AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Khuddakanikāye

Khuddaka Nikāya

Petavatthu-aṭṭhakathā

Petavatthu-aṭṭhakathā

Ganthārambhakathā
Introductory Account

nāthaṃ,ñeyyasāgarapāraguṃ;

Nāthaṃ, the one who has reached the far shore of the ocean of knowledge;
I venerate him, the one whose teaching is profound, deep, and of varied methods.

Vijjācaraṇasampannā, yena niyyanti lokato;

Dhammaṃ, endowed with knowledge and conduct, by which beings are led out of the world;
The Dhamma revered by the Sammāsambuddha.

Sīlādiguṇasampanno, ṭhito maggaphalesu yo;

Ariyasaṅghaṃ, endowed with virtues such as morality, established in the paths and fruits;
That Ariya Saṅgha is the unsurpassed field of merit.

Vandanājanitaṃ puññaṃ, iti yaṃ ratanattaye;

By the merit generated by this veneration of the Triple Gem,
May I be free from obstacles everywhere, through its power.

Petehi ca kataṃ kammaṃ, yaṃ yaṃ purimajātisu;

And the deeds done by the departed, whatever they were in previous lives,
Those deeds that brought about the state of a peta, according to the differences in their results.

Pakāsayantī buddhānaṃ, desanā yā visesato;

Revealing the Buddhas' teaching, which is especially,
Arouses a sense of urgency and makes one witness the results of actions.

Petavatthūti nāmena, supariññātavatthukā;

Petavatthu, with well-understood subject matter by name,
Which the great sages compiled in the Khuddaka Nikāya.

Tassa sammāvalambitvā, porāṇaṭṭhakathānayaṃ;

Relying well on its ancient commentary,
Explaining the origins in detail in each instance.

Suvisuddhaṃ asaṃkiṇṇaṃ, nipuṇatthavinicchayaṃ;

Perfectly pure, unmixed, with precise determination of meaning,
Not deviating from the tradition of the residents of the Mahāvihāra.

Yathābalaṃ karissāmi, atthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ subhaṃ;

According to my ability, I will make a beautiful explanation of the meaning;
Listen to it carefully as I speak, O virtuous ones.

petavatthūti seṭṭhiputtādikassa tassa tassa sattassa petabhāvahetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ, tassa pana pakāsanavasena pavatto ‘‘khettūpamā arahanto’’tiādikā pariyattidhammo idha ‘‘petavatthū’’ti adhippeto.

Petavatthu means the deed that is the cause of the state of a peta of this or that being, such as the merchant's son; but here, the collection of teachings beginning with "the arahants are comparable to a field," which arose in the manner of revealing that, is intended by "Petavatthu."

Tayidaṃ petavatthu kena bhāsitaṃ, kattha bhāsitaṃ, kadā bhāsitaṃ, kasmā ca bhāsitanti? Vuccate – idañhi petavatthu duvidhena pavattaṃ aṭṭhuppattivasena, pucchāvissajjanavasena ca. Tattha yaṃ aṭṭhuppattivasena pavattaṃ, taṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ, itaraṃ nāradattherādīhi pucchitaṃ tehi tehi petehi bhāsitaṃ. Satthā pana yasmā nāradattherādīhi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pucchāvissajjane ārocite taṃ taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi, tasmā sabbampetaṃ petavatthu satthārā bhāsitameva nāma jātaṃ. Pavattitavaradhammacakke hi satthari tattha tattha rājagahādīsu viharante yebhuyyena tāya tāya aṭṭhuppattiyā pucchāvissajjanavasena sattānaṃ kammaphalapaccakkhakaraṇāya taṃ taṃ petavatthu desanāruḷhanti ayaṃ tāvettha ‘‘kena bhāsita’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ sādhāraṇato vissajjanā. Asādhāraṇato pana tassa tassa vatthussa atthavaṇṇanāyameva āgamissati.

Now, by whom was this Petavatthu spoken, where was it spoken, when was it spoken, and why was it spoken? It is said: this Petavatthu arose in two ways: by way of occurrence and by way of question and answer. Among them, that which arose by way of occurrence was spoken by the Blessed One; the other was spoken by those petas questioned by the elders such as Nārada Thera. But since the Teacher, having made that particular occurrence upon being informed of that particular question and answer by the elders such as Nārada Thera, taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering, therefore all this Petavatthu is said to have been spoken by the Teacher. Indeed, while the Teacher, the turner of the excellent Wheel of Dhamma, was dwelling in various places such as Rājagaha, that particular Petavatthu was taught mostly by way of question and answer, through that particular occurrence, in order to make beings witness the result of their actions. This, for now, is the general answer to the questions "by whom was it spoken" and so on. But the specific answer will come in the explanation of the meaning of each story.

Taṃ panetaṃ petavatthu vinayapiṭakaṃ suttantapiṭakaṃ abhidhammapiṭakanti tīsu piṭakesu suttantapiṭakapariyāpannaṃ, dīghanikāyo majjhimanikāyo saṃyuttanikāyo aṅguttaranikāyo khuddakanikāyoti pañcasu nikāyesu khuddakanikāyapariyāpannaṃ, suttaṃ geyyaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ gāthā udānaṃ itivuttakaṃ jātakaṃ abbhutadhammaṃ vedallanti navasu sāsanaṅgesu gāthāsaṅgahaṃ.

Now, this Petavatthu, among the three Piṭakas—the Vinaya Piṭaka, the Suttanta Piṭaka, and the Abhidhamma Piṭaka—is included in the Suttanta Piṭaka; among the five Nikāyas—the Dīgha Nikāya, the Majjhima Nikāya, the Saṃyutta Nikāya, the Aṅguttara Nikāya, and the Khuddaka Nikāya—it is included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; among the nine divisions of the teaching—sutta, geyya, veyyākaraṇa, gāthā, udāna, itivuttaka, jātaka, abbhutadhamma, and vedalla—it is included in the category of gāthās.

‘‘Dvāsīti buddhato gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhuto;

"I received eighty-two thousand from the Buddha, two thousand from the monks;
Eighty-four thousand are the teachings that I propagate." (theragā. 1027)

Evaṃ dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena paṭiññātesu caturāsītiyā dhammakkhandhasahassesu katipayadhammakkhandhasaṅgahaṃ, bhāṇavārato catubhāṇavāramattaṃ, vaggato – uragavaggo ubbarivaggo cūḷavaggo mahāvaggoti catuvaggasaṅgahaṃ. Tesu paṭhamavagge dvādasa vatthūni, dutiyavagge terasa vatthūni, tatiyavagge dasa vatthūni, catutthavagge soḷasa vatthūnīti vatthuto ekapaññāsavatthupaṭimaṇḍitaṃ. Tassa vaggesu uragavaggo ādi, vatthūsu khettūpamapetavatthu ādi, tassāpi ‘‘khettūpamā arahanto’’ti ayaṃ gāthā ādi.

Thus, among the eighty-four thousand aggregates of Dhamma declared by the treasurer of the Dhamma, it is a collection of a certain number of aggregates of Dhamma; in terms of recitations, it is about four bhāṇavāras; in terms of sections, it is a collection of four sections: the Uraga Vagga, the Ubbari Vagga, the Cūḷa Vagga, and the Mahā Vagga. Among them, the first section has twelve stories, the second section has thirteen stories, the third section has ten stories, and the fourth section has sixteen stories, thus adorned with fifty-one stories in total. Among its sections, the Uraga Vagga is the first; among the stories, the Khettūpama Petavatthu is the first; and even within that, this verse, "the arahants are comparable to a field," is the first.

1. Uragavaggo

1. Uraga Vagga

1. Khettūpamapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
1. Khettūpama Petavatthu Explanation

Taṃ panetaṃ vatthuṃ bhagavā rājagahe viharanto veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe aññataraṃ seṭṭhiputtapetaṃ ārabbha kathesi. Rājagahe kira aññataro aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtavittūpakaraṇo anekakoṭidhanasannicayo seṭṭhi ahosi. Tassa mahādhanasampannatāya ‘‘mahādhanaseṭṭhi’’tveva samaññā ahosi. Ekova putto ahosi, piyo manāpo. Tasmiṃ viññutaṃ patte mātāpitaro evaṃ cintesuṃ – ‘‘amhākaṃ puttassa divase divase sahassaṃ sahassaṃ paribbayaṃ karontassa vassasatenāpi ayaṃ dhanasannicayo parikkhayaṃ na gamissati, kiṃ imassa sippuggahaṇaparissamena, akilantakāyacitto yathāsukhaṃ bhoge paribhuñjatū’’ti sippaṃ na sikkhāpesuṃ. Vayappatte pana kularūpayobbanavilāsasampannaṃ kāmābhimukhaṃ dhammasaññāvimukhaṃ kaññaṃ ānesuṃ. So tāya saddhiṃ abhiramanto dhamme cittamattampi anuppādetvā, samaṇabrāhmaṇagurujanesu anādaro hutvā, dhuttajanaparivuto rajjamāno pañcakāmaguṇe rato giddho mohena andho hutvā kālaṃ vītināmetvā, mātāpitūsu kālakatesu naṭanāṭakagāyakādīnaṃ yathicchitaṃ dento dhanaṃ vināsetvā nacirasseva pārijuññappatto hutvā, iṇaṃ gahetvā jīvikaṃ kappento puna iṇampi alabhitvā iṇāyikehi codiyamāno tesaṃ attano khettavatthugharādīni datvā, kapālahattho bhikkhaṃ caritvā bhuñjanto tasmiṃyeva nagare anāthasālāyaṃ vasati.

The Blessed One, while dwelling at Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the Squirrels' Sanctuary, spoke this story concerning a certain merchant's son who had become a peta. It is said that in Rājagaha there was a certain wealthy, rich, and affluent merchant, possessing abundant wealth and resources, a collection of many millions of wealth. He was known simply as "Mahādhana-seṭṭhi" because of his great wealth. He had only one son, dear and beloved. When he reached maturity, his parents thought, "Even if our son were to spend a thousand (kahāpaṇas) a day, this collection of wealth would not be exhausted in a hundred years; what is the use of this effort to learn a craft? Let him enjoy his wealth as he pleases, without tiring his body or mind." Thus, they did not have him trained in any craft. When he came of age, they brought him a maiden endowed with beauty, family, and youth, inclined towards sensual pleasures, averse to the notion of Dhamma. Delighting with her, without even a moment's thought of Dhamma, disrespectful to ascetics, brahmins, and teachers, surrounded by deceitful people, infatuated, delighting in the five strands of sensual pleasure, consumed by greed and blinded by delusion, he spent his time. When his parents passed away, giving as he pleased to dancers, actors, and singers, he wasted his wealth and soon became destitute. Maintaining his livelihood by borrowing, unable to obtain loans again, pressed by the creditors, he gave them his fields, lands, houses, and so on. Begging with a bowl in hand, eating what he received, he lived in the same city in a public almshouse.

Atha naṃ ekadivasaṃ corā samāgatā evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘ambho purisa, kiṃ tuyhaṃ iminā dujjīvitena, taruṇo tvamasi thāmajavabalasampanno, kasmā hatthapādavikalo viya acchasi? Ehi amhehi saha corikāya paresaṃ santakaṃ gahetvā sukhena jīvikaṃ kappehī’’ti. So ‘‘nāhaṃ corikaṃ kātuṃ jānāmī’’ti āha. Corā ‘‘mayaṃ taṃ sikkhāpema, kevalaṃ tvaṃ amhākaṃ vacanaṃ karohī’’ti āhaṃsu. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā tehi saddhiṃ agamāsi. Atha te corā tassa hatthe mahantaṃ muggaraṃ datvā sandhiṃ chinditvā gharaṃ pavisanto taṃ sandhimukhe ṭhapetvā āhaṃsu – ‘‘sace idha añño koci āgacchati, taṃ iminā muggarena paharitvā ekappahāreneva mārehī’’ti. So andhabālo hitāhitaṃ ajānanto paresaṃ āgamanameva olokento tattha aṭṭhāsi. Corā pana gharaṃ pavisitvā gayhūpagaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā gharamanussehi ñātamattāva ito cito ca palāyiṃsu. Gharamanussā uṭṭhahitvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ dhāvantā ito cito ca olokentā taṃ purisaṃ sandhidvāre ṭhitaṃ disvā ‘‘hare duṭṭhacorā’’ti gahetvā hatthapāde muggarādīhi pothetvā rañño dassesuṃ – ‘‘ayaṃ, deva, coro sandhisukhe gahito’’ti. Rājā ‘‘imassa sīsaṃ chindāpehī’’ti nagaraguttikaṃ āṇāpesi. ‘‘Sādhu, devā’’ti nagaraguttiko taṃ gāhāpetvā pacchābāhaṃ gāḷhabandhanaṃ bandhāpetvā rattavaṇṇaviraḷamālābandhakaṇṭhaṃ iṭṭhakacuṇṇamakkhitasīsaṃ vajjhapahaṭabheridesitamaggaṃ rathikāya rathikaṃ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṃ vicarāpetvā kasāhi tāḷento āghātanābhimukhaṃ neti. ‘‘Ayaṃ imasmiṃ nagare vilumpamānakacoro gahito’’ti kolāhalaṃ ahosi.

Then one day, some thieves came together and said to him, "Friend, what is the use of this miserable life for you? You are young, full of strength, vigor, and power. Why do you sit like someone with crippled hands and feet? Come, let us steal other people's property and make a living happily." He said, "I do not know how to steal." The thieves said, "We will teach you; just do as we say." He replied, "Very well," and went with them. Then the thieves gave him a large club, and as they were breaking into a house, they placed him at the entrance and said, "If anyone comes here, strike them with this club and kill them with a single blow." The foolish, ignorant man, not knowing what was beneficial or harmful, stood there watching for someone to come. The thieves, having entered the house, took the valuables they could find, and as soon as the householders noticed, they fled in different directions. The householders arose and quickly ran about, looking here and there, and seeing the man standing at the entrance, they seized him, saying, "Catch the wicked thief!" They beat his hands and feet with clubs and other things, and brought him before the king, saying, "This, Your Majesty, is the thief caught at the scene of the crime." The king ordered the city guard, "Cut off his head!" The city guard, saying, "As you command, Your Majesty," had him seized, his hands tied tightly behind his back, a garland of red flowers placed around his neck, his head smeared with brick dust, led through the streets and crossroads, beaten with whips, towards the execution ground. There was a clamor, "This is the thief who was caught plundering in this city!"

Tena ca samayena tasmiṃ nagare sulasā nāma nagarasobhinī pāsāde ṭhitā vātapānantarena olokentī taṃ tathā nīyamānaṃ disvā pubbe tena kataparicayā ‘‘ayaṃ puriso imasmiṃyeva nagare mahatiṃ sampattiṃ anubhavitvā idāni evarūpaṃ anatthaṃ anayabyasanaṃ patto’’ti tassa kāruññaṃ uppādetvā cattāro modake pānīyañca pesesi. Nagaraguttikassa ca ārocāpesi – ‘‘tāva ayyo āgametu, yāvāyaṃ puriso ime modake khāditvā pānīyaṃ pivissatī’’ti.

At that time, a courtesan named Sulasā, the city's beauty, standing in her mansion, looking out through a window, saw him being led away like that. Having been acquainted with him before, she felt compassion for him, thinking, "This man, having enjoyed great wealth in this very city, has now fallen into such misfortune and ruin." She sent four cakes and some water, and sent word to the city guard, "Let the gentleman wait a moment, until this man has eaten these cakes and drunk the water."

Athetasmiṃ antare āyasmā mahāmoggallāno dibbena cakkhunā olokento tassa byasanappattiṃ disvā karuṇāya sañcoditamānaso – ‘‘ayaṃ puriso akatapuñño katapāpo, tenāyaṃ niraye nibbattissati, mayi pana gate modake ca pānīyañca datvā bhummadevesu uppajjissati, yaṃnūnāhaṃ imassa avassayo bhaveyya’’nti cintetvā pānīyamodakesu upanīyamānesu tassa purisassa purato pāturahosi. So theraṃ disvā pasannamānaso ‘‘kiṃ me idāneva imehi māriyamānassa modakehi khāditehi, idaṃ pana paralokaṃ gacchantassa pātheyyaṃ bhavissatī’’ti cintetvā modake ca pānīyañca therassa dāpesi. Thero tassa pasādasaṃvaḍḍhanatthaṃ tassa passantasseva tathārūpe ṭhāne nisīditvā modake paribhuñjitvā pānīyañca pivitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. So pana puriso coraghātakehi āghātanaṃ netvā sīsacchedaṃ pāpito anuttare puññakkhette mahāmoggallānatthere katena puññena uḷāre devaloke nibbattanārahopi yasmā ‘‘sulasaṃ āgamma mayā ayaṃ deyyadhammo laddho’’ti sulasāya gatena sinehena maraṇakāle cittaṃ upakkiliṭṭhaṃ ahosi. Tasmā hīnakāyaṃ upapajjanto pabbatagahanasambhūte sandacchāye mahānigrodharukkhe rukkhadevatā hutvā nibbatti.

Then, in the meantime, the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, looking with his divine eye, saw his misfortune and, his heart stirred with compassion, thought, "This man has done no merit, but has done evil; therefore, he will be reborn in hell. But if I go, having given the cakes and water, he will be reborn among the earth deities. Why should I not be his refuge?" Thinking this, as the water and cakes were being brought near, he appeared before the man. Seeing the elder, with a gladdened mind, he thought, "What is the use of eating these cakes now, as I am about to be killed? But this will be sustenance for me as I go to the next world." And he offered the cakes and water to the elder. The elder, to increase his faith, sat down in a suitable place where he could see him, ate the cakes, drank the water, and rose from his seat and departed. The man, being led to the execution ground by the thief-catchers and beheaded, although he was worthy of being reborn in a noble heavenly realm because of the merit he had made in the unsurpassed field of merit, the elder Mahāmoggallāna, his mind was defiled at the time of death by the affection he had for Sulasā, thinking, "This offering was obtained by me through Sulasā." Therefore, being reborn in a lower existence, he became a tree deity in a large banyan tree in a hidden shade in a mountain thicket.

So kira sace paṭhamavaye kulavaṃsaṭṭhapane ussukkaṃ akarissa, tasmiṃyeva nagare seṭṭhīnaṃ aggo abhavissa, majjhimavaye majjhimo, pacchimavaye pacchimo. Sace pana paṭhamavaye pabbajito abhavissa, arahā abhavissa, majjhimavaye sakadāgāmī anāgāmī vā abhavissa, pacchimavaye sotāpanno abhavissa. Pāpamittasaṃsaggena pana itthidhutto surādhutto duccaritanirato anādariko hutvā anukkamena sabbasampattito parihāyitvā mahābyasanaṃ pattoti vadanti.

It is said that if he had been diligent in establishing his family lineage in his early years, he would have been the foremost of the merchants in that very city; in his middle age, he would have been middling; and in his later years, he would have been the last. But if he had gone forth in his early years, he would have been an arahant; in his middle age, he would have been a once-returner or a non-returner; and in his later years, he would have been a stream-enterer. However, due to association with bad friends, being a debauchee with women, a drunkard, devoted to misconduct, and disrespectful, he gradually declined from all his wealth and fell into great misfortune, so they say.

Atha so aparena samayena sulasaṃ uyyānagataṃ disvā sañjātakāmarāgo andhakāraṃ māpetvā taṃ attano bhavanaṃ netvā sattāhaṃ tāya saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ kappesi, attānañcassā ārocesi. Tassā mātā taṃ apassantī rodamānā ito cito ca paribbhamati. Taṃ disvā mahājano ‘‘ayyo mahāmoggallāno mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo tassā gatiṃ jāneyya, taṃ upasaṅkamitvā puccheyyāsī’’ti āha. Sā ‘‘sādhu ayyo’’ti theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā tamatthaṃ pucchi. Thero ‘‘ito sattame divase veḷuvanamahāvihāre bhagavati dhammaṃ desente parisapariyante passissasī’’ti āha. Atha sulasā taṃ devaputtaṃ avoca – ‘‘ayuttaṃ mayhaṃ tava bhavane vasantiyā, ajja sattamo divaso, mama mātā maṃ apassantī paridevasokasamāpannā bhavissati, sādhu maṃ, deva, tattheva nehī’’ti. So taṃ netvā veḷuvane bhagavati dhammaṃ desente parisapariyante ṭhapentvā adissamānarūpo aṭṭhāsi.

Then, at another time, seeing Sulasā going to the park, overcome with lust, he caused darkness to envelop her, brought her to his abode, and lived with her for a week, revealing himself to her. Her mother, not seeing her, wandered here and there, weeping. Seeing her, the people said, "The venerable Mahāmoggallāna is powerful and has great abilities; he would know her whereabouts. Go to him and ask." She said, "Very well, sir," approached the elder, and asked him about the matter. The elder said, "On the seventh day from now, while the Blessed One is teaching the Dhamma in the Bamboo Grove Monastery, you will see her at the edge of the assembly." Then Sulasā said to the deva-son, "It is not proper for me to live in your abode. Today is the seventh day, and my mother, not seeing me, will be overcome with lamentation and sorrow. Please, my lord, take me there." He took her and placed her at the edge of the assembly while the Blessed One was teaching the Dhamma in the Bamboo Grove, and remained there unseen.

Tato mahājano sulasaṃ disvā evamāha – ‘‘amma sulase, tvaṃ ettakaṃ divasaṃ kuhiṃ gatā? Tava mātā tvaṃ apassantī paridevasokasamāpannā ummādappattā viya jātā’’ti. Sā taṃ pavattiṃ mahājanassa ācikkhi. Mahājanena ca ‘‘kathaṃ so puriso tathāpāpapasuto akatakusalo devūpapattiṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti vutte sulasā ‘‘mayā dāpite modake pānīyañca ayyassa mahāmoggallānattherassa datvā tena puññena devūpapattiṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti āha. Taṃ sutvā mahājano acchariyabbhutacittajāto ahosi – ‘‘arahanto nāma anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassa, yesu appakopi kato kāro sattānaṃ devūpapattiṃ āvahatī’’ti uḷāraṃ pītisomanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedesi. Bhikkhū tamatthaṃ bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Tato bhagavā imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā –

Then the people, seeing Sulasā, said, "O Sulasā, where have you been for so long? Your mother, not seeing you, has become overwhelmed with lamentation and sorrow, as if she had gone mad." She told the people the whole story. When the people said, "How could such a sinful, unwholesome person obtain rebirth as a deva?" Sulasā said, "Having given the cakes and water offered by me to the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, he obtained rebirth as a deva by that merit." Hearing that, the people were filled with wonder and amazement, "Arahants are indeed an unsurpassed field of merit for the world; even a small act done to them brings about the rebirth of beings as devas!" And they experienced great joy and happiness. The monks reported the matter to the Blessed One. Then the Blessed One, on account of this occurrence, spoke these verses:

1.

1.

‘‘Khettūpamā arahanto, dāyakā kassakūpamā;

"The arahants are comparable to a field, the donors are comparable to farmers;
The gift is comparable to the seed, from which the fruit arises."

2.

2.

‘‘Etaṃ bījaṃ kasī khettaṃ, petānaṃ dāyakassa ca;

"This is the seed, the field is cultivated, for the departed and for the donor;
The departed enjoy that, and the donor increases in merit."

3.

3.

‘‘Idheva kusalaṃ katvā, pete ca paṭipūjiya;

"Having done good here, and having honored the departed;
One goes to heaven, the place of happiness, having done a good deed."

1.Tatthakhettūpamāti khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ tāyati mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena rakkhatīti khettaṃ, sālibījādīnaṃ viruhanaṭṭhānaṃ. Taṃ upamā etesanti khettūpamā, kedārasadisāti attho.Arahantoti khīṇāsavā. Te hi kilesārīnaṃ saṃsāracakkassa arānañca hatattā, tato eva ārakattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā ca ‘‘arahanto’’ti vuccanti. Tattha yathā khetañhi tiṇādidosarahitaṃ svābhisaṅkhatabījamhi vutte utusalilādipaccayantarūpetaṃ kassakassa mahapphalaṃ hoti, evaṃ khīṇāsavasantāno lobhādidosarahito svābhisaṅkhate deyyadhammabīje vutte kālādipaccayantarasahito dāyakassa mahapphalo hoti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘khettūpamā arahanto’’ti. Ukkaṭṭhaniddeso ayaṃ tassa sekhādīnampi khettabhāvāpaṭikkhepato.

1. Here, khettūpamā means: "khetta" signifies a field where seeds that have been sown thrive, protecting and causing great fruitfulness; it is the place where rice seeds and the like germinate. "Upamā" means comparable to, so "khettūpamā" means comparable to a field, that is, similar to a cultivated field. Arahanto means: those who have destroyed the āsavas. They are called "arahanto" because they have destroyed the enemies of defilements and the spokes of the cycle of existence; because they are far from these; because they are worthy of offerings; and because there is no secrecy in their doing evil. Here, just as a field free from grass and other faults, when a seed sown by oneself is placed in it, together with other conditions such as timely water, brings great fruit to the farmer, so the lineage of an arahant, free from greed and other faults, when a gift sown by oneself is placed in it, together with other conditions such as time, brings great fruit to the giver. Therefore, the Blessed One said, "Arahants are comparable to a field." This is a supreme designation, not rejecting the field-like nature of even those in training (sekha) etc.

Dāyakāti cīvarādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ dātāro pariccajanakā, tesaṃ pariccāgena attano santāne lobhādīnaṃ pariccajanakā chedanakā, tato vā attano santānassa sodhakā, rakkhakā cāti attho.Kassakūpamāti kassakasadisā. Yathā kassako sālikhettādīni kasitvā yathākālañca vuttudakadānanīharaṇanidhānarakkhaṇādīhi appamajjanto uḷāraṃ vipulañca sassaphalaṃ paṭilabhati, evaṃ dāyakopi arahantesu deyyadhammapariccāgena pāricariyāya ca appamajjanto uḷāraṃ vipulañca dānaphalaṃ paṭilabhati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dāyakā kassakūpamā’’ti.

Dāyakā means: givers or donors of requisites such as robes; those who relinquish. By their relinquishing, they relinquish or cut off greed, etc., in their own minds; therefore, they are purifiers and protectors of their own minds. Kassakūpamā means: comparable to farmers. Just as a farmer, having cultivated rice fields, etc., and not being heedless with timely sowing, watering, draining, storing, guarding, etc., obtains abundant and plentiful grain, so too, a giver, not being heedless in giving to arahants and in serving them, obtains abundant and plentiful fruit of giving. Therefore, it is said, "Givers are comparable to farmers."

Bījūpamaṃ deyyadhammanti liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ, bījasadiso deyyadhammoti attho. Annapānādikassa hi dasavidhassa dātabbavatthuno etaṃ nāmaṃ.Etto nibbattate phalanti etasmā dāyakapaṭiggāhakadeyyadhammapariccāgato dānaphalaṃ nibbattati ceva uppajjati ca, ciratarapabandhavasena pavattati cāti attho. Ettha ca yasmā pariccāgacetanābhisaṅkhatassa annapānādivatthuno bhāvo, na itarassa, tasmā ‘‘bījūpamaṃ deyyadhamma’’nti deyyadhammaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Tena deyyadhammāpadesena deyyadhammavatthuvisayāya pariccāgacetanāyayeva bījabhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Sā hi paṭisandhiādippabhedassa tassa nissayārammaṇappabhedassa ca phalassa nipphādikā, na deyyadhammoti.

Bījūpamaṃ deyyadhammaṃ is stated with a change of gender, meaning the gift is comparable to a seed. This is a name for the ten kinds of things to be given, such as food and drink. Etto nibbattate phalaṃ means: from this giving, receiving, and relinquishing of the gift, the fruit of giving arises and comes into being, and it continues in a long unbroken series. And here, since the state of the gift, such as food and drink, is accompanied by the intention of relinquishing, not the other way around, therefore the term "bījūpamaṃ deyyadhammaṃ" is used to indicate the gift. Therefore, by referring to the gift, it should be seen that the intention of relinquishing in regard to the gift is the seed. For that is the producer of the fruit which is the variety of rebirth and the variety of its support and object, not the gift itself.

2.Etaṃ bījaṃ kasī khettanti yathāvuttaṃ bījaṃ, yathāvuttañca khettaṃ, tassa bījassa tasmiṃ khette vapanapayogasaṅkhātā kasi cāti attho. Etaṃ tayaṃ kesaṃ icchitabbanti āha ‘‘petānaṃ dāyakassa cā’’ti. Yadi dāyako pete uddissa dānaṃ deti, petānañca dāyakassa ca, yadi na pete uddissa dānaṃ deti, dāyakasseva etaṃ bījaṃ esā kasi etaṃ khettaṃ upakārāya hotīti adhippāyo. Idāni taṃ upakāraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘taṃ petā paribhuñjanti, dātā puññena vaḍḍhatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatthataṃ petā paribhuñjantīti dāyakena pete uddissa dāne dinne yathāvuttakhettakasibījasampattiyā anumodanāya ca yaṃ petānaṃ upakappati, taṃ dānaphalaṃ petā paribhuñjanti.Dātā puññena vaḍḍhatīti dātā pana attano dānamayapuññanimittaṃ devamanussesu bhogasampattiādinā puññaphalena abhivaḍḍhati. Puññaphalampi hi ‘‘kusalānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.80) puññanti vuccati.

2. Etaṃ bījaṃ kasī khettaṃ means: the seed as described, and the field as described, and the cultivation consisting of the act of sowing that seed in that field. "This threefold thing, for whom is it desired?" he asks. "For the departed and for the giver," he says. If the giver gives a gift intending it for the departed, it is for both the departed and the giver; if he does not give a gift intending it for the departed, this seed, this cultivation, this field is for the benefit of the giver alone. Now, to show that benefit, "taṃ petā paribhuñjanti, dātā puññena vaḍḍhatī" is said. Here, taṃ petā paribhuñjantī means: when a gift is given by the giver intending it for the departed, the fruit of giving that accrues to the departed due to the attainment of the aforementioned field, cultivation, and seed, and due to their rejoicing, the departed partake of. Dātā puññena vaḍḍhatī means: the giver, however, grows and increases with the meritorious result of the giving, such as the acquisition of wealth among gods and humans, which is caused by his meritorious act of giving. For the result of merit is also called "merit" in passages such as "Due to the undertaking of wholesome things, monks, thus does this merit increase" (Dī. Ni. 3.80).

3.Idheva kusalaṃ katvāti anavajjasukhavipākaṭṭhena kusalaṃ petānaṃ uddisanavasena dānamayaṃ puññaṃ upacinitvā idheva imasmiṃyeva attabhāve.Pete ca paṭipūjiyāti pete uddissa dānena sammānetvā anubhuyyamānadukkhato te mocetvā. Pete hi uddissa diyyamānaṃ dānaṃ tesaṃ pūjā nāma hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘amhākañca katā pūjā’’ti (pe. va. 18), ‘‘petānaṃ pūjā ca katā uḷārā’’ti (pe. va. 25) ca. ‘‘Pete cā’’ti ca-saddena ‘‘piyo ca hoti manāpo, abhigamanīyo ca hoti vissāsanīyo, bhāvanīyo ca hoti garukātabbo, pāsaṃso ca hoti kittanīyo viññūna’’nti evamādike diṭṭhadhammike dānānisaṃse saṅgaṇhāti.Saggañca kamati ṭhānaṃ, kammaṃ katvāna bhaddakanti kalyāṇaṃ kusalakammaṃ katvā dibbehi āyuādīhi dasahi ṭhānehi suṭṭhu aggattā ‘‘sagga’’nti laddhanāmaṃ katapuññānaṃ nibbattanaṭṭhānaṃ devalokaṃ kamati upapajjanavasena upagacchati.

3. Idheva kusalaṃ katvā means: having accumulated here, in this very existence, merit consisting of giving, which is wholesome in the sense of resulting in blameless happiness, intending it for the departed. Pete ca paṭipūjiyā means: having honored the departed by giving with them in mind, freeing them from the suffering being experienced. For giving a gift intending it for the departed is called honoring them. Therefore, it is said, "And honor has been done to us" (Pe. Va. 18), "And a splendid honor has been done to the departed" (Pe. Va. 25). And the "ca" in "pete ca" includes the visible benefits of giving such as "he is dear and pleasing, approachable and trustworthy, worthy of cultivation and respect, praiseworthy and commendable by the wise." Saggañca kamati ṭhānaṃ, kammaṃ katvāna bhaddakaṃ means: having done a good, wholesome deed, he attains the heavenly realm, the place of rebirth for those who have done meritorious deeds, which is well-named "sagga" because it is supremely excellent with ten attributes such as divine lifespan, by way of rebirth.

Ettha ca ‘‘kusalaṃ katvā’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘kammaṃ katvāna bhaddaka’’nti vacanaṃ ‘‘deyyadhammapariccāgo viya pattidānavasena dānadhammapariccāgopi dānamayakusalakammamevā’’ti dassanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Keci panettha ‘‘petāti arahanto adhippetā’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ ‘‘petā’’ti khīṇāsavānaṃ āgataṭṭhānasseva abhāvato, bījādibhāvassa ca dāyakassa viya tesaṃ ayujjamānattā, petayonikānaṃ yujjamānattā ca. Desanāpariyosāne devaputtaṃ sulasañca ādiṃ katvā caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.

And here, it should be seen that saying "kusalaṃ katvā" and then again saying "kammaṃ katvāna bhaddakaṃ" is to show that "just as the relinquishing of a gift is a meritorious act of giving, so too is the relinquishing of the merit of giving by way of transference." Some, however, say here that "the departed are understood to be the arahants," but that is merely their opinion, since there is no such thing as a place where the arahants have gone, since the state of being a seed, etc., is not fitting for them as it is for the giver, and since it is fitting for beings in the realm of the departed. At the end of the discourse, eighty-four thousand beings, beginning with the deva-son Sulasa, attained the Dhamma.

Khettūpamapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Khettūpama Peta Story is finished.

2. Sūkaramukhapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
2. The Sūkaramukha Peta Story

Kāyo te sabbasovaṇṇoti idaṃ satthari rājagahaṃ upanissāya veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe viharante aññataraṃ sūkaramukhapetaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Atīte kira kassapassa bhagavato sāsane eko bhikkhu kāyena saññato ahosi, vācāya asaññato, bhikkhū akkosati paribhāsati. So kālaṃ katvā niraye nibbatto, ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ tattha paccitvā tato cavitvā imasmiṃ buddhuppāde rājagahasamīpe gijjhakūṭapabbatapāde tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesena khuppipāsābhibhūto peto hutvā nibbatti. Tassa kāyo suvaṇṇavaṇṇo ahosi, mukhaṃ sūkaramukhasadisaṃ. Athāyasmā nārado gijjhakūṭe pabbate vasanto pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā pattacīvaramādāya rājagahaṃ piṇḍāya gacchanto antarāmagge taṃ petaṃ disvā tena katakammaṃ pucchanto –

Kāyo te sabbasovaṇṇo This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the Squirrels' Feeding Place, concerning a certain peta with the face of a pig. It is said that in the dispensation of the Buddha Kassapa, a certain bhikkhu was restrained in body but unrestrained in speech, and he insulted and reviled other bhikkhus. After he died, he was reborn in hell. Having remained there for one Buddha-interval, he passed away from there and was reborn in this Buddha-era near Rājagaha at the foot of Gijjhakūṭa Mountain as a peta afflicted with hunger and thirst, due to the residual result of that same deed. His body was the color of gold, but his face was like the face of a pig. Then, the venerable Nārada, while dwelling on Gijjhakūṭa Mountain, having attended to his bodily needs early in the morning, took his bowl and robe and went to Rājagaha for alms. Seeing that peta on the road, he asked about the deed he had done, saying:

4.

4.

‘‘Kāyo te sabbasovaṇṇo, sabbā obhāsate disā;

"Your body is all golden, all directions shine;
Your face is just like a pig's; what deed did you do in the past?"

kāyo te sabbasovaṇṇoti tava kāyo deho sabbo suvaṇṇavaṇṇo uttattakanakasannibho.Sabbā obhāsate disāti tassa pabhāya sabbāpi disā samantanto obhāsati vijjotati.Obhāsateti vā antogadhahotuatthamidaṃ padanti ‘‘te kāyo sabbasovaṇṇo sabbā disā obhāseti vijjotetī’’ti attho daṭṭhabbo.Mukhaṃte sūkarassevāti mukhaṃ pana te sūkarassa viya, sūkaramukhasadisaṃ tava mukhanti attho.Kiṃ kammamakarī pureti ‘‘tvaṃ pubbe atītajātiyaṃ kīdisaṃ kammaṃ akāsī’’ti pucchati.

kāyo te sabbasovaṇṇo means: your body, your form, is all the color of gold, like molten gold. Sabbā obhāsate disā means: by its radiance, all the directions all around shine and glow. Obhāsate, or, taking "antogadhahotuatthamidaṃ padaṃ" to mean that this word has an implied meaning, the meaning should be understood as "te kāyo sabbasovaṇṇo sabbā disā obhāseti vijjotetī" - your body is all golden, all the directions it illuminates and shines upon. Mukhaṃ te sūkarasseva means: your face, however, is like that of a pig, your face is similar to the face of a pig. Kiṃ kammamakarī pure asks: "What kind of deed did you do in the past, in a previous life?"

Evaṃ therena so peto katakammaṃ puṭṭho gāthāya vissajjento –

Thus questioned by the elder, the peta, explaining the deed he had done, replied in a verse:

5.

5.

‘‘Kāyena saññato āsiṃ, vācāyāsimasaññato;

"I was restrained in body, unrestrained in speech;
Therefore I have such a complexion as you see, Nārada."

kāyena saññato āsinti kāyikena saṃyamena saṃyato kāyadvārikena saṃvarena saṃvuto ahosiṃ.Vācāyāsimasaññatoti vācāya asaññato vācasikena asaṃvarena samannāgato ahosiṃ.Tenāti tena ubhayena saṃyamena asaṃyamena ca.Meti mayhaṃ.Etādiso vaṇṇoti ediso. Yathā tvaṃ, nārada, paccakkhato passasi, evarūpo, kāyena manussasaṇṭhāno suvaṇṇavaṇṇo, mukhena sūkarasadiso āsinti yojanā.Vaṇṇasaddo hi idha chaviyaṃ saṇṭhāne ca daṭṭhabbo.

kāyena saññato āsiṃ means: I was restrained with bodily restraint, endowed with control through the door of the body. Vācāyāsimasaññato means: I was unrestrained in speech, endowed with lack of verbal restraint. Tenā means: by that dual restraint and unrestraint. Me means: to me. Etādiso vaṇṇo means: such a complexion. The connection is: just as you, Nārada, see directly, such was I, with a human-shaped body, golden in color, and with a face like a pig. Vaṇṇa - the word complexion, should be understood here in terms of both skin color and form.

Evaṃ peto therena pucchito tamatthaṃ vissajjetvā tameva kāraṇaṃ katvā therassa ovādaṃ dento –

Having thus answered the elder's question, the peta, making that same cause the reason, giving advice to the elder:

6.

6.

‘‘Taṃ tyāhaṃ nārada brūmi, sāmaṃ diṭṭhamidaṃ tayā;

"Therefore, Nārada, I tell you, this you have seen yourself;
Do not do evil with your mouth, lest you become pig-faced!"

tanti tasmā.Tyāhanti te ahaṃ.Nāradāti theraṃ ālapati.Brūmīti kathemi.Sāmanti sayameva.Idanti attano sarīraṃ sandhāya vadati. Ayañhettha attho – yasmā, bhante nārada, idaṃ mama sarīraṃ galato paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā manussasaṇṭhānaṃ, upari sūkarasaṇṭhānaṃ, tayā paccakkhatova diṭṭhaṃ, tasmā te ahaṃ ovādavasena vadāmīti. Kinti ceti āha‘‘mākāsi mukhasā pāpaṃ, mā kho sūkaramukho ahū’’ti. Tatthati paṭisedhe nipāto.Mukhasāti mukhena.Khoti avadhāraṇe, vācāya pāpakammaṃ mākāsi mā karohi.kho sūkaramukho ahūti ahaṃ viya sūkaramukho mā ahosiyeva. Sace pana tvaṃ mukharo hutvā vācāya pāpaṃ kareyyāsi, ekaṃsena sūkaramukho bhaveyyāsi, tasmā mākāsi mukhasā pāpanti phalapaṭisedhanamukhenapi hetumeva paṭisedheti.

Taṃ means: therefore. Tyāhaṃ means: I to you. Nārada calls out to the elder. Brūmī means: I say, I speak. Sāmaṃ means: oneself. Idaṃ speaks referring to his own body. The meaning here is this: since, venerable Nārada, this body of mine, from the neck down, is human-shaped, and above that, pig-shaped, as you have seen with your own eyes, therefore I say to you by way of advice. What is it? he asks - "mākāsi mukhasā pāpaṃ, mā kho sūkaramukho ahū". Here, is a particle of prohibition. Mukhasā means: with the mouth. Kho is for emphasis, do not do evil deeds with your speech. Mā kho sūkaramukho ahū means: may you certainly not become pig-faced like me. But if you, being garrulous, should do evil with your speech, you would certainly become pig-faced; therefore, by way of prohibiting the result, he prohibits the cause itself.

Athāyasmā nārado rājagahe piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto catuparisamajjhe nisinnassa satthuno tamatthaṃ ārocesi. Satthā, ‘‘nārada, pubbeva mayā so sattho diṭṭho’’ti vatvā anekākāravokāraṃ vacīduccaritasannissitaṃ ādīnavaṃ, vacīsucaritapaṭisaṃyuttañca ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsento dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā sampattaparisāya sātthikā ahosīti.

Then the venerable Nārada, having gone for alms in Rājagaha, returning from his alms round after the meal, reported that matter to the Teacher, who was sitting in the midst of the four assemblies. The Teacher, saying, "Nārada, I have seen that being before," expounded the Dhamma, revealing the danger associated with misconduct of speech in various ways, and the benefits associated with good conduct of speech. That discourse was beneficial to the assembled company.

Sūkaramukhapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Sūkaramukha Peta Story is finished.

3. Pūtimukhapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
3. The Pūtimukha Peta Story

Dibbaṃsubhaṃ dhāresi vaṇṇadhātunti idaṃ satthari veḷuvane viharante kalandakanivāpe aññataraṃ pūtimukhapetaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Atīte kira kassapassa bhagavato kāle dve kulaputtā tassa sāsane pabbajitvā sīlācārasampannā sallekhavuttino aññatarasmiṃ gāmakāvāse samaggavāsaṃ vasiṃsu. Atha aññataro pāpajjhāsayo pesuññābhirato bhikkhu tesaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ upagañchi. Therā tena saddhiṃ paṭisanthāraṃ katvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ datvā dutiyadivase taṃ gahetvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisiṃsu. Manussā te disvā tesu theresu ativiya paramanipaccakāraṃ katvā yāgubhattādīhi paṭimānesuṃ. So vihāraṃ pavisitvā cintesi – ‘‘sundaro vatāyaṃ gocaragāmo, manussā ca saddhā pasannā, paṇītapaṇītaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ denti, ayañca vihāro chāyūdakasampanno, sakkā me idha sukhena vasituṃ. Imesu pana bhikkhūsu idha vasantesu mayhaṃ phāsuvihāro na bhavissati, antevāsikavāso viya bhavissati. Handāhaṃ ime aññamaññaṃ bhinditvā yathā na puna idha vasissanti, tathā karissāmī’’ti.

Dibbaṃ subhaṃ dhāresi vaṇṇadhātuṃ This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at the Bamboo Grove, the Squirrels' Feeding Place, concerning a certain Pūtimukha peta. It is said that in the past, in the time of the Buddha Kassapa, two young men, having gone forth in his dispensation, accomplished in virtue and conduct, living a life of austerity, dwelt together harmoniously in a certain village monastery. Then a bhikkhu with evil intentions, delighting in tale-bearing, approached the place where they were dwelling. The elders, having greeted him with hospitality, gave him a place to stay, and on the second day, taking him, they entered the village for alms. People, seeing them, showed great respect to those elders and honored them with rice-gruel, rice, and so on. He, having entered the monastery, thought, "This is a beautiful alms village, and the people are faithful and devout, giving excellent alms-food; and this monastery is full of shade and water; it is possible for me to live here happily. But while these bhikkhus are living here, I will not have a comfortable dwelling, it will be like living as a junior disciple. Come now, I will cause them to be divided from each other so that they will not live here again."

Athekadivasaṃ mahāthere dvinnampi ovādaṃ datvā attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ paviṭṭhe pesuṇiko bhikkhu thokaṃ kālaṃ vītināmetvā mahātheraṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā therena ‘‘kiṃ, āvuso, vikāle āgatosī’’ti ca vutte, ‘‘āma, bhante kiñci vattabbaṃ atthī’’ti vatvā ‘‘kathehi, āvuso’’ti therena anuññāto āha – ‘‘eso, bhante, tumhākaṃ sahāyakatthero sammukhā mitto viya attānaṃ dassetvā parammukhā sapatto viya upavadatī’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ kathetī’’ti pucchito ‘‘suṇātha, bhante, ‘eso mahāthero saṭho māyāvī kuhako micchājīvena jīvikaṃ kappetī’ti tumhākaṃ aguṇaṃ kathetī’’ti āha. ‘‘Mā, āvuso, evaṃ bhaṇi, na so bhikkhu evaṃ maṃ upavadissati, gihikālato paṭṭhāya mama sabhāvaṃ jānāti ‘pesalo kalyāṇasīlo’’’ti. ‘‘Sace, bhante, tumhe attano visuddhacittatāya evaṃ cintetha, taṃ tumhākaṃyeva anucchavikaṃ, mayhaṃ pana tena saddhiṃ veraṃ natthi, kasmā ahaṃ tena avuttaṃ ‘vutta’nti vadāmi. Hotu, kālantarena sayameva jānissathā’’ti āha. Theropi puthujjanabhāvadosena dveḷhakacitto ‘‘evampi siyā’’ti sāsaṅkahadayo hutvā thokaṃ sithilavissāso ahosi. So bālo paṭhamaṃ mahātheraṃ paribhinditvā itarampi thenaṃ vuttanayeneva paribhindi. Atha te ubhopi therā dutiyadivase aññamaññaṃ anālapitvā pattacīvaramādāya gāme piṇḍāya caritvā piṇḍapātamādāya attano vasanaṭṭhāneyeva paribhuñjitvā sāmīcimattampi akatvā taṃ divasaṃ tattheva vasitvā vibhātāya ca rattiyā aññamaññaṃ anārocetvāva yathāphāsukaṭṭhānaṃ agamaṃsu.

Then, one day, after giving advice to both of the great elders and entering his own dwelling, the tale-bearing bhikkhu, after some time had passed, approached the great elder, paid homage, and when the elder said, "Why, friend, have you come at an unusual hour?", he replied, "Yes, venerable sir, there is something that needs to be said," and when permitted by the elder saying "Speak, friend," he said, "That elder, your companion, showing himself as a friend to your face, reviles you behind your back as if he were an enemy." When asked, "What does he say?", he said, "Listen, venerable sir, he speaks ill of you, saying, 'That great elder is deceitful, fraudulent, cunning, he makes a living by wrong livelihood.'" "Do not speak like that, friend, that bhikkhu will not revile me like that, he knows my nature from the time I was a householder, that I am gentle and of good character." "If, venerable sir, you think like that due to the purity of your own mind, that is fitting for you alone, but I have no animosity towards him, why should I say that he said something he did not say? Let it be, in time you will know for yourself." The elder too, due to the fault of being an ordinary person, became doubtful, his heart hesitant, and he became slightly less trusting. That fool, having first divided the great elder, divided the other elder too in the same way. Then both of those elders, on the second day, without speaking to each other, taking their bowls and robes, went into the village for alms, and having taken their alms-food, ate it in their own dwellings, and without even doing the proper courtesies, having spent that day there, at the break of dawn, without informing each other, they each went to a place that was comfortable for them.

Pesuṇikaṃ pana bhikkhuṃ paripuṇṇamanorathaṃ gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhaṃ manussā disvā āhaṃsu – ‘‘bhante, therā kuhiṃ gatā’’ti? So āha – ‘‘sabbarattiṃ aññamaññaṃ kalahaṃ katvā mayā ‘mā kalahaṃ karotha, samaggā hotha, kalaho nāma anatthāvaho āyatidukkhuppādako akusalasaṃvattaniko, purimakāpi kalahena mahatā hitā paribhaṭṭhā’tiādīni vuccamānāpi mama vacanaṃ anādiyitvā pakkantā’’ti. Tato manussā ‘‘therā tāva gacchantu, tumhe pana amhākaṃ anukampāya idheva anukkaṇṭhitvā vasathā’’ti yāciṃsu. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā tattheva vasanto katipāhena cintesi – ‘‘mayā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā bhikkhū āvāsalobhena paribhinnā, bahuṃ vata mayā pāpakammaṃ pasuta’’nti balavavippaṭisārābhibhūto sokavegena gilāno hutvā nacireneva kālaṃ katvā avīcimhi nibbatti.

When people saw a backbiting monk, who had fully achieved his desire, entering a village for alms, they asked, "Venerable Sir, where have the elders gone?" He said, "Having argued with each other all night, they departed, ignoring my words even when I said, 'Do not quarrel, be harmonious, quarrel is indeed the bringer of disadvantage, the producer of future suffering, the promoter of unwholesomeness; even those of old were ruined, having lost great benefits through quarreling.'" Then the people pleaded, "Let the elders go then, but please, out of compassion for us, stay here without discontent." He agreed, saying "Good," and staying there, after a few days he thought, "I have caused the virtuous monks with good qualities to be divided because of greed for dwelling places. I have indeed accumulated much evil karma," overwhelmed by intense remorse, he became ill with the force of sorrow, and soon after, having died, was reborn in Avīci hell.

Itare dve sahāyakattherā janapadacārikaṃ carantā aññatarasmiṃ āvāse samāgantvā aññamaññaṃ sammoditvā tena bhikkhunā vuttaṃ bhedavacanaṃ aññamaññassa ārocetvā tassa abhūtabhāvaṃ ñatvā samaggā hutvā anukkamena tameva āvāsaṃ paccāgamiṃsu. Manussā dve there disvā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā sañjātasomanassā hutvā catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Therā ca tattheva vasantā sappāyaāhāralābhena samāhitacittā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nacireneva arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu.

The other two companion elders, wandering on tour through the country, met at a certain monastery and, greeting each other, revealed to each other the divisive words spoken by that monk, and realizing the untruth of it, they became united and gradually returned to that same monastery. Seeing the two elders, the people, delighted and elated, attended to them with the four requisites. And the elders, living there, with minds composed by obtaining suitable food, developing insight, soon attained Arahatship.

Pesuṇiko bhikkhu ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ niraye paccitvā imasmiṃ buddhuppāde rājagahassa avidūre pūtimukhapeto hutvā nibbatti. Tassa kāyo suvaṇṇavaṇṇo ahosi, mukhato pana puḷavakā nikkhamitvā ito cito ca mukhaṃ khādanti, tassa dūrampi okāsaṃ pharitvā duggandhaṃ vāyati. Athāyasmā nārado gijjhakūṭapabbatā orohanto taṃ disvā –

The backbiting monk, having suffered in hell for one Buddha-interval, in this Buddha-era was born as a Pūtimukhapeta (foul-mouthed ghost) not far from Rājagaha. His body was golden in color, but worms emerged from his mouth, eating his face here and there, and a foul odor wafted far from him. Then Venerable Nārada, descending from Gijjhakūṭa Mountain, saw him -

7.

7.

‘‘Dibbaṃ subhaṃ dhāresi vaṇṇadhātuṃ, vehāyasaṃ tiṭṭhasi antalikkhe;

"You bear a divine and beautiful complexion,
You stand in the sky, in the atmosphere;
But worms consume your foul-smelling mouth,
What evil deed did you do in the past?" –

dibbanti divi bhavaṃ devattabhāvapariyāpannaṃ. Idha pana dibbaṃ viyāti dibbaṃ.Subhanti sobhanaṃ, sundarabhāvaṃ vā.Vaṇṇadhātunti chavivaṇṇaṃ.Dhāresīti vahasi.Vehāyasaṃ tiṭṭhasi antalikkheti vehāyasasaññite antalikkhe tiṭṭhasi. Keci pana ‘‘vihāyasaṃ tiṭṭhasi antalikkhe’’ti pāṭhaṃ vatvā vihāyasaṃ obhāsento antalikkhe tiṭṭhasīti vacanasesena atthaṃ vadanti.Pūtigandhanti kuṇapagandhaṃ, duggandhanti attho.Kiṃ kammamakāsi pubbeti paramaduggandhaṃ te mukhaṃ kimayo khādanti, kāyo ca suvaṇṇavaṇṇo, kīdisaṃ nāma kammaṃ evarūpassa attabhāvassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ pubbe tvaṃ akāsīti pucchi.

Dibbaṃ means divine, pertaining to the state of divinity. Here, however, dibbaṃ viya means like divine. Subhaṃ means beautiful, or a state of loveliness. Vaṇṇadhātuṃ means the color of the skin. Dhāresi means you bear. Vehāyasaṃ tiṭṭhasi antalikkhe means you stand in the atmosphere, designated as space. But some, saying the reading is "vihāyasaṃ tiṭṭhasi antalikkhe," state the meaning with the addition of words, "illuminating the sky, you stand in the atmosphere." Pūtigandhaṃ means the smell of a corpse, foul-smelling is the meaning. Kiṃ kammamakāsi pubbe means worms eat your extremely foul-smelling mouth, and your body is golden in color, what kind of deed, causing such an existence, did you do in the past?

Evaṃ therena so peto attanā katakammaṃ puṭṭho tamatthaṃ vissajjento –

Thus questioned by the Elder about the deed done by himself, that ghost, revealing the matter –

8.

8.

‘‘Samaṇo ahaṃ pāpotiduṭṭhavāco, tapassirūpo mukhasā asaññato;

"I was a wicked and malicious ascetic,
Appearing as a recluse, uncontrolled in speech;
I obtained a beautiful complexion through merit,
But my mouth is foul because of backbiting." –

samaṇo ahaṃ pāpoti ahaṃ lāmako samaṇo pāpabhikkhu ahosiṃ.Atiduṭṭhavācoti atiduṭṭhavacano, pare atikkamitvā laṅghitvā vattā, paresaṃ guṇaparidhaṃsakavacanoti attho. ‘‘Atidukkhavāco’’ti vā pāṭho, ativiya pharusavacano musāvādapesuññādivacīduccaritanirato.Tapassirūpoti samaṇapatirūpako.Mukhasāti mukhena.Laddhāti paṭiladdhā. Ca-kāro sampiṇḍanattho.Meti mayā.Tapasāti brahmacariyena.Pesuṇiyenāti pisuṇavācāya.Putīti pūtigandhaṃ.

Samaṇo ahaṃ pāpo means I was a wretched ascetic, an evil monk. Atiduṭṭhavāco means one of very wicked speech, speaking transgressively, overstepping others, meaning one whose words destroy the good qualities of others. Or the reading is "atidukkhavāco," meaning one of exceedingly harsh speech, devoted to false speech, backbiting, and other evil conduct of speech. Tapassirūpo means having the appearance of a recluse. Mukhasā means by the mouth. Laddhā means obtained. The ca-particle is for combination. Me means by me. Tapasā means by the Brahmacariya (holy life). Pesuṇiyena means by slanderous speech. Putī means foul-smelling.

Evaṃ so peto attanā katakammaṃ ācikkhitvā idāni therassa ovādaṃ dento –

Thus that ghost, having declared the deed done by himself, now giving advice to the Elder –

9.

9.

‘‘Tayidaṃ tayā nārada sāmaṃ diṭṭhaṃ,

"This you have seen yourself, Nārada,
The skillful speak with compassion;
Do not backbite, nor speak falsely,
You will become a yakkha, enjoying desires." –

tayidanti taṃ idaṃ mama rūpaṃ.Anukampakā ye kusalā vadeyyunti ye anukampanasīlā kāruṇikā parahitapaṭipattiyaṃ kusalā nipuṇā buddhādayo yaṃ vadeyyuṃ, tadeva vadāmīti adhippāyo. Idāni taṃ ovādaṃ dassento‘‘mā pesuṇaṃ mā ca musā abhāṇi, yakkho tuvaṃ hohisi kāmakāmī’’ti āha. Tassattho –pesuṇaṃpisuṇavacanaṃ musā camā abhāṇimā kathehi. Yadi hi tvaṃ musāvādaṃ pisuṇavācañca pahāya vācāya saññato bhaveyyāsi, yakkho vā devo vā devaññataro vā tvaṃ bhavissasi, kāmaṃ kāmitabbaṃ uḷāraṃ dibbasampattiṃ paṭilabhitvā tattha kāmanasīlo yathāsukhaṃ indriyānaṃ paricaraṇena abhiramaṇasīloti.

Tayidaṃ means that, this my form. Anukampakā ye kusalā vadeyyuṃ means whatever those who are compassionate by nature, the compassionate ones, skillful in the practice of benefiting others, the Buddhas and so on, might say, that very thing I say, is the idea. Now, showing that advice, he said, "Mā pesuṇaṃ mā ca musā abhāṇi, yakkho tuvaṃ hohisi kāmakāmī". Its meaning is – pesuṇaṃ slanderous speech, and musā ca falsely, mā abhāṇi do not speak. For if you, having abandoned false speech and slanderous speech, were restrained in speech, you would become a yakkha or a deva or some other kind of deity, having obtained desirable, great divine wealth, there, being one who delights in desires, one who finds pleasure by attending to the senses as he pleases.

Taṃ sutvā thero tato rājagahaṃ gantvā piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto satthu tamatthaṃ ārocesi. Satthā taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā sampattaparisāya sātthikā ahosīti.

Having heard that, the Elder, having gone to Rājagaha, having wandered for alms, after the meal, having returned from the alms round, reported that matter to the Teacher. The Teacher, having made that the occasion for a discourse, taught the Dhamma. That teaching was fruitful for the assembled gathering.

Pūtimukhapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Pūtimukhapeta Vatthu is concluded.

4. Piṭṭhadhītalikapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
4. The Story of the Piṭṭhadhītalika Peta

Yaṃ kiñcārammaṇaṃ katvāti idaṃ satthā sāvatthiyaṃ jetavane viharanto anāthapiṇḍikassa gahapatino dānaṃ ārabbha kathesi. Anāthapiṇḍikassa kira gahapatino dhītu dhītāya dārikāya dhāti piṭṭhadhītalikaṃ adāsi ‘‘ayaṃ te dhītā, imaṃ gahetvā kīḷassū’’ti. Sā tattha dhītusaññaṃ uppādesi. Athassā ekadivasaṃ taṃ gahetvā kīḷantiyā pamādena patitvā bhijji. Tato dārikā ‘‘mama dhītā matā’’ti parodi. Taṃ rodantiṃ kocipi gehajano saññāpetuṃ nāsakkhi. Tasmiñca samaye satthā anāthapiṇḍikassa gahapatino gehe paññatte āsane nisinno hoti, mahāseṭṭhi ca bhagavato samīpe nisinno ahosi. Dhāti taṃ dārikaṃ gahetvā seṭṭhissa santikaṃ agamāsi. Seṭṭhi taṃ disvā ‘‘kissāyaṃ dārikā rodatī’’ti āha. Dhāti taṃ pavattiṃ seṭṭhissa ārocesi. Seṭṭhi taṃ dārikaṃ aṅke nisīdāpetvā ‘‘tava dhītudānaṃ dassāmī’’ti saññāpetvā satthu ārocesi – ‘‘bhante, mama nattudhītaraṃ piṭṭhadhītalikaṃ uddissa dānaṃ dātukāmo, taṃ me pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ svātanāya adhivāsethā’’ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

Yaṃ kiñcārammaṇaṃ katvā This the Teacher spoke while dwelling at Jetavana in Sāvatthi, concerning the donation of Anāthapiṇḍika the householder. It seems that to the granddaughter of Anāthapiṇḍika the householder's daughter, the nurse gave a toy made of flour, saying, "This is your daughter, play with it." She formed the perception of a daughter regarding it. Then one day, while she was playing with it, through carelessness it fell and broke. Then the girl cried, "My daughter is dead." No one in the household was able to console her as she wept. At that time, the Teacher was sitting on a seat prepared in the house of Anāthapiṇḍika the householder, and the great merchant was sitting near the Blessed One. The nurse took that girl and went to the merchant. Seeing her, the merchant said, "Why is this girl crying?" The nurse told the merchant the incident. The merchant, placing that girl on his lap, consoled her, saying, "I will give you another daughter," and reported to the Teacher, "Venerable Sir, my granddaughter wishes to give a donation for the sake of a flour-daughter; may the Blessed One consent to it for tomorrow, together with five hundred monks." The Blessed One consented by remaining silent.

Atha bhagavā dutiyadivase pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ seṭṭhissa gharaṃ gantvā bhattakiccaṃ katvā anumodanaṃ karonto –

Then on the second day, the Blessed One, having gone to the merchant's house together with five hundred monks, having completed the meal, while giving the thanksgiving –

10.

10.

‘‘Yaṃ kiñcārammaṇaṃ katvā, dajjā dānaṃ amaccharī;

"Whatever object one makes the basis,
One should give a gift without stinginess;
And concerning deceased ancestors,
Or even the deities of the dwelling.

11.

11.

‘‘Cattāro ca mahārāje, lokapāle yasassine;

"And the four great kings,
World-protectors, illustrious;
Kuvera, Dhataraṭṭha,
Virūpakkha, Virūḷhaka;
They too are honored,
And the givers are not fruitless.

12.

12.

‘‘Na hi ruṇṇaṃ vā soko vā, yā caññā paridevanā;

"For neither weeping nor sorrow,
Nor any other lamentation;
Is of use to the departed,
Thus stand the relatives.

13.

13.

‘‘Ayañca kho dakkhiṇā dinnā, saṅghamhi suppatiṭṭhitā;

"But this alms-offering given,
Well-established in the Sangha;
Conduces to their long-lasting benefit,
And serves them immediately" – these verses he spoke;

10.Tatthayaṃ kiñcārammaṇaṃ katvāti maṅgalādīsu aññataraṃ yaṃ kiñci ārabbha uddissa.Dajjāti dadeyya.Amaccharīti attano sampattiyā parehi sādhāraṇabhāvāsahanalakkhaṇassa maccherassa abhāvato amaccharī, pariccāgasīlo macchariyalobhādicittamalaṃ dūrato katvā dānaṃ dadeyyāti adhippāyo.Pubbapete ca ārabbhāti pubbakepi pete uddissa.Vatthudevatāti gharavatthuādīsu adhivatthā devatā ārabbhāti yojanā.Atha vāti iminā aññepi devamanussādike ye keci ārabbha dānaṃ dadeyyāti dasseti.

10. There, yaṃ kiñcārammaṇaṃ katvā means having made whatever object the basis, concerning, intending, any one of auspicious occasions and so on. Dajjā means one should give. Amaccharī means, because of the absence of stinginess, which has the characteristic of being unable to bear the common ownership of one's own wealth with others, without stinginess, one who is of a giving nature, having removed far away the defilement of stinginess, greed, and so on, one should give a gift, is the idea. Pubbapete ca ārabbhā means concerning deceased ancestors as well. Vatthudevatā means the deities dwelling in dwelling places and so on, concerning them, is the connection. Atha vā by this he shows that one should give gifts concerning whatever other deities, humans, and so on there may be.

11.Tattha devesu tāva ekacce pākaṭe deve dassento‘‘cattāro ca mahārāje’’ti vatvā puna te nāmato gaṇhanto ‘‘kuvera’’ntiādimāha. Tatthakuveranti vessavaṇaṃ.Dhataraṭṭhantiādīni sesānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ lokapālānaṃ nāmāni.Te ceva pūjitā hontīti te ca mahārājāno pubbapetavatthudevatāyo ca uddisanakiriyāya paṭimānikā honti.Dāyakā ca anipphalāti ye dānaṃ denti, te dāyakā ca paresaṃ uddisanamattena na nipphalā, attano dānaphalassa bhāgino eva honti.

11. There, first showing some well-known deities among the devas, saying "cattāro ca mahārāje", then, again, taking them by name, he said, beginning with "Kuvera". There, kuvera means Vessavaṇa. Dhataraṭṭha, and so on, are the names of the remaining three world-protectors. Te ceva pūjitā hontī means those great kings and the deceased ancestors and the deities of the dwelling become honored by the act of dedicating to them. Dāyakā ca anipphalā means those givers who give gifts, by the mere act of dedicating to others, are not fruitless, they are indeed partakers of the fruit of their own giving.

12.Idāni ‘‘ye attano ñātīnaṃ maraṇena rodanti paridevanti socanti, tesaṃ taṃ niratthakaṃ, attaparitāpanamattamevā’’ti dassetuṃ‘‘na hi ruṇṇaṃ vā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattharuṇṇanti ruditaṃ assumocanaṃ na hi kātabbanti vacanaseso.Sokoti socanaṃ cittasantāpo, antonijjhānanti attho.Yā caññā paridevanāti yā ca ruṇṇasokato aññā paridevanā, ‘‘kahaṃ ekaputtakā’’tiādivācāvippalāpo, sopi na kātabboti attho. Sabbattha vā-saddo vikappanattho.Na taṃ petassa atthāyāti yasmā ruṇṇaṃ vā soko vā paridevanā vāti sabbampi taṃ petassa kālakatassa atthāya upakārāya na hoti, tasmā na hi taṃ kātabbaṃ, tathāpi evaṃ tiṭṭhanti ñātayo aviddasunoti adhippāyo.

12. Now, to show that "those who weep, lament, and grieve at the death of their relatives, that is useless for them, it is merely self-torment," he spoke the verse "na hi ruṇṇaṃ vā". There, ruṇṇaṃ means weeping, shedding tears, it should not be done, is the implied meaning. Soko means grief, mental anguish, inner brooding, is the meaning. Yā caññā paridevanā means whatever lamentation is other than weeping and sorrow, verbal rambling such as "Where is my only child?", that too should not be done, is the meaning. Everywhere, the vā-particle is in the sense of option. Na taṃ petassa atthāyā means since neither weeping nor sorrow nor lamentation, none of that is for the benefit or help of the deceased, therefore it should not be done, even so, relatives stand thus, without wisdom, is the idea.

13.Evaṃ ruṇṇādīnaṃ niratthakabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni yā pubbapetādike ārabbha dāyakena saṅghassa dakkhiṇā dinnā, tassā sātthakabhāvaṃ dassento‘‘ayañca kho dakkhiṇā’’ti gāthamāha. Tatthaayanti dāyakena taṃ dinnaṃ dānaṃ paccakkhato dassento vadati. Ca-saddo byatirekattho, tena yathā ruṇṇādi petassa na kassaci atthāya hoti, na evamayaṃ, ayaṃ pana dakkhiṇā dīgharattaṃ hitāyassa hotīti vakkhamānameva visesaṃ joteti.Khoti avadhāraṇe.Dakkhiṇāti dānaṃ.Saṅghamhi suppatiṭṭhitāti anuttare puññakkhette saṅghe suṭṭhu patiṭṭhitā.Dīgharattaṃ hitāyassāti assa petassa cirakālaṃ hitāya atthāya.Ṭhānaso upakappatīti taṅkhaṇaññeva nipphajjati, na kālantareti attho. Ayañhi tattha dhammatā – yaṃ pete uddissa dāne dinne petā ce anumodanti, tāvadeva tassa phalena petā parimuccantīti.

13. Thus, having shown the uselessness of weeping and so on, now, showing the fruitfulness of the alms-offering given by the giver to the Sangha concerning deceased ancestors and so on, he spoke the verse "ayañca kho dakkhiṇā". There, ayaṃ this, he speaks showing directly the gift given by the giver. The ca-particle is in the sense of distinction, by that, just as weeping and so on are of no use to the deceased, this is not so, but this alms-offering is for the long-lasting benefit of the deceased, it indicates the very distinction that will be said later. Kho is for emphasis. Dakkhiṇā means gift. Saṅghamhi suppatiṭṭhitā means well-established in the Sangha, the unsurpassed field of merit. Dīgharattaṃ hitāyassā means for the long-lasting benefit, for the good of that deceased. Ṭhānaso upakappatī means it arises in that very moment, there is no delay in time, is the meaning. For indeed, there is this natural law there – when a gift is given in dedication to the deceased, if the deceased rejoice in it, by that very much the deceased are freed by its fruit.

Evaṃ bhagavā dhammaṃ desetvā mahājanaṃ pete uddissa dānābhiratamānasaṃ katvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. Punadivase seṭṭhibhariyā avasesā ca ñātakā seṭṭhiṃ anuvattantā evaṃ temāsamattaṃ mahādānaṃ pavattesuṃ. Atha rājā pasenadi kosalo bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘kasmā, bhante, bhikkhū māsamattaṃ mama gharaṃ nāgamiṃsū’’ti pucchi. Satthārā tasmiṃ kāraṇe kathite rājāpi seṭṭhiṃ anuvattanto buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ pavattesi, taṃ disvā nāgarā rājānaṃ anuvattantā māsamattaṃ mahādānaṃ pavattesuṃ. Evaṃ māsadvayaṃ piṭṭhadhītalikamūlakaṃ mahādānaṃ pavattesunti.

Thus, the Blessed One, having taught the Dhamma, having made the minds of the great multitude delighted in giving in dedication to the deceased, rose from his seat and departed. On the following day, the merchant's wife and the remaining relatives, following the merchant, for about three months, continued the great donation. Then King Pasenadi of Kosala approached the Blessed One and asked, "Venerable Sir, why have the monks not come to my house for about a month?" When the Teacher had spoken of that reason, the king also, following the merchant, continued the great donation to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha, seeing that, the townspeople, following the king, continued the great donation for about a month. Thus, for two months, the great donation rooted in the flour-daughter continued.

Piṭṭhadhītalikapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Story of the Piṭṭhadhītalika Peta is concluded.

5. Tirokuṭṭapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
5. The Story of the Tirokuṭṭa Peta

Tirokuṭṭesutiṭṭhantīti idaṃ satthā rājagahe viharanto sambahule pete ārabbha kathesi.

Tirokuṭṭesu tiṭṭhantī This the Teacher spoke while dwelling at Rājagaha, concerning many petas.

Tatrāyaṃ vitthārakathā – ito dvānavutikappe kāsi nāma nagaraṃ ahosi. Tattha jayaseno nāma rājā rajjaṃ kāresi. Tassa sirimā nāma devī. Tassā kucchiyaṃ phusso nāma bodhisatto nibbattitvā anupubbena sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhi. Jayaseno rājā ‘‘mama putto mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhamitvā buddho jāto, mayhameva buddho, mayhaṃ dhammo, mayhaṃ saṅgho’’ti mamattaṃ uppādetvā sabbakālaṃ sayameva upaṭṭhahati, na aññesaṃ okāsaṃ deti.

Here is the detailed story: From here, ninety-two aeons ago, there was a city named Kāsi. There a king named Jayasena ruled the kingdom. He had a queen named Sirimā. In her womb, the Bodhisatta named Phussa was reborn, and gradually attained complete enlightenment, becoming a Fully Enlightened One. King Jayasena, having produced possessiveness, thinking, "My son, having gone forth in the Great Renunciation, has become a Buddha; he is my Buddha, mine is the Dhamma, mine is the Sangha," always attends to him himself, he does not give an opportunity to others.

Bhagavato kaniṭṭhabhātaro vemātikā tayo bhātaro cintesuṃ – ‘‘buddhā nāma sabbaloka hitatthāya uppajjanti, na ekasseva atthāya. Amhākañca pitā aññesaṃ okāsaṃ na deti. Kathaṃ nu kho mayaṃ labheyyāma bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ bhikkhusaṅghañcā’’ti? Tesaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘handa mayaṃ kiñci upāyaṃ karomā’’ti. Te paccantaṃ kupitaṃ viya kārāpesuṃ. Tato rājā ‘‘paccanto kupito’’ti sutvā tayopi putte paccantaṃ vūpasametuṃ pesesi. Te gantvā vūpasametvā āgatā. Rājā tuṭṭho varaṃ adāsi ‘‘yaṃ icchatha, taṃ gaṇhathā’’ti. Te ‘‘mayaṃ bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ icchāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Rājā ‘‘etaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti āha. Te ‘‘mayaṃ aññena anatthikā’’ti āhaṃsu. Tena hi paricchedaṃ katvā gaṇhathāti. Te satta vassāni yāciṃsu. Rājā na adāsi. Evaṃ ‘‘cha, pañca, cattāri, tīṇi, dve, ekaṃ, satta māse, cha, pañca, cattāro’’ti vatvā yāva temāsaṃ yāciṃsu. Tadā rājā ‘‘gaṇhathā’’ti adāsi.

The three younger brothers of the Blessed One, born of different mothers, thought: “Buddhas arise for the benefit of the whole world, not just for one person. And our father does not give an opportunity to others. How can we obtain the chance to attend upon the Blessed One and the Saṅgha of monks?” They had this thought: “Come, let us devise some means.” They made the border appear as if it were in revolt. Then the king, hearing that “the border is in revolt,” sent his three sons to pacify the border. They went, pacified it, and returned. The king, pleased, gave them a boon, saying, “Take what you wish.” They said, “We wish to attend upon the Blessed One.” The king said, “Take something else, leaving this aside.” They said, “We have no need of anything else.” “Then take it by making a limit,” he said. They requested seven years. The king did not give it. Thus, saying “six, five, four, three, two, one, seven months, six, five, four,” they requested even up to three months. Then the king granted it, saying, “Take it.”

Te bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āhaṃsu – ‘‘icchāma mayaṃ, bhante, bhagavantaṃ temāsaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ, adhivāsetu no, bhante, bhagavā imaṃ temāsaṃ vassāvāsa’’nti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena. Te tayo attano janapade niyuttakapurisassa lekhaṃ pesesuṃ ‘‘imaṃ temāsaṃ amhehi bhagavā upaṭṭhātabbo, vihāraṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbaṃ bhagavato upaṭṭhānasambhāraṃ sampādehī’’ti. So sabbaṃ sampādetvā paṭipesesi. Te kāsāyavatthanivatthā hutvā purisasahassehi veyyāvaccakarehi bhagavantaṃ bhikkhusaṅghañca sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahamānā janapadaṃ netvā vihāraṃ niyyātetvā vassaṃ vasāpesuṃ.

They approached the Blessed One and said, “We wish, O Blessed One, to attend upon the Blessed One for three months; may the Blessed One consent to spend the rainy season with us for these three months.” The Blessed One consented by remaining silent. Those three sent a letter to the official appointed in their territory: “The Blessed One is to be attended upon by us for these three months; prepare all the requisites for attending upon the Blessed One, beginning with the monastery.” He prepared everything and sent it back. Those three, clothed in kāsāya robes, respectfully attending upon the Blessed One and the Saṅgha of monks with thousands of attendants, led them to their territory, handed over the monastery, and made them spend the rainy season there.

Tesaṃ bhaṇḍāgāriko eko gahapatiputto sapajāpatiko saddho ahosi pasanno. So buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa dānavattaṃ sakkaccaṃ adāsi. Janapade niyuttakapuriso taṃ gahetvā jānapadehi ekādasamattehi purisasahassehi saddhiṃ sakkaccameva dānaṃ pavattāpesi. Tattha keci jānapadā paṭihatacittā ahesuṃ. Te dānassa antarāyaṃ katvā deyyadhammaṃ attanā khādiṃsu, bhattasālañca agginā dahiṃsu. Pavāritā rājaputtā bhagavato sakkāraṃ katvā bhagavantaṃ purakkhatvā pitu santikameva paccāgamiṃsu. Tattha gantvā bhagavā parinibbāyi. Rājaputtā ca janapade niyuttakapuriso ca bhaṇḍāgāriko ca anupubbena kālaṃ katvā saddhiṃ parisāya sagge uppajjiṃsu, paṭihatacittā janā niraye uppajjiṃsu. Evaṃ tesaṃ ubhayesaṃ janānaṃ saggato saggaṃ nirayato nirayaṃ upapajjantānaṃ dvānavutikappā vītivattā.

Their treasurer, a householder’s son, was faithful and devoted, along with his wife. He respectfully offered alms to the Saṅgha of monks, with the Buddha at its head. The official appointed in the territory, taking it, along with about eleven thousand men from the countryside, respectfully maintained the giving of alms. There, some countrymen were displeased. They obstructed the giving of alms, ate the almsfood themselves, and burned down the refectory with fire. Having completed the pavāraṇā, the princes, having honored the Blessed One, returned to their father, with the Blessed One in the lead. Having gone there, the Blessed One passed away. And the princes, the official appointed in the territory, and the treasurer, having died in due course, were reborn in heaven together with their retinue, while the displeased people were reborn in hell. Thus, for those two groups of people, passing from heaven to heaven and from hell to hell, ninety-two aeons passed.

Atha imasmiṃ bhaddakappe kassapassa bhagavato kāle te paṭihatacittā janā petesu uppannā. Tadā manussā attano attano ñātakānaṃ petānaṃ atthāya dānaṃ datvā uddisanti ‘‘idaṃ no ñātīnaṃ hotū’’ti, te sampattiṃ labhanti. Atha imepi petā taṃ disvā kassapaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchiṃsu – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho, bhante, mayampi evarūpaṃ sampattiṃ labheyyāmā’’ti? Bhagavā āha – ‘‘idāni na labhatha, anāgate pana gotamo nāma sammāsambuddho bhavissati, tassa bhagavato kāle bimbisāro nāma rājā bhavissati, so tumhākaṃ ito dvānavutikappe ñāti ahosi, so buddhassa dānaṃ datvā tumhākaṃ uddisissati, tadā labhissathā’’ti. Evaṃ vutte kira tesaṃ petānaṃ taṃ vacanaṃ ‘‘sve labhissathā’’ti vuttaṃ viya ahosi.

Then, in this auspicious aeon, during the time of Kassapa Buddha, those displeased people were born as petas. At that time, people, giving alms for the sake of their departed relatives, dedicate it, saying, “May this be for our relatives,” and they obtain prosperity. Then these petas too, seeing that, approached Kassapa, the Perfectly Enlightened Buddha, and asked, “What, O Blessed One, can we also obtain such prosperity?” The Blessed One said, “Now you cannot obtain it, but in the future, there will be a Perfectly Enlightened Buddha named Gotama; during the time of that Blessed One, there will be a king named Bimbisāra, who was your relative ninety-two aeons ago; he will give alms to the Buddha and dedicate it to you, then you will obtain it.” When this was said, that word was to those petas as if it was said, “You will obtain it tomorrow.”

Tato ekasmiṃ buddhantare vītivatte amhākaṃ bhagavā uppajji. Tepi tayo rājaputtā purisasahassena saddhiṃ devalokato cavitvā magadharaṭṭhe brāhmaṇakule uppajjitvā anupubbena tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā gayāsīse tayo jaṭilā ahesuṃ, janapade niyuttakapuriso rājā bimbisāro ahosi, bhaṇḍāgāriko gahapatiputto visākho nāma seṭṭhi ahosi, tassa pajāpati dhammadinnā nāma seṭṭhidhītā ahosi, avasesā pana parisā rañño eva parivārā hutvā nibbattiṃsu.

Then, after one Buddha-interval had passed, our Blessed One arose. Those three princes too, having passed away from the heaven, along with their thousand men, were born in brahmin families in the Magadha country, and gradually taking the ascetic life, became three jaṭilas at Gayāsīsa; the official appointed in the territory was King Bimbisāra; the treasurer, the householder’s son, was a wealthy man named Visākha; his wife was a wealthy man's daughter named Dhammadinnā, but the remaining retinue were reborn as the king’s attendants.

Amhākampi bhagavā loke uppajjitvā sattasattāhaṃ atikkamitvā anupubbena bārāṇasiṃ āgamma dhammacakkaṃ pavattetvā pañcavaggiye ādiṃ katvā yāva sahassaparivāre tayo jaṭile vinetvā rājagahaṃ agamāsi. Tattha ca tadahupasaṅkamantaṃyeva rājānaṃ bimbisāraṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpesi saddhiṃ ekādasanahutehi aṅgamagadhavāsīhi brāhmaṇagahapatikehi. Atha raññā svātanāya bhattena nimantito adhivāsetvā dutiyadivase māṇavakavaṇṇena sakkena devānamindena purato gacchantena –

Our Blessed One also, having arisen in the world, having spent seven weeks, gradually arriving at Bārāṇasī, having set in motion the Wheel of Dhamma, having converted the three jaṭilas, beginning with the group of five, along with their retinue of a thousand, went to Rājagaha. There, upon approaching, he established King Bimbisāra in the fruit of Stream-entry, along with eleven nahutas of brahmin householders residing in Aṅga and Magadha. Then, having been invited by the king for a meal on the following day, having accepted in silence, with Sakka, the king of the gods, going in front in the guise of a young man –

‘‘Danto dantehi saha purāṇajaṭilehi, vippamutto vippamuttehi;

‘‘The tamed one with the tamed ones together with ancient jaṭilas, the liberated one with the liberated ones;
Of golden color like a siṅgī gold coin, the Blessed One entered Rājagaha’’ (mahāva. 58) –

Evamādīhi gāthāhi abhitthaviyamāno rājagahaṃ pavisitvā rañño nivesane mahādānaṃ sampaṭicchi. Te pana petā ‘‘idāni rājā dānaṃ amhākaṃ uddisissati, idāni uddisissatī’’ti āsāya samparivāretvā aṭṭhaṃsu.

Thus, being praised with verses such as these, having entered Rājagaha, he accepted a great donation in the king’s residence. Those petas, thinking, “Now the king will dedicate alms to us, now he will dedicate,” stood surrounding the residence with expectation.

Rājā dānaṃ datvā ‘‘kattha nu kho bhagavā vihareyyā’’ti bhagavato vihāraṭṭhānameva cintesi, na taṃ dānaṃ kassaci uddisi. Tathā taṃ dānaṃ alabhantā petā chinnāsā hutvā rattiyaṃ rañño nivesane ativiya bhiṃsanakaṃ vissaramakaṃsu. Rājā bhayasantāsasaṃvegaṃ āpajjitvā vibhātāya rattiyā bhagavato ārocehi – ‘‘evarūpaṃ saddaṃ assosiṃ, kiṃ nu kho me, bhante, bhavissatī’’ti? Bhagavā ‘‘mā bhāyi, mahārāja, na te kiñci pāpakaṃ bhavissati, apica kho santi te purāṇañātakā petesu uppannā. Te ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ tameva paccāsīsantā ‘buddhassa dānaṃ datvā amhākaṃ uddisissatī’ti vicarantā tayā hiyyo dānaṃ datvā na uddisitattā chinnāsā hutvā tathārūpaṃ vissaramakaṃsū’’ti āha. ‘‘Kiṃ idānipi, bhante, dinne te labheyyu’’nti? ‘‘Āma, mahārājā’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi, bhante, adhivāsetu me bhagavā ajjatanāya dānaṃ, tesaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The king, having given alms, thought only of a place for the Blessed One to reside, thinking, “Where should the Blessed One reside?” He did not dedicate that alms to anyone. Thus, not obtaining that alms, the petas, having lost hope, made a very frightening noise in the king’s residence at night. The king, experiencing fear, terror, and agitation, told the Blessed One in the morning: “I heard such a sound, what will happen to me, O Blessed One?” The Blessed One said, “Do not fear, great king, no evil will befall you; however, there are your former relatives born as petas. They, hoping for that same thing for a Buddha-interval, thinking, ‘Having given alms to the Buddha, he will dedicate it to us,’ wandering about, having lost hope because you gave alms yesterday and did not dedicate it, made such a noise.” “If it is given now, would they obtain it, O Blessed One?” “Yes, great king.” “Then, O Blessed One, may the Blessed One consent to the alms for today, I will dedicate it to them.” The Blessed One consented by remaining silent.

Rājā nivesanaṃ gantvā mahādānaṃ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṃ ārocāpesi. Bhagavā rājantepuraṃ gantvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena. Te petā ‘‘api nāma ajja labheyyāmā’’ti gantvā tirokuṭṭādīsu aṭṭhaṃsu. Bhagavā tathā akāsi, yathā te sabbeva rañño āpāthaṃ gatā ahesuṃ. Rājā dakkhiṇodakaṃ dento ‘‘idaṃ me ñātīnaṃ hotū’’ti uddisi. Tāvadeva petānaṃ kamalakuvalayasañchannā pokkharaṇiyo nibbattiṃsu. Te tattha nhatvā ca pivitvā ca paṭippassaddhadarathakilamathapipāsā suvaṇṇavaṇṇā ahesuṃ. Rājā yāgukhajjabhojjāni datvā uddisi. Tesaṃ taṅkhaṇaññeva dibbayāgukhajjabhojjāni nibbattiṃsu. Te tāni paribhuñjitvā pīṇindriyā ahesuṃ. Atha vatthasenāsanāni datvā uddisi. Tesaṃ dibbavatthapāsādapaccattharaṇaseyyādialaṅkāravidhayo nibbattiṃsu. Sā ca tesaṃ sampatti sabbāpi yathā rañño pākaṭā hoti, tathā bhagavā adhiṭṭhāsi. Rājā taṃ disvā ativiya attamano ahosi. Tato bhagavā bhuttāvī pavārito rañño bimbisārassa anumodanatthaṃ tirokuṭṭapetavatthuṃ abhāsi –

The king, having gone to his residence, had a great donation prepared and announced the time to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, having gone to the king’s inner palace, sat down on the prepared seat, together with the Saṅgha of monks. Those petas, thinking, “Perhaps we may obtain it today,” having gone, stood outside the walls and so on. The Blessed One did so that all of them became visible to the king. The king, giving the water of dedication, dedicated it, saying, “May this be for my relatives.” Immediately, lotus- and water lily-covered ponds appeared for the petas. Having bathed and drunk there, their weariness, fatigue, and thirst relieved, they became golden-colored. The king, having given rice gruel, solid food, and soft food, dedicated it. At that very moment, divine rice gruel, solid food, and soft food appeared for them. Having consumed those, they became with satisfied senses. Then, having given cloth, lodging, and so on, he dedicated it. Divine cloths, mansions, spreads, beds, and various ornaments appeared for them. And that entire prosperity of theirs was evident to the king, as the Blessed One willed. The king, seeing that, was exceedingly pleased. Then the Blessed One, having eaten, having finished the meal, spoke the Tirokuṭṭa Discourse to King Bimbisāra for the sake of rejoicing –

14.

14.

‘‘Tirokuṭṭesu tiṭṭhanti, sandhisiṅghāṭakesu ca;

‘‘They stand outside the walls, at crossroads, and at junctions;
They stand by the doorposts, having come to their own home.

15.

15.

‘‘Pahūte annapānamhi, khajjabhojje upaṭṭhite;

‘‘When plenty of food and drink, solid food and soft food, is set out;
No one remembers them, due to the actions of beings.

16.

16.

‘‘Evaṃ dadanti ñātīnaṃ, ye honti anukampakā;

‘‘Thus, relatives give to relatives, those who are compassionate;
Clean, excellent, at the proper time, suitable food and drink.

17.

17.

‘‘Idaṃ vo ñātīnaṃ hotu, sukhitā hontu ñātayo;

‘‘‘May this be for our relatives, may the relatives be happy’;
And they gather there, relatives, petas having gathered;
When there is plenty of food and drink, they rejoice respectfully.

18.

18.

‘‘Ciraṃ jīvantu no ñātī, yesaṃ hetu labhāmase;

‘‘‘May our relatives live long, because of whom we obtain [this];
And our offerings are made, and the donors are not fruitless.’

19.

19.

‘‘Na hi tattha kasi atthi, gorakkhettha na vijjati;

‘‘For there is no farming there, no cattle-keeping is found;
There is no such trade, no buying and selling with gold;
They live there, the departed petas, by what is given here.

20.

20.

‘‘Unname udakaṃ vuṭṭhaṃ, yathā ninnaṃ pavattati;

‘‘As water falling on high ground flows down to the lowlands;
Even so, what is given from here benefits the petas.

21.

21.

‘‘Yathā vārivahā pūrā, paripūrenti sāgaraṃ;

‘‘As rivers full of water fill the ocean;
Even so, what is given from here benefits the petas.

22.

22.

‘‘Adāsi me akāsi me, ñātimittā sakhā ca me;

‘‘‘He gave to me, he did for me, [he was] a relative, friend, and companion of mine’;
One should give alms for the petas, remembering what was done in the past.

23.

23.

‘‘Na hi ruṇṇaṃ vā soko vā, yā caññā paridevanā;

‘‘For neither weeping nor sorrow, nor any lamentation;
Is of benefit to the petas, thus stand the relatives.

24.

24.

‘‘Ayañca kho dakkhiṇā dinnā, saṅghamhi suppatiṭṭhitā;

‘‘But this offering, well-established in the Saṅgha;
Is for their long-term benefit, and serves them in due course.

25.

25.

‘‘So ñātidhammo ca ayaṃ nidassito, petāna pūjā ca katā uḷārā;

‘‘This is the duty to relatives that has been shown, great honor has been done to the petas;
And strength has been given to the monks, you have made much merit, not a little.’’

14.Tatthatirokuṭṭesūti kuṭṭānaṃ parabhāgesu.Tiṭṭhantīti nisajjādipaṭikkhepato ṭhānakappanavacanametaṃ, gehapākārakuṭṭānaṃ dvārato bahi eva tiṭṭhantīti attho.Sandhisiṅghāṭakesu cāti sandhīsu ca siṅghāṭakesu ca.Sandhīti catukkoṇaracchā, gharasandhibhittisandhiālokasandhiyopi vuccanti.Siṅghāṭakāti tikoṇaracchā.Dvārabāhāsu tiṭṭhantīti nagaradvāragharadvārānaṃ bāhā nissāya tiṭṭhanti.Āgantvāna sakaṃ gharanti sakagharaṃ nāma pubbañātigharampi attanā sāmibhāvena ajjhāvutthagharampi, tadubhayampi te yasmā sakagharasaññāya āgacchanti, tasmā ‘‘āgantvāna sakaṃ ghara’’nti āha.

14. There, tirokuṭṭesu means in the outer parts of the walls. Tiṭṭhanti means this is a statement establishing the act of standing, rejecting sitting and so on, meaning they stand outside the doors of the walls of houses and enclosures. Sandhisiṅghāṭakesu ca means at the joints and at the crossroads. Sandhī means a four-cornered road, also called house-joints, wall-joints, and light-joints. Siṅghāṭakā means a three-cornered road. Dvārabāhāsu tiṭṭhanti means they stand relying on the doorposts of city gates and house doors. Āgantvāna sakaṃ gharaṃ means their own home is both the former home of relatives and the home formerly occupied by themselves as owners; since they come to both of those with the perception of it as their own home, therefore he said “āgantvāna sakaṃ gharaṃ.”

15.Evaṃ bhagavā pubbe anajjhāvutthapubbampi pubbañātigharattā bimbisāranivesanaṃ sakagharasaññāya āgantvā tirokuṭṭādīsu ṭhite issāmacchariyaphalaṃ anubhavante ativiya duddasikavirūpabhayānakadassane bahū pete rañño dassento ‘‘tirokuṭṭesu tiṭṭhantī’’ti gāthaṃ vatvā puna tehi katassa kammassa dāruṇabhāvaṃ dassento‘‘pahūte annapānamhī’’ti dutiyagāthamāha.

15. Thus, the Blessed One, showing the king many petas experiencing the result of envy and stinginess, standing in the outer parts of walls and so on, having come to Bimbisāra’s residence with the perception of it as their own home, even though they had never lived there before, because it was the former home of relatives, with very difficult-to-see, deformed, and frightening appearances, having said the verse “tirokuṭṭesu tiṭṭhanti,” now, showing the terrible nature of the action done by them, he said the second verse, ‘‘pahūte annapānamhī’’.

pahūteti anappake bahumhi, yāvadattheti attho. Ba-kārassa hi pa-kāro labbhati ‘‘pahu santo na bharatī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 98) viya. Keci pana ‘‘bahuke’’ti paṭhanti, so pana pamādapāṭho.Annapānamhīti anne ca pāne ca.Khajjabhojjeti khajje ca bhojje ca. Etena asitapītakhāyitasāyitavasena catubbidhampi āhāraṃ dasseti.Upaṭṭhiteti upagamma ṭhite sajjite, paṭiyatteti attho.Na tesaṃ koci sarati sattānanti tesaṃ pettivisaye uppannānaṃ sattānaṃ koci mātā vā pitā vā putto vā nattā vā na sarati. Kiṃ kāraṇā?Kammapaccayāti, attanā katassa adānadānapaṭisedhanādibhedassa kadariyakammassa kāraṇabhāvato. Tañhi kammaṃ tesaṃ ñātīnaṃ sarituṃ na deti.

pahūte means plentiful, abundant, as much as is needed. Indeed, the letter ba is obtained as the letter pa, as in “pahu santo na bharatī” (su. ni. 98) and so on. But some read “bahuke,” but that is a mistaken reading. Annapānamhī means food and drink. Khajjabhojje means solid food and soft food. By this, he shows all four kinds of nutriment, namely, what is eaten, drunk, chewed, and savored. Upaṭṭhite means having come near and standing, prepared, made ready. Na tesaṃ koci sarati sattānaṃ means no one, whether mother, father, son, or grandson, remembers those beings born in the sphere of the petas. What is the reason? Kammapaccayā means due to the causal condition of stingy action done by themselves, which is of the nature of not giving alms and prohibiting alms. Indeed, that action does not allow their relatives to remember them.

16.Evaṃ bhagavā anappakepi annapānādimhi vijjamāne ñātīnaṃ paccāsīsantānaṃ petānaṃ kammaphalena ñātakānaṃ anussaraṇamattassāpi abhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni pettivisayupapanne ñātake uddissa raññā dinnadānaṃ pasaṃsanto‘‘evaṃ dadanti ñātīna’’nti tatiyagāthamāha.

16. Thus, the Blessed One, having shown the absence of even the mere remembrance of relatives due to the fruit of action for the petas expecting [alms] from their relatives even when there is plentiful food, drink, and so on, now, praising the alms given by the king, dedicating it to the relatives who have gone to the sphere of the petas, he said the third verse, ‘‘evaṃ dadanti ñātīna’’.

evanti upamāvacanaṃ. Tassa dvidhā sambandho – tesaṃ sattānaṃ kammapaccayā asarantesupi kesuci keci dadanti ñātīnaṃ, ye evaṃ anukampakā hontīti ca, mahārāja, yathā tayā dinnaṃ, evaṃ suciṃ paṇītaṃ kālena kappiyaṃ pānabhojanaṃ dadanti ñātīnaṃ, ye honti anukampakāti ca. Tatthadadantīti denti uddisanti niyyātenti.Ñātīnanti mātito ca pitito ca sambandhānaṃ.Yeti ye keci puttādayo.Hontīti bhavanti.Anukampakāti atthakāmā hitesino.Sucinti suddhaṃ manoharaṃ dhammikañca.Paṇītanti uḷāraṃ.Kālenāti dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ paribhogayoggakālena, ñātipetānaṃ vā tirokuṭṭādīsu āgantvā ṭhitakālena.Kappiyanti anucchavikaṃ patirūpaṃ ariyānaṃ paribhogārahaṃ.Pānabhojananti pānañca bhojanañca, tadupadesena cettha sabbaṃ deyyadhammaṃ vadati.

Evaṃ is a word of comparison. It has two connections: some among those beings, due to their kamma conditions, give to their relatives even though they are not able to receive; and, “Mahārāja, just as you gave, so too they give pure, excellent, timely, and suitable food and drink to their relatives, who are compassionate.” Here, dadanti means they give, dedicate, and bestow. Ñātīnaṃ means to relatives connected through the mother and father. Ye means whatever sons and others. Honti means they are. Anukampakā means desiring the welfare and benefit of others. Suciṃ means pure, delightful, and righteous. Paṇītaṃ means excellent. Kālena means at a time suitable for the recipients, or at a time when the departed relatives come and stay near walls and other places. Kappiyaṃ means appropriate, suitable, and fit for the use of the noble ones. Pānabhojanaṃ means drink and food, and by implication, it refers to all gifts.

17.Idāni yena pakārena tesaṃ petānaṃ dinnaṃ nāma hoti, taṃ dassento‘‘idaṃ vo ñātīnaṃ hotu, sukhitā hontu ñātayo’’ti catutthagāthāya pubbaḍḍhaṃ āha. Taṃ tatiyagāthāya pubbaḍḍhena sambandhitabbaṃ –

17. Now, showing the manner in which the gift is considered given to those departed ones, he speaks the first half of the fourth verse, "idaṃ vo ñātīnaṃ hotu, sukhitā hontu ñātayo". This should be connected with the first half of the third verse:

‘‘Evaṃ dadanti ñātīnaṃ, ye honti anukampakā;

"Evaṃ dadanti ñātīnaṃ, ye honti anukampakā;
Idaṃ vo ñātīnaṃ hotu, sukhitā hontu ñātayo".

Tena ‘‘idaṃ vo ñātīnaṃ hotūti evaṃ pakārena dadanti, no aññathā’’ti ākāratthena evaṃsaddena dātabbākāranidassanaṃ kataṃ hoti.

Thus, with the word "evaṃ," indicating the manner, the way of giving is shown, implying "they give in this manner, not otherwise," in the sense of the manner of action.

idanti deyyadhammanidassanaṃ.Voti nipātamattaṃ ‘‘yehi vo ariyā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.36) viya.Ñātīnaṃ hotūti pettivisaye uppannānaṃ ñātakānaṃ hotu. ‘‘No ñātīna’’nti ca paṭhanti, amhākaṃ ñātīnanti attho.Sukhitā hontu ñātayoti te pettivisayūpapannā ñātayo idaṃ phalaṃ paccanubhavantā sukhitā sukhappattā hontu.

Idaṃ indicates the gift. Vo is merely an expletive, like in "yehi vo ariyā" (MN 1.36). Ñātīnaṃ hotu means may it be for the relatives who have arisen in the realm of the departed. Some also read "no ñātīnaṃ," meaning for our relatives. Sukhitā hontu ñātayo means may those relatives who have arisen in the realm of the departed, experiencing this result, be happy and attain happiness.

‘‘te ca tattho’’tiādimāha.

"Te ca tattho" etc., he said.

teti ñātipetā.Tatthāti yattha dānaṃ dīyati, tattha.Samāgantvāti ‘‘ime no ñātayo amhākaṃ atthāya dānaṃ uddisantī’’ti anumodanatthaṃ tattha samāgatā hutvā.Pahūte annapānamhīti attano uddissa dīyamāne tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ.Sakkaccaṃ anumodareti kammaphalaṃ abhisaddahantā cittīkāraṃ avijahantā avikkhittacittā hutvā ‘‘idaṃ no dānaṃ hitāya sukhāya hotū’’ti modanti anumodanti pītisomanassajātā honti.

Te means the departed relatives. Tattha means where the gift is given. Samāgantvā means having gathered there to rejoice, thinking, "These relatives of ours are dedicating a gift for our benefit." Pahūte annapānamhī means in that item being given, dedicated to them. Sakkaccaṃ anumodare means believing in the result of kamma, not abandoning respect, with undistracted minds, they rejoice, approve, and become filled with joy and happiness, thinking, "May this gift of ours be for our welfare and happiness."

18.Ciraṃ jīvantūti ciraṃ jīvino dīghāyukā hontu.No ñātīti amhākaṃ ñātakā.Yesaṃ hetūti yesaṃ kāraṇā ye nissāya.Labhāmaseti īdisaṃ sampattiṃ paṭilabhāma. Idañhi uddisanena laddhasampattiṃ anubhavantānaṃ petānaṃ attano ñātīnaṃ thomanākāradassanaṃ. Petānañhi attano anumodanena, dāyakānaṃ uddisanena, ukkhiṇeyyasampattiyā cāti tīhi aṅgehi dakkhiṇā taṅkhaṇaññeva phalanibbattikā hoti. Tattha dāyakā visesahetu. Tenāha ‘‘yesaṃ hetu labhāmase’’ti.Amhākañca katā pūjāti ‘‘idaṃ vo ñātīnaṃ hotū’’ti evaṃ uddisantehi dāyakehi amhākañca pūjā katā, tedāyakā ca anipphalāyasmiṃ santāne pariccāgamayaṃ kammaṃ nibbattaṃ tassa tattheva phaladānato.

18.Ciraṃ jīvantū means may they live long, may our relatives be long-lived. No ñātī means our relatives. Yesaṃ hetū means because of whom, relying on whom. Labhāmase means we obtain such wealth. This is showing the manner of praising one's relatives by the departed ones who are experiencing the wealth obtained through dedication. Indeed, the donation becomes immediately fruitful through three factors: the departed ones' approval, the donors' dedication, and the excellence of the offering. Among these, the donors are the specific cause. Therefore, he said, "yesaṃ hetu labhāmase." Amhākañca katā pūjā means a offering has also been made for us by the donors who dedicate in this way, "idaṃ vo ñātīnaṃ hotū," and those dāyakā ca anipphalā are not fruitless because the action consisting of generosity has arisen in that lineage, and it gives its result right there.

Etthāha – ‘‘kiṃ pana pettivisayūpapannā eva ñātī hetusampattiyo labhanti, udāhu aññepī’’ti? Na cettha amhehi vattabbaṃ, atthi bhagavatā evaṃ byākatattā. Vuttañhetaṃ –-

Here he says: "Do only relatives who have arisen in the realm of the departed receive wealth, or do others also?" We need not say it, because the Blessed One has explained it in this way. It was said thus:

‘‘Mayamassu, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā nāma dānāni dema, puññāni karoma ‘idaṃ dānaṃ petānaṃ ñātisālohitānaṃ upakappatu, idaṃ dānaṃ petā ñātisālohitā paribhuñjantū’ti. Kacci taṃ, bho gotama, dānaṃ petānaṃ ñātisālohitānaṃ upakappati, kacci te petā ñātisālohitā taṃ dānaṃ paribhuñjantīti? Ṭhāne kho, brāhmaṇa, upakappati, no aṭṭhāneti.

"We, Gotama, are Brahmins by name; we give gifts and perform meritorious deeds, thinking, 'May this gift accrue to the departed relatives and blood relatives; may the departed relatives and blood relatives partake of this gift.' Does that gift, Gotama, accrue to the departed relatives and blood relatives? Do those departed relatives and blood relatives partake of that gift?" "In some instances, Brahmin, it accrues; in other instances, it does not.

‘‘Katamaṃ pana, bho gotama, ṭhānaṃ, katamaṃ aṭṭhānanti? Idha, brāhmaṇa, ekacco pāṇātipātī hoti…pe… micchādiṭṭhiko hoti, so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā nirayaṃ upapajjati. Yo nerayikānaṃ sattānaṃ āhāro, tena so tattha yāpeti, tena so tattha tiṭṭhati. Idaṃ kho, brāhmaṇa, aṭṭhānaṃ, yattha ṭhitassa taṃ dānaṃ na upakappati.

"But what, Gotama, is the instance, and what is the non-instance? Here, Brahmin, someone is a killer of living beings…pe… is of wrong view; on the dissolution of the body, after death, he is reborn in hell. The food of beings in hell, with that he lives there, with that he remains there. This, Brahmin, is a non-instance, where the gift does not accrue to one who is situated there.

‘‘Idha pana, brāhmaṇa, ekacco pāṇātipātī hoti…pe… micchādiṭṭhiko hoti, so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā tiracchānayoniṃ upapajjati. Yo tiracchānayonikānaṃ sattānaṃ āhāro, tena so tattha yāpeti, tena so tattha tiṭṭhati. Idampi kho, brāhmaṇa, aṭṭhānaṃ, yattha ṭhitassa taṃ dānaṃ na upakappati.

"But here, Brahmin, someone is a killer of living beings…pe… is of wrong view; on the dissolution of the body, after death, he is reborn in the animal realm. The food of beings in the animal realm, with that he lives there, with that he remains there. This too, Brahmin, is a non-instance, where the gift does not accrue to one who is situated there.

‘‘Idha pana, brāhmaṇa, ekacco pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti…pe… sammādiṭṭhiko hoti, so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā manussānaṃ sahabyataṃ upapajjati…pe… devānaṃ sahabyataṃ upapajjati. Yo devānaṃ āhāro, tena so tattha yāpeti, tena so tattha tiṭṭhati. Idampi kho, brāhmaṇa, aṭṭhānaṃ, yattha ṭhitassa taṃ dānaṃ na upakappati.

"But here, Brahmin, someone abstains from killing living beings…pe… is of right view; on the dissolution of the body, after death, he is reborn into the company of humans…pe… is reborn into the company of devas. The food of devas, with that he lives there, with that he remains there. This too, Brahmin, is a non-instance, where the gift does not accrue to one who is situated there.

‘‘Idha pana, brāhmaṇa, ekacco pāṇātipātī hoti…pe… micchādiṭṭhiko hoti, so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā pettivisayaṃ upapajjati. Yo pettivisayikānaṃ sattānaṃ āhāro, tena so tattha yāpeti, tena so tattha tiṭṭhati. Yaṃ vā panassa ito anupavecchenti mittāmaccā vā ñātisālohitā vā, tena so tattha yāpeti, tena so tattha tiṭṭhati. Idaṃ kho, brāhmaṇa, ṭhānaṃ, yattha ṭhitassa taṃ dānaṃ upakappatī’’ti.

"But here, Brahmin, someone is a killer of living beings…pe… is of wrong view; on the dissolution of the body, after death, he is reborn in the realm of the departed. The food of beings in the realm of the departed, with that he lives there, with that he remains there. Or whatever is given after him from here by friends, companions, or relatives and blood relatives, with that he lives there, with that he remains there. This, Brahmin, is an instance where the gift accrues to one who is situated there."

‘‘Sace pana, bho gotama, so peto ñātisālohito taṃ ṭhānaṃ anupapanno hoti, ko taṃ dānaṃ paribhuñjatī’’ti? ‘‘Aññepissa, brāhmaṇa, petā ñātisālohitā taṃ ṭhānaṃ upapannā honti, te taṃ dānaṃ paribhuñjantī’’ti.

"But if, Gotama, that departed relative and blood relative has not arisen in that instance, who partakes of that gift?" "There are other departed relatives and blood relatives, Brahmin, who have arisen in that instance; they partake of that gift."

‘‘Sace pana, bho gotama, so ceva peto ñātisālohito taṃ ṭhānaṃ anupapanno hoti, aññepissa petā ñātisālohitā taṃ ṭhānaṃ anupapannā honti, ko taṃ dānaṃ paribhuñjatī’’ti? ‘‘Aṭṭhānaṃ kho etaṃ, brāhmaṇa, anavakāso, yaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ vivittaṃ assa iminā dīghena addhunā yadidaṃ petehi ñātisālohitehi, apica, brāhmaṇa, dāyakopi anipphalo’’ti (a. ni. 10.177).

"But if, Gotama, that departed relative and blood relative has not arisen in that instance, and other departed relatives and blood relatives have also not arisen in that instance, who partakes of that gift?" "That, Brahmin, is an impossibility, an unlikely occurrence, that that instance would be devoid of departed relatives and blood relatives throughout this long time. Moreover, Brahmin, the donor is also not fruitless" (AN 10.177).

19.Idāni pettivisayūpapannānaṃ tattha aññassa kasigorakkhādino sampattipaṭilābhakāraṇassa abhāvaṃ ito dinnena yāpanañca dassetuṃ‘‘na hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.

19. Now, to show that there is no other cause for obtaining wealth for those who have arisen in the realm of the departed, such as farming or cattle-rearing, and that they survive by what is given from here, "na hi" etc., was said.

na hi tattha kasi atthīti tasmiṃ pettivisaye kasi na hi atthi, yaṃ nissāya petā sukhena jīveyyuṃ.Gorakkhettha na vijjatīti ettha pettivisaye na kevalaṃ kasiyeva natthi, atha kho gorakkhāpi na vijjati, yaṃ nissāya te sukhena jīveyyuṃ.Vaṇijjā tādisī natthīti vaṇijjāpi tādisī natthi, yā tesaṃ sampattipaṭilābhahetu bhaveyya.Hiraññena kayākayanti hiraññena kayavikkayampi tattha tādisaṃ natthi, yaṃ tesaṃ sampattipaṭilābhahetu bhaveyya.Ite dinnena yāpenti, petā kālagatā tahinti kevalaṃ pana ito ñātīhi vā mittāmaccehi vā dinnena yāpenti, attabhāvaṃ pavattenti.Petāti pettivisayūpapannā sattā.Kālagatāti attano maraṇakālena gatā. ‘‘Kālakatā’’ti vā pāṭho, katakālā katamaraṇā maraṇaṃ sampattā.Tahinti tasmiṃ pettivisaye.

Na hi tattha kasi atthī means in that realm of the departed, there is indeed no farming, relying on which the departed could live happily. Gorakkhettha na vijjatī means in this realm of the departed, not only is there no farming, but there is also no cattle-rearing, relying on which they could live happily. Vaṇijjā tādisī natthī means there is no such trade that would be a cause for them to obtain wealth. Hiraññena kayākayaṃ means there is no such buying and selling with money there that would be a cause for them to obtain wealth. Ito dinnena yāpenti, petā kālagatā tahiṃ means they survive only by what is given by relatives or friends and companions, they maintain their existence. Petā means beings who have arisen in the realm of the departed. Kālagatā means those who have passed away at the time of their death. Alternatively, there is the reading "kālakatā," meaning those who have completed their time, who have died, who have reached death. Tahiṃ means in that realm of the departed.

20-21.Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ upamāhi pakāsetuṃ‘‘unname udakaṃ vuṭṭha’’nti gāthādvayamāha. Tassattho – yathā unname thale unnatappadese meghehi abhivuṭṭhaṃ udakaṃ yathā ninnaṃ pavattati, yo bhūmibhāgo ninno oṇato, taṃ upagacchati; evameva ito dinnaṃ dānaṃ petānaṃ upakappati, phaluppattiyā viniyujjati. Ninnamiva hi udakappavattiyā ṭhānaṃ petaloko dānūpakappanāya. Yathāha – ‘‘idaṃ kho, brāhmaṇa, ṭhānaṃ, yattha ṭhitassa taṃ dānaṃ upakappatī’’ti (a. ni. 10.177). Yathā ca kandarapadarasākhapasākhakusobbhamahāsobbhe hi ogalitena udakena vārivahā mahānajjo pūrā hutvā sāgaraṃ paripūrenti, evaṃ ito dinnadānaṃ pubbe vuttanayena petānaṃ upakappatīti.

20-21. Now, to explain the aforementioned meaning with similes, he speaks the two verses "unname udakaṃ vuṭṭhaṃ". Their meaning is: Just as water rained down by clouds in an elevated area flows down to a low-lying area, reaching that part of the ground that is low and inclined; even so, the gift given from here accrues to the departed, it is applied to the arising of results. For the world of the departed is like a low-lying place for the flowing of water, for the accrual of gifts. As he said, "This, Brahmin, is an instance where the gift accrues to one who is situated there" (AN 10.177). And just as rivers and great rivers are filled by water flowing down through hollows, foothills, branches, twigs, puddles, and great puddles, and they fill the ocean; even so, the gift given from here accrues to the departed in the manner previously described.

22.Yasmā petā ‘‘ito kiñci labhāmā’’ti āsābhibhūtā ñātigharaṃ āgantvāpi ‘‘idaṃ nāma no dethā’’ti yācituṃ na sakkonti, tasmā tesaṃ imāni anussaraṇavatthūni anussaranto kulaputto dakkhiṇaṃ dajjāti dassento‘‘adāsi me’’ti gāthamāha.

22. Because the departed, overcome by hope, come to the house of relatives thinking, "We might receive something from here," but are unable to ask, "Give this to us," therefore, remembering these objects of recollection for them, the son of good family should give a donation, showing this, he speaks the verse "adāsi me".

ñāti,sinehavasena tāṇasamatthatāyamitto,asuko me sahapaṃsukīḷakasahāyosakhā’’ti ca etaṃ sabbamanussaranto petānaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ dajjā dānaṃ niyyāteyya. ‘‘Dakkhiṇā dajjā’’ti vā pāṭho, petānaṃ dakkhiṇā dātabbā, tena ‘‘adāsi me’’tiādinā nayena pubbe katamanussaraṃ anussaratāti vuttaṃ hoti. Karaṇatthe hi idaṃ paccattavacanaṃ.

Remembering that so-and-so was a relative, due to affection and ability to protect, a friend, so-and-so was a playmate from childhood, a companion - remembering all this, one should give a donation to the departed, one should bestow a gift. Alternatively, there is the reading "dakkhiṇā dajjā," a donation should be given to the departed, thus, it is said that one should remember what was done in the past in the manner of "adāsi me" etc. For this locative case is in the sense of instrument.

23-24.Ye pana sattā ñātimaraṇena ruṇṇasokādiparā eva hutvā tiṭṭhanti, na tesaṃ atthāya kiñci denti, tesaṃ taṃ ruṇṇasokādi kevalaṃ attaparitāpanamattameva hoti, taṃ na petānaṃ kañci atthaṃ sādhetīti dassento‘‘na hi ruṇṇaṃ vā’’ti gāthaṃ vatvā puna magadharājena dinnadakkhiṇāya sātthakabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ayañca kho’’ti gāthamāha. Tesaṃ attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.

23-24. Those beings, however, who remain overcome with weeping and sorrow at the death of a relative, and do not give anything for their benefit, their weeping and sorrow are merely self-torment, and do not accomplish any benefit for the departed, showing this, having spoken the verse "na hi ruṇṇaṃ vā", and then to show the meaningfulness of the donation given by King Magadha, he speaks the verse "ayañca kho". Their meaning has already been said below.

25.Idāni yasmā imaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ dentena raññā ñātīnaṃ ñātīhi kattabbakiccakaraṇena ñātidhammo nidassito, bahujanassa pākaṭo kato, nidassanaṃ pākaṭaṃ kataṃ ‘‘tumhehipi evameva ñātīsu ñātidhammo paripūretabbo’’ti. Te ca pete dibbasampattiṃ adhigamentena petānaṃ pūjā katā uḷārā, buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ annapānādīhi santappentena bhikkhūnaṃ balaṃ anuppadinnaṃ, anukampādiguṇaparivārañca cāgacetanaṃ nibbattentena anappakaṃ puññaṃ pasutaṃ, tasmā bhagavā imehi yathābhuccaguṇehi rājānaṃ sampahaṃsento‘‘so ñātidhammo’’ti osānagāthamāha.

25. Now, because by giving this donation, the king has shown the duty of relatives towards relatives by doing what should be done for relatives, has made it evident to many people, has made a demonstration clear, "You too should fulfill the duty of relatives towards relatives in this very way," and by the fact that those departed ones attained divine wealth, an offering to the departed has been made that is excellent, by satisfying the Saṅgha of monks headed by the Buddha with food and drink, strength has been given to the monks, and by generating a disposition of generosity surrounded by compassion and other virtues, no small amount of merit has been accumulated, therefore, the Blessed One, delighting the king with these virtues as they truly are, speaks the concluding verse "so ñātidhammo".

ñātidhammoti ñātīhi ñātīnaṃ kattabbakaraṇaṃ.Uḷārāti phītā samiddhā.Balanti kāyabalaṃ.Pasutanti upacitaṃ. Ettha ca‘‘so ñātidhammo ca ayaṃ nidassito’’ti etena bhagavā rājānaṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi. Ñātidhammadassanañhettha sandassanaṃ.‘‘Petāna pūjā ca katā uḷārā’’ti iminā samādapesi. ‘‘Uḷārā’’ti pasaṃsanañhettha punappunaṃ pūjākaraṇe samādapanaṃ.‘‘Balañca bhikkhūnamanuppadinna’’nti iminā samuttejesi. Bhikkhūnaṃ balānuppadānañhettha evaṃvidhānaṃ balānuppadāne ussāhavaḍḍhanena samuttejanaṃ.‘‘Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappaka’’nti iminā sampahaṃsesi. Puññapasavanakittanañhettha tassa yathābhuccaguṇasaṃvaṇṇanabhāvena sampahaṃsananti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.

Ñātidhammo means the doing of what should be done by relatives for relatives. Uḷārā means abundant and prosperous. Balaṃ means physical strength. Pasutaṃ means accumulated. And here, with "so ñātidhammo ca ayaṃ nidassito," the Blessed One encouraged the king with a Dhamma talk. For showing the duty to relatives is encouragement here. With "Petāna pūjā ca katā uḷārā," he exhorted him. "Uḷārā" is praise, and here it is exhortation to repeatedly make offerings. With "Balañca bhikkhūnamanuppadinnaṃ," he roused him. Giving strength to the monks is encouragement here by increasing enthusiasm in giving strength of this kind. With "Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakaṃ," he delighted him. Mentioning the accumulation of merit is delighting him here by praising his virtues as they truly are; thus the connection should be understood in this way.

Desanāpariyosāne ca pettivisayūpapattiādīnavasaṃvaṇṇanena saṃviggahadayānaṃ yoniso padahataṃ caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Dutiyadivasepi devamanussānaṃ idameva tirokuṭṭadesanaṃ desesi. Evaṃ yāva satta divasā tādisova dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.

At the conclusion of the discourse, for the eighty-four thousand beings whose hearts were stirred by the description of the drawbacks of rebirth in the realm of the departed, and who applied themselves wisely, there was the attainment of Dhamma. On the second day also, he preached this very Tirokuṭṭa discourse to devas and humans. Thus, for seven days, there was the same attainment of Dhamma.

Tirokuṭṭapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Tirokuṭṭa Petavatthu is finished.

6. Pañcaputtakhādakapetivatthuvaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Pañcaputtakhādakapetivatthu

Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsīti idaṃ satthari sāvatthiyaṃ viharante pañcaputtakhādakapetiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Sāvatthiyā kira avidūre gāmake aññatarassa kuṭumbikassa bhariyā vañjhā ahosi. Tassa ñātakā etadavocuṃ – ‘‘tava pajāpati vañjhā, aññaṃ te kaññaṃ ānemā’’ti. So tasso bhariyāya sinehena na icchi. Athassa bhariyā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā sāmikaṃ evamāha – ‘‘sāmi, ahaṃ vañjhā, aññā kaññā ānetabbā, mā te kulavaṃso upacchijjī’’ti. So tāya nippīḷiyamāno aññaṃ kaññaṃ ānesi. Sā aparena samayena gabbhinī ahosi. Vañjhitthī – ‘‘ayaṃ puttaṃ labhitvā imassa gehassa issarā bhavissatī’’ti issāpakatā tassā gabbhapātanūpāyaṃ pariyesantī aññataraṃ paribbājikaṃ annapānādīhi saṅgaṇhitvā tāya tassā gabbhapātanaṃ dāpesi. Sā gabbhe patite attano mātuyā ārocesi, mātā attano ñātake samodhānetvā tamatthaṃ nivedesi. Te vañjhitthiṃ etadavocuṃ – ‘‘tayā imissā gabbho pātito’’ti? ‘‘Nāhaṃ pātemī’’ti. ‘‘Sace tayā gabbho na pātito, sapathaṃ karohī’’ti. ‘‘Sace mayā gabbho pātito, duggatiparāyaṇā khuppipāsābhibhūtā sāyaṃ pātaṃ pañca pañca putte vijāyitvā khāditvā tittiṃ na gaccheyyaṃ, niccaṃ duggandhā makkhikāparikiṇṇā ca bhaveyya’’nti musā vatvā sapathaṃ akāsi. Sā nacirasseva kālaṃ katvā tasseva gāmassa avidūre dubbaṇṇarūpā petī hutvā nibbatti.

Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsī (Naked, you are of unsightly form): This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Sāvatthi, concerning a female peta who eats her five children. It is said that not far from Sāvatthi, in a certain village, the wife of a certain householder was barren. His relatives said to him, "Your wife is barren; let us bring you another maiden." He did not want to because of his affection for his wife. Then his wife, hearing of this matter, said to her husband, "Master, I am barren; another maiden should be brought, lest your lineage be cut off." Urged on by her, he brought another maiden. In due course, she became pregnant. The barren woman, thinking, "Having obtained a son, she will become the mistress of this house," sought a means to cause her abortion, influenced by jealousy. Having ingratiated herself with a certain female ascetic with food and drink, she had her cause the abortion. When the foetus was aborted, she reported it to her mother, and her mother gathered her relatives and reported the matter. They said to the barren woman, "You caused this abortion?" "I did not cause it." "If you did not cause the abortion, take an oath." "If I caused the abortion, may I, destined for a woeful state, overcome by hunger and thirst, give birth to five children every evening and morning, eat them, and not be satisfied, and may I always be foul-smelling and swarming with flies," she lied and took an oath. Not long after, she died and was reborn as a peta of unsightly form not far from that same village.

Tadā janapade vutthavassā aṭṭha therā satthu dassanatthaṃ sāvatthiṃ āgacchantā tassa gāmassa avidūre chāyūdakasampanne araññaṭṭhāne vāsaṃ upagacchiṃsu. Atha sā petī therānaṃ attānaṃ dassesi. Tesu saṅghatthero taṃ petiṃ –

At that time, eight elders who had spent the rainy season in the countryside, coming to Sāvatthi to see the Teacher, took up residence in a forest place abundant with shade and water not far from that village. Then that peta showed herself to the elders. Among them, the Saṅghathera (Elder of the Sangha) said to that peta:

26.

26.

‘‘Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsi, duggandhā pūti vāyasi;

"Naked, you are of unsightly form, foul-smelling, you stink;
Swarming with flies, what are you standing here?"

naggāti niccoḷā.Dubbaṇṇarūpāsīti ṇavirūpā ativiya bībhaccharūpena samannāgatā asi.Duggandhāti aniṭṭhagandhā.Pūti vāyasīti sarīrato kuṇapagandhaṃ vāyasi.Makkhikāhi parikiṇṇāti nīlamakkhikāhi samantato ākiṇṇā.Kā nu tvaṃ idha tiṭṭhasīti kā nāma evarūpā imasmiṃ ṭhāne tiṭṭhasi, ito cito ca vicarasīti attho.

Naggā: naked, unclothed. Dubbaṇṇarūpāsī: you are of disfigured form, possessing a very repulsive appearance. Duggandhā: foul-smelling, having an unpleasant odour. Pūti vāyasī: you emit the stench of a corpse from your body. Makkhikāhi parikiṇṇā: swarming all over with blue flies. Kā nu tvaṃ idha tiṭṭhasī: what kind of being are you, standing in this place, wandering here and there? This is the meaning.

Atha sā petī mahātherena evaṃ puṭṭhā attānaṃ pakāsentī sattānaṃ saṃvegaṃ janentī –

Then that peta, being asked thus by the great elder, revealing herself and generating a sense of urgency in beings:

27.

27.

‘‘Ahaṃ bhadante petīmhi, duggatā yamalokikā;

"Venerable sir, I am a peta, destined for a woeful state, belonging to the realm of Yama;
Having done evil deeds, I have gone from here to the peta-world.

28.

28.

‘‘Kālena pañca puttāni, sāyaṃ pañca punāpare;

"At one time five children, and again five others in the evening;
Having given birth, I eat them, yet they are not enough for me.

29.

29.

‘‘Pariḍayhati dhūmāyati, khudāya hadayaṃ mama;

"My heart burns, it smokes, with hunger;
I do not get water to drink, see me fallen into misfortune."

Imā tisso gāthā abhāsi.

She spoke these three verses.

27.Tatthabhadanteti theraṃ gāravena ālapati.Duggatāti duggatiṃ gatā.Yamalokikāti ‘‘yamaloko’’ti laddhanāme petaloke tattha pariyāpannabhāvena viditā.Ito gatāti ito manussalokato petalokaṃ upapajjanavasena gatā, upapannāti attho.

27. There, bhadante: "Venerable Sir," she addresses the elder with respect. Duggatā: gone to a woeful state. Yamalokikā: known as "belonging to the realm of Yama," being included in that peta-world. Ito gatā: gone from this human world to the peta-world by way of rebirth, reborn, is the meaning.

28.Kālenāti rattiyā vibhātakāle. Bhummatthe hi etaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ.Pañca puttānīti pañca putte. Liṅgavipallāsena hetaṃ vuttaṃ.Sāyaṃ pañca punāpareti sāyanhakāle puna apare pañca putte khādāmīti yojanā.Vijāyitvānāti divase divase dasa dasa putte vijāyitvā.Tepi nā honti me alanti tepi dasaputtā ekadivasaṃ mayhaṃ khudāya paṭighātāya ahaṃ pariyattā na honti. Gāthāsukhatthañhettha nā-iti dīghaṃ katvā vuttaṃ.

28. Kālena: at the time of the breaking of the night. This is a locative used in the sense of an instrument. Pañca puttānī: five children. This is said with a gender irregularity. Sāyaṃ pañca punāpare: in the evening, again I eat another five children, is the construction. Vijāyitvāna: having given birth to ten children each day. Tepi nā honti me alaṃ: even those ten children are not sufficient for me in a single day to counteract my hunger. Here, nā- is said having been lengthened for the sake of ease in the verse.

29.Pariḍayhati dhūmāyati khudāya hadayaṃ mamāti khudāya jighacchāya bādhiyamānāya mama hadayapadeso udaragginā parisamantato jhāyati dhūmāyati santappati.Pānīyaṃ na labhe pātunti pipāsābhibhūtā tattha tattha vicarantī pānīyampi pātuṃ na labhāmi.Passa maṃ byasanaṃ gatanti petūpapattiyā sādhāraṇaṃ asādhāraṇañca imaṃ īdisaṃ byasanaṃ upagataṃ maṃ passa, bhanteti attanā anubhaviyamānaṃ dukkhaṃ therassa pavedesi.

29. Pariḍayhati dhūmāyati khudāya hadayaṃ mamā: my heart-region is completely burned, smokes, and is tormented by the fire of the stomach, being oppressed by hunger and craving. Pānīyaṃ na labhe pātuṃ: overcome with thirst, wandering here and there, I do not obtain water to drink. Passa maṃ byasanaṃ gata: see me, venerable sir, who have come to such misfortune, both common and uncommon to the peta existence, she reported the suffering she was experiencing to the elder.

Taṃ sutvā thero tāya katakammaṃ pucchanto –

Having heard that, the elder, asking about the deed she had done:

30.

30.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil have you done by body, speech, or mind?
By the ripening of what karma do you eat the flesh of your children?"

dukkaṭanti duccaritaṃ.Kissa kammavipākenāti kīdisassa kammassa vipākena, kiṃ pāṇātipātassa, udāhu adinnādānādīsu aññatarassāti attho. ‘‘Kena kammavipākenā’’ti keci paṭhanti.

Dukkaṭaṃ: evil conduct. Kissa kammavipākena: by the ripening of what kind of karma, from what, killing living beings, or from another of the giving what has not been given, and so on? This is the meaning. Some read, "Kena kammavipākena?" ("By the ripening of what karma?")

Atha sā petī attanā katakammaṃ therassa kathentī –

Then that peta, relating to the elder the deed she had done:

31.

31.

‘‘Sapatī me gabbhinī āsi, tassā pāpaṃ acetayiṃ;

"My co-wife was pregnant, I devised evil against her;
I, with a corrupted mind, caused an abortion.

32.

32.

‘‘Tassa dvemāsiko gabbho, lohitaññeva pagghari;

"Her foetus of two months, just blood flowed forth;
Then her mother, angered, gathered my relatives;
And had me take an oath, and intimidated me.

33.

33.

‘‘Sāhaṃ ghorañca sapathaṃ, musāvādaṃ abhāsisaṃ;

"I took a terrible oath, I spoke a false statement;
'I will eat the flesh of my children, if I did that.'

34.

34.

‘‘Tassa kammassa vipākena, musāvādassa cūbhayaṃ;

"By the ripening of that karma, and also the false speech;
I eat the flesh of my children, smeared with pus and blood" - she spoke these verses.

31-32.Tatthasapatīti samānapatikā itthī vuccati.Tassā pāpaṃ acetayinti tassa sapatiyā pāpaṃ luddakaṃ kammaṃ acetayiṃ.Paduṭṭhamanasāti paduṭṭhacittā, paduṭṭhena vā manasā.Dvemāsikoti dvemāsajāto patiṭṭhito hutvā dvemāsikā.Lohitaññeva paggharīti vipajjamāno ruhiraññeva hutvā vissandi.Tadassā mātā kupitā, mayhaṃ ñātī samānayīti tadā assā sapatiyā mātā mayhaṃ kupitā attano ñātake samodhānesi. ‘‘Tatassā’’ti vā pāṭho, tato assāti padavibhāgo.

31-32. There, sapatī: a woman with the same husband is called a co-wife. Tassā pāpaṃ acetayiṃ: I devised an evil, cruel deed against that co-wife. Paduṭṭhamanasā: with a corrupted mind, or by a corrupted mind. Dvemāsiko: having been established, being two months old, a two-month-old foetus. Lohitaññeva paggharī: breaking up, it flowed out as just blood. Tadassā mātā kupitā, mayhaṃ ñātī samānayī: then her co-wife's mother, angered with me, gathered her relatives. Alternatively, there is the reading "Tatassā," with the word division tato assā.

33-34.Sapathanti sapanaṃ.Paribhāsāpayīti bhayena tajjāpesi.Sapathaṃ musāvādaṃ abhāsisanti ‘‘sace taṃ mayā kataṃ, īdisī bhaveyya’’nti katameva pāpaṃ akataṃ katvā dassentī musāvādaṃ abhūtaṃ sapathaṃ abhāsiṃ.Muttamaṃsāni khādāmi, sacetaṃ pakataṃ mayāti idaṃ tadā sapathassa katākāradassanaṃ. Yadi etaṃ gabbhapātanapāpaṃ mayā kataṃ, āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattiyaṃ mayhaṃ puttamaṃsāniyeva khādeyyanti attho.Tassa kammassāti tassa gabbhapātanavasena pakatassa pāṇātipātakammassa.Musāvādassa cāti musāvādakammassa ca.Ubhayanti ubhayassapi kammassa ubhayena vipākena. Karaṇatthe hi idaṃ paccattavacanaṃ.Pubbalohitamakkhitāti pasavanavasena paribhijjanavasena ca pubbena ca lohitena ca makkhitā hutvā puttamaṃsāni khādāmīti yojanā.

33-34. Sapathaṃ: an oath. Paribhāsāpayī: she intimidated me with fear. Sapathaṃ musāvādaṃ abhāsisaṃ: showing as having done a deed that she had not done, saying, "If I did that, may I be such and such," she spoke a false, untrue oath. Muttamaṃsāni khādāmi, sacetaṃ pakataṃ mayā: this is the showing of the way in which the oath was made then. If this evil of abortion was done by me, in the future, in subsequent existences, may I eat only the flesh of my children, is the meaning. Tassa kammassā: of that killing of living beings karma done by way of abortion. Musāvādassa cā: and of the karma of false speech. Ubhayaṃ: of both karmas, by the dual ripening. Here, this is a singular number used in the sense of an instrument. Pubbalohitamakkhitā: smeared with pus and blood from childbirth and from disintegration, I eat the flesh of my children, is the construction.

Evaṃ sā petī attano kammavipākaṃ pavedetvā puna there evamāha – ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, imasmiṃyeva gāme asukassa kuṭumbikassa bhariyā issāpakatā hutvā pāpakammaṃ katvā evaṃ petayoniyaṃ nibbattā. Sādhu, bhante, tassa kuṭumbikassa gehaṃ gacchatha, so tumhākaṃ dānaṃ dassati, taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ mayhaṃ uddisāpeyyātha, evaṃ me ito petalokato mutti bhavissatī’’ti. Therā taṃ sutvā taṃ anukampamānā ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitā tassa kuṭumbikassa gehaṃ piṇḍāya pavisiṃsu. Kuṭambiko there disvā sañjātappasādo paccuggantvā pattāni gahetvā there āsanesu nisīdāpetvā paṇītena āhārena bhojetuṃ ārabhi. Therā taṃ pavattiṃ kuṭumbikassa ārocetvā taṃ dānaṃ tassā petiyā uddisāpesuṃ. Taṅkhaṇaññeva ca sā petī tato dukkhato apetā uḷārasampattiṃ paṭilabhitvā rattiyaṃ kuṭumbikassa attānaṃ dassesi. Atha therā anukkamena sāvatthiṃ gantvā bhagavato tamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā ca tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Desanāvasāne mahājano paṭiladdhasaṃvego issāmaccherato paṭivirami. Evaṃ sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Having thus declared the ripening of her karma, that peta again said to the elders, "Venerable sirs, in this very village I was the wife of such and such a householder, and having committed an evil deed, influenced by jealousy, I was reborn in this peta-existence. It would be good, venerable sirs, if you would go to the house of that householder, and he will give you alms, and may you have that donation dedicated to me, thus I will have liberation from this peta-world." Having heard her words, the elders, feeling compassion for her, entering the house of that householder, established in the nature of seeking alms, for alms. The householder, seeing the elders, with joy arisen, having gone out to meet them and having taken their bowls, having had the elders sit on seats, began to feed them with delicious food. The elders related the matter to the householder and had that donation dedicated to that peta. At that very moment, that peta, freed from that suffering, having regained great prosperity, showed herself to the householder that night. Then the elders, in due course, having gone to Sāvatthi, reported that matter to the Blessed One. And the Blessed One, having made that matter the basis of a talk, taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering. At the end of the teaching, the great crowd, having regained a sense of urgency, refrained from jealousy and stinginess. Thus, that teaching was fruitful for the great crowd.

Pañcaputtakhādakapetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Story of the Peta who Eats her Five Children is Finished.

7. Sattaputtakhādakapetivatthuvaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Story of the Peta Who Eats her Seven Children

Naggādubbaṇṇarūpāsīti idaṃ satthari sāvatthiyaṃ viharante sattaputtakhādakapetiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Sāvatthiyā kira avidūre aññatarasmiṃ gāmake aññatarassa upāsakassa dve puttā ahesuṃ – paṭhamavaye ṭhitā rūpasampannā sīlācārena samannāgatā. Tesaṃ mātā ‘‘puttavatī aha’’nti puttabalena bhattāraṃ atimaññati. So bhariyāya avamānito nibbinnamānaso aññaṃ kaññaṃ ānesi. Sā nacirasseva gabbhinī ahosi. Athassa jeṭṭhabhariyā issāpakatā aññataraṃ vejjaṃ āmisena upalāpetvā tena tassā temāsikaṃ gabbhaṃ pātesi. Atha sā ñātīhi ca bhattārā ca ‘‘tayā imissā gabbho pātito’’ti puṭṭhā ‘‘nāhaṃ pātemī’’ti musā vatvā tehi asaddahantehi ‘‘sapathaṃ karohī’’ti vuttā ‘‘sāyaṃ pātaṃ satta satta putte vijāyitvā puttamaṃsāni khādāmi, niccaṃ duggandhā ca makkhikāparikiṇṇā ca bhaveyya’’nti sapathaṃ akāsi.

Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsī (Naked, you are of unsightly form): This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Sāvatthi, concerning a female peta who eats her seven children. It is said that not far from Sāvatthi, in a certain village, a certain lay follower had two sons – established in their early years, endowed with beauty, possessing morality and good conduct. Their mother, thinking, "I have sons," disdained her husband by the strength of her sons. He, despised by his wife, with a disheartened mind, brought another maiden. In due course, she became pregnant. Then his first wife, influenced by jealousy, having flattered a certain physician with a bribe, had him abort her three-month-old foetus. Then, asked by her relatives and her husband, "You caused this abortion?" she lied, saying, "I did not cause it." When they did not believe her, being told, "Take an oath," she took an oath, saying, "Every evening and morning may I give birth to seven children and eat the flesh of my children, and may I always be foul-smelling and swarming with flies."

Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tassa gabbhapātanassa musāvādassa ca phaleneva petayoniyaṃ nibbattitvā puttanayena puttamaṃsāni khādantī tasseva gāmassa avidūre vicarati. Tena ca samayena sambahulā therā gāmakāvāse vutthavassā bhagavantaṃ dassanāya sāvatthiṃ āgacchantā tassa gāmassa avidūre ekasmiṃ padese rattiyaṃ vāsaṃ kappesuṃ. Atha sā petī tesaṃ therānaṃ attānaṃ dassesi. Taṃ mahāthero gāthāya pucchi –

Not long after, she died and, as a result of that abortion and false speech, having been reborn in the peta-existence, eating the flesh of her children in each birth, she wandered not far from that very village. And at that time, many elders who had spent the rainy season in a village dwelling, coming to Sāvatthi to see the Blessed One, spent the night in a certain place not far from that village. Then that peta showed herself to those elders. The great elder asked her in a verse:

35.

35.

‘‘Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsi, duggandhā pūti vāyasi;

"Naked, you are of unsightly form, foul-smelling, you stink;
Swarming with flies, what are you standing here?"

Sā therena puṭṭhā tīhi gāthāhi paṭivacanaṃ adāsi –

Asked by the elder, she gave a reply in three verses:

36.

36.

‘‘Ahaṃ bhadante petīmhi, duggatā yamalokikā;

"Venerable sir, I am a peta, destined for a woeful state, belonging to the realm of Yama;
Having done evil deeds, I have gone from here to the peta-world.

37.

37.

‘‘Kālena satta puttāni, sāyaṃ satta punāpare;

"At one time seven children, and again seven others in the evening;
Having given birth, I eat them, yet they are not enough for me.

38.

38.

‘‘Pariḍayhati dhūmāyati, khudāya hadayaṃ mama;

"My heart burns, it smokes, with hunger;
I do not attain coolness, like one burned by fire in the heat."

38.Tatthanibbutinti khuppipāsādukkhassa vūpasamaṃ.Nādhigacchāmīti na labhāmi.Aggidaḍḍhāva ātapeti atiuṇhaātape agginā ḍayhamānā viya nibbutiṃ nādhigacchāmīti yojanā.

38. There, nibbutiṃ: the subsiding of the suffering of hunger and thirst. Nādhigacchāmi: I do not obtain. Aggidaḍḍhāva ātape: like one burned by fire in the very hot heat, I do not attain coolness, is the construction.

Taṃ sutvā mahāthero tāya katakammaṃ pucchanto –

Having heard that, the great elder, asking about the deed she had done:

39.

39.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil have you done by body, speech, or mind?
By the ripening of what karma do you eat the flesh of your children?" - he spoke the verse.

Atha sā petī attano petalokūpapattiñca puttamaṃsakhādanakāraṇañca kathentī –

Then that peta, relating her rebirth in the peta-world and the reason for eating the flesh of her children:

40.

40.

‘‘Ahū mayhaṃ duve puttā, ubho sampattayobbanā;

"I had two sons, both attained to youth;
I, devoid of the strength of sons, disdained my husband.

41.

41.

‘‘Tato me sāmiko kuddho, sapatiṃ mayhamānayi;

"Then my husband, angered, brought me a co-wife;
And she conceived, I devised evil against her.

42.

42.

‘‘Sāhaṃ paduṭṭhamanasā, akariṃ gabbhapātanaṃ;

"I, with a corrupted mind, caused an abortion;
Her foetus of three months fell as foul blood.

43.

43.

‘‘Tadassā mātā kupitā, mayhaṃ ñātī samānayi;

"Then her mother, angered, gathered my relatives;
And had me take an oath, and intimidated me.

44.

44.

‘‘Sāhaṃ ghorañca sapathaṃ, musāvādaṃ abhāsisaṃ;

"I took a terrible oath, I spoke a false statement;
'I will eat the flesh of my children, if I did that.'

45.

45.

‘‘Tassa kammassa vipākena, musāvādassa cūbhayaṃ;

"By the result of that deed, and also of the lying, I eat my children's flesh, smeared with pus and blood." Thus, she spoke these verses;

40-45.Tatthaputtabalūpetāti puttabalena upetā, puttānaṃ vasena laddhabalā.Atimaññisanti atikkamitvā maññiṃ avamaññiṃ.Pūtilohitako patīti kuṇapalohitaṃ hutvā gabbho paripati. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ anantarasadisameva. Tattha aṭṭha therā, idha sambahulā. Tattha pañca puttā, idha sattāti ayameva visesoti.

40-45.There, puttabalūpetā means endowed with the strength of sons, having gained strength through her sons. Atimaññisaṃ means having exceeded in contempt, I disrespected. Pūtilohitako patī means the embryo falls as decaying blood. The rest is all similar to the preceding. There, eight elders were mentioned, here, many. There, five sons were mentioned, here, seven; this alone is the difference.

Sattaputtakhādakapetivatthuvaṇṇānā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Story of the Female Petī Who Ate Seven Sons is Concluded.

8. Goṇapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Story of the Cow Petā

Kiṃnu ummattarūpo vāti idaṃ satthā jetavane viharanto aññataraṃ matapitikaṃ kuṭumbikaṃ ārabbha kathesi. Sāvatthiyaṃ kira aññatarassa kuṭumbikassa pitā kālamakāsi. So pitu maraṇena sokasantattahadayo rodamāno ummattako piya vicaranto yaṃ yaṃ passati, taṃ taṃ pucchati – ‘‘api me pitaraṃ passitthā’’ti? Na koci tassa sokaṃ vinodetuṃ asakkhi. Tassa pana hadaye ghaṭe padīpo viya sotāpattiphalassa upanissayo pajjalati.

Kiṃ nu ummattarūpo vā This the Teacher spoke while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning a certain householder whose parents had died. It is said that in Sāvatthī, a certain householder's father passed away. Distraught with grief at his father's death, he wandered around like a madman, crying and asking everyone he saw, "Have you seen my father?" No one was able to dispel his sorrow. However, in his heart, like a lamp in a jar, the underlying condition for the fruit of stream-entry was ablaze.

Satthā paccūsasamaye lokaṃ olokento tassa sotāpattiphalassa upanissayaṃ disvā ‘‘imassa atītakāraṇaṃ āharitvā sokaṃ vūpasametvā sotāpattiphalaṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cintetvā punadivase pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto pacchāsamaṇaṃ anādāya tassa gharadvāraṃ agamāsi. So ‘‘satthā āgato’’ti sutvā paccuggantvā satthāraṃ gehaṃ pavesetvā satthari paññatte āsane nisinne sayaṃ bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisinno ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, mayhaṃ pitu gataṭṭhānaṃ jānāthā’’ti āha. Atha naṃ satthā, ‘‘upāsaka, kiṃ imasmiṃ attabhāve pitaraṃ pucchasi, udāhu atīte’’ti āha. So taṃ vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘bahū kira mayhaṃ pitaro’’ti tanubhūtasoko thokaṃ majjhattataṃ paṭilabhi. Athassa satthā sokavinodanaṃ dhammakathaṃ katvā apagatasokaṃ kallacittaṃ viditvā sāmukkaṃsikāya dhammadesanāya sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpetvā vihāraṃ agamāsi.

The Teacher, surveying the world at dawn, saw the underlying condition for his attainment of stream-entry and thought, "It is fitting to bring forth the past cause for this person, to calm his sorrow, and grant him the fruit of stream-entry." The next day, after the meal, having returned from his alms round, without taking a following ascetic, he went to the door of his house. That man, hearing that the Teacher had arrived, went out to meet him, led the Teacher into his house, and when the Teacher was seated on the prepared seat, he paid homage to the Blessed One and sat down to one side. He then asked, "Venerable Sir, do you know where my father has gone?" Then the Teacher said to him, "Lay follower, are you asking about your father in this present existence, or in the past?" Hearing that statement, his sorrow diminished, thinking, "Indeed, I have had many fathers," and he regained a little composure. Then the Teacher, having given a Dhamma talk to dispel his sorrow, knowing that his sorrow was gone and his mind was receptive, established him in the fruit of stream-entry with a progressive Dhamma talk and went to the monastery.

Atha bhikkhū dhammasabhāyaṃ kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ – ‘‘passatha, āvuso, buddhānubhāvaṃ, tathā sokaparidevasamāpanno upāsako khaṇeneva bhagavatā sotāpattiphale vinīto’’ti. Satthā tattha gantvā paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinno ‘‘kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā’’ti pucchi. Bhikkhū tamatthaṃ bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Satthā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, idāneva mayā imassa soko apanīto, pubbepi apanītoyevā’’ti vatvā tehi yācito atītaṃ āhari.

Then the monks started a discussion in the Dhamma hall: "Behold, friends, the power of the Buddha! The lay follower who was overwhelmed with sorrow and lamentation was led to the fruit of stream-entry in an instant by the Blessed One." The Teacher went there, sat down on the excellent Buddha seat prepared for him, and asked, "What is the topic you are discussing now, monks?" The monks told the Blessed One the matter. The Teacher said, "Monks, it is not only now that I have removed his sorrow; I have removed it before as well," and when requested by them, he related the past.

Atīte bārāṇasiyaṃ aññatarassa gahapatikassa pitā kālamakāsi. So pitu maraṇena sokaparidevasamāpanno assumukho rattakkho kandanto citakaṃ padakkhiṇaṃ karoti. Tassa putto sujāto nāma kumāro paṇḍito byatto buddhisampanno pitusokavinayanūpāyaṃ cintento ekadivasaṃ bahinagare ekaṃ matagoṇaṃ disvā tiṇañca pānīyañca āharitvā tassa purato ṭhapetvā ‘‘khāda, khāda, piva, pivā’’ti vadanto aṭṭhāsi. Āgatāgatā taṃ disvā ‘‘samma sujāta, kiṃ ummattakosi, yo tvaṃ matassa goṇassa tiṇodakaṃ upanesī’’ti vadanti? So na kiñci paṭivadati. Manussā tassa pitu santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘putto te ummattako jāto, matagoṇassa tiṇodakaṃ detī’’ti āhaṃsu. Taṃ sutvā ca kuṭumbikassa pitaraṃ ārabbha ṭhito soko apagato. So ‘‘mayhaṃ kira putto ummattako jāto’’ti saṃvegappatto vegena gantvā ‘‘nanu tvaṃ, tāta sujāta, paṇḍito byatto buddhisampanno, kasmā matagoṇassa tiṇodakaṃ desī’’ti codento –

In the past, in Bārāṇasī, a certain householder's father passed away. Overwhelmed with sorrow and lamentation at his father's death, with tearful face and reddened eyes, he circled the funeral pyre, weeping. His son, a young man named Sujāta, wise, intelligent, and endowed with understanding, thinking of a way to dispel his father's sorrow, one day saw a dead cow outside the city. He brought grass and water and placed them in front of it, and stood there saying, "Eat, eat! Drink, drink!" Those who came and went, seeing him, said, "Good Sujāta, are you mad, that you bring grass and water to a dead cow?" He did not reply to anything. People went to his father and said, "Your son has become mad; he is giving grass and water to a dead cow." Hearing that, the sorrow that the householder had concerning his father disappeared. Feeling agitated that "My son has become mad," he quickly went and, rebuking him, said, "Indeed, Sujāta, are you wise, intelligent, and endowed with understanding? Why do you give grass and water to a dead cow?" –

46.

46.

‘‘Kiṃ nu ummattarūpova, lāyitvā haritaṃ tiṇaṃ;

"Are you mad, having cut green grass,
Do you keep saying, ‘Eat, eat,’ to a decrepit ox that is devoid of life?

47.

47.

‘‘Na hi annena pānena, mato goṇo samuṭṭhahe;

"A dead ox does not rise up with food and drink;
You are foolish and unwise, just like any other fool." –

kiṃ nūti pucchāvacanaṃ.Ummattarūpovāti ummattakasabhāvo viya cittakkhepaṃ patto viya.Lāyitvāti lavitvā.Haritaṃ tiṇanti allatiṇaṃ.Lapasivilapasi.Gatasattanti vigatajīvitaṃ.Jaraggavanti balibaddaṃ jiṇṇagoṇaṃ.Annena pānenāti tayā dinnena haritatiṇena vā pānīyena vā.Mato goṇo samuṭṭhaheti kālakato goṇo laddhajīvito hutvā na hi samuṭṭhaheyya.Tvaṃsi bālo ca dummedhoti tvaṃ bālyayogato bālo, medhāsaṅkhātāya paññāya abhāvato dummedho asi.Yathā taññova dummatīti yathā taṃ aññopi nippañño vippalapeyya, evaṃ tvaṃ niratthakaṃ vippalapasīti attho. Yathā tanti nipātamattaṃ.

kiṃ nu is a word of questioning. Ummattarūpo vā means as if of a mad nature, as if having reached a mental derangement. Lāyitvā means having cut. Haritaṃ tiṇaṃ means fresh grass. Lapasi means you babble. Gatasattaṃ means devoid of life. Jaraggavaṃ means an old ox, a decrepit cow. Annena pānenā means by the green grass or water given by you. Mato goṇo samuṭṭhahe means a dead ox would not rise up, having regained life. Tvaṃsi bālo ca dummedho means you are a fool due to foolishness, and unwise due to the absence of wisdom. Yathā taññova dummatī means just as any other unintelligent person would babble, so you are babbling meaninglessly. Yathā is merely a particle.

Taṃ sutvā sujāto pitaraṃ saññāpetuṃ attano adhippāyaṃ pakāsento –

Having heard that, Sujāta, revealing his intention to make his father understand –

48.

48.

‘‘Ime pādā idaṃ sīsaṃ, ayaṃ kāyo savāladhi;

"These legs, this head, this body with the tail;
The eyes remain just the same; this ox should rise up.

49.

49.

‘‘Nāyyakassa hatthapādā, kāyo sīsañca dissati;

"The hands, feet, body, and head of my grandfather are not seen;
Weeping at a mound of clay, are you not the only fool?" –

imecattāropādā, idaṃ sīsaṃ,saha vāladhinā vattatītisavāladhi ayaṃ kāyo. Imāni ca nettānayanāni yathā maraṇato pubbe,tathevaabhinnasaṇṭhānānitiṭṭhanti. Ayaṃ goṇo samuṭṭhaheti imasmā kāraṇā ayaṃ goṇo samuṭṭhaheyya samuttiṭṭheyyāti mama cittaṃ bhaveyya. ‘‘Maññe goṇo samuṭṭhahe’’ti keci paṭhanti, tena kāraṇena ayaṃ goṇo sahasāpi kāyaṃ samuṭṭhaheyyāti ahaṃ maññeyyaṃ, evaṃ me maññanā sambhaveyyāti adhippāyo.Ayyakassapana mayhaṃ pitāmahassana hatthapādā kāyo sīsaṃ dissati,kevalaṃ pana tassa aṭṭhikāni pakkhipitvā kate mattikāmaye thūpe rudanto sataguṇena sahassaguṇena, tāta,tvaññeva dummatinippañño, bhijjanadhammā saṅkhārā bhijjanti, tattha vijānataṃ kā paridevanāti pitu dhammaṃ kathesi.

ime means these four pādā feet, idaṃ sīsaṃ, savāladhi ayaṃ kāyo means this body together with the tail. Imāni ca nettā means these eyes, just as before death, tatheva tiṭṭhanti means remain with an unchanged appearance. Ayaṃ goṇo samuṭṭhahe means, for this reason, this ox should rise up; my mind might think. Some read "Maññe goṇo samuṭṭhahe," implying, for that reason, I might think that this ox would suddenly rise up. Ayyakassa means of my grandfather, na hatthapādā kāyo sīsaṃ dissati means the hands, feet, body, and head are not seen, but you, father, weep a hundredfold or a thousandfold at a mound of clay made after his bones have been placed inside. Tvaññeva dummati means you alone are unwise, since conditioned things are subject to dissolution. For those who understand, what is the use of lamenting? Thus he taught the Dhamma to his father.

Taṃ sutvā bodhisattassa pitā ‘‘mama mutto paṇḍito maṃ saññāpetuṃ imaṃ kammaṃ akāsī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘tāta sujāta, ‘sabbepi sattā maraṇadhammā’ti aññātametaṃ, ito paṭṭhāya na socissāmi, sokaharaṇasamatthena nāma medhāvinā tādiseneva bhavitabba’’nti puttaṃ pasaṃsanto –

Having heard that, the Bodhisatta’s father thought, "My son, the wise one, did this deed to make me understand." Praising his son, he said, "Dear Sujāta, this was unknown, that all beings are subject to death. From now on, I will not grieve. One must be like this: wise, with the ability to remove sorrow," –

50.

50.

‘‘Ādittaṃ vata maṃ santaṃ, ghatasittaṃva pāvakaṃ;

"You extinguished all my burning anxiety,
Like pouring water on me, who was burning like a fire fueled with ghee.

51.

51.

‘‘Abbahī vata me sallaṃ, sokaṃ hadayanissitaṃ;

"Indeed, you have removed the dart, the sorrow lodged in my heart;
You have driven away the sorrow for my father from me, who was overcome by sorrow.

52.

52.

‘‘Svāhaṃ abbūḷhasallosmi, sītibhūtosmi nibbuto;

"Now I am one who has pulled out the dart, I have become cool, I am at peace;
I do not grieve, I do not weep, having heard you, young man.

53.

53.

‘‘Evaṃ karonti sappaññā, ye honti anukampakā;

"Thus do the wise, who are compassionate;
They turn away from sorrow, as Sujāta did his father." –

ādittanti sokagginā ādittaṃ jalitaṃ.Santanti samānaṃ.Pāvakanti aggi.Vārinā viya osiñcanti udakena avasiñcanto viya.Sabbaṃ nibbāpaye daranti sabbaṃ me cittadarathaṃ nibbāpesi.Abbahī vatāti nīhari vata.Sallanti sokasallaṃ.Hadayanissitanti cittasannissitasallabhūtaṃ.Sokaparetassāti sokena abhibhūtassa.Pitusokanti pitaraṃ ārabbha uppannaṃ sokaṃ.Apānudīti apanesi.Tava sutvāna māṇavāti, kumāra, tava vacanaṃ sutvā idāni pana na socāmi na rodāmi.Sujāto pitaraṃ yathāti yathā ayaṃ sujāto attano pitaraṃ sokato vinivattesi, evaṃ aññepi ye anukampakā anuggaṇhasīlā honti, te sappaññā evaṃ karonti pitūnaṃ aññesañca upakāraṃ karontīti attho.

ādittaṃ means ignited, burning with the fire of sorrow. Santaṃ means being the same. Pāvakaṃ means fire. Vārinā viya osiñcaṃ means as if sprinkling with water. Sabbaṃ nibbāpaye daraṃ means you extinguished all my mental torment. Abbahī vatā means indeed, you have removed. Sallaṃ means the dart of sorrow. Hadayanissitaṃ means located in the heart like a dart. Sokaparetassā means one who is overwhelmed by sorrow. Pitusokaṃ means the sorrow that arose concerning the father. Apānudī means you removed. Tava sutvāna māṇavā means, young man, having heard your words, I now neither grieve nor weep. Sujāto pitaraṃ yathā means just as this Sujāta turned his father away from sorrow, so too, others who are compassionate and show favor do such good for fathers and others, is the meaning.

Māṇavassa vacanaṃ sutvā pitā apagatasoko hutvā sīsaṃ nahāyitvā bhuñjitvā kammante pavattetvā kālaṃ katvā saggaparāyaṇo ahosi. Satthā imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ āharitvā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ saccāni pakāsesi, saccapariyosāne bahū sotāpattiphalādīsu patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Tadā sujāto lokanātho ahosīti.

Having heard the young man's words, his father became free from sorrow, bathed his head, ate, carried on his work, and after passing away, went to heaven. The Teacher, having brought forth this Dhamma talk, revealed the Truths to those monks. At the end of the Truths, many were established in the fruits of stream-entry and so on. At that time, Sujāta was the Lord of the World.

Goṇapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Story of the Cow Petā is Concluded.

9. Mahāpesakārapetivatthuvaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Story of the Great Weaver Petī

Gūthañcamuttaṃ ruhirañca pubbanti idaṃ satthari sāvatthiyaṃ viharante aññataraṃ pesakārapetiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Dvādasamattā kira bhikkhū satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vasanayoggaṭṭhānaṃ vīmaṃsantā upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya aññataraṃ chāyūdakasampannaṃ ramaṇīyaṃ araññāyatanaṃ tassa ca nātidūre nāccāsanne gocaragāmaṃ disvā tattha ekarattiṃ vasitvā dutiyadivase gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisiṃsu. Tattha ekādasa pesakārā paṭivasanti, te te bhikkhū disvā sañjātasomanassā hutvā attano attano gehaṃ netvā paṇītena āhārena parivisitvā āhaṃsu ‘‘kuhiṃ, bhante, gacchathā’’ti? ‘‘Yattha amhākaṃ phāsukaṃ, tattha gamissāmā’’ti. ‘‘Yadi evaṃ, bhante, idheva vasitabba’’nti vassūpagamanaṃ yāciṃsu. Bhikkhū sampaṭicchiṃsu. Upāsakā tesaṃ tattha araññakuṭikāyo kāretvā adaṃsu. Bhikkhū tattha vassaṃ upagacchiṃsu.

Gūthañca muttaṃ ruhirañca pubbaṃ This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Sāvatthī, concerning a certain weaver petī. It is said that about twelve monks, having taken a meditation subject from the Teacher and seeking a suitable place to reside, saw, near the approaching rains retreat, a delightful forest grove abundant with shade and water, and not too far from a village for alms. After spending one night there, on the second day, they entered the village for alms. There, eleven weavers resided. Seeing those monks, they became delighted and, taking them to their respective houses, served them with excellent food and asked, "Where are you going, Venerable Sirs?" "We will go where it is comfortable for us." "If so, Venerable Sirs, you should reside here," they requested for the rains residence. The monks consented. The lay followers had forest huts built for them there and gave them. The monks entered the rains retreat there.

Tattha jeṭṭhakapesakāro dve bhikkhū catūhi paccayehi sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahi, itare ekekaṃ bhikkhuṃ upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Jeṭṭhakapesakārassa bhariyā assaddhā appasannā micchādiṭṭhikā maccharinī bhikkhū na sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhāti. So taṃ disvā tassāyeva kaniṭṭhabhaginiṃ ānetvā attano gehe issariyaṃ niyyādesi. Sā saddhā pasannā hutvā sakkaccaṃ bhikkhū paṭijaggi. Te sabbe pesakāro vassaṃ vutthānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ekekassa ekekaṃ sāṭakamadaṃsu. Tattha maccharinī jeṭṭhapesakārassa bhariyā paduṭṭhacittā attano sāmikaṃ paribhāsi – ‘‘yaṃ tayā samaṇānaṃ sakyaputtiyānaṃ dānaṃ dinnaṃ annapānaṃ, taṃ te paraloke gūthamuttaṃ pubbalohitañca hutvā nibbattatu, sāṭakā ca jalitā ayomayapaṭṭā hontū’’ti.

There, the eldest weaver attended to two monks with the four requisites respectfully, while the others attended to one monk each. The wife of the eldest weaver was faithless, displeased, holding wrong views, and stingy; she did not attend to the monks respectfully. Seeing that, the eldest weaver brought her younger sister to entrust the authority in his house. She, being faithful and pleased, carefully looked after the monks. All those weavers gave each of the monks a robe after they had spent the rains retreat. There, the stingy wife of the eldest weaver, with a corrupted mind, reviled her husband, saying, "May the food and drink that you gave to the Sakyan ascetics be transformed into excrement, urine, pus, and blood in the next world, and may the robes become blazing iron plates!"

Tattha jeṭṭhapesakāro aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā viñjhāṭaviyaṃ ānubhāvasampannā rukkhadevatā hutvā nibbatti. Tassa pana kadariyā bhariyā kālaṃ katvā tasseva vasanaṭṭhānassa avidūre petī hutvā nibbatti. Sā naggā dubbaṇṇarūpā jighacchāpipāsābhibhūtā tassa bhūmadevassa santikaṃ gantvā āha – ‘‘ahaṃ, sāmi, niccoḷā ativiya jighacchāpipāsābhibhūtā vicarāmi, dehi me vatthaṃ annapānañcā’’ti. So tassā dibbaṃ uḷāraṃ annapānaṃ upanesi. Taṃ tāya gahitamattameva gūthamuttaṃ pubbalohitañca sampajjati, sāṭakañca dinnaṃ tāya paridahitaṃ pajjalitaṃ ayomayapaṭṭaṃ hoti. Sā mahādukkhaṃ anubhavantī taṃ chaḍḍetvā kandantī vicarati.

There, the eldest weaver, after some time, passed away and was reborn as a tree deity with great power in the Viñjhā forest. However, his stingy wife passed away and was reborn as a petī not far from that same place of residence. Naked, with a repulsive appearance, overcome by hunger and thirst, she went to that earth deity and said, "Lord, I am naked and excessively overcome by hunger and thirst, wandering about. Give me clothing and food and drink." He presented her with divine and excellent food and drink. As soon as she took it, it turned into excrement, urine, pus, and blood, and the robe that was given, when worn by her, became a blazing iron plate. Experiencing great suffering, she threw it off and wandered about, weeping.

Tena ca samayena aññataro bhikkhu vutthavasso satthāraṃ vandituṃ gacchanto mahatā satthena saddhiṃ viñjhāṭaviṃ paṭipajji. Satthikā rattiṃ maggaṃ gantvā divā vane sandacchāyūdakasampannaṃ padesaṃ disvā yānāni muñcitvā muhuttaṃ vissamiṃsu. Bhikkhu pana vivekakāmatāya thokaṃ apakkamitvā aññatarassa sandacchāyassa vanagahanapaṭicchannassa rukkhassa mūle saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā nipanno rattiyaṃ maggagamanaparissamena kilantakāyo niddaṃ upagañchi. Satthikā vissamitvā maggaṃ paṭipajjiṃsu, so bhikkhu na paṭibujjhi. Atha sāyanhasamaye uṭṭhahitvā te apassanto aññataraṃ kummaggaṃ paṭipajjitvā anukkamena tassā devatāya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ sampāpuṇi. Atha naṃ so devaputto disvā manussarūpena upagantvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā attano vimānaṃ pavesetvā pādabbhañjanādīni datvā payirupāsanto nisīdi. Tasmiñca samaye sā petī āgantvā ‘‘dehi me, sāmi, annapānaṃ sāṭakañcā’’ti āha. So tassā tāni adāsi. Tāni ca tāya gahitamattāni gūthamuttapubbalohitapajjalitaayopaṭṭāyeva ahesuṃ. So bhikkhu taṃ disvā sañjātasaṃvego taṃ devaputtaṃ –

At that time, a certain bhikkhu who had completed the rains residence, while going to pay homage to the Teacher, proceeded along the Viñjhā forest with a large caravan. The caravan people, having traveled by night, saw a place in the forest with dense shade and plenty of water during the day. They unharnessed their vehicles and rested for a while. The bhikkhu, however, desiring solitude, went a little further and, having spread his sanghāṭi robe at the foot of a certain thickly shaded tree covered by dense foliage, lay down and fell asleep, his body tired from traveling the path at night. The caravan people, having rested, resumed their journey, but that bhikkhu did not awaken. Then, at eventide, having arisen and not seeing them, he took a wrong path and gradually reached the dwelling place of that devatā. Then that devaputta, having seen him, approached in human form, greeted him, led him into his vimāna, and sat down attending to him, giving him foot-washing and so on. At that time, that petī came and said, "Give me, lord, food and drink, and a garment." He gave her those things. But as soon as she took them, they became nothing but excrement, urine, pus, blood, and blazing iron plates. The bhikkhu, having seen that, became agitated and said to that devaputta:

54.

54.

‘‘Gūthañca muttaṃ ruhirañca pubbaṃ, paribhuñjati kissa ayaṃ vipāko;

"Excrement and urine, blood and pus, she consumes; what is the result of what deed?
What deed, indeed, did this woman do, who always eats blood and pus?

55.

55.

‘‘Navāni vatthāni subhāni ceva, mudūni suddhāni ca lomasāni;

"New clothes, beautiful indeed, soft, pure, and woolen;
Given, they become mixed and thorny; what deed, indeed, did this woman do?"

kissa ayaṃ vipākoti kīdisassa kammassa ayaṃ vipāko, yaṃ esā idāni paccanubhavatīti.Ayaṃ nu kiṃ kammamakāsi nārīti ayaṃ itthī kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ pubbe akāsi.Yā sabbadā lohitapubbabhakkhāti yā sabbakālaṃ ruhirapubbameva bhakkhati paribhuñjati.Navānīti paccagghāni tāvadeva pātubhūtāni.Subhānīti sundarāni dassanīyāni.Mudūnīti sukhasamphassāni.Suddhānīti parisuddhavaṇṇāni.Lomasānīti salomakāni sukhasamphassāni, sundarānīti attho.Dinnāni missā kitakā bhavantīti kitakakaṇṭakasadisāni lohapaṭṭasadisāni bhavanti. ‘‘Kīṭakā bhavantī’’ti vā pāṭho, khādakapāṇakavaṇṇāni bhavantīti attho.

kissa ayaṃ vipāko: what kind of deed is this the result of, which she is now experiencing? Ayaṃ nu kiṃ kammamakāsi nārī: What deed, indeed, did this woman do in the past? Yā sabbadā lohitapubbabhakkhā: She who always eats and consumes only blood and pus. Navāni: newly made, just appeared. Subhāni: beautiful, lovely to see. Mudūni: pleasant to the touch. Suddhāni: of pure color. Lomasānī: woolen, pleasant to the touch, beautiful is the meaning. Dinnāni missā kitakā bhavantī: become like thorny bristles, like iron plates. Alternatively, the reading is "Kīṭakā bhavantī": they become the color of biting creatures is the meaning.

Evaṃ so devaputto tena bhikkhunā puṭṭho tāya purimajātiyā katakammaṃ pakāsento –

Thus, that devaputta, being asked by that bhikkhu, revealing the deed done by her in a previous birth:

56.

56.

‘‘Bhariyā mamesā ahu bhadante, adāyikā maccharinī kadariyā;

"She was my wife, venerable sir, ungenerous, miserly, stingy;
She scolded and reviled me while I was giving to samaṇas and brāhmaṇas.

57.

57.

‘‘Gūthañca muttaṃ ruhirañca pubbaṃ, paribhuñja tvaṃ asuciṃ sabbakālaṃ;

"Excrement and urine, blood and pus, may you consume impurity always;
May this be yours in the next world, and may your clothes be like thorns;
Having practiced such evil conduct, she has come here and eats for a long time."

adāyikāti kassaci kiñcipi adānasīlā.Maccharinī kadariyāti paṭhamaṃ maccheramalassa sabhāvena maccharinī, tāya ca punappunaṃ āsevanatāya thaddhamaccharinī, tāya kadariyā ahūti yojanā. Idāni tassā tameva kadariyataṃ dassento‘‘sā maṃ dadanta’’ntiādimāha. Tatthaetādisanti evarūpaṃ yathāvuttavacīduccaritādiṃ caritvā.Idhāgatāti imaṃ petalokaṃ āgatā, petattabhāvaṃ upagatā.Cirarattāya khādatīti cirakālaṃ gūthādimeva khādati. Tassā hi yenākārena akkuṭṭhaṃ, tenevākārena pavattamānampi phalaṃ. Yaṃ uddissa akkuṭṭhaṃ, tato aññattha pathaviyaṃ kamantakasaṅkhāte matthake asanipāto viya attano upari patati.

adāyikā: not in the habit of giving anything to anyone. Maccharinī kadariyā: firstly, miserly by nature of the stain of stinginess, and then, by repeatedly indulging in it, stubbornly miserly; thus, she became stingy is the connection. Now, showing her very stinginess, he said ‘‘sā maṃ dadanta’’ etc. There, etādisaṃ: such as that, practicing evil conduct of speech as stated. Idhāgatā: having come to this realm of petas, having attained the state of a peta. Cirarattāya khādatī: eats only excrement and so on for a long time. For her, the result manifests in the very manner in which she scolded. Like a thunderbolt falling on one's own head, it falls upon oneself, instead of elsewhere, on the head, which is called the tenth (organ).

Evaṃ so devaputto tāya pubbe katakammaṃ kathetvā puna taṃ bhikkhuṃ āha – ‘‘atthi pana, bhante, koci upāyo imaṃ petalokato mocetu’’nti? ‘‘Atthī’’ti ca vutte ‘‘kathetha, bhante’’ti. Yadi bhagavato ariyasaṅghassa ca ekasseva vā bhikkhuno dānaṃ datvā imissā uddisiyati, ayañca taṃ anumodati, evametissā ito dukkhato mutti bhavissatīti. Taṃ sutvā devaputto tassa bhikkhuno paṇītaṃ annapānaṃ datvā taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ tassā petiyā ādisi. Tāvadeva sā petī suhitā pīṇindriyā dibbāhārassa tittā ahosi. Puna tasseva bhikkhuno hatthe dibbasāṭakayugaṃ bhagavantaṃ uddissa datvā tañca dakkhiṇaṃ petiyā ādisi. Tāvadeva ca sā dibbavatthanivatthā dibbālaṅkāravibhūsitā sabbakāmasamiddhā devaccharāpaṭibhāgā ahosi. So ca bhikkhu tassa devaputtassa iddhiyā tadaheva sāvatthiṃ patvā jetavanaṃ pavisitvā bhagavato santikaṃ upagantvā vanditvā taṃ sāṭakayugaṃ datvā taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Bhagavāpi tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Thus, that devaputta, having related the deed done by her in the past, again said to that bhikkhu, "Is there, venerable sir, any way to release her from this realm of petas?" When it was said, "There is," he said, "Tell me, venerable sir." If a gift is given to the Blessed One and the Ariya-saṅgha, or even to a single bhikkhu, and dedicated to her, and she approves of it, then she will be freed from suffering here. Having heard that, the devaputta gave excellent food and drink to that bhikkhu and dedicated that offering to that petī. Immediately, that petī became nourished, her senses invigorated, satisfied with divine food. Again, giving a pair of divine garments into the hands of that bhikkhu, he dedicated that offering to the Blessed One for the petī. Immediately, she, clothed in divine garments, adorned with divine ornaments, fulfilled in all desires, became like a celestial nymph. And that bhikkhu, by the power of that devaputta, reached Sāvatthi that very day, entered Jetavana, approached the Blessed One, paid homage, gave that pair of garments, and reported that event. The Blessed One also, having made that matter the occasion, taught the Dhamma to the assembled assembly. That teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Mahāpesakārapetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Mahāpesakārapetavatthu is finished.

10. Khallāṭiyapetivatthuvaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Khallāṭiyapetavatthu

nu antovimānasminti idaṃ satthari sāvatthiyaṃ viharante aññataraṃ khallāṭiyapetiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Atīte kira bārāṇasiyaṃ aññatarā rūpūpajīvinī itthī abhirūpā dassanīyā pāsādikā paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgatā atimanoharakesakalāpī ahosi. Tassā hi kesā nīlā dīghā tanū mudū siniddhā vellitaggā dvihatthagayhā visaṭṭhā yāva mekhalā kalāpā olambanti. Taṃ tassā kesasobhaṃ disvā taruṇajano yebhuyyena tassaṃ paṭibaddhacitto ahosi. Athassā taṃ kesasobhaṃ asahamānā issāpakatā katipayā itthiyo mantetvā tassā eva paricārikadāsiṃ āmisena upalāpetvā tāya tassā kesūpapātanaṃ bhesajjaṃ dāpesuṃ. Sā kira dāsī taṃ bhesajjaṃ nhāniyacuṇṇena saddhiṃ payojetvā gaṅgāya nadiyā nhānakāle tassā adāsi. Sā tena kesamūlesu temetvā udake nimujji, nimujjanamatteyeva kesā samūlā paripatiṃsu, sīsaṃ cassā tittakalābusadisaṃ ahosi. Atha sā sabbaso vilūnakesā luñcitamatthakā kapotī viya virūpā hutvā lajjāya antonagaraṃ pavisituṃ asakkontī vatthena sīsaṃ veṭhetvā bahinagare aññatarasmiṃ padese vāsaṃ kappentī katipāhaccayena apagatalajjā tato nivattetvā tilāni pīḷetvā telavaṇijjaṃ surāvaṇijjañca karontī jīvikaṃ kappesi. Sā ekadivasaṃ dvīsu tīsu manussesu surāmattesu mahāniddaṃ okkamantesu sithilabhūtāni tesaṃ nivatthavatthāni avahari.

Kā nu antovimānasmiṃ This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Sāvatthi, concerning a certain Khallāṭiyapetī. It is said that in the past, in Bārāṇasī, a certain woman who lived by her beauty was beautiful, lovely to see, pleasing, endowed with the utmost beauty, and had an extremely charming mass of hair. For her hairs were dark blue, long, fine, soft, smooth, with curled ends, a double-handful in extent, and hanging loosely down to her girdle in a mass. Seeing that beauty of her hair, the young men were mostly attached to her. Then, some women, unable to bear that beauty of her hair, and overcome by envy, conspired and bribed her own serving maid with gifts, and had her give a medicine to make her hair fall out. It is said that the maid mixed that medicine with bathing powder and gave it to her at the time of bathing in the river Gaṅgā. She rubbed it into the roots of her hair and plunged into the water, and as soon as she plunged in, her hairs fell out completely, roots and all, and her head became like a bald gourd. Then she, with all her hair gone, her head shaved, ugly like a pigeon, unable to enter the city out of shame, wrapped her head in a cloth and made her dwelling in a certain place outside the city, and after a few days, having gotten rid of her shame, she returned from there and made a living by pressing sesame seeds for oil and selling liquor. One day, while two or three men were lying in a deep sleep, drunk with liquor, she stole their loose garments.

Athekadivasaṃ sā ekaṃ khīṇāsavattheraṃ piṇḍāya carantaṃ disvā pasannacittā attano gharaṃ netvā paññatte āsane nisīdāpetvā telasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ doṇinimmajjaniṃ piññākamadāsi. So tassā anukampāya taṃ paṭiggahetvā paribhuñji. Sā pasannamānasā upari chattaṃ dhārayamānā aṭṭhāsi. So ca thero tassā cittaṃ pahaṃsento anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Sā ca itthī anumodanakāleyeva ‘‘mayhaṃ kesā dīghā tanū siniddhā mudū vellitaggā hontū’’ti patthanamakāsi.

Then one day, seeing a thera who was a khīṇāsava going for alms, she invited him to her house with a gladdened heart, had him sit on a seat that was prepared, and gave him oil-soaked immersion in a trough and oil-cake. He accepted and consumed it out of compassion for her. She stood holding an umbrella over him with a pleased mind. And that thera, praising her mind, gave thanks and departed. And that woman, at the very time of giving thanks, made a wish, "May my hairs be long, fine, smooth, soft, and with curled ends."

Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā missakakammassa phalena samuddamajjhe kanakavimāne ekikā hutvā nibbatti. Tassā kesā patthitākārāyeva sampajjiṃsu. Manussānaṃ sāṭakāvaharaṇena pana naggā ahosi. Sā tasmiṃ kanakavimāne punappunaṃ uppajjitvā ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ naggāva hutvā vītināmesi. Atha amhākaṃ bhagavati loke uppajjitvā pavattitavaradhammacakke anupubbena sāvatthiyaṃ viharante sāvatthivāsino sattasatā vāṇijā suvaṇṇabhūmiṃ uddissa nāvāya mahāsamuddaṃ otariṃsu. Tehi āruḷhā nāvā visamavātavegukkhittā ito cito ca paribbhamantī taṃ padesaṃ agamāsi. Atha sā vimānapetī saha vimānena tesaṃ attānaṃ dassesi. Taṃ disvā jeṭṭhavāṇijo pucchanto –

After that, she died after some time and, as a result of mixed karma, was reborn alone in a golden vimāna in the middle of the ocean. Her hairs came to be just as she had wished. But by stealing the garments of men, she was naked. She repeatedly arose in that golden vimāna and spent an entire Buddha-era naked. Then, when our Blessed One arose in the world and set in motion the excellent wheel of the Dhamma, seven hundred merchants dwelling in Sāvatthi gradually descended into the great ocean by ship, heading for Suvaṇṇabhūmi. The ship in which they were traveling, tossed about by the force of adverse winds, went around here and there and arrived at that place. Then that vimānapetī showed herself to them with the vimāna. Seeing her, the chief merchant asked:

58.

58.

‘‘Kā nu antovimānasmiṃ, tiṭṭhantī nūpanikkhami;

"Who are you, standing inside the vimāna, or do you not come out?
Come out, good lady, let us see you standing outside."

kā nu antovimānasmiṃ tiṭṭhantīti vimānassa anto abbhantare tiṭṭhantī kā nu tvaṃ, kiṃ manussitthī, udāhu amanussitthīti pucchati.Nūpanikkhamīti vimānato na nikkhami.Upanikkhamassu, bhadde, passāma taṃ bahiṭṭhitanti, bhadde, taṃ mayaṃ bahi ṭhitaṃ passāma daṭṭhukāmamhā, tasmā vimānato nikkhamassu. ‘‘Upanikkhamassu bhaddante’’ti vā pāṭho, bhaddaṃ te atthūti attho.

kā nu antovimānasmiṃ tiṭṭhantī: Who are you, standing inside the vimāna, what sort of person or what kind of non-human creature are you? Nūpanikkhamī: Do you not come out from the vimāna? Upanikkhamassu, bhadde, passāma taṃ bahiṭṭhita: Good lady, we wish to see you standing outside, therefore, come out of the vimāna. Alternatively, the reading is "Upanikkhamassu bhaddante": may good be to you is the meaning.

Athassa sā attano bahi nikkhamisuṃ asakkuṇeyyataṃ pakāsentī –

Then, she, revealing her inability to come out outside:

59.

59.

‘‘Aṭṭīyāmi harāyāmi, naggā nikkhamituṃ bahi;

"I am distressed, I am ashamed, to come out naked;
I am covered by my hairs, I have done little merit."

aṭṭīyāmīti naggā hutvā bahi nikkhamituṃ aṭṭikā dukkhitā amhi.Harāyāmīti lajjāmi.Kesehamhi paṭicchannāti kesehi amhi ahaṃ paṭicchāditā pārutasarīrā.Puññaṃ me appakaṃ katanti appakaṃ parittaṃ mayā kusalakammaṃ kataṃ, piññākadānamattanti adhippāyo.

aṭṭīyāmī: I am distressed, troubled, to come out naked. Harāyāmī: I am ashamed. Kesehamhi paṭicchannā: I am covered, my body is hidden by my hairs. Puññaṃ me appakaṃ kata: I have done little merit, only the giving of oil-cake is intended.

Athassā vāṇijo attano uttarisāṭakaṃ dātukāmo –-

Then the merchant, wishing to give her his upper garment:

60.

60.

‘‘Handuttarīyaṃ dadāmi te, idaṃ dussaṃ nivāsaya;

"Here, I give you an upper garment, wear this cloth;
Having worn this cloth, come out, beautiful one;
Come out, good lady, let us see you standing outside."

handāti gaṇha.Uttarīyanti upasaṃbyānaṃ uttarisāṭakanti attho.Dadāmi teti tuyhaṃ dadāmi.Idaṃ dussaṃ nivāsayāti idaṃ mama uttarisāṭakaṃ tvaṃ nivāsehi.Sobhaneti sundararūpe.

handā: take. Uttarīyaṃ: the upper garment, the outer cloak is the meaning. Dadāmi te: I give to you. Idaṃ dussaṃ nivāsayā: You should wear this my upper garment. Sobhane: of beautiful form.

Evañca pana vatvā attano uttarisāṭakaṃ tassā upanesi, sā tathā diyyamānassa attano anupakappanīyatañca, yathā diyyamānaṃ upakappati, tañca dassentī –

And having spoken thus, he offered her his upper garment, she, showing that it was not suitable for her as it was being given, and how it becomes suitable as it is being given:

61.

61.

‘‘Hatthena hatthe te dinnaṃ, na mayhaṃ upakappati;

"Given by your hand into my hand, it is not suitable for me;
Here is a lay follower, faithful, a disciple of the Sammāsambuddha.

62.

62.

‘‘Etaṃ acchādayitvāna, mama dakkhiṇamādisa;

"Having covered him with it, dedicate the offering to me;
Then I will be happy, fulfilled in all desires."

hatthena hatthe te dinnaṃ, na mayhaṃ upakappatīti, mārisa, tava hatthena mama hatthe tayā dinnaṃ na mayhaṃ upakappati na viniyujjati, upabhogayoggaṃ na hotīti attho.Esetthupāsako saddhoti eso ratanattayaṃ uddissa saraṇagamanena upāsako kammaphalasaddhāya ca samannāgatattā saddho ettha etasmiṃ janasamūhe atthi.Etaṃ acchādayitvāna, mama dakkhiṇamādisāti etaṃ upāsakaṃ mama diyyamānaṃ sāṭakaṃ paridahāpetvā taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ mayhaṃ ādisa pattidānaṃ dehi.Tathāhaṃ sukhitā hessanti tathā kate ahaṃ sukhitā dibbavatthanivatthā sukhappattā bhavissāmīti.

hatthena hatthe te dinnaṃ, na mayhaṃ upakappatī: Sir, given by your hand into my hand, it is not suitable for me, it is not appropriate, it is not fit for use is the meaning. Esetthupāsako saddho: Here, in this crowd of people, there is a lay follower who is faithful, because he is endowed with going for refuge to the Triple Gem and with faith in the result of kamma. Etaṃ acchādayitvāna, mama dakkhiṇamādisā: Having made this lay follower put on the garment being given to me, dedicate that offering to me, give the sharing of merit. Tathāhaṃ sukhitā hessaṃ: Having done so, I will be happy, clothed in divine garments, having attained happiness.

Taṃ sutvā vāṇijā taṃ upāsakaṃ nhāpetvā vilimpetvā vatthayugena acchādesuṃ. Tamatthaṃ pakāsentā saṅgītikārā –

Having heard that, the merchants bathed that lay follower, anointed him, and clothed him with a pair of garments. The compilers of the Saṅgīti, revealing that matter:

63.

63.

‘‘Tañca te nhāpayitvāna, vilimpetvāna vāṇijā;

"Then the merchants, having bathed him, and having anointed him,
Having clothed him with garments, dedicated the offering to her.

64.

64.

‘‘Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe, vipāko udapajjatha;

"Immediately upon the dedication, the result arose;
Food, clothing, and drink, this is the fruit of the offering.

65.

65.

‘‘Tato suddhā sucivasanā, kāsikuttamadhārinī;

"Then, pure, wearing clean garments, wearing excellent Kāsika cloth;
Laughing, she came out of the vimāna, this is the fruit of the offering."

Tisso gāthāyo avocuṃ.

Spoke three verses.

63.Tatthatanti taṃ upāsakaṃ. Ca-saddo nipātamattaṃ.Teti te vāṇijāti yojanā.Vilimpetvānāti uttamena gandhena vilimpetvā.Vatthehacchādayitvānāti vaṇṇagandharasasampannaṃ sabyañjanaṃ bhojanaṃ bhojetvā nivāsanaṃ uttarīyanti dvīhi vatthehi acchādesuṃ, dve vatthāni adaṃsūti attho.Tassā dakkhiṇamādisunti tassā petiyā taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ ādisiṃsu.

63. There, taṃ: that lay follower. The word "ca" is merely a particle. Te: by those merchants is the connection. Vilimpetvānā: having anointed with excellent perfume. Vatthehacchādayitvānā: having fed him food of good color, smell, and taste, together with side dishes, they covered him with two garments, a garment for wearing and an upper garment, they gave two garments is the meaning. Tassā dakkhiṇamādisuṃ: they dedicated that offering to that petī.

64.Samanantarānuddiṭṭhetianū-ti nipātamattaṃ, tassā dakkhiṇāya uddiṭṭhasamanantarameva.Vipāko udapajjathāti tassā petiyā vipāko dakkhiṇāya phalaṃ uppajji. Kīdisoti petī āhabhojanacchādanapānīyanti. Nānappakāraṃ dibbabhojanasadisaṃ bhojanañca nānāvirāgavaṇṇasamujjalaṃ dibbavatthasadisaṃ vatthañca anekavidhaṃ pānakañcadakkhiṇāya idaṃīdisaṃphalaṃ udapajjathāti yojanā.

64. Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe means anū is merely a particle; immediately after the offering to the south. Vipāko udapajjathā means the result of the offering to the south arose for that ghost. What kind of ghost? She said, bhojanacchādanapānīya, meaning food similar to divine food of various kinds, and clothing similar to divine garments, radiant with various dispassionate colors, and drinks of many kinds; the connection is dakkhiṇāya idaṃ īdisaṃ phalaṃ udapajjathā, "such a result arose from the offering."

65.Tatoti yathāvuttabhojanādipaṭilābhato pacchā.Suddhāti nhānena suddhasarīrā.Sucivasanāti suvisuddhavatthanivatthā.Kāsikuttamadhārinīti kāsikavatthatopi uttamavatthadhārinī.Hasantīti ‘‘passatha tāva tumhākaṃ dakkhiṇāya idaṃ phalavisesa’’nti pakāsanavasena hasamānā vimānato nikkhami.

65. Tato means after receiving the aforementioned food, etc. Suddhā means with a body purified by bathing. Sucivasanā means wearing very pure garments. Kāsikuttamadhārinī means wearing garments even finer than those of Kasi. Hasantī means laughing in a way that proclaimed, "Look at the special result of your offering!" she emerged from the mansion.

Atha te vāṇijā evaṃ paccakkhato puññaphalaṃ disvā acchariyabbhutacittajātā tasmiṃ upāsake sañjātagāravabahumānā katañjalī taṃ payirupāsiṃsu. Sopi te dhammakathāya bhiyyosomattāya pasādetvā saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpesi. Te tāya vimānapetiyā katakammaṃ –

Then those merchants, seeing the fruit of merit directly in this way, with minds filled with wonder and amazement, approached that lay follower with joined hands, filled with respect and reverence. He, too, gladdened them further with a Dhamma talk and established them in the refuges and precepts. The deed done by that mansion-ghost was:

66.

66.

‘‘Sucittarūpaṃ ruciraṃ, vimānaṃ te pabhāsati;

"A well-painted, beautiful mansion shines for you;
Tell, O deity, when asked, what deed is this fruit of?"

sucittarūpanti hatthiassaitthipurisādivasena ceva mālākammalatākammādivasena ca suṭṭhu vihitacittarūpaṃ.Ruciranti ramaṇīyaṃ dassanīyaṃ.Kissa kammassidaṃ phalanti kīdisassa kammassa, kiṃ dānamayassa udāhu sīlamayassa idaṃ phalanti attho.

sucittarūpaṃ means beautifully decorated with paintings of elephants, horses, women, and men, as well as garlands, creeper designs, and the like. Ruciraṃ means delightful and pleasing to see. Kissa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ means of what kind of deed, of what sort of meritorious act, whether giving or moral conduct, is this the fruit?

Sā tehi evaṃ puṭṭhā ‘‘mayā katassa parittakassa kusalakammassa tāva idaṃ phalaṃ, akusalakammassa pana āyatiṃ niraye edisaṃ bhavissatī’’ti tadubhayaṃ ācikkhantī –

Being asked thus by them, she, declaring both that this was the fruit of the little meritorious deed she had done and that in the future, in hell, there would be such an unwholesome deed, said:

67.

67.

‘‘Bhikkhuno caramānassa, doṇinimmajjaniṃ ahaṃ;

"To a bhikkhu going on alms round,
A strainer for the oil-dregs,
I gave to one who was upright,
With a mind full of faith.

68.

68.

‘‘Tassa kammassa kusalassa, vipākaṃ dīghamantaraṃ;

"Of that meritorious deed,
For a long time, I experience the result;
In this mansion, yet it is but little now.

69.

69.

‘‘Uddhaṃ catūhi māsehi, kālaṃkiriyā bhavissati;

"Upwards from now, in four months,
There will be my death;
Wholly bitter, terrible,
I shall fall into hell.

70.

70.

‘‘Catukkaṇṇaṃ catudvāraṃ, vibhattaṃ bhāgaso mitaṃ;

"Four-cornered, with four doors,
Divided into portions, measured;
Enclosed by iron walls,
Covered over with iron.

71.

71.

‘‘Tassa ayomayā bhūmi, jalitā tejasā yutā;

"Its ground is made of iron,
Burning, joined with heat;
On all sides, a hundred yojanas,
Spreading, it always stands.

72.

72.

‘‘Tatthāhaṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ, dukkhaṃ vedissa vedanaṃ;

"There, for a long time, I shall feel,
A painful feeling of suffering;
The fruit of an evil deed,
Therefore, I greatly lament." – thus she spoke in verses.

67.Tatthabhikkhuno caramānassāti aññatarassa bhinnakilesassa bhikkhuno bhikkhāya carantassa.Doṇinimmajjaninti vissandamānatelaṃ piññākaṃ.Ujubhūtassāti cittajimhavaṅkakuṭilabhāvakarānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena ujubhāvappattassa.Vippasannena cetasāti kammaphalasaddhāya suṭṭhu pasannena cittena.

67. There, bhikkhuno caramānassa means to a certain bhikkhu, with destroyed defilements, going on alms round. Doṇinimmajjani means oil-dregs that are dripping. Ujubhūtassa means to one who has attained uprightness due to the absence of defilements that cause crookedness, deceit, and dishonesty of mind. Vippasannena cetasā means with a mind well pleased with faith in the result of kamma.

68-69.Dīghamantaranti ma-kāro padasandhikaro, dīghaantaraṃ dīghakālanti attho.Tañca dāni parittakanti tañca puññaphalaṃ vipakkavipākattā kammassa idāni parittakaṃ appāvasesaṃ, na cireneva ito cavissāmīti attho. Tenāha‘‘uddhaṃ catūhi māsehi, kālaṃkiriyā bhavissatī’’ti catūhi māsehi uddhaṃ catunnaṃ māsānaṃ upari pañcame māse mama kālaṃkiriyā bhavissatīti dasseti.Ekantakaṭukanti ekanteneva aniṭṭhachaphassāyatanikabhāvato ekantadukkhanti attho.Ghoranti dāruṇaṃ.Nirayanti natthi ettha ayo sukhanti katvā ‘‘niraya’’nti laddhanāmaṃ narakaṃ.Papatissahanti papahissāmi ahaṃ.

68-69. Dīghamantaraṃ the ma-syllable is a euphonic connector; dīghaantaraṃ means a long time. Tañca dāni parittakaṃ means that the fruit of that merit is now little because of the ripening of the kamma, meaning that she will soon pass away from here. Therefore, she said, ‘‘uddhaṃ catūhi māsehi, kālaṃkiriyā bhavissatī’’, indicating that after four months, on the fifth month, her death will occur. Ekantakaṭukaṃ means wholly painful because it is entirely characterized by undesirable sense-impressions. Ghoraṃ means terrible. Nirayaṃ means hell, which obtained the name "Niraya" because there is no happiness there. Papatissahaṃ means "I shall fall."

70.‘‘Niraya’’nti cettha avīcimahānirayassa adhippetattā taṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ‘‘catukkaṇṇa’’ntiādimāha. Tatthacatukkaṇṇanti catukkoṇaṃ.Catudvāranti catūsu disāsu catūhi dvārehi yuttaṃ.Vibhattanti suṭṭhu vibhattaṃ.

70. Here, because "Niraya" is understood to mean Avīci Great Hell, in order to show its form, he said ‘‘catukkaṇṇa’’ etc. There, catukkaṇṇaṃ means four-cornered. Catudvāraṃ means endowed with four doors in the four directions. Vibhattaṃ means well-divided.

Bhāgasoti bhāgato.Mitanti tulitaṃ.Ayopākārapariyantanti ayomayena pākārena parikkhittaṃ.Ayasā paṭikujjitanti ayopaṭaleneva upari pihitaṃ.

Bhāgaso means by portions. Mitaṃ means measured. Ayopākārapariyantaṃ means surrounded by a wall made of iron. Ayasā paṭikujjitaṃ means covered over with a layer of iron.

71-72.Tejasā yutāti samantato samuṭṭhitajālena mahatā agginā nirantaraṃ samāyutajālā.Samantā yojanasatanti evaṃ pana samantā bahi sabbadisāsu yojanasataṃ yojanānaṃ sataṃ.Sabbadāti sabbakālaṃ.Pharitvā tiṭṭhatīti byāpetvā tiṭṭhati.Tatthāti tasmiṃ mahāniraye.Vedissanti vedissāmi anubhavissāmi.Phalañca pāpakammassāti idaṃ īdisaṃ dukkhānubhavanaṃ mahā evaṃ katassa pāpassa kammassa phalanti attho.

71-72. Tejasā yutā means constantly joined with a great fire with flames rising up on all sides. Samantā yojanasataṃ means in this way, on all sides, externally in all directions, a hundred yojanas, a hundred yojanas. Sabbadā means always. Pharitvā tiṭṭhatī means standing pervading. Tatthā means in that Great Hell. Vedissaṃ means I shall feel, I shall experience. Phalañca pāpakammassa means such an experience of suffering is the fruit of an evil deed done in this way.

Evaṃ tāya attanā katakammaphale āyatiṃ nerayikabhaye ca pakāsite so upāsako karuṇāsañcoditamānaso ‘‘handassāhaṃ patiṭṭhā bhaveyya’’nti cintetvā āha – ‘‘devate, tvaṃ mayhaṃ ekassa dānavasena sabbakāmasamiddhā uṭṭhārasampattiyuttā jātā, idāni pana imesaṃ upāsakānaṃ dānaṃ datvā satthu ca guṇe anussaritvā nirayūpapattito muccissasī’’ti. Sā petī haṭṭhatuṭṭhā ‘‘sādhū’’ti vatvā te dibbena annapānena santappetvā dibbāni vatthāni nānāvidhāni ratanāni ca adāsi, bhagavantañca uddissa dibbaṃ dussayugaṃ tesaṃ hatthe datvā ‘‘aññatarā, bhante, vimānapetī bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatīti sāvatthiṃ gantvā satthāraṃ mama vacanena vandathā’’ti vandanañca pesesi, tañca nāvaṃ attano iddhānubhāvena tehi icchitapaṭṭanaṃ taṃ divasameva upanesi.

When she thus declared the fruit of the deed she had done and the fear of future rebirth in hell, that lay follower, his mind stirred by compassion, thinking, "May I be a support for her," said, "O deity, you have become endowed with the attainment of wealth and success in all desires because of my single act of giving; now, by giving a gift to these lay followers and recollecting the qualities of the Teacher, you will be freed from falling into hell." That ghost, delighted and pleased, saying "Good!", satisfied them with divine food and drink, and gave divine garments and various kinds of jewels, and giving a pair of divine cloths into their hands, intending it for the Blessed One, she sent a message of homage, saying, "Going to Savatthi, with my words, pay homage to the Teacher, saying, 'Venerable sir, a certain mansion-ghost bows to the feet of the Blessed One with her head'," and by her own power, she brought that ship to the desired port on that very day.

Atha te vāṇijā tato paṭṭanato anukkamena sāvatthiṃ patvā jetavanaṃ pavisitvā satthu taṃ dussayugaṃ datvā vandanañca nivedetvā ādito paṭṭhāya taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Satthā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi, sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā jātā. Te pana upāsakā dutiyadivase buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ datvā tassā dakkhiṇamādisiṃsu. Sā ca tato petalokato cavitvā vividharatanavijjotite tāvatiṃsabhavane kanakavimāne accharāsahassaparivārā nibbattīti.

Then those merchants, reaching Savatthi in due course from that port, entered Jetavana, gave that pair of cloths to the Teacher, and having announced the homage, they related that event to the Blessed One from the beginning. The Teacher, making that matter the occasion, extensively taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering, and that teaching was fruitful for the multitude. Those lay followers, on the second day, gave a great offering to the Sangha of bhikkhus with the Buddha at its head and dedicated that to her. And she, passing away from that ghost realm, was reborn in a golden mansion in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, radiant with various jewels, attended by a thousand nymphs.

Khallāṭiyapetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Khallāṭiyā Ghost Story is finished.

11. Nāgapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
11. Commentary on the Nāga Ghost Story

Puratovasetena paleti hatthināti idaṃ satthari jetavane viharante dve brāhmaṇapete ārambha vuttaṃ. Āyasmā kira saṃkicco sattavassiko khuraggeyeva arahattaṃ patvā sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhito tiṃsamattehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ araññāyatane vasanto tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pañcannaṃ corasatānaṃ hatthato āgataṃ maraṇampi bāhitvā te ca core dametvā pabbājetvā satthu santikaṃ agamāsi. Satthā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhammaṃ desesi, desanāvasāne te bhikkhū arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Athāyasmā saṃkicco paripuṇṇavasso laddhūpasampado tehi pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ bārāṇasiṃ gantvā isipatane vihāsi. Manussā therassa santikaṃ gantvā dhammaṃ sutvā pasannamānasā vīthipaṭipāṭiyā vaggavaggā hutvā āgantukadānaṃ adaṃsu. Tattha aññataro upāsako manusse niccabhatte samādapesi, te yathābalaṃ niccabhattaṃ paṭṭhapesuṃ.

Puratova setena paleti hatthinā ("Ahead, he flees on a white elephant") This was said with reference to two brahmin ghosts while the Teacher was dwelling at Jetavana. It seems that Venerable Saṃkicca, having attained arahantship at the mere age of seven and remaining in the state of a novice, while dwelling in a forest hermitage with about thirty bhikkhus, even averted death that had come from the hands of five hundred robbers for those bhikkhus, and having tamed those robbers, ordained them and went to the presence of the Teacher. The Teacher taught the Dhamma to those bhikkhus, and at the end of the teaching, those bhikkhus attained arahantship. Then Venerable Saṃkicca, having reached full age and received ordination, went to Bārāṇasī with those five hundred bhikkhus and stayed at Isipatana. People, having gone to the presence of the Thera, heard the Dhamma, and with pleased minds, gave alms to the newcomers in turn, group by group. There, a certain lay follower urged the people to [offer] constant alms, and they established constant alms according to their ability.

Tena ca samayena bārāṇasiyaṃ aññatarassa micchādiṭṭhikassa brāhmaṇassa dve puttā ekā ca dhītā ahesuṃ. Tesu jeṭṭhaputto tassa upāsakassa mitto ahosi. So taṃ gahetvā āyasmato saṃkiccassa santikaṃ agamāsi. Āyasmā saṃkicco tassa dhammaṃ desesi. So muducitto ahosi. Atha naṃ so upāsako āha – ‘‘tvaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno niccabhattaṃ dehī’’ti. ‘‘Anāciṇṇaṃ amhākaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ samaṇānaṃ sakyaputtiyānaṃ niccabhattadānaṃ, tasmā nāhaṃ dassāmī’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ mayhampi bhattaṃ na dassasī’’ti? ‘‘Kathaṃ na dassāmī’’ti āha. ‘‘Yadi evaṃ yaṃ mayhaṃ desi, taṃ ekassa bhikkhussa dehī’’ti. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā dutiyadivase pātova vihāraṃ gantvā ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ ānetvā bhojesi.

And at that time, in Bārāṇasī, a certain brahmin with wrong views had two sons and a daughter. Among them, the elder son was a friend of that lay follower. He took him and went to the presence of Venerable Saṃkicca. Venerable Saṃkicca taught him the Dhamma. He was soft-hearted. Then that lay follower said to him, "Give constant alms to one bhikkhu." "It is not our brahmin's custom to give constant alms to the renunciates, the Sakyan monks, therefore I will not give." "What, will you not give alms even to me?" "How can I not give?" he said. "If so, give what you give to me to one bhikkhu." He agreed, saying "Good!", and on the second day, early in the morning, he went to the monastery, brought a bhikkhu, and fed him.

Evaṃ gacchante kāle bhikkhūnaṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā dhammañca suṇitvā tassa kaniṭṭhabhātā ca bhaginī ca sāsane abhippasannā puññakammaratā ca ahesuṃ. Evaṃ te tayo janā yathāvibhavaṃ dānāni dentā samaṇabrāhmaṇe sakkariṃsu garuṃ kariṃsu mānesuṃ pūjesuṃ. Mātāpitaro pana nesaṃ assaddhā appasannā samaṇabrāhmaṇesu agāravā puññakiriyāya anādarā acchandikā ahesuṃ. Tesaṃ dhītaraṃ dārikaṃ mātulaputtassatthāya ñātakā vāresuṃ. So ca āyasmato saṃkiccassa santike dhammaṃ sutvā saṃvegajāto pabbajitvā niccaṃ attano mātu-gehaṃ bhuñjituṃ gacchati. Taṃ mātā attano bhātu-dhītāya dārikāya palobheti. Tena so ukkaṇṭhito hutvā upajjhāyaṃ upasaṅgamitvā āha – ‘‘uppabbajissāmahaṃ, bhante, anujānātha ma’’nti. Upajjhāyo tassa upanissayasampattiṃ disvā āha – ‘‘sāmaṇera, māsamattaṃ āgamehī’’ti. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā māse atikkante tatheva ārocesi. Upajjhāyo puna ‘‘aḍḍhamāsaṃ āgamehī’’ti āha. Aḍḍhamāse atikkante tatheva vutte puna ‘‘sattāhaṃ āgamehī’’ti āha. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇi. Atha tasmiṃ antosattāhe sāmaṇerassa mātulāniyā gehaṃ vinaṭṭhacchadanaṃ jiṇṇaṃ dubbalakuṭṭaṃ vātavassābhihataṃ paripati. Tattha brāhmaṇo brāhmaṇī dve puttā ghītā ca gehena ajjhotthaṭā kālamakaṃsu. Tesu brāhmaṇo brāhmaṇī ca petayoniyaṃ nibbattiṃsu, dve puttā dhītā ca bhummadevesu. Tesu jeṭṭhaputtassa hatthiyānaṃ nibbatti, kaniṭṭhassa assatarīratho, dhītāya suvaṇṇasivikā. Brāhmaṇo ca brāhmaṇī ca mahante mahante ayomuggare gahetvā aññamaññaṃ ākoṭenti, abhihataṭṭhānesu mahantā mahantā ghaṭappamāṇā gaṇḍā uṭṭhahitvā muhutteneva pacitvā paribhedappattā honti. Te aññamaññassa gaṇḍe phāletvā kodhābhibhūtā nikkaruṇā pharusavacanehi tajjentā pubbalohitaṃ pivanti, na ca tittiṃ paṭilabhanti.

As time went on in this way, having seen the practice of the bhikkhus and having heard the Dhamma, his younger brother and sister became very devoted to the Dispensation and were fond of meritorious deeds. Thus those three people, according to their means, gave gifts and honored, respected, esteemed, and venerated the renunciates and brahmins. But their parents were faithless, displeased, disrespectful to renunciates and brahmins, and indifferent to meritorious deeds, without zeal. Relatives requested his daughter, the girl, for the son of her maternal uncle. Having heard the Dhamma in the presence of Venerable Saṃkicca, stirred with a sense of urgency, he went forth and always went to his mother's house to eat. His mother entices him with her brother's daughter, the girl. Then, longing for that, he approached his preceptor and said, "Venerable sir, I will disrobe; permit me." The preceptor, seeing the attainment of his potential, said, "Novice, wait about a month." He agreed, saying "Good!", and when a month had passed, he announced it in the same way. The preceptor again said, "Wait half a month." When half a month had passed, when it was said in the same way again, he said, "Wait a week." He agreed, saying "Good!". Then, within that week, the house of the novice's maternal aunt, with its roof destroyed, old and with weak walls, struck by wind and rain, collapsed. There, the brahmin, the brahmin woman, and the two sons, crushed by the house, died. Among them, the brahmin and the brahmin woman were reborn in the ghost realm, and the two sons and the daughter in the earth-bound deities. For the elder son, an elephant vehicle arose; for the younger, a mule chariot; for the daughter, a golden palanquin. And the brahmin and the brahmin woman, taking very large iron clubs, struck each other, and in the places struck, very large lumps arose, the size of pots, and in a moment, having ripened, they reached the point of bursting. They, splitting each other's lumps, overcome with anger, merciless, threatening with harsh words, drink pus and blood, but do not obtain satisfaction.

Atha sāmaṇero ukkaṇṭhābhibhūto upajjhāyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āha – ‘‘bhante, mayā paṭiññātadivasā vītivattā, gehaṃ gamissāmi, anujānātha ma’’nti. Atha naṃ upajjhāyo ‘‘atthaṅgate sūriye kālapakkhacātuddasiyā pavattamānāya ehī’’ti vatvā isipatanavihārassa piṭṭhipassena thokaṃ gantvā aṭṭhāsi. Tena ca samayena te dve devaputtā saddhiṃ bhaginiyā teneva maggena yakkhasamāgamaṃ sambhāvetuṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ pana mātāpitaro muggarahatthā pharusavācā kāḷarūpā ākulākulalūkhapatitakesabhārā aggidaḍḍhatālakkhandhasadisā vigalitapubbalohitā valitagattā ativiya jegucchabībhacchadassanā te anubandhanti.

Then the novice, overcome with longing, approached his preceptor and said, "Venerable sir, the days I promised have passed; I will go home; permit me." Then the preceptor, saying to him, "Come when the sun has set, on the waning fourteenth day," went a little behind the Isipatana monastery and stood. And at that time, those two sons of the gods, together with their sister, were going along that very path to attend a yaksha gathering, but their parents, with clubs in their hands, harsh-spoken, black in color, with disheveled, rough, fallen hair, like burned palm stumps, with pus and blood flowing, covered with sores, exceedingly disgusting and repulsive to see, were following them.

Athāyasmā saṃkicco yathā so sāmaṇero te sabbe gacchante passati, tathārūpaṃ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharitvā sāmaṇeraṃ āha – ‘‘passasi tvaṃ, sāmaṇera, ime gacchante’’ti? ‘‘Āma, bhante, passāmī’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi imehi katakammaṃ paṭipucchā’’ti. So hatthiyānādīhi gacchante anukkamena paṭipucchi. Te āhaṃsu – ‘‘ye pacchato petā āgacchanti, te paṭipucchā’’ti. Sāmaṇero te pete gāthāhi ajjhabhāsi –

Then Venerable Saṃkicca, having arranged the psychic power in such a way that the novice sees all those going, said to the novice, "Do you see these going, novice?" "Yes, venerable sir, I see." "Then ask them about the deeds they have done." He asked those going with the elephant vehicle etc., in order. They said, "Ask those ghosts who are coming behind." The novice addressed those ghosts with verses:

73.

73.

‘‘Puratova setena paleti hatthinā, majjhe pana assatarīrathena;

"Ahead, he flees on a white elephant, in the middle, on a mule chariot;
And behind, a maiden is carried on a palanquin, illuminating all ten directions.

74.

74.

‘‘Tumhe pana muggarahatthapāṇino, rudaṃmukhā chinnapabhinnagattā;

"But you, with clubs in your hands, with weeping faces, with broken and shattered bodies;
Having been human beings, what evil did you do, that you drink each other's blood?"

puratoti sabbapaṭhamaṃ.Setenāti paṇḍarena.Paletīti gacchati.Majjhe panāti hatthiṃ āruḷhassa sivikaṃ āruḷhāya ca antare.Assatarīrathenāti assatarīyuttena rathena paletīti yojanā.Nīyatīti vahīyati.Obhāsayantī dasa sabbaso disāti sabbato samantato sabbā dasa disā attano sarīrappabhāhi vatthābharaṇādippabhāhi ca vijjotayamānā.Muggarahatthapāṇinoti muggarā hatthasaṅkhātesu pāṇīsu yesaṃ te muggarahatthapāṇino, bhūmisaṇhakaraṇīyādīsu pāṇivohārassa labbhamānattā hatthasaddena pāṇi eva visesito.Chinnapabhinnagattāti muggarappahārena tattha tattha chinnapabhinnasarīrā.Pivāthāti pivatha.

Puratoti means first of all. Setenāti means white. Paletīti means goes. Majjhe panāti means between one riding an elephant and one riding in a palanquin. Assatarīrathenāti the meaning is he goes in a chariot yoked with mules. Nīyatīti means is carried. Obhāsayantī dasa sabbaso disāti means illuminating all ten directions from all around with her own bodily radiance and the radiance of clothes, ornaments, and so on. Muggarahatthapāṇinoti means those who have mallets in their hands, the hands being indicated by the term "hand," because the use of the hand is found in actions such as leveling the ground; thus, the term "hand" specifically indicates the hand itself. Chinnapabhinnagattāti means having bodies cut and broken in various places by the blow of the mallets. Pivāthāti means drink.

Evaṃ sāmaṇerena puṭṭhā te petā sabbaṃ taṃ

Thus, questioned by the novice, those departed spirits recounted all that

Pavattiṃ catūhi gāthāhi paccabhāsiṃsu –

Occurrence in four verses:

75.

75.

‘‘Puratova yo gacchati kuñjarena, setena nāgena catukkamena;

‘‘He who goes in front on an elephant, a white elephant with a fourfold gait,
That is our eldest son, having given donations, he is happy and rejoicing.

76.

76.

‘‘Yo yo majjhe assatarīrathena, catubbhi yuttena suvaggitena;

‘‘He who goes in the middle in a chariot yoked with mules, fitted with four and well-adorned,
That is our middle son, un-miserly, a giver, he shines forth.

77.

77.

‘‘Yā sā ca pacchā sivikāya nīyati, nārī sapaññā migamandalocanā;

‘‘She who is carried behind in a palanquin, a wise woman with deer-like, gentle eyes,
That is our youngest daughter, happy and rejoicing with half a share.

78.

78.

‘‘Ete ca dānāni adaṃsu pubbe, pasannacittā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ;

‘‘These gave donations in the past, with pleased minds, to ascetics and brahmins,
But we were miserly, revilers of ascetics and brahmins;
These give and are cared for, but we waste away, like a reed that is cut.’’

75.Tatthapuratova yo gacchatīti imesaṃ gacchantānaṃ yo purato gacchati. ‘‘Yoso purato gacchatī’’ti vā pāṭho, tassa yo eso purato gacchatīti attho.Kuñjarenāti kuṃ pathaviṃ jīrayati, kuñjesu vā ramati caratīti ‘‘kuñjaro’’ti laddhanāmena hatthinā.Nāgenāti, nāssa agamanīyaṃ anabhibhavanīyaṃ atthīti nāgā, tena nāgena.Catukkamenāti catuppadena.Jeṭṭhakoti pubbajo.

75. There, puratova yo gacchatīti means of those who are going, he who goes in front. Alternatively, the reading is ‘‘Yoso purato gacchatī,’’ meaning, he who is going in front. Kuñjarenāti means by an elephant named "kuñjara" because it wears away the earth (kuṃ pathaviṃ jīrayati), or it delights and wanders in groves (kuñjesu ramati carati). Nāgenāti means by a nāga, because for it there is nothing that cannot be reached or overcome (nāssa agamanīyaṃ anabhibhavanīyaṃ atthi). Catukkamenāti means with a four-legged gait. Jeṭṭhakoti means the eldest.

76-77.Catubbhīti catūhi assatarīhi.Suvaggitenāti sundaragamanena cāturagamanena.Migamandalocanāti migī viya mandakkhikā.Bhāgaḍḍhabhāgenāti bhāgassa aḍḍhabhāgena, attanā laddhakoṭṭhāsato aḍḍhabhāgadānena hetubhūtena.Sukhīti sukhinī. Liṅgavipallāsena hetaṃ vuttaṃ.

76-77. Catubbhīti means with four mules. Suvaggitenāti means with beautiful gait, with a graceful movement. Migamandalocanāti means having gentle eyes like a doe. Bhāgaḍḍhabhāgenāti means by half a share of a portion, because of giving half the share from what she obtained. Sukhīti means happy. This is said by a gender change.

78.Paribhāsakāti akkosakā.Paricārayantīti dibbesu kāmaguṇesu attano indriyāni ito cito ca yathāsukhaṃ cārenti, parijanehi vā attano puññānubhāvanissandena paricariyaṃ kārenti.Mayañca sussāma naḷova chinnoti mayaṃ pana chinno ātape khitto naḷo viya sussāma, khuppipāsāhi aññamaññaṃ daṇḍābhighātehi ca sukkhā visukkhā bhavāmāti.

78. Paribhāsakāti means accusers. Paricārayantīti means they direct their senses comfortably here and there in the divine sense pleasures, or they cause care to be taken by attendants, due to the residual effect of their meritorious deeds. Mayañca sussāma naḷova chinnoti means we, however, waste away like a reed cut and thrown in the sun, we become dried up and withered by hunger and thirst, and by beating each other with clubs.

Evaṃ attano pāpaṃ sampavedetvā ‘‘mayaṃ tuyhaṃ mātulamātulāniyo’’ti ācikkhiṃsu. Taṃ sutvā sāmaṇero sañjātasaṃvego ‘‘evarūpānaṃ kibbisakārīnaṃ kathaṃ nu kho bhojanāni sijjhantī’’ti pucchanto –

Having thus declared their evil deeds, they said, "We are your maternal uncles and aunts." Hearing that, the novice, stirred with emotion, wondering, "How can food be successfully prepared for those who commit such misdeeds?" asked:

79.

79.

‘‘Kiṃ tumhākaṃ bhojanaṃ kiṃ sayānaṃ, kathañca yāpetha supāpadhammino;

‘‘What is your food, what your resting place, how do you live, you of very evil nature?
Having ruined happiness in abundant, plentiful possessions, today you have attained suffering.’’

kiṃ tumhākaṃ bhojananti kīdisaṃ tumhākaṃ bhojanaṃ?Kiṃ sayānanti kīdisaṃ sayanaṃ? ‘‘Kiṃ sayānā’’ti keci paṭhanti, kīdisā sayanā, kīdise sayane sayathāti attho.Kathañca yāpethāti kena pakārena yāpetha, ‘‘kathaṃ vo yāpethā’’tipi pāṭho, kathaṃ tumhe yāpethāti attho.Supāpadhamminoti suṭṭhu ativiya pāpadhammā.Pahūtabhogesūti apariyantesu uḷāresu bhogesu santesu.Anappakesūti na appakesu bahūsu.Sukhaṃ virādhāyāti sukhahetuno puññassa akaraṇena sukhaṃ virajjhitvā virādhetvā. ‘‘Sukhassa virādhenā’’ti keci paṭhanti.Dukkhajja pattāti ajja idāni idaṃ petayonipariyāpannaṃ dukkhaṃ anuppattāti.

Kiṃ tumhākaṃ bhojananti means what kind of food is yours? Kiṃ sayānanti means what kind of resting place? Some read "Kiṃ sayānā," meaning what kind of beds, in what kind of bed do you lie? Kathañca yāpethāti means in what way do you live? "Kathaṃ vo yāpethā" is also a reading, meaning how do you live? Supāpadhamminoti means of exceedingly evil nature. Pahūtabhogesūti means while there were abundant, great possessions. Anappakesūti means not few, but many. Sukhaṃ virādhāyāti means by not doing meritorious deeds, the cause of happiness, having failed in happiness, having ruined it. Some read "Sukhassa virādhenā". Dukkhajja pattāti means today, now, this suffering of having fallen into the realm of departed spirits has befallen.

Evaṃ sāmaṇerena puṭṭhā petā tena pucchitamatthaṃ vissajjentā –

Thus questioned by the novice, the departed spirits, explaining the matter asked by him:

80.

80.

‘‘Aññamaññaṃ vadhitvāna, pivāma pubbalohitaṃ;

‘‘Striking one another, we drink pus and blood;
Drinking much, we are not satisfied, nor do we feel pleased.

81.

81.

‘‘Icceva maccā paridevayanti, adāyakā pecca yamassa ṭhāyino;

‘‘Thus, indeed, do beings lament, ungenerous, having passed away, they stand in Yama's realm;
Those who, knowing and obtaining possessions, do not enjoy them, nor do they perform meritorious deeds.

82.

82.

‘‘Te khuppipāsūpagatā parattha, pacchā ciraṃ jhāyare ḍayhamānā;

‘‘Tormented by hunger and thirst in the next world, later they languish for a long time, being burnt;
Having done deeds that bring suffering, they experience bitter fruits of suffering.

83.

83.

‘‘Ittarañhi dhanaṃ dhaññaṃ, ittaraṃ idha jīvitaṃ;

‘‘Truly, wealth and grain are insignificant, insignificant is life here;
Having known the insignificant as insignificant, a wise person should make an island (of good deeds).

84.

84.

‘‘Ye te evaṃ pajānanti, narā dhammassa kovidā;

‘‘Those people who thus understand, skilled in the Dhamma,
They do not neglect giving, having heard the words of the worthy ones.’’

Pañca gāthā abhāsiṃsu.

They spoke five verses.

80-81.Tatthana dhātā homāti dhātā suhitā tittā na homa.Nacchādimhaseti na ruccāma, na ruciṃ uppādema, na taṃ mayaṃ attano ruciyā pivissāmāti attho.Iccevāti evameva.Maccā paridevayantīti mayaṃ viya aññepi manussā katakibbisā paridevanti kandanti.Adāyakāti adānasīlā maccharino.Yamassa ṭhāyinoti yamalokasaññite yamassa ṭhāne pettivisaye ṭhānasīlā.Ye te vidicca adhigammabhogeti ye te sampati āyatiñca sukhavisesavidhāyake bhoge vinditvā paṭilabhitvā.Na bhuñjare nāpi karonti puññanti amhe viya sayampi na bhuñjanti, paresaṃ dentā dānamayaṃ puññampi na karonti.

80-81. There, na dhātā homāti means we are not satisfied, replete, or content. Nacchādimhaseti means we do not like, we do not produce liking, the meaning is that we do not drink it according to our liking. Iccevāti means just so. Maccā paridevayantīti means just like us, other beings who have committed evil deeds lament and cry. Adāyakāti means those who are ungenerous by nature, the miserly. Yamassa ṭhāyinoti means standing by nature in the realm of departed spirits in Yama's place, designated as the realm of Yama. Ye te vidicca adhigammabhogeti means those who, having found and obtained possessions which are productive of special happiness in the present and in the future. Na bhuñjare nāpi karonti puññanti means just like us, they neither enjoy themselves, nor do they do meritorious deeds consisting of giving, giving to others.

82.Te khuppipāsūpagatā paratthāti te sattā parattha paraloke pettivisaye jighacchāpipāsābhibhūtā hutvā.Ciraṃ jhāyare ḍayhamānāti khudādihetukena dukkhagginā ‘‘akataṃ vata amhehi kusalaṃ, kataṃ pāpa’’ntiādinā vattamānena vippaṭisāragginā pariḍayhamānā jhāyanti, anutthunantīti attho.Dukhudrānīti dukkhavipākāni.Anubhonti dukkhaṃ kaṭukapphalānīti aniṭṭhaphalāni pāpakammāni katvā cirakālaṃ dukkhaṃ āpāyikadukkhaṃ anubhavanti.

82. Te khuppipāsūpagatā paratthāti means those beings in the next world, in the realm of departed spirits, being overcome by hunger and thirst. Ciraṃ jhāyare ḍayhamānāti means they languish, being burnt by the fire of suffering caused by hunger and so on, and by the fire of remorse arising from saying, "We did not do good, we did evil." Dukhudrānīti means having painful results. Anubhonti dukkhaṃ kaṭukapphalānīti means having done evil deeds with undesirable results, they experience suffering, the suffering of the lower realms, for a long time.

83-84.Ittaranti na cirakālaṭṭhāyī, aniccaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ.Ittaraṃ idha jīvitanti idha manussaloke sattānaṃ jīvitampi ittaraṃ parittaṃ appakaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘yo ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.91; saṃ. ni. 1.145; a. ni. 7.74).Ittaraṃ ittarato ñatvāti dhanadhaññādiupakaraṇaṃ manussānaṃ jīvitañca ittaraṃ parittaṃ khaṇikaṃ na cirassanti paññāya upaparikkhitvā.Dīpaṃ kayirātha paṇḍitoti sapañño puriso dīpaṃ attano patiṭṭhaṃ paraloke hitasukhādhiṭṭhānaṃ kareyya.Ye te evaṃ pajānantīti ye te manussā manussānaṃ bhogānaṃ jīvitassa ca ittarabhāvaṃ yāthāvato jānanti, te dāne sabbakālaṃ nappamajjanti.Sutvā arahataṃ vacoti arahataṃ buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā, sutattāti attho. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.

83-84. Ittaranti means not lasting long, impermanent, subject to change. Ittaraṃ idha jīvitanti means in this human world, the life of beings is also insignificant, limited, and small. Therefore, the Blessed One said: "He who lives long, lives a hundred years, or a little more" (dī. ni. 2.91; saṃ. ni. 1.145; a. ni. 7.74). Ittaraṃ ittarato ñatvāti means having examined with wisdom that wealth, grain, and other equipment, and the life of humans, are insignificant, limited, momentary, and not lasting long. Dīpaṃ kayirātha paṇḍitoti means a wise person should make an island, his own support, a foundation of benefit and happiness in the next world. Ye te evaṃ pajānantīti means those people who truly know the insignificant nature of the possessions and life of human beings, they do not neglect giving at any time. Sutvā arahataṃ vacoti means having heard the word of the worthy ones, the Buddhas and other noble ones, having heard it well. The rest is clear.

Evaṃ te petā sāmaṇerena puṭṭhā tamatthaṃ ācikkhitvā ‘‘mayaṃ tuyhaṃ mātulamātulāniyo’’ti pavedesuṃ. Taṃ sutvā sāmaṇero sañjātasaṃvego ukkaṇṭhaṃ paṭivinodetvā upajjhāyassa pādesu sirasā nipatitvā evamāha – ‘‘yaṃ, bhante, anukampakena karaṇīyaṃ anukampaṃ upādāya, taṃ me tumhehi kataṃ, mahatā vatamhi anatthapātato rakkhito, na dāni me gharāvāsena attho, abhiramissāmi brahmacariyavāse’’ti. Athāyasmā saṃkicco tassa ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhi. So kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjanto nacirasseva arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Āyasmā pana saṃkicco taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Satthā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi, sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Thus, those departed spirits, having been asked by the novice, declared that matter and announced, "We are your maternal uncles and aunts." Hearing that, the novice, stirred with emotion, having dispelled his agitation, fell with his head at the feet of his preceptor and said thus: "Venerable sir, that which should be done by one who is compassionate, taking compassion as the basis, that has been done for me by you; I have been protected from a great fall into misfortune; now I have no need of the householder's life, I shall delight in the life of celibacy." Then, venerable Saṃkicca described a meditation subject suitable to his inclination. Practicing that meditation subject, before long he attained arahantship. Venerable Saṃkicca, however, announced that occurrence to the Blessed One. The Teacher, having made that the occasion for a discourse and creating an opening, extensively taught the Dhamma to the assembled company; that teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Nāgapetavatthuvaṇaṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Nāgapeta Vatthu is Finished.

12. Uragapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
12. Uragapeta Vatthu

Uragova tacaṃ jiṇṇanti idaṃ satthā jetavane viharanto aññataraṃ upāsakaṃ ārabbha kathesi. Sāvatthiyaṃ kira aññatarassa upāsakassa putto kālamakāsi. So puttamaraṇahetu paridevasokasamāpanno bahi nikkhamitvā kiñci kammaṃ kātuṃ asakkonto geheyeva aṭṭhāsi. Atha satthā paccūsavelāyaṃ mahākaruṇāsamāpattito vuṭṭhāya buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento taṃ upāsakaṃ disvā pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya tassa gehaṃ gantvā dvāre aṭṭhāsi. Upāsako ca satthu āgatabhāvaṃ sutvā sīghaṃ uṭṭhāya gantvā paccuggamanaṃ katvā hatthato pattaṃ gahetvā gehaṃ pavesetvā āsanaṃ paññapetvā adāsi. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Upāsakopi bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Taṃ bhagavā ‘‘kiṃ, upāsaka, sokapareto viya dissatī’’ti āha. ‘‘Āma, bhagavā, piyo me putto kālakato, tenāhaṃ socāmī’’ti. Athassa bhagavā sokavinodanaṃ karonto uragajātakaṃ (jā. 1.5.19 ādayo) kathesi.

Uragova tacaṃ jiṇṇanti This, the Teacher, while dwelling at Jetavana, spoke concerning a certain lay follower. It is said that in Savatthi the son of a certain lay follower died. Because of the death of his son, he was overwhelmed with grief and sorrow, and unable to go out and do any work, he stayed at home. Then, the Teacher, rising from the Great Compassion attainment at dawn, surveying the world with the Buddha-eye, saw that lay follower, and at forenoon time, having dressed, taking his bowl and robe, went to his house and stood at the door. The lay follower, hearing of the Teacher's arrival, quickly got up, went out to meet him, took the bowl from his hand, led him into the house, prepared a seat, and gave it to him. The Blessed One sat down on the prepared seat. The lay follower, having venerated the Blessed One, sat down to one side. The Blessed One said to him, "Why, lay follower, do you appear to be overwhelmed with sorrow?" "Yes, Blessed One, my beloved son has died, therefore I am grieving." Then the Blessed One, relieving his sorrow, related the Uraga Jātaka (jā. 1.5.19 ff.).

Atīte kira kāsiraṭṭhe bārāṇasiyaṃ dhammapālaṃ nāma brāhmaṇakulaṃ ahosi. Tattha brāhmaṇo brāhmaṇī putto dhītā suṇisā dāsīti ime sabbepi maraṇānussatibhāvanābhiratā ahesuṃ. Tesu yo gehato nikkhamati, so sesajane ovaditvā nirapekkhova nikkhamati. Athekadivasaṃ brāhmaṇo puttena saddhiṃ gharato nikkhamitvā khettaṃ gantvā kasati. Putto sukkhatiṇapaṇṇakaṭṭhāni ālimpeti. Tattheko kaṇhasappo ḍāhabhayena rukkhasusirato nikkhamitvā imaṃ brāhmaṇassa puttaṃ ḍaṃsi. So visavegena mucchito tattheva paripatitvā kālakato, sakko devarājā hutvā nibbatti. Brāhmaṇo puttaṃ mataṃ disvā kammantasamīpena gacchantaṃ ekaṃ purisaṃ evamāha – ‘‘samma, mama gharaṃ gantvā brāhmaṇiṃ evaṃ vadehi ‘nhāyitvā suddhavatthanivatthā ekassa bhattaṃ mālāgandhādīni ca gahetvā turitaṃ āgacchatū’ti’’. So tattha gantvā tathā ārocesi, gehajanopi tathā akāsi. Brāhmaṇo nhatvā bhuñjitvā vilimpitvā parijanaparivuto puttassa sarīraṃ citakaṃ āropetvā aggiṃ datvā dārukkhandhaṃ ḍahanto viya nissoko nissantāpo aniccasaññaṃ manasi karonto aṭṭhāsi.

It is said that in the past in the kingdom of Kasi, in Baranasi, there was a brahmin family named Dhammapala. There, the brahmin, his wife, son, daughter, daughter-in-law, and servant were all constantly practicing mindfulness of death. Of those, whoever went out from the house would advise the remaining people and go out without attachment. Then one day, the brahmin went to the field with his son and was plowing. The son was collecting dry grass, leaves, and sticks. There, a black snake, fearing the heat, came out of a tree hollow and bit this brahmin's son. He, overwhelmed by the force of the poison, fell down right there and died, and was reborn as Sakka, king of the gods. The brahmin, seeing his son dead, said to a man passing by near the work site: "Friend, go to my house and tell the brahmin woman thus: 'Having bathed and dressed in clean clothes, quickly come here taking food for one person, garlands, perfumes, and so on.'" He went there and announced it thus, and the people in the house did likewise. The brahmin, having bathed, eaten, and perfumed himself, surrounded by his attendants, placed his son's body on the pyre, lit the fire, and stood without sorrow or grief, contemplating impermanence in his mind, as if burning a log of wood.

Atha brāhmaṇassa putto sakko hutvā nibbatti, so ca amhākaṃ bodhisatto ahosi. So attano purimajātiṃ katapuññañca paccavekkhitvā pitaraṃ ñātake ca anukampamāno brāhmaṇavesena tattha āgantvā ñātake asocante disvā ‘‘ambho, migaṃ jhāpetha, amhākaṃ maṃsaṃ detha, chātomhī’’ti āha. ‘‘Na migo, manusso brāhmaṇā’’ti āha. ‘‘Kiṃ tumhākaṃ paccatthiko eso’’ti? ‘‘Na paccatthiko, ure jāto oraso mahāguṇavanto taruṇaputto’’ti āha. ‘‘Kimatthaṃ tumhe tathārūpe guṇavati taruṇaputte mate na socathā’’ti? Taṃ sutvā brāhmaṇo asocanakāraṇaṃ kathento –

Then, the brahmin's son, having been reborn as Sakka, reflecting on his former birth and the merit he had done, feeling compassion for his father and relatives, came there in the guise of a brahmin and, seeing his relatives not grieving, said, "Good sirs, you are burning a deer, give us the meat, we are hungry." "It is not a deer, brahmin, it is a human being," they said. "Was he an enemy of yours?" "He was not an enemy, he was a son born from our loins, virtuous, a young son," they said. "Why do you not grieve when such a virtuous, young son has died?" Hearing that, the brahmin, explaining the reason for not grieving:

85.

85.

‘‘Uragova tacaṃ jiṇṇaṃ, hitvā gacchati saṃ tanuṃ;

‘‘Just as a snake casts off its worn-out skin,
So, when beings die, the body is discarded, devoid of consciousness.

86.

86.

‘‘Ḍayhamāno na jānāti, ñātīnaṃ paridevitaṃ;

‘‘While being burned, he does not know the lamentation of relatives,
Therefore, I do not weep for him, he has gone according to his destiny.’’

Dve gāthā abhāsi.

He spoke two verses.

85-86.Tatthauragoti urena gacchatīti urago. Sappassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Tacaṃ jiṇṇanti jajjarabhāvena jiṇṇaṃ purāṇaṃ attano tacaṃ nimmokaṃ.Hitvā gacchati saṃ tanunti yathā urago attano jiṇṇatacaṃ rukkhantare vā kaṭṭhantare vā mūlantare vā pāsāṇantare vā kañcukaṃ omuñcanto viya sarīrato omuñcitvā pahāya chaḍḍetvā yathākāmaṃ gacchati, evameva saṃsāre paribbhamanto satto porāṇassa kammassa parikkhīṇattā jajjarībhūtaṃ saṃ tanuṃ attano sarīraṃ hitvā gacchati, yathākammaṃ gacchati, punabbhavavasena upapajjatīti attho.Evanti ḍayhamānaṃ puttassa sarīraṃ dassento āha.Sarīre nibbhogeti assa viya aññesampi kāye evaṃ bhogavirahite niratthake jāte.Peteti āyuusmāviññāṇato apagate.Kālakate satīti mate jāte.Tasmāti yasmā ḍayhamāno kāyo apetaviññāṇattā ḍāhadukkhaṃ viya ñātīnaṃ ruditaṃ paridevitampi na jānāti, tasmā etaṃ mama puttaṃ nimittaṃ katvā na rodāmi.Gato sotassa yā gatīti yadi matasattā na ucchijjanti, matassa pana katokāsassa kammassa vasena yā gati pāṭikaṅkhā, taṃ cutianantarameva gato, so na purimañātīnaṃ ruditaṃ paridevitaṃ vā paccāsīsati, nāpi yebhuyyena purimañātīnaṃ ruditena kāci atthasiddhīti adhippāyo.

85-86. There, urago means one that goes with the chest, i.e., urago. This is a designation for a snake. Tacaṃ jiṇṇa means old and worn out, due to being decrepit, its own skin, the slough. Hitvā gacchati saṃ tanu means just as a snake sheds its old skin from its body, as if unrolling a slough on a tree, wood, root, or stone, and having abandoned and discarded it, goes as it pleases; even so, a being wandering in Saṃsāra, due to the exhaustion of old karma, abandons its decrepit, worn-out body, goes according to its karma, and is reborn according to future existence; this is the meaning. Eva is said showing the body of the son being burned. Sarīre nibbhoge means when the body, like that of a horse, and of others, becomes devoid of enjoyment, useless. Pete means when he has passed away from life, warmth, and consciousness. Kālakate satī means when he has died. Tasmā means since the body being burned does not know the pain of burning or the weeping and lamentation of relatives because it is devoid of consciousness, therefore I do not weep taking this, my son, as a reason. Gato sotassa yā gatī means if beings who have died are not annihilated, then according to the karma of the deceased who has made opportunity, whatever destination is expected, he has gone there immediately after death; he does not expect the weeping or lamentation of former relatives, nor is any purpose generally achieved by the weeping of former relatives; this is the intention.

Evaṃ brāhmaṇena attano asocanakāraṇe kathite pariyāyamanasikārakosalle pakāsite brāhmaṇarūpo sakko brāhmaṇiṃ āha – ‘‘amma, tuyhaṃ so mato kiṃ hotī’’ti? ‘‘Dasa māse kucchinā pariharitvā thaññaṃ pāyetvā hatthapāde saṇṭhapetvā saṃvaḍḍhito putto me, sāmī’’ti. ‘‘Yadi evaṃ pitā tāva purisabhāvena mā rodatu, mātu nāma hadayaṃ mudukaṃ, tvaṃ kasmā na rodasī’’ti? Taṃ sutvā sā arodanakāraṇaṃ kathentī –

When the brahmin had spoken about his reason for not grieving and had revealed his skill in reflection on the appropriate method, Sakka in the form of a brahmin said to the brahmin woman, "My good woman, what was that dead person to you?" "Having carried him in my womb for ten months, having given him milk, having set up his hands and feet, my son was raised by me, O master," she said. "If so, the father, being of male nature, should not weep, but the heart of a mother is soft. Why do you not weep?" Hearing that, she, explaining the reason for not weeping, said:

87.

87.

‘‘Anabbhito tato āgā, nānuññāto ito gato;

"Uninvited he came from there, unasked he went from here;
As he came, so he has gone; what is the lamentation in this?"

88.

88.

‘‘Ḍayhamāno na jānāti, ñātīnaṃ paridevitaṃ;

"Burning, he does not know the lamentation of relatives;
Therefore, I do not weep for him; he has gone to his destiny."

anabbhitoti anavhāto, ‘‘ehi mayhaṃ puttabhāvaṃ upagacchā’’ti evaṃ apakkosito.Tatoti yattha pubbe ṭhito, tato paralokato.Āgāti āgañchi.Nānuññātoti ananumato, ‘‘gaccha, tāta, paraloka’’nti evaṃ amhehi avissaṭṭho.Itoti idhalokato.Gatoti apagato.Yathāgatoti yenākārena āgato, amhehi anabbhito eva āgatoti attho.Tathā gatoti tenevākārena gato. Yathā sakeneva kammunā āgato, tathā sakeneva kammunā gatoti. Etena kammassakataṃ dasseti.Tattha kā paridevanāti evaṃ avasavattike saṃsārapavatte maraṇaṃ paṭicca kā nāma paridevanā, ayuttā sā paññavatā akaraṇīyāti dasseti.

Anabbhito means uninvited, not summoned, "Come, take on the state of being my son." Tato means from there, from the other world where he previously stood. Āgā means he came. Nānuññāto means unpermitted, not released by us, "Go, dear one, to the other world." Ito means from this world. Gato means he has departed. Yathāgato means in what manner he came, he came uninvited by us. Tathā gato means in that very manner he has gone. Just as he came by his own karma, so he has gone by his own karma. By this, he shows ownership of karma. Tattha kā paridevanā means in such an uncontrollable cycle of Saṃsāra, what is the lamentation regarding death? It is inappropriate and should not be done by the wise; he shows.

Evaṃ brāhmaṇiyā vacanaṃ sutvā tassa bhaginiṃ pucchi – ‘‘amma, tuyhaṃ so kiṃ hotī’’ti? ‘‘Bhātā me, sāmī’’ti. ‘‘Amma, bhaginiyo nāma bhātūsu sinehā, tvaṃ kasmā na rodasī’’ti? Sāpi arodanakāraṇaṃ kathentī –

Having heard the brahmin woman's words, Sakka asked his sister, "My good woman, what was he to you?" "He was my brother, O master." "My good woman, sisters have affection for their brothers. Why do you not weep?" She, too, explaining the reason for not weeping, said:

89.

89.

‘‘Sace rode kissa assaṃ, tattha me kiṃ phalaṃ siyā;

"If I were to weep, I would become emaciated; what fruit would there be for me in that?
For relatives, friends, and companions, there would only be more displeasure."

90.

90.

‘‘Ḍayhamāno na jānāti, ñātīnaṃ paridevitaṃ;

"Burning, he does not know the lamentation of relatives;
Therefore, I do not weep for him; he has gone to his destiny."

sace rode kisā assanti yadi ahaṃ rodeyyaṃ, kisā parisukkhasarīrā bhaveyyaṃ.Tattha me kiṃ phalaṃ siyāti tasmiṃ mayhaṃ bhātu maraṇanimitte rodane kiṃ nāma phalaṃ, ko ānisaṃso bhaveyya? Na tena mayhaṃ bhātiko āgaccheyya, nāpi so tena sugatiṃ gaccheyyāti adhippāyo.Ñātimittasuhajjānaṃ, bhiyyo no aratī siyāti amhākaṃ ñātīnaṃ mittānaṃ suhadayānañca mama socanena bhātumaraṇadukkhato bhiyyopi arati dukkhameva siyāti.

Sace rode kisā assaṃ means if I were to weep, I would become emaciated, with a very dried-up body. Tattha me kiṃ phalaṃ siyā means in that weeping of mine regarding my brother's death, what fruit, what benefit, would there be? He would not come back to me by that, nor would he go to a good destination by that; this is the intention. Ñātimittasuhajjānaṃ, bhiyyo no aratī siyā means for our relatives, friends, and companions, by my grieving, there would be even more displeasure and suffering than the suffering of my brother's death.

Evaṃ bhaginiyā vacanaṃ sutvā tassa bhariyaṃ pucchi – ‘‘tuyhaṃ so kiṃ hotī’’ti? ‘‘Bhattā me, sāmī’’ti. ‘‘Bhadde, itthiyo nāma bhattari sinehā honti, tasmiñca mate vidhavā anāthā honti, kasmā tvaṃ na rodasī’’ti? Sāpi attano arodanakāraṇaṃ kathentī –

Having heard the sister's words, Sakka asked his wife, "What was he to you?" "He was my husband, O master." "Good woman, women have affection for their husbands, and when he is dead, they become widows and helpless. Why do you not weep?" She, too, explaining her reason for not weeping, said:

91.

91.

‘‘Yathāpi dārako candaṃ, gacchantamanurodati;

"Just as a child cries after the moon as it goes;
Even so is this, whoever grieves for the dead."

92.

92.

‘‘Ḍayhamāno na jānāti, ñātīnaṃ paridevitaṃ;

"Burning, he does not know the lamentation of relatives;
Therefore, I do not weep for him; he has gone to his destiny." - she spoke the two verses.

dārakoti bāladārako.Candanti candamaṇḍalaṃ.Gacchantanti nabhaṃ abbhussukkamānaṃ.Anurodatīti ‘‘mayhaṃ rathacakkaṃ gahetvā dehī’’ti anurodati.Evaṃsampadamevetanti yo petaṃ mataṃ anusocati, tassetaṃ anusocanaṃ evaṃsampadaṃ evarūpaṃ, ākāsena gacchantassa candassa gahetukāmatāsadisaṃ alabbhaneyyavatthusmiṃ icchābhāvatoti adhippāyo.

Dārako means a young child. Canda means the moon. Gacchanta means rising into the sky. Anurodatī means he cries, "Give me the wheel of my cart." Evaṃsampadameveta means whoever grieves for the dead, this grieving is just like that, of such a kind, like the desire to grasp the moon going through the sky, like wanting something unattainable; this is the intention.

Evaṃ tassa bhariyāya vacanaṃ sutvā dāsiṃ pucchi – ‘‘amma, tuyhaṃ so kiṃ hotī’’ti? ‘‘Ayyo me, sāmī’’ti. ‘‘Yadi evaṃ tena tvaṃ pothetvā veyyāvaccaṃ kāritā bhavissasi, tasmā maññe ‘sumuttāhaṃ tenā’ti na rodasī’’ti? ‘‘Sāmi, mā maṃ evaṃ avaca, na cetaṃ anucchavikaṃ, ativiya khantimettānuddayāsampanno yuttavādī mayhaṃ ayyaputto ure saṃvaḍḍhaputto viya ahosī’’ti. Atha ‘‘kasmā na rodasī’’ti? Sāpi attano arodanakāraṇaṃ kathentī –

Having heard the words of his wife, Sakka asked the slave woman, "My good woman, what was he to you?" "He was my master, O master." "If so, you must have been made to do menial tasks with beatings by him. Therefore, I suppose you do not weep, thinking, 'I am freed from him'?" "Master, do not say such a thing to me. This is not inappropriate, my master was exceedingly endowed with patience, loving-kindness, and compassion, and spoke justly. He was like a son raised on my lap." Then, "Why do you not weep?" She, too, explaining her reason for not weeping, said:

93.

93.

‘‘Yathāpi brahme udakumbho, bhinno appaṭisandhiyo;

"Just as an earthenware water pot, broken, cannot be rejoined;
Even so is this, whoever grieves for the dead."

94.

94.

‘‘Ḍayhamāno na jānāti, ñātīnaṃ paridevitaṃ;

"Burning, he does not know the lamentation of relatives;
Therefore, I do not weep for him; he has gone to his destiny."

yathāpi brahme udakubbho, bhinno appaṭisandhiyoti brāhmaṇa seyyathāpi udakaghaṭo muggarappahārādinā bhinno appaṭisandhiyo puna pākatiko na hoti. Sesamettha vuttanayattā uttānatthameva.

Yathāpi brahme udakubbho, bhinno appaṭisandhiyo means, brahmin, just as an earthenware water pot, broken by a blow from a hammer or the like, cannot be rejoined, it does not return to its original state. The rest here is straightforward in meaning, as stated above.

Sakko tesaṃ kathaṃ sutvā pasannamānaso ‘‘sammadeva tumhehi maraṇassati bhāvitā, ito paṭṭhāya na tumhehi kasiādikaraṇakiccaṃ atthī’’ti tesaṃ gehaṃ sattaratanabharitaṃ katvā ‘‘appamattā dānaṃ detha, sīlaṃ rakkhatha, uposathakammaṃ karothā’’ti ovaditvā attānañca tesaṃ nivedetvā sakaṭṭhānameva gato. Tepi brāhmaṇādayo dānādīni puññāni karontā yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā devaloke uppajjiṃsu.

Having heard their discussion, Sakka, with a pleased mind, said, "Good people, you have cultivated mindfulness of death. From now on, you do not need to do work such as plowing," and he filled their house with the seven treasures, and having advised them, "Be diligent, give alms, keep the precepts, perform the Uposatha observance," and having revealed himself to them, he went to his own abode. Those brahmins and others, doing meritorious deeds such as giving alms, after living as long as they lived, were reborn in the heavenly world.

Satthā imaṃ jātakaṃ āharitvā tassa upāsakassa sokasallaṃ samuddharitvā upari saccāni pakāsesi, saccapariyosāne upāsako sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahīti.

The Teacher, having brought forth this Jātaka, extracted the dart of sorrow from that lay follower, and then revealed the Truths. At the conclusion of the Truths, the lay follower was established in the fruit of Stream-entry.

Uragapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Uragapetavatthu is finished.

Iti khuddaka-aṭṭhakathāya petavatthusmiṃ

Thus, in the Petavatthu of the Khuddaka-Aṭṭhakathā,

Dvādasavatthupaṭimaṇḍitassa

which is adorned with twelve object-lessons,

Paṭhamassa uragavaggassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The meaning of the first chapter, the Uragavagga, is finished.

2. Ubbarivaggo

2. Ubbarivaggo

1. Saṃsāramocakapetivatthuvaṇṇanā
1. Saṃsāramocakapetivatthuvaṇṇanā

Naggādubbaṇṇarūpāsīti idaṃ satthari veḷuvane viharante magadharaṭṭhe iṭṭhakavatīnāmake gāme aññataraṃ petiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Magadharaṭṭhe kira iṭṭhakavatī ca dīgharāji cāti dve gāmakā ahesuṃ, tattha bahū saṃsāramocakā micchādiṭṭhikā paṭivasanti. Atīte ca kāle pañcannaṃ vassasatānaṃ matthake aññatarā itthī tattheva iṭṭhakavatiyaṃ aññatarasmiṃ saṃsāramocakakule nibbattitvā micchādiṭṭhivasena bahū kīṭapaṭaṅge jīvitā voropetvā petesu nibbatti.

Naggādubbaṇṇarūpāsī This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at the Veḷuvana, concerning a certain petī in the village of Iṭṭhakavatī in the Magadha country. It is said that in the Magadha country there were two villages named Iṭṭhakavatī and Dīgharāji, where many Saṃsāramocaka heretics lived. In the past, at the end of five hundred years, a certain woman was born in that very Iṭṭhakavatī in a certain Saṃsāramocaka family, and due to her heretical views, having deprived many insects and moths of life, she was reborn among the petas.

Sā pañca vassasatāni khuppipāsādidukkhaṃ anubhavitvā amhākaṃ bhagavati loke uppajjitvā pavattitavaradhammacakke anukkamena rājagahaṃ upanissāya veḷuvane viharante punapi iṭṭhakavatiyaṃyeva aññatarasmiṃ saṃsāramocakakuleyeva nibbattitvā yadā sattaṭṭhavassuddesikakāle aññāhi dārikāhi saddhiṃ rathikāya kīḷanasamatthā ahosi, tadā āyasmā sāriputtatthero tameva gāmaṃ upanissāya aruṇavatīvihāre viharanto ekadivasaṃ dvādasahi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ tassa gāmassa dvārasamīpena maggena atikkamati. Tasmiṃ khaṇe bahū gāmadārikā gāmato nikkhamitvā dvārasamīpe kīḷantiyo pasannamānasā mātāpitūnaṃ paṭipattidassanena vegenāgantvā theraṃ aññe ca bhikkhū pañcapatiṭṭhitena vandiṃsu. Sā panesā assaddhakulassa dhītā cirakālaṃ aparicitakusalatāya sādhujanācāravirahitā anādarā alakkhikā viya aṭṭhāsi. Thero tassā pubbacaritaṃ idāni ca saṃsāramocakakule nibbattanaṃ āyatiñca niraye nibbattanārahataṃ disvā ‘‘sacāyaṃ maṃ vandissati, niraye na uppajjissati, petesu nibbattitvāpi mamaṃyeva nissāya sampattiṃ paṭilabhissatī’’ti ñatvā karuṇāsañcoditamānaso tā dārikāyo āha – ‘‘tumhe bhikkhū vandatha, ayaṃ pana dārikā alakkhikā viya ṭhitā’’ti. Atha naṃ tā dārikā hatthesu pariggahetvā ākaḍḍhitvā balakkārena therassa pāde vandāpesuṃ.

Having experienced suffering from hunger, thirst, and so on for five hundred years, when our Blessed One arose in the world and set in motion the excellent Dhamma-wheel, she successively approached Rājagaha, and while he was dwelling in the Veḷuvana, again she was reborn in that very Iṭṭhakavatī in a certain Saṃsāramocaka family. When she was about seven or eight years old and able to play in the street with other girls, the venerable Sāriputta Thera, dwelling in the Aruṇavatī monastery near that village, one day passed by the gate of that village along the road with twelve monks. At that moment, many village girls, having come out of the village and playing near the gate, with pleased minds, and having seen the conduct of their parents, quickly came and saluted the Thera and the other monks with the five-point prostration. But that daughter of an unbelieving family, due to her long unfamiliarity with wholesome deeds, devoid of virtuous conduct, stood carelessly, like an unfortunate person. The Thera, seeing her past conduct, her present rebirth in a Saṃsāramocaka family, and her future fitness for rebirth in hell, knowing that "if she salutes me, she will not be reborn in hell, and even having been reborn among the petas, relying on me, she will obtain prosperity," moved by compassion, said to those girls, "You salute the monks, but this girl is standing like an unfortunate person." Then those girls, having taken her in their hands, dragged her and forcibly made her salute at the feet of the Thera.

Sā aparena samayena vayappattā dīgharājiyaṃ saṃsāramocakakule aññatarassa kumārassa dinnā paripuṇṇagabbhā hutvā kālakatā petesu uppajjitvā naggā dubbaṇṇarūpā khuppipāsābhibhūtā ativiya bībhacchadassanā vicarantī rattiyaṃ āyasmato sāriputtattherassa attānaṃ dassetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ disvā thero –

Later, when she came of age, she was given to a certain young man in a Saṃsāramocaka family in Dīgharāji, and having become fully pregnant, she died and was reborn among the petas. Naked, with a disfigured appearance, overcome by hunger and thirst, wandering about with a very repulsive appearance, at night she showed herself to the venerable Sāriputta Thera and stood to one side. Seeing her, the Thera said:

95.

95.

‘‘Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsi, kisā dhamanisanthatā;

"Naked, with a disfigured appearance, emaciated, covered with veins;
With protruding ribs, so thin, who are you standing here?"

dhamanisanthatāti nimmaṃsalohitatāya sirājālehi patthatagattā.Upphāsuliketi uggataphāsulike.Kisiketi kisasarīre. Pubbepi ‘‘kisā’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘kisike’’ti vacanaṃ aṭṭhicammanhārumattasarīratāya ativiya kisabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ sutvā petī attānaṃ pavedentī –

Dhamanisanthatā means with a body spread with a network of veins due to being without flesh and blood. Upphāsulike means with protruding ribs. Kisike means with a thin body. Having said "emaciated" earlier, the word "thin" is said again to show that she is extremely thin, with only bones, skin, and sinews. Hearing that, the petī, declaring herself, said:

96.

96.

‘‘Ahaṃ bhadante petīmhi, duggatā yamalokikā;

"I am a petī, venerable sir, unfortunate, a resident of the world of Yama;
Having done evil deeds, I have gone from here to the world of petas." - Having spoken the verse, again asked by the Thera:

97.

97.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil was done by body, speech, or mind?
By the result of what karma have you gone from here to the world of petas?"

Katakammaṃ puṭṭhā ‘‘adānasīlā maccharinī hutvā petayoniyaṃ nibbattitvā evaṃ mahādukkhaṃ anubhavāmī’’ti dassentī tisso gāthā abhāsi –

Asked about the karma she had done, showing that "having been uncharitable, immoral, and stingy, I was reborn in the realm of petas and am experiencing such great suffering," she spoke three verses:

98.

98.

‘‘Anukampakā mayhaṃ nāhesuṃ bhante, pitā ca mātā athavāpi ñātakā;

"There were no compassionate ones for me, venerable sir, neither father nor mother nor relatives;
Who would have urged me, 'Give alms, with a clear mind, to monks and brahmins'?"

99.

99.

‘‘Ito ahaṃ vassasatāni pañca, yaṃ evarūpā vicarāmi naggā;

"From here, for five hundred years, I wander about like this, naked;
Being consumed by hunger and thirst, this is the fruit of my evil karma."

100.

100.

‘‘Vandāmi taṃ ayya pasannacittā, anukampa maṃ vīra mahānubhāva;

"I salute you, venerable sir, with a clear mind, have compassion on me, hero, of great power;
And having given something to me, instruct me in whatever it may be, release me from misfortune, venerable sir."

98.Tatthaanukampakāti samparāyikena atthena anuggaṇhakā.Bhanteti theraṃ ālapati.Ye maṃ niyojeyyunti mātā vā pitā vā atha vā ñātakā edisā pasannacittā hutvā ‘‘samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ dadāhi dāna’’nti ye maṃ niyojeyyuṃ, tādisā anukampakā mayhaṃ nāhesunti yojanā.

98. There, anukampakā means those who favor with regard to the next world. Bhante is addressing the Thera. Ye maṃ niyojeyyu means mother or father or relatives, with such pleased minds, "Give alms to monks and brahmins," those who would urge me, such compassionate ones there were not for me; this is the connection.

99.Ito ahaṃ vassasatāni pañca, yaṃ evarūpā vicarāmi naggāti idaṃ sā petī ito tatiyāya jātiyā attano petattabhāvaṃ anussaritvā idānipi tathā pañcavassasatāni vicarāmīti adhippāyenāha. Tatthayanti yasmā, dānādīnaṃ puññānaṃ akatattā evarūpā naggā petī hutvā ito paṭṭhāya vassasatāni pañca vicarāmīti yojanā.Taṇhāyāti pipāsāya.Khajjamānāti khādiyamānā, bādhiyamānāti attho.

99. Ito ahaṃ vassasatāni pañca, yaṃ evarūpā vicarāmi naggā This petī said this recollecting her state as a petī from her third birth from here, with the intention that even now she wanders about like that for five hundred years. There, ya means because, due to not having done meritorious deeds such as giving alms, having become such a naked petī, from here I wander for five hundred years; this is the connection. Taṇhāyā means from thirst. Khajjamānā means being consumed, being afflicted; this is the meaning.

100.Vandāmi taṃ ayya pasannacittāti ayya, tamahaṃ pasannacittā hutvā vandāmi, ettakameva puññaṃ idāni mayā kātuṃ sakkāti dasseti.Anukampa manti anuggaṇha mamaṃ uddissa anuddayaṃ karohi.Datvā ca me ādisa yañhi kiñcīti kiñcideva deyyadhammaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ datvā taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ mayhaṃ ādisa, tena me ito petayonito mokkho bhavissatīti adhippāyena vadati. Tenevāha‘‘mocehi maṃ duggatiyā bhadante’’ti.

100. Vandāmi taṃ ayya pasannacittā means, "Venerable sir, I venerate you with a serene mind," showing that "Only this much merit can I do now." Anukampa manti means, "Accept me, have compassion for me, directing your kindness towards me." Datvā ca me ādisa yañhi kiñcī means, "Having given any offering to ascetics or brahmins, dedicate that merit to me, so that I may be liberated from this realm of ghosts." He speaks with this intention. Therefore, she says "mocehi maṃ duggatiyā bhadante".

Evaṃ petiyā vutte yathā so thero paṭipajji, taṃ dassetuṃ saṅgītikārehi tisso gāthā vuttā –

To show how the Elder responded to the ghost's words, the compilers of the Saṅgīti recited three verses –

101.

101.

‘‘Sādhūti so paṭissutvā, sāriputtonukampako;

"Hearing this, compassionate Sāriputta,
Having given a morsel to the monks, and a hand-sized piece of cloth,
And water from a bowl,
He dedicated the merit to her."

102.

102.

‘‘Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe, vipāko udapajjatha;

"Immediately upon the dedication,
The result arose;
Food, clothing, and drink,
This was the fruit of the offering."

103.

103.

‘‘Tato suddhā sucivasanā, kāsikuttamadhārinī;

"Then, pure, wearing clean garments,
Adorned in finest Kāsi silk,
With colorful clothes and ornaments,
She approached Sāriputta."

101-103.Tatthabhikkhūnanti bhikkhuno, vacanavipallāsena hetaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ālopaṃ bhikkhuno datvā’’ti keci paṭhanti.Ālopanti kabaḷaṃ, ekālopamattaṃ bhojananti attho.Pāṇimattañca coḷakanti ekahatthappamāṇaṃ coḷakhaṇḍanti attho.Thālakassa ca pānīyanti ekathālakapūraṇamattaṃ udakaṃ. Sesaṃ khallāṭiyapetavatthusmiṃ vuttanayameva.

101-103. There, bhikkhūnanti means "to a bhikkhu"; this is said by a reversal of words. Some read, "Having given a morsel to a bhikkhu." Ālopanti means a mouthful, meaning food just enough for one mouthful. Pāṇimattañca coḷakanti means a piece of cloth the size of one hand. Thālakassa ca pānīyanti means water filling one bowl. The rest is as has been said in the Khallāṭiya Petavatthu.

Athāyasmā sāriputto taṃ petiṃ pīṇindriyaṃ parisuddhachavivaṇṇaṃ dibbavatthābharaṇālaṅkāraṃ samantato attano pabhāya obhāsentiṃ attano santikaṃ upagantvā ṭhitaṃ disvā paccakkhato kammaphalaṃ tāya vibhāvetukāmo hutvā tisso gāthā abhāsi –

Then, venerable Sāriputta, seeing that ghost, with her senses delighted, with the color of her skin purified, adorned with divine clothes and ornaments, illuminating all around with her own radiance, having come near and standing close to him, wishing to reveal the fruit of her actions visibly to her, spoke three verses –

104.

104.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing beauty,
You stand, O deity;
Illuminating all directions,
Like a medicinal star."

105.

105.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what do you have such beauty,
By what does this prosper here for you;
And do those enjoyments arise for you,
Whatever is dear to the mind?"

106.

106.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, O deity of great power,
What merit did you do when you were a human being?
By what are you so radiant and powerful,
And your beauty shines in all directions?"

104.Tatthaabhikkantenāti atimanāpena, abhirūpenāti attho.Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena.Obhāsentī disā sabbāti sabbāpi dasa disā jotentī ekālokaṃ karontī. Yathā kinti āha‘‘osadhī viya tārakā’’ti. Ussannā pabhā etāya dhīyati, osadhānaṃ vā anubalappadāyikāti katvā ‘‘osadhī’’ti laddhanāmā tārakā yathā samantato ālokaṃ kurumānā tiṭṭhati, evameva tvaṃ sabbadisā obhāsentīti attho.

104. There, abhikkantenāti means exceedingly pleasing, beautiful. Vaṇṇenāti means with the color of the skin. Obhāsentī disā sabbāti means illuminating all ten directions, making them one light. How is it like what? He says, "osadhī viya tārakā". Because light is discerned by it, or because it is the giver of strength to medicinal herbs, the star, having obtained the name "osadhī," just as it stands making light all around, just so you are illuminating all directions, is the meaning.

105.Kenāti kiṃ-saddo pucchāyaṃ. Hetuatthe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ, kena hetunāti attho.Teti tava.Etādisoti ediso, etarahi yathādissamānoti vuttaṃ hoti.Kena te idha mijjhatīti kena puññavisesena idha imasmiṃ ṭhāne idāni tayā labbhamānaṃ sucaritaphalaṃ ijjhati nipphajjati.Uppajjantīti nibbattanti.Bhogāti paribhuñjitabbaṭṭhena ‘‘bhogā’’ti laddhanāmā vatthābharaṇādivittūpakaraṇavisesā.Ye kecīti bhoge anavasesato byāpetvā saṅgaṇhāti. Anavasesabyāpako hi ayaṃ niddeso yathā ‘‘ye keci saṅkhārā’’ti.Manaso piyāti manasā piyāyitabbā, manāpiyāti attho.

105. Kenāti the word "kiṃ" is for questioning. This is an instrumental case in the sense of a cause, meaning, "By what cause?" Teti means "to you." Etādisoti means "such as this," it is said, "as is seen now." Kena te idha mijjhatīti means, "By what special merit does the fruit of good conduct, obtainable by you now in this place, prosper and succeed?" Uppajjantīti means "arise." Bhogāti means, "by way of being used," possessions having obtained the name "bhogā", are special things such as clothes, ornaments, wealth, and equipment. Ye kecīti encompasses and gathers the possessions without remainder. For this indication is all-encompassing, just as "whatever formations." Manaso piyāti means "to be loved by the mind," pleasing to the mind.

106.Pucchāmīti pucchaṃ karomi, ñātuṃ icchāmīti attho.Tanti tvaṃ.Devīti dibbānabhāvasamaṅgitāya, devi. Tenāha ‘‘mahānubhāve’’ti.Manussabhūtāti manussesu jātā manussabhāvaṃ pattā. Idaṃ yebhuyyena sattā manussattabhāve ṭhitā puññāni karontīti katvā vuttaṃ. Ayametāyaṃ gāthānaṃ saṅkhepato attho, vitthārato pana paramatthadīpaniyaṃ vimānavatthuaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

106. Pucchāmīti means "I ask a question, I wish to know." Tanti means "you." Devīti means "O deity, being endowed with divine power." Therefore, he says "mahānubhāve". Manussabhūtāti means "having been born among humans, having attained the state of being human." This is said because, for the most part, beings standing in the state of being human do meritorious deeds. This is the meaning of these verses in brief, but in detail it should be understood in the same manner as said in the commentary on the Vimanavatthu in the Paramatthadīpanī.

Evaṃ puna therena puṭṭhā petī tassā sampattiyā laddhakāraṇaṃ pakāsentī sesagāthā abhāsi –

Then, being asked again by the Elder, the ghost, revealing the cause obtained for that attainment, spoke the remaining verses –

107.

107.

‘‘Uppaṇḍukiṃ kisaṃ chātaṃ, naggaṃ sampatitacchaviṃ;

"Emaciated, lean, and hungry,
Naked, with cracked skin;
The compassionate Sage in the world,
Saw me in such a wretched state."

108.

108.

‘‘Bhikkhūnaṃ ālopaṃ datvā, pāṇimattañca coḷakaṃ;

"Having given a morsel to the monks,
And a hand-sized piece of cloth,
And water from a bowl,
He dedicated the merit to me."

109.

109.

‘‘Ālopassa phalaṃ passa, bhattaṃ vassasataṃ dasa;

"Behold the fruit of a morsel,
I enjoy food for ten hundred years,
Fulfilling every desire,
With various flavorful curries."

110.

110.

‘‘Pāṇimattassa coḷassa, vipākaṃ passa yādisaṃ;

"Behold the result of a hand-sized piece of cloth,
Such as there are cloths
In the conquered territory of Nanda the king."

111.

111.

‘‘Tato bahutarā bhante, vatthānacchādanāni me;

"More abundant than that, Venerable Sir,
Are my clothes and coverings;
Made of Koseyya silk, wool, and linen,
And of cotton."

112.

112.

‘‘Vipulā ca mahagghā ca, tepākāsevalambare;

"And vast and very valuable,
They hang in the sky;
I wear that,
Whatever is dear to my mind."

113.

113.

‘‘Thālakassa ca pānīyaṃ, vipākaṃ passa yādisaṃ;

"Behold the result of a bowl of water,
Such as it is;
Deep and square,
Are the beautifully made ponds."

114.

114.

‘‘Setodakā suppatitthā, sītā appaṭigandhiyā;

"With white water, good landing places,
Cool and without bad smells,
Covered with lotuses and water lilies,
Filled with water-lily filaments."

115.

115.

‘‘Sāhaṃ ramāmi kīḷāmi, modāmi akutobhayā;

"I delight, I play, I rejoice,
Without fear from anywhere;
I have come to venerate the compassionate Sage in the world,
Venerable Sir."

107.Tatthauppaṇḍukinti uppaṇḍukajātaṃ.Chātanti bubhukkhitaṃ khudāya abhibhūtaṃ.Sampatitacchavinti chinnabhinnasarīracchaviṃ.Loketi idaṃ ‘‘kāruṇiko’’ti ettha vuttakaruṇāya visayadassanaṃ.Taṃ manti tādisaṃ mamaṃ, vuttanayena ekantato karuṇaṭṭhāniyaṃ maṃ.Duggatanti duggatiṃ gataṃ.

107. There, uppaṇḍukinti means one with paleness arisen. Chātanti means hungry, overcome by hunger. Sampatitacchavinti means one with skin of a torn and broken body. Loketi this is a showing of the object of compassion said in the word "kāruṇiko". Taṃ manti means "such as me," me who, in the manner said, is entirely the place of compassion. Duggatanti means "gone to a bad state."

108-109.Bhikkhūnaṃ ālopaṃ datvātiādi therena attano karuṇāya katākāradassanaṃ. Tatthabhattanti odanaṃ, dibbabhojananti attho.Vassasataṃ dasāti dasa vassasatāni, vassasahassanti vuttaṃ hoti. Accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.Bhuñjāmi kāmakāminī, anekarasabyañjananti aññehipi kāmetabbakāmehi samannāgatā anekarasabyañjanaṃ bhattaṃ bhuñjāmīti yojanā.

108-109. Bhikkhūnaṃ ālopaṃ datvātiādi is a showing of the deed done by the Elder out of his compassion. There, bhattanti means cooked rice, divine food is the meaning. Vassasataṃ dasāti means "ten centuries," it is said, "a thousand years." This is a locative case in the sense of continuous connection. Bhuñjāmi kāmakāminī, anekarasabyañjananti is construed as "I enjoy food with various tastes and curries, endowed with desires to be desired by others."

110.Coḷassāti deyyadhammasīsena tabbisayaṃ dānamayaṃ puññameva dasseti.Vipākaṃ passa yādisanti tassa coḷadānassa vipākasaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ passa, bhante. Taṃ pana yādisaṃ yathārūpaṃ, kinti ceti āha‘‘yāvatā nandarājassā’’tiādi.

110. Coḷassāti, by way of being the chief of gifts, he shows only the merit consisting of giving concerning that. Vipākaṃ passa yādisanti means, "Behold the fruit, known as the result of that giving of cloth, Venerable Sir." But how is that? He says, "yāvatā nandarājassā"tiādi.

nandarājānāma? Atīte kira dasavassasahassāyukesu manussesu bārāṇasivāsī eko kuṭumbiko araññe jaṅghāvihāraṃ vicaranto araññaṭṭhāne aññataraṃ paccekabuddhaṃ addasa. So paccekabuddho tattha cīvarakammaṃ karonto anuvāte appahonte saṃharitvāva ṭhapetuṃ āraddho. So kuṭumbiko taṃ disvā, ‘‘bhante, kiṃ karothā’’ti vatvā tena appicchatāya kiñci avuttepi ‘‘cīvaradussaṃ nappahotī’’ti ñatvā attano uttarāsaṅgaṃ paccekabuddhassa pādamūle ṭhapetvā agamāsi. Paccekabuddho taṃ gahetvā anuvātaṃ āropento cīvaraṃ katvā pārupi. So kuṭumbikā jīvitapariyosāne kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbattitvā tattha yāvatāyukaṃ dibbasampattiṃ anubhavitvā tato cavitvā bārāṇasito yojanamatte ṭhāne aññatarasmiṃ gāme amaccakule nibbatti.

Who is this nandarājā? It is said that in the past, among humans of ten thousand years of age, a certain householder living in Bārāṇasī, wandering on a walking tour in the forest, saw a Paccekabuddha in a forest area. That Paccekabuddha, doing robe-making work there, had begun to put it away, having gathered it together because there was not enough wind. Seeing him, that householder, having said, "Venerable Sir, what are you doing?", even though he said nothing due to his frugality, knowing that "the robe cloth is not enough," placed his upper robe at the feet of the Paccekabuddha and left. The Paccekabuddha, taking that, raising it in the wind, made a robe and wore it. That householder, at the end of his life, having died, was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, and having experienced divine prosperity there for as long as his life lasted, and having passed away from there, he was born in a certain village about a league from Bārāṇasī, in a minister's family.

Tassa vayappattakāle tasmiṃ gāme nakkhattaṃ saṅghuṭṭhaṃ ahosi. So mātaraṃ āha – ‘‘amma, sāṭakaṃ me dehi, nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmī’’ti. Sā sudhotavatthaṃ nīharitvā adāsi. ‘‘Amma, thūlaṃ ida’’nti. Aññaṃ nīharitvā adāsi, tampi paṭikkhipi. Atha naṃ mātā āha – ‘‘tāta, yādise gehe mayaṃ jātā, natthi no ito sukhumatarassa vatthassa paṭilābhāya puñña’’nti. ‘‘Labhanaṭṭhānaṃ gacchāmi, ammā’’ti. ‘‘Gaccha, putta, ahaṃ ajjeva tuyhaṃ bārāṇasinagare rajjapaṭilābhaṃ icchāmī’’ti. So ‘‘sādhu, ammā’’ti mātaraṃ vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā āha – ‘‘gacchāmi, ammā’’ti. ‘‘Gaccha, tātā’’ti. Evaṃ kirassā cittaṃ ahosi – ‘‘kahaṃ gamissati, idha vā ettha vā gehe nisīdissatī’’ti. So pana puññaniyāmena codiyamāno gāmato nikkhamitvā bārāṇasiṃ gantvā maṅgalasilāpaṭṭe sasīsaṃ pārupitvā nipajji. So ca bārāṇasirañño kālakatassa sattamo divaso hoti.

At the time he reached the proper age, a festival was proclaimed in that village. He said to his mother, "Mother, give me a cloth, I will play at the festival." She took out a freshly washed cloth and gave it to him. "Mother, this is coarse." She took out another and gave it to him, but he rejected that too. Then his mother said to him, "Dear, in such a house as we are born, we do not have the merit to obtain a cloth more fine than this." "I will go to the place where it can be obtained, Mother." "Go, son, today I wish for you to obtain kingship in the city of Bārāṇasī." He, saying "Good, Mother," venerating his mother, circumambulating her, said, "I am going, Mother." "Go, dear." It seems that such was her thought: "Where will he go? He will sit down in this or that house." But he, being urged on by the rule of merit, having gone out from the village, having gone to Bārāṇasī, lay down on the auspicious stone slab, having covered his head. And that was the seventh day of the king of Bārāṇasī's death.

Amaccā ca purohito ca rañño sarīrakiccaṃ katvā rājaṅgaṇe nisīditvā mantayiṃsu – ‘‘rañño ekā dhītā atthi, putto natthi, arājakaṃ rajjaṃ na tiṭṭhati, phussarathaṃ vissajjemā’’ti. Te kumudavaṇṇe cattāro sindhave yojetvā setacchattappamukhaṃ pañcavidhaṃ rājakakudhabhaṇḍaṃ rathasmiṃyeva ṭhapetvā rathaṃ vissajjetvā pacchato tūriyāni paggaṇhāpesuṃ. Ratho pācīnadvārena nikkhamitvā uyyānābhimukkho ahosi. ‘‘Paricayena uyyānābhimukho gacchati, nivattemā’’ti keci āhaṃsu. Purohito ‘‘mā nivattayitthā’’ti āha. Ratho kumāraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā ārohanasajjo hutvā aṭṭhāsi, purohito pārupanakaṇṇaṃ apanetvā pādatalāni olokento ‘‘tiṭṭhatu ayaṃ dīpo, dvisahassadīpaparivāresu catūsu mahādīpesu ekarajjaṃ kāretuṃ yutto’’ti vatvā ‘‘tūriyāni paggaṇhatha, punapi paggaṇhathā’’ti tikkhattuṃ tūriyāni paggaṇhāpesi.

And the ministers and the chaplain, having done the funeral rites for the king, sitting down in the royal courtyard, consulted, "The king has one daughter, he has no son, a kingdom without a king does not stand, let us send forth the chariot of fortune." They, having harnessed four Sindh horses of kumuda color, having placed the five kinds of royal insignia, headed by the white parasol, in the chariot itself, having sent forth the chariot, had musical instruments played behind it. The chariot, having gone out through the eastern gate, went towards the park. Some said, "Due to familiarity, it is going towards the park, let us turn it back." The chaplain said, "Do not turn it back." The chariot, having circumambulated the boy, stood ready for him to mount. The chaplain, removing the covering, looking at the soles of his feet, said, "Let this island stand, he is fit to rule a single kingdom in the four great islands in the two thousand islands," having said this, he had the musical instruments played, "Play them again, play them again," he had the musical instruments played three times.

Atha kumāro mukhaṃ vivaritvā oloketvā ‘‘kena kammena āgatattha, tātā’’ti āha. ‘‘Deva, tumhākaṃ rajjaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ rājā kaha’’nti? ‘‘Divaṅgato, sāmī’’ti. ‘‘Kati divasā atikkantā’’ti? ‘‘Ajja sattamo divaso’’ti. ‘‘Putto vā dhītā vā natthī’’ti? ‘‘Dhītā atthi, deva, putto natthī’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi karissāmi rajja’’nti. Te tāvadeva abhisekamaṇḍapaṃ katvā rājadhītaraṃ sabbālaṅkārehi alaṅkaritvā uyyānaṃ ānetvā kumārassa abhisekaṃ akaṃsu.

Then the boy, opening his mouth, looking around, said, "By what action have I come here, dear ones?" "O god, the kingdom comes to you." "Where is your king?" "He has passed away, lord." "How many days have passed?" "Today is the seventh day." "Is there no son or daughter?" "There is a daughter, O god, there is no son." "Then I will rule the kingdom." They, immediately making a pavilion for the anointing ceremony, having adorned the king's daughter with all ornaments, having brought her to the park, performed the anointing ceremony for the boy.

Athassa katābhisekassa satasahassagghanikaṃ vatthaṃ upanesuṃ. So ‘‘kimidaṃ, tātā’’ti āha. ‘‘Nivāsanavatthaṃ, devā’’ti. ‘‘Nanu, tātā, thūla’’nti? ‘‘Manussānaṃ paribhogavatthesu ito sukhumataraṃ natthi, devā’’ti. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ rājā evarūpaṃ nivāsesī’’ti? ‘‘Āma, devā’’ti. ‘‘Na maññe puññavā tumhākaṃ rājā (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.191) suvaṇṇabhiṅkāraṃ āharatha, labhissāmi vattha’’nti. Suvaṇṇabhiṅkāraṃ āhariṃsu. So uṭṭhāya hatthe dhovitvā mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā hatthena udakaṃ ādāya puratthimadisāyaṃ abbhukkiri. Tadā ghanapathaviṃ bhinditvā aṭṭha kapparukkhā uṭṭhahiṃsu. Puna udakaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇāya pacchimāya uttarāyāti evaṃ catūsu disāsu abbhukkiri. Sabbadisāsu aṭṭha aṭṭha katvā dvattiṃsa kapparukkhā uṭṭhahiṃsu. Ekekāya disāya soḷasa soḷasa katvā catusaṭṭhi kammarukkhāti keci vadanti. So ekaṃ dibbadussaṃ nivāsetvā ekaṃ pārupitvā ‘‘nandarañño vijite suttakantikā itthiyo mā suttaṃ kantiṃsūti bheriṃ carāpethā’’ti vatvā chattaṃ ussāpetvā alaṅkatapaṭiyatto hatthikkhandhavaragato nagaraṃ pavisitvā pāsādaṃ āruyha mahāsampattiṃ anubhavi.

Then they offered him a cloth worth a hundred thousand. He said, "What is this, dear ones?" "A garment to be worn, O god." "But, dear ones, is it not coarse?" "Among the clothes used by humans, there is nothing finer than this, O god." "Did your king wear such a garment?" "Yes, O god." "I do not think your king was virtuous (A. N. VIII, 1.1.191), bring a golden pitcher, I will obtain a cloth." They brought a golden pitcher. He, having stood up, having washed his hands, having rinsed his mouth, having taken water with his hand, sprinkled it in the eastern direction. Then, breaking through the solid earth, eight wish-fulfilling trees arose. Again, having taken water, he sprinkled it in the southern, western, and northern directions. In all directions, eight each, thirty-two wish-fulfilling trees arose. Some say that in each direction there were sixteen each, sixty-four wish-fulfilling trees. He, having worn one divine cloth, having covered himself with another, saying, "Proclaim by beat of drum that in the conquered territory of King Nanda, women who spin thread should not spin thread," having raised the parasol, mounted on the excellent elephant, adorned and prepared, having entered the city, having ascended to the palace, experienced great prosperity.

Evaṃ gacchante kāle ekadivasaṃ devī rañño sampattiṃ disvā ‘‘aho tapassī’’ti kāruññākāraṃ dassesi. ‘‘Kimidaṃ, devī’’ti ca puṭṭhā ‘‘atimahatī te, deva, sampatti. Atīte addhani kalyāṇaṃ akattha, idāni anāgatassa atthāya kusalaṃ na karothā’’ti āha. ‘‘Kassa dema? Sīlavanto natthī’’ti. ‘‘Asuñño, deva, jambudīpo arahantehi, tumhe dānameva sajjetha, ahaṃ arahante lacchāmī’’ti āha. Punadivase rājā mahārahaṃ dānaṃ sajjāpesi. Devī ‘‘sace imissāya disāya arahanto atthi, idhāgantvā amhākaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti adhiṭṭhahitvā uttaradisābhimukhā urena nipajji. Nipannamattāya eva deviyā himavante vasantānaṃ padumavatiyā puttānaṃ pañcasatānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ jeṭṭhako mahāpadumapaccekabuddho bhātike āmantesi – ‘‘mārisā nandarājā tumhe nimanteti, adhivāsetha tassā’’ti. Te adhivāsetvā tāvadeva ākāsenāgantvā uttaradvāre otariṃsu. Manussā ‘‘pañcasatā, deva, paccekabuddhā āgatā’’ti rañño ārocesuṃ. Rājā saddhiṃ deviyā āgantvā vanditvā pattaṃ gahetvā paccekabuddhe pāsādaṃ āropetvā tattha tesaṃ dānaṃ datvā bhattakiccāvasāne rājā saṅghattherassa, devī saṅghanavakassa pādamūle nipajjitvā ‘‘ayyā, paccayehi na kilamissanti, mayaṃ puññena na hāyissāma, amhākaṃ idha nivāsāya paṭiññaṃ dethā’’ti paṭiññaṃ kāretvā uyyāne nivāsaṭṭhānāni kāretvā yāvajīvaṃ paccekabuddhe upaṭṭhahitvā tesu parinibbutesu sādhukīḷitaṃ kāretvā gandhadāruādīhi sarīrakiccaṃ kāretvā dhātuyo gahetvā cetiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā ‘‘evarūpānampi nāma mahānubhāvānaṃ mahesīnaṃ maraṇaṃ bhavissati, kimaṅgaṃ pana mādisāna’’nti saṃvegajāto jeṭṭhaputtaṃ rajje patiṭṭhāpetvā sayaṃ tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbaji. Devīpi ‘‘raññe pabbajite ahaṃ kiṃ karissāmī’’ti pabbaji. Dvepi uyyāne vasantā jhānāni nibbattetvā jhānasukhena vītināmetvā āyupariyosāne brahmaloke nibbattiṃsu. So kira nandarājā amhākaṃ satthu mahāsāvako mahākassapatthero ahosī, tassa aggamahesī bhaddā kāpilānī nāma.

As time went on in this way, one day the queen, seeing the king's wealth, showed a gesture of compassion, saying, "Alas, ascetic!" When asked, "What is this, O Queen?" she said, "Great is your wealth, O King. In the past, you did good deeds, but now you do not perform meritorious deeds for the future." "To whom shall we give? There are no virtuous ones," he said. "Jambudīpa is not empty of arahants, O King. You should just prepare the alms, and I will find arahants," she said. The next day, the king prepared a great and valuable almsgiving. The queen, resolving, "If there are arahants in this direction, may they come here and accept our alms," lay down on her chest facing the northern direction. As soon as she lay down, Mahāpaduma Paccekabuddha, the eldest of the five hundred Paccekabuddhas who were the sons of Padumavatī, dwelling in the Himalayas, addressed his brothers, saying, "Venerable ones, King Nanda invites you; please accept his invitation." Having accepted, they immediately came through the air and descended at the northern gate. People announced to the king, "Five hundred Paccekabuddhas have arrived, O King." The king, together with the queen, came, paid homage, took their bowls, led the Paccekabuddhas up to the palace, and there gave them alms. After the meal, the king and queen prostrated themselves at the feet of the Saṅghatthera and the Saṅghanavaka respectively, and requested, "Venerable sirs, may you not be weary of the requisites, may we not diminish in merit. Please grant us the promise to reside here." Having obtained their promise, they had dwelling places built in the garden and attended to the Paccekabuddhas for as long as they lived. When they passed away, they had a proper funeral performed, carried out the bodily rites with sandalwood and other fragrant woods, took the relics, and established a cetiya, thinking, "Even for great and powerful beings like these great queens, death will occur; what then of those like me?" Filled with revulsion, he established his eldest son in the kingdom and himself took ordination as a hermit. The queen, thinking, "When the king has gone forth, what shall I do?" also went forth. Both dwelling in the garden, developed jhānas, spent their time in the bliss of jhāna, and at the end of their lives, were reborn in the Brahma realm. It is said that King Nanda was the great disciple of our Teacher, the Venerable Mahākassapa, and his chief queen was named Bhaddā Kāpilānī.

‘‘yāvatā nandarājassa, vijitasmiṃ paṭicchadā’’ti. Tatthavijitasminti raṭṭhe.Paṭicchadāti vatthāni. Tāni hi paṭicchādenti etehīti ‘‘paṭicchadā’’ti vuccanti.

"As far as Nanda's, in the conquered land, coverings." Here, "vijitasmiṃ" means in the kingdom. "Paṭicchadā" means clothes. They are called "paṭicchadā" because they cover (paṭicchādenti) with these.

111.Idāni sā petī ‘‘nandarājasamiddhitopi etarahi mayhaṃ samiddhi vipulatarā’’ti dassentī‘‘tato bahutarā, bhante, vatthānacchādanāni me’’tiādimāha. Tatthatatoti nandarājassa pariggahabhūtavatthatopi bahutarāni mayhaṃ vatthacchādanānīti attho.Vatthānacchādanānīti nivāsanavatthāni ceva pārupanavatthāni ca.Koseyyakambalīyānīti koseyyāni ceva kambalāni ca.Khomakappāsikānīti khomavatthāni ceva kappāsamayavatthāni ca.

111. Now, that ghost (petī), showing that "even more than Nanda's prosperity, my prosperity is greater," said, "Therefore, more abundant, Venerable, are clothes and coverings to me." Here, "tato" means, even from the clothes that were Nanda's possessions, more abundant are clothes and coverings to me, is the meaning. "Vatthānacchādanānī" means both clothes for wearing and clothes for covering. "Koseyyakambalīyānī" means both silk and woolen cloths. "Khomakappāsikānī" means both linen clothes and cotton clothes.

112.Vipulāti āyāmato ca vitthārato ca vipulā.Mahagghāti mahagghavasena mahantā mahārahā.Ākāsevalambareti ākāseyeva olambamānā tiṭṭhanti.Yaṃ yañhi manaso piyanti yaṃ yaṃ mayhaṃ manaso piyaṃ, taṃ taṃ gahetvā paridahāmi pārupāmi cāti yojanā.

112. "Vipulā" means extensive in length and width. "Mahagghā" means great and valuable in terms of great price. "Ākāsevalambare" means they stand hanging in the sky itself. "Yaṃ yañhi manaso piyaṃ" means whatever is pleasing to my mind, that I take and wear or cover myself with, is the connection.

113.Thālakassa ca pānīyaṃ, vipākaṃ passa yādisanti thālakapūraṇamattaṃ pānīyaṃ dinnaṃ anumoditaṃ, tassa pana vipākaṃ yādisaṃ yāva mahantaṃ passāti dassentī‘‘gambhīrā caturassā cā’’tiādimāha. Tatthagambhīrāti agādhā.Caturassāti caturassasaṇṭhānā.Pokkharaññoti pokkharaṇiyo.Sunimmitāti kammānubhāveneva suṭṭhu nimmitā.

113. "Of a bowl also, the water, the result see what it is like," showing that the merit of giving and approving of even just a bowlful of water, see how great the result is, she said, "Deep, square, and..." Here, "gambhīrā" means unfathomable. "Caturassā" means square in shape. "Pokkharañño" means lotus ponds. "Sunimmitā" means well-constructed as if by the power of karma.

114.Setodakāti setaudakā setavālukasamparikiṇṇā.Suppatitthāti sundaratitthā.Sītāti sītalodakā.Appaṭigandhiyāti paṭikūlagandharahitā surabhigandhā.Vārikiñjakkhapūritāti kamalakuvalayādīnaṃ kesarasañchannena vārinā paripuṇṇā.

114. "Setodakā" means with white water, scattered with white sand. "Suppatitthā" means with beautiful banks. "Sītā" means with cool water. "Appaṭigandhiyā" means without repulsive odors, with fragrant scents. "Vārikiñjakkhapūritā" means filled with water covered with the filaments of lotuses, blue lotuses, and so on.

115.Sāhanti sā ahaṃ.Ramāmīti ratiṃ vindāmi.Kīḷāmīti indriyāni paricāremi.Modāmīti bhogasampattiyā pamuditā homi.Akutobhayāti kutocipi asañjātabhayā, serī sukhavihārinī homi.Bhante, vanditumāgatāti, bhante, imissā dibbasampattiyā paṭilābhassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ tvaṃ vandituṃ āgatā upagatāti attho. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ tattha tattha vuttameva.

115. "Sāhaṃ" means that I. "Ramāmī" means I find delight. "Kīḷāmī" means I indulge my senses. "Modāmī" means I am joyful with the attainment of wealth. "Akutobhayā" means without any arising fear, I live freely and happily. "Bhante, vanditumāgatā" means, Venerable, I have come to pay homage to you, the cause of obtaining this divine prosperity. Whatever here is not separate in meaning has already been stated in its place.

Evaṃ tāya petiyā vutte āyasmā sāriputto iṭṭhakavatiyaṃ dīgharājiyanti gāmadvayavāsikesu attano santikaṃ upagatesu manussesu imamatthaṃ vitthārato kathento saṃvejetvā saṃsāramocanapāpakammato mocetvā upāsakabhāve patiṭṭhāpesi. Sā pavatti bhikkhūsu pākaṭā jātā. Taṃ bhikkhū bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi, sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Thus, when that ghost (petī) had spoken, Venerable Sāriputta, while dwelling in Iṭṭhakavatī, to the people of the two villages called Dīgharājī who had come to his presence, explaining this matter in detail, having roused their emotions, freed them from deeds that lead to the bondage of Saṃsāra, and established them in the state of being lay followers. That event became known among the monks. The monks reported that matter to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, making that matter the occasion, taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering, and that teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Saṃsāramocakapetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Saṃsāramocaka Petavatthu is finished.

2. Sāriputtattheramātupetivatthuvaṇṇanā
2. Sāriputtattheramātupetivatthuvaṇṇanā

Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsīti idaṃ satthari veḷuvane viharante āyasmato sāriputtattherassa ito pañcamāya jātiyā mātubhūtaṃ petiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Ekadivasaṃ āyasmā ca sāriputto āyasmā ca mahāmoggallāno āyasmā ca anuruddho āyasmā ca kappino rājagahassa avidūre aññatarasmiṃ araññāyatane viharanti. Tena ca samayena bārāṇasiyaṃ aññataro brāhmaṇo aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavanibbakayācakānaṃ opānabhūto annapānavatthasayanādīni deti. Dento ca āgatāgatānaṃ yathākālaṃ yathārahañca pādodakapādabbhañjanādidānānupubbakaṃ sabbābhideyyaṃ paṭipanno hoti, purebhattaṃ bhikkhū annapānādinā sakkaccaṃ parivisati. So desantaraṃ gacchanto bhariyaṃ āha – ‘‘bhoti, yathāpaññattaṃ imaṃ dānavidhiṃ aparihāpentī sakkaccaṃ anupatiṭṭhāhī’’ti. Sā ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā tasmiṃ pakkante eva tāva bhikkhūnaṃ paññattaṃ dānavidhiṃ pacchindi, addhikānaṃ pana nivāsatthāya upagatānaṃ gehapiṭṭhito chaḍḍitaṃ jarasālaṃ dassesi ‘‘ettha vasathā’’ti. Annapānādīnaṃ atthāya tattha addhikesu āgatesu ‘‘gūthaṃ khādatha, muttaṃ pivatha, lohitaṃ pivatha, tumhākaṃ mātu matthaluṅgaṃ khādathā’’ti yaṃ yaṃ asuci jegucchaṃ, tassa tassa nāmaṃ gahetvā niṭṭhuraṃ vadati.

"Naked, of unsightly form..." This was spoken by the Teacher while dwelling at Veḷuvana, concerning the ghost (petī) who was the mother of Venerable Sāriputta in his fifth previous existence. Once, Venerable Sāriputta, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, Venerable Anuruddha, and Venerable Kappina were dwelling in a certain forest retreat not far from Rājagaha. At that time, in Bārāṇasī, a certain brahmin was rich, wealthy, and possessed of great abundance, an open house to ascetics, brahmins, the poor, beggars, mendicants, and supplicants, giving food, drink, clothing, bedding, and so on. While giving, he treated those who came at the appropriate time and in the appropriate manner with all kinds of hospitality, beginning with water for the feet and foot massage, and before the meal, he respectfully served the monks with food and drink. Going to another country, he said to his wife, "Lady, without neglecting this established practice of giving, respectfully attend to it." She, having agreed, "Good," as soon as he had departed, cut off the established practice of giving to the monks. But to the travelers who had come to stay, she showed old rice thrown from the back of the house, saying, "Live here." When the travelers came there for food, drink, and so on, she would say harsh words, taking the names of whatever was impure and disgusting: "Eat feces, drink urine, drink blood, eat the brain of your mother."

Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā kammānubhāvukkhittā petayoniyaṃ nibbattitvā attano vacīduccaritānurūpaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavantī purimajātisambandhaṃ anussaritvā āyasmato sāriputtassa santikaṃ upasaṅkamitukāmā tassa vihāradvāraṃ sampāpuṇi, tassa vihāradvāradevatāyo vihārappavesanaṃ nivāresuṃ. Sā kira ito pañcamāya jātiyā therassa mātubhūtapubbā, tasmā evamāha – ‘‘ahaṃ ayyassa sāriputtattherassa ito pañcamāya jātīyā mātā, detha me dvārappavesanaṃ theraṃ daṭṭhu’’nti. Taṃ sutvā devatā tassā pavesanaṃ anujāniṃsu. Sā pavisitvā caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ ṭhatvā therassa attānaṃ dassesi. Thero taṃ disvā karuṇāya sañcoditamānaso hutvā –

She, after some time, having died, propelled by the power of her karma, was reborn in the realm of ghosts (petas), experiencing suffering in accordance with her verbal misconduct. Remembering her connection from her previous life, desiring to approach Venerable Sāriputta, she arrived at the gate of his monastery, but the deities of the monastery gate prevented her from entering the monastery. She had been the mother of the Thera in his fifth previous existence, therefore she said this: "I am the mother of the Venerable Sāriputta in his fifth previous existence. Give me entrance to see the Thera." Hearing that, the deities permitted her entrance. Having entered, standing at the end of the cloister, she showed herself to the Thera. The Thera, his mind stirred by compassion, asked in a verse:

116.

116.

‘‘Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsi, kisā dhamanisanthatā;

"Naked, of unsightly form you are,
Lean, with veins spread out;
With protruding ribs, emaciated, gaunt, who are you standing here?"

Gāthāya pucchi. Sā therena puṭṭhā paṭivacanaṃ dentī –

Asked by the Thera, she, giving a reply, said:

117.

117.

‘‘Ahaṃ te sakiyā mātā, pubbe aññāsu jātīsu;

"I am your own mother,
In former different births;
Born into the realm of ghosts,
Afflicted with hunger and thirst.

118.

118.

‘‘Chaḍḍitaṃ khipitaṃ kheḷaṃ, siṅghāṇikaṃ silesumaṃ;

"That which is discarded, spat out, phlegm,
Nasal mucus, and mucus;
The fat of those being burned,
And the blood of those who have given birth.

119.

119.

‘‘Vaṇikānañca yaṃ ghāna-sīsacchinnāna lohitaṃ;

"And the blood of those whose noses or heads have been cut off due to wounds;
Overcome by hunger, I eat that which is discharged by men and women.

120.

120.

‘‘Pubbalohitaṃ bhakkhāmi, pasūnaṃ mānusāna ca;

"I eat pus and blood, of animals and humans;
Without shelter, without a home, devoted to charnel grounds.

121.

121.

‘‘Dehi puttaka me dānaṃ, datvā anvādisāhi me;

"Give me alms, dear son, having given, dedicate it to me;
Perhaps I may be freed from eating pus and blood,"—she spoke five verses.

117.Tatthaahaṃ te sakiyā mātāti ahaṃ tuyhaṃ jananibhāvato sakiyā mātā.Pubbe aññāsu jātīsūti mātā hontīpi na imissaṃ jātiyaṃ, atha kho pubbe aññāsu jātīsu, ito pañcamiyanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Upapannā pettivisayanti paṭisandhivasena petalokaṃ upagatā.Khuppipāsasamappitāti khudāya ca pipāsāya ca abhibhūtā, nirantaraṃ jighacchāpipāsāhi abhibhuyyamānāti attho.

117. Here, "ahaṃ te sakiyā mātā" means I am your own mother in terms of giving birth. "Pubbe aññāsu jātīsū" means even being a mother, not in this life, but in former different births, it should be seen as in the fifth previous existence. "Upapannā pettivisayaṃ" means having gone to the realm of ghosts by way of rebirth. "Khuppipāsasamappitā" means afflicted by hunger and thirst, constantly overcome by hunger and thirst, is the meaning.

118-119.Chaḍḍitanti ucchiṭṭhakaṃ, vantanti attho.Khipitanti khipitena saddhiṃ mukhato nikkhantamalaṃ.Kheḷanti niṭṭhubhaṃ.Siṅghāṇikanti matthaluṅgato vissanditvā nāsikāya nikkhantamalaṃ.Silesumanti semhaṃ.Vasañca ḍayhamānānanti citakasmiṃ ḍayhamānānaṃ kaḷevarānaṃ vasātelañca.Vijātānañca lohitanti pasūtānaṃ itthīnaṃ lohitaṃ, gabbhamalaṃ ca-saddena saṅgaṇhāti.Vaṇikānanti sañjātavaṇānaṃ.Yanti yaṃ lohitanti sambandho.Ghānasīsacchinnānanti ghānacchinnānaṃ sīsacchinnānañca yaṃ lohitaṃ, taṃ bhuñjāmīti yojanā. Desanāsīsametaṃ ‘‘ghānasīsacchinnāna’’nti, yasmā hatthapādādicchinnānampi lohitaṃ bhuñjāmiyeva. Tathā ‘‘vaṇikāna’’nti iminā tesampi lohitaṃ saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Khudāparetāti jighacchābhibhūtā hutvā.Itthipurisanissitanti itthipurisasarīranissitaṃ yathāvuttaṃ aññañca cammamaṃsanhārupubbādikaṃ paribhuñjāmīti dasseti.

118-119. "Chaḍḍitaṃ" means leftovers, vomit is the meaning. "Khipitaṃ" means impurities that come out of the mouth with spitting. "Kheḷaṃ" means spittle. "Siṅghāṇikaṃ" means impurities that drip from the brain and come out of the nose. "Silesumaṃ" means phlegm. "Vasañca ḍayhamānānaṃ" means the fat and oil of corpses burning on the pyre. "Vijātānañca lohitaṃ" means the blood of women who have given birth, and also includes the placenta by the word "ca". "Vaṇikānaṃ" means of those with wounds. "Yaṃ" is connected to "yaṃ lohitaṃ" (whatever blood). "Ghānasīsacchinnānaṃ" means the blood of those whose noses have been cut off and those whose heads have been cut off, that I eat, is the connection. "Ghānasīsacchinnānaṃ" includes the head of the teaching, since I eat the blood of those whose hands, feet, etc., have been cut off as well. Thus, it should be seen that by "vaṇikānaṃ," the blood of those (with wounds) is also included. "Khudāparetā" means having been overcome by hunger. "Itthipurisanissitaṃ" shows that I consume the aforementioned and other pus, blood, skin, flesh, tendons, etc., that come from the bodies of men and women.

120-121.Pasūnanti ajagomahiṃsādīnaṃ.Aleṇāti asaraṇā.Anagārāti anāvāsā.Nīlamañcaparāyaṇāti susāne chaḍḍitamalamañcasayanā. Atha vānīlāti chārikaṅgārabahulā susānabhūmi adhippetā, taṃyeva mañcaṃ viya adhisayanāti attho.Anvādisāhimeti yathā dinnaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ mayhaṃ upakappati, tathā uddisa pattidānaṃ dehi.Appeva nāma mucceyyaṃ, pubbalohitabhojanāti tava uddisanena etasmā pubbalohitabhojanā petajīvikā api nāma mucceyyaṃ.

120-121. "Pasūnaṃ" means of goats, cows, buffaloes, etc. "Aleṇā" means without refuge. "Anagārā" means without a dwelling. "Nīlamañcaparāyaṇā" means beds or couches of refuse discarded in the cemetery. Or "nīlā" means the charnel ground, which is full of ashes and embers, is intended, and that itself is like a couch to lie on, is the meaning. "Anvādisāhi me" means dedicate the giving in such a way that the alms given are suitable for me. "Appeva nāma mucceyyaṃ, pubbalohitabhojanā" means perhaps by your dedication, I may be freed from this life of eating pus and blood.

Taṃ sutvā āyasmā sāriputtatthero dutiyadivase mahāmoggallānattherādike tayo there āmantetvā tehi saddhiṃ rājagahe piṇḍāya caranto rañño bimbisārassa nivesanaṃ agamāsi. Rājā there disvā vanditvā ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, āgatatthā’’ti āgamanakāraṇaṃ pucchi. Āyasmā mahāmoggallāno taṃ pavattiṃ rañño ārocesi. Rājā ‘‘aññātaṃ, bhante’’ti vatvā there vissajjetvā sabbakammikaṃ amaccaṃ pakkosāpetvā āṇāpesi ‘‘nagarassa avidūre vivitte chāyūdakasampanne ṭhāne catasso kuṭiyo kārehī’’ti. Antepure ca pahonakavisesavasena tidhā vibhajitvā catasso kuṭiyo paṭicchāpesi, sayañca tattha gantvā kātabbayuttakaṃ akāsi. Niṭṭhitāsu kuṭikāsu sabbaṃ balikaraṇaṃ sajjāpetvā annapānavatthādīni buddhappamukhassa cātuddisassa bhikkhusaṅghassa anucchavike sabbaparikkhāre ca upaṭṭhāpetvā āyasmato sāriputtattherassa taṃ sabbaṃ niyyādesi. Atha thero taṃ petiṃ uddissa taṃ sabbaṃ buddhappamukhassa cātuddisassa bhikkhusaṅghassa adāsi. Sā petī taṃ anumoditvā devaloke nibbattitvā sabbakāmasamiddhā ca hutvā aparadivase āyasmato mahāmoggallānattherassa santikaṃ upagantvā vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ thero paṭipucchi, sā attano petūpapattiṃ puna devūpapattiñca vitthārato kathesi. Tena vuttaṃ –

Hearing that, Venerable Sāriputta, the next day, having invited Venerable Mahāmoggallāna and three other Theras, while wandering for alms in Rājagaha with them, went to the residence of King Bimbisāra. The king, seeing the Theras, paid homage and asked, "What is the reason for your coming, Venerable?" Venerable Mahāmoggallāna told the king that event. The king, saying, "Unknown, Venerable," having dismissed the Theras, summoned all the administrative officials and ordered, "Build four huts in a secluded place not far from the city, endowed with shade and water." In the inner palace, having divided it into three according to sufficient distinctions, he had four huts prepared, and himself went there and did what was appropriate. When the huts were completed, having prepared all the offerings, and having provided food, drink, clothing, and other requisites and all the suitable equipment for the Saṅgha headed by the Buddha and for the four directions, he entrusted all that to Venerable Sāriputta. Then the Thera, dedicating it to that ghost (petī), gave all that to the Saṅgha headed by the Buddha and to the four directions. That ghost (petī), approving of it, was reborn in the world of the devas, and having become endowed with all desirable things, on the following day, approaching Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, paid homage and stood there. The Thera questioned her, and she described in detail her rebirth as a ghost (petī) and again her rebirth among the devas. Therefore, it was said:

122.

122.

‘‘Mātuyā vacanaṃ sutvā, upatissonukampako;

"Having heard the words of his mother, Upatissa, full of compassion,
Invited Moggallāna, Anuruddha, and Kappina.

123.

123.

‘‘Catasso kuṭiyo katvā, saṅghe cātuddise adā;

"Having made four dwellings, she gave to the Sangha in the four directions;
Dwellings, food, and drink, she gave as alms to her mother."

124.

124.

‘‘Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe, vipāko udapajjatha;

"Immediately upon giving, the result arose;
Food, drink, and clothing, this is the fruit of alms."

125.

125.

‘‘Tato suddhā sucivasanā, kāsikuttamadhārinī;

"Then, pure, wearing clean garments, adorned in the finest Kāsika cloth,
Adorned with various clothes and ornaments, she approached Kolika."

123.Tatthasaṅghe cātuddise adāti cātuddisassa saṅghassa adāsi, niyyādesīti attho. Sesaṃ vuttatthameva.

123. There, saṅghe cātuddise adā means she gave to the Sangha in the four directions, she bestowed, is the meaning. The rest is as previously stated.

Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno taṃ petiṃ –

Then Venerable Mahāmoggallāna asked that peta:

126.

126.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing beauty, you stand, O deity;
Illuminating all directions, like a star among herbs.

127.

127.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, tena te idha mijjhati;

"By what deed do you have such beauty, by what does this succeed for you here?
And these enjoyments arise for you, whatever is dear to the mind.

128.

128.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, O deity of great power, what meritorious deed did you do as a human being?
By what are you so radiant with power,
And your beauty shines in all directions?" - he asked;

129-133.Atha sā‘‘sāriputtassāhaṃ mātā’’tiādinā vissajjesi. Sesaṃ vuttatthameva. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi, sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

129-133. Then she replied beginning with "sāriputtassāhaṃ mātā". The rest is as previously stated. Then Venerable Mahāmoggallāna announced that occurrence to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, making that matter the reason for a discourse, taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering; that teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Sāriputtattheramātupetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Story of the Peta, Mother of Sāriputta, is Finished.

3. Mattāpetivatthuvaṇṇanā
3. Mattāpetivatthuvaṇṇanā

Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsīti idaṃ satthari jetavane viharante mattaṃ nāma petiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Sāvatthiyaṃ kira aññataro kuṭumbiko saddho pasanno ahosi. Tassa bhariyā assaddhā appasannā kodhanā vañjhā ca ahosi nāmena mattā nāma. Atha so kuṭumbiko kulavaṃsūpacchedanabhayena sadisakulato tissaṃ nāma aññaṃ kaññaṃ ānesi. Sā ahosi saddhā pasannā sāmino ca piyā manāpā, sā nacirasseva gabbhinī hutvā dasamāsaccayena puttaṃ vijāyi, ‘‘bhūto’’tissa nāmaṃ ahosi. Sā gehassāminī hutvā cattāro bhikkhū sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahi, vañjhā pana taṃ usūyati.

Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsī (Naked, of unsightly form) This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning a peta named Mattā. It seems that in Sāvatthi, a certain householder was faithful and devoted. His wife was unfaithful, undevoted, angry, and barren, named Mattā. Then that householder, fearing the break in the family lineage, brought another maiden named Tissā from a family of similar status. She was faithful and devoted, and dear and pleasing to her husband, and before long, becoming pregnant, she gave birth to a son after ten months, his name was Bhūta. She, as the mistress of the house, diligently attended to four monks, but the barren woman was jealous of her.

Tā ubhopi ekasmiṃ divase sīsaṃ nhatvā allakesā aṭṭhaṃsu, kuṭumbiko guṇavasena tissāya ābaddhasineho manuññena hadayena tāya saddhiṃ bahuṃ sallapanto aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ asahamānā mattā issāpakatā gehe sammajjitvā ṭhapitaṃ saṅkāraṃ tissāya matthake okiri. Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā petayoniyaṃ nibbattitvā attano kammabalena pañcavidhaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavati. Taṃ pana dukkhaṃ pāḷito eva viññāyati. Athekadivasaṃ sā petī sañjhāya vītivattāya gehassa piṭṭhipasse nhāyantiyā tissāya attānaṃ dassesi. Taṃ disvā tissā –

Both of them, one day, having washed their heads, stood with wet hair, the householder, with affection attached to Tissā because of her good qualities, stood conversing with her at length with a pleasing heart. Mattā, unable to bear this, overcome with jealousy, swept the house and poured the rubbish that had been collected onto Tissā's head. She, at another time, having died, was reborn in the realm of petas, and by the power of her own deeds, she experienced five kinds of suffering. But that suffering is known only in the Pali. Then one day, that peta, after sunset, showed herself to Tissā, who was bathing at the back of the house. Seeing her, Tissā -

134.

134.

‘‘Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsi, kisā dhamanisanthatā;

"Naked, of unsightly form, emaciated, with veins spread out,
With protruding ribs, how thin, who are you standing here?" -

Gāthāya paṭipucchi. Itarā –

She asked in verse. The other one -

135.

135.

‘‘Ahaṃ mattā tuvaṃ tissā, sapattī te pure ahuṃ;

"I am Mattā, you are Tissā, I was your co-wife before;
Having done evil deeds, I have gone from here to the world of petas." -

ahaṃ mattā tuvaṃ tissāti ahaṃ mattā nāma, tuvaṃ tissā nāma.Pureti purimattabhāve.Teti tuyhaṃ sapattī ahuṃ, ahosinti attho. Puna tissā –

ahaṃ mattā tuvaṃ tissā means I am named Mattā, you are named Tissā. Pure means in a former existence. Te means I was your co-wife, is the meaning. Again, Tissā -

136.

136.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil deed was done by body, speech, or mind?
By the result of what deed have you gone from here to the world of petas?" -

Gāthāya katakammaṃ pucchi. Puna itarā –

In the verse, she asked about the deed that was done. Again, the other one -

137.

137.

‘‘Caṇḍī ca pharusā cāsiṃ, issukī maccharī saṭhā;

"I was fierce and harsh, envious, miserly, and deceitful;
Having spoken harsh words, I have gone from here to the world of petas." -

caṇḍīti kodhanā.Pharusāti pharusavacanā.Āsinti ahosiṃ.Tāhanti taṃ ahaṃ.Duruttanti dubbhāsitaṃ niratthakavacanaṃ. Ito parampi tāsaṃ vacanapaṭivacanavaseneva gāthā pavattā –

caṇḍī means angry. Pharusā means harsh-spoken. Āsi means I was. Tāhaṃ means that I. Duruttaṃ means ill-spoken, meaningless words. From here on, the verses occurred only in the manner of their conversation and replies -

138.

138.

‘‘Sabbaṃ ahampi jānāmi, yathā tvaṃ caṇḍikā ahu;

"I also know everything, how you were fierce;
But I ask you something else, by what are you covered in dust?

139.

139.

‘‘Sīsaṃnhātā tuvaṃ āsi, sucivatthā alaṅkatā;

"You had washed your head, were wearing clean clothes, adorned;
And I was excessively, even more adorned than you.

140.

140.

‘‘Tassā me pekkhamānāya, sāmikena samantayi;

"While I was looking on, he conversed with you, the husband;
Then great envy arose in me, anger arose in me.

141.

141.

‘‘Tato paṃsuṃ gahetvāna, paṃsunā tañhi okiriṃ;

"Then having taken dust, I poured that dust on you;
By the result of that deed, I am covered in dust."

142.

142.

‘‘Sabbaṃ ahampi jānāmi, paṃsunā maṃ tvamokiri;

"I also know everything, that you poured dust on me;
But I ask you something else, by what are you afflicted with scabies?

143.

143.

‘‘Bhesajjahārī ubhayo, vanantaṃ agamimhase;

"Both of us, carriers of medicine, went to the forest;
You brought medicine, and I brought kapikacchu fruits.

144.

144.

‘‘Tassā tyājānamānāya, seyyaṃ tyāhaṃ samokiriṃ;

"Without you knowing, I scattered it on your bed;
By the result of that deed, I am afflicted with scabies."

145.

145.

‘‘Sabbaṃ ahampi jānāmi, seyyaṃ me tvaṃ samokiri;

"I also know everything, that you scattered it on my bed;
But I ask you something else, by what are you naked?

146.

146.

‘‘Sahāyānaṃ samayo āsi, ñātīnaṃ samitī ahu;

"There was an occasion for friends, an assembly for relatives;
And you were invited, with your husband, but not I.

147.

147.

‘‘Tassā tyājānamānāya, dussaṃ tyāhaṃ apānudiṃ;

"Without you knowing, I removed your garment;
By the result of that deed, I am naked."

148.

148.

‘‘Sabbaṃ ahampi jānāmi, dussaṃ me tvaṃ apānudi;

"I also know everything, that you removed my garment;
But I ask you something else, by what do you smell of excrement?

149.

149.

‘‘Tava gandhañca mālañca, paccagghañca vilepanaṃ;

"Your perfume and garland, and fresh unguent;
I threw into a dung heap, that evil was done by me;
By the result of that deed, I smell of excrement."

150.

150.

‘‘Sabbaṃ ahampi jānāmi, taṃ pāpaṃ pakataṃ tayā;

"I also know everything, that evil was done by you;
But I ask you something else, by what are you destitute?

151.

151.

‘‘Ubhinnaṃ samakaṃ āsi, yaṃ gehe vijjate dhanaṃ;

"It was equal for both of us, whatever wealth was in the house;
With opportunities for giving present, I made no refuge for myself;
By the result of that deed, I am destitute."

152.

152.

‘‘Tadeva maṃ tvaṃ avaca, pāpakammaṃ nisevasi;

"You yourself told me that, that you engage in evil deeds;
For by evil deeds, a good destination is not easily attained.

153.

153.

‘‘Vāmato maṃ tvaṃ paccesi, athopi maṃ usūyasi;

"You used to reproach me to my face, and also you were jealous of me;
See what the result of evil deeds is like.

154.

154.

‘‘Te gharā tā ca dāsiyo, tānevābharaṇānime;

"Those houses, and those slave women, and these ornaments;
Others attend to them, enjoyments are not eternal.

155.

155.

‘‘Idāni bhūtassa pitā, āpaṇā gehamehiti;

"Now the father of Bhūta is coming home from the market;
Perhaps he might give something to you, do not go from here yet.

156.

156.

‘‘Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāmhi, kisā dhamanisanthatā;

"I am naked, of unsightly form, emaciated, with veins spread out;
This is just a loincloth for women, may the father of Bhūta not see me.

157.

157.

‘‘Handa kiṃ vā tyāhaṃ dammi, kiṃ vā teca karomahaṃ;

"Well then, what shall I give you, or what shall I do for you?
By which you would be happy, fulfilled in all desires.

158.

158.

‘‘Cattāro bhikkhū saṅghato, cattāro pana puggale;

"Four monks from the Sangha, and four individuals;
Having fed eight monks, dedicate the merit to me;
Then I would be happy, fulfilled in all desires."

159.

159.

‘‘Sādhūti sā paṭissutvā, bhojayitvāṭṭha bhikkhavo;

"Good," having promised, she fed eight monks;
Having covered them with clothes, she dedicated the merit to her.

160.

160.

‘‘Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe, vipāko udapajjatha;

"Immediately upon dedication, the result arose;
Food, clothing, and drink, this is the fruit of alms."

161.

161.

‘‘Tato suddhā sucivasanā, kāsikuttamadhārinī;

"Then, pure, wearing clean garments, adorned in the finest Kāsika cloth,
Adorned with various clothes and ornaments, she approached her co-wife.

162.

162.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing beauty, you stand, O deity;
Illuminating all directions, like a star among herbs.

163.

163.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what deed do you have such beauty, by what does this succeed for you here?
And these enjoyments arise for you, whatever is dear to the mind.

164.

164.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsī puññaṃ;

"I ask you, O deity of great power, what meritorious deed did you do as a human being?
By what are you so radiant with power, and your beauty shines in all directions?"

165.

165.

‘‘Ahaṃ mattā tuvaṃ tissā, sapattī te pure ahuṃ;

"I am Mattā, you are Tissā, I was your co-wife before;
Having done evil deeds, I have gone from here to the world of petas.

166.

166.

‘‘Tava dinnena dānena, modāmi akutobhayā;

"By the gift given by you, I rejoice, free from fear;
May you live long, sister, together with all your relatives;
The sorrowless, stainless state, the abode of those with mastery.

167.

167.

‘‘Idha dhammaṃ caritvāna, dānaṃ datvāna sobhane;

"Having practiced the Dhamma here, having given gifts, O beautiful one;
Having removed the stain of stinginess, root and all, blameless, go to the heavenly state."

138.Tatthasabbaṃ ahampi jānāmi, yathā tvaṃ caṇḍikā ahūti ‘‘caṇḍī ca pharusā cāsi’’nti yaṃ tayā vuttaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ ahampi jānāmi, yathā tvaṃ caṇḍikā kodhanā pharusavacanā issukī maccharī saṭhā ca ahosi.Aññañca kho taṃ pucchāmīti aññaṃ puna taṃ idāni pucchāmi.Kenāsi paṃsukunthitāti kena kammena saṅkārapaṃsūti oguṇṭhitā sabbaso okiṇṇasarīrā ahūti attho.

138. There, sabbaṃ ahampi jānāmi, yathā tvaṃ caṇḍikā ahū means "caṇḍī ca pharusā cāsi" (you were fierce and harsh), all that was said by you, I also know all of that, how you were fierce, angry, harsh-spoken, envious, miserly, and deceitful. Aññañca kho taṃ pucchāmī means again, I now ask you something else. Kenāsi paṃsukunthitā means by what deed have you been covered in rubbish and dust, with a body entirely covered and strewn, is the meaning.

139-40.Sīsaṃnhātāti sasīsaṃ nhātā.Adhimattanti adhikataraṃ.Samalaṅkatatarāti sammā atisayena alaṅkatā. ‘‘Adhimattā’’ti vā pāṭho, ativiya mattā mānamadamattā, mānanissitāti attho.Tayāti bhotiyā.Sāmikena samantayīti sāmikena saddhiṃ allopasallāpavasena kathesi.

139-40. Sīsaṃnhātā means having washed her head. Adhimattaṃ means exceedingly. Samalaṅkatatarā means well, exceedingly adorned. Or alternatively, the reading is "adhimattā," extremely intoxicated, intoxicated with pride and conceit, dependent on pride, is the meaning. Tayā means by you. Sāmikena samantayī means he spoke with the husband in the manner of affectionate conversation and greeting.

142-144.Khajjasi kacchuyāti kacchurogena khādīyasi, bādhīyasīti attho.Bhesajjahārīti bhesajjahāriniyo osadhahārikāyo.Ubhayoti duve, tvañca ahañcāti attho.Vanantanti vanaṃ.Tvañca bhesajjamāharīti tvaṃ vejjehi vuttaṃ attano upakārāvahaṃ bhesajjaṃ āhari.Ahañca kapikacchunoti ahaṃ pana kapikacchuphalāni duphassaphalāni āhariṃ.Kapikacchūti vā sayaṃbhūtā vuccati, tasmā sayaṃbhūtāya pattaphalāni āharinti attho.Seyyaṃ tyāhaṃ samokirinti tava seyyaṃ ahaṃ kapikacchuphalapattehi samantato avakiriṃ.

142-144. Khajjasi kacchuyā means you are eaten away by the disease of scabies, you are afflicted, is the meaning. Bhesajjahārī means carriers of medicine, bringers of medicinal herbs. Ubhayo means both, you and I, is the meaning. Vanantaṃ means to the forest. Tvañca bhesajjamāharī means you brought medicine that was said by doctors, that was beneficial to yourself. Ahañca kapikacchuno means but I brought the fruits of kapikacchu, fruits that are difficult to touch. Kapikacchū is also called sayaṃbhūtā, therefore it means she brought the leaves and fruits of sayaṃbhūtā. Seyyaṃ tyāhaṃ samokiriṃ means I scattered the leaves and fruits of kapikacchu all around on your bed.

146-147.Sahāyānanti mittānaṃ.Samayoti samāgamo.Ñātīnanti bandhūnaṃ.Samitīti sannipāto.Āmantitāti maṅgalakiriyāvasena nimantitā.Sasāminīti sabhattikā, saha bhattunāti attho.No ca khohanti no ca kho ahaṃ āmantitā āsinti yojanā.Dussaṃ tyāhanti dussaṃ te ahaṃ.Apānudinti corikāya avahariṃ aggahosiṃ.

146-147. Sahāyānaṃ means of friends. Samayo means gathering. Ñātīnaṃ means of relatives. Samitī means assembly. Āmantitā means invited in the manner of a celebratory occasion. Sasāminī means with her husband, together with her husband, is the meaning. No ca khohaṃ means but I was not invited, is the connection. Dussaṃ tyāhaṃ means the garment of you. Apānudiṃ means I secretly took away, I seized.

149.Paccagghanti abhinavaṃ, mahagghaṃ vā.Atāresinti khipiṃ.Gūthagandhinīti gūthagandhagandhinī karīsavāyinī.

149. Paccagghaṃ means fresh, or of great value. Atāresiṃ means I threw. Gūthagandhinī means smelling of the odor of excrement, smelling of feces.

151.Yaṃ gehe vijjate dhananti yaṃ gehe dhanaṃ upalabbhati, taṃ tuyhaṃ mayhañcāti amhākaṃ ubhinna samakaṃ tulyameva āsi.Santesūti vijjamānesu.Dīpanti patiṭṭhaṃ, puññakammaṃ sandhāya vadati.

151. Yaṃ gehe vijjate dhanaṃ means whatever wealth is found in the house, that which is wealth in the house, that is equal and the same for both you and me, for both of us. Santesū means in the presence of. Dīpaṃ means a refuge, he speaks in reference to meritorious deeds.

152.Evaṃ sā petī tissāya pucchitamatthaṃ katthetvā puna pubbe tassā vacanaṃ akatvā attanā kataṃ aparādhaṃ pakāsentī‘‘tadeva maṃ tva’’ntiādimāha. Tatthatadevāti tadā eva, mayhaṃ manussattabhāve ṭhitakāleyeva. Tathevāti vā pāṭho, yathā etarahi jātaṃ, taṃ tathā evāti attho.Manti attānaṃ niddisati,tvanti tissaṃ.Avacāti abhaṇi. Yathā pana avaca, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pāpakamma’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pāpakammānī’’ti pāḷi. ‘‘Tvaṃ pāpakammāniyeva karosi, pāpehi pana kammehi sugati sulabhā na hoti, atha kho duggati eva sulabhā’’ti yathā maṃ tvaṃ pubbe avaca ovadi, taṃ tathevāti vadati.

152. In this way, that female peta, having stated the matter questioned by Tissa, then, without repeating her previous words, revealed her own offense, saying, "tadeva maṃ tva..." and so on. Here, "tadeva" means at that very time, while I was still in human existence. Alternatively, there is the reading "tatheva," meaning just as it is now, that is, in the same way. "Maṃ" refers to herself, "tvaṃ" to Tissa. "Avacā" means you said. To show how she spoke, "pāpakamma..." and so on was said. The reading "pāpakammānī" also exists. She says, "Just as you previously spoke to me, advising, 'You only do evil deeds, and with evil deeds, a good destination is not easily attained, but rather a bad destination is easily attained,' that is just how it is."

153.Taṃ sutvā tissā‘‘vāmato maṃ tvaṃ paccesī’’tiādinā tisso gāthā āha. Tatthavāmato maṃ tvaṃ paccesīti vilomato maṃ tvaṃ adhigacchasi, tuyhaṃ hitesimpi vipaccanīkakāriniṃ katvā maṃ gaṇhāsi.Maṃ usūyasīti mayhaṃ usūyasi, mayi issaṃ karosi.Passa pāpānaṃ kammānaṃ, vipāko hoti yādisoti pāpakānaṃ nāma kammānaṃ vipāko yādiso yathā ghorataro, taṃ paccakkhato passāti vadati.

153. Having heard that, Tissa spoke three verses beginning with "vāmato maṃ tvaṃ paccesī." Here, "vāmato maṃ tvaṃ paccesī" means you approach me in a contrary way; though I am for your benefit, you treat me as your adversary and take me to task. "Maṃ usūyasī" means you are jealous of me; you envy me. "Passa pāpānaṃ kammānaṃ, vipāko hoti yādiso" means see directly how terrible the result of evil deeds is.

154.Te aññe paricārentīti te ghare dāsiyo ābharaṇāni ca imāni tayā pubbe pariggahitāni idāni aññe paricārenti paribhuñjanti. ‘‘Ime’’ti hi liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ.Na bhogā honti sassatāti bhogā nāmete na sassatā anavaṭṭhitā tāvakālikā mahāyagamanīyā, tasmā tadatthaṃ issāmacchariyādīni na kattabbānīti adhippāyo.

154. "Te aññe paricārenti" means the female slaves in the house and these ornaments, previously acquired by you, others now attend to and enjoy. "Ime" is used with a change of gender (neuter instead of feminine). "Na bhogā honti sassatā" means these possessions are not permanent, they are unstable and temporary, and they are greatly desirable; therefore, jealousy, miserliness, and so on should not be done for their sake. This is the implied meaning.

155.Idānibhūtassa pitāti idāneva bhūtassa mayhaṃ puttassa pitā kuṭumbiko.Āpaṇāti āpaṇato imaṃgehaṃ ehitiāgamissati.Appeva te dade kiñcīti gehaṃ āgato kuṭumbiko tuyhaṃ dātabbayuttakaṃ kiñci deyyadhammaṃ api nāma dadeyya.Mā su tāva ito agāti ito gehassa pacchā vatthuto mā tāva agamāsīti taṃ anukampamānā āha.

155. "Idāni bhūtassa pitā" means the father of my son, who has just been born, the householder. "Āpaṇā" means he will come "gehaṃ ehiti" from the shop to this house. "Appeva te dade kiñcī" means when the householder comes to the house, he might give you some offering that is fitting to be given. "Mā su tāva ito agā" means, feeling compassion for her, she says, "Do not go away from this place behind the house."

156.Taṃ sutvā petī attano ajjhāsayaṃ pakāsentī‘‘naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāmhī’’ti gāthamāha. Tatthakopīnametaṃ itthīnanti etaṃ naggadubbaṇṇatādikaṃ paṭicchādetabbatāya itthīnaṃ kopīnaṃ rundhanīyaṃ.Mā maṃ bhūtapitāddasāti tasmā bhūtassa pitā kuṭumbiko maṃ mā addakkhīti lajjamānā vadati.

156. Having heard that, the female peta, revealing her own inclination, spoke the verse "naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāmhī." Here, "kopīnametaṃ itthīnaṃ" means this nakedness and ugliness should be covered; it is the shame of women that should be concealed. "Mā maṃ bhūtapitāddasā" means, feeling ashamed, she says, "Therefore, may the father of my son, the householder, not see me."

157.Taṃ sutvā tissā sañjātanuddayā‘‘handa kiṃ vā tyāhaṃ dammī’’ti gāthamāha. Tatthahandāti codanatthe nipāto.Kiṃ vā tyāhaṃ dammīti kiṃ te ahaṃ dammi, kiṃ vatthaṃ dassāmi, udāhu bhattanti.Kiṃ vā tedha karomahanti kiṃ vā aññaṃ te idha imasmiṃ kāle upakāraṃ karissāmi.

157. Having heard that, Tissa, with compassion arising, spoke the verse "handa kiṃ vā tyāhaṃ dammī." Here, "handā" is a particle used in the sense of inquiry. "Kiṃ vā tyāhaṃ dammī" means what shall I give you? What cloth shall I give, or perhaps food? "Kiṃ vā tedha karomaha" means what other assistance shall I do for you here at this time?

158.Taṃ sutvā petī‘‘cattāro bhikkhū saṅghato’’ti gāthamāha. Tatthacattāro bhikkhū saṅghato, cattāro pana puggaleti bhikkhusaṅghato saṅghavasena cattāro bhikkhū, puggalavasena cattāro bhikkhūti evaṃ aṭṭha bhikkhū yathāruciṃ bhojetvā taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ mama ādisa, mayhaṃ pattidānaṃ dehi.Tadāhaṃ sukhitā hessanti yadā tvaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ mama uddisissasi, tadā ahaṃ sukhitā sukhappattā sabbakāmasamiddhinī bhavissāmīti attho.

158. Having heard that, the female peta spoke the verse "cattāro bhikkhū saṅghato." Here, "cattāro bhikkhū saṅghato, cattāro pana puggale" means feed four monks from the Saṅgha in terms of the community and four monks in terms of individuals, thus eight monks in total, according to their preference, and dedicate that merit to me; give the sharing of merit to me. "Tadāhaṃ sukhitā hessaṃ" means when you dedicate the merit to me, then I will be happy, attaining happiness and fulfilling all wishes.

159-161.Taṃ sutvā tissā tamatthaṃ attano sāmikassa ārocetvā dutiyadivase aṭṭha bhikkhū bhojetvā tassā dakkhiṇamādisi, sā tāvadeva paṭiladdhadibbasampattikā puna tissāya santikaṃ upasaṅkami. Tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ saṅgītikārehi‘‘sādhūti sā paṭissutvā’’tiādikā tisso gāthā ṭhapitā.

159-161. Having heard that, Tissa, having told that matter to her husband, on the second day fed eight monks and dedicated the merit to her. Immediately, she, having regained divine prosperity, again approached Tissa. To show that matter, the compilers of the Saṅgīti placed these three verses beginning with "sādhūti sā paṭissutvā."

162-167.Upasaṅkamitvā ṭhitaṃ pana naṃ tissā‘‘abhikkantena vaṇṇenā’’tiādīhi tīhi gāthāhi paṭipucchi. Itarā‘‘ahaṃ mattā’’ti gāthāya attānaṃ ācikkhitvā‘‘ciraṃ jīvāhī’’ti gāthāya tassā anumodanaṃ datvā‘‘idha dhammaṃ caritvānā’’ti gāthāya ovādaṃ adāsi. Tatthatava dinnenāti tayā dinnena.Asokaṃ virajaṃ ṭhānanti sokābhāvena asokaṃ, sedajallikānaṃ pana abhāvena virajaṃ dibbaṭṭhānaṃ, sabbametaṃ devalokaṃ sandhāya vadati.Āvāsanti ṭhānaṃ.Vasavattinanti dibbena ādhipateyyena attano vasaṃ vattentānaṃ.Samūlanti salobhadosaṃ. Lobhadosā hi macchariyassa mūlaṃ nāma.Aninditāti agarahitā pāsaṃsā,saggamupehi ṭhānanti rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggattā ‘‘sagga’’nti laddhanāmaṃ dibbaṭṭhānaṃ upehi, sugatiparāyaṇā hohīti attho. Sesaṃ uttānameva.

162-167. But when she approached and stood there, Tissa questioned her with three verses beginning with "abhikkantena vaṇṇenā." The other one, having identified herself with the verse "ahaṃ mattā," having given her approval with the verse "ciraṃ jīvāhī," gave advice with the verse "idha dhammaṃ caritvānā." Here, "tava dinnenā" means by what was given by you. "Asokaṃ virajaṃ ṭhānaṃ" means the divine abode without sorrow because of the absence of sorrow, and without dust because of the absence of sweat and dirt; all this is said referring to the deva world. "Āvāsaṃ" means abode. "Vasavattinaṃ" means those who wield power over themselves through divine authority. "Samūlaṃ" means with the root, which is greed and hatred. For greed and hatred are the root of miserliness. "Aninditā" means unblamed, praised; "saggamupehi ṭhānaṃ" means attain the divine abode named "sagga" because it is supremely excellent with respect to objects such as forms; may you be devoted to a good destination. The rest is self-explanatory.

Atha tissā taṃ pavattiṃ kuṭumbikassa ārocesi, kuṭumbiko bhikkhūnaṃ ārocesi, bhikkhū bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi, taṃ sutvā mahājano paṭiladdhasaṃvego vineyya maccherādimalaṃ dānasīlādirato sugatiparāyaṇo ahosīti.

Then Tissa told that event to the householder, the householder told the monks, and the monks told the Buddha. The Buddha, having made that matter the occasion, taught the Dhamma to the assembled company. Having heard that, the great multitude, regaining a sense of urgency, having removed the stain of miserliness and so on, being devoted to generosity, morality, and so on, became devoted to a good destination.

Mattāpetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Mattāpetavatthu is finished.

4. Nandāpetivatthuvaṇṇanā
4. Nandāpetivatthuvaṇṇanā

Kāḷī dubbaṇṇarūpāsīti idaṃ satthari jetavane viharante nandaṃ nāma petiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Sāvatthiyā kira avidūre aññatarasmiṃ gāmake nandiseno nāma upāsako ahosi saddho pasanno. Bhariyā panassa nandā nāma assaddhā appasannā maccharinī caṇḍī pharusavacanā sāmike agāravā aggatissā sassuṃ corivādena akkosati paribhāsati. Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā petayoniyaṃ nibbattitvā tasseva gāmassa avidūre vicarantī ekadivasaṃ nandisenassa upāsakassa gāmato nikkhamantassa avidūre attānaṃ dassesi. So taṃ disvā –

Kāḷī dubbaṇṇarūpāsīti This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning a female peta named Nandā. It is said that not far from Sāvatthī, in a certain village, there was a lay follower named Nandisena, faithful and devoted. But his wife, named Nandā, was faithless, undevoted, miserly, fierce, harsh-spoken, disrespectful to her husband, excessively angry, and she reviled and abused her mother-in-law with accusations of theft. In due course, she died and was reborn in the peta realm. Wandering not far from that same village, one day she showed herself to the lay follower Nandisena as he was leaving the village. Seeing her, he said:

168.

168.

‘‘Kāḷī dubbaṇṇarūpāsi, pharusā bhīrudassanā;

"You are black, ugly, coarse, and of frightening appearance;
You are cross-eyed and have discolored teeth; I do not think you are a human being."

kāḷīti kāḷavaṇṇā, jhāmaṅgārasadiso hissā vaṇṇo ahosi.Pharusāti kharagattā.Bhīrudassanāti bhayānakadassanā sappaṭibhayākārā. ‘‘Bhārudassanā’’ti vā pāṭho, bhāriyadassanā, dubbaṇṇatādinā duddasikāti attho.Piṅgalāti piṅgalalocanā.Kaḷārāti kaḷāradantā.Na taṃ maññāmi mānusinti ahaṃ taṃ mānusinti na maññāmi, petimeva ca taṃ maññāmīti adhippāyo. Taṃ sutvā petī attānaṃ pakāsentī –

kāḷīti black-colored; her complexion was like burnt charcoal. "Pharusā" means having a rough body. "Bhīrudassanā" means having a frightening appearance, with a terrifying manner. Alternatively, there is the reading "bhārudassanā," meaning having a burdensome appearance, difficult to look at due to ugliness and so on. "Piṅgalā" means having cross-eyes. "Kaḷārā" means having discolored teeth. "Na taṃ maññāmi mānusi" means I do not think you are a human being; I think you are certainly a peta. This is the implied meaning. Having heard that, the female peta, revealing herself, said:

169.

169.

‘‘Ahaṃ nandā nandisena, bhariyā te pure ahuṃ;

"I am Nandā, wife of Nandisena;
Having done evil deeds, I have gone to the world of petas from here."

ahaṃ nandā nandisenāti sāmi nandisena ahaṃ nandā nāma.Bhariyā te pure ahunti purimajātiyaṃ tuyhaṃ bhariyā ahosiṃ. Ito paraṃ –

ahaṃ nandā nandisenāti O husband Nandisena, I am named Nandā. "Bhariyā te pure ahuṃ" means in a previous birth, I was your wife. Further on—

170.

170.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil deed did I do by body, speech, or mind,
That by the result of which deed, I have gone to the world of petas from here?"

Tassa upāsakassa pucchā. Athassa sā –

This is the question of the lay follower. Then she (said):

171.

171.

‘‘Caṇḍī ca pharusā cāsiṃ, tayi cāpi agāravā;

"I was fierce and coarse, and also disrespectful to you;
Having spoken harsh words, I have gone to the world of petas from here."

Vissajjesi. Puna so –

She explained. Again, he (said):

172.

172.

‘‘Handuttarīyaṃ dadāmi te, imaṃ dussaṃ nivāsaya;

"Here, I will give you an upper garment; put on this cloth;
Having put on this cloth, come, I will take you home.

173.

173.

‘‘Vatthañca annapānañca, lacchasi tvaṃ gharaṃ gatā;

"Having gone home, you will obtain clothing, food, and drink;
And you will see your sons, and you will see your daughters-in-law." Then she (said):

174.

174.

‘‘Hatthena hatthe te dinnaṃ, na mayhaṃ upakappati;

"What is given to you hand to hand is not suitable for me;
Rather, feed monks who are virtuous,

175.

175.

‘‘Tappehi annapānena, mama dakkhiṇamādisa;

"Free from lust, and learned, with food and drink, and dedicate the merit to me;
Then I will be happy, fulfilling all wishes."

Dve gāthā abhāsi. Tato –

She spoke two verses. Then—

176.

176.

‘‘Sādhūti so paṭissutvā, dānaṃ vipulamākiri;

"He, having agreed, made abundant giving;
Food, drink, edibles, and also clothing and lodgings;
Umbrellas, perfumes, garlands, and various kinds of footwear.

177.

177.

‘‘Bhikkhū ca sīlasampanne, vītarāge bahussute;

"Having satisfied the monks who are virtuous, free from lust, and learned,
With food and drink, he dedicated the merit to her.

178.

178.

‘‘Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe, vipāko udapajjatha;

"Immediately upon the dedication, the result arose;
Food, clothing, and drink—this is the result of the offering.

179.

179.

‘‘Tato suddhā sucivasanā, kāsikuttamadhārinī;

"Then, pure and wearing clean clothes, wearing the finest silk;
Adorned with various clothes and ornaments, she approached her husband."

Catasso gāthā saṅgītikārehi vuttā. Tato paraṃ –

These four verses were spoken by the compilers of the Saṅgīti. After that—

180.

180.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing beauty, as you stand there, O deity,
Illuminating all directions, like the morning star.

181.

181.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what do you have such beauty? By what do you prosper here?
And do those enjoyments arise for you, whatever is pleasing to the mind?

182.

182.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, O deity of great power, what merit did you do when you were a human being,
That you are thus ablaze with power, and your complexion illuminates all directions?"

183.

183.

‘‘Ahaṃ nandā nandisena, bhariyā te pure ahuṃ;

"I am Nandā, wife of Nandisena;
Having done evil deeds, I have gone to the world of petas from here.

184.

184.

‘‘Tava dinnena dānena, modāmi akutobhayā;

"By the giving given by you, I rejoice, free from all fear;
Long live, O householder, together with all your relatives;

Asokaṃ virajaṃ khemaṃ, āvāsaṃ vasavattinaṃ.

The sorrowless, stainless, secure abode of those who wield power.

185.

185.

‘‘Idha dhammaṃ caritvāna, dānaṃ datvā gahapati;

"Having practiced the Dhamma here, O householder, having given alms,
Having removed the stain of miserliness with its root, blameless, attain the heavenly state."

Upāsakassa ca petiyā ca vacanapaṭivacanagāthā.

These are the verses of dialogue between the lay follower and the female peta.

176.Tatthadānaṃ vipulamākirīti ukkhiṇeyyakhette deyyadhammabījaṃ vippakiranto viya mahādānaṃ pavattesi. Sesaṃ anantaravatthusadisameva.

176. Here, "dānaṃ vipulamākirī" means he set in motion a great offering, like scattering seeds of meritorious deeds in a field for harvest. The rest is similar to the preceding story.

Evaṃ sā attano dibbasampattiṃ tassā ca kāraṇaṃ nandisenassa vibhāvetvā attano vasanaṭṭhānameva gatā. Upāsako taṃ pavattiṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ārocesi, bhikkhū bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Thus, having explained her divine prosperity and its cause to Nandisena, she went to her own dwelling place. The lay follower told that event to the monks, and the monks told the Buddha. The Buddha, having made that matter the occasion, taught the Dhamma to the assembled company. That teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Nandāpetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Nandāpetavatthu is finished.

5. Maṭṭhakuṇḍalīpetavatthuvaṇṇanā
5. Maṭṭhakuṇḍalīpetavatthuvaṇṇanā

Alaṅkato maṭṭhakuṇḍalīti idaṃ satthari jetavane viharante maṭṭhakuṇḍalidevaputtaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paramatthadīpaniyaṃ vimānavatthuvaṇṇanāyaṃ maṭṭhakuṇḍalīvimānavatthuvaṇṇanāya (vi. va. aṭṭha. 1206 maṭṭhakuṇḍalīvimānavaṇṇanā) vuttameva, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

Alaṅkato maṭṭhakuṇḍalīti This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning the deva son Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī. What should be said here has already been said in the Paramatthadīpanī commentary on the Vimanavatthu, in the Maṭṭhakuṇḍalīvimānavatthuvaṇṇanā (VvA. 1206 Maṭṭhakuṇḍalīvimānavaṇṇanā); therefore, it should be understood according to the method stated there.

Ettha ca maṭṭhakuṇḍalīdevaputtassa vimānadevatābhāvato tassa vatthu yadipi vimānavatthupāḷiyaṃ saṅgahaṃ āropitaṃ, yasmā pana so devaputto adinnapubbakabrāhmaṇassa puttasokena susānaṃ gantvā āḷāhanaṃ anupariyāyitvā rodantassa sokaharaṇatthaṃ attano devarūpaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā haricandanussado bāhā paggayha kandanto dukkhābhibhūtākārena peto viya attānaṃ dassesi. Manussattabhāvato apetattā petapariyāyopi labbhati evāti tassa vatthu petavatthupāḷiyampi saṅgahaṃ āropitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

And here, although the story of the deva son Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī is included in the Vimanavatthu collection because he became a vimāna deity, nevertheless, because that deva son, in order to alleviate the sorrow of the brahmin who had never given alms before, went to the charnel ground and circled around the cremation site lamenting his son's death, concealing his divine form and extending his arms stained with red sandalwood, showing himself like a peta, overwhelmed by sorrow, as he was one who had passed away from human existence, the designation of "peta" is also applicable. Thus, it should be seen that his story is also included in the Petavatthu collection.

Maṭṭhakuṇḍalīpetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Maṭṭhakuṇḍalīpetavatthu is finished.

6. Kaṇhapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
6. Kaṇhapetavatthuvaṇṇanā

Uṭṭhehikaṇha kiṃ sesīti idaṃ satthā jetavane viharanto aññataraṃ mataputtaṃ upāsakaṃ ārabbha kathesi. Sāvatthiyaṃ kira aññatarassa upāsakassa putto kālamakāsi. So tena sokasallasamappito na nhāyati, na bhuñjati, na kammante vicāreti, na buddhupaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati, kevalaṃ, ‘‘tāta piyaputtaka, maṃ ohāya kahaṃ paṭhamataraṃ gatosī’’tiādīni vadanto vippalapati. Satthā paccūsasamaye lokaṃ olokento tassa sotāpattiphalūpanissayaṃ disvā punadivase bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto sāvatthiyaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakicco bhikkhū uyyojetvā ānandattherena pacchāsamaṇena tassa gharadvāraṃ agamāsi. Satthu āgatabhāvaṃ upāsakassa ārocesuṃ. Athassa gehajano gehadvāre āsanaṃ paññāpetvā satthāraṃ nisīdāpetvā upāsakaṃ pariggahetvā satthu santikaṃ upanesi. Ekamantaṃ nisinnaṃ taṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ, upāsaka, socasī’’ti vatvā ‘‘āma, bhante’’ti vutte, ‘‘upāsaka, porāṇakapaṇḍitā paṇḍitānaṃ kathaṃ sutvā mataputtaṃ nānusociṃsū’’ti vatvā tena yācito atītaṃ āhari.

Uṭṭhehi kaṇha kiṃ sesī This the Teacher spoke while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning a lay follower who had lost his son. It seems that in Savatthi, the son of a certain lay follower passed away. Overwhelmed by the dart of sorrow, he neither bathed, nor ate, nor attended to his work, nor went to pay homage to the Buddha, but only lamented, saying, "Dear son, beloved child, where have you gone, leaving me so soon?" Seeing in the early morning that he had the potential for Stream-entry, the Teacher, surrounded by the Sangha of monks, went to Savatthi for alms on the following day. Having completed the meal and dismissed the monks, accompanied by the Venerable Ananda as his attendant, he went to the door of the lay follower’s house. The householders announced the Teacher's arrival to the lay follower. Then his family members prepared a seat at the door of the house, invited the Teacher to sit, and brought the lay follower into the Teacher's presence, supporting him. Seeing him seated to one side, the Teacher said, "Why are you grieving, lay follower?" When he replied, "Yes, Venerable," the Teacher said, "Lay follower, in the past, wise men, having heard the words of the wise, did not grieve for their dead son," and, being requested, he told a story of the past.

Atīte dvāravatīnagare dasa bhātikarājāno ahesuṃ – vāsudevo baladevo candadevā sūriyadevo aggidevo varuṇadevo ajjuno pajjuno ghaṭapaṇḍito aṅkuro cāti. Tesu vāsudevamahārājassa piyaputto kālamakāsi. Tena rājā sokapareto sabbakiccāni pahāya mañcassa aṭaniṃ pariggahetvā vippalapanto nipajji. Tasmiṃ kāle ghaṭapaṇḍito cintesi – ‘‘ṭhapetvā maṃ añño koci mama bhātu sokaṃ pariharituṃ samattho nāma natthi, upāyenassa sokaṃ harissāmī’’ti. So ummattakavesaṃ gahetvā ‘‘sasaṃ me detha, sasaṃ me dethā’’ti ākāsaṃ olokento sakalanagaraṃ vicari. ‘‘Ghaṭapaṇḍito ummattako jāto’’ti sakalanagaraṃ saṅkhubhi.

In the past, in the city of Dvaravati, there were ten brother kings: Vasudeva, Baladeva, Candadeva, Suriyadeva, Aggideva, Varunadeva, Ajjuna, Pajjuna, Ghatapandita, and Ankura. Among them, a beloved son of King Vasudeva passed away. Overcome with grief, the king abandoned all his duties and lay down, clinging to the leg of his couch, lamenting. At that time, Ghatapandita thought, "There is no one but me who is able to alleviate my brother's sorrow. I will remove his sorrow by some skillful means." He took on the guise of a madman and wandered throughout the entire city, looking up at the sky, saying, "Give me a hare, give me a hare!" The whole city was in turmoil, saying, "Ghatapandita has gone mad."

Tasmiṃ kāle rohiṇeyyo nāma amacco vāsudevarañño santikaṃ gantvā tena saddhiṃ kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpento –

At that time, an advisor named Rohineyya went to King Vasudeva and, engaging in conversation with him, spoke this verse:

207.

207.

‘‘Uṭṭhehi kaṇha kiṃ sesi, ko attho supanena te;

"Get up, Krishna, why do you sleep? What use is there in your sleeping? Your own brother, your heart, your right eye, his winds are growing strong, Kesava mutters about a hare."

207.Tatthakaṇhāti vāsudevaṃ gottenālapati.Ko attho supanena teti supanena tuyhaṃ kā nāma vaḍḍhi.Sako bhātāti sodariyo bhātā.Hadayaṃ cakkhu ca dakkhiṇanti hadayena ceva dakkhiṇacakkhunā ca sadisoti attho.Tassa vātā balīyantīti tassa aparāparaṃ uppajjamānā ummādavātā balavanto honti vaḍḍhanti abhibhavanti.Sasaṃ jappatīti ‘‘sasaṃ me dethā’’ti vippalapati.Kesavāti so kira kesānaṃ sobhanānaṃ atthitāya ‘‘kesavo’’ti voharīyati. Tena naṃ nāmena ālapati.

207. There, kaṇha is an address to Vasudeva by his clan name. Ko attho supanena te means what benefit is there for you in sleeping? Sako bhātā means own brother, born from the same womb. Hadayaṃ cakkhu ca dakkhiṇaṃ means like the heart and the right eye. Tassa vātā balīyantī means for him, the winds of madness, arising one after another, are growing strong, increasing, and overwhelming. Sasaṃ jappatī means he is muttering, "Give me a hare." Kesavā He is called "Kesava" because he has beautiful hair. He addresses him by that name.

Tassa vacanaṃ sutvā sayanato uṭṭhitabhāvaṃ dīpento satthā abhisambuddho hutvā –

Revealing that he rose from his bed after hearing his words, the Teacher, having become fully enlightened, said this verse:

208.

208.

‘‘Tassa taṃ vacanaṃ sutvā, rohiṇeyyassa kesavo;

"Having heard that word of Rohineyya, Kesava, afflicted by his brother's grief, quickly arose."

Rājā uṭṭhāya sīghaṃ pāsādā otaritvā ghaṭapaṇḍitassa santikaṃ gantvā ubhosu hatthesu naṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā tena saddhiṃ sallapanto –

Having risen, the king quickly descended from his palace and went to Ghatapandita, firmly grasping him with both hands and conversing with him:

209.

209.

‘‘Kiṃ nu ummattarūpova, kevalaṃ dvārakaṃ imaṃ;

"Are you truly mad, wandering about this whole Dvaraka? You babble 'a hare, a hare'; what kind of hare do you want?

210.

210.

‘‘Sovaṇṇamayaṃ maṇimayaṃ, lohamayaṃ atha rūpiyamayaṃ;

"A golden one, a jeweled one, or one made of iron or silver? I will have a hare made for you of conch, rock, or coral.

211.

211.

‘‘Santi aññepi sasakā, araññavanagocarā;

"There are other hares, dwelling in forests and woods; I will bring those to you as well. What kind of hare do you want?"

Tisso gāthāyo abhāsi.

He spoke these three verses.

209-211.Tatthaummattarūpovāti ummattako viya.Kevalanti sakalaṃ.Dvārakanti dvāravatīnagaraṃ vicaranto.Saso sasoti lapasīti saso sasoti vilapasi.Sovaṇṇamayanti suvaṇṇamayaṃ.Lohamayanti tambalohamayaṃ.Rūpiyamayanti rajatamayaṃ. Yaṃ icchasi taṃ vadehi, atha kena socasi. Aññepi araññe vanagocarā sasakā atthi, te te ānayissāmi, vada, bhadramukha, kīdisaṃ sasamicchasīti ghaṭapaṇḍitaṃ ‘‘sasena atthiko’’ti adhippāyena sasena nimantesi. Taṃ sutvā ghaṭapaṇḍito –

209-211. There, ummattarūpovā means as if mad. Kevalaṃ means the entire. Dvārakaṃ means wandering in the city of Dvaravati. Saso sasoti lapasī means you are lamenting, "Hare, hare." Sovaṇṇamayaṃ means made of gold. Lohamayaṃ means made of copper. Rūpiyamayaṃ means made of silver. Tell me what you want, or why are you grieving? There are other hares dwelling in the forest; I will bring them to you. Tell me, good sir, what kind of hare do you want? Ghatapandita asked, inviting him with the hare, with the intention that he wanted a hare. Having heard that, Ghatapandita said:

212.

212.

‘‘Nāhamete sase icche, ye sasā pathavissitā;

"I do not want those hares that are on the earth; I want a hare from the moon; take it down for me, Kesava."

oharāti ohārehi. Taṃ sutvā rājā ‘‘nissaṃsayaṃ me bhātā ummattako jāto’’ti domanassappatto –

oharā means take down. Having heard that, the king, becoming dejected, said, "Without a doubt, my brother has become mad":

213.

213.

‘‘So nūna madhuraṃ ñāti, jīvitaṃ vijahissasi;

"Surely, dear relative, you will give up your sweet life; you desire the unattainable; you want a hare from the moon."

ñātīti kaniṭṭhaṃ ālapati. Ayamettha attho – mayhaṃ piyañātiyaṃ atimadhuraṃattanojīvitaṃ,taṃvijahissasimaññe, yo apatthayitabbaṃ patthesīti.

ñātī is an address to a younger relative. The meaning here is: My dear relative, so sweet is your own life, that you will give it up, I think, because you desire what cannot be desired.

Ghaṭapaṇḍito rañño vacanaṃ sutvā niccalova ṭhatvā ‘‘bhātika, tvaṃ candato sasaṃ patthentassa taṃ alabhitvā jīvitakkhayo bhavissatīti jānanto kasmā mataṃ puttaṃ alabhitvā anusocasī’’ti imamatthaṃ dīpento –

Having heard the king's words, Ghatapandita stood still and, revealing this meaning, said, "Brother, since you know that one who desires a hare from the moon will die without obtaining it, why do you grieve for your dead son, whom you cannot obtain?"

214.

214.

‘‘Evaṃ ce kaṇha jānāsi, yathaññamanusāsasi;

"If you know this, Krishna, as you instruct others, why do you still grieve today for your son who died in the past?"

evaṃ ce, kaṇha, jānāsīti, bhātika, kaṇhanāmaka mahārāja, ‘‘alabbhaneyyavatthu nāma na patthetabba’’nti yadi evaṃ jānāsi.Yathaññanti evaṃ jānantova yathā aññaṃ anusāsasi, tathā akatvā.Kasmā pure mataṃ puttanti atha kasmā ito catumāsamatthake mataṃ puttaṃ ajjāpi anusocasīti.

evaṃ ce, kaṇha, jānāsī means, Brother, King Krishna, if you know that "an unobtainable thing should not be desired." Yathaññaṃ means even knowing this, why do you not act as you instruct others. Kasmā pure mataṃ puttaṃ means then why do you still grieve today for your son who died about four months ago?

Evaṃ so antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhitakova ‘‘ahaṃ tāva evaṃ paññāyamānaṃ patthemi, tvaṃ pana apaññāyamānassatthāya socasī’’ti vatvā tassa dhammaṃ desento –

Thus, standing in the middle of the street, saying, "I desire something that is obviously unattainable, but you grieve for something that is even more unattainable," he taught him the Dhamma:

215.

215.

‘‘Na yaṃ labbhā manussena, amanussena vā pana;

"That which cannot be obtained by a human or a non-human, that 'may my son not die, having been born,' how can the unobtainable be obtained?

216.

216.

‘‘Na mantā mūlabhesajjā, osadhehi dhanena vā;

"Neither by mantras, nor by herbal medicines, nor by drugs, nor by wealth, can that which you grieve for, Krishna, be brought back." He spoke these two verses.

215.Tatthayanti, bhātika, yaṃ ‘‘evaṃjāto me putto mā marī’’timanussenavā devenavā pana na labbhāna sakkā laddhuṃ, taṃ tvaṃ patthesi, taṃ panetaṃkuto labbhā,kena kāraṇena laddhuṃ sakkā. Yasmāalabbhiyaṃalabbhaneyyavatthu nāmetanti attho.

215. There, yaṃ means, Brother, that which, "may my son not die, having been born," cannot be obtained by a human or a deva, that you desire. But how can that be obtained? For what reason can it be obtained? Because it is called alabbhiyaṃ, an unobtainable thing.

216.Mantāti mantappayogena.Mūlabhesajjāti mūlabhesajjena.Osadhehīti nānāvidhehi osadhehi.Dhanena vāti koṭisatasaṅkhena dhanena vāpi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yaṃ petamanusocasi, taṃ etehi mantappayogādīhipi ānetuṃ na sakkāti.

216. Mantā means by the application of mantras. Mūlabhesajjā means by herbal medicines. Osadhehī means by various kinds of drugs. Dhanena vā means even by hundreds of millions of wealth. This is what was said: That which you grieve for, cannot be brought back even by these, such as the application of mantras.

Puna ghaṭapaṇḍito ‘‘bhātika, idaṃ maraṇaṃ nāma dhanena vā jātiyā vā vijjāya vā sīlena vā bhāvanāya vā na sakkā paṭibāhitu’’nti dassento –

Again, Ghatapandita, showing that "this death cannot be warded off by wealth, or by birth, or by knowledge, or by virtue, or by meditation," said:

217.

217.

‘‘Mahaddhanā mahābhogā, raṭṭhavantopi khattiyā;

"The wealthy, those with great fortunes, the kings who rule countries, those with abundant wealth and grain, even they are not free from aging and death.

218.

218.

‘‘Khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā, suddā caṇḍālapukkussā;

"Kshatriyas, Brahmins, Vaishyas, Shudras, Chandalas, and Pukkusas, these and others by birth, even they are not free from aging and death.

219.

219.

‘‘Ye mantaṃ parivattenti, chaḷaṅgaṃ brahmacintitaṃ;

"Those who recite the mantras, the six-limbed Vedas contemplated by Brahma, these and others by knowledge, even they are not free from aging and death.

220.

220.

‘‘Isayo vāpi ye santā, saññatattā tapassino;

"Even the sages, who are peaceful, restrained, and ascetics, in time, those ascetics abandon their bodies.

221.

221.

‘‘Bhāvitattā arahanto, katakiccā anāsavā;

"Those who have developed themselves, the Arahants, who have done what was to be done, free from defilements, relinquish this body upon the exhaustion of merit and demerit."

Pañcahi gāthāhi rañño dhammaṃ desesi.

With these five verses, he taught the Dhamma to the king.

217.Tatthamahaddhanāti nidhānagatasseva mahato dhanassa atthitāya bahudhanā.Mahābhogāti devabhogasadisāya mahatiyā bhogasampattiyā samannāgatā.Raṭṭhavantoti sakalaraṭṭhavanto.Pahūtadhanadhaññāseti tiṇṇaṃ catunnaṃ vā saṃvaccharānaṃ atthāya nidahitvā ṭhapetabbassa niccaparibbayabhūtassa dhanadhaññassa vasena apariyantadhanadhaññā.Tepi no ajarāmarāti tepi evaṃ mahāvibhavā mandhātumahāsudassanādayo khattiyā ajarāmarā nāhesuṃ, aññadatthu maraṇamukhameva anupaviṭṭhāti attho.

217. There, mahaddhanā means having much wealth due to the existence of great wealth, like buried treasure. Mahābhogā means endowed with great wealth and prosperity, similar to the wealth of devas. Raṭṭhavanto means those who possess entire countries. Pahūtadhanadhaññāse means inexhaustible wealth and grain, in terms of wealth and grain that are constantly spent, that should be stored away for the sake of three or four years. Tepi no ajarāmarā means even those Kshatriyas with such great glory, like Mandhatu and Mahasudassana, were not free from aging and death; rather, they were indeed subject to death.

218.Eteti yathāvuttakhattiyādayo.Aññeti aññatarā evaṃbhūtā ambaṭṭhādayo.Jātiyāti attano jātinimittaṃ ajarāmarā nāhesunti attho.

218. Ete means the Kshatriyas and others mentioned above. Aññe means others of such a kind, like the Ambatthas. Jātiyā means that by reason of their birth, they were not free from aging and death.

219.Mantanti vedaṃ.Parivattentīti sajjhāyanti vācenti ca. Atha vāparivattentīti vedaṃ anuparivattentā homaṃ karontā japanti.Chaḷaṅganti sikkhākappaniruttibyākaraṇajotisatthachandovicitisaṅkhātehi chahi aṅgehi yuttaṃ.Brahmacintitanti brāhmaṇānamatthāya brahmanā cintitaṃ kathitaṃ.Vijjāyāti brahmasadisavijjāya samannāgatā, tepi no ajarāmarāti attho.

219. Mantaṃ means the Vedas. Parivattentī means those who recite and read. Or else, parivattentī means those who recite the Vedas, perform homa, and chant. Chaḷaṅgaṃ means endowed with six limbs, namely, sikkhā, kappa, nirutti, vyākaraṇa, jotisattha, and chandoviciti. Brahmacintitaṃ means thought and spoken by Brahma for the sake of the Brahmins. Vijjāyā means endowed with knowledge like that of Brahma, even they were not free from aging and death.

220-221.Isayoti yamaniyamādīnaṃ paṭikūlasaññādīnañca esanaṭṭhena isayo.Santāti kāyavācāhi santasabhāvā.Saññatattāti rāgādīnaṃ saṃyamena saṃyatacittā. Kāyatapanasaṅkhāto tapo etesaṃ atthītitapassino. Punatapassinoti saṃvarakā. Tena evaṃ tapanissitakā hutvā sarīrena ca vimokkhaṃ pattukāmāpi saṃvarakā sarīraṃ vijahanti evāti dasseti. Atha vāisayoti adhisīlasikkhādīnaṃ esanaṭṭhena isayo, tadatthaṃ tappaṭipakkhānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ vūpasamena santā, ekārammaṇe cittassa saṃyamena saññatattā, sammappadhānayogato vīriyatāpena tapassino, sappayogā rāgādīnaṃ santapanena tapassinoti yojetabbaṃ.Bhāvitattāti catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāya bhāvitacittā.

220-221. Isayo means sages because of their seeking of practices such as restraint and the perception of repulsiveness. Santā means those whose nature is peaceful in body and speech. Saññatattā means those whose minds are restrained by the restraint of defilements such as passion. They possess asceticism, which is known as bodily mortification; therefore, they are tapassino. Again, tapassino means those who practice self-control. Therefore, it shows that even those who rely on such austerity and desire to attain liberation through the body relinquish the body. Or else, isayo means sages because of their seeking of higher training in morality, and so forth; for that purpose, they are peaceful due to the calming of evil qualities that are opposed to it; they are saññatattā due to the restraint of the mind on a single object; they are tapassino due to the heat of energy from right effort; they should be connected as tapassino due to the tormenting of defilements such as passion by proper effort. Bhāvitattā means those whose minds are developed by the development of the four noble truths as the object of meditation.

Evaṃ ghaṭapaṇḍitena dhamme kathite taṃ sutvā rājā apagatasokasallo pasannamānaso ghaṭapaṇḍitaṃ pasaṃsanto –

Thus, when the Dhamma was spoken by Ghatapandita, having heard it, the king, freed from the dart of sorrow, with a pleased mind, praised Ghatapandita:

222.

222.

‘‘Ādittaṃ vata maṃ santaṃ, ghaṭasittaṃva pāvakaṃ;

"Like a fire quenched by water, you have extinguished all my anguish, as if sprinkling me, who was burning, with water mixed with Ghaṭa.

223.

223.

‘‘Abbahī vata me sallaṃ, sokaṃ hadayanissitaṃ;

"You have truly removed the dart, the sorrow lodged in my heart, you who have driven away the grief for my son from me, who was overcome with sorrow.

224.

224.

‘‘Svāhaṃ abbūḷhasallosmi, sītibhūtosmi nibbuto;

"Now, I am one who has had the dart removed, I have become cool, I am at peace; I do not grieve, nor do I weep, having heard your words, brother.

225.

225.

‘‘Evaṃ karonti sappaññā, ye honti anukampakā;

"The wise act in this way, those who are compassionate; they free others from sorrow, as Ghaṭa did his elder brother.

226.

226.

‘‘Yassa etādisā honti, amaccā paricārakā;

"Those who have such ministers and attendants, who follow with good counsel, as Ghaṭa did his elder brother." He spoke the remaining verses.

225.Tatthaghaṭo jeṭṭhaṃva bhātaranti yathā ghaṭapaṇḍito attano jeṭṭhabhātaraṃ mataputtasokābhibhūtaṃ attano upāyakosallena ceva dhammakathāya ca tato puttasokato vinivattayi, evaṃ aññepi sappaññā ye honti anukampakā, te ñātīnaṃ upakāraṃ karontīti attho.

225. There, ghaṭo jeṭṭhaṃva bhātaraṃ means just as Ghatapandita freed his elder brother, who was overcome with sorrow for his dead son, from that sorrow by his skill in means and his teaching of the Dhamma, so too, other wise men, who are compassionate, do good to their relatives.

226.Yassa etādisā hontīti ayaṃ abhisambuddhagāthā. Tassattho – yathā yena kāraṇena puttasokaparetaṃ rājānaṃ vāsudevaṃ ghaṭapaṇḍito sokaharaṇatthāya subhāsitena anvesi anuesi,yassaaññassāpietādisāpaṇḍitāamaccāpaṭiladdhā assu, tassa kuto sokoti! Sesagāthā heṭṭhā vuttatthā evāti.

226. Yassa etādisā hontī is a verse of perfect enlightenment. Its meaning is this: Just as Ghatapandita sought out and followed King Vasudeva, who was overcome with sorrow for his son, with good counsel for the purpose of removing his sorrow, if another should have such wise ministers who have been obtained, how could there be sorrow for him! The meaning of the remaining verses is the same as stated below.

Satthā imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ āharitvā ‘‘evaṃ, upāsaka, porāṇakapaṇḍitā paṇḍitānaṃ kathaṃ sutvā puttasokaṃ hariṃsū’’ti vatvā saccāni pakāsetvā jātakaṃ samodhānesi. Saccapariyosāne upāsako sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahīti.

Having brought forth this Dhamma teaching, the Teacher said, "Thus, lay follower, in the past, wise men, having heard the words of the wise, removed their sorrow for their son," and having revealed the Truths, he identified the Jataka. At the end of the Truths, the lay follower was established in the fruit of Stream-entry. (pāci. 239)

Kaṇhapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Kaṇhapeta Story is complete.

7. Dhanapālaseṭṭhipetavatthuvaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Dhanapālaseṭṭhi Peta Story

Naggo dubbaṇṇarūposīti idaṃ satthari jetavane viharante dhanapālapetaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Anuppanne kira buddhe paṇṇaraṭṭhe erakacchanagare dhanapālako nāma seṭṭhi ahosi assaddho appasanno kadariyo natthikadiṭṭhiko. Tassa kiriyā pāḷito eva viññāyati. So kālaṃ katvā marukantāre peto hutvā nibbatti. Tassa tālakkhandhappamāṇo kāyo ahosi, samuṭṭhitacchavi pharuso, virūpakeso, bhayānako, dubbaṇṇo ativiya virūpo bībhacchadassano. So pañcapaṇṇāsa vassāni bhattasitthaṃ vā udakabinduṃ vā alabhanto visukkhakaṇṭhoṭṭhajivho jighacchāpipāsābhibhūto ito cito ca paribbhamati.

Naggo dubbaṇṇarūposī—This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning the peta Dhanapāla. It seems that in the time when a Buddha had not yet arisen, in the city of Erakaccha in the Paṇṇaraṭṭha country, there was a wealthy man named Dhanapāla, who was faithless, displeased, miserly, and held nihilistic views (natthikadiṭṭhi). His behavior was known to be thus. Having died, he was reborn as a peta in the Marukantāra desert. His body was the size of a palm tree trunk, his skin was rough and raised, his hair was disheveled, he was fearsome, ugly, exceedingly deformed, and repulsive to see. For fifty-five years, without obtaining even a drop of rice-water or a drop of water, with his throat, lips, and tongue parched, overcome by hunger and thirst, he wandered here and there.

Atha amhākaṃ bhagavati loke uppajjitvā pavattitavaradhammacakke anukkamena sāvatthiyaṃ viharante sāvatthivāsino vāṇijā pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni bhaṇḍassa pūretvā uttarāpathaṃ gantvā bhaṇḍaṃ vikkiṇitvā paṭiladdhabhaṇḍaṃ sakaṭesu āropetvā paṭinivattamānā sāyanhasamaye aññataraṃ sukkhanadiṃ pāpuṇitvā tattha yānaṃ muñcitvā rattiyaṃ vāsaṃ kappesuṃ. Atha so peto pipāsābhibhūto pānīyassatthāya āgantvā tattha bindumattampi pānīyaṃ alabhitvā vigatāso chinnamūlo viya tālo chinnapādo pati. Taṃ disvā vāṇijā –

Then, when our Blessed One arose in the world and set in motion the excellent Wheel of Dhamma, while dwelling in Sāvatthi, merchants residing in Sāvatthi, filling five hundred carts with goods, went to the northern region, sold their goods, loaded the acquired goods back onto the carts, and returning, reached a certain dry river at evening time, unyoked their vehicles there, and prepared to spend the night. Then that peta, overcome with thirst, came seeking water, and not obtaining even a drop of water there, his hope gone, he fell like a palm tree with its roots cut, its foot severed. Seeing him, the merchants asked:

227.

227.

‘‘Naggo dubbaṇṇarūposi, kiso dhamanisanthato;

"Naked, of unsightly form you are, emaciated, with sinews showing;
With protruding ribs, so gaunt, who are you, sir?"

Imāya gāthāya pucchiṃsu. Tato peto –

They asked with this verse. Then the peta said:

228.

228.

‘‘Ahaṃ bhadante petomhi, duggato yamalokiko;

"I, venerable sirs, am a peta, gone to a bad state, belonging to the realm of Yama;
Having done evil deeds, I have gone from here to the peta world."

Attānaṃ āvikatvā puna tehi –

Having revealed himself, he was again asked by them:

229.

229.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil have you done by body, speech, or mind?
By the result of what deed have you gone from here to the peta world?"

Katakammaṃ pucchito pubbe nibbattaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya atītaṃ paccuppannaṃ anāgatañca attano pavattiṃ dassento tesañca ovādaṃ dento –

Asked about the deed he had done, showing his own history from the place of his former birth, past, present and future, and giving them advice:

230.

230.

‘‘Nagaraṃ atthi paṇṇānaṃ, erakacchanti vissutaṃ;

"There is a city of the Paṇṇa kings, renowned as Erakaccha;
There I was formerly a wealthy man, known to you as Dhanapāla.

231.

231.

‘‘Asīti sakaṭavāhānaṃ, hiraññassa ahosi me;

"Eighty cartloads of silver were mine;
Abundant were my gold, pearls and beryls.

232.

232.

‘‘Tāva mahaddhanassāpi, na me dātuṃ piyaṃ ahu;

"Even with such great wealth, it was not pleasing to me to give;
Closing the door, I ate, lest beggars should see me.

233.

233.

‘‘Assaddho maccharī cāsiṃ, kadariyo paribhāsako;

"Faithless, miserly, and stingy I was, a reviler;
Preventing many people from giving and doing good deeds.

234.

234.

‘‘Vipāko natthi dānassa, saṃyamassa kuto phalaṃ;

"There is no result of giving, what fruit comes from restraint?
Ponds and wells, parks I had planted;
Drinking-booths I destroyed, and bridges in difficult places.

235.

235.

‘‘Svāhaṃ akatakalyāṇo, katapāpo tato cuto;

"I, having done no good, having done evil, having passed away from there,
Have come to the realm of petas, afflicted by hunger and thirst.

236.

236.

‘‘Pañcapaṇṇāsa vassāni, yato kālaṅkato ahaṃ;

"For fifty-five years, since I died,
I do not recall having eaten, or even drunk water.

237.

237.

‘‘Yo saṃyamo so vināso, yo vināso so saṃyamo;

"That which is restraint is ruin, that which is ruin is restraint;
The petas indeed know that which is restraint is ruin.

238.

238.

‘‘Ahaṃ pure saṃyamissaṃ, nādāsiṃ bahuke dhane;

"Formerly I would restrain myself, I did not give from my abundant wealth;
When there were things fit to be given to the worthy, I made no island for myself;
Now I regret it afterwards, a recipient of the fruit of my own deeds.

239.

239.

‘‘Uddhaṃ catūhi māsehi, kālakiriyā bhavissati;

"In four months from now, death will occur;
To a hell, utterly bitter and terrible, I shall fall.

240.

240.

‘‘Catukkaṇṇaṃ catudvāraṃ, vibhattaṃ bhāgaso mitaṃ;

"Four-cornered, with four gates, divided into parts, measured out;
Enclosed by a wall of iron, covered over with iron.

241.

241.

‘‘Tassa ayomayā bhūmi, jalitā tejasā yutā;

"Its ground is made of iron, blazing, endowed with heat;
On all sides, for a hundred yojanas, it stands pervading always.

242.

242.

‘‘Tatthāhaṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ, dukkhaṃ vedissa vedanaṃ;

"There for a long time, I shall experience painful feeling;
The fruit of evil deeds, therefore I grieve greatly.

243.

243.

‘‘Taṃ vā vadāmi bhaddaṃ vo, yāvantettha samāgatā;

"That I say to you, good be with you, as many as are gathered here;
Do not do evil deeds, openly or in secret.

244.

244.

‘‘Sace taṃ pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, karissatha karotha vā;

"If you do that evil deed, or are doing it now;
There is no escape for you from suffering, even if you take flight and flee.

245.

245.

‘‘Matteyyā hotha petteyyā, kule jeṭṭhāpacāyikā;

"Be devoted to your mother, devoted to your father, respect those who are elder in the family;
Be generous to ascetics, generous to brahmins, thus you will go to heaven."

Imā gāthā abhāsi.

These verses he spoke.

230-231.Tatthapaṇṇānanti paṇṇānāmaraṭṭhassa evaṃnāmakānaṃ rājūnaṃ.Erakacchanti tassa nagarassa nāmaṃ.Tatthāti tasmiṃ nagare.Pureti pubbe atītattabhāve.Dhanapāloti maṃ vidūti ‘‘dhanapālaseṭṭhī’’ti maṃ jānanti. Tayidaṃ nāmaṃ tadā mayhaṃ atthānugatamevāti dassento‘‘asītī’’ti gāthamāha. Tatthaasīti sakaṭavāhānanti vīsatikhāriko vāho, yo sakaṭanti vuccati. Tesaṃ sakaṭavāhānaṃ asīti hiraññassa tathā kahāpaṇassa ca me ahosīti yojanā.Pahūtaṃ me jātarūpanti suvaṇṇampi pahūtaṃ anekabhāraparimāṇaṃ ahosīti sambandho.

230-231.There, paṇṇānaṃ means of the kings named thus of the Paṇṇaraṭṭha country. Erakaccha is the name of that city. Tattha means in that city. Pure means formerly, in a past existence. Dhanapāloti maṃ vidū means "they know me as the wealthy man Dhanapāla." Showing that this name was in accordance with my nature at that time, he said the verse ‘‘asītī’’. There, asīti sakaṭavāhānaṃ means a load of twenty khāris, which is called a cart. The meaning is that I had eighty cartloads of silver and also of kahāpaṇas. Pahūtaṃ me jātarūpaṃ means the connection is that I had abundant gold too, an amount measuring many cartloads.

232-233.Name dātuṃ piyaṃ ahūti dānaṃ dātuṃ mayhaṃ piyaṃ nāhosi.Mā maṃ yācanakāddasunti ‘‘yācakā mā maṃ passiṃsū’’ti pidahitvā gehadvāraṃ bhuñjāmi.Kadariyoti thaddhamaccharī.Paribhāsakoti dānaṃ dente disvā bhayena santajjako.Dadantānaṃ karontānanti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, dānāni dadante puññāni karonte.Bahū janeti bahū satte. Dadantānaṃ vā karontānaṃ vā samudāyabhūtaṃ bahuṃ janaṃ puññakammatovārayissaṃnivāresiṃ.

232-233.Na me dātuṃ piyaṃ ahū means it was not pleasing to me to give a gift. Mā maṃ yācanakāddasuṃ means "lest beggars should see me," I would close the door of my house and eat. Kadariyo means obstinate and miserly. Paribhāsako means one who threatens with fear upon seeing others giving. Dadantānaṃ karontānaṃ is a sāmivacanaṃ in the sense of use, to those giving gifts and doing meritorious deeds. Bahū jane means many beings. I would prevent the community of many people who were giving or doing meritorious deeds from meritorious actions.vārayissaṃ means I prevented.

234-236.Vipāko natthi dānassātiādi dānādīnaṃ nivāraṇe kāraṇadassanaṃ. Tatthavipāko natthi dānassāti dānakammassa phalaṃ nāma natthi, kevalaṃ puññaṃ puññanti dhanavināso evāti dīpeti.Saṃyamassāti sīlasaṃyamassa.Kuto phalanti kuto nāma phalaṃ labbhati, niratthakameva sīlarakkhaṇanti adhippāyo.Ārāmānīti ārāmūpavanānīti attho.Papāyoti pānīyasālā.Duggeti udakacikkhallānaṃ vasena duggamaṭṭhānāni.Saṅkamanānīti setuyo.Tato cutoti tato manussalokato cuto.Pañcapaṇṇāsāti pañcapaññāsa.Yato kālaṅkato ahanti yadā kālakatā ahaṃ, tato paṭṭhāya.Nābhijānāmīti ettakaṃ kālaṃ bhuttaṃ vā pītaṃ vā kiñci na jānāmi.

234-236.Vipāko natthi dānassātiādi shows the reason for preventing giving etc. There, vipāko natthi dānassā means there is no result of the act of giving, it only shows that merit is merely merit and the destruction of wealth. Saṃyamassa means of restraint by virtue of morality. Kuto phalaṃ means how is fruit obtained, the intention is that keeping morality is meaningless. Ārāmānī means parks and gardens. Papāyo means water pavilions. Dugge means difficult places due to mud and water. Saṅkamanānī means bridges. Tato cuto means having passed away from that human world. Pañcapaṇṇāsā means fifty-five. Yato kālaṅkato ahaṃ means from when I died. Nābhijānāmīti means I do not recall having eaten or drunk anything for that long.

237-38.Yo saṃyamo so vināsoti lobhādivasena yaṃ saṃyamanaṃ kassaci adānaṃ, so imesaṃ sattānaṃ vināso nāma petayoniyaṃ nibbattapetānaṃ mahābyasanassa hetubhāvato. ‘‘Yo vināso so saṃyamo’’ti iminā yathāvuttassa atthassa ekantikabhāvaṃ vadati.Petā hi kira jānantīti ettha hi-saddo avadhāraṇe, kira-saddo arucisūcane. ‘‘Saṃyamo deyyadhammassa apariccāgo vināsahetū’’ti imamatthaṃ petā eva kira jānanti paccakkhato anubhuyyamānattā, na manussāti. Nayidaṃ yuttaṃ manussānampi petānaṃ viya khuppipāsādīhi abhibhuyyamānānaṃ dissamānattā. Petā pana purimattabhāve katakammassa pākaṭabhāvato tamatthaṃ suṭṭhutaraṃ jānanti. Tenāha –‘‘ahaṃ pure saṃyamissa’’ntiādi. Tatthasaṃyamissanti sayampi dānādipuññakiriyato saṃyamanaṃ saṅkocaṃ akāsiṃ.Bahuke dhaneti mahante dhane vijjamāne.

237-38.Yo saṃyamo so vināso means that restraint due to greed etc., the non-giving to anyone, that is ruin for these beings, since it is the cause of great suffering, causing them to be reborn in the peta realm. With "yo vināso so saṃyamo" he speaks of the absolute nature of the stated meaning. Petā hi kira jānantīti here, the word "hi" is for emphasis, the word "kira" indicates distaste. Only the petas know this meaning "restraint, non-abandonment of what should be given, is the cause of ruin," since it is directly experienced, not humans. This is not right, since it is seen that humans too are overcome by hunger, thirst, etc., like petas. But petas know that meaning much better due to the obviousness of the deed done in the previous existence. Therefore he said – ‘‘ahaṃ pure saṃyamissa’’ntiādi. There, saṃyamissaṃ means I myself did restraint, constriction, from giving etc., meritorious actions. Bahuke dhane means when great wealth was available.

243.Tanti tasmā.Voti tumhe.Bhaddaṃ voti bhaddaṃ kalyāṇaṃ sundaraṃ tumhākaṃ hotūti vacanaseso.Yāvantettha samāgatāti yāvanto yāvatakā ettha samāgatā, te sabbe mama vacanaṃ suṇāthāti adhippāyo.Āvīti pakāsanaṃ paresaṃ pākaṭavasena.Rahoti paṭicchannaṃ apākaṭavasena.Āvi vāpāṇātipātādimusāvādādikāyavacīpayogavasena,yadi vā rahoabhijjhādivasenapāpakaṃlāmakaṃ akusalakammaṃ mākatthamā karittha.

243.Taṃ means therefore. Vo means you. Bhaddaṃ vo means may good, auspiciousness, beauty be to you, this is the rest of the statement. Yāvantettha samāgatā means however many are gathered here, the intention is that all of you should listen to my words. Āvī means openly, in a way obvious to others. Raho means secretly, in a non-obvious way. Āvi vā means by way of bodily or vocal action such as killing living beings or telling lies, yadi vā raho means by way of covetousness etc., pāpakaṃ means bad, unskillful kammaṃ mākattha means do not do.

244.Sace taṃ pāpakaṃ kammanti atha pana taṃ pāpakammaṃ āyatiṃkarissatha,etarahivā karotha,nirayādīsu catūsu apāyesu manussesu ca appāyukatādivasena tassa phalabhūtā dukkhatopamuttipamokkho nāmanatthi. Uppaccāpi palāyatanti uppatitvā ākāsena gacchantānampi mokkho natthiyevāti attho.‘‘Upeccā’’tipi pāḷi, ito vā etto vā palāyante tumhe anubandhissatīti adhippāyena upecca sañcicca palāyantānampi tumhākaṃ tato mokkho natthi, gatikālādipaccayantarasamavāye pana sati vipaccatiyevāti attho. Ayañca attho –

244.Sace taṃ pāpakaṃ kammaṃnti means but if you karissatha will do that evil deed in the future, or karotha do it now, then there is no pamutti release from the suffering that is the fruit of that deed in the four woeful states beginning with hell, and in humans due to having a short life etc. Uppaccāpi palāyataṃ means even for those flying up and going through the sky, there is no release. ‘‘Upeccā’’tipi pāḷi, means there is also the reading "upecca," meaning even for you fleeing here and there intending to escape, it will follow and there is no escape for you from that, but it will ripen only when there is a coincidence of another causal condition such as the time of movement etc. And this meaning -

‘‘Na antalikkhe na samuddamajjhe, na pabbatānaṃ vivaraṃ pavissa;

"Not in the sky, nor in the midst of the ocean, nor by entering the clefts of the mountains,
Is there found that place on earth where one might stand and be freed from an evil deed." (dha. pa. 127; mi. pa. 4.2.4) –

Imāya gāthāya dīpetabbo.

Should be illuminated by this verse.

245.Matteyyāti mātuhitā.Hothāti tesaṃ upaṭṭhānādīni karotha. Tathāpetteyyāti veditabbā.Kule jeṭṭhāpacāyikāti kule jeṭṭhakānaṃ apacāyanakarā.Sāmaññāti samaṇapūjakā. Tathābrahmaññāti bāhitapāpapūjakāti attho.Evaṃ saggaṃ gamissathāti iminā mayā vuttanayena puññāni katvā devalokaṃ upapajjissathāti attho. Yaṃ panettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā khallāṭiyapetavatthuādīsu vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

245.Matteyyā means kind to their mothers. Hothā means you should do services such as attending to them. Similarly, petteyyā should be understood. Kule jeṭṭhāpacāyikā means respecting the elders in the family. Sāmaññā means honoring ascetics. Similarly, brahmaññā means honoring those who have banished evil. Evaṃ saggaṃ gamissathā means by doing meritorious deeds in the way spoken by me, you will be reborn in the world of devas. Whatever is not explained here in terms of meaning should be understood in the same way as stated in the Khallāṭiyapetavatthu etc. below.

Te vāṇijā tassa vacanaṃ sutvā saṃvegajātā taṃ anukampamānā bhājanehi pānīyaṃ gahetvā taṃ sayāpetvā mukhe āsiñciṃsu. Tato mahājanena bahuvelaṃ āsittaṃ udakaṃ tassa petassa pāpabalena adhogaḷaṃ na otiṇṇaṃ, kuto pipāsaṃ paṭivinessati. Te taṃ pucchiṃsu – ‘‘api te kāci assāsamattā laddhā’’ti. So āha – ‘‘yadi me ettakehi janehi ettakaṃ velaṃ āsiñcamānaṃ udakaṃ ekabindumattampi paragaḷaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ, ito petayonito mokkho mā hotū’’ti. Atha te vāṇijā taṃ sutvā ativiya saṃvegajātā ‘‘atthi pana koci upāyo pipāsāvūpasamāyā’’ti āhaṃsu. So āha – ‘‘imasmiṃ pāpakamme khīṇe tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakānaṃ vā dāne dinne mama dānamuddisissati, ahaṃ ito petattato muccissāmī’’ti. Taṃ sutvā vāṇijā sāvatthiṃ gantvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā taṃ pavattiṃ ārocetvā saraṇāni sīlāni ca gahetvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa sattāhaṃ dānaṃ datvā tassa petassa dakkhiṇaṃ ādisiṃsu. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā catunnaṃ parisānaṃ dhammaṃ desesi. Mahājano ca lobhādimaccheramalaṃ pahāya dānādipuññābhirato ahosīti.

Those merchants, hearing his words, being stirred with emotion and pitying him, took water in vessels, made him lie down, and poured it into his mouth. Then, the water poured in by the great crowd for a long time did not go down his throat due to the power of the peta’s evil deed, how could it relieve his thirst? They asked him, “Have you obtained any relief?” He said, “If even a drop of water from so many people pouring it in for so long has entered past my throat, may there be no release for me from this peta existence.” Then those merchants, hearing that, being exceedingly stirred with emotion, asked, “Is there any way to relieve your thirst?” He said, “When this evil deed is exhausted, if a gift is given to the Tathāgata or to the disciples of the Tathāgata, and the giving is designated for me, I will be freed from this peta-state.” Hearing that, the merchants went to Sāvatthi, approached the Blessed One, related that event, took refuge and the precepts, gave alms to the Saṅgha of monks with the Buddha at their head for a week, and dedicated the merit to that peta. The Blessed One, making that matter the occasion for a discourse, taught the Dhamma to the four assemblies. And the great crowd, abandoning the defilement of greed etc. and miserliness, became devoted to meritorious deeds such as giving.

Dhanapālaseṭṭhipetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Dhanapālaseṭṭhi Peta Story is complete.

8. Cūḷaseṭṭhipetavatthuvaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Cūḷaseṭṭhi Peta Story

Naggo kiso pabbajitosi, bhanteti idaṃ satthari veḷuvane viharante cūḷaseṭṭhipetaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Bārāṇasiyaṃ kira eko gahapati assaddho appasanno maccharī kadariyo puññakiriyāya anādaro cūḷaseṭṭhi nāma ahosi. So kālaṃ katvā petesu nibbatti, tassa kāyo apagatamaṃsalohito aṭṭhinhārucammamatto muṇḍo apetavattho ahosi. Dhītā panassa anulā andhakavinde sāmikassa gehe vasantī pitaraṃ uddissa brāhmaṇe bhojetukāmā taṇḍulādīni dānūpakaraṇāni sajjesi. Taṃ ñatvā peto āsāya ākāsena tattha gacchanto rājagahaṃ sampāpuṇi. Tena ca samayena rājā ajātasattu devadattena uyyojito pitaraṃ jīvitā voropetvā tena vippaṭisārena dussupinena ca niddaṃ anupagacchanto uparipāsādavaragato caṅkamanto taṃ petaṃ ākāsena gacchantaṃ disvā imāya gāthāya pucchi –

"Naggo kiso pabbajitosi, bhante"ti This (verse) was spoken by the Teacher while dwelling at the Bamboo Grove, concerning the ghost of Cūḷaseṭṭhi. It is said that in Bārāṇasī, there was a householder named Cūḷaseṭṭhi, who was faithless, displeased, miserly, stingy, and indifferent to meritorious deeds. Having died, he was reborn among the ghosts. His body, devoid of flesh and blood, was reduced to skin, bones, and sinews; he was bald and without clothes. His daughter, Anulā, living in Andhakavinda in her husband's house, wishing to feed Brahmins in dedication to her father, prepared rice and other requisites for alms-giving. Knowing this, the ghost, hoping (for the merit), went through the air to that place, but reached Rājagaha. At that time, King Ajātasattu, incited by Devadatta, having killed his father and unable to sleep due to remorse and nightmares, was pacing on the upper terrace of his palace when he saw that ghost going through the air and asked him with this verse:

246.

246.

‘‘Naggo kiso pabbajitosi bhante, rattiṃ kuhiṃ gacchasi kissahetu;

"Naked, emaciated, a recluse you seem, venerable sir, where do you go at night, and why?
Tell me that, perhaps we may be able to satisfy you with all wealth."

pabbajitoti samaṇo. Rājā kira taṃ naggattā muṇḍattā ca ‘‘naggo samaṇo aya’’nti saññāya ‘‘naggo kiso pabbajitosī’’tiādimāha.Kissahetūti kinnimittaṃ.Sabbena vittaṃ paṭipādaye tuvanti vittiyā upakaraṇabhūtaṃ vittaṃ sabbena bhogena tuyhaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ, sabbena vā ussāhena paṭipādeyyaṃ sampādeyyaṃ. Tathā kātuṃ mayaṃ appeva nāma sakkuṇeyyāma, tasmāācikkha me taṃ,etaṃ tava āgamanakāraṇaṃ mayhaṃ kathehīti attho.

Pabbajito: a renunciate. It seems the king, thinking him to be a naked ascetic due to his nakedness and baldness, addressed him as "naggo kiso pabbajitosī" and so on. Kissahetū: for what reason? Sabbena vittaṃ paṭipādaye tuvaṃ: with all wealth, meaning wealth that serves as a means for livelihood, or with all effort, I could provide and accomplish (what you need) according to your desire. We may indeed be able to do so, therefore ācikkha me taṃ: tell me the reason for your coming, explain this cause of your arrival to me, is the meaning.

Evaṃ raññā puṭṭho peto attano pavattiṃ kathento tisso gāthā abhāsi –

Thus questioned by the king, the ghost, relating his own story, spoke three verses:

247.

247.

‘‘Bārāṇasī nagaraṃ dūraghuṭṭhaṃ, tatthāhaṃ gahapati aḍḍhako ahu dīno;

"Bārāṇasī is a city famed far and wide, there I was a wealthy householder, but stingy;
Ungiving, with a mind greedy for sensual pleasures, I reached the realm of Yama due to immorality.

248.

248.

‘‘So sūcikāya kilamito tehi,

"I am tormented by that needle;
For that reason, I go among my relatives, seeking a morsel of food;
They are uncharitable and do not believe that ‘there is fruit of giving in the next world.’"

249.

249.

‘‘Dhītā ca mayhaṃ lapate abhikkhaṇaṃ, dassāmi dānaṃ pitūnaṃ pitāmahānaṃ;

"And my daughter speaks often, ‘I will give alms to fathers and grandfathers’;
Brahmins are served with what is prepared; I go to Andhakavinda to eat."

247.Tatthadūraghuṭṭhanti dūrato eva guṇakittanavasena ghositaṃ, sabbattha vissutaṃ pākaṭanti attho.Aḍḍhakoti aḍḍho mahāvibhavo.Dīnoti nihīnacitto adānajjhāsayo. Tenāha‘‘adātā’’ti.Gedhitamano āmisasminti kāmāmise laggacitto gedhaṃ āpanno.Dussīlyena yamavisayamhi pattoti attanā katena dussīlakammunā yamavisayaṃ petalokaṃ patto amhi.

247. There, dūraghuṭṭhaṃ: proclaimed from afar by way of reciting virtues, well-known and famous everywhere, is the meaning. Aḍḍhako: wealthy, possessing great riches. Dīno: of base mind, inclined to ungenerosity. Therefore, he said ‘‘adātā’’. Gedhitamano āmisasmiṃ: with a mind clinging to sensual pleasures, overcome by greed. Dussīlyena yamavisayamhi patto: by the immoral actions done by myself, I have reached the realm of Yama, the world of ghosts.

248.So sūcikāya kilamitoti so ahaṃ vijjhanaṭṭhena sūcisadisatāya ‘‘sūcikā’’ti laddhanāmāya jighacchāya kilamito nirantaraṃ vijjhamāno. ‘‘Kilamatho’’ti icceva vā pāṭho.Tehīti ‘‘dīno’’tiādinā vuttehi pāpakammehi kāraṇabhūtehi. Tassa hi petassa tāni pāpakammāni anussarantassa ativiya domanassaṃ uppajji, tasmā evamāha.Tenevāti teneva jighacchādukkhena.Ñātīsu yāmīti ñātīnaṃ samīpaṃ yāmi gacchāmi.Āmisakiñcikkhahetūti āmisassa kiñcikkhanimittaṃ, kiñci āmisaṃ patthentoti attho.Adānasīlā na ca saddahanti, ‘dānaphalaṃ hoti paramhi loke’ti yathā ahaṃ, tathā evaṃ aññepi manussā adānasīlā ‘‘dānassa phalaṃ ekaṃsena paraloke hotī’’ti na ca saddahanti. Yato ahaṃ viya tepi petā hutvā mahādukkhaṃ paccanubhavantīti adhippāyo.

248. So sūcikāya kilamito: I am wearied by that hunger, which, by its piercing nature, is like a needle (sūcikā) and has thus obtained the name "needle," constantly piercing me. "Kilamatho" could also be a reading. Tehī: by those evil deeds mentioned by "dīno" etc., which are the cause. Indeed, great remorse arose in that ghost as he recalled those evil deeds, therefore he spoke thus. Tenevā: by that very suffering of hunger. Ñātīsu yāmī: I go near to the relatives. Āmisakiñcikkhahetū: for the sake of a tiny bit of food, desiring some food, is the meaning. Adānasīlā na ca saddahanti, ‘dānaphalaṃ hoti paramhi loke’: just as I am, so too other people are uncharitable and do not believe that "there is certainly a result of giving in the next world." The implication is that, like me, they too will become ghosts and experience great suffering.

249.Lapateti katheti.Abhikkhaṇanti abhiṇhaṃ bahuso. Kinti lapatīti āha‘‘dassāmi dānaṃ pitūnaṃ pitāmahāna’’nti. Tatthapitūnanti mātāpitūnaṃ, cūḷapitumahāpitūnaṃ vā.Pitāmahānanti ayyakapayyakānaṃ.Upakkhaṭanti sajjitaṃ.Parivisayantīti bhojayanti.Andhakavindanti evaṃnāmakaṃ nagaraṃ.Bhuttunti bhuñjituṃ. Tato parā saṅgītikārakehi vuttā –

249. Lapate: says. Abhikkhaṇaṃ: frequently, repeatedly. What does she say? He says, ‘‘dassāmi dānaṃ pitūnaṃ pitāmahāna’’. There, pitūnaṃ: to the parents, or to the great-grandparents. Pitāmahānaṃ: to the grandfathers and great-grandfathers. Upakkhaṭaṃ: prepared. Parivisayantī: they serve. Andhakavindaṃ: a city of that name. Bhuttuṃ: to eat. From then on, it was recited by the Saṅgītikārakas (reciters):

250.

250.

‘‘Tamavoca rājā ‘anubhaviyāna tampi,

"The king said to him, ‘Having experienced even that,
Come quickly, I too will make an offering;
Tell me that, if there is a reason,
We will listen to a trustworthy explanation.’"

251.

251.

‘‘Tathāti vatvā agamāsi tattha, bhuñjiṃsu bhattaṃ na ca dakkhiṇārahā;

"‘So be it,’ he said, and went there; they ate the meal, but were not worthy of offerings;
He returned to Rājagaha again, and appeared before the lord of men.

252.

252.

‘‘Disvāna petaṃ punadeva āgataṃ, rājā avoca ‘ahamapi kiṃ dadāmi;

"Seeing the ghost come again, the king said, ‘What shall I give?
Tell me that, if there is a reason, so that you may be pleased for a long time.’"

253.

253.

‘‘Buddhañca saṅghaṃ parivisiyāna rāja, annena pānena ca cīvarena;

"‘Having served the Buddha and the Sangha, O king,
With food, drink, and robes;
Dedicate that merit to my welfare, thus I may be pleased for a long time.’"

254.

254.

‘‘Tato ca rājā nipatitvā tāvade, dānaṃ sahatthā atulaṃ daditvā saṅghe;

"Then the king, having descended immediately,
Gave an unsurpassed gift to the Sangha with his own hands;
He announced what was done to the Tathāgata,
And dedicated the merit to that ghost."

255.

255.

‘‘So pūjito ativiya sobhamāno, pāturahosi purato janādhipassa;

"He, being honored, exceedingly radiant,
Appeared before the lord of men;
‘I am a Yaksha, having attained great power,
Humans are neither equal nor similar to me.’"

256.

256.

‘‘Passānubhāvaṃ aparimitaṃ mamayidaṃ, tayānudiṭṭhaṃ atulaṃ datvā saṅghe;

"‘Behold my immeasurable power, this you have caused,
Having given an unsurpassed gift to the Sangha;
I am always and constantly satisfied by many things,
I depart, happy, from the world of men and gods.’"

250.Tatthatamavoca rājāti taṃ petaṃ tathā vatvā ṭhitaṃ rājā ajātasattu avoca.Anubhaviyāna tampīti taṃ tava dhītuyā upakkhaṭaṃ dānampi anubhavitvā.Eyyāsīti āgaccheyyāsi.Kassanti karissāmi.Ācikkhame taṃ yadi atthi hetūti sace kiñci kāraṇaṃ atthi, taṃ kāraṇaṃ mayhaṃ ācikkha kathehi.Saddhāyitanti saddhāyitabbaṃ.Hetuvacoti hetuyuttavacanaṃ, ‘‘amukasmiṃ ṭhāne asukena pakārena dāne kate mayhaṃ upakappatī’’ti sakāraṇaṃ vacanaṃ vadāti attho.

250. There, tamavoca rājā: King Ajātasattu said to that ghost who was standing there after speaking thus. Anubhaviyāna tampi: having experienced even that alms prepared by your daughter. Eyyāsī: may you come. Kassaṃ: I will do. Ācikkha me taṃ yadi atthi hetū: if there is any reason, tell that reason to me, explain. Saddhāyitaṃ: to be believed. Hetuvaco: a statement with reason, meaning a statement with a cause, saying, "If alms are given in such a way in such a place, it will be helpful to me."

251.Tathāti vatvāti sādhūti vatvā.Tatthāti tasmiṃ andhakavinde parivesanaṭṭhāne.Bhuñjiṃsu bhattaṃ na ca dakkhiṇārahāti bhattaṃ bhuñjiṃsu dussīlabrāhmaṇā, na ca pana dakkhiṇārahā sīlavanto bhuñjiṃsūti attho.Punāparanti puna aparaṃ vāraṃ rājagahaṃ paccāgami.

251. Tathāti vatvā: saying "good." Tatthā: in that place of serving in Andhakavinda. Bhuñjiṃsu bhattaṃ na ca dakkhiṇārahā: the immoral Brahmins ate the meal, but not the virtuous ones who are worthy of offerings, is the meaning. Punāparaṃ: again, another time, he returned to Rājagaha.

252.Kiṃ dadāmīti ‘‘kīdisaṃ te dānaṃ dassāmī’’ti rājā petaṃ pucchi.Yena tuvanti yena kāraṇena tvaṃ.Cirataranti cirakālaṃ.Pīṇitoti titto siyā, taṃ kathehīti attho.

252. Kiṃ dadāmī: "What kind of alms shall I give you?" the king asked the ghost. Yena tuvaṃ: by which you. Cirataraṃ: for a long time. Pīṇito: may be satisfied, tell me that, is the meaning.

253.Parivisiyānāti bhojetvā.Rājāti ajātasattuṃ ālapati.Me hitāyāti mayhaṃ hitatthāya petattabhāvato parimuttiyā.

253. Parivisiyānā: having fed. Rājā: addresses Ajātasattu. Me hitāyā: for my welfare, for liberation from the state of being a ghost.

254.Tatoti tasmā tena vacanena, tato vā pāsādato.Nipatitvāti nikkhamitvā.Tāvadeti tadā eva aruṇuggamanavelāya. Yamhi peto paccāgantvā rañño attānaṃ dassesi, tasmiṃ purebhatte eva dānaṃ adāsi.Sahatthāti sahatthena.Atulanti appamāṇaṃ uḷāraṃ paṇītaṃ.Datvā saṅgheti saṅghassa datvā.Ārocesi pakataṃ tathāgatassāti ‘‘idaṃ, bhante, dānaṃ aññataraṃ petaṃ sandhāya pakata’’nti taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Ārocetvā ca yathā taṃ dānaṃ tassa upakappati, evaṃ tassa ca petassa dakkhiṇaṃ ādisittha ādisi.

254. Tato: therefore, by that statement, or from the palace. Nipatitvā: having descended. Tāvade: at that very moment, at the time of sunrise. On the same morning when the ghost returned and showed himself to the king, he gave alms. Sahatthā: with his own hand. Atulaṃ: immeasurable, grand, excellent. Datvā saṅghe: having given to the Sangha. Ārocesi pakataṃ tathāgatassā: "This alms, venerable sir, was done in reference to a certain ghost," he announced that event to the Blessed One. Having announced it, he dedicated the merit to that ghost in such a way that the alms would be beneficial to him.

255.Soti so peto.Pūjitoti dakkhiṇāya diyyamānāya pūjito.Ativiya sobhamānoti dibbānubhāvena ativiya virocamāno.Pāturahosīti pātubhavi, rañño purato attānaṃ dassesi.Yakkhohamasmīti petattabhāvato mutto yakkho ahaṃ jāto devabhāvaṃ pattosmi.Na mayhamatthi samā sadisā mānusāti mayhaṃ ānubhāvasampattiyā samā vā bhogasampattiyā sadisā vā manussā na santi.

255. So: that ghost. Pūjito: honored by the merit being given. Ativiya sobhamāno: exceedingly radiant with divine power. Pāturahosī: appeared, showed himself before the king. Yakkhohamasmī: having been freed from the state of being a ghost, I have become a Yaksha, having attained a divine state. Na mayhamatthi samā sadisā mānusā: there are no humans equal to me in the attainment of power or similar in the possession of wealth.

256.Passānubhāvaṃaparimitaṃ mamayidanti ‘‘mama idaṃ aparimāṇaṃ dibbānubhāvaṃ passā’’ti attano sampattiṃ paccakkhato rañño dassento vadati.Tayānudiṭṭhaṃ atulaṃ datvā saṅgheti ariyasaṅghassa atulaṃ uḷāraṃ dānaṃ datvā mayhaṃ anukampāya tayā anudiṭṭhaṃ.Santappito satataṃ sadā bahūhīti annapānavatthādīhi bahūhi deyyadhammehi ariyasaṅghaṃ santappentena tayā sadā sabbakālaṃ yāvajīvaṃ tatthāpi satataṃ nirantaraṃ ahaṃ santappito pīṇito.Yāmi ahaṃ sukhito manussadevāti ‘‘tasmā ahaṃ idāni sukhito manussadeva mahārāja yathicchitaṭṭhānaṃ yāmī’’ti rājānaṃ āpucchi.

256. Passānubhāvaṃ aparimitaṃ mamayidaṃ: showing his own wealth directly to the king, he says, "Behold my immeasurable divine power." Tayānudiṭṭhaṃ atulaṃ datvā saṅghe: having given immeasurable and excellent alms to the Noble Sangha, it was overseen by you out of compassion for me. Santappito satataṃ sadā bahūhī: by you, who always and constantly, for as long as life lasts, and even then continuously, satisfy the Noble Sangha with many things to be given such as food, drink, and robes, I am constantly satisfied and pleased. Yāmi ahaṃ sukhito manussadevā: "Therefore, I, now happy, a god among men, depart to a place as I please," he took leave of the king.

Evaṃ pete āpucchitvā gate rājā ajātasattu tamatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ārocesi, bhikkhū bhagavato santikaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Taṃ sutvā mahājano maccheramalaṃ pahāya dānādipuññābhirato ahosīti.

Thus, when the ghost had taken leave and departed, King Ajātasattu announced that matter to the monks, and the monks approached the Blessed One and announced it. The Blessed One, having made that matter the occasion (for teaching) and giving a progressive discourse, taught the Dhamma to the assembled crowd. Having heard it, the great multitude, abandoning the stain of stinginess, became devoted to meritorious deeds such as giving.

Cūḷāseṭṭhipetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Cūḷāseṭṭhi Ghost Story is Concluded.

9. Aṅkurapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
9. Aṅkurapeta Vatthu Description

Yassa atthāya gacchāmāti idaṃ satthā sāvatthiyaṃ viharanto aṅkurapetaṃ ārabbha kathesi. Kāmañcettha aṅkuro peto na hoti, tassa pana caritaṃ yasmā petasambandhaṃ, tasmā taṃ ‘‘aṅkurapetavatthū’’ti vuttaṃ.

Yassa atthāya gacchāmā This (verse) was spoken by the Teacher while dwelling at Sāvatthī, concerning the ghost Aṅkura. Although Aṅkura himself is not a ghost, his story is related to ghosts, therefore it is called the "Aṅkurapeta Vatthu."

Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepakathā – ye te uttaramadhurādhipatino rañño mahāsāgarassa puttaṃ upasāgaraṃ paṭicca uttarāpathe kaṃsabhoge asitañjananagare mahākaṃsassa dhītuyā devagabbhāya kucchiyaṃ uppannā añjanadevī vāsudevo baladevo candadevo sūriyadevo aggidevo varuṇadevo ajjuno pajjuno ghaṭapaṇḍito aṅkuro cāti vāsudevādayo dasa bhātikāti ekādasa khattiyā ahesuṃ, tesu vāsudevādayo bhātaro asitañjananagaraṃ ādiṃ katvā dvāravatīpariyosānesu sakalajambudīpe tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesu sabbe rājāno cakkena jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpetvā dvāravatiyaṃ vasamānā rajjaṃ dasa koṭṭhāse katvā vibhajiṃsu. Bhaginiṃ pana añjanadeviṃ na sariṃsu. Puna saritvā ‘‘ekādasa koṭṭhāse karomā’’ti vutte tesaṃ sabbakaniṭṭho aṅkuro ‘‘mama koṭṭhāsaṃ tassā detha, ahaṃ vohāraṃ katvā jīvissāmi, tumhe attano attano janapadesu suṅkaṃ mayhaṃ vissajjethā’’ti āha. Te ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā tassa koṭṭhāyaṃ bhaginiyā datvā nava rājāno dvāravatiyaṃ vasiṃsu.

Here is a summary of the story: In the north country, in the city of Asitañjana in Kaṃsabhoja, there were eleven khattiyas, namely Vāsudeva, Baladeva, Candadeva, Sūriyadeva, Aggideva, Varuṇadeva, Ajjuna, Pajjuna, Ghaṭapaṇḍita, and Aṅkura—ten Vāsudevas and others, born in the womb of Devagabbhā, the daughter of Mahākaṃsa, with Upasāgara, the son of King Mahāsāgara, the ruler of Uttaramadhurā, as the cause. Beginning with the city of Asitañjana and ending in Dvāravatī, they killed all the kings in sixty-three thousand cities throughout Jambudīpa with a discus, and dividing the kingdom into ten parts, they lived in Dvāravatī. But they did not remember their sister Añjanadevī. When they remembered her again and said, "Let us make eleven parts," Aṅkura, the youngest of them all, said, "Give my share to her; I will live by trading, and you may send me the tolls from your respective countries." They agreed, saying, "Good," and gave his share to his sister, while the nine kings lived in Dvāravatī.

Aṅkuro pana vaṇijjaṃ karonto niccakālaṃ mahādānaṃ deti. Tassa paneko dāso bhaṇḍāgāriko atthakāmo ahosi. Aṅkuro pasannamānaso tassa ekaṃ kuladhītaraṃ gahetvā adāsi. So putte gabbhagateyeva kālamakāsi. Aṅkuro tasmiṃ jāte tassa pituno dinnaṃ bhattavetanaṃ tassa adāsi. Atha tasmiṃ dārake vayappatte ‘‘dāso na dāso’’ti rājakule vinicchayo uppajji. Taṃ sutvā añjanadevī dhenūpamaṃ vatvā ‘‘mātu bhujissāya puttopi bhujisso evā’’ti dāsabyato mocesi.

Aṅkura, however, while engaging in trade, constantly gave great alms. He had a slave who was a treasurer and wished for his welfare. Aṅkura, with a pleased mind, took a maiden from a good family and gave her to him. He died while the sons were still in the womb. When the sons were born, Aṅkura gave them the food allowance that had been given to their father. Then, when the boys came of age, a dispute arose in the royal court as to whether they were slaves or not. Hearing this, Añjanadevī, speaking with a voice like a cow, freed them from slavery, saying, "The son of a free mother is also free."

Dārako pana lajjāya tattha vasituṃ avisahanto roruvanagaraṃ gantvā tattha aññatarassa tunnavāyassa dhītaraṃ gahetvā tunnavāyasippena jīvikaṃ kappesi. Tena samayena roruvanagare asayhamahāseṭṭhi nāma ahosi. So samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavanibbakayācakānaṃ mahādānaṃ deti. So tunnavāyo seṭṭhino gharaṃ ajānantānaṃ pītisomanassajāto hutvā asayhaseṭṭhino nivesanaṃ dakkhiṇabāhuṃ pasāretvā dassesi ‘‘ettha gantvā laddhabbaṃ labhantū’’ti. Tassa kammaṃ pāḷiyaṃyeva āgataṃ.

Unable to live there due to shame, the boy went to the city of Roruva and, taking the daughter of a certain tailor, made a living by tailoring. At that time, there was a wealthy merchant named Asayhamahāseṭṭhi in the city of Roruva. He gave great alms to ascetics, Brahmins, the poor, wayfarers, beggars, and supplicants. That tailor, joyful and delighted, not knowing the merchant's house, stretched out his right arm and showed Asayhaseṭṭhi's residence, saying, "Let them go there and get what they can." His action is described in the Pali itself.

So aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā marubhūmiyaṃ aññatarasmiṃ nigrodharukkhe bhummadevatā hutvā nibbatti, tassa dakkhiṇahattho sabbakāmadado ahosi. Tasmiṃyeva ca roruve aññataro puriso asayhaseṭṭhino dāne byāvaṭo assaddho appasanno micchādiṭṭhiko puññakiriyāya anādaro kālaṃ katvā tassa devaputtassa vasanaṭṭhānassa avidūre peto hutvā nibbatti. Tena ca katakammaṃ pāḷiyaṃyeva āgataṃ. Asayhamahāseṭṭhi pana kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane sakkassa devarañño sahabyataṃ upagato.

Later, having passed away, he was reborn as a bhummadevatā (earth deity) in a certain nigrodha tree in the desert, whose right hand was the giver of all desires. In that same roruva hell, another man, who was involved in Asayha the merchant’s giving, faithless, displeased, of wrong view, and indifferent to meritorious deeds, died and was reborn as a peta not far from the dwelling of that devaputta. The deed he committed is recorded in the Pali itself. But Asayha the great merchant, having passed away, went to companionship with Sakka, the divine king, in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven.

Atha aparena samayena aṅkuro pañcahi sakaṭasatehi, aññataro ca brāhmaṇo pañcahi sakaṭasatehīti dvepi janā sakaṭasahassena bhaṇḍaṃ ādāya marukantāramaggaṃ paṭipannā maggamūḷhā hutvā bahuṃ divasaṃ tattheva vicarantā parikkhīṇatiṇodakāhārā ahesuṃ. Aṅkuro assadūtehi catūsu disāsu pāniyaṃ maggāpesi. Atha so kāmadadahattho yakkho taṃ tesaṃ byasanappattiṃ disvā aṅkurena pubbe attano kataṃ upakāraṃ cintetvā ‘‘handa dāni imassa mayā avassayena bhavitabba’’nti attano vasanavaṭarukkhaṃ dassesi. So kira vaṭarukkho sākhāviṭapasampanno ghanapalāso sandacchāyo anekasahassapāroho āyāmena vitthārena ubbedhena ca yojanaparimāṇo ahosi. Taṃ disvā aṅkuro haṭṭhatuṭṭho tassa heṭṭhā khandhāvāraṃ bandhāpesi. Yakkho attano dakkhiṇahatthaṃ pasāretvā paṭhamaṃ tāva pānīyena sabbaṃ janaṃ santappesi. Tato yo yo yaṃ yaṃ icchati, tassa tassa taṃ taṃ adāsi.

Then, at another time, Aṅkura with five hundred carts, and another Brahmin with five hundred carts, both of these people, taking goods with a thousand carts, set out on the desert route, and having lost their way, wandered there for many days, and their grass, water, and food were exhausted. Aṅkura searched for water in the four directions with horse messengers. Then that yakkha with the wish-fulfilling hand, seeing their misfortune, and thinking of the help he had formerly received from Aṅkura, thought, "Now, I must definitely help him," and showed his dwelling banyan tree. That banyan tree, it is said, was endowed with branches and limbs, with dense foliage and thick shade, with many thousands of shoots, and in length, breadth, and height, it was a yojana in extent. Seeing it, Aṅkura, delighted and pleased, had a camp set up beneath it. The yakkha, extending his right hand, first satisfied all the people with water. Then, whatever each one desired, he gave that to each one.

Evaṃ tasmiṃ mahājane nānāvidhena annapānādinā yathākāmaṃ santappite pacchā vūpasante maggaparissame so brāhmaṇavāṇijo ayoniso manasikaronto evaṃ cintesi – ‘‘dhanalābhāya ito kambojaṃ gantvā mayaṃ kiṃ karissāma, imameva pana yakkhaṃ yena kenaci upāyena gahetvā yānaṃ āropetvā amhākaṃ nagarameva gamissāmā’’ti. Evaṃ cintetvā tamatthaṃ aṅkurassa kathento –

Thus, when that great crowd had been satisfied as they wished with various kinds of food and drink, and later, when their travel weariness had subsided, that Brahmin merchant, considering unwisely, thought thus: "Why should we go to Kamboja for wealth? By some means or other, we will take this yakkha, load him onto a vehicle, and go to our city." Thinking thus, he said this to Aṅkura:

257.

257.

‘‘Yassa atthāya gacchāma, kambojaṃ dhanahārakā;

"For whose sake we go, to Kamboja, bearers of wealth;
This wish-granting yakkha, let us take this yakkha away.

258.

258.

‘‘Imaṃ yakkhaṃ gahetvāna, sādhukena pasayha vā;

Having taken this yakkha, gently or by force,
Having loaded him on a vehicle, quickly let us go to Dvārakā."

yassa atthāyāti yassa kāraṇā.Kambojanti kambojaraṭṭhaṃ.Dhanahārakāti bhaṇḍavikkayena laddhadhanahārino.Kāmadadoti icchiticchitadāyako.Yakkhoti devaputto.Nayāmaseti nayissāma.Sādhukenāti yācanena.Pasayhāti abhibhavitvā balakkārena,yānanti sukhayānaṃ.Dvārakanti dvāravatīnagaraṃ. Ayaṃ hetthādhippāyo – yadatthaṃ mayaṃ ito kambojaṃ gantukāmā, tena gamanena sādhetabbo attho idheva sijjhati. Ayañhi yakkho kāmadado, tasmā imaṃ yakkhaṃ yācitvā tassa anumatiyā vā, sace saññattiṃ na gacchati, balakkārena vā yānaṃ āropetvā yāne pacchābāhaṃ bandhitvā taṃ gahetvā itoyeva khippaṃ dvāravatīnagaraṃ gacchāmāti.

yassa atthāya: for whose sake.Kambojaṃ: the Kamboja country.Dhanahārakā: bearers of wealth obtained by selling goods.Kāmadado: the giver of whatever is desired.Yakkho: the devaputta.Nayāmase: we will take.Sādhukenā: by asking.Pasayhā: having overpowered, by force.Yānaṃ: a comfortable vehicle.Dvārakaṃ: the city of Dvāravatī. This is the underlying meaning: The purpose for which we intend to go to Kamboja, the purpose to be accomplished by that journey is achieved right here. This yakkha is a wish-granter, therefore, either having asked this yakkha and with his permission, or if he does not agree to persuasion, having loaded him onto a vehicle by force, having tied his hands behind his back on the vehicle, having taken him, let us go quickly from here to the city of Dvāravatī.

Evaṃ pana brāhmaṇena vutto aṅkuro sappurisadhamme ṭhatvā tassa vacanaṃ paṭikkhipanto –

Then, when Aṅkura, standing firm in the qualities of a good man, rejected his words, saying:

259.

259.

‘‘Yassa rukkhassa chāyāya, nisīdeyya sayeyya vā;

"In whose tree's shade, one sits or lies down;
One should not break its branch, for a betrayer of a friend is evil."

na bhañjeyyāti na chindeyya.Mittadubbhoti mittesu dubbhanaṃ tesaṃ anatthuppādanaṃ.Pāpakoti abhaddako mittadubbho. Yo hi sītacchāyo rukkho ghammābhitattassa purisassa parissamavinodako, tassāpi nāma pāpakaṃ na cintetabbaṃ, kimaṅkaṃ pana sattabhūtesu. Ayaṃ devaputto sappuriso pubbakārī amhākaṃ dukkhapanūdako bahūpakāro, na tassa kiñci anatthaṃ cintetabbaṃ, aññadatthu so pūjetabbo evāti dasseti.

na bhañjeyya: one should not cut.Mittadubbho: harming friends, causing harm to them.Pāpako: inauspicious, a betrayer of friends. Indeed, one should not think ill even of a tree that provides cool shade and removes the weariness of a person afflicted by heat, so what to say of sentient beings? This devaputta is a good man, a former benefactor, a remover of our suffering, a great help, no harm should be thought of him, rather he should be honored, he shows.

Taṃ sutvā brāhmaṇā ‘‘atthassa mūlaṃ nikativinayo’’ti nītimaggaṃ nissāya aṅkurassa paṭilomapakkhe ṭhatvā –

Hearing that, the Brahmins, relying on the path of worldly wisdom that "deceit is the root of gain," stood on the opposite side of Aṅkura:

260.

260.

‘‘Yassa rukkhassa chāyāya, nisīdeyya sayeyya vā;

"In whose tree's shade, one sits or lies down;
One should cut even its trunk, if the gain is such."

attho ce tādiso siyāti tādisena dabbasambhārena sace attho bhaveyya, tassa rukkhassa khandhampi chindeyya, kimaṅgaṃ pana sākhādayoti adhippāyo.

attho ce tādiso siyā: if there should be gain with such a wealth of resources, one should cut even the trunk of that tree, what to say of branches and the like, is the meaning.

Evaṃ brāhmaṇena vutte aṅkuro sappurisadhammaṃyeva paggaṇhanto –

When the Brahmin had spoken thus, Aṅkura, embracing the qualities of a good man, said:

261.

261.

‘‘Yassa rukkhassa chāyāya, nisīdeyya sayeyya vā;

"In whose tree's shade, one sits or lies down;
One should not break its leaf, for a betrayer of a friend is evil."

na tassa pattaṃ bhindeyyāti tassa rukkhassa ekapaṇṇamattampi na pāteyya, pageva sākhādiketi adhippāyo.

na tassa pattaṃ bhindeyyā: one should not cause even a single leaf of that tree to fall, what to say of branches and so on, is the meaning.

Punapi brāhmaṇo attano vādaṃ paggaṇhanto –

Again, the Brahmin, upholding his own doctrine:

262.

262.

‘‘Yassa rukkhassa chāyāya, nisīdeyya sayeyya vā;

"In whose tree's shade, one sits or lies down;
One should uproot it entirely, if the gain is such."

samūlampi taṃ abbuheti taṃ tattha samūlampi saha mūlenapi abbuheyya, uddhareyyāti attho.

samūlampi taṃ abbuhe: one should uproot it entirely from there, even with its roots, is the meaning.

Evaṃ brāhmaṇena vutte puna aṅkuro taṃ nītiṃ niratthakaṃ kātukāmo –

When the Brahmin had spoken thus, Aṅkura, wishing to render that principle useless:

263.

263.

‘‘Yassekarattimpi ghare vaseyya, yatthannapānaṃ puriso labhetha;

"In whose house one dwells even for a single night, where a person obtains food and drink;
One should not think evil of him even in mind, gratitude is praised by the good.

264.

264.

‘‘Yassekarattimpi ghare vaseyya, annena pānena upaṭṭhito siyā;

"In whose house one dwells even for a single night, having been attended to with food and drink;
One should not think evil of him even in mind, the unbetraying hand burns the betrayer of a friend.

265.

265.

‘‘Yo pubbe katakalyāṇo, pacchā pāpena hiṃsati;

"He who formerly did good, afterwards harms with evil;
Like a person struck by a wet hand, he does not see auspicious things."

Imā tisso gāthā abhāsi.

He spoke these three verses.

263.Tatthayassāti yassa puggalassa.Ekarattimpīti ekarattimattampi kevalaṃ gehe vaseyya.Yatthannapānaṃ puriso labhethāti yassa santike koci puriso annapānaṃ vā yaṃkiñci bhojanaṃ vā labheyya.Na tassapāpaṃ manasāpi cintayeti tassa puggalassa abhaddakaṃ anatthaṃ manasāpi na cinteyya na piheyya, pageva kāyavācāhi. Kasmāti ce?Kataññutā sappurisehi vaṇṇitāti kataññutā nāma buddhādīhi uttamapurisehi pasaṃsitā.

263. Therein, yassa: of which person.Ekarattimpī: even for just one night.Yatthannapānaṃ puriso labhethā: in whose presence a certain man might obtain food and drink or any kind of nourishment.Na tassa pāpaṃ manasāpi cintaye: one should not think or desire ill or harm to that person even in mind, what to say of by body and speech. Why is that? Kataññutā sappurisehi vaṇṇitā: gratitude is praised by the Buddhas and other excellent people.

264.Upaṭṭhitoti payirupāsito ‘‘idaṃ gaṇha idaṃ bhuñjā’’ti annapānādinā upaṭṭhito.Adubbhapāṇīti ahiṃsakahattho hatthasaṃyato.Dahate mittadubbhinti taṃ mittadubbhiṃ puggalaṃ dahati vināseti, appaduṭṭhe hitajjhāsayasampanne puggale parena kato aparādho avisesena tasseva anatthāvaho, appaduṭṭho puggalo atthato taṃ dahati nāma. Tenāha bhagavā –

264.Upaṭṭhito: waited upon, attended upon with food and drink, saying, "Take this, eat this."Adubbhapāṇī: one with a non-harming hand, restrained in hand.Dahate mittadubbhiṃ: the unbetraying hand burns the betrayer of a friend; that burns and destroys that betrayer of a friend, the crime done to an unharmed person, endowed with thoughts of welfare, is without distinction a bringer of harm to him alone, the unharmed person in effect burns him. Therefore, the Blessed One said:

‘‘Yo appaduṭṭhassa narassa dussati, suddhassa posassa anaṅgaṇassa;

"He who wrongs an innocent man, a pure person without stain;
That very evil reverts to the fool, like fine dust thrown against the wind." (dha. pa. 125; jā. 1.5.94; saṃ. ni. 1.22);

265.Yo pubbe katakalyāṇoti yo puggalo kenaci sādhunā katabhaddako katūpakāro.Pacchā pāpena hiṃsatīti taṃ pubbakārinaṃ aparabhāge pāpena abhaddakena anatthakena bādhati.Allapāṇihato posoti allapāṇinā upakārakiriyāya allapāṇinā dhotahatthena pubbakārinā heṭṭhā vuttanayena hato bādhito, tassa vā pubbakārino bādhanena hato allapāṇihato nāma, akataññupuggalo.Na so bhadrāni passatīti so yathāvuttapuggalo idhaloke ca paraloke ca iṭṭhāni na passati, na vindati, na labhatīti attho.

265.Yo pubbe katakalyāṇo: he who was formerly done good, done help by a certain virtuous one.Pacchā pāpena hiṃsatī: in the latter part, harms that former benefactor with evil, inauspiciousness, and harm.Allapāṇihato poso: a person struck by a wet hand, struck or harmed in the way described above by the former benefactor with a wet hand, a hand wet with the act of helping, or struck by the harming of that former benefactor, is called struck by a wet hand, an ungrateful person.Na so bhadrāni passatī: that person as described does not see desirable things in this world or the next, he does not find, does not obtain, is the meaning.

Evaṃ sappurisadhammaṃ paggaṇhantena aṅkurena abhibhavitvā vutto so brāhmaṇo niruttaro tuṇhī ahosi. Yakkho pana tesaṃ dvinnaṃ vacanapaṭivacanāni sutvā brāhmaṇassa kujjhitvāpi ‘‘hotu imassa duṭṭhabrāhmaṇassa kattabbaṃ pacchā jānissāmī’’ti attano kenaci anabhibhavanīyatameva tāva dassento –

Thus, when he had been overcome and spoken to by Aṅkura, who embraced the qualities of a good man, that Brahmin was silenced and became quiet. But the yakkha, having heard the words and replies of those two, though angered with the Brahmin, thinking "I will know what to do to this wicked Brahmin later," showing his own unassailability by anyone:

266.

266.

‘‘Nāhaṃ devena vā manussena vā, issariyena vā haṃ suppasayho;

"Not by a deva or a human, or by power am I easily overcome;
I am a yakkha possessed of supreme power, far-going, endowed with beauty and strength."

devena vāti yena kenaci devena vā.Manussena vāti etthāpi eseva nayo.Issariyenati devissariyena vā manussissariyena vā. Tattha devissariyaṃ nāma catumahārājikasakkasuyāmādīnaṃ deviddhi, manussissariyaṃ nāma cakkavattiādīnaṃ puññiddhi. Tasmā issariyaggahaṇena mahānubhāve devamanusse saṅgaṇhāti. Mahānubhāvāpi hi devā attano puññaphalūpatthambhite manussepi asati payogavipattiyaṃ abhibhavituṃ na sakkonti, pageva itare.Hanti asahane nipāto.Na suppasayhoti appadhaṃsiyo.Yakkhohamasmi paramiddhipattoti attano puññaphalena ahaṃ yakkhattaṃ upagato asmi, yakkhova samāno na yo vā so vā, atha kho paramiddhipatto paramāya uttamāya yakkhiddhiyā samannāgato.Dūraṅgamoti khaṇeneva dūrampi ṭhānaṃ gantuṃ samattho.Vaṇṇabalūpapannoti rūpasampattiyā sarīrabalena ca upapanno samannāgatoti tīhipi padehi mantappayogādīhi attano anabhibhavanīyataṃyeva dasseti. Rūpasampanno hi paresaṃ bahumānito hoti, rūpasampadaṃ nissāya visabhāgavatthunāpi anākaḍḍhaniyovāti vaṇṇasampadā anabhibhavanīyakāraṇanti vuttā.

devena vā: by any deva whatsoever.Manussena vā: here also the same method.Issariyena vā: by divine power or human power. Therein, divine power is the divine power of the Four Great Kings, Sakka, Suyāma, and others, human power is the merit-based power of cakkavattis and others. Therefore, by the term "power," he includes both devas and humans of great influence. For even powerful devas cannot overcome humans supported by the fruit of their own merit when there is no failure in their effort, what to say of others.Ha: is a particle of impatience.Na suppasayho: not easily destroyed.Yakkhohamasmi paramiddhipatto: by the fruit of my own merit, I have attained yakkha status, I am a yakkha, not just anyone, but one possessed of supreme power, endowed with supreme and excellent yakkha power.Dūraṅgamo: capable of going even to a distant place in an instant.Vaṇṇabalūpapanno: endowed with beauty of form and strength of body, by these three terms he shows his own unassailability. For one who is beautiful is respected by others, being beautiful, one is not drawn away even by dissimilar things, therefore, beauty of form is said to be a cause of unassailability.

Ito paraṃ aṅkurassa ca devaputtassa ca vacanapaṭivacanakathā hoti –

From here on, there is the story of the words and replies of Aṅkura and the devaputta:

267.

267.

‘‘Pāṇi te sabbasovaṇṇo, pañcadhāro madhussavo;

"Your hand is all-golden, with five streams, dripping honey;
Various flavors flow, I think you are Purindada (Sakka)."

268.

268.

‘‘Nāmhi devo na gandhabbo, nāpi sakko purindado;

"I am not a deva nor a gandhabba, nor Sakka Purindada;
Know me, Aṅkura, as a peta, come here from Roruva.

269.

269.

‘‘Kiṃsīlo kiṃsamācāro, roruvasmiṃ pure tuvaṃ;

"What was your virtue, what your conduct, in Roruva city?
By what brahmacariya of yours, does merit succeed in your hand?

270.

270.

‘‘Tunnavāyo pure āsiṃ, roruvasmiṃ tadā ahaṃ;

"I was a weaver in the past, then in Roruva I was;
Living meagerly, wretched, I had nothing to give.

271.

271.

‘‘Nivesanañca me āsi, asayhassa upantike;

"And my dwelling was near Asayha's;
Of the faithful, generous master, doer of merit, modest.

272.

272.

‘‘Tattha yācanakāyanti, nānāgottā vanibbakā;

"There came beggars, of various families, mendicants;
And they asked me there, for Asayha's dwelling.

273.

273.

‘‘Kattha gacchāma bhaddaṃ vo, kattha dānaṃ padīyati;

"'Where shall we go, good sir, where is giving offered?'
Asked thus, I told them of Asayha's dwelling.

274.

274.

‘‘Paggayha dakkhiṇaṃ bāhuṃ, ettha gacchatha bhaddaṃ vo;

"'Extending your right arm, go this way, good sir;
Giving is offered there, in Asayha's dwelling.'

275.

275.

‘‘Tena pāṇi kāmadado, tena pāṇi madhussavo;

"By that, my hand is wish-fulfilling, by that, my hand drips honey;
By that brahmacariya of mine, merit succeeds in my hand.

276.

276.

‘‘Na kira tvaṃ adā dānaṃ, sakapāṇīhi kassaci;

"Indeed, you did not give a gift, with your own hands to anyone;
Approving of another's gift, extending your hand, you spoke.

277.

277.

‘‘Tena pāṇi kāmadado, tena pāṇi madhussavo;

"By that, your hand is wish-fulfilling, by that, your hand drips honey;
By that brahmacariya of yours, merit succeeds in your hand.

278.

278.

‘‘Yo so dānamadā bhante, pasanno sakapāṇibhi;

"That one who gave gifts, revered sir, pleased with his own hands;
Having abandoned the human body, to what destination did he go?

279.

279.

‘‘Nāhaṃ pajānāmi asayhasāhino, aṅgīrasassa gatiṃ āgatiṃ vā;

"I do not know the going or coming of Asayha, the giver of food, the Aṅgirasa;
But I have heard in the presence of Vessavaṇa that Asayha has gone to companionship with Sakka.

280.

280.

‘‘Alameva kātuṃ kalyāṇaṃ, dānaṃ dātuṃ yathārahaṃ;

"It is enough to do good, to give gifts as is fitting;
Having seen a wish-fulfilling hand, who would not do merit?

281.

281.

‘‘So hi nūna ito gantvā, anuppatvāna dvārakaṃ;

"Surely, having gone from here, and arrived at Dvārakā;
I will establish giving, which will bring me happiness.

282.

282.

‘‘Dassāmannañca pānañca, vatthasenāsanāni ca;

"I will give food and drink, cloth, lodging;
And wells and water-sheds, causeways in difficult places."

Pannarasa vacanapaṭivacanagāthā honti.

There are fifteen verses of words and replies.

267.Tatthapāṇi teti tava dakkhiṇahattho.Sabbasovaṇṇoti sabbaso suvaṇṇavaṇṇo.Pañcadhāroti pañcahi aṅgulīhi parehi kāmitavatthūnaṃ dhārā etassa santīti pañcadhāro.Madhussavoti madhurarasavissandako. Tenāha‘‘nānārasā paggharantī’’ti, madhurakaṭukakasāvādibhedā nānāvidhā rasā vissandantīti attho. Yakkhassa hi kāmadade madhurādirasasampannāni vividhāni khādanīyabhojanīyāni hatthe vissajjante madhurādirasā paggharantīti vuttaṃ.Maññehaṃ taṃ purindadanti maññe ahaṃ taṃ purindadaṃ sakkaṃ, ‘‘evaṃmahānubhāvo sakko devarājā’’ti taṃ ahaṃ maññāmīti attho.

267. Here, pāṇi te means your right hand. Sabbasovaṇṇo means entirely golden in color. Pañcadhāro means having streams of desired objects flowing from the five fingers. Madhussavo means exuding sweet flavor. Hence it was said, "nānārasā paggharantī," meaning various flavors such as sweet, bitter, and astringent flow out. For the Yaksha, various kinds of delicious edibles and foods with sweet and other flavors emanate from his hand according to his desire; hence it is said that sweet and other flavors flow out. Maññehaṃ taṃ purindada means I think of you as Purindada, Sakka; I consider you to be Sakka, the king of the gods, who has such great power. This is the meaning.

268.Nāmhi devoti vessavaṇādiko pākaṭadevo na homi.Na gandhabboti gandhabbakāyikadevopi na homi.Nāpi sakko purindadoti purimattabhāve pure dānassa paṭṭhapitattā ‘‘purindado’’ti laddhanāmo sakko devarājāpi na homi. Kataro pana ahosīti āha‘‘petaṃ maṃ aṅkura jānāhī’’tiādi. Aṅkurapetūpapattikaṃ maṃ jānāhi, ‘‘aññataro petamahiddhiko’’ti maṃ upadhārehi.Roruvamhā idhāgatanti roruvanagarato cavitvā marukantāre idha imasmiṃ nigrodharukkhe upapajjanavasena āgataṃ, ettha nibbattanti attho.

268. Nāmhi devo means I am not a well-known deva like Vessavaṇa. Na gandhabbo means I am not a Gandhabba-bodied deva either. Nāpi sakko purindado means I am not Sakka, the king of the gods, who is named "Purindada" because of establishing the giving of alms in a previous existence. Then he says, "Who was I then?" ‘‘petaṃ maṃ aṅkura jānāhī’’ means know me as Aṅkura, a peta in the peta realm; consider me to be a peta with great power. Roruvamhā idhāgata means having passed away from the city of Roruva and arrived in this Nigrodha tree in this desert due to rebirth; it means being reborn here.

269.Kiṃsīlo kiṃsamācāro, roruvasmiṃ pure tuvanti pubbe purimattabhāve roruvanagare vasanto tvaṃ kiṃsīlo kiṃsamācāro ahosi, pāpato nivattanalakkhaṇaṃ kīdisaṃ sīlaṃ samādāya saṃvattitapuññakiriyālakkhaṇena samācārena kiṃsamācāro, dānādīsu kusalasamācāresu kīdiso samācāro ahosīti attho.Kena te brahmacariyena,puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhatīti kīdisena seṭṭhacariyena idaṃ evarūpaṃ tava hatthesu puññaphalaṃ idāni samijjhati nipphajjati, taṃ kathehīti attho. Puññaphalañhi idha uttarapadalopena ‘‘puñña’’nti adhippetaṃ. Tatthā hi taṃ ‘‘kusalānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.80) puññanti vuttaṃ.

269. Kiṃsīlo kiṃsamācāro, roruvasmiṃ pure tuva means what was your sīla and what was your samācāra when you lived in the city of Roruva in a previous existence? What kind of sīla, characterized by refraining from evil, did you undertake, and what kind of samācāra, characterized by meritorious actions, did you engage in? What kind of samācāra was there in meritorious practices such as giving alms? This is the meaning. Kena te brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhatī means by what kind of excellent conduct (brahmacariya) does this meritorious result now succeed and come to fruition in your hands? Tell me that. Here, "puñña" is understood to mean "puññaphala" (meritorious result) by the elision of the latter word. Indeed, in such passages as "Due to undertaking wholesome dhammas, merit thus increases" (D. III, 80), it is referred to as "puñña."

270.Tunnavāyoti tunnakāro.Sukicchavuttīti suṭṭhu kicchaputtiko ativiya dukkhajīviko.Kapaṇoti varāko, dīnoti attho.Na me vijjati dātaveti addhikānaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ dātuṃ kiñci dātabbayuttakaṃ mayhaṃ natthi, cittaṃ pana me dānaṃ dinnanti adhippāyo.

270. Tunnavāyo means a weaver. Sukicchavuttī means one who has a very difficult livelihood, living in extreme poverty. Kapaṇo means wretched, poor. Na me vijjati dātave means I have nothing fit to give to supplicants, samaṇas, and brāhmaṇas, but my intention was to give alms. This is the intended meaning.

271.Nivesananti gharaṃ, kammakaraṇasālā vā.Asayhassa upantiketi asayhassa mahāseṭṭhino gehassa samīpe.Saddhassāti kammaphalasaddhāya samannāgatassa.Dānapatinoti dāne nirantarappavattāya pariccāgasampattiyā lobhassa ca abhibhavena patibhūtassa.Katapuññassāti pubbe katasucaritakammassa.Lajjinoti pāpajigucchanasabhāvassa.

271. Nivesana means house or workshop. Asayhassa upantike means near the house of the great merchant Asayha. Saddhassā means endowed with faith in the results of kamma. Dānapatino means one who is the master of giving, constantly engaged in giving, having overcome greed with the accomplishment of generosity. Katapuññassā means one who has performed meritorious deeds in the past. Lajjino means having a nature of abhorrence towards evil.

272.Tatthāti tasmiṃ mama nivesane.Yācanakāyantīti yācanakā janā asayhaseṭṭhiṃ kiñci yācitukāmā āgacchanti.Nānāgottāti nānāvidhagottāpadesā.Vanibbakāti vaṇṇadīpakā, ye dāyakassa puññaphalādiñca guṇakittanādimukhena attano atthikabhāvaṃ pavedentā vicaranti.Te ca maṃ tattha pucchantītitatthāti nipātamattaṃ, te yācakādayo maṃ asayhaseṭṭhino nivesanaṃ pucchanti. Akkharacintakā hi īdisesu ṭhānesu kammadvayaṃ icchanti.

272. Tatthā means in that house of mine. Yācanakāyantī means supplicants come to Asayha the merchant, wishing to ask for something. Nānāgottā means having various family lineages. Vanibbakā means panegyrists, those who go around proclaiming their neediness by praising the giver's merit and virtues. Te ca maṃ tattha pucchantī means tatthā is merely a particle; those supplicants and others ask me for the house of Asayha the merchant. For those who think about the letters, two kinds of kamma are desired in such places.

273.Kattha gacchāma bhaddaṃ vo, kattha dānaṃ padīyatīti tesaṃ pucchanākāradassanaṃ. Ayaṃ pettha attho – bhaddaṃ tumhākaṃ hotu, mayaṃ ‘‘asayhamahāseṭṭhinā dānaṃ padīyatī’’ti sutvā āgatā, kattha dānaṃ padīyati, kattha vā mayaṃ gacchāma, kattha gatena dānaṃ sakkā laddhunti.Tesāhaṃ puṭṭho akkhāmīti evaṃ tehi addhikajanehi labhanaṭṭhānaṃ puṭṭho ‘‘ahaṃ pubbe akatapuññatāya idāni īdisānaṃ kiñci dātuṃ asamattho jāto, dānaggaṃ pana imesaṃ dassento lābhassa upāyācikkhaṇena pītiṃ uppādento ettakenapi bahuṃ puññaṃ pasavāmī’’ti gāravaṃ uppādetvā dakkhiṇaṃ bāhuṃ pasāretvā tesaṃ asayhaseṭṭhissa nivesanaṃ akkhāmi. Tenāha‘‘paggayha dakkhiṇaṃ bāhu’’ntiādi.

273. Kattha gacchāma bhaddaṃ vo, kattha dānaṃ padīyatī shows the manner of their asking. This is the meaning here: May good befall you; we have come having heard that "alms are given by the great merchant Asayha"; where are alms given, or where should we go, where can we obtain alms by going? Tesāhaṃ puṭṭho akkhāmī means having been asked by those supplicants about the place of obtaining alms, "Because of my past lack of merit, I am now unable to give anything to such people, but by showing them the place of alms, I generate joy by indicating the means of gain, and by this much, I produce much merit," having generated respect, I extended my right arm and showed them the house of Asayha the merchant. Therefore, it was said ‘‘paggayha dakkhiṇaṃ bāhu’’.

274.Tena pāṇi kāmadadoti tena paradānapakāsanena parena katassa dānassa sakkaccaṃ anumodanamattena hetunā idāni mayhaṃ hattho kapparukkho viya santānakalatā viya ca kāmaduho icchiticchitadāyī kāmadado hoti. Kāmadado ca hontotena pāṇi madhussavoiṭṭhavatthuvissajjanako jāto.

274. Tena pāṇi kāmadado means due to that act of revealing another's almsgiving, due to the mere act of approving of the alms given by another, my hand is now a wish-fulfilling tree, like a creeper of continuous abundance, granting whatever is desired. And becoming a wish-fulfiller, tena pāṇi madhussavo became an issuer of desired objects.

276.Na kira tvaṃ adā dānantikirāti anussavanatthe nipāto, tvaṃ kira attano santakaṃ na pariccaji,sakapāṇīhisahatthehi yassa kassaci samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā kiñci dānaṃ na adāsi.Parassa dānaṃ anumodamānoti kevalaṃ pana parena kataṃ parassa dānaṃ ‘‘aho dānaṃ pavattesī’’ti anumodamānoyeva vihāsi.

276. Na kira tvaṃ adā dāna means kirā is a particle in the sense of hearsay; you did not give up your own possessions, you did not give any alms to any samaṇa or brāhmaṇa with your own hands ( sakapāṇīhi). Parassa dānaṃ anumodamāno means you only rejoiced in the alms given by another, "Oh, alms are being given!"

277.Tena pāṇi kāmadadoti tena tuyhaṃ pāṇi evaṃ kāmadado, aho acchariyā vata puññānaṃ gatīti adhippāyo.

277. Tena pāṇi kāmadado means therefore, your hand is a wish-fulfiller; how wonderful is the course of merit! This is the intended meaning.

278.Yo so dānamadā, bhante, pasanno sakapāṇibhīti devaputtaṃ gāravena ālapati. Bhante, parena katassa dānānumodakassa tāva tuyhaṃ īdisaṃ phalaṃ evarūpo ānubhāvo, yo pana so asayhamahāseṭṭhi mahādānaṃ adāsi, pasannacitto hutvā sahatthehi tadā mahādānaṃ pavattesi.So hitvā mānusaṃ dehanti so idha manussattabhāvaṃ pahāya.Kinti kataraṃ.Nu sotiti nipātamattaṃ.Disataṃ gatoti disaṃ ṭhānaṃ gato, kīdisī tassa gato nipphattīti asayhaseṭṭhino abhisamparāyaṃ pucchi.

278. Yo so dānamadā, bhante, pasanno sakapāṇibhī addresses the devaputta with respect. Bhante, if such is the result, such is the power for you who only rejoice in the alms given by another, then what of that great merchant Asayha who gave great alms, having a serene mind, he initiated great alms with his own hands. So hitvā mānusaṃ deha means having abandoned the human state here. Ki means which. Nu so means is merely a particle. Disataṃ gato means gone to a direction, a place; what is his destination, his rebirth? He asked about the future destiny of Asayha the merchant.

279.Asayhasāhinoti aññehi maccharīhi lobhābhibhūtehi sahituṃ vahituṃ asakkuṇeyyassa pariccāgādivibhāgassa sappurisadhurassa sahanato asayhasāhino.Aṅgīrasassāti aṅgato nikkhamanakajutissa. Rasoti hi jutiyā adhivacanaṃ. Tassa kira yācake āgacchante disvā uḷāraṃ pītisomanassaṃ uppajjati, mukhavaṇṇo vippasīdati, taṃ attano paccakkhaṃ katvā evamāha.Gatiṃ āgatiṃ vāti tassa ‘‘asukaṃ nāma gatiṃ, ito gato’’ti gatiṃ vā ‘‘tato vā pana asukasmiṃ kāle idhāgamissatī’’ti āgatiṃ vā nāhaṃ jānāmi, avisayo esa mayhaṃ.Sutañca me vessavaṇassa santiketi apica kho upaṭṭhānaṃ gatena vessavaṇassa mahārājassa santike sutametaṃ mayā.Sakkassa sahabyataṃ gato asayhoti asayhaseṭṭhi sakkassa devānamindassa sahabyataṃ gato ahosi, tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbattoti attho.

279. Asayhasāhino means Asayhasāhino because of enduring (sahanato) the burden of a good man's generosity, which others, overcome by stinginess and greed, cannot bear (sahituṃ vahituṃ asakkuṇeyyassa). Aṅgīrasassā means having radiance issuing from the body. Rasa is indeed a term for radiance. It is said that when he saw supplicants coming, great joy and gladness arose in him, his complexion brightened; having made that his own experience, he said thus. Gatiṃ āgatiṃ vā means I do not know his destination, whether "he went to such and such a destination from here," or his return, whether "he will come here at such and such a time from there"; that is beyond my scope. Sutañca me vessavaṇassa santike means moreover, this was heard by me near Vessavaṇa, the great king, who had gone for attendance. Sakkassa sahabyataṃ gato asayho means Asayha the merchant went to the companionship of Sakka, the king of the gods; he was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. This is the meaning.

280.Alameva kātuṃ kalyāṇanti yaṃkiñci kalyāṇaṃ kusalaṃ puññaṃ kātuṃ yuttameva patirūpameva. Tattha pana yaṃ sabbasādhāraṇaṃ sukatataraṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘dānaṃ dātuṃ yathāraha’’nti vuttaṃ, attano vibhavabalānurūpaṃ dānaṃ dātuṃ alameva. Tattha kāraṇamāha‘‘pāṇiṃ kāmadadaṃ disvā’’ti. Yatra hi nāma parakatapuññānumodanapubbakena dānapatinivesanamaggācikkhaṇamattena ayaṃ hattho kāmadado diṭṭho, imaṃ disvā.Kopuññaṃ na karissatīti mādiso ko nāma attano patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ puññaṃ na karissatīti.

280. Alameva kātuṃ kalyāṇa means it is indeed fitting and proper to do whatever is good, wholesome, and meritorious. However, to show what is most supremely skillful for all, it was said ‘‘dānaṃ dātuṃ yathāraha’’ means it is indeed proper to give alms according to one's wealth and strength. The reason for that is given: ‘‘pāṇiṃ kāmadadaṃ disvā’’ means since this hand is seen to be a wish-fulfiller by the mere act of approving of another's merit and showing the way to the almsgiver's house, Ko puññaṃ na karissatī means who like me would not do merit, which is one's own foundation?

281.Evaṃ aniyamavasena puññakiriyāya ādaraṃ dassetvā idāni attani taṃ niyametvā dassento‘‘so hi nūnā’’tiādigāthādvayamāha. Tatthasoti so ahaṃ.ti avadhāraṇe nipāto,nūnāti parivitakke.Ito gantvāti ito marubhūmito apagantvā.Anuppatvāna dvārakanti dvāravatīnagaraṃ anupāpuṇitvā.Paṭṭhapayissāmīti pavattayissāmi.

281. Having shown enthusiasm for meritorious deeds in an unconfined manner, now showing that confining it to oneself, he spoke the following two verses beginning with ‘‘so hi nūnā’’. Here, so means that I. is a particle in the sense of emphasis, nūnā means in conjecture. Ito gantvā means having gone away from this desert. Anuppatvāna dvāraka means having reached the city of Dvāravatī. Paṭṭhapayissāmī means I will establish.

Evaṃ aṅkurena ‘‘dānaṃ dassāmī’’ti paṭiññāya katāya yakkho tuṭṭhamānaso ‘‘mārisa, tvaṃ vissattho dānaṃ dehi, ahaṃ pana te sahāyakiccaṃ karissāmi, yena te deyyadhammo na parikkhayaṃ gamissati, tena pakārena karissāmī’’ti taṃ dānakiriyāya samuttejetvā ‘‘brāhmaṇa vāṇija, tvaṃ kira mādise balakkārena netukāmo attano pamāṇaṃ na jānāsī’’ti tassa bhaṇḍamantaradhāpetvā taṃ yakkhavibhiṃsakāya bhiṃsāpento santajjesi. Atha naṃ aṅkuro nānappakāraṃ yācitvā brāhmaṇena khamāpento pasādetvā sabbabhaṇḍaṃ pākatikaṃ kārāpetvā rattiyā upagatāya yakkhaṃ vissajjetvā gacchanto tassa avidūre aññataraṃ ativiya bībhacchadassanaṃ petaṃ disvā tena katakammaṃ pucchanto –

Having made the promise "I will give alms," Aṅkura, the Yaksha, with a delighted mind, encouraged him for the act of giving alms, saying, "Marisa, give alms confidently, I will do the work of helping you, in such a way that your gift will not be exhausted." Then, frightening the brahmin, "Brahmin, merchant, you wish to forcibly take someone like me, you do not know your own limit," he made the goods disappear. Then Aṅkura, entreating him in various ways, appeasing the brahmin with forgiveness, making all the goods as before, dismissing the Yaksha as the night approached, going not far from there, seeing another peta with a very repulsive appearance, asking him about the kamma he had done—

283.

283.

‘‘Kena te aṅgulī kuṇā, mukhañca kuṇalīkataṃ;

"Why are your fingers crooked, and your face contorted;
And your eyes are discharging, what evil have you done?"

kuṇāti kuṇikā paṭikuṇikā anujubhūtā.Kuṇalīkatanti mukhavikārena vikuṇitaṃ saṃkuṇitaṃ.Paggharantīti asuciṃ vissandanti.

kuṇā means crooked, bent, not straight. Kuṇalīkata means distorted, contorted by a facial expression. Paggharantī means discharging impurities.

Athassa peto –

Then that peta said—

284.

284.

‘‘Aṅgīrasassa gahapatino, saddhassa gharamesino;

"Of Aṅgīrasa, the householder, faithful, a dweller in a house;
In his distribution of alms, I was in charge of the giving.

285.

285.

‘‘Tattha yācanake disvā, āgate bhojanatthike;

"There, seeing beggars, come seeking food;
Withdrawing to one side, I made my face contorted.

286.

286.

‘‘Tena me aṅgulī kuṇā, mukhañca kuṇalīkataṃ;

"Therefore, my fingers are crooked, and my face contorted;
My eyes are discharging, that evil have I done."

Tisso gāthā abhāsi.

He spoke three verses.

284.Tattha‘‘aṅgīrasassā’’tiādinā asayhaseṭṭhiṃ kitteti.Gharamesinoti gharamāvasantassa gahaṭṭhassa.Dānavissaggeti dānagge pariccāgaṭṭhāne.Dāne adhikato ahunti deyyadhammassa pariccajane dānādhikāre adhikato ṭhapito ahosiṃ.

284. Here, ‘‘aṅgīrasassā’’ etc., praises Asayha the merchant. Gharamesino means dwelling in a house, a householder. Dānavissagge means in the distribution of alms, in the place of generosity. Dāne adhikato ahu means I was appointed, placed in charge of the giving of alms, in the distribution of what should be given.

285.Ekamantaṃ apakkammāti yācanake bhojanatthike āgate disvā dānabyāvaṭena dānaggato anapakkamma yathāṭhāneyeva ṭhatvā sañjātapītisomanassena vippasannamukhavaṇṇena sahatthena dānaṃ dātabbaṃ, parehi vā patirūpehi dāpetabbaṃ, ahaṃ pana tathā akatvā yācanake āgacchante dūratova disvā attānaṃ adassento ekamantaṃ apakkamma apakkamitvā.Akāsiṃ kuṇaliṃ mukhanti vikuṇitaṃ saṅkucitaṃ mukhaṃ akāsiṃ.

285. Ekamantaṃ apakkammā means having seen beggars come seeking food, without withdrawing from the place of giving alms due to being engaged in giving, one should remain in the same place and give alms with one's own hands with a joyful and glad mind, with a brightened countenance, or one should have it given by suitable persons; but I, not having done so, seeing the beggars coming from afar, withdrawing to one side, not showing myself. Akāsiṃ kuṇaliṃ mukha means I made my face contorted, contracted.

286.Tenāti yasmā tadāhaṃ sāminā dānādhikāre niyutto samāno dānakāle upaṭṭhite macchariyāpakato dānaggato apakkamanto pādehi saṅkocaṃ āpajjiṃ, sahatthehi dātabbe tathā akatvā hatthasaṅkocaṃ āpajjiṃ, pasannamukhena bhavitabbe mukhasaṅkocaṃ āpajjiṃ, piyacakkhūhi oloketabbe cakkhukālusiyaṃ uppādesiṃ, tasmā hatthaṅguliyo ca pādaṅguliyo ca kuṇitā jātā, mukhañca kuṇalīkataṃ virūparūpaṃ saṅkucitaṃ, akkhīni asucīduggandhajegucchāni assūni paggharantīti attho. Tena vuttaṃ –

286. Tenā means since then, being appointed by my master in the charge of giving alms, being overcome by stinginess when the time for giving alms approached, withdrawing from the place of giving alms, I contracted my feet, I contracted my hands, not giving what should be given with my own hands, I contracted my face, when I should have been with a pleasant face, I caused darkness in my eyes, when I should have looked with affectionate eyes, therefore, both my hand fingers and foot fingers became crooked, and my face became contorted, deformed, contracted, and my eyes are discharging impure, foul-smelling, disgusting tears. Therefore, it was said—

‘‘Tena me aṅgulī kuṇā, mukhañca kuṇalīkataṃ;

"Therefore, my fingers are crooked, and my face contorted;
My eyes are discharging, that evil have I done."

Taṃ sutvā aṅkuro petaṃ garahanto –

Having heard that, Aṅkura rebuked the peta—

287.

287.

‘‘Dhammena te kāpurisa, mukhañca kuṇalīkataṃ;

"By Dhamma, your face is contorted, O ignoble man;
And your eyes are discharging, because of another's alms;
You made your face contorted."

dhammenāti yutteneva kāraṇena.Teti tava.Kāpurisāti lāmakapurisa.Yanti yasmā.Parassa dānassāti parassa dānasmiṃ. Ayameva vā pāṭho.

dhammenā means with a justified reason. Te means your. Kāpurisā means base person. Ya means because. Parassa dānassā means in another's alms. Or this is the very reading.

Puna aṅkuro taṃ dānapatiṃ seṭṭhiṃ garahanto –

Again, Aṅkura rebuked that almsgiver, the merchant—

288.

288.

‘‘Kathañhi dānaṃ dadamāno, kareyya parapattiyaṃ;

"How indeed, when giving alms, should one arrange for another;
Food and drink, edibles, clothes, and lodgings?"

dānaṃdadanto purisokathañhināma taṃparapattiyaṃparena pāpetabbaṃ sādhetabbaṃkareyya,attapaccakkhameva katvā sahattheneva dadeyya, sayaṃ vā tattha byāvaṭo bhaveyya, aññathā attano deyyadhammo aṭṭhāne viddhaṃsiyetha, dakkhiṇeyyā ca dānena parihāyeyyunti.

How indeed should a person giving alms kareyya arrange for another to deliver ( parapattiyaṃ), to accomplish ( sādhetabbaṃ)? One should do it directly and give it with one's own hands, or one should be engaged there oneself; otherwise, one's own gift would be destroyed in the wrong place, and the recipients of merit would be diminished by the alms.

Evaṃ taṃ garahitvā idāni attanā paṭipajjitabbavidhiṃ dassento –

Having thus rebuked him, now showing the method to be followed by oneself—

289.

289.

‘‘So hi nūna ito gantvā, anuppatvāna dvārakaṃ;

"Surely, having gone from here, having arrived at Dvārakā, I will establish a donation, which will bring happiness to me."

290.

290.

‘‘Dassāmannañca pānañca, vatthasenāsanāni ca;

"I will give food and drink, cloth, lodging, a hall, a well, and causeways in difficult places."

Gāthādvayamāha, taṃ vuttatthameva.

He spoke these two verses, which have the meaning as stated above.

291.

291.

‘‘Tato hi so nivattitvā, anuppatvāna dvārakaṃ;

"Then, indeed, having returned, having arrived at Dvārakā, Aṅkura established a donation, which would bring happiness to him.

292.

292.

‘‘Adā annañca pānañca, vatthasenāsanāni ca;

"He gave food and drink, cloth, lodging, a hall and a well, with a very clear mind.

293.

293.

‘‘Ko chāto ko ca tasito, ko vatthaṃ paridahissati;

"Who is hungry? Who is thirsty? Who will put on clothes? Whose animals are weary? Yoke a vehicle from here!

294.

294.

‘‘Ko chatticchati gandhañca, ko mālaṃ ko upāhanaṃ;

"Who wants an umbrella and perfume? Who wants a garland? Who wants shoes?" Thus, the barbers, cooks, and bards proclaimed there, always evening and morning, in Aṅkura's mansion."

Catasso gāthā aṅgurassa paṭipattiṃ dassetuṃ saṅgītikārehi ṭhapitā.

The four verses were placed by the compilers to show Aṅkura's practice.

291.Tatthatatoti marukantārato.Nivattitvāti paṭinivattitvā.Anuppatvāna dvārakanti dvāravatīnagaraṃ anupāpuṇitvā.Dānaṃ paṭṭhapayi aṅguroti yakkhena paripūritasakalakoṭṭhāgāro sabbapātheyyakaṃ mahādānaṃ so aṅguro paṭṭhapesi.Yaṃtumassa sukhāvahanti yaṃ attano sampati āyatiñca sukhanibbattakaṃ.

291. There, tato: from the desert. Nivattitvā: having turned back. Anuppatvāna dvārakaṃ: having reached the city of Dvāravatī. Dānaṃ paṭṭhapayi aṅguro: that Aṅkura, with all the storehouses filled by the Yaksha, established a great donation with all provisions. Yaṃtumassa sukhāvahaṃ: which would produce happiness for himself in future existences.

293.Kochātoti ko jighacchito, so āgantvā yathāruci bhuñjatūti adhippāyo. Eseva nayo sesesupi.Tasitoti pipāsito.Paridahissatīti nivāsessati pārupissati cāti attho.Santānīti parissamappattāni.Yoggānīti rathavāhanāni.Ito yojentu vāhananti ito yoggasamūhato yathārucitaṃ gahetvā vāhanaṃ yojentu.

293. Ko chāto: who is hungry; the intention is, let him come and eat as he pleases. The same method applies to the rest as well. Tasito: thirsty. Paridahissati: will wear; the meaning is, will clothe and cover. Santānī: exhausted. Yoggānī: chariots and vehicles. Ito yojentu vāhanaṃ: from this collection of yokes, having taken what is desired, let them yoke a vehicle.

294.Ko chatticchatīti ko kilañjachattādibhedaṃ chattaṃ icchati, so gaṇhātūti adhippāyo. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Gandhanti catujjātiyagandhādikaṃ gandhaṃ.Mālanti ganthitāganthitabhedaṃ pupphaṃ.Upāhananti khallabaddhādibhedaṃ upāhanaṃ.Itissūti etthati nipātamattaṃ, iti evaṃ ‘‘ko chāto, ko tasito’’tiādināti attho.Kappakāti nhāpitakā.Sūdāti bhattakārakā.Māgadhāti gandhino.Sadāti sabbakālaṃ divase divase sāyañca pāto ca tattha aṅgurassa nivesane ghosenti ugghosentīti yojanā.

294. Ko chatticchati: who wants an umbrella of the kilañja-leaf type, etc.; the intention is, let him take it. The same method applies to the rest as well. Gandhaṃ: perfume, such as the four kinds of perfumes. Mālaṃ: a garland, either strung or unstrung flowers. Upāhanaṃ: shoes, such as those bound with leather straps. Itissū: here, is merely an expletive; the meaning is, thus, with "Who is hungry? Who is thirsty?" etc. Kappakā: barbers. Sūdā: cooks. Māgadhā: bards. Sadā: always, day by day, evening and morning, in that place, in Aṅkura's mansion, they proclaimed, they announced; this is the connection.

Evaṃ mahādānaṃ pavattentassa gacchante kāle tittibhāvato atthikajanehi pavivittaṃ viraḷaṃ dānaggaṃ ahosi. Taṃ disvā aṅkuro dāne uḷārajjhāsayatāya atuṭṭhamānaso hutvā attano dāne niyuttaṃ sindhakaṃ nāma māṇavaṃ āmantetvā –

While he was thus maintaining the great donation, as time passed, the donation hall became deserted and sparsely attended due to the abundance. Seeing this, Aṅkura, with a mind not satisfied due to his noble intention in giving, summoned a young man named Sindhaka, who was appointed in his donation, and said:

295.

295.

‘‘Sukhaṃ supati aṅkuro, iti jānāti maṃ jano;

"Aṅkura sleeps happily, so people think of me; but I sleep unhappily, Sindhaka, because I do not see beggars.

296.

296.

‘‘Sukhaṃ supati aṅkuro, iti jānāti maṃ jano;

"Aṅkura sleeps happily, so people think of me; but I sleep unhappily, Sindhaka, because there are so few beggars."

sukhaṃ supati aṅkuro, iti jānāti maṃ janoti ‘‘aṅkuro rājā yasabhogasamappito dānapati attano bhogasampattiyā dānasampattiyā ca sukhaṃ supati, sukheneva niddaṃ upagacchati, sukhaṃ paṭibujjhatī’’ti evaṃ maṃ jano sambhāveti.Dukkhaṃ supāmi sindhakāti ahaṃ pana sindhaka dukkhameva supāmi. Kasmā?Yaṃ na passāmi yācaketi, yasmā mama ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ deyyadhammapaṭiggāhake bahū yācake na passāmi, tasmāti attho.Appake su vanibbaketi vanibbakajane appake katipaye jāte dukkhaṃ supāmīti yojanā.ti ca nipātamattaṃ, appake vanibbakajane satīti attho.

sukhaṃ supati aṅkuro, iti jānāti maṃ jano: "King Aṅkura, endowed with fame and wealth, a giver, sleeps happily due to his wealth and generosity; he goes to sleep happily, he wakes up happily," thus people consider me. Dukkhaṃ supāmi sindhakā: but I, Sindhaka, sleep unhappily. Why? Yaṃ na passāmi yācake: because I do not see many beggars who receive donations in accordance with my intention; this is the meaning. Appake su vanibbake: I sleep unhappily because there are so few beggars; this is the connection. is just an expletive; the meaning is, because there are few beggars.

Taṃ sutvā sindhako tassa uḷāraṃ dānādhimuttiṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātukāmo –

Hearing that, Sindhaka, wishing to make his noble inclination towards giving even more evident,

297.

297.

‘‘Sakko ce te varaṃ dajjā, tāvatiṃsānamissaro;

"If Sakka, the lord of the Tāvatiṃsa devas, were to give you a boon, what boon would you, desiring a boon, choose for the entire world?"

tāvatiṃsānaṃdevānaṃsabbassacalokassa issaro sakko‘‘varaṃ varassu, aṅkura, yaṃkiñci manasicchita’’nti tuyhaṃ varaṃdajjādadeyyace, varamānopatthayamānokissakīdisaṃvaraṃvareyyāsīti attho.

tāvatiṃsānaṃ devānaṃ sabbassa ca lokassa issaro sakko: Sakka, the lord of the Tāvatiṃsa gods and of the entire world, dajjā: would give you a boon, ce: if, "Choose a boon, Aṅkura, whatever is desired in your mind," varamāno: desiring, kissa: what kind of, varaṃ vareyyāsīti: what boon would you choose; this is the meaning.

Atha aṅkuro attano ajjhāsayaṃ yāthāvato pavedento –

Then Aṅkura, revealing his intention as it really was,

298.

298.

‘‘Sakko ce me varaṃ dajjā, tāvatiṃsānamissaro;

"If Sakka, the lord of the Tāvatiṃsa devas, were to give me a boon, for me, rising early and being mindful, expecting the sunrise,

299.

299.

‘‘Dadato me na khīyetha, datvā nānutapeyyahaṃ;

divine foods should appear, and virtuous beggars. May my wealth not diminish as I give, and may I not regret having given; giving, may I gladden my heart; this is the boon I would choose from Sakka." He spoke these two verses;

298.Tatthakāluṭṭhitassa me satoti kāle pāto vuṭṭhitassa atthikānaṃ dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ apacāyanapāricariyādivasena uṭṭhānavīriyasampannassa me samānassa.Sūriyuggamanaṃ patīti sūriyuggamanavelāyaṃ.Dibbā bhakkhā pātubhaveyyunti devalokapariyāpannā āhārā uppajjeyyuṃ.Sīlavanto ca yācakāti yācakā ca sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā bhaveyyuṃ.

298. There, kāluṭṭhitassa me sato: for me, rising early, for one who is diligent in rising in the morning for the sake of honoring and attending to those worthy of offerings. Sūriyuggamanaṃ patī: at the time of sunrise. Dibbā bhakkhā pātubhaveyyuṃ: foods belonging to the heavenly realm should appear. Sīlavanto ca yācakā: and the beggars should be virtuous, possessing good qualities.

299.Dadatome na khīyethāti āgatāgatānaṃ dānaṃ dadato ca me deyyadhammo na khīyetha, na parikkhayaṃ gaccheyya.Datvā nānutapeyyahanti tañca dānaṃ datvā kiñcideva appasādakaṃ disvā tena ahaṃ pacchā nānutapeyyaṃ.Dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādeyyanti dadamāno cittaṃ pasādeyyaṃ, pasannacittoyeva hutvā dadeyyaṃ.Etaṃ sakkaṃ varaṃ vareti sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ ārogyasampadā, deyyadhammasampadā, dakkhiṇeyyasampadā, deyyadhammassa aparimitasampadā, dāyakasampadāti etaṃ pañcavidhaṃ varaṃ vareyyaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘kāluṭṭhitassa me sato’’ti etena ārogyasampadā, ‘‘dibbā bhakkhā pātubhaveyyu’’nti etena deyyadhammasampadā, ‘‘sīlavanto ca yācakā’’ti etena dakkhiṇeyyasampadā, ‘‘dadato me na khīyethā’’ti etena deyyadhammassa aparimitasampadā, ‘‘datvā nānutapeyyahaṃ, dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādeyya’’nti etehi dāyakasampadāti ime pañca atthā varabhāvena icchitā. Te ca kho dānamayapuññassa yāvadeva uḷārabhāvāyāti veditabbā.

299. Dadato me na khīyethā: and for me, giving to those who come, may my wealth not diminish, may it not come to an end. Datvā nānutapeyyahaṃ: and having given that donation, seeing something displeasing, may I not regret it afterwards. Dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādeyyaṃ: giving, may I gladden my heart, may I give with a gladdened heart. Etaṃ sakkaṃ varaṃ vare: I would choose this fivefold boon from Sakka, the king of the gods: the perfection of health, the perfection of wealth, the perfection of recipients, the unlimited perfection of wealth, and the perfection of the giver. Here, with "kāluṭṭhitassa me sato," the perfection of health is desired; with "dibbā bhakkhā pātubhaveyyu," the perfection of wealth; with "sīlavanto ca yācakā," the perfection of recipients; with "dadato me na khīyethā," the unlimited perfection of wealth; with "datvā nānutapeyyahaṃ, dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādeyya," the perfection of the giver; these five things are to be understood as being for the sake of the great abundance of meritorious deeds consisting of giving.

Evaṃ aṅkurena attano ajjhāsaye pavedite tattha nisinno nītisatthe kataparicayo sonako nāma eko puriso taṃ atidānato vicchinditukāmo –

When Aṅkura thus revealed his intention, a certain man named Soṇaka, who was sitting there and was well-versed in the science of polity, wishing to dissuade him from excessive giving,

300.

300.

‘‘Na sabbavittāni pare pavecche, dadeyya dānañca dhanañca rakkhe;

"One should not give away all one's wealth to others; one should give donations and protect one's wealth; wealth is better than giving; families do not prosper with excessive giving.

301.

301.

‘‘Adānamatidānañca nappasaṃsanti paṇḍitā,

The wise do not praise not-giving and excessive giving; wealth is better than giving; one should live moderately, that is the way of the wise."

‘‘na sabbavittānī’’tiādimāhāti apare.

Some say, he spoke "na sabbavittānī" etc.

300.Tatthasabbavittānīti saviññāṇakaaviññāṇakappabhedāni sabbāni vittūpakaraṇāni, dhanānīti attho.Pareti paramhi, parassāti attho.Na paveccheti na dadeyya, ‘‘dakkhiṇeyyā laddhā’’ti katvā kiñci asesetvā sabbasāpateyyapariccāgo na kātabboti attho.Dadeyya dānañcāti sabbena sabbaṃ dānadhammo na kātabbo, atha kho attano āyañca vayañca jānitvā vibhavānurūpaṃ dānañca dadeyya.Dhanañca rakkheti aladdhalābhaladdhaparirakkhaṇarakkhitasambandhavasena dhanaṃ paripāleyya.

300. There, sabbavittānī: all possessions, wealth, distinguished as animate and inanimate. Pare: to another, for another. Na pavecche: one should not give; thinking, "I have found worthy recipients," one should not make a complete sacrifice of all one's property, leaving nothing; this is the meaning. Dadeyya dānañcā: one should not practice giving with everything, but knowing one's income and expenditure, one should give donations according to one's means. Dhanañca rakkhe: and one should protect wealth by means of gaining what is not gained, preserving what is gained, and increasing what is preserved.

‘‘Ekena bhoge bhuñjeyya, dvīhi kammaṃ payojaye;

"With one part, one should enjoy wealth; with two parts, one should pursue one's livelihood; and the fourth part one should set aside for times of adversity." (dī. ni. 3.265)

Tasmā hīti yasmā dhanañca rakkhanto dānañca karonto ubhayalokahitāya paṭipanno hoti dhanamūlakañca dānaṃ, tasmā dānato dhanameva seyyo sundarataroti atidānaṃ na kātabbanti adhippāyo. Tenāha‘‘atippadānena kulā na hontī’’ti, dhanassa pamāṇaṃ ajānitvā dānassa taṃ nissāya atippadānapasaṅgena kulāni na honti nappavattanti, ucchijjantīti attho.

Tasmā hī: because one who protects wealth and also gives is practicing for the benefit of both worlds, and giving has wealth as its basis, therefore wealth is better, more beautiful, than giving; the intention is that excessive giving should not be done. Therefore, he said, "atippadānena kulā na hontī": families do not prosper, do not continue, they are cut off, due to the excessive giving that arises from not knowing the measure of wealth and relying on that for giving.

301.Idāni viññūnaṃ pasaṃsitamevatthaṃ patiṭṭhapento‘‘adānamatidānañcā’’ti gāthamāha. Tatthaadānamatidānañcāti sabbena sabbaṃ kaṭacchubhikkhāyapi taṇḍulamuṭṭhiyāpi adānaṃ, pamāṇaṃ atikkamitvā pariccāgasaṅkhātaṃ atidānañcapaṇḍitābuddhimanto sapaññajātikānappasaṃsantina vaṇṇayanti. Sabbena sabbaṃ adānena hi samparāyikato atthato paribāhiro hoti. Atidānena diṭṭhadhammikapaveṇī na pavattati.Samena vatteyyāti avisamena lokiyasarikkhakena samāhitena majjhimena ñāyena pavatteyya.Sa dhīradhammoti yā yathāvuttā dānādānappavatti, so dhīrānaṃ dhitisampannānaṃ nītinayakusalānaṃ dhammo, tehi gatamaggoti dīpeti.

301. Now, establishing the very thing praised by the wise, he speaks the verse "adānamatidānañcā". There, adānamatidānañcā: not giving anything at all, not even a handful of rice with a ladle for alms, and excessive giving, which is defined as exceeding the proper measure, paṇḍitā: the wise, those of intelligent nature, nappasaṃsanti: do not praise. By not giving anything at all, one is excluded from the benefit of the next world. By excessive giving, the continuity of worldly affairs does not proceed. Samena vatteyyā: one should live with evenness, with a balanced, moderate way similar to the worldly standard. Sa dhīradhammo: that practice of giving and not-giving as described above, is the way of the wise, of those endowed with wisdom, skilled in the ways of polity; it shows the path taken by them.

Taṃ sutvā aṅkuro tassa adhippāyaṃ parivattento –

Hearing that, Aṅkura, turning around his intention,

302.

302.

‘‘Aho vata re ahameva dajjaṃ, santo ca maṃ sappurisā bhajeyyuṃ;

"Oh, how wonderful it would be if I alone should give, and virtuous noble people should associate with me, filling up the low places like a cloud, I would satisfy all the beggars.

303.

303.

‘‘Yassa yācanake disvā, mukhavaṇṇo pasīdati;

"Seeing a beggar, whose face brightens, and having given, who is delighted, dwelling in such a home is happiness.

304.

304.

‘‘Yassa yācanake disvā, mukhavaṇṇo pasīdati;

"Seeing a beggar, whose face brightens, and having given, who is delighted, this is the success of the sacrifice.

305.

305.

‘‘Pubbeva dānā sumano, dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādaye;

"Before giving, one is glad; while giving, one makes the mind serene; having given, one is delighted; this is the success of the sacrifice."

Catūhi gāthāhi attanā paṭipajjitabbavidhiṃ pakāsesi.

With these four verses, he revealed the method to be practiced by himself.

302.Tatthaaho vatāti sādhu vata.Reti ālapanaṃ.Ahameva dajjanti ahaṃ dajjameva. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – māṇava, ‘‘dānā dhanameva seyyo’’ti yadi ayaṃ nītikusalānaṃ vādo tava hotu, kāmaṃ ahaṃ dajjameva.Santo ca maṃ sappurisā bhajeyyunti tasmiñca dāne santo upasantakāyavacīmanosamācārā sappurisā sādhavo maṃ bhajeyyuṃ upagaccheyyuṃ.Meghova ninnāni paripūrayantoti ahaṃ abhippavassanto mahāmegho viya ninnāni ninnaṭṭhānāni sabbesaṃ vanibbakānaṃ adhippāye paripūrayanto aho vata te santappeyyanti.

302. There, aho vatā: indeed it is good. Re: an exclamation. Ahameva dajjaṃ: I alone would give. Here, the meaning in brief is: young man, even if this saying of those skilled in polity is for you, let it be so; I would give. Santo ca maṃ sappurisā bhajeyyuṃ: and in that giving, peaceful noble people, of good conduct in body, speech, and mind, would associate with me, would approach me. Meghova ninnāni paripūrayanto: like a great cloud raining down, filling up the low places, fulfilling the intentions of all the beggars, how wonderful it would be if I could satisfy them!

303.Yassa yācanake disvāti yassa puggalassa gharamesino yācanake disvā ‘‘paṭhamaṃ tāva upaṭṭhitaṃ vata me puññakkhetta’’nti saddhājātassamukhavaṇṇo pasīdati,yathāvibhavaṃ pana tesaṃ dānaṃ datvāattamanopītisomanassehi gahitacitto hoti.Tanti yadettha yācakānaṃ dassanaṃ, tena ca disvā cittassa pasādanaṃ, yathārahaṃ dānaṃ datvā ca attamanatā.

303. Yassa yācanake disvā: seeing a beggar, for that person, for the householder, having faith arise thinking, "Indeed, the field of merit has come to me first," mukhavaṇṇo pasīdati: the complexion of his face brightens, and having given a donation to them according to his means, attamano: his mind is seized with joy and gladness. Taṃ: that seeing of beggars here, and with that, the gladdening of the mind seeing them, and having given donations as appropriate, and being delighted.

304.Esā yaññassa sampadāti esā yaññassa sampatti pāripūri, nipphattīti attho.

304. Esā yaññassa sampadā: this is the accomplishment, the fulfillment, the perfection of the sacrifice.

305.Pubbeva dānā sumanoti ‘‘sampattīnaṃ nidānaṃ anugāmikaṃ nidhānaṃ nidhessāmī’’ti muñcanacetanāya pubbe eva dānūpakaraṇassa sampādanato paṭṭhāya sumano somanassajāto bhaveyya.Dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādayeti dadanto deyyadhammaṃ dakkhiṇeyyahatthe patiṭṭhāpento ‘‘asārato dhanato sārādānaṃ karomī’’ti attano cittaṃ pasādeyya.Datvā attamano hotīti dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ deyyadhammaṃ pariccajitvā ‘‘paṇḍitapaññattaṃ nāma mayā anuṭṭhitaṃ, aho sādhu suṭṭhū’’ti attamano pamuditamano pītisomanassajāto hoti.Esā yaññassa sampadāti yā ayaṃ pubbacetanā muñjacetanā aparacetanāti imesaṃ kammaphalasaddhānugatānaṃ somanassapariggahitānaṃ tissannaṃ cetanānaṃ pāripūri, esā yaññassa sampadā dānassa sampatti, na ito aññathāti adhippāyo.

305. Pubbeva dānā sumano: before giving, thinking, "I will lay down a treasure that is the source of attainments, a treasure that follows me," from the very beginning of preparing the requisites for giving, one should be glad, of a joyous mind. Dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādaye: while giving, establishing the wealth in the hands of the recipients, one should gladden one's own mind thinking, "I am doing what is essential with wealth that is unessential." Datvā attamano hotī: having given away the wealth to the recipients, thinking, "Indeed, what was ordained by the wise has been practiced by me, oh, how good, how excellent!" he is delighted, joyous, of a mind filled with joy and gladness. Esā yaññassa sampadā: this fulfillment of these three intentions—the prior intention, the intention of relinquishing, and the subsequent intention— these intentions accompanied by faith in the law of karma and embraced by joy, is the accomplishment of the sacrifice, the perfection of giving; it is not otherwise; this is the intention.

Evaṃ aṅkuro attano paṭipajjanavidhiṃ pakāsetvā bhiyyosomattāya abhivaḍḍhamānadānajjhāsayo divase divase mahādānaṃ pavattesi. Tena tadā sabbarajjāni unnaṅgalāni katvā mahādāne diyyamāne paṭiladdhasabbūpakaraṇā manussā attano attano kammante pahāya yathāsukhaṃ vicariṃsu, tena rājūnaṃ koṭṭhāgārāni parikkhayaṃ agamaṃsu. Tato rājāno aṅkurassa dūtaṃ pāhesuṃ – ‘‘bhoto dānaṃ nissāya amhākaṃ āyassa vināso ahosi, koṭṭhāgārāni parikkhayaṃ gatāni, tattha yuttamattaṃ ñātabba’’nti.

Thus, Aṅkura, revealing his mode of practice, with an intention of giving that increased all the more, day by day, maintained a great almsgiving. Then, having made all the kingdoms free of taxes, when the great alms were being given, people, having received all their requisites, abandoning their respective occupations, wandered around as they pleased, so that the royal storehouses were depleted. Then the kings sent a messenger to Aṅkura, saying, "Because of your almsgiving, our income has been ruined, and the storehouses have been depleted; a suitable measure should be known there."

Taṃ sutvā aṅkuro dakkhiṇāpathaṃ gantvā damiḷavisaye samuddassa avidūraṭṭhāne mahatiyo anekadānasālāyo kārāpetvā mahādānāni pavattento yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti. Tassa dānavibhūtiñca saggūpapattiñca dassento saṅgītikārā –

Having heard that, Aṅkura went to the Southern region, and in the Damiḷa country, not far from the sea, having built many alms halls, while maintaining great almsgiving, having lived as long as he lived, after the breakup of the body, after death, he was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Showing his glory of giving and heavenly rebirth, the compilers of the Saṅgīti said:

306.

306.

‘‘Saṭṭhi vāhasahassāni, aṅkurassa nivesane;

"Sixty thousand vāhas are in Aṅkura's dwelling;
Food is given constantly to the being who desires merit.

307.

307.

‘‘Tisahassāni sūdā hi, āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalā;

"Three thousand cooks, indeed, with adorned jeweled earrings;
Depend on Aṅkura, engaged in the almsgiving sacrifice.

308.

308.

‘‘Saṭṭhi purisasahassāni, āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalā;

"Sixty thousand men, with adorned jeweled earrings;
In Aṅkura's great almsgiving, young men split firewood.

309.

309.

‘‘Soḷasitthisahassāni, sabbālaṅkārabhūsitā;

"Sixteen thousand women, adorned with all ornaments;
In Aṅkura's great almsgiving, women grind various ingredients.

310.

310.

‘‘Soḷasitthisahassāni, sabbālaṅkārabhūsitā;

"Sixteen thousand women, adorned with all ornaments;
In Aṅkura's great almsgiving, ladle-holders are present.

311.

311.

‘‘Bahuṃ bahūnaṃ pādāsi, ciraṃ pādāsi khattiyo;

"He gave much to many, the Khattiya gave for a long time;
Respectfully, with his own hands, having honored again and again.

312.

312.

‘‘Bahū māse ca pakkhe ca, utusaṃvaccharāni ca;

"For many months and fortnights, seasons and years;
Aṅkura maintained great almsgiving for a long period.

313.

313.

‘‘Evaṃ datvā yajitvā ca, aṅkuro dīghamantaraṃ;

"Thus giving and sacrificing for a long time, Aṅkura;
Having abandoned the human body, he went to Tāvatiṃsa," – they spoke the verses;

306.Tathasaṭṭhi vāhasahassānīti vāhānaṃ saṭṭhisahassāni gandhasālitaṇḍulādipūritavāhānaṃ saṭṭhisahassāni.Puññapekkhassadānajjhāsayassa dānādhimuttassaaṅkurassa nivesane niccaṃdivase divasejantunosattakāyassabhojanaṃ dīyateti yojanā.

306.Therein, saṭṭhi vāhasahassānī means sixty thousand vāhas, sixty thousand vāhas filled with fragrant rice and other grains. Puññapekkhassa means of Aṅkura who has the intention of giving, who is inclined towards giving, nivesane niccaṃ means always, day by day, in (his) dwelling, jantuno means for the multitude of beings, bhojanaṃ dīyate means food is given, this is the connection.

307-8.Tisahassāni sūdā hīti tisahassamattā sūdā bhattakārakā. Te ca kho pana padhānabhūtā adhippetā, tesu ekamekassa pana vacanakarā anekāti veditabbā. ‘‘Tisahassāni sūdāna’’nti ca paṭhanti.Āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalāti nānāmaṇivicittakuṇḍaladharā. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ, āmuttakaṭakakaṭisuttādiābharaṇāpi te ahesuṃ.Aṅkuraṃ upajīvantīti taṃ upanissāya jīvanti, tappaṭibaddhajīvikā hontīti attho.Dāne yaññassa vāvaṭāti mahāyāgasaññitassa yaññassa dāne yajane vāvaṭā ussukkaṃ āpannā.Kaṭṭhaṃ phālenti māṇavāti nānappakārānaṃ khajjabhojjādiāhāravisesānaṃ pacanāya alaṅkatapaṭiyattā taruṇamanussā kaṭṭhāni phālenti vidālenti.

307-8.Tisahassāni sūdā hī means approximately three thousand cooks. And those principal ones are intended, but it should be understood that there are many assistants for each one of them. And some read "tisahassāni sūdāna." Āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalā means wearing various jeweled earrings. And this is just an example, they also had ornaments such as armlets, bracelets, waistbands, etc. Aṅkuraṃ upajīvantī means they live depending on him, the meaning is that their livelihood is tied to him. Dāne yaññassa vāvaṭā means they are eager and ready in the giving, in the sacrifice of the great sacrifice. Kaṭṭhaṃ phālenti māṇavā means young men, adorned and prepared for the cooking of various kinds of foods, delicacies, and other food items, split and cut firewood.

309.Vidhāti vidhātabbāni bhojanayoggāni kaṭukabhaṇḍāni.Piṇḍentīti pisanavasena payojenti.

309.Vidhā means various ingredients suitable for food that need to be prepared. Piṇḍentī means they prepare by grinding them.

310.Dabbigāhāti kaṭacchugāhikā.Upaṭṭhitāti parivesanaṭṭhānaṃ upagantvā ṭhitā honti.

310.Dabbigāhā means those who hold the ladles. Upaṭṭhitā means they stand having approached the place for serving.

311.Bahunti mahantaṃ pahūtikaṃ.Bahūnanti anekesaṃ.Pādāsīti pakārehi adāsi.Cīranti cirakālaṃ. Vīsativassasahassāyukesu hi manussesu so uppanno. Bahuṃ bahūnaṃ cirakālañca dento yathā adāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘sakkaccañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthasakkaccanti sādaraṃ, anapaviddhaṃ anavaññātaṃ katvā.Sahatthāti sahatthena, na āṇāpanamattena.Cittīkatvāti gāravabahumānayogena cittena karitvā pūjetvā.Punappunanti bahuso na ekavāraṃ, katipayavāre vā akatvā anekavāraṃ pādāsīti yojanā.

311.Bahuṃ means great, abundant. Bahūnaṃ means to many. Pādāsī means he gave in various ways. Cīraṃ means for a long time. For he was born among humans who lived for twenty thousand years. To show how he gave much to many for a long time, ‘‘sakkaccañcā’’ etc. was said. Therein, sakkaccaṃ means respectfully, having done (it) without discarding or despising. Sahatthā means with his own hands, not just by ordering. Cittīkatvā means having honored and venerated, having done (it) with a mind of respect and reverence. Punappunaṃ means repeatedly, not just once, but having done (it) numerous times, not just a few times, he gave, this is the connection.

312.Idāni tameva punappunaṃ karaṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ‘‘bahū māse cā’’ti gāthamāhaṃsu. Tatthabahū māseti cittamāsādike bahū aneke māse.Pakkheti kaṇhasukkabhede bahū pakkhe.Utusaṃvaccharāni cāti vasantagimhādike bahū utū ca saṃvaccharāni ca, sabbattha accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.Dīghamantaranti dīghakālamantaraṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘ciraṃ pādāsī’’ti cirakālaṃ dānassa pavattitabhāvaṃ vatvā puna tassa nirantarameva pavattitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bahū māse’’tiādi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

312.Now, to further explain that repeated act, they spoke the verse ‘‘bahū māse cā’’. Therein, bahū māse means many months, numerous months such as the month of Citta. Pakkhe means many fortnights in terms of dark and bright halves of the month. Utusaṃvaccharāni cā means many seasons such as spring and summer, and years, in all instances the term of use (ca) is in the sense of continuous connection. Dīghamantaraṃ means for a long time. And here, having stated that the almsgiving was maintained for a long time with "ciraṃ pādāsī," to show that it was continued without interruption, "bahū māse" etc. was said, this should be seen.

313.Evanti vuttappakārena.Datvā yajitvā cāti atthato ekameva, kesañci dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ ekaccassa deyyadhammassa pariccajanavasena datvā, puna ‘‘bahuṃ bahūnaṃ pādāsī’’ti vuttanayena atthikānaṃ sabbesaṃ yathākāmaṃ dento mahāyāgavasena yajitvā.So hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ,tāvatiṃsūpago ahūti so aṅkuro āyupariyosāne manussatthabhāvaṃ pahāya paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena tāvatiṃsadevanikāyūpago ahosi.

313.Evaṃ means in the manner described above. Datvā yajitvā cā in meaning, it is just one, having given by giving up some of the offerings to some of the recipients, then giving to all the needy ones according to their desire in the manner stated in "bahuṃ bahūnaṃ pādāsī," he sacrificed in terms of a great sacrifice. So hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ, tāvatiṃsūpago ahū means that Aṅkura, at the end of his lifespan, abandoning the human existence, in the way of rebirth, he went to the Tāvatiṃsa group of deities.

Evaṃ tasmiṃ tāvatiṃsesu nibbattitvā dibbasampattiṃ anubhavante amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle indako nāma māṇavo āyasmato anuruddhattherassa piṇḍāya carantassa pasannamānaso kaṭacchubhikkhaṃ dāpesi. So aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā khettagatassa puññassa ānubhāvena tāvatiṃsesu mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo devaputto hutvā nibbatto dibbehi rūpādīhi dasahi ṭhānehi aṅkuraṃ devaputtaṃ abhibhavitvā virocati. Tena vuttaṃ –

Thus, having been born in Tāvatiṃsa and experiencing divine prosperity, in the time of our Blessed One, a young man named Indaka, with a pleased mind, gave a ladleful of alms to Āyasmā Anuruddha Thera who was wandering for alms. He, at another time, having passed away, by the power of the merit acquired in the field, having been born in Tāvatiṃsa as a powerful, greatly influential divine being, surpassing the divine Aṅkura devaputta in ten aspects with divine forms, etc., shines forth. Therefore, it was said –

314.

314.

‘‘Kaṭacchubhikkhaṃ datvāna, anuruddhassa indako;

"Having given a ladleful of alms to Anuruddha, Indaka;
Having abandoned the human body, he went to Tāvatiṃsa.

315.

315.

‘‘Dasahi ṭhānehi aṅkuraṃ, indako atirocati;

"In ten aspects, Indaka surpasses Aṅkura;
In form, sound, taste, smell, and lovely tactile objects.

316.

316.

‘‘Āyunā yasasā ceva, vaṇṇena ca sukhena ca;

"In lifespan, glory, complexion, and happiness;
In dominion, Indaka surpasses Aṅkura."

314-5.Tattharūpeti rūpahetu, attano rūpasampattinimittanti attho.Saddetiādīsupi eseva nayo.Āyunāti jīvitena. Nanu ca devānaṃ jīvitaṃ paricchinnappamāṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Saccaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ pana yebhuyyavasena. Tathā hi ekaccānaṃ devānaṃ yogavipattiādinā antarāmaraṇaṃ hotiyeva. Indako pana tisso vassakoṭiyo saṭṭhi ca vassasahassāni paripūretiyeva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āyunā atirocatī’’ti.Yasasāti mahatiyā parivārasampattiyā.Vaṇṇenāti saṇṭhānasampattiyā. Vaṇṇadhātusampadā pana ‘‘rūpe’’ti iminā vuttāyeva.Ādhipaccenāti issariyena.

314-5.Therein, rūpe means because of form, the meaning is with regard to his own attainment of beauty. The same method applies in sadde etc. Āyunā means with life. But isn't it said that the life of the deities is of limited measure? It is true, it is said, but that is mostly in general. Thus, for some deities, death occurs in between due to misfortune, etc. But Indaka completes three hundred and sixty thousand years. Therefore it was said, "āyunā atirocatī." Yasasā means with great retinue and prosperity. Vaṇṇenā means with beauty of appearance. But the abundance of the element of complexion has already been stated with "rūpe." Ādhipaccenā means with sovereignty.

Evaṃ aṅkure ca indake ca tāvatiṃsesu nibbattitvā dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantesu amhākaṃ bhagavā abhisambodhito sattame saṃvacchare āsāḷhipuṇṇamāyaṃ sāvatthinagaradvāre kaṇḍambarukkhamūle yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ katvā anukkamena tipadavikkamena tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gantvā pāricchattakamūle paṇḍukambalasilāyaṃ yugandharapabbate bālasūriyo viya virocamāno dasahi lokadhātūhi sannipatitāya devabrahmaparisāya jutiṃ attano sarīrappabhāya abhibhavanto abhidhammaṃ desetuṃ nisinno avidūre nisinnaṃ indakaṃ, dvādasayojanantare nisinnaṃ aṅkurañca disvā dakkhiṇeyyasampattivibhāvanatthaṃ –

Thus, while Aṅkura and Indaka, having been born in Tāvatiṃsa, were experiencing divine prosperity, our Blessed One, having attained enlightenment, in the seventh year, on the Āsāḷhi full moon day, having performed the Twin Miracle at the foot of the Kaṇḍamba tree at the gate of Sāvatthi city, gradually going to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven with three strides, shining like the rising sun on the Yugandhara mountain on the paṇḍukambala stone at the foot of the Pāricchatta tree, surpassing the splendor of the assembly of deities and Brahmās gathered from ten world-elements with the radiance of his own body, being seated to teach the Abhidhamma, seeing Indaka seated not far away, and Aṅkura seated at a distance of twelve yojanas, in order to reveal the prosperity of the recipient –

‘‘Mahādānaṃ tayā dinnaṃ, aṅkura dīghamantaraṃ;

"The great alms were given by you, Aṅkura, for a long time;
You are seated very far away, come near to me," –

Gāthamāha. Taṃ sutvā aṅkuro ‘‘bhagavā mayā cirakālaṃ bahuṃ deyyadhammaṃ pariccajitvā pavattitampi mahādānaṃ dakkhiṇeyyasampattivirahena akhette vuttabījaṃ viya na uḷāraphalaṃ ahosi, indakassa pana kaṭacchubhikkhādānampi dakkhiṇeyyasampattiyā sukhette vuttabījaṃ viya ativiya uḷāraphalaṃ jāta’’nti āha. Tamatthaṃ dassente saṅgītikārā –

He spoke the verse. Having heard that, Aṅkura said, "Even the great almsgiving maintained by me, having given up much offering for a long time, was not of great fruit like a seed sown in a barren field due to the absence of the prosperity of the recipient, but even Indaka's giving of a ladleful of alms, due to the prosperity of the recipient, has become exceedingly great fruit like a seed sown in a fertile field." Showing that meaning, the compilers of the Saṅgīti said –

317.

317.

‘‘Tāvatiṃse yadā buddho, silāyaṃ paṇḍukambale;

"When the Buddha was in Tāvatiṃsa, on the paṇḍukambala stone;
At the foot of the Pāricchatta tree, the best of men resided.

318.

318.

‘‘Dasasu lokadhātūsu, sannipatitvāna devatā;

"In the ten world-elements, having gathered together, the deities;
Attend upon the Sambuddha, residing on the mountain peak.

319.

319.

‘‘Na koci devo vaṇṇena, sambuddhaṃ atirocati;

"No deity surpasses the Sambuddha in complexion;
Having transcended all the deities, the Sambuddha alone shines forth.

320.

320.

‘‘Yojanāni dasa dve ca, aṅkuroyaṃ tadā ahu;

"Twelve yojanas away, Aṅkura was then;
Not far from the Buddha, Indaka shines forth.

321.

321.

‘‘Oloketvāna sambuddho, aṅkurañcāpi indakaṃ;

"Having looked at Aṅkura and also Indaka, the Sambuddha;
Extolling the recipient, spoke this word.

322.

322.

‘‘Mahādānaṃ tayā dinnaṃ, aṅkuraṃ dīghamantaraṃ;

"Great alms were given by you, Aṅkura, for a long time;
You are seated very far away, come near to me.

323.

323.

‘‘Codito bhāvitattena, aṅkuro idamabravi;

"Urged by the developed one, Aṅkura said this;
What is mine with that giving, empty of a (worthy) recipient?

324.

324.

‘‘Ayaṃ so indako yakkho, dajjā dānaṃ parittakaṃ;

"This Indaka, the yakkha, gave a small gift;
Surpasses us, like the moon among the stars.

325.

325.

‘‘Ujjaṅgale yathā khette, bījaṃ bahumpi ropitaṃ;

"Just as in barren land, even a large seed is sown;
It does not produce abundant fruit, nor does it please the farmer.

326.

326.

‘‘Tatheva dānaṃ bahukaṃ, dussīlesu patiṭṭhitaṃ;

"Likewise, much almsgiving, established in the immoral;
It does not produce abundant fruit, nor does it please the giver.

327.

327.

‘‘Yathāpi bhaddake khette, bījaṃ appampi ropitaṃ;

"Just as in good land, even a small seed is sown;
When the rain pours properly, it pleases the farmer with fruit.

328.

328.

‘‘Tatheva sīlavantesu, guṇavantesu tādisu;

"Likewise, in the virtuous, in such ones with good qualities;
Even a small deed done, the merit is of great fruit," – they spoke the verses;

317.Tatthatāvatiṃseti tāvatiṃsabhavane.Silāyaṃ paṇḍukambaleti paṇḍukambalanāmake silāsane purisuttamo buddho yadā vihāsīti yojanā.

317.Therein, tāvatiṃse means in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Silāyaṃ paṇḍukambale means when the best of men, the Buddha, resided on the stone seat named Paṇḍukambala, this is the connection.

318.Dasasu lokadhātūsu, sannipatitvāna devatāti jātikhettasaññitesu dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu kāmāvacaradevatā brahmadevatā ca buddhassa bhagavato payirupāsanāya dhammassavanatthañca ekato sannipatitvā. Tenāha‘‘payirupāsanti sambuddhaṃ, vasantaṃ nagamuddhanī’’ti, sinerumuddhanīti attho.

318.Dasasu lokadhātūsu, sannipatitvāna devatā means the deities of the desire realm and the Brahma deities in the ten thousand world-systems known as the realm of birth, having gathered together in one place for the purpose of attending upon the Buddha and for listening to the Dhamma. Therefore, he said, ‘‘payirupāsanti sambuddhaṃ, vasantaṃ nagamuddhanī’’, the meaning is on the peak of Mount Sineru.

320.Yojanānidasa dve ca, aṅkuroyaṃ tadā ahūti ayaṃ yathāvuttacarito aṅkuro tadā satthu sammukhakāle dasa dve yojanāni antaraṃ katvā ahu. Satthu nisinnaṭṭhānato dvādasayojanantare ṭhāne nisinno ahosīti attho.

320.Yojanāni dasa dve ca, aṅkuroyaṃ tadā ahū means this Aṅkura, whose story has been told as mentioned, then at the time of the Teacher's presence, was at a distance of twelve yojanas. The meaning is that he was seated twelve yojanas away from the place where the Teacher was sitting.

323.Coditobhāvitattenāti pāramiparibhāvitāya ariyamaggabhāvanāya bhāvitattena sammāsambuddhena codito.Kiṃ mayhaṃ tenātiādikā satthu paṭivacanavasena aṅkurena vuttagāthā.Dakkhiṇeyyena suññatanti yaṃ dakkhiṇeyyena suññataṃ rittakaṃ virahitaṃ tadā mama dānaṃ, tasmā ‘‘kiṃ mayhaṃ tenā’’ti attano dānapuññaṃ hīḷento vadati.

323.Codito bhāvitattenā means urged by the Sammāsambuddha who has developed (himself) by the Ariya path development that has been cultivated for perfections. Kiṃ mayhaṃ tenā etc. are the verses spoken by Aṅkura as a reply to the Teacher. Dakkhiṇeyyena suññataṃ means that my almsgiving was devoid, empty, and lacking of the (worthiness of the) recipient, therefore he speaks depreciating his own merit of giving, saying "kiṃ mayhaṃ tenā."

324.Yakkhoti devaputto.Dajjāti datvā.Atirocati amhehīti attanā mādisehi ativiya virocati.ti vā nipātamattaṃ, amhe atikkamitvā abhibhavitvā virocatīti attho. Yathā kinti āha‘‘cando tāragaṇe yathā’’ti.

324.Yakkho means devaputta. Dajjā means having given. Atirocati amhehī means shines forth exceedingly more than those like me. is just a particle, the meaning is that he shines forth surpassing and outshining us. How (does he shine forth)? He said, ‘‘cando tāragaṇe yathā’’ (like the moon among the stars).

325-6.Ujjaṅgaleti ativiya thaddhabhūmibhāge. ‘‘Ūsare’’ti keci vadanti.Ropitanti vuttaṃ, vapitvā vā uddharitvā vā puna ropitaṃ.Napi tosetīti na nandayati, appaphalatāya vā tuṭṭhiṃ na janeti.Tathevāti yathā ujjaṅgale khette bahumpi bījaṃ ropitaṃ vipulaphalaṃ uḷāraphalaṃ na hoti, tato eva kassakaṃ na toseti, tathā dussīlesu sīlavirahitesu bahukampi dānaṃ patiṭṭhāpitaṃ vipulaphalaṃ mahapphalaṃ na hoti, tato eva dāyakaṃ na tosetīti attho.

325-6.Ujjaṅgale means in a very barren, hard ground. Some say "ūsare." Ropitaṃ means planted, either planted after sowing or transplanted after uprooting. Na pi toseti means it does not please, it does not generate satisfaction due to its lack of fruitfulness. Tathevā means just as even a large amount of seed planted in a barren field does not yield abundant and excellent fruit, and therefore does not please the farmer, so too, even a large amount of donations established among the immoral, those devoid of virtue, does not yield abundant and great fruit, and therefore does not please the donor. This is the meaning.

327-8.Yathāpi bhaddaketi gāthādvayassa vattavipariyāyena atthayojanā veditabbā. Tatthasammā dhāraṃ pavecchanteti vuṭṭhidhāraṃ sammadeva pavattente, anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ anudasāhaṃ anupañcāhaṃ deve vassanteti attho.Guṇavantesūti jhānādiguṇayuttesu.Tādisūti iṭṭhādīsu tādilakkhaṇappattesu.Kāranti liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ, upakāroti attho. Kīdiso upakāroti āha‘‘puñña’’nti.

327-8.Yathāpi bhaddake The meaning of the two verses should be understood by reversing the order of presentation. There, sammā dhāraṃ pavecchante means causing the rain to fall properly, meaning the rain falls every half-month, every ten days, every five days. Guṇavantesū means in those endowed with qualities such as jhāna. Tādisū means in those who have attained such characteristics as being worthy of offerings. Kāra is stated by inversion of gender, meaning upakāra (benefit). What kind of benefit? He says, ‘‘puñña’’ (merit).

329.

329.

‘‘Viceyya dānaṃ dātabbaṃ, yattha dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ;

"Giving should be discerning, where what is given is of great fruit;
Having given a discerning gift, donors go to heaven."

330.

330.

‘‘Viceyya dānaṃ sugatappasaṭṭhaṃ, ye dakkhiṇeyyā idha jīvaloke;

"A discerning gift is praised by the Sugata, to those worthy of offerings in this living world;
Gifts given to these are of great fruit, like seeds sown in fertile ground." –

Ayaṃ saṅgītikārehi ṭhapitā gāthā.

This verse was established by the compilers.

329.Tatthaviceyyāti vicinitvā, puññakkhettaṃ paññāya upaparikkhitvā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

329. There, viceyya means discerning, having investigated the field of merit with wisdom. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Tayidaṃ aṅkurapetavatthu satthārā tāvatiṃsabhavane dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatānaṃ purato dakkhiṇeyyasampattivibhāvanatthaṃ ‘‘mahādānaṃ tayā dinna’’ntiādinā attanā samuṭṭhāpitaṃ, tattha tayo māse abhidhammaṃ desetvā mahāpavāraṇāya devagaṇaparivuto devadevo devalokato saṅkassanagaraṃ otaritvā anukkamena sāvatthiṃ patvā jetavane viharanto catuparisamajjhe dakkhiṇeyyasampattivibhāvanatthameva ‘‘yassa atthāya gacchāmā’’tiādinā vitthārato desetvā catusaccakathāya desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhi. Desanāvasāne tesaṃ anekakoṭipāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.

This Aṅkurapeta story was initiated by the Teacher himself in Tāvatiṃsa heaven, in front of the deities of the ten thousand world-systems, to explain the attainment of those worthy of offerings, with "Mahādānaṃ tayā dinna" (A great gift was given by you), etc., after teaching the Abhidhamma for three months, the God of Gods, surrounded by a multitude of deities, descended from the heaven to Saṅkassanagara for the Great Pavāraṇā ceremony and, gradually reaching Sāvatthi, while dwelling in Jetavana, for the purpose of illustrating the attainment of those worthy of offerings, he delivered the sermon in detail with "Yassa atthāya gacchāma" (For whose sake we go), etc., and concluded the teaching with the Four Noble Truths. At the end of the discourse, a realization of the Dhamma arose in those many hundreds of thousands of beings.

Aṅkurapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Aṅkurapetavatthu Commentary is finished.

10. Uttaramātupetivatthuvaṇṇanā
10. Uttaramātupetivatthu Commentary

Divāvihāragataṃ bhikkhunti idaṃ uttaramātupetivatthu. Tatrāyaṃ atthavibhāvanā – satthari parinibbute paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiyā pavattitāya āyasmā mahākaccāyano dvādasahi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ kosambiyā avidūre aññatarasmiṃ araññāyatane vihāsi. Tena ca samayena rañño udenassa aññataro amacco kālamakāsi, tena ca pubbe nagare kammantā adhiṭṭhitā ahesuṃ. Atha rājā tassa puttaṃ uttaraṃ nāma māṇavaṃ pakkosāpetvā ‘‘tvañca pitarā adhiṭṭhite kammante samanusāsā’’ti tena ṭhitaṭṭhāne ṭhapesi.

Divāvihāragataṃ bhikkhuṃ is the Uttaramātupetivatthu. Here is the exposition of its meaning: After the passing away of the Teacher, when the First Great Council was convened, Venerable Mahākaccāyana was dwelling with twelve monks in a certain forest hermitage not far from Kosambī. At that time, a certain minister of King Udena passed away, and he had previously overseen various works in the city. Then the king summoned his son, a young man named Uttara, and appointed him to the position his father had held, saying, "You too should oversee the works that your father oversaw."

So ca sādhūti sampaṭicchitvā ekadivasaṃ nagarapaṭisaṅkharaṇiyānaṃ dārūnaṃ atthāya vaḍḍhakiyo gahetvā araññaṃ gato. Tattha āyasmato mahākaccāyanattherassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ upagantvā theraṃ tattha paṃsukūlacīvaradharaṃ vivittaṃ nisinnaṃ disvā iriyāpatheyeva pasīditvā katapaṭisanthāro vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Thero tassa dhammaṃ kathesi. So dhammaṃ sutvā ratanattaye sañjātappasādo saraṇesu patiṭṭhāya theraṃ nimantesi – ‘‘adhivāsetha me, bhante, svātanāya bhattaṃ saddhiṃ bhikkhūhi anukampaṃ upādāyā’’ti. Adhivāsesi thero tuṇhībhāvena. So tato nikkhamitvā nagaraṃ gantvā aññesaṃ upāsakānaṃ ācikkhi – ‘‘thero mayā svātanāya nimantito, tumhehipi mama dānaggaṃ āgantabba’’nti.

Having accepted with "Very well," one day he took carpenters to the forest for the sake of timber needed for the city's restoration. There, approaching the dwelling place of Venerable Mahākaccāyana Thera, seeing the Thera sitting in solitude, wearing robes made of rags, he was pleased by his deportment alone, and after exchanging courteous greetings, he paid homage and sat down to one side. The Thera discoursed on the Dhamma to him. Having heard the Dhamma, with faith arisen in the Triple Gem, established in the refuges, he invited the Thera, saying, "May the Venerable One accept my meal for tomorrow, together with the monks, out of compassion." The Thera accepted by remaining silent. Having left there, he went to the city and informed other lay followers, "The Thera has been invited by me for tomorrow; you too should come to my giving-place."

So dutiyadivase kālasseva paṇītaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ paṭiyādāpetvā kālaṃ ārocāpetvā saddhiṃ bhikkhūhi āgacchantassa therassa paccuggamanaṃ katvā vanditvā purakkhatvā gehaṃ pavesesi. Atha mahārahakappiyapaccattharaṇaatthatesu āsanesu there ca bhikkhūsu ca nisinnesu gandhapupphadhūpehi pūjaṃ katvā paṇītena annapānena te santappetvā sañjātappasādo katañjalī anumodanaṃ suṇitvā katabhattānumodane there gacchante pattaṃ gahetvā anugacchanto nagarato nikkhamitvā paṭinivattanto ‘‘bhante, tumhehi niccaṃ mama gehaṃ pavisitabba’’nti yācitvā therassa adhivāsanaṃ ñatvā nivatti. Evaṃ so theraṃ upaṭṭhahanto tassa ovāde patiṭṭhāya sotāpattiphalaṃ pāpuṇi, vihārañca kāresi, sabbe ca attano ñātake sāsane abhippasanne akāsi.

On the following day, having prepared delicious edibles and food early in the morning, having announced the time, and having gone out to meet the Thera coming together with the monks, he paid homage and led them into the house. Then, after the Thera and the monks were seated on seats prepared with great, worthy coverings, having made offerings with fragrant flowers and incense, having satisfied them with delicious food and drink, with joy arisen, with hands joined in reverence, having listened to the words of appreciation, as the Thera was leaving after the meal, taking the bowl, following him out of the city, as he was returning, he requested, "Venerable Sir, you must always enter my house," and having known the Thera's acceptance, he turned back. Thus, while attending to the Thera, established in his advice, he attained the fruit of stream-entry, and he had a monastery built, and he made all his relatives have faith in the Teaching.

Mātā panassa maccheramalapariyuṭṭhitacittā hutvā evaṃ paribhāsi – ‘‘yaṃ tvaṃ mama anicchantiyā eva samaṇānaṃ annapānaṃ desi, taṃ te paraloke lohitaṃ sampajjatū’’ti. Ekaṃ pana morapiñchakalāpaṃ vihāramahadivase diyyamānaṃ anujāni. Sā kālaṃ katvā petayoniyaṃ uppajji, morapiñchakalāpadānānumodanena panassā kesā nīlā siniddhā vellitaggā sukhumā dīghā ca ahesuṃ. Sā yadā gaṅgānadiṃ ‘‘pānīyaṃ pivissāmī’’ti otarati, tadā nadī lohitapūrā hoti. Sā pañcapaṇṇāsa vassāni khuppipāsābhibhūtā vicaritvā ekadivasaṃ kaṅkhārevatattheraṃ gaṅgāya tīre divāvihāraṃ nisinnaṃ disvā attānaṃ attano kesehi paṭicchādetvā upasaṅkamitvā pānīyaṃ yāci. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –

But his mother, with her mind overcome by the stain of stinginess, spoke thus: "That which you give food and drink to the ascetics without my consent, may that turn into blood for you in the next world!" However, she approved of a cluster of peacock feathers being offered on the great festival day of the monastery. Having passed away, she was born in the realm of the departed spirits, but by the merit of approving the offering of the cluster of peacock feathers, her hair was blue, smooth, with curled tips, fine, and long. When she descends into the Ganges River thinking, "I will drink water," then the river becomes full of blood. Having wandered around for fifty-five years, afflicted by hunger and thirst, one day, seeing Venerable Kaṅkhārevata Thera sitting for the day's rest on the bank of the Ganges, covering herself with her own hair, she approached and asked for water. Referring to that, it was said –

331.

331.

‘‘Divāvihāragataṃ bhikkhuṃ, gaṅgātīre nisinnakaṃ;

"To a monk resting during the day,
Sitting on the bank of the Ganges,
A departed spirit approached,
Ugly, with a fearful appearance."

332.

332.

‘‘Kesā cassā atidīghā, yāvabhūmāvalambare;

"Her hairs were very long,
Hanging down to the ground;
Covered by her hairs,
She spoke thus to the ascetic:" –

Imā dve gāthā saṅgītikārakehi idha ādito ṭhapitā.

These two verses were initially placed here by the compilers.

bhīrudassanāti bhayānakadassanā. ‘‘Ruddadassanā’’ti vā pāṭho, bībhacchabhāriyadassanāti attho.Yāvabhūmāvalambareti yāva bhūmi, tāva olambanti. Pubbe ‘‘bhikkhu’’nti ca pacchā ‘‘samaṇa’’nti ca kaṅkhārevatattherameva sandhāya vuttaṃ.

bhīrudassanā means with a frightening appearance. Alternatively, "ruddadassanā" is the reading, meaning with a repulsive and burdensome appearance. Yāvabhūmāvalambare means reaching to the ground, they hang down that far. Previously "bhikkhu" and later "samaṇa" are both stated referring to Venerable Kaṅkhārevata Thera.

Sā pana petī theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā pānīyaṃ yācantī –

That departed spirit, approaching the Thera and asking for water –

333.

333.

‘‘Pañcapaṇṇāsa vassāni, yato kālakatā ahaṃ;

"Fifty-five years,
Since I passed away;
I do not recall having eaten,
Or even drunk water;
Give me water, Venerable Sir,
Thirsty for water am I." – She spoke this verse;

333.Tatthanābhijānāmi bhuttaṃ vāti evaṃ dīghamantare kāle bhojanaṃ bhuttaṃ vā pānīyaṃ pītaṃ vā nābhijānāmi, na bhuttaṃ na pītanti attho.Tasitāti pipāsitā.Pāniyāyāti pānīyatthāya āhiṇḍantiyā me pānīyaṃ dehi, bhanteti yojanā.

333. There, nābhijānāmi bhuttaṃ vā means I do not recall having eaten food or drunk water in such a long time, meaning I have neither eaten nor drunk. Tasitā means thirsty. Pāniyāyā means give me water as I wander about seeking water, Venerable Sir. This is the construction.

Ito paraṃ –

From here on –

334.

334.

‘‘Ayaṃ sītodikā gaṅgā, himavantato sandati;

"This Ganges is cool and fresh,
Flowing down from the Himalayas;
Take and drink from here,
Why do you ask me for water?"

335.

335.

‘‘Sacāhaṃ bhante gaṅgāya, sayaṃ gaṇhāmi pāniyaṃ;

"If I myself, Venerable Sir, draw water
From the Ganges,
It turns into blood for me,
Therefore, I ask for water."

336.

336.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What wrong have you done
By body, speech, or mind?
By the ripening of what karma
Does the Ganges become blood for you?"

337.

337.

‘‘Putto me uttaro nāma, saddho āsi upāsako;

"My son is named Uttara,
He was a faithful lay follower;
He gives to the ascetics
Without my consent.

338.

338.

‘‘Cīvaraṃ piṇḍapātañca, paccayaṃ sayanāsanaṃ;

"Robes, alms food, too,
Requisites, and lodging;
I revile him for that,
Afflicted by stinginess.

339.

339.

‘‘Yaṃ tvaṃ mayhaṃ akāmāya, samaṇānaṃ pavecchasi;

"That which you, without my consent,
Give to the ascetics,
Robes, alms food, too,
Requisites, and lodging,

340.

340.

‘‘Etaṃ te paralokasmiṃ, lohitaṃ hotu uttara;

"May that be blood for you in the next world,
Uttara!
By the ripening of that karma,
The Ganges becomes blood for me." –

Imā therassa ca petiyā ca vacanapaṭivacanagāthā.

These are the verses of conversation between the Thera and the departed spirit.

334.Tatthahimavantatoti mahato himassa atthitāya ‘‘himavā’’ti laddhanāmato pabbatarājato.Sandatīti pavattati.Ettoti ito mahāgaṅgāto.Kinti kasmā maṃ yācasi pānīyaṃ, gaṅgānadiṃ otaritvā yathāruci pivāti dasseti.

334. There, himavantato means from the king of mountains, which obtained the name "Himavā" because of the existence of great snow. Sandatī means flows. Etto means from this great Ganges. Kiṃ means why do you ask me for water? He shows that having descended into the Ganges River, one should drink as one pleases.

335.Lohitaṃme parivattatīti udakaṃ sandamānaṃ mayhaṃ pāpakammaphalena lohitaṃ hutvā parivattati pariṇamati, tāya gahitamattaṃ udakaṃ lohitaṃ jāyati.

335. Lohitaṃ me parivattatī means the flowing water, by the result of my evil deeds, becomes blood and transforms for me, the water turns into blood as soon as it is taken.

337-40.Mayhaṃ akāmāyāti mama anicchantiyā.Pavecchatīti deti.Paccayanti gilānapaccayaṃ.Etanti yaṃ etaṃ cīvarādikaṃ paccayajātaṃ samaṇānaṃ pavecchasi desi, etaṃ te paralokasmiṃ lohitaṃ hotu uttarāti abhisapanavasena kataṃ pāpakammaṃ, tassa vipākenāti yojanā.

337-40. Mayhaṃ akāmāyā means without my consent. Pavecchatī means gives. Paccayaṃ means requisites for the sick. Etaṃ means this collection of requisites such as robes, etc., that you give to the ascetics, may this be blood for you in the next world, Uttara! The evil deed done by way of cursing, by the result of that karma is the construction.

Athāyasmā revato taṃ petiṃ uddissa bhikkhusaṅghassa pānīyaṃ adāsi, piṇḍāya caritvā bhattaṃ gahetvā bhikkhūnamadāsi, saṅkārakūṭādito paṃsukūlaṃ gahetvā dhovitvā bhisiñca cimilikañca katvā bhikkhūnaṃ adāsi, tena cassā petiyā dibbasampattiyo ahesuṃ. Sā therassa santikaṃ gantvā attanā laddhadibbasampattiṃ therassa dassesi. Thero taṃ pavattiṃ attano santikaṃ upagatānaṃ catunnaṃ parisānaṃ pakāsetvā dhammakathaṃ kathesi. Tena mahājano sañjātasaṃvego vigatamalamacchero hutvā dānasīlādikusaladhammābhirato ahosīti. Idaṃ pana petavatthu dutiyasaṅgītiyaṃ saṅgahaṃ āruḷhanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Then Venerable Revata, addressing that departed spirit, gave water to the Saṅgha of monks, and having begged for alms and taken food, he gave it to the monks, and having taken rags from a pile of refuse, washed them, and made a cushion and a headrest, he gave them to the monks, and by that, divine attainments came to be for that departed spirit. She went to the presence of the Thera and showed the divine attainments she had obtained to the Thera. The Thera, having revealed that account to the four assemblies who had come into his presence, delivered a Dhamma talk. By that, the great crowd, having become agitated, having become free from the stain of stinginess, became delighted in meritorious deeds such as giving and morality. But this Petavatthu should be seen as having ascended to the collection at the Second Council.

Uttaramātupetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Uttaramātupetivatthu Commentary is finished.

11. Suttapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
11. Suttapetavatthu Commentary

Ahaṃ pure pabbajitassa bhikkhunoti idaṃ suttapetavatthu. Tassa kā uppatti? Sāvatthiyā kira avidūre aññatarasmiṃ gāmake amhākaṃ satthari anuppanneyeva sattannaṃ vassasatānaṃ upari aññataro dārako ekaṃ paccekabuddhaṃ upaṭṭhahi. Tassa mātā tasmiṃ vayappatte tassatthāya samānakulato aññataraṃ kuladhītaraṃ ānesi. Vivāhadivaseyeva ca so kumāro sahāyehi saddhiṃ nhāyituṃ gato ahinā daṭṭho kālamakāsi, ‘‘yakkhagāhenā’’tipi vadanti. So paccekabuddhassa upaṭṭhānena bahuṃ kusalakammaṃ katvā ṭhitopi tassā dārikāya paṭibaddhacittatāya vimānapeto hutvā nibbatti, mahiddhiko pana ahosi mahānubhāvo.

Ahaṃ pure pabbajitassa bhikkhuno is the Suttapetavatthu. What is its origin? It is said that in Sāvatthi, not far from the city, in a certain village, even before our Teacher had arisen, more than seven hundred years ago, a certain boy attended to a Paccekabuddha. When he reached maturity, his mother brought a daughter from a family of equal status for him. On the very day of the wedding, that young man, having gone to bathe with his friends, was bitten by a snake and died, or some say, "by the seizure of a yakkha." Having done much meritorious karma by attending to the Paccekabuddha, even though he was established in that, due to his mind being attached to that girl, he was reborn as a vimānapeta (a departed spirit with a heavenly mansion), but he was of great power, of great influence.

Atha so taṃ dārikaṃ attano vimānaṃ netukāmo ‘‘kena nu kho upāyena esā diṭṭhadhammavedanīyakammaṃ katvā mayā saddhiṃ idha abhirameyyā’’ti tassā dibbabhogasampattiyā anubhavanahetuṃ vīmaṃsanto paccekabuddhaṃ cīvarakammaṃ karontaṃ disvā manussarūpena gantvā vanditvā ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, suttakena attho atthī’’ti āha. ‘‘Cīvarakammaṃ karomi, upāsakā’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi, bhante, asukasmiṃ ṭhāne suttabhikkhaṃ carathā’’ti tassā dārikāya gehaṃ dassesi. Paccekabuddho tattha gantvā gharadvāre aṭṭhāsi. Atha sā paccekabuddhaṃ tattha ṭhitaṃ disvā pasannamānasā ‘‘suttakena me ayyo atthiko’’ti ñatvā ekaṃ suttaguḷaṃ adāsi. Atha so amanusso manussarūpena tassa dārikāya gharaṃ gantvā tassā mātaraṃ yācitvā tāya saddhiṃ katipāhaṃ vasitvā tassā mātuyā anuggahatthaṃ tasmiṃ gehe sabbabhājanāni hiraññasuvaṇṇassa pūretvā sabbattha upari nāmaṃ likhi ‘‘idaṃ devadattiyaṃ dhanaṃ na kenaci gahetabba’’nti, tañca dārikaṃ gahetvā attano vimānaṃ agamāsi. Tassā mātā pahūtaṃ dhanaṃ labhitvā attano ñātakānaṃ kapaṇaddhikādinañca datvā attanā ca paribhuñjitvā kālaṃ karontī ‘‘mama dhītā āgacchati ce, idaṃ dhanaṃ dassethā’’ti ñātakānaṃ kathetvā kālamakāsi.

Then, wanting to take that girl to his own mansion, contemplating, "By what means could she, having done karma with immediately visible result, delight with me here?", seeing the Paccekabuddha making a robe, having gone in human form, having paid homage, he said, "Is there a need for thread, Venerable Sir?" "I am making a robe, lay follower." "Then, Venerable Sir, go for alms of thread at such-and-such place," he showed the house of that girl. The Paccekabuddha, having gone there, stood at the door of the house. Then that girl, having seen the Paccekabuddha standing there, with a pleased mind, knowing, "My lord needs thread," gave a ball of thread. Then that non-human, having gone to the house of that girl in human form, having asked her mother, having lived with her for a few days, in order to favor that mother, having filled all the vessels in that house with silver and gold, having written the name on top everywhere, "This wealth belongs to Devadattā, it should not be taken by anyone," and having taken that girl, he went to his own mansion. Having obtained abundant wealth, having given to her relatives, to the poor and needy, etc., and having enjoyed it herself, as the mother was passing away, she told her relatives, "If my daughter comes, give this wealth to her," and passed away.

Tato sattannaṃ vassasatānaṃ accayena amhākaṃ bhagavati loke uppajjitvā pavattitavaradhammacakke anukkamena sāvatthiyaṃ viharante tassā itthiyā tena amanussena saddhiṃ vasantiyā ukkaṇṭhā uppajji. Sā taṃ ‘‘sādhu, ayyaputta, maṃ sakaññeva gehaṃ paṭinehī’’ti vadantī –

Then, after the lapse of seven hundred years, when our Blessed One arose in the world and set in motion the unsurpassed Wheel of Dhamma, while dwelling in Savatthi in due course, that woman, living with that non-human being, became restless. She, saying to him, "Good sir, son, please take me to my own home," spoke these verses:

341.

341.

‘‘Ahaṃ pure pabbajitassa bhikkhuno,

"I gave a thread to a monk who had gone forth,
Approaching him when he asked;
Its result is obtained as abundant fruit,
And many rolls of cloth arise for me.

342.

342.

‘‘Pupphābhikiṇṇaṃ ramitaṃ vimānaṃ, anekacittaṃ naranārisevitaṃ;

"A flower-strewn, delightful palace, of varied design, frequented by men and women;
I enjoy and wear them, possessing abundant wealth that never diminishes.

343.

343.

‘‘Tasseva kammassa vipākamanvayā, sukhañca sātañca idhūpalabbhati;

"Following the result of that very deed, happiness and pleasure are obtained here;
I, having gone again to the human state, will do meritorious deeds, lead me there, good sir, son!"

Imā gāthā abhāsi.

These verses she spoke.

341.Tattha‘‘pabbajitassa bhikkhuno’’ti idaṃ paccekabuddhaṃ saddhāya vuttaṃ. So hi kāmādimalānaṃ attano santānato anavasesato pabbājitattā pahīnattā paramatthato ‘‘pabbajito’’ti, bhinnakilesattā ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti ca vattabbataṃ arahati.Suttanti kappāsiyasuttaṃ.Upasaṅkammāti mayhaṃ gehaṃ upasaṅkamitvā.Yācitāti ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyāna yācanā’’ti (jā. 1.7.59) evaṃ vuttāya kāyaviññattipayogasaṅkhātāya bhikkhācariyāya yācitā.Tassāti tassa suttadānassa.Vipāko vipulaphalūpalabbhatīti vipulaphalo uḷāraudayo mahāudayo vipāko etarahi upalabbhati paccanubhavīyati.Bahukāti anekā.Vatthakoṭiyoti vatthānaṃ koṭiyo, anekasatasahassapabhedāni vatthānīti attho.

341. Here, "pabbajitassa bhikkhuno" means it was said with faith of a Paccekabuddha. For he is worthy of being called "gone forth" in the ultimate sense, because he has completely expelled and abandoned defilements such as desire from his being; and "bhikkhu" because his defilements are destroyed. Sutta means cotton thread. Upasaṅkammā means approaching my house. Yācitā means requested by the practice of begging, which is described as an expression of bodily awareness, "The noble ones stand intending to give, this is the request of the noble ones" (Jā. 1.7.59). Tassā means of that giving of thread. Vipāko vipulaphalūpalabbhatī means a result of abundant fruit, a great and magnificent outcome, is now obtained and experienced. Bahukā means many. Vatthakoṭiyo means rolls of cloth, cloths of many hundreds of thousands of kinds, is the meaning.

342.Anekacittanti nānāvidhacittakammaṃ, anekehi vā muttāmaṇiādīhi ratanehi vicittarūpaṃ.Naranārisevitanti paricārakabhūtehi narehi nārīhi ca upasevitaṃ.Sāhaṃ bhuñjāmīti sā ahaṃ taṃ vimānaṃ paribhuñjāmi.Pārupāmīti anekāsu vatthakoṭīsu icchiticchitaṃ nivāsemi ceva paridahāmi ca.Pahūtavittāti pahūtavittūpakaraṇā mahaddhanā mahābhogā.Na ca tāva khīyatīti tañca vittaṃ na khīyati, na parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ gacchati.

342. Anekacittaṃ means varied craftsmanship, or a variegated appearance with many gems such as pearls and jewels. Naranārisevitaṃ means frequented by men and women acting as attendants. Sāhaṃ bhuñjāmi means I enjoy that palace. Pārupāmi means I dwell in and wear whatever I desire from the many rolls of cloth. Pahūtavittā means possessing abundant wealth and resources, very rich, having great possessions. Na ca tāva khīyatī means that wealth does not diminish, does not go to exhaustion or depletion.

343.Tasseva kammassa vipākamanvayāti tasseva suttadānamayapuññakammassa anvayā paccayā hetubhāvena vipākabhūtaṃsukhaṃ,iṭṭhamadhurasaṅkhātaṃsātañca idhaimasmiṃ vimāneupalabbhati. Gantvā punadeva mānusanti puna eva manussalokaṃ upagantvā.Kāhāmi puññānīti mayhaṃ sukhavisesanipphādakāni puññāni karissāmi, yesaṃ vā mayā ayaṃ sampatti laddhāti adhippāyo.Nayayyaputta manti, ayyaputta, maṃ manussalokaṃ naya, nehīti attho.

343. Tasseva kammassa vipākamanvayā means following that very meritorious act of giving thread, as a consequence and cause, the resulting sukhaṃ, happiness known as desirable and sweet, and sātañca idha here in this palace, upalabbhati is obtained. Gantvā punadeva mānusaṃ means having gone again to the human world. Kāhāmi puññānī means I will do meritorious deeds that produce special happiness for me, or the meaning is, "by which I obtained this prosperity." Nayayyaputta maṃ means, good sir, son, lead me, take me to the human world.

Taṃ sutvā so amanusso tassā paṭibaddhacittatāya anukampāya gamanaṃ anicchanto –

Having heard that, that non-human, not wanting to go due to his attachment to her and out of compassion—

344.

344.

‘‘Satta tuvaṃ vassasatā idhāgatā,

"Seven centuries have passed since you came here,
You will be old and aged there;
All your relatives will be deceased,
What will you do there, having gone from here?"

sattāti vibhattilopena niddeso, nissakke vā etaṃ paccattavacanaṃ.Vassasatāti vassasatato, sattahi vassasatehi uddhaṃ tuvaṃ idhāgatā imaṃ vimānaṃ āgatā, idhāgatāya tuyhaṃ satta vassasatāni hontīti attho.Jiṇṇā cavuḍḍhā ca tahiṃ bhavissasīti idha dibbehi utuāhārehi upathambhitattabhāvā kammānubhāvena ettakaṃ kālaṃ daharākāreneva ṭhitā. Ito pana gatā kammassa ca parikkhīṇattā manussānañca utuāhāravasena jarājiṇṇā vayovuḍḍhā ca tahiṃ manussaloke bhavissasi. Kinti?Sabbeva te kālakatā ca ñātakāti dīghassa addhuno gatattā tava ñātayopi sabbe eva matā, tasmā ito devalokato tattha manussalokaṃ gantvā kiṃ karissasi, avasesampi āyuñca idheva khepehi, idha vasāhīti adhippāyo.

Sattā is an indication by way of the elision of case endings, or this is an expression of certainty. Vassasatā means more than seven hundred years have passed since you came here to this palace, seven centuries have passed for you since you came here. Jiṇṇā ca vuḍḍhā ca tahiṃ bhavissasi means here, your existence is supported by divine seasonal foods, and by the power of karma you have remained in a youthful state for so long. But having gone from here, with the exhaustion of your karma, and by means of the seasonal foods of humans, you will become decrepit with age and advanced in years in that human world. How so? Sabbeva te kālakatā ca ñātakā means because a long time has passed, all your relatives have died. Therefore, having gone there to the human world from this world of devas, what will you do? Spend the rest of your life here, stay here, is the meaning.

Evaṃ tena vuttā sā tassa vacanaṃ asaddahantī punadeva –

Having been told this, she, not believing his words, again—

345.

345.

‘‘Satteva vassāni idhāgatāya me, dibbañca sukhañca samappitāya;

"Only seven years have passed for me since I came here,
And divine happiness has been provided;
I, having gone again to the human state, will do meritorious deeds, lead me there, good sir, son!"

satteva vassāni idhāgatāya meti, ayyaputta, mayhaṃ idhāgatāya satteva vassāni maññe vītivattāni. Satta vassasatāni dibbasukhasamappitāya bahumpi kālaṃ gataṃ asallakkhentī evamāha.

Satteva vassāni idhāgatāya me means, good sir, son, I think only seven years have passed since I came here. Not realizing that much time has passed in the enjoyment of divine happiness for seven centuries, she spoke thus.

Evaṃ pana tāya vutto so vimānapeto nānappakāraṃ taṃ anusāsitvā ‘‘tvaṃ idāni sattāhato uttari tattha na jīvissasi, mātuyā te nikkhittaṃ mayā dinnaṃ dhanaṃ atthi, taṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ datvā idheva uppattiṃ patthehī’’ti vatvā taṃ bāhāyaṃ gahetvā gāmamajjhe ṭhapetvā ‘‘idhāgate aññepi jane ‘yathābalaṃ puññāni karothā’ti ovadeyyāsī’’ti vatvā gato. Tena vuttaṃ –

Having been spoken to in this way, that spirit of the palace, having instructed her in various ways, said, "Now you will not live there for more than a week, there is wealth given by me that your mother left behind, give that to ascetics and brahmins and wish for rebirth here." Saying this, having taken her by the arm and placed her in the middle of the village, he said, "Advise other people who come here to do meritorious deeds according to their ability," and left. Therefore it was said:

346.

346.

‘‘So taṃ gahetvāna pasayha bāhāyaṃ, paccānayitvāna theriṃ sudubbalaṃ;

"He, having forcibly taken that old woman by the arm,
Having brought back the exceedingly weak old woman;
He advised, 'Let other people who come here,
Do meritorious deeds, happiness is obtained!'"

soti so vimānapeto.Tanti taṃ itthiṃ.Gahetvāna pasayha bāhāyanti pasayha netā viya bāhāyaṃ taṃ gahetvā.Paccānayitvānāti tassā jātasaṃvuḍḍhagāmaṃ punadeva ānayitvā.Therinti thāvariṃ, jiṇṇaṃ vuḍḍhanti attho.Sudubbalanti jarājiṇṇatāya eva suṭṭhu dubbalaṃ. Sā kira tato vimānato apagamanasamanantarameva jiṇṇā vuḍḍhā mahallikā addhagatā vayoanuppattā ahosi.Vajjesīti vadeyyāsi. Vattabbavacanākārañca dassetuṃ‘‘aññampi jana’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – bhadde, tvampi puññaṃ kareyyāsi, aññampi janaṃ idha tava dassanatthāya āgataṃ ‘‘bhadramukhā, ādittaṃ sīsaṃ vā celaṃ vā ajjhupekkhitvāpi dānasīlādīni puññāni karothāti, kate ca puññe ekaṃseneva tassa phalabhūtaṃ sukhaṃ upalabbhati, na ettha saṃsayo kātabbo’’ti vadeyyāsi ovadeyyāsīti.

So means that spirit of the palace. Taṃ means that woman. Gahetvāna pasayha bāhāyaṃ means having taken her by the arm like one leading forcibly. Paccānayitvānā means having brought her back again to the village where she was born and raised. Theriṃ means the old woman, aged and elderly is the meaning. Sudubbalaṃ means exceedingly weak due to old age. It seems that as soon as she departed from that palace, she became old, aged, elderly, advanced in years, and reached old age. Vajjesī means you should say. And to show the manner of speaking, "aññampi janaṃ" etc., was said. Its meaning is: Good lady, you also should do merit, and to other people who come here to see you, you should say, "Good sirs, even neglecting a burning head or garment, do meritorious deeds such as giving and morality, and having done meritorious deeds, happiness, which is the result of that, is certainly obtained, there is no doubt to be made about this," you should advise.

Evañca vatvā tasmiṃ gate sā itthī attano ñātakānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā tesaṃ attānaṃ jānāpetvā tehi niyyāditadhanaṃ gahetvā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ dānaṃ dentī attano santikaṃ āgatāgatānaṃ –

Having said this and when he had gone, that woman, having gone to the dwelling place of her relatives and made herself known to them, and having taken the wealth given by them, giving alms to ascetics and brahmins, to those who came to her presence—

347.

347.

‘‘Diṭṭhā mayā akatena sādhunā, petā vihaññanti tatheva manussā;

"I have seen with my own eyes that by not doing good,
Ghosts are afflicted, likewise humans;
And having done karma that brings pleasant feeling,
Devas and humans, beings abide in happiness."

Gāthāya ovādamadāsi.

She gave advice in this verse.

akatenāti anibbattitena attanā anupacitena.Sādhunāti kusalakammena, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ.Vihaññantīti vighātaṃ āpajjanti.Sukhavedanīyanti sukhavipākaṃ puññakammaṃ.Sukhe ṭhitāti sukhe patiṭṭhitā. ‘‘Sukhedhitā’’ti vā pāṭho, sukhena abhivuḍḍhā phītāti attho. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – yathā petā tatheva manussā akatena kusalena, katena ca akusalena vihaññamānā khuppipāsādinā vighātaṃ āpajjantā mahādukkhaṃ anubhavantā diṭṭhā mayā. Sukhavedanīyaṃ pana kammaṃ katvā tena katena kusalakammena, akatena ca akusalakammena devamanussapariyāpannā pajā sukhe ṭhitā diṭṭhā mayā, attapaccakkhametaṃ, tasmā pāpaṃ dūratova parivajjentā puññakiriyāya yuttapayuttā hothāti.

Akatenā means by what is not produced, not accumulated by oneself. Sādhunā means by meritorious action, the instrumental case indicating characteristic. Vihaññantī means they undergo destruction. Sukhavedanīyaṃ means meritorious action of pleasant result. Sukhe ṭhitā means established in happiness. Or, "sukhedhitā" is also a reading, meaning grown and flourished with happiness. Here, the meaning is this: Just as ghosts, likewise humans, by not doing good and by doing evil, being afflicted and undergoing destruction due to hunger, thirst, etc., I have seen experiencing great suffering. But having done karma that brings pleasant feeling, by that meritorious action that was done, and by not doing evil, the beings included among devas and humans, established in happiness, I have seen. This is self-evident, therefore, avoiding evil from afar, be diligent and devoted to meritorious deeds.

Evaṃ pana ovādaṃ dentī samaṇabrāhmaṇādīnaṃ sattāhaṃ mahādānaṃ pavattetvā sattame divase kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti. Bhikkhū taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi, visesato ca paccekabuddhesu pavattitadānassa mahapphalataṃ mahānisaṃsatañca pakāsesi. Taṃ sutvā mahājano vigatamalamacchero dānādipuññābhirato ahosīti.

While giving advice in this way, having maintained a great almsgiving to ascetics, brahmins, etc., for a week, on the seventh day, having died, she was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. The monks reported that event to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, having made that event the starting point, taught the Dhamma to the assembled company, and especially revealed the great fruit and great benefit of giving to Paccekabuddhas. Having heard that, the great multitude, free from the stain of stinginess, became delighted in meritorious deeds such as giving.

Suttapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Sutta Peta Story is finished.

12. Kaṇṇamuṇḍapetivatthuvaṇṇanā
12. Commentary on the Kaṇṇamuṇḍā Petī Story

Soṇṇasopānaphalakāti idaṃ satthari sāvatthiyaṃ viharante kaṇṇamuṇḍapetiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Atīte kira kassapabuddhakāle kimilanagare aññataro upāsako sotāpanno pañcahi upāsakasatehi saddhiṃ samānacchando hutvā ārāmaropanasetubandhanacaṅkamanakaraṇādīsu puññakammesu pasuto hutvā viharanto saṅghassa vihāraṃ kāretvā tehi saddhiṃ kālena kālaṃ vihāraṃ gacchati. Tesaṃ bhariyāyopi upāsikā hutvā aññamaññaṃ samaggā mālāgandhavilepanādihatthā kālena kālaṃ vihāraṃ gacchantiyo antarāmagge ārāmasabhādīsu vissamitvā gacchanti.

Soṇṇasopānaphalakā This was said about Kaṇṇamuṇḍā Petī while the Teacher was dwelling at Savatthi. It is said that in the past, in the time of the Buddha Kassapa, in the city of Kimila, a certain lay follower, being of one mind with five hundred lay followers, being devoted to meritorious deeds such as building monasteries, constructing bridges, and making walkways, having a monastery built for the Sangha, went to the monastery with them from time to time. Their wives also, being lay followers, united with each other, with garlands, perfumes, and unguents in hand, went to the monastery from time to time, and having rested in the rest-houses and assembly halls in between the roads, they would go.

Athekadivasaṃ katipayā dhuttā ekissā sabhāya sannisinnā tāsu tattha vissamitvā gatāsu tāsaṃ rūpasampattiṃ disvā paṭibaddhacittā hutvā tāsaṃ sīlācāraguṇasampannataṃ ñatvā kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ ‘‘ko etāsu ekissāpi sīlabhedaṃ kātuṃ samattho’’ti. Tattha aññataro ‘‘ahaṃ samattho’’ti āha. Te tena ‘‘sahassena abbhutaṃ karomā’’ti abbhutaṃ akaṃsu. So anekehi upāyehi vāyamamāno tāsu sabhaṃ āgatāsu sumuñcitaṃ sattatantiṃ madhurassaraṃ vīṇaṃ vādento madhureneva sarena kāmapaṭisaṃyuttagītāni gāyanto gītasaddena tāsu aññataraṃ itthiṃ sīlabhedaṃ pāpento aticāriniṃ katvā te dhutte sahassaṃ parājesi. Te sahassaparājitā tassā sāmikassa ārocesuṃ. Sāmiko taṃ pucchi – ‘‘kiṃ tvaṃ evarūpā, yathā te purisā avocu’’nti. Sā ‘‘nāhaṃ īdisaṃ jānāmī’’ti paṭikkhipitvā tasmiṃ asaddahante samīpe ṭhitaṃ sunakhaṃ dassetvā sapathaṃ akāsi ‘‘sace mayā tādisaṃ pāpakammaṃ kataṃ, ayaṃ chinnakaṇṇo kāḷasunakho tattha tattha bhave jātaṃ maṃ khādatū’’ti. Itarāpi pañcasatā itthiyo taṃ itthiṃ aticāriniṃ jānantī kiṃ ayaṃ tathārūpaṃ pāpaṃ akāsi, udāhu nākāsī’’ti coditā ‘‘na mayaṃ evarūpaṃ jānāmā’’ti musā vatvā ‘‘sace mayaṃ jānāma, bhave bhave etissāyeva dāsiyo bhaveyyāmā’’ti sapathaṃ akaṃsu.

Then one day, some rogues, sitting in a certain assembly hall, having seen their beauty as they rested there and departed, became attached to them, and having known their perfection of virtue and conduct, they started a discussion, "Who is able to cause a breach of morality in even one of these?" There, one said, "I am able." They made a wager with him, "Let us wager a thousand." He, striving by various means, as they came to the assembly hall, playing a well-tuned seven-stringed lute with a sweet sound, singing songs connected with sensuality with a sweet voice, causing one of those women to break her morality with the sound of the song, made her an adulteress and won the thousand from those rogues. Those defeated by the thousand reported it to her husband. The husband asked her, "Are you like this, as those men said?" She denied it, saying, "I do not know such a thing." Not believing her, she showed a dog standing nearby and made an oath, "If I have done such an evil deed, may this black dog with severed ears devour me in every existence where I am born." The other five hundred women, knowing that woman to be an adulteress, being questioned, "Has she done such an evil deed, or not?" said falsely, "We do not know such a thing," and made an oath, "If we know, may we be slaves to her in every existence."

Atha sā aticārinī itthī teneva vippaṭisārena ḍayhamānahadayā sussitvā na cireneva kālaṃ katvā himavati pabbatarāje sattannaṃ mahāsarānaṃ aññatarassa kaṇṇamuṇḍadahassa tīre vimānapetī hutvā nibbatti. Vimānasāmantā cassā kammavipākānubhavanayoggā ekā pokkharaṇī nibbatti. Sesā ca pañcasatā itthiyo kālaṃ katvā sapathakammavasena tassāyeva dāsiyo hutvā nibbattiṃsu. Sā tattha pubbe katassa puññakammassa phalena divasabhāgaṃ dibbasampattiṃ anubhavitvā aḍḍharatte pāpakammabalasañcoditā sayanato uṭṭhahitvā pokkharaṇitīraṃ gacchati. Tattha gataṃ gajapotakappamāṇo eko kāḷasunakho bheravarūpo chinnakaṇṇo tikhiṇāyatakathinadāṭho suvipphulitakhadiraṅgārapuñjasadisanayano nirantarappavattavijjulatāsaṅghātasadisajivho kathinatikhiṇanakho kharāyatadubbaṇṇalomo tato āgantvā taṃ bhūmiyaṃ nipātetvā atisayajighacchābhibhūto viya pasayha khādanto aṭṭhisaṅkhalikamattaṃ katvā dantehi gahetvā pokkharaṇiyaṃ khipitvā antaradhāyati. Sā ca tattha pakkhittasamanantarameva pakatirūpadhārinī hutvā vimānaṃ abhiruyha sayane nipajjati. Itarā pana tassā dāsabyameva dukkhaṃ anubhavanti. Evaṃ tāsaṃ tattha vasantīnaṃ paññāsādhikāni pañca vassasatāni vītivattāni.

Then that adulterous woman, with her heart burned by that very remorse, withered and soon died, and was reborn in the Himavat mountain range, on the shore of Kaṇṇamuṇḍa Lake, one of the seven great lakes, as a palace-dwelling ghost. Near the palace, a pond arose suitable for her to experience the result of her karma. And the remaining five hundred women, having died, were reborn as slaves to her by virtue of their oath-karma. There, by the result of the meritorious deed previously done, she would experience divine prosperity during the day, but at midnight, incited by the power of her evil karma, she would get up from her bed and go to the shore of the pond. Having gone there, a black dog the size of a baby elephant, of terrifying appearance, with severed ears, sharp and long canine teeth, eyes like a blazing pile of charcoal, a tongue like a continuous cluster of lightning flashes, hard and sharp claws, and rough, long, ugly hair, coming from there, throwing her down on the ground, like one overcome by excessive hunger, forcibly devouring her, reducing her to a skeleton, taking her with its teeth and throwing her into the pond, would disappear. And as soon as she was thrown there, she would assume her natural form and, ascending to the palace, would lie down on her bed. The others, however, only experienced the suffering of being her slaves. Thus, while they were living there, five hundred and fifty years passed.

Atha tāsaṃ purisehi vinā dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantīnaṃ ukkaṇṭhā ahesuṃ. Tattha ca kaṇṇamuṇḍadahato niggatā pabbatavivarena āgantvā gaṅgaṃ nadiṃ anupaviṭṭhā ekā nadī atthi. Tāsañca vasanaṭṭhānasamīpe eko dibbaphalehi ambarukkhehi panasalabujādīhi ca upasobhito ārāmasadiso araññappadeso atthi. Tā evaṃ samacintesuṃ – ‘‘handa, mayaṃ imāni ambaphalāni imissā nadiyā pakkhipissāma, appeva nāma imaṃ phalaṃ disvā phalalobhena kocideva puriso idhāgaccheyya, tena saddhiṃ ramissāmāti. Tā tathā akaṃsu. Tāhi pana pakkhittāni ambaphalāni kānici tāpasā gaṇhiṃsu, kānici vanacarakā, kānici kākā vilujjiṃsu, kānici tīre laggiṃsu. Ekaṃ pana gaṅgāya sotaṃ patvā anukkamena bārāṇasiṃ sampāpuṇi.

Then, as they were experiencing divine fortune without men, they felt longing. From the Kaṇṇamuṇḍa Lake, there is a river that emerges from a mountain pass and flows into the Ganges. Near their dwelling place was a forest region resembling a park, adorned with divine fruit-bearing mango trees, jackfruit trees, and bulletwood trees. They thought thus: "Come, let us throw these mangoes into this river. Perhaps someone, seeing this fruit and desiring it, might come here, and we can enjoy ourselves with him." They did so. Of the mangoes thrown by them, some were taken by ascetics, some by forest dwellers, some were snatched by crows, and some washed ashore. But one, reaching the current of the Ganges, gradually reached Bārāṇasī.

Tena ca samayena bārāṇasirājā lohajālaparikkhitte gaṅgājale nhāyati. Atha taṃ phalaṃ nadisotena vuyhamānaṃ anukkamena āgantvā lohajāle laggi. Taṃ vaṇṇagandharasasampannaṃ mahantaṃ dibbaṃ ambaphalaṃ disvā rājapurisā rañño upanesuṃ. Rājā tassa ekadesaṃ gahetvā vīmaṃsanatthāya ekassa bandhanāgāre ṭhapitassa vajjhacorassa khādituṃ adāsi. So taṃ khāditvā ‘‘deva, mayā evarūpaṃ na khāditapubbaṃ, dibbamidaṃ maññe ambaphala’’nti āha. Rājā punapi tassa ekaṃ khaṇḍaṃ adāsi. So taṃ khāditvā vigatavalitapalito ativiya manohararūpo yobbane ṭhito viya ahosi. Taṃ disvā rājā acchariyabbhutajāto taṃ ambaphalaṃ paribhuñjitvā sarīre visesaṃ labhitvā manusse pucchi – ‘‘kattha evarūpāni dibbaambaphalāni saṃvijjantī’’ti? Manussā evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘himavante kira, deva, pabbatarāje’’ti. ‘‘Sakkā pana tāni ānetu’’nti? ‘‘Vanacarakā, deva, jānantī’’ti.

At that time, the King of Bārāṇasī was bathing in the Ganges, enclosed by a net of iron mesh. Then, that fruit, carried by the river's current, gradually came and got caught in the iron mesh. Seeing that large, divine mango fruit, rich in color, fragrance, and taste, the royal officials presented it to the king. The king, taking a portion of it, gave it to a condemned thief held in a prison to eat, in order to test it. Having eaten it, he said, "Sire, I have never eaten anything like this before. I think this is a divine mango fruit." The king gave him another piece. Having eaten that, he became free from wrinkles and gray hair, and exceedingly charming in appearance, as if standing in his youth. Seeing that, the king, astonished and amazed, having consumed that mango fruit and experiencing a change in his body, asked the people, "Where can such divine mango fruits be found?" The people said, "It is said that they are in the Himalayas, the king of mountains." "Is it possible to bring them?" "The forest dwellers, Sire, know."

Rājā vanacarake pakkosāpetvā tesaṃ tamatthaṃ ācikkhitvā tehi sammantetvā dinnassa ekassa vanacarakassa sahassaṃ datvā taṃ vissajjesi – ‘‘gaccha, sīghaṃ taṃ me ambaphalaṃ ānehī’’ti. So taṃ kahāpaṇasahassaṃ puttadārassa datvā pātheyyaṃ gahetvā paṭigaṅgaṃ kaṇṇamuṇḍadahābhimukho gantvā manussapathaṃ atikkamitvā kaṇṇamuṇḍadahato oraṃ saṭṭhiyojanappamāṇe padese ekaṃ tāpasaṃ disvā tena ācikkhitamaggena gacchanto puna tiṃsayojanappamāṇe padese ekaṃ tāpasaṃ disvā, tena ācikkhitamaggena gacchanto puna pannarasayojanappamāṇe ṭhāne aññaṃ tāpasaṃ disvā, tassa attano āgamanakāraṇaṃ kathesi. Tāpaso taṃ anusāsi – ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya imaṃ mahāgaṅgaṃ pahāya imaṃ khuddakanadiṃ nissāya paṭisotaṃ gacchanto yadā pabbatavivaraṃ passasi, tadā rattiyaṃ ukkaṃ gahetvā paviseyyāsi. Ayañca nadī rattiyaṃ nappavattati, tena te gamanayoggā hoti, katipayayojanātikkamena te ambe passissasī’’ti. So tathā katvā udayante sūriye vividharatanaraṃsijālapajjotitabhūmibhāgaṃ phalabhārāvanatasākhāvitānatarugaṇopasobhitaṃ nānāvidhavihaṅgagaṇūpakūjitaṃ ativiya manoharaṃ ambavanaṃ sampāpuṇi.

The king summoned the forest dwellers, explained the matter to them, and after consulting with them, gave a thousand (kahāpaṇas) to one forest dweller and sent him off, saying, "Go, quickly bring me that mango fruit!" Giving that thousand (kahāpaṇas) to his wife and children, and taking provisions, he went upstream towards the Kaṇṇamuṇḍa Lake, and crossing the path of humans, at a distance of sixty yojanas from the Kaṇṇamuṇḍa Lake, he saw an ascetic. Going by the path shown by him, again at a distance of thirty yojanas, he saw another ascetic, and going by the path shown by him, again at a place fifteen yojanas away, he saw another ascetic, and told him the reason for his coming. The ascetic advised him, "From here on, leaving this great Ganges, relying on this small river, go upstream, and when you see a mountain pass, then at night, taking a torch, enter it. This river does not flow at night, so it is suitable for your travel. After crossing a few yojanas, you will see mangoes." Having done so, at sunrise, he reached a mango grove, its ground illuminated by a network of various jewel-like rays, adorned with rows of trees with branches bent low with the burden of fruit, resounding with the calls of various kinds of birds, and exceedingly delightful.

Atha naṃ tā amanussitthiyo dūratova āgacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘esa mama pariggaho, esa mama pariggaho’’ti upadhāviṃsu. So pana tāhi saddhiṃ tattha dibbasampattiṃ anubhavituṃ yoggassa puññakammassa akatattā tā disvāva bhīto viravanto palāyitvā anukkamena bārāṇasiṃ patvā taṃ pavattiṃ rañño ārocesi. Rājā taṃ sutvā tā itthiyo daṭṭhuṃ ambaphalāni ca paribhuñjituṃ sañjātābhilāso rajjabhāraṃ amaccesu āropetvā migavāpadesena sannaddhadhanukalāpo khaggaṃ bandhitvā katipayamanussaparivāro teneva vanacarakena dassitamaggena gantvā katipayayojanantare ṭhāne manussepi ṭhapetvā vanacarakameva gahetvā anukkamena gantvā tampi tato nivattāpetvā udayante divākare ambavanaṃ pāvisi. Atha naṃ tā itthiyo abhinavauppannamiva devaputtaṃ disvā paccuggantvā ‘‘rājā’’ti ñatvā sañjātasinehabahumānā sakkaccaṃ nhāpetvā dibbehi vatthālaṅkāramālāgandhavilepanehi sumaṇḍitapasādhitaṃ katvā vimānaṃ āropetvā nānaggarasaṃ dibbabhojanaṃ bhojetvā tassa icchānurūpaṃ payirupāsiṃsu.

Then those non-human women, seeing him coming from afar, ran up, saying, "This is my companion, this is my companion!" But because he had not performed meritorious deeds worthy of experiencing divine fortune with them there, seeing them, he was frightened and fled, and gradually reaching Bārāṇasī, he reported the incident to the king. Hearing that, the king, desiring to see those women and enjoy the mango fruits, entrusting the burden of the kingdom to his ministers, under the pretext of hunting, girded with a bow and quiver, wearing a sword, with a retinue of a few men, went by the path shown by that very forest dweller, and after a few yojanas, stationed the men and, taking only the forest dweller, gradually went on and, sending him back from there, at sunrise, entered the mango grove. Then those women, seeing him like a newly born divine being, welcomed him and, recognizing him as the king, with affection and respect, respectfully bathed him, adorned and decorated him with divine clothes, ornaments, garlands, perfumes, and unguents, seated him on a divine mansion, fed him divine food of various flavors, and attended to him according to his wishes.

Atha diyaḍḍhavassasate atikkante rājā aḍḍharattisamaye uṭṭhahitvā nisinno taṃ aticāriniṃ petiṃ pokkharaṇitīraṃ gacchantiṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho esā imāya velāya gacchatī’’ti vīmaṃsitukāmo anubandhi. Atha naṃ tattha gataṃ sunakhena khajjamānaṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho ida’’nti ajānanto tayo ca divase vīmaṃsitvā ‘‘eso etissā paccāmitto bhavissatī’’ti nisitena usunā vijjhitvā jīvitā voropetvā tañca itthiṃ pothetvā pokkharaṇiṃ otāretvā paṭiladdhapurimarūpaṃ disvā –

Then, after one and a half centuries had passed, the king, rising in the middle of the night, sat and saw that adulterous female ghost going to the bank of a pond. Wanting to investigate, "Why is she going at this hour?" he followed her. Then, seeing her being eaten by a dog there, not knowing, "What is this?" and investigating for three days, thinking, "This will be her enemy," he struck her with a sharp arrow, deprived her of life, and having struck that woman and lowered her into the pond, seeing her having regained her former form –

348.

348.

‘‘Soṇṇasopānaphalakā, soṇṇavālukasanthatā;

"With golden stair-platforms, covered with golden sand,
There are fragrant sogandhikā, beautiful, with pure scents, delightful.

349.

349.

‘‘Nānārukkhehi sañchannā, nānāgandhasameritā;

"Covered with various trees, wafted with various scents,
Covered with various lotuses, filled with white lotuses.

350.

350.

‘‘Surabhiṃ sampavāyanti, manuññā māluteritā;

"They blow forth fragrance, pleasant, driven by the breeze,
Resounded by swans and cranes, filled with the cooing of ruddy geese and whistling ducks.

351.

351.

‘‘Nānādijagaṇākiṇṇā, nānāsaragaṇāyutā;

"Crowded with various flocks of birds, endowed with various groups of lakes,
Trees bearing various fruits, forests bearing various flowers.

352.

352.

‘‘Na manussesu īdisaṃ, nagaraṃ yādisaṃ idaṃ;

"Such a city is not among humans, as this one is,
Many are your palaces, made of gold and silver;
Shining brightly, they illuminate all four directions.

353.

353.

‘‘Pañca dāsisatā tuyhaṃ, yā temā paricārikā;

"You have five hundred female slaves, who are your attendants;
They wear conch-shell bracelets and armlets, adorned with golden necklaces.

354.

354.

‘‘Pallaṅkā bahukā tuyhaṃ, sovaṇṇarūpiyāmayā;

"You have many couches, made of gold and silver;
Covered with antelope hides, prepared with woolen blankets.

355.

355.

‘‘Yattha tuvaṃ vāsūpagatā, sabbakāmasamiddhinī;

"Where you have gone to dwell, fulfilled with all desires;
At midnight, having arisen from there, you go.

356.

356.

‘‘Uyyānabhūmiṃ gantvāna, pokkharaññā samantato;

"Having gone to the garden land, around the pond;
On its bank you stand, on the green, beautiful turf.

357.

357.

‘‘Tato te kaṇṇamuṇḍo sunakho, aṅgamaṅgāni khādati;

"Then that Kaṇṇamuṇḍa dog eats your limbs, piece by piece;
And when you have been eaten, made into a skeleton;
You plunge into the pond, and your body becomes as before.

358.

358.

‘‘Tato tvaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgī, sucāru piyadassanā;

"Then you, with complete limbs, very beautiful and pleasing to see;
Having covered yourself with a cloth, you come to me.

359.

359.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil deed have you done by body, speech, or mind?
Due to the result of what action does the Kaṇṇamuṇḍa dog
Eat your limbs, piece by piece?"—

Dvādasahi gāthāhi taṃ tassa pavattiṃ paṭipucchi.

With twelve verses, he questioned her about that event.

348.Tatthasoṇṇasopānaphalakāti suvaṇṇamayasopānaphalakā.Soṇṇavālukasanthatāti samantato suvaṇṇamayāhi vālukāhi santhatā.Tatthāti pokkharaṇiyaṃ.Sogandhiyāti sogandhikā.Vaggūti sundarā rucirā.Sucigandhāti manuññagandhā.

348. There, soṇṇasopānaphalakā means golden stair-platforms. Soṇṇavālukasanthatā means covered all around with golden sand. Tattha means in the pond. Sogandhiyā means fragrant sogandhikā. Vaggū means beautiful, lovely. Sucigandhā means having pleasant scents.

349.Nānāgandhasameritāti nānāvidhasurabhigandhavasena gandhavāyunā samantato eritā.Nānāpadumasañchannāti nānāvidharattapadumasañchāditasalilatalā.Puṇḍarīkasamotatāti setapadumehi ca samokiṇṇā.

349. Nānāgandhasameritā means wafted all around by the fragrant wind, due to various kinds of pleasant scents. Nānāpadumasañchannā means the surface of the water covered with various kinds of red lotuses. Puṇḍarīkasamotatā means also filled with white lotuses.

350.Surabhiṃ sampavāyantīti sammadeva sugandhaṃ vāyati pokkharaṇīti adhippāyo.Haṃsakoñcābhirudāti haṃsehi ca koñcehi ca abhināditā.

350. Surabhiṃ sampavāyantī means the pond wafts a very pleasant fragrance; this is the meaning. Haṃsakoñcābhirudā means resounded by swans and cranes.

351.Nānādijagaṇākiṇṇāti nānādijagaṇākiṇṇā.Nānāsaragaṇāyutāti nānāvidhavihaṅgamābhirudasamūhayuttā.Nānāphaladharāti nānāvidhaphaladhārino sabbakālaṃ vividhaphalabhāranamitasākhattā.Nānāpupphadharā vanāti nānāvidhasurabhikusumadāyikāni vanānīti attho. Liṅgavipallāsena hi ‘‘vanā’’ti vuttaṃ.

351. Nānādijagaṇākiṇṇā means crowded with various flocks of birds. Nānāsaragaṇāyutā means endowed with groups of various kinds of bird calls. Nānāphaladharā means bearing various fruits, with branches bent low by the burden of various fruits at all times. Nānāpupphadharā vanā means forests giving various fragrant flowers; this is the meaning. "Vanā" is said with a gender shift.

352.Na manussesu īdisaṃ nagaranti yādisaṃ tava idaṃ nagaraṃ, īdisaṃ manussesu natthi, manussaloke na upalabbhatīti attho.Rūpiyamayāti rajatamayā.Daddallamānāti ativiya virocamānā.Ābhentīti sobhayanti.Samantā caturo disāti samantato catassopi disāyo.

352. Na manussesu īdisaṃ nagaraṃ means such a city as this one of yours does not exist among humans, it is not found in the human world; this is the meaning. Rūpiyamayā means made of silver. Daddallamānā means shining exceedingly brightly. Ābhentī means they illuminate. Samantā caturo disā means all around, in the four directions.

353.Yā temāti yā te imā.Paricārikāti veyyāvaccakāriniyo.ti tā paricārikāyo.Kambukāyūradharāti saṅkhavalayakāyūravibhūsitā.Kañcanāveḷabhūsitāti suvaṇṇavaṭaṃsakasamalaṅkatakesahatthā.

353. Yā temā means these that are yours. Paricārikā means those who do service. means those attendants. Kambukāyūradharā means adorned with conch-shell bracelets and armlets. Kañcanāveḷabhūsitā means with their hair adorned with golden earrings.

354.Kadalimigasañchannāti kadalimigacammapaccattharaṇatthatā.Sajjāti sajjitā sayituṃ yuttarūpā.Gonakasanthatāti dīghalomakena kojavena santhatā.

354. Kadalimigasañchannā means covered with deer hides as bedspreads. Sajjā means prepared, suitable for lying down. Gonakasanthatā means covered with a long-haired woolen blanket.

355.Yatthāti yasmiṃ pallaṅke.Vāsūpagatāti vāsaṃ upagatā, sayitāti attho.Sampattāyaḍḍharattāyāti aḍḍharattiyā upagatāya.Tatoti pallaṅkato.

355. Yatthā means on which couch. Vāsūpagatā means having gone to dwell, having lain down; this is the meaning. Sampattāyaḍḍharattāyā means when midnight has arrived. Tato means from the couch.

356.Pokkharaññāti pokkharaṇiyā.Hariteti nīle.Saddaleti taruṇatiṇasañchanne.Subheti suddhe. Subheti vā tassā ālapanaṃ. Bhadde, samantato harite saddale tassā pokkharaṇiyā tīre tvaṃ gantvāna ṭhāsi tiṭṭhasīti yojanā.

356. Pokkharaññā means of the pond. Harite means green. Saddale means covered with fresh grass. Subhe means pure. Or, Subhe is an address to her. O beautiful one, having gone to the bank of that pond, all around on the green turf, you stand; this is the connection.

357.Kaṇṇamuṇḍoti khaṇḍitakaṇṇo chinnakaṇṇo.Khāyitā āsīti khāditā ahosi.Aṭṭhisaṅkhalikā katāti aṭṭhisaṅkhalikamattā katā.Yathā pureti sunakhena khādanato pubbe viya.

357. Kaṇṇamuṇḍo means with a severed ear, a cut ear. Khāyitā āsī means you were eaten. Aṭṭhisaṅkhalikā katā means made only into a skeleton. Yathā pure means as before being eaten by the dog.

358.Tatoti pokkharaṇiṃ ogāhanato pacchā.Aṅgapaccaṅgīti paripuṇṇasabbaṅgapaccaṅgavatī.Sucārūti suṭṭhu manoramā.Piyadassanāti dassanīyā.Āyāsīti āgacchasi.

358. Tato means after plunging into the pond. Aṅgapaccaṅgī means having complete limbs. Sucārū means very delightful. Piyadassanā means pleasing to see. Āyāsī means you come.

Evaṃ tena raññā pucchitā sā petī ādito paṭṭhāya attano pavattiṃ tassa kathentī –

Thus, being questioned by that king, that female ghost, recounting her story from the beginning, said to him –

360.

360.

‘‘Kimilāyaṃ gahapati, saddho āsi upāsako;

"In Kimilā, a householder, was a faithful lay follower;
I was his wife, immoral and adulterous.

361.

361.

‘‘So maṃ aticaramānāya, sāmiko etadabravi;

"As I was committing adultery, my husband said this to me;
'This is not proper for you, that you commit adultery with me.'

362.

362.

‘‘Sāhaṃ ghorañca sapathaṃ, musāvādañca bhāsisaṃ;

"I then spoke a terrible oath and a false statement;
'I do not commit adultery with you, in body or mind.

363.

363.

‘‘‘Sacāhaṃ taṃ aticarāmi, kāyena uda cetasā;

"'If I commit adultery with you, in body or mind;
May this Kaṇṇamuṇḍa dog eat my limbs, piece by piece.'

364.

364.

‘‘Tassa kammassa vipākaṃ, musāvādassa cūbhayaṃ;

"The result of that action, and both the false statement;
For seven hundred years, it has been experienced by me;
And the Kaṇṇamuṇḍa dog eats my limbs, piece by piece.'"—She spoke five verses.

360-1.Tatthakimilāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare.Aticārinīti bhariyā hi patiṃ atikkamma caraṇato ‘‘aticārinī’’ti vuccati. Aticaramānāya mayi so sāmiko maṃ etadabravīti yojanā.Netaṃ channantiādi vuttākāradassanaṃ. Tatthanetaṃ channanti na etaṃ yuttaṃ.Na patirūpanti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Yanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ.Aticarāsīti aticarasi, ayameva vā pāṭho. Yaṃ maṃ tvaṃ aticarasi, tattha yaṃ aticaraṇaṃ, netaṃ channaṃ netaṃ patirūpanti attho.

360-1. There, kimilāyaṃ means in a city named Kimilā. Aticārinī means a wife is called "aticārinī" because she goes beyond her husband. The connection is: "As I was committing adultery, that husband of mine said this to me." Netaṃ channa etc., shows the manner stated. There, netaṃ channa means this is not fitting. Na patirūpaṃ is a synonym for that. Yaṃ refers to the action. Aticarāsī means you commit adultery, or this is the reading itself. "That you commit adultery with me, that adultery, this is not fitting, this is not proper;" this is the meaning.

362-4.Ghoranti dāruṇaṃ.Sapathanti sapanaṃ.Bhāsisanti abhāsiṃ.Sacāhanti sace ahaṃ.Tanti tvaṃ.Tassa kammassāti tassa pāpakammassa dussīlyakammassa.Musāvādassa cāti ‘‘nāhaṃ taṃ aticarāmī’’ti vuttamusāvādassa ca.Ubhayanti ubhayassa vipākaṃ.Anubhūtanti anubhūyamānaṃ mayāti attho.Yatoti yato pāpakammato.

362-4. Ghora means dreadful. Sapatha means an oath. Bhāsisam means I spoke. Sacāham means if I. Tam means you. Tassa kammassā means of that evil deed, of the deed of immorality. Musāvādassa cā means and of the lie, "I will not transgress against you," that was spoken. Ubhayam means the result of both. Anubhūtam means being experienced by me, is the meaning. Yato means because of which evil deed.

Evañca pana vatvā tena attano kataṃ upakāraṃ kittentī –

Having said this, she praised the help he had given her:

365.

365.

‘‘Tvañca deva bahukāro, atthāya me idhāgato;

"You, O deva, have done much for me, you came here for my benefit;
I am freed from the shaven-headed one, without sorrow, without fear from anywhere.

366.

366.

‘‘Tāhaṃ deva namassāmi, yācāmi pañjalīkatā;

"Therefore, O deva, I salute you, I beseech you with hands joined in reverence;
Enjoy the superhuman pleasures, delight, O deva, with me."

devāti rājānaṃ ālapati.Kaṇṇamuṇḍassāti kaṇṇamuṇḍato. Nissakke hi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Atha rājā tattha vāsena nibbinnamānaso gamanajjhāsayaṃ pakāsesi. Taṃ sutvā petī rañño paṭibaddhacittā tatthevassa vāsaṃ yācantī‘‘tāhaṃ, deva, namassāmī’’ti gāthamāha.

Devā she addresses the king. Kaṇṇamuṇḍassā from the shaven-headed one. This is a term of ownership without substance. Then, the king, with his mind weary of staying there, revealed his intention to leave. Hearing that, the petī, her mind attached to the king, begging him to stay there, spoke this verse: "Tāhaṃ, deva, namassāmī."

Puna rājā ekaṃsena nagaraṃ gantukāmova hutvā attano ajjhāsayaṃ pavedento –

Again, the king, being determined to go to the city, declaring his intention:

367.

367.

‘‘Bhuttā amānusā kāmā, ramitomhi tayā saha;

"I have enjoyed the superhuman pleasures, I have delighted with you;
Therefore, O fortunate one, I beseech you, quickly return me."

tāhanti taṃ ahaṃ.Subhageti subhagayutte.Paṭinayāhi manti mayhaṃ nagarameva maṃ paṭinehi. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.

Tāham means you, I. Subhage means endowed with good fortune. Paṭinayāhi ma means take me back to my city. The rest is clear everywhere.

Atha sā vimānapetī rañño vacanaṃ sutvā viyogaṃ asahamānā sokāturatāya byākulahadayā vedhamānasarīrā nānāvidhehi upāyehi āyācitvāpi taṃ tattha vāsetuṃ asakkontī bahūhi mahārahehi ratanehi saddhiṃ rājānaṃ nagaraṃ netvā pāsādaṃ āropetvā kanditvā paridevitvā attano vasanaṭṭhānameva gatā. Rājā pana taṃ disvā sañjātasaṃvego dānādīni puññakammāni katvā saggaparāyaṇo ahosi. Atha amhākaṃ bhagavati loke uppajjitvā pavattitavaradhammacakke anukkamena sāvatthiyaṃ viharante ekadivasaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno pabbatacārikaṃ caramāno taṃ itthiṃ saparivāraṃ disvā tāya katakammaṃ pucchi. Sā ādito paṭṭhāya sabbaṃ therassa kathesi. Thero tāsaṃ dhammaṃ desesi. Taṃ pavattiṃ thero bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Mahājano paṭiladdhasaṃvego pāpato oramitvā dānādīni puññakammāni katvā saggaparāyaṇo ahosīti.

Then that vimāna-petī, hearing the king's words, unable to bear the separation, with her heart distraught due to sorrow, her body trembling, even after pleading in various ways, unable to make him stay there, taking the king to the city along with many valuable jewels, having him ascend the palace, weeping and lamenting, went to her own dwelling place. The king, seeing that, stirred with saṃvega, having done meritorious deeds such as giving, was devoted to heaven. Then, when our Blessed One arose in the world and set in motion the excellent Wheel of Dhamma, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a mountain pilgrimage, saw that woman with her retinue and asked her about the deed she had done. She told the Thera everything from the beginning. The Thera taught them the Dhamma. The Thera reported that occurrence to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, making that the basis for a story, taught the Dhamma to the assembled company. The great crowd, having regained saṃvega, descending from the peak, having done meritorious deeds such as giving, were devoted to heaven.

Kaṇṇamuṇḍapetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Kaṇṇamuṇḍa-petavatthu is finished.

13. Ḍhubbaripetavatthuvaṇṇanā
13. Commentary on the Ḍhubbari-petavatthu

Ahu rājā brahmadattoti idaṃ ubbaripetavatthuṃ satthā jetavane viharanto aññataraṃ upāsikaṃ ārabbha kathesi. Sāvatthiyaṃ kira aññatarāya upāsikāya sāmiko kālamakāsi. Sā pativiyogadukkhāturā socantī āḷāhanaṃ gantvā rodati. Bhagavā tassā sotāpattiphalassa upanissayasampattiṃ disvā karuṇāya sañcoditamānaso hutvā tassā gehaṃ gantvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Upāsikā satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Atha naṃ satthā ‘‘kiṃ, upāsike, socasī’’ti vatvā ‘‘āma, bhagavā, piyavippayogena socāmī’’ti vutte tassā sokaṃ apanetukāmo atītaṃ āhari.

Ahu rājā brahmadatto This Ubbarī-petavatthu was spoken by the Teacher while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning a certain female lay follower. It seems that in Sāvatthi, the husband of a certain female lay follower passed away. She, distressed by the separation from her husband, went to the charnel ground, weeping. The Blessed One, seeing the fulfillment of the conditions for her attainment of Stream-entry, His mind moved by compassion, went to her house and sat down on the prepared seat. The female lay follower approached the Teacher, paid homage, and sat down to one side. Then the Teacher, saying to her, "Why are you grieving, female lay follower?" and when she said, "Yes, Blessed One, I am grieving because of separation from a loved one," wishing to remove her sorrow, brought forth the past.

Atīte pañcālaraṭṭhe kapilanagare cūḷanībrahmadatto nāma rājā ahosi. So agatigamanaṃ pahāya attano vijite pajāya hitakaraṇanirato dasa rājadhamme akopetvā rajjaṃ anusāsamāno kadāci ‘‘attano rajje kiṃ vadantī’’ti sotukāmo tunnavāyavesaṃ gahetvā eko adutiyo nagarato nikkhamitvā gāmato gāmaṃ janapadato janapadaṃ vicaritvā sabbarajjaṃ akaṇṭakaṃ anupapīḷaṃ manusse sammodamāne apārutaghare maññe viharante disvā somanassajāto nivattitvā nagarābhimukho āgacchanto aññatarasmiṃ gāme ekissā vidhavāya duggatitthiyā gehaṃ pāvisi. Sā taṃ disvā āha – ‘‘ko nu tvaṃ, ayyo, kuto vā āgatosī’’ti? ‘‘Ahaṃ tunnavāyo, bhadde, bhatiyā tunnavāyakammaṃ karonto vicarāmi. Yadi tumhākaṃ tunnavāyakammaṃ atthi, bhattañca vetanañca detha, tumhākampi kammaṃ karomī’’ti. ‘‘Natthamhākaṃ kammaṃ bhattavetanaṃ vā, aññesaṃ karohi, ayyā’’ti. So tattha katipāhaṃ vasanto dhaññapuññalakkhaṇasampannaṃ tassā dhītaraṃ disvā mātaraṃ āha – ‘‘ayaṃ dārikā kiṃ kenaci katapariggahā, udāhu akatapariggahā. Sace pana kenaci akatapariggahā, imaṃ mayhaṃ detha, ahaṃ tumhākaṃ sukhena jīvanūpāyaṃ kātuṃ samattho’’ti. ‘‘Sādhu, ayyā’’ti sā tassa taṃ adāsi.

In the past, in the Pañcāla country, in the city of Kapilā, there was a king named Cūḷanībrahmadatta. He, abandoning partiality, intent on doing good to the people in his kingdom, ruling without violating the ten kingly virtues, once wishing to hear "what they are saying in my kingdom," taking the guise of a weaver, alone, without a companion, leaving the city, wandering from village to village, from district to district, seeing his entire kingdom without thorns, without oppression, people living in harmony, dwelling as if in houses with open doors, filled with joy, returning, coming towards the city, entered the house of a certain poor widow in a village. She, seeing him, said, "Who are you, sir, and where have you come from?" "I am a weaver, madam, wandering while doing weaving work for hire. If you have weaving work, give me food and wages, and I will do your work." "We have no work, nor food and wages; do it for others, sir." He, staying there for a few days, seeing her daughter, endowed with auspicious marks of wealth, said to her mother, "Is this girl engaged to anyone, or is she unengaged? If she is unengaged to anyone, give her to me; I am capable of providing you with a comfortable way of life." "Very well, sir," she gave her to him.

So tāya saddhiṃ katipāhaṃ vasitvā tassā kahāpaṇasahassaṃ datvā ‘‘ahaṃ katipāheneva nivattissāmi. Bhadde, tvaṃ mā ukkaṇṭhasī’’ti vatvā attano nagaraṃ gantvā, nagarassa ca tassa gāmassa ca antare maggaṃ samaṃ kārāpetvā alaṅkārāpetvā mahatā rājānubhāvena tattha gantvā taṃ dārikaṃ kahāpaṇarāsimhi ṭhapetvā suvaṇṇarajatakalasehi nhāpetvā ‘‘ubbarī’’ti nāmaṃ kārāpetvā aggamahesiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā tañca gāmaṃ tassā ñātīnaṃ datvā mahatā rājānubhāvena taṃ nagaraṃ ānetvā tāya saddhiṃ abhiramamāno yāvajīvaṃ rajjasukhaṃ anubhavitvā āyupariyosāne kālamakāsi. Kālakate ca tasmiṃ, kate ca sarīrakicce ubbarī pativiyogena sokasallasamappitahadayā āḷāhanaṃ gantvā bahū divase gandhapupphādīhi pūjetvā rañño guṇe kittetvā ummādappattā viya kandantī paridevantī āḷāhanaṃ padakkhiṇaṃ karoti.

He, staying with her for a few days, giving her a thousand kahāpaṇas, said, "I will return in a few days. Madam, do not be anxious," and going to his city, having the road between the city and that village leveled and decorated, going there with great royal pomp, placing that girl on a heap of kahāpaṇas, bathing her with golden and silver pots, naming her "Ubbarī," placing her in the chief queen's position, giving that village to her relatives, bringing her to that city with great royal pomp, amusing himself with her, having enjoyed royal pleasures for as long as he lived, at the end of his life, passed away. When he had passed away, and the funeral rites were completed, Ubbarī, her heart pierced by the dart of sorrow due to separation from her husband, going to the charnel ground, for many days worshipping with incense and flowers, praising the king's virtues, like one who had gone mad, weeping, lamenting, circumambulating the charnel ground.

Tena ca samayena amhākaṃ bhagavā bodhisattabhūto isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā adhigatajjhānābhiñño himavantassa sāmantā aññatarasmiṃ araññāyatane viharanto sokasallasamappitaṃ ubbariṃ dibbena cakkhunā disvā ākāsena āgantvā dissamānarūpo ākāse ṭhatvā tattha ṭhite manusse pucchi – ‘‘kassidaṃ āḷāhanaṃ, kassatthāya cāyaṃ itthī ‘brahmadatta, brahmadattā’ti kandantī paridevatī’’ti. Taṃ sutvā manussā ‘‘brahmadatto nāma pañcālānaṃ rājā, so āyupariyosāne kālamakāsi, tassidaṃ āḷāhanaṃ, tassa ayaṃ aggamahesī ubbarī nāma ‘brahmadatta, brahmadattā’ti tassa nāmaṃ gahetvā kandantī paridevatī’’ti āhaṃsu. Tamatthaṃ dīpentā saṅgītikārā –

At that time, our Blessed One, the Bodhisatta, having gone forth into the ascetic life, having attained jhāna and supernormal powers, dwelling in a certain forest dwelling on the outskirts of the Himalayas, seeing Ubbarī, her heart pierced by the dart of sorrow, with His divine eye, coming through the sky, standing in the sky in visible form, asked the people standing there, "Whose charnel ground is this, and for whom is this woman weeping and lamenting, crying 'Brahmadatta, Brahmadatta'?" Hearing that, the people said, "Brahmadatta is the name of the king of the Pañcālas; he passed away at the end of his life; this is his charnel ground, and this, his chief queen named Ubbarī, crying 'Brahmadatta, Brahmadatta,' taking his name, is weeping and lamenting." The compilers of the songs, revealing that meaning, composed these verses:

368.

368.

‘‘Ahu rājā brahmadatto, pañcālānaṃ rathesabho;

"There was a king named Brahmadatta, the best of charioteers of the Pañcālas;
With the passing of days and nights, the king made his time."

369.

369.

‘‘Tassa āḷāhanaṃ gantvā, bhariyā kandati ubbari;

"Going to his charnel ground, his wife Ubbarī weeps;
Not seeing Brahmadatta, she weeps, 'Brahmadatta.'

370.

370.

‘‘Isi ca tattha āgacchi, sampannacaraṇo muni;

"And an ascetic came there, a sage perfected in conduct;
He asked those who were gathered there.

371.

371.

‘‘‘Kassa idaṃ āḷāhanaṃ, nānāgandhasameritaṃ;

"'Whose charnel ground is this, filled with various scents?
Whose wife is this weeping, for her husband gone far away?
Not seeing Brahmadatta, she weeps, 'Brahmadatta.'

372.

372.

‘‘Te ca tattha viyākaṃsu, ye tattha su samāgatā;

"Those who were gathered there explained;
'Of Brahmadatta, good sir, of Brahmadatta, noble sir.

373.

373.

‘‘Tassa idaṃ āḷāhanaṃ, nānāgandhasameritaṃ;

"'This charnel ground is his, filled with various scents;
This wife of his is weeping, for her husband gone far away;
Not seeing Brahmadatta, she weeps, 'Brahmadatta.'" - these six verses were established;

368-9.Tatthaahūti ahosi.Pañcālānanti pañcālaraṭṭhavāsīnaṃ, pañcālaraṭṭhasseva vā. Ekopi hi janapado janapadikānaṃ rājakumārānaṃ vasena ruḷhiyā ‘‘pañcālāna’’nti bahuvacanena niddisīyati.Rathesabhoti rathesu usabhasadiso, mahārathoti attho.Tassa āḷāhananti tassa rañño sarīrassa daḍḍhaṭṭhānaṃ.

368-9. There ahū means there was. Pañcālānaṃ means of the inhabitants of the Pañcāla country, or of the Pañcāla country itself. Even a single district is designated in the plural "of the Pañcālas" due to the convention of the princes of the district. Rathesabho means like a bull among chariots, a great charioteer, is the meaning. Tassa āḷāhanaṃ means the place where the body of that king was burned.

370.Isīti jhānādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ esanaṭṭhena isi.Tatthāti tasmiṃ ubbariyā ṭhitaṭṭhāne, susāneti attho.Āgacchīti agamāsi.Sampannacaraṇoti sīlasampadā, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, jāgariyānuyogo, saddhādayo satta saddhammā, cattāri rūpāvacarajhānānīti imehi pannarasahi caraṇasaṅkhātehi guṇehi sampanno samannāgato, caraṇasampannoti attho.Munīti attahitañca parahitañca munāti jānātīti muni.So ca tattha apucchitthāti so tasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhite jane paṭipucchi.Ye tattha su samāgatāti ye manussā tattha susāne samāgatā.ti nipātamattaṃ. ‘‘Ye tatthāsuṃ samāgatā’’ti vā pāṭho.Āsunti ahesunti attho.

370. Isī an ascetic because of seeking qualities such as jhāna. Tattha means in that place where Ubbarī was standing, the cemetery, is the meaning. Āgacchī means he went. Sampannacaraṇo means endowed with the fifteen qualities known as caraṇa: perfection of virtue (sīlasampadā), guarding the doors of the senses (indriyesu guttadvāratā), moderation in eating (bhojane mattaññutā), devotion to wakefulness (jāgariyānuyogo), the seven good qualities beginning with faith (saddhādayo satta saddhammā), and the four rūpāvacara-jhānas; possessed of caraṇa, is the meaning. Munī means one who knows (munāti) his own welfare and the welfare of others. So ca tattha apucchitthā means he asked the people standing in that place. Ye tattha su samāgatā means those people who were gathered in that cemetery. is merely a particle. Or the reading is "Ye tatthāsuṃ samāgatā." Āsuṃ means they were.

371.Nānāgandhasameritanti nānāvidhehi gandhehi samantato eritaṃ upavāsitaṃ.Itoti manussalokato.Dūragatanti paralokaṃ gatattā vadati.Brahmadattāti kandatīti brahmadattāti evaṃ nāmasaṃkittanaṃ katvā paridevanavasena avhāyati.

371. Nānāgandhasameritaṃ means completely filled with various scents, perfumed on all sides. Ito means from this human world. Dūragataṃ he speaks because he has gone to another world. Brahmadattāti kandati means invoking by way of lamentation, uttering his name thus: "Brahmadatta."

372-3.Brahmadattassa bhaddante, brahmadattassa mārisāti mārisa, nirāmayakāyacitta mahāmuni brahmadattassa rañño idaṃ āḷāhanaṃ, tasseva brahmadattassa rañño ayaṃ bhariyā, bhaddaṃ te tassa ca brahmadattassa bhaddaṃ hotu, tādisānaṃ mahesīnaṃ hitānucintanena paraloke ṭhitānampi hitasukhaṃ hotiyevāti adhippāyo.

372-3. Brahmadattassa bhaddante, brahmadattassa mārisā means noble sir, O great sage with a healthy body and mind, this charnel ground is of King Brahmadatta; this wife is of that same King Brahmadatta; may good befall you, and may good befall that Brahmadatta as well, the intention being that by contemplating the welfare of such queens, happiness and well-being may come even to those dwelling in the afterlife.

Atha so tāpaso tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā anukampaṃ upādāya ubbariyā santikaṃ gantvā tassā sokavinodanatthaṃ –

Then that ascetic, taking compassion, going to Ubbarī's presence, for the sake of dispelling her sorrow:

374.

374.

‘‘Chaḷāsītisahassāni, brahmadattassanāmakā;

"Eighty-six thousand, by the name of Brahmadatta;
Have been burned in this charnel ground; which of them do you grieve for?"

chaḷāsītisahassānīti chasahassādhikaasītisahassasaṅkhā.Brahmadattassanāmakāti brahmadattoti evaṃnāmakā.Tesaṃ kamanusocasīti tesaṃ chaḷāsītisahassasaṅkhātānaṃ brahmadattānaṃ katamaṃ brahmadattaṃ tvaṃ anusocasi, katamaṃ paṭicca te soko uppannoti pucchi.

Chaḷāsītisahassāni means eighty-six thousand. Brahmadattassanāmakā means those with the name Brahmadatta. Tesaṃ kamanusocasī means which of those eighty-six thousand Brahmadattas do you grieve for; concerning which one has your sorrow arisen, he asked.

Evaṃ pana tena isinā pucchitā ubbarī attanā adhippetaṃ brahmadattaṃ ācikkhantī –

Being thus asked by that ascetic, Ubbarī, declaring the Brahmadatta she intended:

375.

375.

‘‘Yo rājā cūḷanīputto, pañcālānaṃ rathesabho;

"The king, son of Cūḷanī, the best of charioteers of the Pañcālas;
Him, O venerable sir, I grieve for, my husband, the giver of all desires."

cūḷanīputtoti evaṃnāmassa rañño putto.Sabbakāmadanti mayhaṃ sabbassa icchiticchitassa dātāraṃ, sabbesaṃ vā sattānaṃ icchitadāyakaṃ.

Cūḷanīputto means the son of a king of that name. Sabbakāmadaṃ means the giver of all my desired wishes, or the giver of all desired things to all beings.

Evaṃ ubbariyā vutte puna tāpaso –

When Ubbarī had spoken thus, again the ascetic:

376.

376.

‘‘Sabbevāhesuṃ rājāno, brahmadattassanāmakā;

"All were kings, by the name of Brahmadatta;
All were sons of Cūḷanī, the best of charioteers of the Pañcālas.

377.

377.

‘‘Sabbesaṃ anupubbena, mahesittamakārayi;

"You were the chief queen of all in succession;
Why, having abandoned the former ones, do you grieve for the latter one?" - he spoke these two verses;

376.Tatthasabbevāhesunti sabbeva te chaḷāsītisahassasaṅkhā rājāno brahmadattassa nāmakā cūḷanīputtā pañcālānaṃ rathesabhāva ahesuṃ. Ime rājabhāvādayo visesā tesu ekassāpi nāhesuṃ.

376. There, sabbevāhesuṃ means all those eighty-six thousand kings were named Brahmadatta, were sons of Cūḷanī, and were the best of charioteers of the Pañcālas. These qualities of being a king, etc., did not belong to even one of them.

377.Mahesittamakārayīti tvañca tesaṃ sabbesampi anupubbena aggamahesibhāvaṃ akāsi, anuppattāti attho.Kasmāti guṇato ca sāmikabhāvato ca avisiṭṭhesu ettakesu janesu purimake rājāno pahāya pacchimaṃ ekaṃmeva kasmā kena kāraṇena anusocasīti pucchi.

377. Mahesittamakārayī means and you were the chief queen of all of them in succession, you attained that, is the meaning. Kasmā means among so many people who are not distinguished in terms of virtue or being a husband, why, for what reason, do you grieve for only the latter one, having abandoned the former kings, he asked.

Taṃ sutvā ubbarī saṃvegajātā puna tāpasaṃ –

Hearing that, Ubbarī, experiencing saṃvega, again said to the ascetic:

378.

378.

‘‘Ātume itthibhūtāya, dīgharattāya mārisa;

"Grief has come upon me, being a woman, for a long time, noble sir;
Because I am a woman, you speak much in saṃsāra."

ātumeti attani.Itthibhūtāyāti itthibhāvaṃ upagatāya.Dīgharattāyāti dīgharattaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – itthibhūtāya attani sabbakālaṃ itthīyeva hoti, udāhu purisabhāvampi upagacchatīti.Yassā me itthibhūtāyāti yassā mayhaṃ itthibhūtāya evaṃ tāva bahusaṃsāre mahesibhāvaṃ mahāmuni tvaṃ bhāsasi kathesīti attho. ‘‘Āhu me itthibhūtāyā’’ti vā pāṭho. Tatthaāti anussaraṇatthe nipāto.Āhu meti sayaṃ anussaritaṃ aññātamidaṃ mayā, itthibhūtāya itthibhāvaṃ upagatāya evaṃ mayhaṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ aparāparuppatti ahosi. Kasmā? Yasmā yassā me itthibhūtāya sabbesaṃ anupubbena mahesittamakārayi, kiṃ tvaṃ, mahāmuni, saṃsāre bahuṃ bhāsasīti yojanā.

Ātume means in myself. Itthibhūtāyā means having attained the state of a woman. Dīgharattāyā means for a long time. The meaning here is: "In my female existence, am I always only a woman, or do I sometimes attain the state of a man?" Yassā me itthibhūtāyā means: "Because of me, who has been a woman for so long, you, the great sage, speak of great authority in the extensive cycle of rebirths." Alternatively, there is the reading "Āhu me itthibhūtāyā." Here, ā is a particle used for recollection. Āhu me means: "This, uncomprehended by me, is now recollected: as a woman, having attained the state of a woman, such and such births occurred to me for so long. Why? Because of me, who as a woman, made the greatest authority of all in sequence. Why do you, great sage, speak so much of saṃsāra?" This is the construction.

Taṃ sutvā tāpaso ayaṃ niyamo saṃsāre natthi ‘‘itthī itthīyeva hoti, puriso puriso evā’’ti dassento –

Having heard this, the ascetic, showing that this rule does not exist in saṃsāra, "a woman is always a woman, a man is always a man," –

379.

379.

‘‘Ahu itthī ahu puriso, pasuyonimpi āgamā;

"She was a woman, she was a man, she went to the animal womb;
Thus it is with past existences, no end is seen."

ahu itthī ahu purisoti tvaṃ kadāci itthīpi ahosi, kadāci purisopi ahosi. Na kevalaṃ itthipurisabhāvameva, atha kho pasu yonimpi agamāsi, kadāci pasubhāvampi agamāsi, tiracchānayonimpi upagatā ahosi.Evametaṃ atītānaṃ, pariyanto na dissatīti evaṃ yathāvuttaṃ etaṃ itthibhāvaṃ purisabhāvaṃ tiracchānādibhāvañca upagatānaṃ atītānaṃ attabhāvānaṃ pariyanto ñāṇacakkhunā mahatā ussāhena passantānampi na dissati. Na kevalaṃ taveva, atha kho sabbesampi saṃsāre paribbhamantānaṃ sattānaṃ attabhāvassa pariyanto na dissateva na paññāyateva. Tenāha bhagavā –

Ahu itthī ahu puriso means you were sometimes a woman, sometimes a man. Not only the state of woman or man, but also pasu yonimpi āgamā means sometimes you went to the animal state, you attained the state of an animal, the womb of a beast. Evametaṃ atītānaṃ, pariyanto na dissatī means thus, as stated, for those who have attained this state of woman, state of man, state of animals, etc., no end is seen to past existences, even for those who see with the eye of wisdom and great effort. Not only for you, but for all beings wandering in saṃsāra, no end of existence is seen or known. Therefore, the Blessed One said:

‘‘Anamataggoyaṃ, bhikkhave, saṃsāro, pubbā koṭi na paññāyati avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ sattānaṃ taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarata’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.124).

"Without discoverable beginning is this saṃsāra, bhikkhus. The earliest point is not evident of beings obstructed by ignorance and fettered by craving, running on and wandering through (saṃ. ni. 2.124).

Evaṃ tena tāpasena saṃsārassa apariyantataṃ kammassakatañca vibhāventena desitaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā saṃsāre saṃviggahadayā dhamme ca pasannamānasā vigatasokasallā hutvā attano pasādaṃ sokavigamanañca pakāsentī –

Having heard the Dhamma thus spoken by that ascetic, explaining the endlessness of saṃsāra and that beings are owners of their karma, with hearts agitated by saṃsāra, minds pleased with the Dhamma, and free from sorrow and grief, revealing her joy and the removal of sorrow, she said –

380.

380.

‘‘Ādittaṃ vata maṃ santaṃ, ghatasittaṃva pāvakaṃ;

"Like a fire that was blazing, sprinkled with ghee,
You have quenched all my fear, as if with water.

381.

381.

‘‘Abbahī vata me sallaṃ, sokaṃ hadayanissitaṃ;

"You have drawn out my dart, the sorrow lodged in my heart;
You have driven away the grief of me afflicted by sorrow.

382.

382.

‘‘Sāhaṃ abbūḷhasallāsmi, sītibhūtāsmi nibbutā;

"I am one whose dart is drawn out, cooled, and extinguished;
I do not sorrow, nor do I weep, having heard you, great sage."

Tisso gāthā abhāsi. Tāsaṃ attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.

She spoke three verses. Their meaning has been stated below.

Idāni saṃviggahadayāya ubbariyā paṭipattiṃ dassento satthā –

Now, showing the practice of Ubbarī, whose heart was agitated, the Teacher said –

383.

383.

‘‘Tassa taṃ vacanaṃ sutvā, samaṇassa subhāsitaṃ;

"Having heard that word of the well-spoken ascetic,
Taking bowl and robe, she went forth into homelessness.

384.

384.

‘‘Sā ca pabbajitā santā, agārasmā anagāriyaṃ;

"And she, having gone forth, from household to homelessness,
Cultivated a mind of loving-kindness for rebirth in the Brahma-world.

385.

385.

‘‘Gāmā gāmaṃ vicarantī, nigame rājadhāniyo;

"Wandering from village to village, to market towns and royal cities,
There was a village named Uruveḷā, where she made her end of life.

386.

386.

‘‘Mettacittaṃ ābhāvetvā, brahmalokūpapattiyā;

"Having cultivated a mind of loving-kindness for rebirth in the Brahma-world,
Having eradicated the mind attached to femaleness, she went to the Brahma-world." – He spoke four verses;

383-4.Tatthatassāti tassa tāpasassa.Subhāsitanti suṭṭhu bhāsitaṃ, dhammanti attho.Pabbajitā santāti pabbajjaṃ upagatā samānā, pabbajitvā vā hutvā santakāyavācā.Mettacittanti mettāsahagataṃ cittaṃ. Cittasīsena mettajjhānaṃ vadati.Brahmalokūpapattiyāti tañca sā mettacittaṃ bhāventī brahmalokūpapattiyā abhāvesi, na vipassanāpādakādiatthaṃ. Anuppanne hi buddhe brahmavihārādike bhāventā tāpasaparibbājakā yāvadeva bhavasampattiatthameva bhāvesuṃ.

383-4. There, tassa means of that ascetic. Subhāsitaṃ means well-spoken, meaning Dhamma. Pabbajitā santā means having gone forth, being peaceful in body and speech, or having gone forth and being peaceful. Mettacittaṃ means a mind accompanied by loving-kindness. Mettā-jhāna is spoken of in terms of the head of the mind. Brahmalokūpapattiyā means she cultivated that mind of loving-kindness for rebirth in the Brahma-world, not for the purpose of insight, etc. For, when Buddhas have not arisen, ascetics and wanderers cultivate the Brahma-vihāras and the like only for the sake of attaining existence.

385-6.Gāmāgāmanti gāmato aññaṃ gāmaṃ.Ābhāvetvāti vaḍḍhetvā brūhetvā.‘‘Abhāvetvā’’ti keci paṭhanti, tesaṃ a-kāro nipātamattaṃ.Itthicittaṃ virājetvāti itthibhāve cittaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ abhiruciṃ virājetvā itthibhāve virattacittā hutvā.Brahmalokūpagāti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena brahmalokaṃ upagamanakā ahosi. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānameva.

385-6. Gāmā gāmaṃ means from one village to another village. Ābhāvetvā means having increased, having expanded. Some read "abhāvetvā", for them, the a- is merely a particle. Itthicittaṃ virājetvā means having eradicated the mind, inclination, and desire in the state of woman, having a mind detached from the state of woman. Brahmalokūpagā means she was one who went to the Brahma-world by way of rebirth. The rest is easy to understand, as the meaning has been stated below.

Satthā imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ āharitvā tassā upāsikāya sokaṃ vinodetvā upari catusaccadesanaṃ akāsi. Saccapariyosāne sā upāsikā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Sampattaparisāya ca desanā sātthikā ahosīti.

Having brought forth this Dhamma teaching, the Teacher dispelled the grief of that female lay follower and then taught the Four Noble Truths. At the end of the Truths, that female lay follower was established in the fruit of Stream-entry. And the teaching was fruitful for the assembled gathering.

Ubbaripetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Ubbarī Petavatthu is finished.

Iti khuddaka-aṭṭhakathāya petavatthusmiṃ

Thus, in the Khuddaka Commentary, in the Petavatthu,

Terasavatthupaṭimaṇḍitassa

the meaning commentary on the thirteen-story

Dutiyassa ubbarivaggassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

second Ubbarī Vagga is finished.

3. Cūḷavaggo

3. Cūḷavaggo

1. Abhijjamānapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
1. Abhijjamānapetavatthuvaṇṇanā

Abhijjamānevārimhīti idaṃ satthari veḷuvane viharante aññataraṃ luddapetaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Bārāṇasiyaṃ kira aparadisābhāge pāragaṅgāya vāsabhagāmaṃ atikkamitvā cundaṭṭhilanāmake gāme eko luddako ahosi. So araññe mige vadhitvā varamaṃsaṃ aṅgāre pacitvā khāditvā avasesaṃ paṇṇapuṭe bandhitvā kājena gahetvā gāmaṃ āgacchati. Taṃ bāladārakā gāmadvāre disvā ‘‘maṃsaṃ me dehi, maṃsaṃ me dehī’’ti hatthe pasāretvā upadhāvanti. So tesaṃ thokaṃ thokaṃ maṃsaṃ deti. Athekadivasaṃ maṃsaṃ alabhitvā uddālakapupphaṃ piḷandhitvā bahuñca hatthena gahetvā gāmaṃ gacchantaṃ taṃ dārakā gāmadvāre disvā ‘‘maṃsaṃ me dehi, maṃsaṃ me dehī’’ti hatthe pasāretvā upadhāviṃsu. So tesaṃ ekekaṃ pupphamañjariṃ adāsi.

Abhijjamāne vārimhī this was said by the Teacher while dwelling at the Veḷuvana, concerning a certain greedy ghost (peta) who was a hunter. It is said that in Bārāṇasī, in the Aparadisā region, past Vāsabhagāma on the other side of the Ganges, there was a hunter in a village named Cundaṭṭhila. He would kill deer in the forest, cook the best meat on coals, eat it, and tie the rest in a leaf-packet, take it on a pole and come to the village. Seeing him at the village gate, the young children would run up, stretching out their hands, saying, "Give me meat, give me meat." He would give them a little meat. Then one day, not getting meat, adorning themselves with uddālaka flowers, taking many in their hands, they went to the village. Seeing him at the village gate, the children ran up, stretching out their hands, saying, "Give me meat, give me meat." He gave them each a cluster of flowers.

Atha aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā petesu nibbatto naggo virūparūpo bhayānakadassano supinepi annapānaṃ ajānanto sīse ābandhitauddālakakusumamālākalāpo ‘‘cundaṭṭhilāyaṃ ñātakānaṃ santike kiñci labhissāmī’’ti gaṅgāya udake abhijjamāne paṭisotaṃ padasā gacchati. Tena ca samayena koliyo nāma rañño bimbisārassa mahāmatto kupitaṃ paccantaṃ vūpasametvā paṭinivattento hatthiassādiparivārabalaṃ thalapathena pesetvā sayaṃ gaṅgāya nadiyā anusotaṃ nāvāya āgacchanto taṃ petaṃ tathā gacchantaṃ disvā pucchanto –

Then at another time, having died and been reborn among the petas, naked, deformed, frightening to behold, not knowing food or drink even in dreams, with a garland of uddālaka flowers tied on his head, thinking, "I will get something near my relatives in Cundaṭṭhila," he went upstream on foot while the Ganges water was breaking up. At that time, Koliyo, the great minister of King Bimbisāra, having pacified a rebelling frontier region, returning, sending the retinue of elephants, horses, etc. by land, himself coming in a boat downstream on the Ganges River, seeing that peta going in that way, asking –

387.

387.

‘‘Abhijjamāne vārimhi, gaṅgāya idha gacchasi;

"In the water being broken up, you go here on the Ganges;
Naked, like a ghost with a divided body, adorned with garlands;
Where will you go, ghost? Where will your dwelling be?"

abhijjamāneti padanikkhepena abhijjamāne saṅghāte,vārimhi gaṅgāyāti gaṅgāya nadiyā udake.Idhāti imasmiṃ ṭhāne.Pubbaddhapetovāti kāyassa purimaddhena apeto viya apetayoniko devaputto viya. Kathaṃ?Māladhārī alaṅkatoti, mālāhi piḷandhitvā alaṅkatasīsaggoti attho.Kattha vāso bhavissatīti katarasmiṃ gāme dese vā tuyhaṃ nivāso bhavissati, taṃ kathehīti attho.

Abhijjamāne means being broken up by the placing of the feet, by the impact; vārimhi gaṅgāyā means in the water of the Ganges River. Idhā means in this place. Pubbaddhapetovā means as if divided from the first half of the body, like a departed spirit, like a deva-son who has passed away. How? Māladhārī alaṅkato, meaning his head is adorned with garlands. Kattha vāso bhavissatī means in which village or country will your dwelling be? Tell me that.

Idāni yaṃ tadā tena petena koliyena ca vuttaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ saṅgītikārā –

Now, to show what was said then by that peta and by Koliyo, the compilers of the Saṅgīti –

388.

388.

‘‘Cundaṭṭhilaṃ gamissāmi, peto so iti bhāsati;

"I will go to Cundaṭṭhila," so the ghost said;
"It is between Vāsabhagāma and near Bārāṇasī."

389.

389.

‘‘Tañca disvā mahāmatto, koliyo iti vissuto;

"Having seen him, the great minister, Koliyo, well-known,
Gave parched grain and rice to the ghost, and a pair of yellow cloths.

390.

390.

‘‘Nāvāya tiṭṭhamānāya, kappakassa adāpayi;

"While standing in the boat, he had it given to the barber;
When it was given to the barber, it appeared on the ghost in that place.

391.

391.

‘‘Tato suvatthavasano, māladhārī alaṅkato;

"Then, clothed in fine garments, adorned with garlands,
Merit was provided for the ghost standing in that place;
Therefore, one should give to the ghosts, again and again, out of compassion." – they spoke the verses;

388.Tatthacundaṭṭhilanti evaṃnāmakaṃ gāmaṃ.Antare vāsabhagāmaṃ, bārāṇasiñca santiketi vāsabhagāmassa ca bārāṇasiyā ca vemajjhe. Antarā-saddayogena hetaṃ sāmyatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Bārāṇasiyā santike hi so gāmoti. Ayañhettha attho – antare vāsabhagāmassa ca bārāṇasiyā ca yo cundaṭṭhilanāmako gāmo bārāṇasiyā avidūre, taṃ gāmaṃ gamissāmīti.

388. There, cundaṭṭhilaṃ means to a village of that name. Antare vāsabhagāmaṃ, bārāṇasiñca santike means between Vāsabhagāma and near Bārāṇasī. This is a use of words expressing similarity due to the connection with the word antarā (between). For that village is near Bārāṇasī. The meaning here is: "I will go to that village named Cundaṭṭhila, which is between Vāsabhagāma and Bārāṇasī, not far from Bārāṇasī."

389.Koliyo iti vissutoti koliyoti evaṃpakāsitanāmo.Sattuṃ bhattañcāti sattuñceva bhattañca.Pītakañca yugaṃ adāti pītakaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ ekaṃ vatthayugañca adāsi.

389. Koliyo iti vissuto means Koliyo, whose name was thus proclaimed. Sattuṃ bhattañcā means both parched grain and rice. Pītakañca yugaṃ adā means he also gave a pair of yellow-colored, golden-colored cloths.

390.Kadā adāsīti ce āhanāvāya tiṭṭhamānāya. Kappakassa adāpayīti gacchantiṃ nāvaṃ ṭhapetvā tattha ekassa nhāpitassa upāsakassa dāpesi, dinnamhi vatthayugeti yojanā.Ṭhāneti ṭhānaso taṅkhaṇaññeva.Petassa dissathāti petassa sarīre paññāyittha, tassa nivāsanapārupanavatthaṃ sampajji. Tenāha‘‘tato suvatthavasano, māladhārī alaṅkato’’ti, suvatthavasano mālābharaṇehi sumaṇḍitapasādhito.Ṭhāne ṭhitassa petassa, dakkhiṇā upakappathāti dakkhiṇeyyaṭṭhāne ṭhitā panesā dakkhiṇā tassa petassa yasmā upakappati, viniyogaṃ agamāsi.Tasmā dajjetha petānaṃ, anukampāya punappunanti petānaṃ anukampāya pete uddissa punappunaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ dadeyyāti attho.

390. When did he give it? He says nāvāya tiṭṭhamānāya. Kappakassa adāpayī means having stopped the boat that was going, he had it given to a barber there, a lay follower, the meaning is "when a pair of cloths was given". Ṭhāne means immediately in that very place. Petassa dissathā means it appeared on the body of the peta, it became a garment to wear. Therefore he said ‘‘tato suvatthavasano, māladhārī alaṅkato’’, clothed in fine garments, well-adorned with garlands and ornaments. Ṭhāne ṭhitassa petassa, dakkhiṇā upakappathā means because this offering (dakkhiṇā) stands in a worthy place, it benefits that peta, it went to its use. Tasmā dajjetha petānaṃ, anukampāya punappunanti means one should give offerings again and again to the petas, out of compassion for the petas.

Atha so koliyamahāmatto taṃ petaṃ anukampamāno dānavidhiṃ sampādetvā anusotaṃ āgantvā sūriye uggacchante bārāṇasiṃ sampāpuṇi. Bhagavā ca tesaṃ anuggahatthaṃ ākāsena āgantvā gaṅgātīre aṭṭhāsi. Koliyamahāmattopi nāvāto otaritvā haṭṭhapahaṭṭho bhagavantaṃ nimantesi – ‘‘adhivāsetha me, bhante, bhagavā ajjatanāya bhattaṃ anukampaṃ upādāyā’’ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena. So bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ viditvā tāvadeva ramaṇīye bhūmibhāge mahantaṃ sākhāmaṇḍapaṃ upari catūsu ca passesu nānāvirāgavaṇṇavicittavividhavasanasamalaṅkataṃ kāretvā tattha bhagavato āsanaṃ paññāpetvā adāsi. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane.

Then that great minister Koliyo, showing compassion for that peta, having completed the method of giving, coming downstream, reached Bārāṇasī as the sun was rising. The Blessed One, in order to favor them, came through the air and stood on the bank of the Ganges. The great minister Koliyo too, getting out of the boat, delighted and joyful, invited the Blessed One, "May the Blessed One accept my meal for today, out of compassion." The Blessed One accepted by remaining silent. Knowing the Blessed One's acceptance, he immediately had a large pavilion of branches made in a delightful place, decorated above and on all four sides with various cloths of different colors and designs, and there he prepared and gave a seat for the Blessed One. The Blessed One sat down on the prepared seat.

Atha so mahāmatto bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā gandhapupphādīhi pūjetvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisinno heṭṭhā attano vuttavacanaṃ petassa ca paṭivacanaṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā ‘‘bhikkhusaṅgho āgacchatū’’ti cintesi. Cintitasamanantarameva buddhānubhāvasañcodito suvaṇṇahaṃsagaṇo viya dhataraṭṭhahaṃsarājaṃ bhikkhusaṅgho dhammarājaṃ samparivāresi. Tāvadeva mahājano sannipati ‘‘uḷārā dhammadesanā bhavissatī’’ti. Taṃ disvā pasannamānaso mahāmatto buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena santappesi. Bhagavā katabhattakicco mahājanassa anukampāya ‘‘bārāṇasisamīpagāmavāsino sannipatantū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Sabbe ca te iddhibalena mahājanā sannipatiṃsu, uḷāre cassa pete pākaṭe akāsi. Tesu keci chinnabhinnapilotikakhaṇḍadharā, keci attano keseheva paṭicchāditakopinā, keci naggā yathājātarūpā khuppipāsābhibhūtā tacapariyonaddhā aṭṭhimattasarīrā ito cito ca paribbhamantā mahājanassa paccakkhato paññāyiṃsu.

Then that great minister, approaching the Blessed One, honoring and venerating him with perfumes, flowers, etc., sat down to one side and reported to the Blessed One what he had said below and the peta's reply. The Blessed One thought, "Let the community of bhikkhus come." As soon as he thought this, impelled by the Buddha's power, the community of bhikkhus, like a flock of golden geese, surrounded the King of the Dhamma, the Dhamma-king. Immediately, a great crowd gathered, "There will be a sublime Dhamma talk." Seeing this, with a pleased mind, the great minister satisfied the community of bhikkhus, with the Buddha at its head, with delicious foods, hard and soft. The Blessed One, having finished his meal, desiring to show favor to the great crowd, resolved, "Let the inhabitants of the villages near Bārāṇasī assemble." And by the power of his iddhi, all those people assembled, and he made the extraordinary petas visible to them. Some of them wore torn and tattered rags, some covered their private parts with their own hair, some were naked as they were born, overcome by hunger and thirst, with bodies consisting of skin and bones, wandering here and there, they appeared to the great crowd visibly.

Atha bhagavā tathārūpaṃ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkhāsi, yathā te ekajjhaṃ sannipatitvā attanā kataṃ pāpakammaṃ mahājanassa pavedesuṃ. Tamatthaṃ dīpentā saṅgītikārā –

Then the Blessed One performed such a transformation by iddhi that they assembled in one place and declared to the great crowd the evil deeds they had done themselves. The compilers of the Saṅgīti, revealing that meaning –

392.

392.

‘‘Sātunnavasanā eke, aññe kesanivāsanā;

"Some are clothed in rags, others in hair;
Ghosts go for food, they depart in all directions.

393.

393.

‘‘Dūre eke padhāvitvā, aladdhāva nivattare;

"Some run far away, only to return without having obtained anything;
Hungry, faint, and terrified, they collapse upon the ground.

394.

394.

‘‘Keci tattha papatitvā, bhūmiyaṃ paṭisumbhitā;

"Some, falling there, collapse upon the ground;
Having done no good deeds in the past, they are scorched by the heat as if burned by fire.

395.

395.

‘‘Mayaṃ pubbe pāpadhammā, gharaṇī kulamātaro;

"We, in the past, were of evil tendencies, mistresses and mothers of families;
When there were gifts to be given, we did not make a lamp for ourselves.

396.

396.

‘‘Pahūtaṃ annapānampi, apissu avakirīyati;

"Even abundant food and drink were scattered away;
To those gone forth on the right path, we gave nothing at all.

397.

397.

‘‘Akammakāmā alasā, sādukāmā mahagghasā;

"Desiring inaction, lazy, fond of sweets, and gluttonous;
We reviled those who gave morsels of food and those who received it.

398.

398.

‘‘Te gharā tā ca dāsiyo, tānevābharaṇāni no;

"Those houses, those female slaves, and those ornaments of ours;
Others now use them, while we are the recipients of suffering.

399.

399.

‘‘Veṇī vā avaññā honti, rathakārī ca dubbhikā;

"Those of the Veṇī caste are despised, and the chariot-makers are treacherous;
The Caṇḍālī are wretched, and the barbers repeatedly so.

400.

400.

‘‘Yāni yāni nihīnāni, kulāni kapaṇāni ca;

"Whatever families are low and wretched;
In those very families they are born, such is the fate of the miserly.

401.

401.

‘‘Pubbe ca katakalyāṇā, dāyakā vītamaccharā;

"Those who did good deeds in the past, givers without miserliness;
They fill heaven and illuminate Nandana.

402.

402.

‘‘Vejayante ca pāsāde, ramitvā kāmakāmino;

"Sporting in the Vejayanta palace, enjoying sensual pleasures as they wish;
They are born in high families, abounding in wealth, after passing away from there.

403.

403.

‘‘Kūṭāgāre ca pāsāde, pallaṅke ponakatthate;

"In storied mansions and palaces, on couches covered with fine blankets;
Their bodies fanned by peacock-feather fans, born in families of renown.

404.

404.

‘‘Aṅkato aṅkaṃ gacchanti, māladhārī alaṅkatā;

"From lap to lap they go, wearing garlands and adorned;
Nurses attend to them, seeking their pleasure morning and evening.

405.

405.

‘‘Nayidaṃ akatapuññānaṃ, katapuññānamevidaṃ;

"This is not for those who have not done merit, this is for those who have done merit;
Asoka, Nandana, delightful, the great forest of the Tāvatiṃsa gods.

406.

406.

‘‘Sukhaṃ akatapuññānaṃ, idha natthi parattha ca;

"There is no happiness for those who have not done merit, neither here nor hereafter;
But there is happiness for those who have done merit, both here and hereafter.

407.

407.

‘‘Tesaṃ sahabyakāmānaṃ, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahuṃ;

"For those who desire companionship with them, much merit should be done;
For those who have done merit rejoice, endowed with pleasures in heaven," thus they spoke these verses;

392.Tatthasātunnavasanāti chinnabhinnapilotikakhaṇḍanivāsanā.Eketi ekacce.Kesanivāsanāti keseheva paṭicchāditakopinā.Bhattāya gacchantīti ‘‘appeva nāma ito gatā yattha vā tattha vā kiñci ucchiṭṭhabhattaṃ vā vamitabhattaṃ vā gabbhamalādikaṃ vā labheyyāmā’’ti katthacideva aṭṭhatvā ghāsatthāya gacchanti.Pakkamanti disodisanti disato disaṃ anekayojanantarikaṃ ṭhānaṃ pakkamanti.

392. Therein, sātunnavasanā means wearing torn, tattered, and patched rags. Eke means some. Kesanivāsanā means having a loincloth covered only with hair. Bhattāya gacchantī means going for alms, thinking, "Perhaps, having gone here or there, we might obtain some leftover food, vomit-food, or fetal filth." They do not stay anywhere, but go for food. Pakkamanti disodisa means they depart from one direction to another, to a place many yojanas away.

393.Dūreti dūreva ṭhāne.Eketi ekacce petā.Padhāvitvāti ghāsatthāya upadhāvitvā.Aladdhāva nivattareti kiñci ghāsaṃ vā pānīyaṃ vā alabhitvā eva nivattanti.Pamucchitāti khuppipāsādidukkhena sañjātamucchā.Bhantāti paribbhamantā.Bhūmiyaṃ paṭisumbhitāti tāya eva mucchāya uppattiyā ṭhatvā avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍā viya vissussitvā pathaviyaṃ patitā.

393. Dūre means in a distant place. Eke means some departed spirits. Padhāvitvā means having run for food. Aladdhāva nivattare means they return without obtaining any food or drink. Pamucchitā means fainting due to the suffering of hunger, thirst, etc. Bhantā means wandering around. Bhūmiyaṃ paṭisumbhitā means having arisen in that very faint, they collapse on the ground, drying up like lumps of clay thrown away.

394.Tatthāti gataṭṭhāne.Bhūmiyaṃ paṭisumbhitāti papāte patitā viya jighacchādidukkhena ṭhātuṃ asamatthabhāvena bhūmiyaṃ patitā, tattha vā gataṭṭhāne ghāsādīnaṃ alābhena chinnāsā hutvā kenaci paṭimukhaṃ sumbhitā pothitā viya bhūmiyaṃ patitā hontīti attho.Pubbe akatakalyāṇāti purimabhave akatakusalā.Aggidaḍḍhāva ātapeti nidāghakāle ātapaṭṭhāne agginā daḍḍhā viya, khuppipāsagginā ḍayhamānā mahādukkhaṃ anubhavantīti attho.

394. Tattha means in that place to which they have gone. Bhūmiyaṃ paṭisumbhitā means having fallen to the ground, like those who have fallen from a precipice, unable to stand due to the suffering of hunger, etc.; or, in that place to which they have gone, having lost hope due to the lack of food, etc., they fall to the ground as if struck in the face and crushed by someone turning against them; this is the meaning. Pubbe akatakalyāṇā means not having done good deeds in a previous existence. Aggidaḍḍhāva ātape means like those burned by fire in a hot place during the summer season, experiencing great suffering while being burned by the fire of hunger and thirst; this is the meaning.

395.Pubbeti atītabhave.Pāpadhammāti issukīmaccharīādibhāvena lāmakasabhāvā.Gharaṇīti gharasāminiyo.Kulamātaroti kuladārakānaṃ mātaro, kulapurisānaṃ vā mātaro.Dīpanti patiṭṭhaṃ, puññanti attho. Tañhi sattānaṃ sugatīsu patiṭṭhābhāvato ‘‘patiṭṭhā’’ti vuccati.Nākamhāti na karimha.

395. Pubbe means in a past existence. Pāpadhammā means having a base nature due to envy, miserliness, etc. Gharaṇī means mistresses of the house. Kulamātaro means mothers of families, or mothers of clansmen. Dīpaṃ means a support, meaning merit. For it is called "support" because it is the basis for beings in happy destinations. Nākamhā means we did not do.

396.Pahūtanti bahuṃ.Annapānampīti annañca pānañca.Apissu avakirīyatītiti nipātamattaṃ, api avakirīyati chaṭṭīyati.Sammaggateti sammā gate sammā paṭipanne sammā paṭipannāya.Pabbajiteti pabbajitāya. Sampadāne hi idaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Sammaggate vā pabbajite sati labbhamāneti attho.Na ca kiñci adamhaseti ‘‘kiñcimattampi deyyadhammaṃ nādamhā’’ti vippaṭisārābhibhūtā vadanti.

396. Pahūtaṃ means abundant. Annapānampī means both food and drink. Apissu avakirīyatī here, is merely an expletive, api avakirīyati means it is scattered and thrown away. Sammaggate means to one who has gone rightly, who has practiced rightly. Pabbajite means to one who has gone forth. This is a plural locative in the sense of the dative. Or, it means when a sammaggata or pabbajita is available. Na ca kiñci adamhase means, overwhelmed by remorse, they say, "We gave not even a little gift."

397.Akammakāmāti sādhūti akattabbaṃ kammaṃ akusalaṃ kāmentīti akammakāmā, sādhūhi vā kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ kāmentīti kammakāmā, na kammakāmāti akammakāmā, kusaladhammesu acchandikāti attho.Alasāti kusītā kusalakammakaraṇe nibbīriyā.Sādukāmāti sātamadhuravatthupiyā.Mahagghasāti mahābhojanā, ubhayenāpi sundarañca madhurañca bhojanaṃ labhitvā atthikānaṃ kiñci adatvā sayameva bhuñjitāroti dasseti.Ālopapiṇḍadātāroti ālopamattassapi bhojanapiṇḍassa dāyakā.Paṭiggaheti tassa paṭiggaṇhanake.Paribhāsimhaseti paribhavaṃ karontā bhāsimha, avamaññimha uppaṇḍimhā cāti attho.

397. Akammakāmā means desiring unwholesome deeds that should not be done, or desiring wholesome deeds that should be done; thus, being averse to wholesome qualities is the meaning. Alasā means lazy, without energy to do wholesome deeds. Sādukāmā means fond of sweet and pleasant things. Mahagghasā means gluttonous, showing that they themselves would eat beautiful and sweet food without giving anything to those in need. Ālopapiṇḍadātāro means givers of even a morsel of food. Paṭiggahe means to the receiver of that. Paribhāsimhase means we spoke with contempt, we disdained and mocked them, is the meaning.

398.Te gharāti yattha mayaṃ pubbe ‘‘amhākaṃ ghara’’nti mamattaṃ akarimhā, tāni gharāni yathāṭhitāni, idāni no na kiñci upakappatīti adhippāyo.Tā ca dāsiyo tānevābharaṇāni noti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tatthanoti amhākaṃ.Teti te gharādike.Aññe paricārenti, paribhogādivasena viniyogaṃ karontīti attho.Mayaṃ dukkhassa bhāginoti mayaṃ pana pubbe kevalaṃ kīḷanappasutā hutvā sāpateyyaṃ pahāya gamanīyaṃ anugāmikaṃ kātuṃ ajānantā idāni khuppipāsādidukkhassa bhāgino bhavāmāti attānaṃ garahantā vadanti.

398. Te gharā means those houses in which we formerly had a sense of "mine," thinking "these are our houses;" those houses remain as they were, but now they are of no use to us, is the idea. Tā ca dāsiyo tānevābharaṇāni no the same method applies here as well. Therein, no means ours. Te means those houses, etc. Aññe paricārenti means others make use of them, utilizing them for enjoyment, etc., is the meaning. Mayaṃ dukkhassa bhāgino means we, however, having previously been solely devoted to play and not knowing how to relinquish our possessions and make them something that follows us, are now recipients of the suffering of hunger, thirst, etc., thus they say, reproaching themselves.

399.Idāni yasmā petayonito cavitvā manussesu uppajjantāpi sattā yebhuyyena tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesena hīnajātikā kapaṇavuttinova honti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘veṇivā’’tiādinā dve gāthā vuttā. Tatthaveṇivāti venajātikā, vilīvakārā naḷakārā hontīti attho.-saddo aniyamattho.Avaññāti avaññeyyā, avajānitabbāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Vambhanā’’ti vā pāṭho, parehi bādhanīyāti attho.Rathakārīti cammakārino.Dubbhikāti mittadubbhikā mittānaṃ bādhikā.Caṇḍālīti caṇḍālajātikā.Kapaṇāti vanibbakā ativiya kāruññappattā.Kappakāti kappakajātikā, sabbattha ‘‘honti punappuna’’nti yojanā, aparāparampi imesu nihīnakulesu uppajjantīti vuttaṃ hoti.

399. Now, to show that even those beings who, having passed away from the realm of departed spirits and being reborn among humans, mostly have a low birth and a wretched existence due to the remaining result of that same karma, therefore, two verses beginning with "veṇivā" have been stated. Therein, veṇivā means those of the Veṇī caste, basket weavers and reed workers, is the meaning. The word is used to indicate uncertainty. Avaññā means despicable, to be disdained, it is said. Alternatively, the reading is "vambhanā," meaning liable to be oppressed by others. Rathakārī means leather workers. Dubbhikā means treacherous friends, harming friends. Caṇḍālī means those of the Caṇḍāla caste. Kapaṇā means beggars, extremely pitiable. Kappakā means those of the barber caste; in all cases, the phrase "honti punappuna" should be applied, meaning they are repeatedly born in these low families again and again, it is said.

400.Tesu tesveva jāyantīti yāni yāni aññānipi nesādapukkusakulādīni kapaṇāni ativiya vambhaniyāni paramaduggatāni ca, tesu tesu eva nihīnakulesu macchariyamalena petesu nibbattitvā tato cutā nibbattanti. Tenāha‘‘esā maccharino gatī’’ti.

400. Tesu tesveva jāyantī means in whatever other low families there are, such as those of hunters and Pukkusas, which are wretched, extremely liable to oppression, and utterly destitute, in those very low families they are born, having passed away from the realm of departed spirits due to the stain of miserliness. Therefore, he said, "esā maccharino gatī" (this is the fate of the miserly).

401.Evaṃ akatapuññānaṃ sattānaṃ gatiṃ dassetvā idāni katapuññānaṃ gatiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pubbe ca katakalyāṇā’’ti satta gāthā vuttā. Tatthasaggaṃ te paripūrentīti ye pubbe purimajātiyaṃ katakalyāṇā dāyakā dānapuññābhiratā vigatamalamaccherā, te attano rūpasampattiyā ceva parivārasampattiyā ca saggaṃ devalokaṃ paripūrenti paripuṇṇaṃ karonti.Obhāsenti ca nandananti na kevalaṃ paripūrentiyeva, atha kho kapparukkhādīnaṃ pabhāhi sabhāveneva obhāsamānampi nandanavanaṃ attano vatthābharaṇajutīhi sarīrappabhāya ca abhibhavitvā ceva obhāsetvā ca jotenti.

401. Having thus shown the fate of beings who have not done merit, now, to show the fate of those who have done merit, seven verses beginning with "pubbe ca katakalyāṇā" have been stated. Therein, saggaṃ te paripūrentī means those who in a former birth did good deeds, givers delighting in meritorious giving, free from the stain of miserliness, they fill heaven, the world of the gods, with their own beauty and retinue. Obhāsenti ca nandanaṃ means not only do they fill it, but they also illuminate Nandana Grove, which is naturally radiant with the light of the wish-fulfilling trees and the like, surpassing and illuminating it with the splendor of their clothes, ornaments, and bodily radiance.

402.Kāmakāminoti yathicchitesu kāmaguṇesu yathākāmaṃ paribhogavanto.Uccākulesūti uccesu khattiyakulādīsu kulesu.Sabhogesūti mahāvibhavesu.Tato cutāti tato devalokato cutā.

402. Kāmakāmino means enjoying sensual pleasures as they wish, having complete enjoyment in the desired sense qualities. Uccākulesū means in high families, such as families of Khattiyas, etc. Sabhogesū means abounding in great wealth. Tato cutā means having passed away from that world of the gods.

403.Kūṭāgāreca pāsādeti kūṭāgāre ca pāsāde ca.Bījitaṅgāti bījiyamānadehā.Morahatthehīti morapiñchapaṭimaṇḍitabījanīhatthehi.Yasassinoti parivāravanto ramantīti adhippāyo.

403. Kūṭāgāre ca pāsāde means in storied mansions and palaces. Bījitaṅgā means having their bodies fanned. Morahatthehī means with hands holding fans adorned with peacock feathers. Yasassino means renowned, enjoying themselves with a retinue, is the idea.

404.Aṅkato aṅkaṃ gacchantīti dārakakālepi ñātīnaṃ dhātīnañca aṅkaṭṭhānato aṅkaṭṭhānameva gacchanti, na bhūmitalanti adhippāyo.Upatiṭṭhantīti upaṭṭhānaṃ karonti.Sukhesinoti sukhamicchantā, ‘‘mā sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā’’ti appakampi dukkhaṃ pariharantā upatiṭṭhantīti adhippāyo.

404. Aṅkato aṅkaṃ gacchantī means even in childhood, they go only from the lap of relatives and nurses to another lap, not to the ground, is the idea. Upatiṭṭhantī means they attend to. Sukhesino means desiring their happiness, attending to them, avoiding even the slightest discomfort, thinking, "lest they feel cold or hot," is the idea.

405.Nayidaṃ akatapuññānanti idaṃ sokavatthuabhāvato asokaṃ rammaṃ ramaṇīyaṃ tidasānaṃ tāvatiṃsadevānaṃmahāvanaṃmahāupavanabhūtaṃnandanaṃnandanavanaṃ akatapuññānaṃ na hoti, tehi laddhuṃ na sakkāti attho.

405. Nayidaṃ akatapuññānaṃ means this Nandana Grove, which is free from any cause of sorrow, delightful, lovely, and is the mahāvanaṃ (great forest), the great pleasure grove of the Tāvatiṃsa gods, is not for those who have not done merit; it is not possible for them to obtain it, is the meaning.

406.Idhāti imasmiṃ manussaloke visesato puññaṃ karīyati, taṃ sandhāyāha.Idhāti vā diṭṭhadhamme.Paratthāti samparāye.

406. Idhā means in this human world, merit is especially performed; referring to that, he said idhā, or in this very life. Parattha means in the next life.

407.Tesanti tehi yathāvuttehi devehi.Sahabyakāmānanti sahabhāvaṃ icchantehi.Bhogasamaṅginoti bhogehi samannāgatā, dibbehi pañcakāmaguṇehi samappitā modantīti attho. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.

407. Tesaṃ means by those gods as described. Sahabyakāmānaṃ means those who desire companionship. Bhogasamaṅgino means endowed with pleasures, endowed with divine five sense qualities, they rejoice, is the meaning. The rest is easy to understand.

Evaṃ tehi petehi sādhāraṇato attanā katakammassa ca gatiyā puññakammassa ca gatiyā paveditāya saṃviggamanassa koḷiyāmaccapamukhassa tattha sannipatitassa mahājanassa ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ bhagavā vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi. Desanāpariyosāne caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.

Thus, with the common declaration by those departed spirits of the fate of their own deeds and of the fate of meritorious deeds, the Blessed One extensively taught the Dhamma in accordance with the inclinations of the great crowd gathered there, headed by Koḷiya, the minister, who were stirred with emotion. At the end of the discourse, a realization of the Dhamma arose in eighty-four thousand beings.

Abhijjamānapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Abhijjamāna Petavatthu is finished.

2. Sāṇavāsittherapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Sāṇavāsī Thera Petavatthu

Kuṇḍināgariyo theroti idaṃ satthari veḷuvane viharante āyasmato sāṇavāsittherassa ñātipete ārabbha vuttaṃ. Atīte kira bārāṇasiyaṃ kitavassa nāma rañño putto uyyānakīḷaṃ kīḷitvā nivattanto sunettaṃ nāma paccekabuddhaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā nagarato nikkhamantaṃ disvā issariyamadamatto hutvā ‘‘kathañhi nāma mayhaṃ añjaliṃ akatvā ayaṃ muṇḍako gacchatī’’ti paduṭṭhacitto hatthikkhandhato otaritvā ‘‘kacci te piṇḍapāto laddho’’ti ālapanto hatthato pattaṃ gahetvā pathaviyaṃ pātetvā bhindi. Atha naṃ sabbattha tādibhāvappattiyā nibbikāraṃ karuṇāvipphārasomanassanipātapasannacittameva olokentaṃ aṭṭhānāghātena dūsitacitto ‘‘kiṃ maṃ kitavassa rañño puttaṃ na jānāsi, tvaṃ olokayanto mayhaṃ kiṃ karissasī’’ti vatvā avahasanto pakkāmi. Pakkantamattasseva cassa narakaggidāhapaṭibhāgo balavasarīradāho uppajji. So tena mahāsantāpenābhibhūtakāyo atibāḷhaṃ dukkhavedanābhitunno kālaṃ katvā avīcīmahāniraye nibbatti.

Kuṇḍināgariyo thero This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Veḷuvana, concerning the relatives who were departed spirits of the venerable Sāṇavāsī Thera. It is said that in the past, in Bārāṇasī, the son of a king named Kitava, while returning after playing in the pleasure garden, saw Sunetta, a Paccekabuddha, going out from the city after wandering for alms, and, being intoxicated with the pride of royalty, thought with a corrupted mind, "How can this shaveling go without paying homage to me?" Descending from the elephant's neck, he said, "I hope you have obtained alms," while taking the bowl from his hand and throwing it onto the ground, breaking it. Then, feeling displeased by him looking at him with a mind that was indifferent to the attainment of such a state, filled with compassion and a serene downpour of joy, he said mockingly, "Do you not know that I am the son of King Kitava? What will you do to me by looking at me?" and departed. As soon as he had departed, a burning sensation arose in him, like the fire of hell, a severe burning in his body. Overwhelmed by that great torment and afflicted by intense painful feelings, he died and was reborn in the great hell of Avīci.

So tattha dakkhiṇapassena vāmapassena uttāno avakujjoti bahūhi pakārehi parivattitvā caturāsīti vassasahassāni paccitvā tato cuto petesu apirimitakālaṃ khuppipāsādidukkhaṃ anubhavitvā tato cuto imasmiṃ buddhuppāde kuṇḍinagarassa samīpe kevaṭṭagāme nibbatti. Tassa jātissarañāṇaṃ uppajji, tena so pubbe attanā anubhūtapubbaṃ dukkhaṃ anussaranto vayappattopi pāpabhayena ñātakehipi saddhiṃ macchabandhanatthaṃ na gacchati. Tesu gacchantesu macche ghātetuṃ anicchanto nilīyati, gato ca jālaṃ bhindati, jīvante vā macche gahetvā udake vissajjeti, tassa taṃ kiriyaṃ arocantā ñātakā gehato taṃ nīhariṃsu. Eko panassa bhātā sinehabaddhahadayo ahosi.

Having been cooked there for eighty-four thousand years, turning in many ways, on his right side, on his left side, face up, and face down, he then passed away from there and experienced the suffering of hunger, thirst, etc., among the departed spirits for an immeasurable time. Having passed away from there, in this Buddha-era, he was born near Kuṇḍinagara, in a village of fishermen. The knowledge of his past lives arose in him; remembering the suffering he had experienced in the past, even when he came of age, he did not go with his relatives to fish, fearing evil. When they went to kill fish, he would hide, and if he went, he would break the nets or take the living fish and release them into the water. His relatives, disliking his actions, drove him out of the house. However, one brother of his was affectionate and bound by love.

Tena ca samayena āyasmā ānando kuṇḍinagaraṃ upanissāya sāṇapabbate viharati. Atha so kevaṭṭaputto ñātakehi pariccatto hutvā ito cito ca paribbhamanto taṃ padesaṃ patto bhojanavelāya therassa santikaṃ upasaṅkami. Thero taṃ pucchitvā bhojanena atthikabhāvaṃ ñatvā tassa bhattaṃ datvā katabhattakicco sabbaṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā dhammakathāya pasannamānasaṃ ñatvā ‘‘pabbajissasi, āvuso’’ti? ‘‘Āma, bhante, pabbajissāmī’’ti. Thero taṃ pabbājetvā tena saddhiṃ bhagavato santikaṃ agamāsi. Atha naṃ satthā āha – ‘‘ānanda, imaṃ sāmaṇeraṃ anukampeyyāsī’’ti. So ca akatakusalattā appalābho ahosi. Atha naṃ satthā anuggaṇhanto bhikkhūnaṃ paribhogatthāya pānīyaghaṭānaṃ paripūraṇe niyojesi. Taṃ disvā upāsakā tassa bahūni niccabhattāni paṭṭhapesuṃ.

At that time, venerable Ānanda was dwelling at Sāṇapabbata, depending on Kuṇḍinagara. Then that Kevaṭṭaputta, abandoned by his relatives, wandering here and there, reached that place and approached the elder at mealtime. The elder, having asked him and knowing his need for food, gave him food. Having finished his meal and knowing all the circumstances, and knowing his mind was pleased by the Dhamma talk, asked, "Will you go forth, friend?" "Yes, venerable, I will go forth." The elder ordained him and went with him to the presence of the Blessed One. Then the Teacher said to him, "Ānanda, may you have compassion on this novice." But he was of little gain because he had not done good deeds. Then the Teacher, favoring him, assigned him to fill the water pots for the use of the bhikkhus. Seeing this, the lay followers established many regular meals for him.

‘‘mātā pitā ca te, bhante’’tiādigāthā avoca.Kuṇḍināgariyo therotiādayo pana ādito pañca gāthā tāsaṃ sambandhadassanatthaṃ dhammasaṅgāhakehi ṭhapitā.

He spoke the verse beginning with, "mātā pitā ca te, bhante." However, the five verses beginning with "Kuṇḍināgariyo thero" were placed by the compilers of the Dhamma to show their connection.

408.

408.

‘‘Kuṇḍināgariyo thero, sāṇavāsinivāsiko;

"The elder of Kuṇḍināgara, residing at Sāṇavāsi;
A monk named Poṭṭhapāda, with cultivated senses.

409.

409.

‘‘Tassa mātā pitā bhātā, duggatā yamalokikā;

"His mother, father, and brother, were unfortunate, in the realm of Yama;
Having done evil deeds, they went to the peta realm from here.

410.

410.

‘‘Te duggatā sūcikaṭṭā, kilantā naggino kisā;

"Those unfortunates, pierced with needles, weary, naked, and emaciated;
Trembling, with great fear, do not show themselves, the pitiable ones.

411.

411.

‘‘Tassa bhātā vitaritvā, naggo ekapathekako;

"His brother, having passed away, naked, alone on a path;
Having become a catukuṇḍika, showed himself to the elder.

412.

412.

‘‘Thero cāmanasikatvā, tuṇhībhūto atikkami;

"The elder, not paying attention, passed by silently;
And he informed the elder, 'I am your brother, gone to the peta realm.'

413.

413.

‘‘Mātā pitā ca te bhante, duggatā yamalokikā;

"Your mother and father, venerable, are unfortunate, in the realm of Yama;
Having done evil deeds, they went to the peta realm from here.

414.

414.

‘‘Tena duggatā sūcikaṭṭā, kilantā naggino kisā;

"Those unfortunates, pierced with needles, weary, naked, and emaciated;
Trembling, with great fear, do not show themselves, the pitiable ones.

415.

415.

‘‘Anukampassu kāruṇiko, datvā anvādisāhi no;

"Have compassion, be compassionate, give and dedicate to us;
By the gift given by you, the pitiable ones will survive.'"

408-9.Tatthakuṇḍināgariyo theroti evaṃnāmake nagare jātasaṃvaḍḍhatthero, ‘‘kuṇḍikanagaro thero’’tipi pāṭho, so evattho.Sāṇavāsinivāsikoti sāṇapabbatavāsī.Poṭṭhapādoti nāmenāti nāmena poṭṭhapādo nāma.Samaṇoti samitapāpo.Bhāvitindriyoti ariyamaggabhāvanāya bhāvitasaddhādiindriyo, arahāti attho.Tassāti tassa sāṇavāsittherassa.Duggatāti duggatigatā.

408-9. There, kuṇḍināgariyo thero: the elder who was born and raised in a city of that name; there is also a reading "kuṇḍikanagaro thero", the meaning is the same. Sāṇavāsinivāsiko: dwelling on Sāṇapabbata. Poṭṭhapādoti nāmena: named Poṭṭhapāda by name. Samaṇo: one who has calmed evil. Bhāvitindriyo: one whose faculties such as faith have been cultivated by the cultivation of the Noble Path, meaning an Arahant. Tassā: of that elder of Sāṇavāsi. Duggatā: gone to a bad state.

410.Sūcikaṭṭāti pūtinā lūkhagattā aṭṭakā, sūcikāti laddhanāmāya khuppipāsāya aṭṭā pīḷitā. ‘‘Sūcikaṇṭhā’’ti keci paṭhanti, sūcichiddasadisamukhadvārāti attho.Kilantāti kilantakāyacittā.Nagginoti naggarūpā niccoḷā.Kisāti aṭṭhittacamattasarīratāya kisadehā.Uttasantāti ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo amhākaṃ putto’’ti ottappena utrāsaṃ āpajjantā.Mahattāsāti attanā pubbe katakammaṃ paṭicca sañjātamahābhayā.Na dassentīti attānaṃ na dassenti, sammukhībhāvaṃ na gacchanti.Kurūrinoti dāruṇakammantā.

410. Sūcikaṭṭā: with foul, rough bodies, emaciated, afflicted by hunger and thirst named sūcikā. Some read "sūcikaṇṭhā", meaning with a mouth opening like a needle's eye. Kilantā: with weary body and mind. Naggino: naked, without clothes. Kisā: with emaciated bodies, having only skin and bones. Uttasantā: becoming frightened with shame, thinking, "This samana is our son." Mahattāsā: having great fear that has arisen in relation to the deeds done by oneself in the past. Na dassentī: do not show themselves, do not go into their presence. Kurūrino: because of cruel deeds.

411.Tassa bhātāti sāṇavāsittherassa bhātā.Vitaritvāti vitiṇṇo hutvā, ottappasantāsabhayāti attho. Vituritvāti vā pāṭho, turito hutvā, taramānarūpo hutvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Ekapatheti ekapadikamagge.Ekakoti ekiko adutiyo.Catukuṇḍiko bhavitvānāti catūhi aṅgehi kuṇḍeti attabhāvaṃ pavattetīti catukuṇḍiko, dvīhi jāṇūhi dvīhi hatthehi gacchanto tiṭṭhanto ca, evaṃbhūto hutvāti attho. So hi evaṃ purato kopīnapaṭicchādanā hotīti tathā akāsi.Therassa dassayītumanti therassa attānaṃ uddisayi dassesi.

411. Tassa bhātā: the brother of the Sāṇavāsi elder. Vitaritvā: having passed away, meaning shame, fear, and terror. Or, there is a reading "vituritvā", having hurried, it is said to mean having been quick, in a hurrying manner. Ekapathe: on a single path. Ekako: alone, without a second. Catukuṇḍiko bhavitvānā: a catukuṇḍika because he causes the self to proceed with four limbs, going and standing with two knees and two hands, meaning having become like that. For he did so in front of his loincloth covering himself. Therassa dassayītumaṃ: to show, to point out himself to the elder.

412.Amanasikatvāti ‘‘ayaṃ nāma eso’’ti evaṃ manasi akaritvā anāvajjetvā.So cāti so peto.Bhātā petagato ahanti ‘‘ahaṃ atītattabhāve bhātā, idāni petabhūto idhāgato’’ti vatvā viññāpayi theranti yojanā.

412. Amanasikatvā: not considering in the mind in this way, "This is so and so", not paying attention. So cā: that peta. Bhātā petagato ahaṃ: the construction is "I was your brother in a past existence, now having become a peta, I have come here," thus he informed the elder.

413-5.Yathā pana viññāpayi, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘mātā pitā cā’’tiādinā tisso gāthā vuttā. Tatthamātā pitā ca teti tava mātā ca pitā ca.Anukampassūti anuggaṇha anudayaṃ karohi.Anvādisāhīti ādisa.Noti amhākaṃ.Tava dinnenāti tayā dinnena.

413-5. In order to show how he informed him, three verses beginning with "mātā pitā cā" are stated. There, mātā pitā ca te: your mother and father. Anukampassū: favor, show compassion. Anvādisāhī: dedicate. No: to us. Tava dinnenā: by what is given by you.

Taṃ sutvā thero yathā paṭipajji, taṃ dassetuṃ –

To show how the elder then proceeded, [it is said:] –

416.

416.

‘‘Thero caritvā piṇḍāya, bhikkhū aññe ca dvādasa;

"The elder, having gone for alms, and twelve other bhikkhus;
Gathered together, because of the distribution of food.

417.

417.

‘‘Thero sabbeva te āha, yathāladdhaṃ dadātha me;

"The elder said to all of them, 'Give me what you have obtained;
I will make a Saṅgha meal, out of compassion for my relatives.'

418.

418.

‘‘Niyyādayiṃsu therassa, thero saṅghaṃ nimantayi;

"They gave to the elder, the elder invited the Saṅgha;
Having given, the elder dedicated to his mother, father, and brother;
'May this be for my relatives, may my relatives be happy.'

419.

419.

‘‘Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe, bhojanaṃ udapajjatha;

"Immediately upon dedication, food arose;
Pure, excellent, abundant, with various flavors and curries.

420.

420.

‘‘Tato uddassayī bhātā, vaṇṇavā balavā sukhī;

"Then his brother showed himself, handsome, strong, and happy;
'Abundant food, venerable, see we are no longer naked;
Thus, venerable, strive, so that we may obtain clothing.'

421.

421.

‘‘Thero saṅkārakūṭamhā, uccinitvāna nantake;

"The elder, having collected rags from a refuse heap;
Having made a patchwork cloth, gave it to the Saṅgha in the four directions.

422.

422.

‘‘Datvā anvādisī thero, mātu pitu ca bhātuno;

"Having given, the elder dedicated to his mother, father, and brother;
'May this be for my relatives, may my relatives be happy.'

423.

423.

‘‘Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe, vatthāni udapajjisuṃ;

"Immediately upon dedication, clothes arose;
Then, well-clothed, he showed himself to the elder.

424.

424.

‘‘Yāvatā nandarājassa, vijitasmiṃ paṭicchadā;

"As many as there are coverings in the territory of King Nanda;
More than that, venerable, are the clothing coverings for us.

425.

425.

‘‘Koseyyakambalīyāni, khomakappāsikāni ca;

"Silken and woolen blankets, linen and cotton;
Abundant and very valuable, they hang in the air.

426.

426.

‘‘Te mayaṃ paridahāma, yaṃ yañhi manaso piyaṃ;

"We wear those, whatever is pleasing to the mind;
Thus, venerable, strive, so that we may obtain a house.'

427.

427.

‘‘Thero paṇṇakuṭiṃ katvā, saṅghe cātuddise adā;

"The elder, having made a leaf hut, gave it to the Saṅgha in the four directions;
Having given, the elder dedicated to his mother, father, and brother;
'May this be for my relatives, may my relatives be happy.'

428.

428.

‘‘Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe, gharāni udapajjisuṃ;

"Immediately upon dedication, houses arose;
With storied mansions, divided, measured by portions.

429.

429.

‘‘Na manussesu īdisā, yādisā no gharā idha;

"There are no such houses among humans, as the houses we have here;
Even among the gods, as the houses are, such are the houses we have here.

430.

430.

‘‘Daddallamānā ābhenti, samantā caturo disā;

"Shining, they illuminate all four directions;
Thus, venerable, strive, so that we may obtain water.'

431.

431.

‘‘Thero karaṇaṃ pūretvā, saṅghe cātuddise adā;

"The elder, having filled a water vessel, gave it to the Saṅgha in the four directions;
Having given, the elder dedicated to his mother, father, and brother;
'May this be for my relatives, may my relatives be happy.'

432.

432.

‘‘Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe, pānīyaṃ udapajjatha;

"Immediately upon dedication, water arose;
Deep, square, and well-made ponds.

433.

433.

‘‘Sītodikā suppatitthā, sītā appaṭigandhiyā;

"With cold water, well-established, cool, without foul odor;
Covered with lotuses and lilies, filled with water-lily pollen.

434.

434.

‘‘Tattha nhatvā pivitvā ca, therassa paṭidassayuṃ;

"Having bathed and drunk there, they showed themselves to the elder;
'Abundant water, venerable, our feet are in pain.

435.

435.

‘‘Āhiṇḍamānā khañjāma, sakkhare kusakaṇṭake;

"Wandering about, we limp, on gravel, grass, and thorns;
Thus, venerable, strive, so that we may obtain a vehicle.'

436.

436.

‘‘Thero sipāṭikaṃ laddhā, saṅghe cātuddise adā;

"The elder, having obtained a litter, gave it to the Saṅgha in the four directions;
Having given, the elder dedicated to his mother, father, and brother;
'May this be for my relatives, may my relatives be happy.'

437.

437.

‘‘Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe, petā rathena māgamuṃ;

"Immediately upon dedication, the petas came by chariot;
'We have been favored, venerable, with food and clothing.

438.

438.

‘‘Gharena pānīyadānena, yānadānena cūbhayaṃ;

"By the giving of a house, the giving of water, and the giving of a vehicle, both;
We have come to venerate the compassionate Sage in the world, venerable,'"—they spoke the verses;

416-7.Tatthathero caritvā piṇḍāyāti thero piṇḍāpātacārikāya caritvā.Bhikkhū aññe ca dvādasāti therena saha vasantā aññe ca dvādasa bhikkhūekajjhaṃekatosannipatiṃsu. Kasmāti ce?Bhattavissaggakāraṇāti bhattakiccakāraṇā bhuñjananimittaṃ.Teti te bhikkhū.Yathāladdhanti yaṃ yaṃ laddhaṃ.Dadāthāti detha.

416-7. There, thero caritvā piṇḍāyā: the elder, having gone on alms round. Bhikkhū aññe ca dvādasā: other twelve bhikkhus dwelling with the elder, ekajjhaṃ: together sannipatiṃsu. Why? Bhattavissaggakāraṇā: because of the distribution of food, for the purpose of eating. Te: those bhikkhus. Yathāladdhaṃ: whatever was obtained. Dadāthā: give.

418.Niyyādayiṃsūti adaṃsu.Saṅghaṃ nimantayīti te eva dvādasa bhikkhū saṅghuddesavasena taṃ bhattaṃ dātuṃ nimantesi.Anvādisīti ādisi. Tattha yesaṃ anvādisi, te dassetuṃ‘‘mātu pitu ca bhātuno, idaṃ me ñātīnaṃ hotu, sukhitā hontu ñātayo’’ti vuttaṃ.

418. Niyyādayiṃsū: they gave. Saṅghaṃ nimantayī: he invited those twelve bhikkhus themselves to give that meal by way of directing it to the Saṅgha. Anvādisī: he dedicated. There, to show to whom he dedicated, "mātu pitu ca bhātuno, idaṃ me ñātīnaṃ hotu, sukhitā hontu ñātayo" is said.

419.Samanantarānuddiṭṭheti uddiṭṭhasamanantarameva.Bhojanaṃ udapajjathāti tesaṃ petānaṃ bhojanaṃ uppajji. Kīdisanti āha‘‘suci’’ntiādi. Tatthaanekarasabyañjananti nānārasehi byañjanehi yuttaṃ, atha vā anekarasaṃ anekabyañjanañca.Tatoti bhojanalābhato pacchā.

419. Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe: immediately after the dedication. Bhojanaṃ udapajjathā: food arose for those petas. What kind? He says, "suci" etc. There, anekarasabyañjana: endowed with curries of various flavors, or various flavors and various curries. Tato: after obtaining the food.

420.Uddassayī bhātāti bhātikabhūto peto therassa attānaṃ dassesi.Vaṇṇavā balavā sukhīti tena bhojanalābhena tāvadeva rūpasampanno balasampanno sukhitova hutvā.Pahūtaṃ bhojanaṃ, bhanteti, bhante, tava dānānubhāvena pahūtaṃ anappakaṃ bhojanaṃ amhehi laddhaṃ.Passa naggāmhaseti olokehi, naggikā pana amha, tasmā tathā, bhante,parakkamapayogaṃ karohi.Yathā vatthaṃ labhāmaseti yena pakārena yādisena payogena sabbeva mayaṃ vatthāni labheyyāma, tathā vāyamathāti attho.

420. Uddassayī bhātā: the brother-becoming-peta showed himself to the elder. Vaṇṇavā balavā sukhī: by that obtaining of food, having become immediately endowed with beauty, endowed with strength, and happy. Pahūtaṃ bhojanaṃ, bhante: Venerable, by the power of your giving, abundant food was obtained by us. Passa naggāmhase: look, we are naked, therefore thus, Venerable, parakkama: make an effort. Yathā vatthaṃ labhāmase: in whatever way, by whatever kind of effort, we all may obtain clothes, that is the meaning, you should strive.

421.Saṅkārakūṭamhāti tattha tattha saṅkāraṭṭhānato.Uccinitvānāti gavesanavasena gahetvā.Nantaketi chinnapariyante chaḍḍitadussakhaṇḍe. Te pana yasmā khaṇḍabhūtā pilotikā nāma honti, tāhi ca thero cīvaraṃ katvā saṅghassa adāsi, tasmā āha‘‘pilotikaṃ paṭaṃ katvā, saṅghe cātuddise adā’’ti. Tatthasaṅghe cātuddise adāti catūhipi disāhi āgatabhikkhusaṅghassa adāsi. Sampadānatthe hi idaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.

421. Saṅkārakūṭamhā: from a place of refuse here and there. Uccinitvānā: having taken by way of searching. Nantake: discarded pieces of cloth with cut ends. But since those pieces are called pilotikā, and the elder made a robe with them and gave it to the Saṅgha, therefore he says, "pilotikaṃ paṭaṃ katvā, saṅghe cātuddise adā". There, saṅghe cātuddise adā: he gave to the Saṅgha of bhikkhus who had come from all four directions. For this is a locative case in the sense of the recipient.

423-4.Suvatthavasanoti sundaravatthavasano.Therassa dassayītumanti therassa attānaṃ dassayi dassesi, pākaṭo ahosi. Paṭicchādayati etthātipaṭicchadā.

423-4. Suvatthavasano: wearing beautiful clothes. Therassa dassayītumaṃ: he showed, pointed out himself to the elder, he became apparent. Paṭicchadā: that by which one covers.

428-9.Kūṭāgāranivesanāti kūṭāgārabhūtā tadaññanivesanasaṅkhātā ca gharā. Liṅgavipallāsavasena hetaṃ vuttaṃ.Vibhattāti samacaturassaāyatavaṭṭasaṇṭhānādivasena vibhattā.Bhāgaso mitāti bhāgena paricchinnā.Noti amhākaṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ petaloke.Api dibbesūtiapīti nipātamattaṃ, devalokesūti attho.

428-9. Kūṭāgāranivesanā: houses that are storied mansions and designated as other dwellings. This is said by way of gender displacement. Vibhattā: divided by way of being square, rectangular, round shaped, etc. Bhāgaso mitā: measured by portions. No: for us. Idhā: in this peta world. Api dibbesū: apī is merely a particle, meaning in the deva worlds.

431.Karaṇanti dhamakaraṇaṃ.Pūretvāti udakassa pūretvā.Vārikiñjakkhapūritāti tattha tattha vārimatthake padumuppalādīnaṃ kesarabhārehi sañchāditavasena pūritā.Phalantīti pupphanti, paṇhikapariyantādīsu vidālentīti attho.

431. Karaṇa: a water pot. Pūretvā: having filled with water. Vārikiñjakkhapūritā: filled there and there with the burden of pollen of lotuses, lilies, etc., on the surface of the water. Phalantī: they burst, meaning they split around the ankles etc.

435-6.Āhiṇḍamānāti vicaramānā.Khañjāmāti khañjanavasena gacchāma.Sakkhare kusakaṇṭaketi sakkharavati kusakaṇṭakavati ca bhūmibhāge, sakkhare kusakaṇṭake ca akkamantāti attho.Yānanti rathavayhādikaṃ yaṃkiñci yānaṃ.Sipāṭikanti ekapaṭalaupāhanaṃ.

435-6. Āhiṇḍamānā means wandering about. Khañjāmā means we go limping. Sakkhare kusakaṇṭake means in a place full of gravel and thorny grass, meaning they were stepping on gravel and thorny grass. Yāna means any vehicle such as a chariot. Sipāṭika means a single-layered shoe.

437-8.Rathena māgamunti makāro padasandhikaro, rathena āgamaṃsu.Ubhayanti ubhayena dānena, yānadānena ceva bhattādicatupaccayadānena ca. Pānīyadānena hettha bhesajjadānampi saṅgahitaṃ. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānamevāti.

437-8. Rathena māgamu The ma is a euphonic addition; (it means) they came by chariot. Ubhaya means by both kinds of giving, by giving vehicles and by giving the four requisites such as food. Here, giving water and medicine are included. The rest is easy to understand since the method has already been stated.

Thero taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā ‘‘yathā ime etarahi, evaṃ tvampi ito anantarātīte attabhāve peto hutvā mahādukkhaṃ anubhavī’’ti vatvā therena yācito suttapetavatthuṃ kathetvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Taṃ sutvā mahājano sañjātasaṃvego dānasīlādipuññakammanirato ahosīti.

The Elder reported this occurrence to the Blessed One. The Blessed One made that matter the occasion (for a teaching), saying, "Just as these (beings) are now, so you too, in a previous existence not far removed from this one, having been a peta, experienced great suffering." Requested by the Elder, he then related the suttapetavatthu and taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering. Having heard it, the great multitude, stirred with saṃvega, became devoted to meritorious deeds such as giving and virtue.

Sāṇavāsittherapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Sāṇavāsitthera Peta-story is finished.

3. Rathakārapetivatthuvaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Story of the Female Peta-Chariot Maker

Veḷuriyathambhaṃ ruciraṃ pabhassaranti idaṃ satthari sāvatthiyaṃ viharante aññataraṃ petiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Atīte kira kassapassa bhagavato kāle aññatarā itthī sīlācārasampannā kalyāṇamittasannissayena sāsane abhippasannā suvibhattavicitrabhittithambhasopānabhūmitalaṃ ativiya dassanīyaṃ ekaṃ āvāsaṃ katvā tattha bhikkhū nisīdāpetvā paṇītena āhārena parivisitvā bhikkhusaṅghassa niyyādesi. Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā aññassa pāpakammassa vasena himavati pabbatarāje rathakāradahaṃ nissāya vimānapetī hutvā nibbatti. Tassā saṅghassa āvāsadānapuññānubhāvena sabbaratanamayaṃ uḷāraṃ ativiya samantato pāsādikaṃ manoharaṃ ramaṇīyaṃ pokkharaṇiyaṃ nandanavanasadisaṃ upasobhitaṃ vimānaṃ nibbatti, sayañca suvaṇṇavaṇṇā abhirūpā dassanīyā pāsādikā ahosi.

Veḷuriyathambhaṃ ruciraṃ pabhassaraṃ This was spoken by the Teacher while dwelling at Sāvatthi, concerning a certain petī. It is said that in the time of the Blessed Kassapa, a certain woman, accomplished in virtue and good conduct, greatly devoted to the Teaching through association with good friends, had a dwelling built that was exceedingly beautiful, with well-arranged and decorated walls, pillars, stairways, and floors, and having seated bhikkhus there, she served them with fine food and dedicated it to the community of bhikkhus. Later, she died and, due to another evil deed, was reborn as a vimānapetī, dwelling near the Chariot-Maker Lake on Mount Himavat. By the power of her merit in giving the dwelling to the Sangha, a magnificent, all-jeweled palace arose for her, exceedingly lovely and delightful on all sides, adorned like the Nandanavana garden with lotus ponds, and she herself was of golden hue, beautiful, and pleasing to behold.

Sā tattha purisehi vināva dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantī viharati. Tassā tattha dīgharattaṃ nippurisāya vasantiyā anabhirati uppannā. Sā ukkaṇṭhitā hutvā ‘‘attheso upāyo’’ti cintetvā dibbāni ambapakkāni nadiyaṃ pakkhipati. Sabbaṃ kaṇṇamuṇḍapetivatthusmiṃ āgatanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idha pana bārāṇasivāsī eko māṇavo gaṅgāya tesu ekaṃ ambaphalaṃ disvā tassa pabhavaṃ gavesanto anukkamena taṃ ṭhānaṃ gantvā nadiṃ disvā tadanusārena tassā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gato. Sā taṃ disvā attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ netvā paṭisanthāraṃ karontī nisīdi. So tassā vasanaṭṭhānasampattiṃ disvā pucchanto –

There, she lived experiencing divine fortune without men. After she had lived there for a long time without a man, discontent arose in her. Thinking, "There is a way," she threw divine ripe mangoes into the river. Everything should be understood in the same way as it came in the story of Kaṇṇamuṇḍa the petī. Here, however, a certain youth living in Bārāṇasī, seeing a mango fruit in the Ganges, sought its origin and gradually went to that place and, seeing the river, went to her dwelling place, following it. Seeing him, she brought him to her dwelling place and, offering hospitality, sat down. Seeing the prosperity of her dwelling place, he asked:

439.

439.

‘‘Veḷuriyathambhaṃ ruciraṃ pabhassaraṃ, vimānamāruyha anekacittaṃ;

"Mounting a palace of lovely, radiant,
beryl pillars, adorned with diverse designs,
There you shine, goddess of great power,
Illuminating your path like the moon on the fifteenth day.

440.

440.

‘‘Vaṇṇo ca te kanakassa sannibho, uttattarūpo bhusa dassaneyyo;

"Your complexion is like that of gold,
Like refined gold, exceedingly beautiful to see;
Seated on a supreme, incomparable couch,
You are alone, and you have no husband.

441.

441.

‘‘Imā ca te pokkharaṇī samantā, pahūtamalyā bahupuṇḍarīkā;

"These ponds all around you
Are full of garlands and many white lotuses;
Strewn all around with gold dust,
There is no mud or slime to be found.

442.

442.

‘‘Haṃsā cime dassanīyā manoramā, udakasmimanupariyanti sabbadā;

"These swans are beautiful and delightful,
They wander always about in the water;
Gathering, they sing sweetly together,
Their blended voices like the sound of drums.

443.

443.

‘‘Daddallamānā yasasā yasassinī, nāvāya ca tvaṃ avalamba tiṭṭhasi;

"Blazing with glory, O glorious one,
You stand leaning on a boat;
With long, lovely eyelashes, a smiling, sweet speaker,
Beautiful in every limb, you greatly shine.

444.

444.

‘‘Idaṃ vimānaṃ virajaṃ same ṭhitaṃ, uyyānavantaṃ ratinandivaḍḍhanaṃ;

"This palace is spotless, standing on level ground,
Possessing a garden, increasing delight and joy;
O faultless-looking woman, I desire
To rejoice here with you in Nandana."

Imā gāthā abhāsi.

He spoke these verses.

439.Tatthatatthāti tasmiṃ vimāne.Acchasīti icchiticchitakāle nisīdasi.Devīti taṃ ālapati.Mahānubhāveti mahatā dibbānubhāvena samannāgate.Pathaddhanīti attano pathabhūte addhani, gaganatalamaggeti attho.Pannaraseva candoti puṇṇamāsiyaṃ paripuṇṇamaṇḍalo cando viya vijjotamānāti attho.

439. There, tatthā means in that palace. Acchasī means you sit at will, whenever you wish. Devī He addresses her as "goddess". Mahānubhāve means endowed with great divine power. Pathaddhanī means in your own path, in the sky, meaning in the sky. Pannaraseva cando means shining like the full moon on the fifteenth day, the moon with its perfectly round orb.

440.Vaṇṇoca te kanakassa sannibhoti tava vaṇṇo ca uttattasiṅgīsuvaṇṇena sadiso ativiya manoharo. Tenāha‘‘uttattarūpo bhusa dassaneyyo’’ti.Atuleti mahārahe.Atuleti vā devatāya ālapanaṃ, asadisarūpeti attho.Natthi ca tuyha sāmikoti tuyhaṃ sāmiko ca natthi.

440. Vaṇṇo ca te kanakassa sannibho Your complexion is like that of molten gold, exceedingly delightful. Therefore, he said, ‘‘uttattarūpo bhusa dassaneyyo’’ (exceedingly beautiful to see, like refined gold). Atule means of great value. Or Atule is an address to the deity, meaning of incomparable form. Natthi ca tuyha sāmiko means and you have no husband.

441.Pahūtamalyāti kamalakuvalayādibahuvidhakusumavatiyo.Suvaṇṇacuṇṇehīti suvaṇṇavālukāhi.Samantamotthatāti samantato okiṇṇā.Tatthāti tāsu pokkharaṇīsu.Paṅko paṇako cāti kaddamo vā udakapicchillo vā na vijjati.

441. Pahūtamalyā means possessing many kinds of flowers, such as lotuses and water lilies. Suvaṇṇacuṇṇehī means with golden sand. Samantamotthatā means strewn all around. Tatthā means in those ponds. Paṅko paṇako cā means there is no mud or slime.

442.Haṃsā cime dassanīyā manoramāti ime haṃsā ca dassanasukhā manoramā ca.Anupariyantīti anuvicaranti.Sabbadāti sabbesu utūsu.Samayyāti saṅgamma.Vaggūti madhuraṃ.Upanadantīti vikūjanti.Bindussarāti avisaṭassarā sampiṇḍitassarā.Dundubhīnaṃva ghosoti vaggubindussarabhāvena dundubhīnaṃ viya tava pokkharaṇiyaṃ haṃsānaṃ ghosoti attho.

442. Haṃsā cime dassanīyā manoramā means these swans are delightful to see and pleasing to the mind. Anupariyantī means wander about. Sabbadā means in all seasons. Samayyā means gathering together. Vaggū means sweetly. Upanadantī means resound. Bindussarā means with indistinct sounds, blended sounds. Dundubhīnaṃva ghoso means the sound of the swans in your pond is like the sound of drums due to their sweet, blended voices.

443.Daddallamānāti ativiya abhijalantī.Yasasāti deviddhiyā.Nāvāyāti doṇiyaṃ. Pokkharaṇiyañhi paduminiyaṃ suvaṇṇanāvāya mahārahe pallaṅke nisīditvā udakakīḷaṃ kīḷantiṃ petiṃ disvā evamāha.Avalambāti avalambitvā apassenaṃ apassāya.Tiṭṭhasīti idaṃ ṭhānasaddassa gatinivatti atthattā gatiyā paṭikkhepavacanaṃ. ‘‘Nisajjasī’’ti vā pāṭho, nisīdasiccevassa attho daṭṭhabbo.Āḷārapamheti vellitadīghanīlapakhume.Hasiteti hasitamahāhasitamukhe.Piyaṃvadeti piyabhāṇinī.Sabbaṅgakalyāṇīti sabbehi aṅgehi sundare, sobhanasabbaṅgapaccaṅgīti attho.Virocasīti virājesi.

443. Daddallamānā means blazing exceedingly. Yasasā means with divine power. Nāvāyā means in a boat. For he saw the petī playing in the water in the lotus pond, seated on a golden boat, on a precious couch, and so he spoke thus. Avalambā means leaning on, without moving, without leaving. Tiṭṭhasī Since the word "ṭhāna" (standing) has the meaning of going and stopping, this is a rejection of movement. Or "nisajjasī" is the reading; its meaning should be understood as "you are sitting". Āḷārapamhe means with long, lovely eyelashes. Hasite means with a smiling or laughing face. Piyaṃvade means speaking kindly. Sabbaṅgakalyāṇī means beautiful in all limbs, possessing beautiful major and minor limbs. Virocasī means you shine forth.

444.Virajanti vigatarajaṃ niddosaṃ.Same ṭhitanti same bhūmibhāge ṭhitaṃ, caturassasobhitatāya vā samabhāge ṭhitaṃ, samantabhaddakanti attho.Uyyānavantanti nandanavanasahitaṃ.Ratinandivaḍḍhananti ratiñca nandiñca vaḍḍhetīti ratinandivaḍḍhanaṃ, sukhassa ca pītiyā ca saṃvaḍḍhananti attho.Nārīti tassā ālapanaṃ.Anomadassaneti paripuṇṇaaṅgapaccaṅgatāya aninditadassane.Nandaneti nandanakare.Idhāti nandanavane, vimāne vā.Moditunti abhiramituṃ icchāmīti yojanā.

444. Viraja means free from defilement, without fault. Same ṭhita means standing on level ground, or standing equally because of its quadrangular beauty, meaning perfectly auspicious. Uyyānavanta means possessing a garden like Nandanavana. Ratinandivaḍḍhana means increasing both delight and joy, meaning increasing happiness and pleasure. Nārī This is an address to her. Anomadassane means of faultless appearance due to the perfection of major and minor limbs. Nandane means in the Nandana garden. Idhā means in this Nandana garden, or in the palace. Modituṃ means I wish to rejoice.

Evaṃ tena māṇavena vutte sā vimānapetidevatā tassa paṭivacanaṃ dentī –

When the youth had spoken thus, that vimānapetī deity gave him a reply:

445.

445.

‘‘Karohi kammaṃ idha vedanīyaṃ, cittañca te idha nihitaṃ bhavatu;

"Do a deed here that will bear fruit,
And let your mind be set on this;
Having done a deed here that will bear fruit,
Thus you will obtain me, O lover of pleasures."

karohi kammaṃ idha vedanīyanti idha imasmiṃ dibbaṭṭhāne vipaccanakaṃ vipākadāyakaṃ kusalakammaṃ karohi pasaveyyāsi.Idha nihitanti idhūpanītaṃ, ‘‘idha ninna’’nti vā pāṭho, imasmiṃ ṭhāne ninnaṃ poṇaṃ pabbhāraṃ tava cittaṃ bhavatu hotu.Mamanti maṃ.Lacchasīti labhissasi.

karohi kammaṃ idha vedanīya means do and increase wholesome deeds here in this divine place that will ripen, that will give results. Idha nihita means brought here. Or "idha ninna" is the reading, let your mind be inclined, leaning, bent toward this place. Mamaṃ means me. Lacchasī means you will obtain.

So māṇavo tassā vimānapetiyā vacanaṃ sutvā tato manussapathaṃ gato tattha cittaṃ paṇidhāya tajjaṃ puññakammaṃ katvā nacirasseva kālaṃ katvā tattha nibbatti tassā petiyā sahabyataṃ. Tamatthaṃ pakāsentā saṅgītikārā –

Having heard the words of that vimānapetī, the youth went to the human realm, established his mind there, performed meritorious deeds accordingly, and before long, having died, was reborn there in companionship with that petī. The compilers of the Saṃgīti, revealing that matter, said:

446.

446.

‘‘Sādhūti so tassā paṭissuṇitvā,

"He agreed with her, saying 'Good!',
And did a deed there that would bear fruit;
Having done a deed there that would bear fruit,
That youth was reborn in companionship with her."

sādhūti sampaṭicchane nipāto.Tassāti tassā vimānapetiyā.Paṭissuṇitvāti tassā vacanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā.Tahiṃ vedanīyanti tasmiṃ vimāne tāya saddhiṃ veditabbasukhavipākaṃ kusalakammaṃ.Sahabyatanti sahabhāvaṃ. So māṇavo tassā sahabyataṃ upapajjīti yojanā. Sesaṃ uttānameva.

sādhūti is a particle of acceptance. Tassā means of that vimānapetī. Paṭissuṇitvā means having accepted her words. Tahiṃ vedanīyaṃ means wholesome deeds in that palace with her that would result in happiness to be experienced. Sahabyataṃ means companionship. The meaning is that youth was reborn in companionship with her. The rest is easy to understand.

Evaṃ tesu tattha cirakālaṃ dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantesu puriso kammassa parikkhayena kālamakāsi, itthī pana attano puññakammassa khettaṅgatabhāvena ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ tattha paripuṇṇaṃ katvā vasi. Atha amhākaṃ bhagavati loke uppajjitvā pavattitavaradhammacakke anukkamena jetavane viharante āyasmā mahāmoggallāno ekadivasaṃ pabbatacārikaṃ caramāno taṃ vimānañca vimānapetiñca disvā ‘‘veḷuriyathambhaṃ ruciraṃ pabhassara’’ntiādikāhi gāthāhi pucchi. Sā cassa ādito paṭṭhāya sabbaṃ attano pavattiṃ ārocesi. Taṃ sutvā thero sāvatthiṃ āgantvā bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Taṃ sutvā mahājano dānādipuññadhammanirato ahosīti.

Thus, while they were experiencing divine fortune there for a long time, the man died when his karma was exhausted, but the woman, because her meritorious deeds were in an appropriate field (of merit), lived there for an entire Buddha-era. Then, when our Blessed One had arisen in the world and set the excellent Wheel of Dhamma in motion, the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a mountain tour, saw that palace and the vimānapetī and asked her with verses beginning "veḷuriyathambhaṃ ruciraṃ pabhassaraṃ". She told him all her story from the beginning. Having heard that, the Elder came to Sāvatthi and reported it to the Blessed One. The Blessed One made that matter the occasion (for teaching) and taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering. Having heard it, the great multitude became devoted to meritorious deeds such as giving.

Rathakārapetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Story of the Female Peta-Chariot Maker is finished.

4. Bhusapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Bhusa Peta-story

Bhusāni eko sāliṃ punāparoti idaṃ satthari sāvatthiyaṃ viharante cattāro pete ārabbha vuttaṃ. Sāvatthiyā kira avidūre aññatarasmiṃ gāmake eko kūṭavāṇijo kūṭamānādīhi jīvikaṃ kappesi. So sālipalāpe gahetvā tambamattikāya paribhāvetvā garutare katvā rattasālihi saddhiṃ missetvā vikkiṇi. Tassa putto ‘‘gharaṃ āgatānaṃ mama mittasuhajjānaṃ sammānaṃ na karotī’’ti kupito yugacammaṃ gahetvā mātusīse pahāramadāsi. Tassa suṇisā sabbesaṃ atthāya ṭhapitamaṃsaṃ corikāya khāditvā puna tehi anuyuñjiyamānā ‘‘sace mayā taṃ maṃsaṃ khāditaṃ, bhave bhave attano piṭṭhimaṃsaṃ kantitvā khādeyya’’nti sapathamakāsi. Bhariyā panassa kiñcideva upakaraṇaṃ yācantānaṃ ‘‘natthī’’ti vatvā tehi nippīḷiyamānā ‘‘sace santaṃ natthīti vadāmi, jātajātaṭṭhāne gūthabhakkhā bhaveyya’’nti musāvādena sapathamakāsi.

Bhusāni eko sāliṃ punāparo This was spoken by the Teacher while dwelling at Sāvatthi, concerning four petas. It is said that not far from Sāvatthi, in a certain village, there was a deceitful merchant who made his living by using false weights and measures. He would take rice chaff, soak it in red clay to make it heavier, mix it with red rice, and sell it. His son, angered that "he does not show respect to my friends and companions who come to the house," took a yoke strap and struck his mother on the head. His daughter-in-law secretly ate the meat that had been set aside for everyone, and when they questioned her about it, she swore an oath, "If I ate that meat, may I cut off and eat the flesh of my own back in every existence." His wife, when they asked her for some small item, said "There is none," and when they pressed her, she swore a false oath, "If I say there is none when there is, may I be a dung-eater in every existence."

Te cattāropi janā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā viñjhāṭaviyaṃ petā hutvā nibbattiṃsu. Tattha kūṭavāṇijo kammaphalena pajjalantaṃ bhusaṃ ubhohi hatthehi gahetvā attano matthake ākiritvā mahādukkhaṃ anubhavati, tassa putto ayomayehi muggarehi sayameva attano sīsaṃ bhinditvā anappakaṃ dukkhaṃ paccanubhoti. Tassa suṇisā kammaphalena sunisitehi ativiya vipulāyatehi nakhehi attano piṭṭhimaṃsāni kantitvā khādantī aparimitaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavati, tassa bhariyāya sugandhaṃ suvisuddhaṃ apagatakāḷakaṃ sālibhattaṃ upanītamattameva nānāvidhakimikulākulaṃ paramaduggandhajegucchaṃ gūthaṃ sampajjati, taṃ sā ubhohi hatthehi pariggahetvā bhuñjantī mahādukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti.

All four of these people, after some time, died and were reborn as petas in the Viñjhā forest. There, the deceitful merchant, by the result of his karma, takes burning chaff with both hands and pours it over his head, experiencing great suffering. His son, with iron clubs, shatters his own head himself, experiencing no small amount of suffering. His daughter-in-law, by the result of her karma, cuts off the flesh of her own back with exceedingly sharp and very long nails, and eats it, experiencing immeasurable suffering. His wife, as soon as fragrant, very clean, pure rice without husks is brought to her, it turns into dung teeming with various kinds of worms, exceedingly foul-smelling and disgusting; taking it with both hands, she eats it, experiencing great suffering.

Evaṃ tesu catūsu janesu petesu nibbattitvā mahādukkhaṃ anubhavantesu āyasmā mahāmoggalāno pabbatacārikaṃ caranto ekadivasaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ gato. Te pete disvā –

While these four people were thus reborn as petas and experiencing great suffering, the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a mountain tour, went to that place one day. Seeing those petas, he said:

447.

447.

‘‘Bhusāni eko sāliṃ punāparo, ayañca nārī sakamaṃsalohitaṃ;

"One gathers chaff, another rice, and this woman (eats) her own flesh and blood;
And you consume excrement, filth, and what is disgusting; what is the result of this?"

bhusānīti palāpāni.Ekoti ekako.Sālinti sālino. Sāmiatthe hetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, sālino palāpāni pajjalantāni attano sīse avakiratīti adhippāyo.Punāparoti puna aparo. Yo hi so mātusīsaṃ pahari, so ayomuggarehi attano sīsaṃ paharitvā sīsabhedaṃ pāpuṇāti, taṃ sandhāya vadati.Sakamaṃsalohitanti attano piṭṭhimaṃsaṃ lohitañca paribhuñjatīti yojanā.Akantanti amanāpaṃ jegucchaṃ.Kissa ayaṃ vipākoti katamassa pāpakammassa idaṃ phalaṃ, yaṃ idāni tumhehi paccanubhavīyatīti attho.

Bhusāni means husks. Eko means alone. Sāli means rice. Here, the locative case is used in the sense of possession, meaning they scatter burning husks of rice on their own heads. Punāparo means again another. He who struck his mother's head, strikes his own head with iron mallets and meets with head-splitting, this is said with that in mind. Sakamaṃsalohita means that they consume their own back flesh and blood. Akanta means unpleasant, repulsive. Kissa ayaṃ vipāko means what evil deed is this the result of, which you are now experiencing.

Evaṃ therena tehi katakamme pucchite kūṭavāṇijassa bhariyā sabbehi tehi katakammaṃ ācikkhantī –

When the elder thus inquired about the deed they had done, the wife of the deceitful merchant, recounted the deed done by all of them:

448.

448.

‘‘Ayaṃ pure mātaraṃ hiṃsati, ayaṃ pana kūṭavāṇijo;

"This one here harms his mother, this one is a deceitful merchant;
This one, having eaten meat, deceives with false speech.

449.

449.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, agārinī sabbakulassa issarā;

"I, being a human among humans, a householder, the mistress of all the family;
I conceal (goods) even when they are available, and I gave nothing from here.

450.

450.

‘‘Musāvādena chādemi, natthi etaṃ mama gehe;

"I cover up with false speech, 'There is nothing of this in my house';
If I conceal what is available, may excrement be my food.

451.

451.

‘‘Tassa kammassa vipākena, musāvādassa cūbhayaṃ;

"By the result of that deed, and both by false speech;
Fragrant rice gruel is transformed into excrement for me.

452.

452.

‘‘Avañjhāni ca kammāni, na hi kammaṃ vinassati;

"Deeds are not fruitless, indeed, a deed does not perish;
I eat and drink foul-smelling excrement full of worms," – she spoke the verses;

448.Tatthaayanti puttaṃ dassenti vadati.Hiṃsatīti thāmena paribādheti, muggarena paharatīti attho.Kūṭavāṇijoti khalavāṇijo, vañcanāya vaṇijjakārakoti attho.Maṃsāni khāditvāti parehi sādhāraṇamaṃsaṃ khāditvā ‘‘na khādāmī’’ti musāvādena te vañceti.

448. There, ayaṃ she says pointing to her son. Hiṃsatī means oppresses by force, strikes with a mallet. Kūṭavāṇijo means a false merchant, one who engages in trade by deception. Maṃsāni khāditvā means having eaten meat that is common to others, he deceives them with the false speech, "I do not eat."

449-50.Agārinīti gehasāminī.Santesūti vijjamānesveva parehi yācitaupakaraṇesu.Pariguhāmīti paṭicchādesiṃ. Kālavipallāsena hetaṃ vuttaṃ.Mā ca kiñci ito adanti ito mama santakato kiñcimattampi atthikassa parassa na adāsiṃ.Chādemiti ‘‘natthi etaṃ mama gehe’’ti musāvādena chādesiṃ.

449-50. Agārinī means the mistress of the house. Santesū means even when the requisites requested by others are available. Pariguhāmī means I concealed. This is said by a reversal of time. Mā ca kiñci ito adaṃ means I did not give even a little bit from my possessions to anyone in need. Chādemi means I concealed with the false speech "There is nothing of this in my house."

451-2.Gūthaṃ me parivattatīti sugandhaṃ sālibhattaṃ mayhaṃ kammavasena gūthabhāvena parivattati pariṇamati.Avañjhānīti amoghāni anipphalāni.Na hi kammaṃ vinassatīti yathūpacitaṃ kammaṃ phalaṃ adatvā na hi vinassati.Kiminanti kimivantaṃ sañjātakimikulaṃ.Mīḷhanti gūthaṃ. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānameva.

451-2. Gūthaṃ me parivattatī means fragrant rice gruel is transformed, changed, into the state of excrement for me due to my deed. Avañjhānī means not fruitless, not ineffective. Na hi kammaṃ vinassatī means indeed, a deed does not perish without giving its fruit according to what has been accumulated. Kiminaṃ means full of worms, a multitude of worms have arisen. Mīḷhaṃ means excrement. The rest is easy to understand as the meaning has been stated earlier.

Evaṃ thero tassā petiyā vacanaṃ sutvā taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Thus, the Elder, having heard the words of that peta, reported the incident to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, having made that matter the occasion for a discourse, taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering. That teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Bhusapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Bhusā Peta Story is Finished.

5. Kumārapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Kumāra Peta Story

Accherarūpaṃ sugatassa ñāṇanti idaṃ kumārapetavatthu. Tassa kā uppatti? Sāvatthiyaṃ kira bahū upāsakā dhammagaṇā hutvā nagare mahantaṃ maṇḍapaṃ kāretvā taṃ nānāvaṇṇehi vatthehi alaṅkaritvā kālasseva satthāraṃ bhikkhusaṅghañca nimantetvā mahārahavarapaccattharaṇatthatesu āsanesu buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nisīdāpetvā gandhapupphādīhi pūjetvā mahādānaṃ pavattenti. Taṃ disvā aññataro maccheramalapariyuṭṭhitacitto puriso taṃ sakkāraṃ asahamāno evamāha – ‘‘varametaṃ sabbaṃ saṅkārakūṭe chaḍḍitaṃ, na tveva imesaṃ muṇḍakānaṃ dinna’’nti. Taṃ sutvā upāsakā saṃviggamānasā ‘‘bhāriyaṃ vata iminā purisena pāpaṃ pasutaṃ, yena evaṃ buddhappamukhe bhikkhusaṅghe aparaddha’’nti tamatthaṃ tassa mātuyā ārocetvā ‘‘gaccha, tvaṃ sasāvakasaṅghaṃ bhagavantaṃ khamāpehī’’ti āhaṃsu. Sā ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā puttaṃ santajjentī saññāpetvā bhagavantaṃ bhikkhusaṅghañca upasaṅkamitvā puttena kataaccayaṃ desentī khamāpetvā bhagavato bhikkhusaṅghassa ca sattāhaṃ yāgudānena pūjaṃ akāsi. Tassā putto nacirasseva kālaṃ katvā kiliṭṭhakammūpajīviniyā gaṇikāya kucchiyaṃ nibbatti. Sā ca naṃ jātamattaṃyeva ‘‘dārako’’ti ñatvā susāne chaḍḍāpesi. So tattha attano puññabaleneva gahitārakkho kenaci anupadduto mātu-aṅke viya sukhaṃ supi. Devatā tassa ārakkhaṃ gaṇhiṃsūti ca vadanti.

Accherarūpaṃ sugatassa ñāṇaṃ (Wondrous is the Sugata's Knowledge) is the Kumāra Peta Story. What is its origin? It is said that in Sāvatthi, many lay followers, having gathered together, had a large pavilion built in the city, and after decorating it with cloths of various colors, they invited the Teacher and the Saṅgha of monks early in the morning. After seating the Saṅgha of monks, with the Buddha at their head, on seats spread with valuable and excellent coverings, they honored them with perfumes, flowers, etc., and provided a great alms-giving. Seeing that, a certain man, his mind overcome with the stain of stinginess, unable to bear that honor, said thus: "It would be better if all this were thrown on a heap of rubbish, rather than given to these shaven-headed ones." Having heard that, the lay followers, with agitated minds, said, "Indeed, a great evil has been produced by this man, by whom the Saṅgha of monks, with the Buddha at their head, has been offended." Having reported that matter to his mother, they said, "Go, appease the Blessed One with his Saṅgha of disciples." She, replying "Good," appeased her son by admonishing him, and approaching the Blessed One and the Saṅgha of monks, confessing the offense committed by her son, and making amends, offered worship to the Blessed One and the Saṅgha of monks for a week with the giving of rice-gruel. Her son, not long after, having died, was reborn in the womb of a prostitute who earned her living by means of defiled deeds. And she, knowing him to be a boy as soon as he was born, had him thrown into the charnel ground. There, by the power of his own merit, his safety was assured, unharmed by anyone, he slept happily as if in his mother's lap. They say that deities took up his protection.

Atha bhagavā paccūsasamaye mahākaruṇāsamāpattito vuṭṭhāya buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento taṃ dārakaṃ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṃ disvā sūriyuggamanavelāya sivathikaṃ agamāsi. ‘‘Satthā idhāgato, kāraṇenettha bhavitabba’’nti mahājano sannipati. Bhagavā sannipatitaparisāya ‘‘nāyaṃ dārako oññātabbo, yadipi idāni susāne chaḍḍito anātho ṭhito, āyatiṃ pana diṭṭheva dhamme abhisamparāyañca uḷārasampattiṃ paṭilabhissatī’’ti vatvā tehi manussehi ‘‘kiṃ nu kho, bhante, iminā purimajātiyaṃ kataṃ kamma’’nti puṭṭho –

Then, the Blessed One, arising at dawn from the attainment of great compassion, surveyed the world with his Buddha-eye, and seeing that boy thrown in the charnel ground, went to the charnel ground at sunrise. "The Teacher has come here, there must be a reason for it," a great crowd gathered. The Blessed One, to the assembled gathering, said, "This boy should not be despised, even though he is now lying abandoned and helpless in the charnel ground, in the future he will obtain great prosperity both in this very life and in the life to come." When asked by those people, "What deed, O Blessed One, was done by him in a past life?" –

‘‘Buddhapamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa, pūjaṃ akāsi janatā uḷāraṃ;

"To the Saṅgha of monks, with the Buddha at their head, the people gave lavish offerings;
Therein, there was a change of heart for him, he spoke harsh and impolite words." –

Ādinā nayena dārakena katakammaṃ āyatiṃ pattabbaṃ sampattiñca pakāsetvā sannipatitāya parisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ dhammaṃ kathetvā upari sāmukkaṃsikaṃ dhammadesanaṃ akāsi. Saccapariyosāne caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi, tañca dārakaṃ asītikoṭivibhavo eko kuṭumbiko bhagavato sammukhāva ‘‘mayhaṃ putto’’ti aggahesi. Bhagavā ‘‘ettakena ayaṃ dārako rakkhito, mahājanassa ca anuggaho kato’’ti vihāraṃ agamāsi.

In this way, revealing the deed done by the boy and the prosperity to be attained in the future, the Buddha preached the Dhamma in accordance with the inclinations of the assembled gathering, and then gave a more elevated Dhamma talk. At the end of the Truth, a realization of the Dhamma arose in eighty-four thousand living beings, and a householder with eighty crores of wealth, in the presence of the Blessed One, took that boy as "my son." The Blessed One, thinking, "The boy has been protected by this much, and a favor has been done to the great multitude," went to the monastery.

So aparena samayena tasmiṃ kuṭumbike kālakate tena niyyāditaṃ dhanaṃ paṭipajjitvā kuṭumbaṃ saṇṭhapento tasmiṃ nagareyeva mahāvibhavo gahapati hutvā dānādinirato ahosi. Athekadivasaṃ bhikkhū dhammasabhāyaṃ kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ – ‘‘aho nūna satthā sattesu anukampako, sopi nāma dārako tadā anātho ṭhito etarahi mahatiṃ sampattiṃ paccanubhavati, uḷārāni ca puññāni karotī’’ti. Taṃ sutvā satthā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, tassa ettakāva sampatti, atha kho āyupariyosāne tāvatiṃsabhavane sakkassa devarañño putto hutvā nibbattissati, mahatiṃ dibbasampattiñca paṭilabhissatī’’ti byākāsi. Taṃ sutvā bhikkhū ca mahājano ca ‘‘idaṃ kira kāraṇaṃ disvā dīghadassī bhagavā jātamattassevassa āmakasusāne chaḍḍitassa tattha gantvā saṅgahaṃ akāsī’’ti satthu ñāṇavisesaṃ thometvā tasmiṃ attabhāve tassa pavattiṃ kathesuṃ. Tamatthaṃ dīpentā saṅgītikārā –

Later, when that householder had died, he took possession of the wealth bequeathed by him, and while managing the household, he became a very wealthy householder in that very city, and was devoted to generosity and other virtues. Then one day, the monks started a discussion in the Dhamma hall – "Indeed, the Teacher is compassionate towards beings, that boy, who was helpless at that time, is now experiencing great prosperity, and is performing great meritorious deeds." Having heard that, the Teacher said, "Monks, his prosperity is not just this much, but at the end of his life, he will be reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven as the son of Sakka, the king of gods, and will attain great heavenly prosperity." Having heard that, the monks and the great multitude, praising the Teacher's special knowledge, saying, "Having seen this reason, the far-sighted Blessed One went there and took care of him, even though he had been thrown into the charnel ground as soon as he was born," recounted his story in that existence. The compilers of the Saṅgīti, revealing that matter, said –

453.

453.

‘‘Accherarūpaṃ sugatassa ñāṇaṃ, satthā yathā puggalaṃ byākāsi;

"Wondrous is the Sugata's knowledge, the Teacher declared according to the individual;
Some become those with abundant merit, some become those with little merit.

454.

454.

‘‘Ayaṃ kumāro sīvathikāya chaḍḍito, aṅguṭṭhasnehena yāpeti rattiṃ;

"This boy was thrown in the charnel ground, he lives the night with the moisture of his toe;
Neither non-human spirits nor reptiles would harm the meritorious boy.

455.

455.

‘‘Sunakhāpimassa palihiṃsu pāde, dhaṅkā siṅgālā parivattayanti;

"Dogs licked his feet, crows and jackals kept watch over him;
Flocks of birds carry away the afterbirth, while crows carry away the eye-mucus.

456.

456.

‘‘Nayimassa rakkhaṃ vidahiṃsu keci, na osadhaṃ sāsapadhūpanaṃ vā;

"No one provided protection for him, nor medicine, nor fumigation with mustard seeds;
They did not even consider the conjunction of the stars, nor did they scatter all kinds of grain.

457.

457.

‘‘Etādisaṃ uttamakicchapattaṃ, rattābhataṃ sīvathikāya chaḍḍitaṃ;

"Having attained such a supreme state, brought by night, thrown in the charnel ground;
Trembling like a lump of butter, with doubtful life remaining.

458.

458.

‘‘Tamaddasā devamanussapūjito, disvā ca taṃ byākari bhūripañño;

"Him the Blessed One saw, revered by gods and humans, and having seen him, the wise one declared;
'This boy in this city, will be the foremost of families and in wealth'.

459.

459.

‘‘Kissa vataṃ kiṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, kissa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko;

"What vow, what holy life, what well-done deed is this the result of?
Having attained such misfortune, he will experience such (fortune) in the future." –

Cha gāthā avocuṃ.

They spoke six verses.

453.Tatthaaccherarūpanti acchariyasabhāvaṃ.Sugatassa ñāṇanti aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ sammāsambuddhassa ñāṇaṃ, āsayānusayañāṇādisabbaññutaññāṇameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tayidaṃ aññesaṃ avisayabhūtaṃ kathaṃ ñāṇanti āha‘‘satthā yathā puggalaṃ byākāsī’’ti. Tena satthu desanāya eva ñāṇassa acchariyabhāvo viññāyatīti dasseti.

453. There, accherarūpaṃ means of wondrous nature. Sugatassa ñāṇaṃ means the knowledge of the Sammāsambuddha, unsurpassed by others, is stated referring to the all-knowing knowledge such as the knowledge of inclinations and underlying tendencies. How is this knowledge, which is beyond the scope of others, knowledge? He says, ‘‘satthā yathā puggalaṃ byākāsī’’ (the Teacher declared according to the individual). Thus, he shows that the wondrous nature of the knowledge is known only by the Teacher's teaching.

‘‘ussannapuññāpi bhavanti heke, parittapuññāpi bhavanti heke’’ti āha. Tassattho – ussannakusaladhammāpi idhekacce puggalā laddhapaccayassa apuññassa vasena jātiādinā nihīnā bhavanti, parittapuññāpi appatarapuññadhammāpi eke sattā khettasampattiādinā tassa puññassa mahājutikatāya uḷārā bhavantīti.

He says ‘‘ussannapuññāpi bhavanti heke, parittapuññāpi bhavanti heke’’ (some become those with abundant merit, some become those with little merit). Its meaning is: here, some individuals with abundant meritorious qualities become inferior by birth etc., due to the absence of acquired conditions; and some beings with little meritorious qualities become great due to the great radiance of that merit because of the excellence of the field (of merit).

454.Sīvathikāyāti susāne.Aṅguṭṭhasnehenāti aṅguṭṭhato pavattasnehena, devatāya aṅguṭṭhato paggharitakhīrenāti attho.Na yakkhabhūtā na sarīsapā vāti pisācabhūtā vā yakkhabhūtā vā sarīsapā vā ye keci sarantā gacchantā vāna viheṭhayeyyuṃna bādheyyuṃ.

454. Sīvathikāyā means in the charnel ground. Aṅguṭṭhasnehena means with the moisture flowing from the toe, meaning with the milk flowing from the toe by a deity. Na yakkhabhūtā na sarīsapā vā means neither non-human spirits or yaksha spirits nor reptiles or any that crawl or move na viheṭhayeyyuṃ would not harm.

455.Palihiṃsu pādeti attano jivhāya pāde lihisuṃ.Dhaṅkāti kākā.Parivattayantīti ‘‘mā naṃ kumāraṃ keci viheṭheyyu’’nti rakkhantā nirogabhāvajānanatthaṃ aparāparaṃ parivattanti.Gabbhāsayanti gabbhamalaṃ.Pakkhigaṇāti gijjhakulalādayo sakuṇagaṇā.Harantīti apanenti.Akkhimalanti akkhigūthaṃ.

455. Palihiṃsu pāde means they licked his feet with their tongues. Dhaṅkā means crows. Parivattayantī means protecting, thinking, "May no one harm the boy," they turn him over and over to know if he is healthy. Gabbhāsayaṃ means afterbirth. Pakkhigaṇā means flocks of birds such as vultures and ospreys. Harantī means they remove. Akkhimalaṃ means eye-mucus.

456.Kecīti keci manussā, amanussā pana rakkhaṃ saṃvidahiṃsu.Osadhanti tadā āyatiñca ārogyāvahaṃ agadaṃ.Sāsapadhūpanaṃ vāti yaṃ jātassa dārakassa rakkhaṇatthaṃ sāsapena dhūpanaṃ karonti, tampi tassa karontā nāhesunti dīpenti.Nakkhattayogampi na aggahesunti nakkhattayuttampi na gaṇhiṃsu. ‘‘Asukamhi nakkhatte tithimhi muhutte ayaṃ jāto’’ti evaṃ jātakammampissa na keci akaṃsūti attho.Na sabbadhaññānipi ākiriṃsūti maṅgalaṃ karontā agadavasena yaṃ sāsapatelamissitaṃ sāliādidhaññaṃ ākiranti, tampissa nākaṃsūti attho.

456. Kecī means some people, but non-humans provided protection. Osadhaṃ means medicine, a remedy that brings benefit and health in the future. Sāsapadhūpanaṃ vā means the fumigation with mustard seeds that they do for the protection of the newborn child, he indicates that they did not do that for him. Nakkhattayogampi na aggahesuṃ means they did not even consider the conjunction of the stars. Meaning, no one did his birth ceremony, saying, "He was born on such and such a constellation, on such and such a day, at such and such a moment." Na sabbadhaññānipi ākiriṃsū means they did not scatter all kinds of grain, the rice etc. mixed with mustard oil, which they scatter for the sake of auspiciousness as a charm.

457.Etādisanti evarūpaṃ.Uttamakicchapattanti paramakicchaṃ āpannaṃ ativiya dukkhappattaṃ.Rattābhatanti rattiyaṃ ābhataṃ.Nonītapiṇḍaṃ viyāti navanītapiṇḍasadisaṃ, maṃsapesimattatā evaṃ vuttaṃ.Pavedhamānanti dubbalabhāvena pakampamānaṃ.Sasaṃsayanti ‘‘jīvati nu kho na nu kho jīvatī’’ti saṃsayitatāya saṃsayavantaṃ.Jīvitasāvasesanti jīvitaṭṭhitiyā hetubhūtānaṃ sādhanānaṃ abhāvena kevalaṃ jīvitamattāvasesakaṃ.

457. Etādisaṃ means of such a kind. Uttamakicchapattaṃ means having reached the supreme difficulty, having attained extreme suffering. Rattābhataṃ means brought by night. Nonītapiṇḍaṃ viyā means like a lump of butter, it is said thus because he is just a mass of flesh. Pavedhamānaṃ means trembling, shaking, due to weakness. Sasaṃsayaṃ means doubtful, being in doubt whether he is alive or not. Jīvitasāvasesaṃ means only life remaining due to the absence of the means that are the cause of the continuation of life.

458.Aggakuliko bhavissati bhogato cāti bhoganimittaṃ bhogassa vasena aggakuliko seṭṭhakuliko bhavissatīti attho.

458. Aggakuliko bhavissati bhogato cā means he will be the foremost of families, the best of families, because of wealth, for the sake of wealth.

459.‘‘Kissa vata’’nti ayaṃ gāthā satthu santike ṭhitehi upāsakehi tena katakammassa pucchāvasena vuttā. Sā ca kho sivathikāya sannipatitehīti veditabbā. Tatthakissāti kiṃ assa.Vatanti vatasamādānaṃ. Punakissāti kīdisassa suciṇṇassa vatassa brahmacariyassa cāti vibhattiṃ vipariṇāmetvā yojanā.Etādisanti gaṇikāya kucchiyā nibbattanaṃ, susāne chaḍḍananti evarūpaṃ.Byasananti anatthaṃ.Tādisanti tathārūpaṃ, ‘‘aṅguṭṭhasnehena yāpeti ratti’’ntiādinā, ‘‘ayaṃ kumāro nagarassimassa aggakuliko bhavissatī’’tiādinā ca vuttappakāranti attho.Iddhinti deviddhiṃ, dibbasampattinti vuttaṃ hoti.

459. The verse "Kissa vata" was spoken by the lay followers standing near the Teacher, as an inquiry into the deed he had done. And it should be understood as referring to those gathered at the charnel ground. There, kissa means what would it be? Vata is an expression of emphasis. Again, kissa means of what kind of well-performed vow or brahmacariya? It is to be construed by changing the विभक्ति (inflection). Etādisaṃ means being born in the womb of a prostitute, being thrown in the cemetery, such a kind of. Byasanaṃ means misfortune. Tādisaṃ means of that nature, as stated by "he lives on the oil from his toe," etc., and "this boy will be the chief householder of the city," etc. Iddhiṃ means divine power, it is said as divine attainment.

Idāni tehi upāsakehi puṭṭho bhagavā yathā tadā byākāsi, taṃ dassentā saṅgītikārā –

Now, the compilers of the Saṅgīti, showing how the Blessed One explained when asked by those lay followers, said:

460.

460.

‘‘Buddhapamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa, pūjaṃ akāsi janatā uḷāraṃ;

"To the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha,
The people made a grand offering;
There, there was an alteration in his mind,
He spoke harsh, impolite words.

461.

461.

‘‘So taṃ vitakkaṃ pavinodayitvā, pītiṃ pasādaṃ paṭiladdhā pacchā;

"Having dispelled that thought,
He regained joy and serenity afterward;
To the Tathāgata dwelling in Jetavana,
He attended with rice-gruel for seven nights.

462.

462.

‘‘Tassa vataṃ taṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, tassa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko;

"That vow and brahmacariya of his,
This is the result of that well-performed deed;
Having attained such misfortune,
He will experience such power."

463.

463.

‘‘Ṭhatvāna so vassasataṃ idheva, sabbehi kāmehi samaṅgibhūto;

"Having lived for a hundred years right here,
Endowed with all sensual pleasures;
At the dissolution of the body, after death,
He goes to companionship with Vāsava."

Catasso gāthā avocuṃ.

Four verses were spoken.

460.Tatthajanatāti janasamūho, upāsakagaṇoti adhippāyo.Tatrāti tassaṃ pūjāyaṃ.Assāti tassa dārakassa.Cittassahu aññathattanti purimabhavasmiṃ cittassa aññathābhāvo anādaro agāravo apaccayo ahosi.Asabbhanti sādhusabhāya sāvetuṃ ayuttaṃ pharusaṃ vācaṃ abhāsi.

460. There, janatā means a crowd of people, the meaning is a group of lay followers. Tatra means in that offering. Assa means of that boy. Cittassāhu aññathattaṃ means in a previous existence, there was an otherness of mind, disrespect, irreverence, lack of faith. Asabbhaṃ means he spoke harsh words unsuitable to be proclaimed in a virtuous assembly.

461.Soti so ayaṃ.Taṃ vitakkanti taṃ pāpakaṃ vitakkaṃ.Pavinodayitvāti mātarā katāya saññattiyā vūpasametvā.Pītiṃ pasādaṃ paṭiladdhāti pītiṃ pasādañca paṭilabhitvā uppādetvā.Yāguyā upaṭṭhāsīti yāgudānena upaṭṭhahi.Sattarattanti sattadivasaṃ.

461. So means that one. Taṃ vitakkaṃ means that evil thought. Pavinodayitvā means having calmed down by the advice given by his mother. Pītiṃ pasādaṃ paṭiladdhā means having regained and generated joy and serenity. Yāguyā upaṭṭhāsi means he attended with the offering of rice-gruel. Sattarattaṃ means for seven days.

462.Tassavataṃ taṃ pana brahmacariyanti taṃ mayā heṭṭhā vuttappakāraṃ attano cittassa pasādanaṃ dānañca imassa puggalassa vataṃ taṃ brahmacariyañca, aññaṃ kiñci natthīti attho.

462. Tassa vataṃ taṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ means that pacification of his own mind and the giving of alms, which I have described below, is the vow and brahmacariya of this person; there is nothing else, is the meaning.

463.Ṭhatvānāti yāva āyupariyosānā idheva manussaloke ṭhatvā.Abhisamparāyanti punabbhave.Sahabyataṃ gacchati vāsavassāti sakkassa devānamindassa puttabhāvena sahabhāvaṃ gamissati. Anāgatatthe hi idaṃ paccuppannakālavacanaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

463. Ṭhatvāna means having lived in this human world until the end of his life. Abhisamparāyaṃ means in a future existence. Sahabyataṃ gacchati vāsavassā means he will go to companionship with Sakka, the Lord of the Gods, as a son. This is a future tense expressed in the present tense. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Kumārapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Kumārapetavatthu is finished.

6. Seriṇīpetivatthuvaṇṇanā
6. Seriṇīpetivatthuvaṇṇanā

Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsīti idaṃ satthari jetavane viharante seriṇīpetiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Kururaṭṭhe kira hatthinipure seriṇī nāma ekā rūpūpajīvinī ahosi. Tattha ca uposathakaraṇatthāya tato tato bhikkhū sannipatiṃsu. Puna mahābhikkhusannipāto ahosi. Taṃ disvā manussā tilataṇḍulādiṃ sappinavanītamadhuādiñca bahuṃ dānūpakaraṇaṃ sajjetvā mahādānaṃ pavattesuṃ. Tena ca samayena sā gaṇikā assaddhā appasannā maccheramalapariyuṭṭhitacittā tehi manussehi ‘‘ehi tāva idaṃ dānaṃ anumodāhī’’ti ussāhitāpi ‘‘kiṃ tena muṇḍakānaṃ samaṇānaṃ dinnenā’’ti appasādameva nesaṃ sampavedesi, kuto appamattakassa pariccāgo.

Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsī This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning the Seriṇī ghost. It is said that in the Kururaṭṭha, in Hatthinipura, there was a courtesan named Seriṇī who earned her living through her beauty. There, monks gathered from various places to observe the Uposatha. Again, there was a great gathering of monks. Seeing that, people prepared many alms-giving materials such as sesame seeds, rice grains, ghee, butter, honey, etc., and initiated a great alms-giving. At that time, that courtesan, being faithless, displeased, and with a mind enveloped in the stain of stinginess, even when urged by those people, "Come, please rejoice in this alms-giving," she expressed only displeasure to them, saying, "What is the use of giving to these shaven-headed ascetics?" How could there be any giving away of even a small amount?

Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā aññatarassa paccantanagarassa parikhāpiṭṭhe petī hutvā nibbatti. Atha hatthinipuravāsī aññataro upāsako vaṇijjāya taṃ nagaraṃ gantvā rattiyā paccūsasamaye parikhāpiṭṭhaṃ gato tādisena payojanena. Sā tattha taṃ disvā sañjānitvā naggā aṭṭhittacamattāvasesasarīrā ativiya bībhacchadassanā avidūre ṭhatvā attānaṃ dassesi. So taṃ disvā –

Later, after passing away, she was reborn as a ghost on the moat of a certain border city. Then, a certain lay follower living in Hatthinipura went to that city for trade and went to the moat at dawn for some purpose. Seeing him there, she recognized him and, being naked, with a body remaining only as skin and bones, and extremely repulsive to look at, she stood not far away and showed herself. Seeing her, he -

464.

464.

‘‘Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpāsi, kisā dhamanisanthatā;

"Naked, of ugly form, you are,
Lean, covered with veins;
With protruding ribs, emaciated, who are you standing here?"

Gāthāya pucchi. Sāpissa –

Asked in the verse. She also -

465.

465.

‘‘Ahaṃ bhadante petīmhi, duggatā yamalokikā;

"I am, venerable sir, a ghost,
Miserable, a resident of Yama's world;
Having done evil deeds,
I have gone to the ghost realm from here."

Gāthāya attānaṃ pakāsesi. Puna tena –

Revealed herself in the verse. Then by him -

466.

466.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil have you done by body, speech, or mind?
By the result of what deed have you gone to the ghost realm from here?"

Gāthāya katakammaṃ pucchitā –

When asked about the deed she had done in the verse -

467.

467.

‘‘Anāvaṭesu titthesu, viciniṃ aḍḍhamāsakaṃ;

"In open bathing places,
I searched for half a māsaka;
Where there were worthy things to give,
I did not make a refuge for myself.

468.

468.

‘‘Nadiṃ upemi tasitā, rittakā parivattati;

"I approach a river, thirsty, but it turns out empty;
I approach shade in hot weather, but heat turns out.

469.

469.

‘‘Aggivaṇṇo ca me vāto, ḍahanto upavāyati;

"And a wind like fire blows upon me,
Burning me intensely;
This too, venerable sir, I deserve,
And other evil worse than that.

470.

470.

‘‘Gantvāna hatthiniṃ puraṃ, vajjesi mayha mātaraṃ;

"Having gone to Hatthinipura,
You should tell my mother;
'Your daughter was seen by me,
Miserable, a resident of Yama's world;
Having done evil deeds,
She has gone to the ghost realm from here.'

471.

471.

‘‘Atthi me ettha nikkhittaṃ, anakkhātañca taṃ mayā;

"There is something of mine deposited here,
And that was not disclosed by me;
Four hundred thousand,
Underneath the couch.

472.

472.

‘‘Tato me dānaṃ dadatu, tassā ca hotu jīvikā;

"From that, let her give alms for me,
And let that be her livelihood;
And having given alms, let my mother,
Dedicate the merit to me;
Then I will be happy,
With all desires fulfilled."

Imāhi chahi gāthāhi attanā katakammañceva puna tena attano kātabbaṃ atthañca ācikkhi.

In these six verses, she declared both the deed she had done and the benefit to be done by him.

467.Tatthaanāvaṭesu titthesūti kenaci anivāritesu nadītaḷākādīnaṃ titthapadesesu, yattha manussā nhāyanti, udakakiccaṃ karonti, tādisesu ṭhānesu.Viciniṃ aḍḍhamāsakanti ‘‘manussehi ṭhapetvā vissaritaṃ apināmettha kiñci labheyya’’nti lobhābhibhūtā aḍḍhamāsakamattampi viciniṃ gavesiṃ. Atha vāanāvaṭesu titthesūti upasaṅkamanena kenaci anivāritesu sattānaṃ payogāsayasuddhiyā kāraṇabhāvena titthabhūtesu samaṇabrāhmaṇesu vijjamānesu.Viciniṃ aḍḍhamāsakanti maccheramalapariyuṭṭhitacittā kassaci kiñci adentī aḍḍhamāsakampi visesena ciniṃ, na sañciniṃ puññaṃ. Tenāha‘‘santesu deyyadhammesu, dīpaṃ nākāsimattano’’ti.

467. There, anāvaṭesu titthesu means in bathing places of rivers, lakes, etc., not restricted by anyone, in such places where people bathe and do their water duties. Viciniṃ aḍḍhamāsakaṃ means, being overcome by greed, thinking "perhaps I might get something left behind and forgotten by people," I searched and sought even for half a māsaka. Or else, anāvaṭesu titthesu means in the presence of ascetics and Brahmins, who are places of pilgrimage because they are the cause of the purification of the means of approach for beings, not restricted by anyone through approach. Viciniṃ aḍḍhamāsakaṃ means, with a mind enveloped in the stain of stinginess, not giving anything to anyone, I especially accumulated, but did not accumulate merit, even for half a māsaka. Therefore, she said "santesu deyyadhammesu, dīpaṃ nākāsimattano."

468.Tasitāti pipāsitā.Rittakāti kākapeyyā sandamānāpi nadī mama pāpakammena udakena rittā tucchā vālikamattā hutvā parivattati.Uṇhesūti uṇhasamayesu.Ātapo parivattatīti chāyāṭṭhānaṃ mayi upagatāya ātapo sampajjati.

468. Tasitā means thirsty. Rittakā means even though the river is flowing with drinkable water, because of my evil deed, it turns out to be empty, void, or just sand. Uṇhesu means in hot seasons. Ātapo parivattati means when I approach a shady place, heat arises.

469-70.Aggivaṇṇoti samphassena aggisadiso. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘ḍahanto upavāyatī’’ti.Etañca, bhante, arahāmīti,bhanteti taṃ upāsakaṃ garukārena vadati. Bhante, etañca yathāvuttaṃ pipāsādidukkhaṃ, aññañca tato pāpakaṃ dāruṇaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavituṃ arahāmi tajjassa pāpassa katattāti adhippāyo.Vajjesīti vadeyyāsi.

469-70. Aggivaṇṇo means like fire in touch. Therefore, it is said "ḍahanto upavāyati." Etañca, bhante, arahāmi means, bhante is said to the lay follower with respect. Venerable sir, I deserve to experience this aforementioned suffering of thirst, etc., and other suffering more evil and terrible than that, because of having done such evil, is the meaning. Vajjesi means you should tell.

471-72.Ettha nikkhittaṃ, anakkhātanti ‘‘ettakaṃ ettha nikkhitta’’nti anācikkhitaṃ. Idāni tassa parimāṇaṃ ṭhapitaṭṭhānañca dassentī‘‘cattāri satasahassāni, pallaṅkassa ca heṭṭhato’’ti āha. Tatthapallaṅkassāti pubbe attano sayanapallaṅkassa.Tatoti nihitadhanato ekadesaṃ gahetvā mamaṃ uddissa dānaṃ detu.Tassāti mayhaṃ mātuyā.

471-72. Ettha nikkhittaṃ, anakkhātaṃ means not disclosed, "so much is deposited here." Now, showing the amount and the place where it was kept, she said "cattāri satasahassāni, pallaṅkassa ca heṭṭhato." There, pallaṅkassa means of her former sleeping couch. Tato means having taken a portion from the deposited wealth, let her give alms dedicating it to me. Tassā means for my mother.

Evaṃ tāya petiyā vutte so upāsako tassā vacanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā tattha attano karaṇīyaṃ tīretvā hatthinipuraṃ gantvā tassā mātuyā tamatthaṃ ārocesi. Tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ –

Having been told thus by that ghost, that lay follower, accepting her words, having completed his business there, went to Hatthinipura and informed her mother of that matter. To show that matter -

473.

473.

Sādhūti so paṭissutvā, gantvāna hatthiniṃ puraṃ;

He replied, "Good," and having gone to Hatthinipura;
He told her mother -

Avoca tassā mātaraṃ –

"Your daughter was seen by me,
Miserable, a resident of Yama's world;
Having done evil deeds,
She has gone to the ghost realm from here.

‘‘Dhītā ca te mayā diṭṭhā, duggatā yamalokikā;

474.

474.

"She instructed me there,
You should tell my mother;
'Your daughter was seen by me,
Miserable, a resident of Yama's world;
Having done evil deeds,
She has gone to the ghost realm from here.'

‘‘Sā maṃ tattha samādapesi, vajjesi mayha mātaraṃ;

475.

475.

"'There is something of mine deposited here,
And that was not disclosed by me;
Four hundred thousand,
Underneath the couch.

‘‘‘Atthi ca me ettha nikkhittaṃ, anakkhātañca taṃ mayā;

476.

476.

"'From that, let her give alms for me,
And let that be her livelihood;
And having given alms, let my mother,
Dedicate the merit to me;
Then I will be happy,
With all desires fulfilled.'

‘‘‘Tato me dānaṃ dadatu, tassā ca hotu jīvikā;

477.

477.

"Then she gave alms,
And dedicated the merit to her;
And the ghost was happy,
And she had a good livelihood."

‘‘Tato hi sā dānamadā, tassā dakkhiṇamādisī;

The compilers of the Saṅgīti said. These are easy to understand.

Saṅgītikārā āhaṃsu. Tā suviññeyyāva.

Having heard that, her mother gave alms to the Saṅgha of monks and dedicated it to her. Then, standing in the attainment of recovered possessions, she showed herself to her mother and told the reason. The mother told the monks, and the monks told the Blessed One about that incident. The Blessed One, having made that matter the occasion for the origin of the story, taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering. That teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Taṃ sutvā tassā mātā bhikkhusaṅghassa dānaṃ datvā tassā ādisi. Tena sā paṭiladdhūpakaraṇasampattiyaṃ ṭhitā mātu attānaṃ dassetvā taṃ kāraṇaṃ ācikkhi, mātā bhikkhūnaṃ ārocesi, bhikkhū taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

The Commentary on the Seriṇīpetavatthu is finished.

Seriṇīpetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

7. Migaluddakapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
7. Migaluddakapetavatthuvaṇṇanā

Naranāripurakkhato yuvā This was said concerning the Migaluddaka ghost while the Blessed One was dwelling in the Veḷuvana. It is said that in Rājagaha, a certain hunter made his living by killing deer day and night. He had a lay follower as a friend, who, being unable to dissuade him from evil at all times, encouraged him in merit at night, saying, "Come, friend, abstain from killing living beings at night." He abstained at night and killed living beings only during the day.

Naranāripurakkhatoyuvāti idaṃ bhagavati veḷuvane viharante migaluddakapetaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Rājagahe kira aññataro luddako rattindivaṃ mige vadhitvā jīvikaṃ kappesi. Tasseko upāsako mitto ahosi, so taṃ sabbakālaṃ pāpato nivattetuṃ asakkonto ‘‘ehi, samma, rattiyaṃ pāṇātipātā viramāhī’’ti rattiyaṃ puññe samādapesi. So rattiyaṃ viramitvā divā eva pāṇātipātaṃ karoti.

Later, after passing away, he was reborn as a celestial ghost near Rājagaha, experiencing great suffering during the day and being attended to at night, endowed and furnished with the five sense pleasures. Seeing him, Venerable Nārada -

So aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā rājagahasamīpe vemānikapeto hutvā nibbatto, divasabhāgaṃ mahādukkhaṃ anubhavitvā rattiyaṃ pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūto paricāresi. Taṃ disvā āyasmā nārado –

478.

478.

"Surrounded by men and women, young, you shine with delightful sense qualities;
During the day you experience suffering, what did you do in your former life?"

‘‘Naranāripurakkhato yuvā, rajanīyehi kāmaguṇehi sobhasi;

naranāripurakkhato means surrounded and attended by attendant sons and daughters of the gods. Yuvā means young. Rajanīyehi means with desirable, causing the arising of lust. Kāmaguṇehī means with sensual components. Sobhasi means you shine with endowment at night, is the meaning. Therefore, he said "divasaṃ anubhosi kāraṇaṃ," but during the day you experience various kinds of suffering. Rajanī means or in nights. Yehī is just a particle. Kimakāsi purimāya jātiyā means what kind of deed, resulting in such happiness and suffering, did you do in your previous life? Tell that, is the meaning.

naranāripurakkhatoti paricārakabhūtehi devaputtehi devadhītāhi ca purakkhato payirupāsito.Yuvāti taruṇo.Rajanīyehīti kamanīyehi rāguppattihetubhūtehi.Kāmaguṇehīti kāmakoṭṭhāsehi.Sobhasīti samaṅgibhāvena virocasi rattiyanti adhippāyo. Tenāha‘‘divasaṃ anubhosi kāraṇa’’nti, divasabhāge pana nānappakāraṃ kāraṇaṃ ghātanaṃ paccanubhavasi.Rajanīti vā rattīsu.Yehīti nipātamattaṃ.Kimakāsi purimāya jātiyāti evaṃ sukhadukkhasaṃvattaniyaṃ kiṃ nāma kammaṃ ito purimāya jātiyā tvaṃ akattha, taṃ kathehīti attho.

Having heard that, the ghost, declaring to the Thera the deed he had done -

Taṃ sutvā peto therassa attanā katakammaṃ ācikkhanto –

479.

479.

"In beautiful Rājagaha, in delightful Giribbaja,
I was formerly a deer hunter, with bloody hands, cruel.

‘‘Ahaṃ rājagahe ramme, ramaṇīye giribbaje;

480.

480.

‘‘Avirodhakaresu pāṇisu, puthusattesu paduṭṭhamānaso;

"With bloodstained hands among the harmless beings, with a mind corrupted towards other creatures,
I wandered, always very cruel, delighting in harming others, unrestrained.

481.

481.

‘‘Tassa me sahāyo suhadayo, saddho āsi upāsako;

"I had a friend, kind-hearted, a faithful upāsaka;
He, too, out of compassion for me, repeatedly restrained me.

482.

482.

‘‘‘Mākāsi pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, mā tāta duggatiṃ agā;

"'Do not do evil deeds, do not go to a bad destination, dear one;
If you wish for happiness after death, abstain from killing beings, be restrained.'

483.

483.

‘‘Tassāhaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā, sukhakāmassa hitānukampino;

"Hearing his words, desiring happiness, compassionate and kind;
I did not follow his entire advice, foolish, delighting in long-standing evil.

484.

484.

‘‘So maṃ puna bhūrisumedhaso, anukampāya saṃyame nivesayi;

"He, again, with great wisdom, out of compassion, established me in restraint;
'If you kill beings during the day, then at least be restrained at night.'

485.

485.

‘‘Svāhaṃ divā hanitvā pāṇino, virato rattimahosi saññato;

"So, having killed beings during the day, I refrained at night, being restrained;
At night I am cared for, during the day I am devoured, in a bad state.

486.

486.

‘‘Tassa kammassa kusalassa, anubhomi rattiṃ amānusiṃ;

"Due to that wholesome deed, I experience superhuman things at night;
During the day, chased by dogs, they run around to devour me.

487.

487.

‘‘Ye ca te satatānuyogino, dhuvaṃ payuttā sugatassa sāsane;

"And those who are constantly diligent, firmly engaged in the Sugata's teaching;
I think they attain only the Deathless, the unconditioned state." –

Imā gāthā abhāsi.

These verses he spoke.

479-80.Tatthaluddoti dāruṇo.Lohitapāṇīti abhiṇhaṃ pāṇaghātena lohitamakkhitapāṇī.Dāruṇoti kharo, sattānaṃ hiṃsanakoti attho.Avirodhakaresūti kenaci virodhaṃ akarontesu migasakuṇādīsu.

479-80. Here, luddo means cruel. Lohitapāṇī means one whose hands are constantly stained with blood from killing beings. Dāruṇo means harsh, meaning one who harms beings. Avirodhakaresu means towards harmless animals like deer and birds.

482-83.Asaṃyamāti asaṃvarā dussīlyā.Sakalānusāsaninti sabbaṃ anusāsaniṃ, sabbakālaṃ pāṇātipātato paṭiviratinti attho.Cirapāpābhiratoti cirakālaṃ pāpe abhirato.

482-83. Asaṃyamā means without restraint, immorality. Sakalānusāsaniṃ means all the advice, meaning complete abstinence from killing at all times. Cirapāpābhirato means one who delights in evil for a long time.

484.Saṃyameti sucarite.Nivesayīhi nivesesi.Sace divā hanasi pāṇino, atha te rattiṃ bhavatu saṃyamoti nivesitākāradassanaṃ. So kira sallapāsasajjanādinā rattiyampi pāṇavadhaṃ anuyutto ahosi.

484. Saṃyame means in good conduct. Nivesayī means he established. Sace divā hanasi pāṇino, atha te rattiṃ bhavatu saṃyamo is showing the way he was established. It seems that he was engaged in killing beings even at night by means of traps and snares.

485.Divā khajjāmi duggatoti idāni duggatiṃ gato mahādukkhappatto divasabhāge khādiyāmi. Tassa kira divā sunakhehi migānaṃ khādāpitattā kammasarikkhakaṃ phalaṃ hoti, divasabhāge mahantā sunakhā upadhāvitvā aṭṭhisaṅghātamattāvasesaṃ sarīraṃ karonti. Rattiyā pana upagatāya taṃ pākatikameva hoti, dibbasampattiṃ anubhavati. Tena vuttaṃ –

485. Divā khajjāmi duggato means now, having gone to a bad state, having reached great suffering, I am devoured during the day. It seems that because he used to feed the deer to the dogs during the day, he receives a similar result of his kamma; during the day, large dogs run up and make his body remain only as a collection of bones. But when the night comes, he becomes natural again, and experiences divine prosperity. Therefore, it was said –

486.

486.

‘‘Tassa kammassa kusalassa, anubhomi rattiṃ amānusiṃ;

"Due to that wholesome deed, I experience superhuman things at night;
During the day, chased by dogs, they run around to devour me."

paṭihatāti paṭihatacittā baddhāghātā viya hutvā.Samantā khāditunti mama sarīraṃ samantato khādituṃ upadhāvanti. Idañca nesaṃ ativiya attano bhayāvahaṃ upagamanakālaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Te pana upadhāvitvā aṭṭhimattāvasesaṃ sarīraṃ katvā gacchanti.

Paṭihatā means with repelled minds, as if bound by hatred. Samantā khādituṃ means they run around to devour my body from all sides. And this was said taking into account the time of their approach, which is very frightening to him. But they run up, make his body remain only as bones, and then leave.

487.Ye ca te satatānuyoginoti osānagāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – ahampi nāma rattiyaṃ pāṇavadhamattato virato evarūpaṃ sampattiṃ anubhavāmi.Yepanatepurisāsugatassabuddhassa bhagavatosāsaneadhisīlādikedhuvaṃ payuttādaḷhaṃ payuttāsatataṃsabbakālaṃ anuyogavantā,tepuññavantokevalaṃlokiyasukhena asammissaṃ‘‘asaṅkhataṃ pada’’nti laddhanāmaṃamatameva adhigacchantimaññe, natthi tesaṃ tadadhigame koci vibandhoti.

487. Ye ca te satatānuyogino This is the summary meaning of the concluding verse – Even I, having abstained from killing only at night, experience such prosperity. Ye pana te purisā sugatassa buddhassa bhagavato sāsane adhisīlādike dhuvaṃ payuttā daḷhaṃ payuttā satataṃ sabbakālaṃ anuyogavantā, those meritorious ones, who are constantly diligent in the Sugata’s, the Buddha’s, the Blessed One’s, teaching, in the higher morality and so on, firmly engaged, strongly engaged, always diligent, te puññavanto kevalaṃ lokiyasukhena asammissaṃ asaṅkhataṃ padaṃti laddhanāmaṃ amatameva adhigacchanti those meritorious ones attain only the Deathless, which is named "unconditioned state," unmixed with worldly happiness, maññe, natthi tesaṃ tadadhigame koci vibandho I think there is no obstacle for them in attaining that.

Evaṃ tena petena vutte thero taṃ pavattiṃ satthu ārocesi. Satthā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sabbampi vuttanayameva.

When the peta had spoken thus, the Elder reported that incident to the Teacher. The Teacher, making that matter the occasion for a discourse, taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering. Everything is as has been said before.

Migaluddakapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Migaluddaka Peta Story is finished.

8. Dutiyamigaluddakapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
8. The Commentary on the Second Migaluddaka Peta Story

Kūṭāgāre ca pāsādeti idaṃ bhagavati veḷuvane viharante aparaṃ migaluddakapetaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Rājagahe kira aññataro māgaviko māṇavo vibhavasampannopi samāno bhogasukhaṃ pahāya rattindivaṃ mige hananto vicarati. Tassa sahāyabhūto eko upāsako anuddayaṃ paṭicca – ‘‘sādhu, samma, pāṇātipātato viramāhi, mā te ahosi dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāyā’’ti ovādaṃ adāsi. So taṃ anādiyi. Atha so upāsako aññataraṃ attano manobhāvanīyaṃ khīṇāsavattheraṃ yāci – ‘‘sādhu, bhante, asukapurisassa tathā dhammaṃ desetha, yathā so pāṇātipātato virameyyā’’ti.

Kūṭāgāre ca pāsāde This was spoken by the Blessed One while dwelling in the Veḷuvana, concerning another Migaluddaka peta. It seems that in Rājagaha, a certain Māgavika youth, although possessing wealth, abandoned the pleasure of wealth and wandered about killing deer day and night. An upāsaka, being a friend of his, out of compassion, gave him advice, saying, "Good sir, abstain from killing beings, may it not be for your harm and suffering for a long time." He did not heed it. Then that upāsaka requested a certain venerable Elder who was a khīṇāsava and pleasing to his mind, saying, "Venerable Sir, please teach the Dhamma to such-and-such a person in such a way that he may abstain from killing beings."

Athekadivasaṃ so thero rājagahe piṇḍāya caranto tassa gehadvāre aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ disvā so māgaviko sañjātabahumāno paccuggantvā gehaṃ pavesetvā āsanaṃ paññāpetvā adāsi. Nisīdi thero paññatte āsane, sopi theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā nisīdi. Tassa thero pāṇātipāte ādīnavaṃ, tato viratiyā ānisaṃsañca pakāsesi. So taṃ sutvāpi tato viramituṃ na icchi. Atha naṃ thero āha – ‘‘sace, tvaṃ āvuso, sabbena sabbaṃ viramituṃ na sakkosi, rattimpi tāva viramassū’’ti, so ‘‘sādhu, bhante, viramāmi ratti’’nti tato virami. Sesaṃ anantaravatthusadisaṃ. Gāthāsu pana –

Then one day that Elder, while wandering for alms in Rājagaha, stood at the door of his house. Seeing him, that Māgavika, with great respect, went out to meet him, brought him into the house, and offered him a seat. The Elder sat down on the prepared seat, and he too approached the Elder and sat down. The Elder explained to him the danger in killing beings, and the benefit of abstaining from it. Even after hearing that, he did not want to abstain from it. Then the Elder said to him, "If, friend, you are not able to abstain completely, at least abstain at night," and he said, "Good, Venerable Sir, I will abstain at night," and from then on he abstained. The rest is similar to the previous story. But in the verses –

488.

488.

‘‘Kūṭāgāre ca pāsāde, pallaṅke gonakatthate;

"In a peaked house, in a palace, on a couch spread with blankets,
You rejoice with fivefold music, well-played.

489.

489.

‘‘Tato ratyā vivasāne, sūriyuggamanaṃ pati;

"Then at the end of the night, when the sun rises;
Cast away in the charnel ground, you undergo great suffering.

490.

490.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil have you done by body, speech, or mind;
By the result of what kamma do you undergo this suffering?" –

Tīhi gāthāhi nāradatthero naṃ paṭipucchi. Athassa peto –

With these three verses, Nārada Thera questioned him. Then the peta said –

491.

491.

‘‘Ahaṃ rājagahe ramme, ramaṇīye giribbaje;

"In lovely Rājagaha, in delightful Giribbaja;
I was formerly a hunter of deer, a cruel and unrestrained hunter.

492.

492.

‘‘Tassa me sahāyo suhadayo, saddho āsi upāsako;

"I had a friend, kind-hearted, a faithful upāsaka;
A bhikkhu who frequented his family was a disciple of Gotama;
He, too, out of compassion for me, repeatedly restrained me.

493.

493.

‘‘‘Mākāsi pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, mā tāta duggatiṃ agā;

"'Do not do evil deeds, do not go to a bad destination, dear one;
If you wish for happiness after death, abstain from killing beings, be restrained.'

494.

494.

‘‘Tassāhaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā, sukhakāmassa hitānukampino;

"Hearing his words, desiring happiness, compassionate and kind;
I did not follow his entire advice, foolish, delighting in long-standing evil.

495.

495.

‘‘So maṃ puna bhūrisumedhaso, anukampāya saṃyame nivesayi;

"He, again, with great wisdom, out of compassion, established me in restraint;
'If you kill beings during the day, then at least be restrained at night.'

496.

496.

‘‘Svāhaṃ divā hanitvā pāṇino, virato rattimahosi saññato;

"So, having killed beings during the day, I refrained at night, being restrained;
At night I am cared for, during the day I am devoured, in a bad state.

497.

497.

‘‘Tassa kammassa kusalassa, anubhomi rattiṃ amānusiṃ;

"Due to that wholesome deed, I experience superhuman things at night;
During the day, chased by dogs, they run around to devour me.

498.

498.

‘‘Ye ca te satatānuyogino, dhuvaṃ payuttā sugatassa sāsane;

"And those who are constantly diligent, firmly engaged in the Sugata's teaching;
I think they attain only the Deathless, the unconditioned state." –

Tamatthaṃ ācikkhi. Tāsaṃ attho heṭṭhā vuttanayova.

He declared that matter. Their meaning is as has been said below.

Dutiyamigaluddakapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Second Migaluddaka Peta Story is finished.

9. Kūṭavinicchayikapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
9. The Commentary on the Kūṭavinicchayika Peta Story

Mālī kiriṭī kāyūrīti idaṃ satthari veḷuvane viharante kūṭavinicchayikapetaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Tadā bimbisāro rājā māsassa chasu divasesu uposathaṃ upavasati, taṃ anuvattantā bahū manussā uposathaṃ upavasanti. Rājā attano santikaṃ āgatāgate manusse pucchati – ‘‘kiṃ tumhehi uposatho upavuttho, udāhu na upavuttho’’ti? Tatreko adhikaraṇe niyuttakapuriso pisuṇavāco nekatiko lañjagāhako ‘‘na upavutthomhī’’ti vattuṃ asahanto ‘‘upavutthomhi, devā’’ti āha. Atha naṃ rājasamīpato nikkhantaṃ sahāyo āha – ‘‘kiṃ, samma, ajja tayā upavuttho’’ti? ‘‘Bhayenāhaṃ, samma, rañño sammukhā evaṃ avocaṃ, nāhaṃ uposathiko’’ti.

Mālī kiriṭī kāyūrī This was spoken by the Teacher while dwelling in the Veḷuvana, concerning the Kūṭavinicchayika peta. At that time, King Bimbisāra observed the uposatha on six days of the month, and many people, following his example, observed the uposatha. The king asked the people who came to his presence, "Have you observed the uposatha, or have you not observed it?" There, a certain official employed in legal affairs, a slanderer, a deceiver, a bribe-taker, being unable to say "I have not observed it," said, "I have observed it, Your Majesty." Then, when he had left the king's presence, a friend said to him, "Well, friend, have you observed the uposatha today?" "Out of fear, friend, I said so in the king's presence, I am not observing the uposatha."

Atha naṃ sahāyo āha – ‘‘yadi evaṃ upaḍḍhuposathopi tāva te ajja hotu, uposathaṅgāni samādiyāhī’’ti. So tassa vacanaṃ ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā gehaṃ gantvā abhutvāva mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā uposathaṃ adhiṭṭhāya rattiyaṃ vāsūpagato rittāsayasambhūtena balavavātahetukena sūlena upacchinnāyusaṅkhāro cutianantaraṃ pabbatakucchiyaṃ vemānikapeto hutvā nibbatti. So hi ekarattiṃ uposatharakkhaṇamattena vimānaṃ paṭilabhi dasakaññāsahassaparivāraṃ mahatiñca dibbasampattiṃ. Kūṭavinicchayikatāya pana pesuṇikatāya ca attano piṭṭhimaṃsāni sayameva okkantitvā khādati. Taṃ āyasmā nārado gijjakūṭato otaranto disvā –

Then his friend said to him, "If so, let even half an uposatha be yours today, undertake the uposatha precepts." He accepted his words with "Good," and going home, without even eating, having washed his face, resolving on the uposatha, having gone to bed at night, due to a strong pain caused by wind arising from an empty stomach, his life force was cut off, and after death, he was reborn as a vemānika peta in a mountain cave. Indeed, by observing the uposatha for one night, he obtained a mansion, surrounded by ten thousand maidens, and great divine prosperity. But due to his false judgment and slander, he himself cuts off and eats the flesh of his back. Venerable Nārada, descending from Gijjhakūṭa, saw him –

499.

499.

‘‘Mālī kiriṭī kāyūrī, gattā te candanussadā;

"Adorned with garlands, a crown, and armlets, your limbs are anointed with sandalwood;
Your face is bright, you shine like the color of the sun.

500.

500.

‘‘Amānusā pārisajjā, ye teme paricārakā;

"Superhuman are your attendants, those who attend to you;
Ten thousand maidens, those who are your attendants;
They wear conch-shell armlets, adorned with golden ornaments.

501.

501.

‘‘Mahānubhāvosi tuvaṃ, lomahaṃsanarūpavā;

"You are of great power, with a hair-raising form;
You yourself cut off and eat the flesh of your back.

502.

502.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil have you done by body, speech, or mind;
By the result of what kamma do you yourself cut off and eat the flesh of your back?

503.

503.

‘‘Attanohaṃ anatthāya, jīvaloke acārisaṃ;

"For my own harm, I behaved in the world of the living;
With slander, false speech, deceit, and fraud.

504.

504.

‘‘Tatthāhaṃ parisaṃ gantvā, saccakāle upaṭṭhite;

"There, having gone to the assembly, when the time for truth arose;
Rejecting what is beneficial and the Dhamma, I followed what is unrighteous.

505.

505.

‘‘Evaṃ so khādatattānaṃ, yo hoti piṭṭhimaṃsiko;

"Thus he who eats himself, who is a backbiter;
As I eat today, the flesh of my own back.

506.

506.

‘‘Tayidaṃ tayā nārada sāmaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, anukampakā ye kusalā vadeyyuṃ;

"This, Nārada, you have seen with your own eyes, those who are compassionate should speak about;
Do not slander, nor speak falsely, do not be a backbiter yourself." –

Thero catūhi gāthāhi pucchi, sopi tassa catūhi gāthāhi etamatthaṃ vissajjesi.

The Elder asked with four verses, and he explained this matter to him with four verses.

499.Tatthamālīti māladhārī, dibbapupphehi paṭimaṇḍitoti adhippāyo.Kiriṭīti veṭhitasīso.Kāyūrīti keyūravā, bāhālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitoti attho.Gattāti sarīrāvayavā.Candanussadāti candanasārānulittā.Sūriyavaṇṇova sobhasīti bālasūriyasadisavaṇṇo eva hutvā virocasi. ‘‘Araṇavaṇṇī pabhāsasī’’tipi pāḷi, araṇanti araṇiyehi devehi sadisavaṇṇo ariyāvakāsoti attho.

499. Here, mālī means wearing garlands, meaning adorned with divine flowers. Kiriṭī means with a turban on his head. Kāyūrī means wearing armlets, meaning adorned with arm ornaments. Gattā means the parts of the body. Candanussadā means anointed with sandalwood essence. Sūriyavaṇṇova sobhasī means shining just like the color of the rising sun. "Araṇavaṇṇī pabhāsasī" is also a reading, araṇa means of a color similar to that of the gods in the wilderness, meaning a worthy abode.

500.Pārisajjāti parisapariyāpannā, upaṭṭhākāti attho.Tuvanti tvaṃ.Lomahaṃsanarūpavāti passantānaṃ lomahaṃsajananarūpayutto. Mahānubhāvatāsamaṅgitāya hetaṃ vuttaṃ.Ukkaccāti ukkantitvā, chinditvāti attho.

500. Pārisajjā means surrounding the retinue, meaning attendants. Tuvaṃ means you. Lomahaṃsanarūpavā means possessing a form that causes the hair of those who see him to stand on end. This was said due to his association with great power. Ukkacca means having cut off, having severed.

503.Acārisanti acariṃ paṭipajjiṃ.Pesuññamusāvādenāti pesuññena ceva musāvādena ca.Nikativañcanāya cāti nikatiyā vañcanāya ca patirūpadassanena paresaṃ vikārena vañcanāya ca.

503. Acārisaṃ means I behaved, I practiced. Pesuññamusāvādenā means with slander and false speech. Nikativañcanāya ca means with deceit and fraud, with showing a false appearance and deceiving others by changing their appearance.

504.Saccakāleti saccaṃ vattuṃ yuttakāle.Atthanti diṭṭhadhammikādibhedaṃ hitaṃ.Dhammanti kāraṇaṃ ñāyaṃ.Nirākatvāti chaḍḍetvā pahāya.Soti yo pesuññādiṃ ācarati, so satto. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

504. Saccakāle means at the time suitable for speaking the truth. Atthaṃ means benefit, such as the distinction between what is seen in this life and so on. Dhammaṃ means cause, rightness. Nirākatvā means having rejected, having abandoned. So means that being who practices slander and so on. The rest is all as has been said below.

Kūṭavinicchayikapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Commentary on the Kūṭavinicchayika Petavatthu is complete.

10. Dhātuvivaṇṇapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Dhātuvivaṇṇa Petavatthu

Antalikkhasmiṃtiṭṭhantoti idaṃ dhātuvivaṇṇapetavatthu. Bhagavati kusinārāyaṃ upavattane mallānaṃ sālavane yamakasālānamantare parinibbute dhātuvibhāge ca kate rājā ajātasattu attanā laddhadhātubhāgaṃ gahetvā satta vassāni satta ca māse satta ca divase buddhaguṇe anussaranto uḷārapūjaṃ pavattesi. Tattha asaṅkheyyā appameyyā manussā cittāni pasādetvā saggūpagā ahesuṃ, chaḷāsītimattāni pana purisasahassāni cirakālabhāvitena assaddhiyena micchādassanena ca vipallatthacittā pasādanīyepi ṭhāne attano cittāni padosetvā petesu uppajjiṃsu. Tasmiṃyeva rājagahe aññatarassa vibhavasampannassa kuṭumbikassa bhariyā dhītā suṇisā ca pasannacittā ‘‘dhātupūjaṃ karissāmā’’ti gandhapupphādīni gahetvā dhātuṭṭhānaṃ gantuṃ āraddhā. So kuṭumbiko ‘‘kiṃ aṭṭhikānaṃ pūjanenā’’ti tā paribhāsetvā dhātupūjaṃ vivaṇṇesi. Tāpi tassa vacanaṃ anādiyitvā tattha gantvā dhātupūjaṃ katvā gehaṃ āgatā tādisena rogena abhibhūtā nacirasseva kālaṃ katvā devaloke nibbattiṃsu. So pana kodhena abhibhūto nacirasseva kālaṃ katvā tena pāpakammena petesu nibbatti.

Antalikkhasmiṃ tiṭṭhanto This Dhātuvivaṇṇa Petavatthu (story of the petas who reviled the relics) begins. When the Blessed One attained Parinibbāna in the Upavattana of the Mallas in Kusinārā, between the twin Sāla trees, and the distribution of the relics (dhātu) had been carried out, King Ajātasattu, having taken the portion of the relics he had obtained, for seven years, seven months, and seven days, caused great offerings to be made, recollecting the virtues of the Buddha. There, countless, immeasurable humans, having gladdened their hearts, were reborn in heaven. However, eighty-six thousand men, with minds corrupted by long-held lack of faith (assaddhiyena) and wrong views (micchādassanena), having soured their minds even in a place of inspiration, were born among the petas. In that same Rājagaha, the wife, daughter, and daughter-in-law of a certain wealthy householder, with joyful hearts, intending to "make offerings to the relics," took perfumes and flowers and began to go to the place of the relics. That householder, saying, "What is the use of worshipping bones?" disparaged them and reviled the relic-worship. They, disregarding his words, went there, made offerings to the relics, and returned home. Afflicted by such a disease, they soon died and were reborn in the deva-world. But he, overcome with anger, soon died and was reborn among the petas due to that evil deed.

Athekadivasaṃ āyasmā mahākassapo sattesu anukampāya tathārūpaṃ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkhāsi, yathā manussā te pete tā ca devatāyo passanti. Tathā pana katvā cetiyaṅgaṇe ṭhito taṃ dhātuvivaṇṇakaṃ petaṃ tīhi gāthāhi pucchi. Tassa so peto byākāsi –

Then, one day, Venerable Mahākassapa, out of compassion for beings, performed such a powerful act of psychic power (iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ), that humans saw those petas and those devatās. Having done so, standing in the courtyard of the cetiya, he asked that peta who reviled the relics with three verses. That peta explained:

507.

507.

‘‘Antalikkhasmiṃ tiṭṭhanto, duggandho pūti vāyasi;

"Standing in the sky, you stink, you foully reek;
And worms eat your face, foully stinking. What deed did you do before?

508.

508.

‘‘Tato satthaṃ gahetvāna, okkantanti punappunaṃ;

"Then, taking a knife, they cut repeatedly;
Having sprinkled with lye, they cut repeatedly.

509.

509.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil have you done by body, speech, or mind?
By the ripening of what deed do you undergo this suffering?"

510.

510.

‘‘Ahaṃ rājagahe ramme, ramaṇīye giribbaje;

"I, in delightful Rājagaha, in charming Giribbaja,
Was a master of wealth and grain, of great abundance, sir.

511.

511.

‘‘Tassāyaṃ me bhariyā ca, dhītā ca suṇisā ca me;

"This was my wife, my daughter, and my daughter-in-law;
When they were bringing garlands and lotuses, and expensive unguents,
To the Thūpa, I prevented them. That evil was done by me.

512.

512.

‘‘Chaḷāsītisahassāni, mayaṃ paccattavedanā;

"Eighty-six thousand of us are feeling individually;
Having reviled the Thūpa-offering, we burn intensely in hell.

513.

513.

‘‘Ye ca kho thūpapūjāya, vattante arahato mahe;

"Those who declare drawbacks in the great offering to the Thūpa of the Worthy One;
One should dissuade them from that.

514.

514.

‘‘Imā ca passa ayantiyo, māladhārī alaṅkatā;

"And see these women coming, garlanded, adorned;
Experiencing the result of garlands, prosperous and glorious.

515.

515.

‘‘Tañca disvāna accheraṃ, abbhutaṃ lomahaṃsanaṃ;

"Having seen that wonder, amazement, hair-raising sight,
The wise pay homage, venerate that Great Sage.

516.

516.

‘‘Sohaṃ nūna ito gantvā, yoniṃ laddhāna mānusiṃ;

"Surely, having gone from here, having obtained a human birth,
I will make offerings to the Thūpa, diligently again and again."

507-8.Tatthaduggandhoti aniṭṭhagandho, kuṇapagandhagandhīti attho. Tenāha‘‘pūti vāyasī’’ti.Tatoti duggandhavāyanato kimīhi khāyitabbato ca upari.Sattaṃ gahetvāna, okkantanti punappunanti kammasañcoditā sattā nisitadhāraṃ satthaṃ gahetvā punappunaṃ taṃ vaṇamukhaṃ avakantanti.Khārena paripphositvā, okkantanti punappunanti avakantitaṭṭhāne khārodakena āsiñcitvā punappunampi avakantanti.

507-8. Therein, duggandho means an unpleasant smell, smelling like a corpse. Therefore, he said, "pūti vāyasī." Tato means above the foul smell and being eaten by worms. Sattaṃ gahetvāna, okkantanti punappunaṃ means beings impelled by karma, taking a sharp knife, repeatedly cut that wound opening. Khārena paripphositvā, okkantanti punappunaṃ means having sprinkled the cut place with lye-water, they cut again and again.

510.Issaro dhanadhaññassa, supahūtassāti ativiya pahūtassa dhanassa dhaññassa ca issaro sāmī, aḍḍho mahaddhanoti attho.

510. Issaro dhanadhaññassa, supahūtassāti means the master, the owner, of very abundant wealth and grain, rich and wealthy.

511.Tassāyaṃ me bhariyā ca, dhītā ca suṇisā cāti tassa mayhaṃ ayaṃ purimattabhāve bhariyā, ayaṃ dhītā, ayaṃ suṇisā. Tā devabhūtā ākāse ṭhitāti dassento vadati.Paccagghanti abhinavaṃ.Thūpaṃ harantiyo vāresinti thūpaṃ pūjetuṃ upanentiyo dhātuṃ vivaṇṇento paṭikkhipiṃ.Taṃ pāpaṃ pakataṃ mayāti taṃ dhātuvivaṇṇanapāpaṃ kataṃ samācaritaṃ mayāti vippaṭisārappatto vadati.

511. Tassāyaṃ me bhariyā ca, dhītā ca suṇisā cāti means, this is my wife in a previous existence, this is my daughter, this is my daughter-in-law. Showing that those devatās are standing in the sky, he speaks. Paccagghaṃ means new. Thūpaṃ harantiyo vāresiṃ means while they were bringing (offerings) to worship the Thūpa, I, reviling the relics, prevented them. Taṃ pāpaṃ pakataṃ mayāti means, that evil of reviling the relics was done, committed by me. He speaks, overcome with remorse.

512.Chaḷāsītisahassānīti chasahassādhikā asītisahassamattā.Mayanti te pete attanā saddhiṃ saṅgahetvā vadati.Paccattavedanāti visuṃ visuṃ anubhuyyamānadukkhavedanā.Nirayeti baladukkhatāya pettivisayaṃ nirayasadisaṃ katvā āha.

512. Chaḷāsītisahassānīti means about eighty-six thousand. Mayaṃ means including those petas with himself, he speaks. Paccattavedanāti means suffering individually experienced. Nirayeti means having made the peta realm like hell due to the intensity of suffering, he speaks.

513.Ye ca kho thūpapūjāya, vattante arahato maheti arahato sammāsambuddhassa thūpaṃ uddissa pūjāmahe pavattamāne ahaṃ viya ye thūpapūjāya ādīnavaṃ dosaṃ pakāsenti. Te puggale tato puññato vivecayetha vivecāpayetha, paribāhire janayethāti aññāpadesena attano mahājāniyataṃ vibhāveti.

513. Ye ca kho thūpapūjāya, vattante arahato maheti means, like me, those who declare drawbacks in the offering to the Thūpa of the Arahant, the Fully Enlightened Buddha, in the great offering that is proceeding. One should dissuade and separate those individuals from that merit, should create exclusion, he reveals his great ruin by way of indirection.

514.Āyantiyoti ākāsena āgacchantiyo.Mālāvipākanti thūpe katamālāpūjāya vipākaṃ phalaṃ.Samiddhāti dibbasampattiyā samiddhā.Tā yasassiniyoti tā parivāravantiyo.

514. Āyantiyoti means coming through the sky. Mālāvipākaṃti means the result, the fruit, of the garland-offering made at the Thūpa. Samiddhāti means prosperous with divine wealth. Tā yasassiniyoti means they are attended by retinues.

515.Tañca disvānāti tassa atiparittassa pūjāpuññassa acchariyaṃ abbhutaṃ lomahaṃsanaṃ atiuḷāraṃ vipākavisesaṃ disvā.Namo karonti sappaññā, vandanti taṃ mahāmuninti, bhante kassapa, imā itthiyo taṃ uttamapuññakkhettabhūtaṃ vandanti abhivādenti, namo karonti namakkārañca karontīti attho.

515. Tañca disvānāti means having seen the wonderful, amazing, hair-raising, exceedingly great, special result of that very small merit of offering. Namo karonti sappaññā, vandanti taṃ mahāmuniṃti means, venerable Kassapa, these women venerate and salute that supreme field of merit, and pay homage, they also make reverence, is the meaning.

516.Atha so peto saṃviggamānaso saṃvegānurūpaṃ āyatiṃ attanā kātabbaṃ dassento‘‘sohaṃ nūnā’’ti gāthamāha. Taṃ uttānatthameva.

516. Then that peta, with a stirred mind, showing what he should do in the future in accordance with his agitation, spoke the verse "sohaṃ nūnā." Its meaning is straightforward.

Evaṃ petena vutto mahākassapo taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi.

Thus, Mahākassapa, spoken to by the peta, made that story of its origin, and taught the Dhamma to the assembled company.

Dhātuvivaṇṇapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Commentary on the Dhātuvivaṇṇa Petavatthu is complete.

Iti khuddaka-aṭṭhakathāya petavatthusmiṃ

Thus, in the Khuddaka-aṭṭhakathā, in the Petavatthu,

Dasavatthupaṭimaṇḍitassa

The description of the ten-sectioned

Tatiyassa cūḷavaggassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Third Cūḷavagga is complete.

4. Mahāvaggo

4. Mahāvagga

1. Ambasakkarapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Ambasakkara Petavatthu

Vesālīnāma nagaratthi vajjīnanti idaṃ ambasakkarapetavatthu. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati jetavane viharante ambasakkaro nāma licchavirājā micchādiṭṭhiko natthikavādo vesāliyaṃ rajjaṃ kāresi. Tena ca samayena vesālinagare aññatarassa vāṇijassa āpaṇasamīpe cikkhallaṃ hoti, tattha bahū janā uppatitvā atikkamantā kilamanti, keci kaddamena limpanti. Taṃ disvā so vāṇijo ‘‘mā ime manussā kalalaṃ akkamiṃsū’’ti apagataduggandhaṃ saṅkhavaṇṇapaṭibhāgaṃ gosīsaṭṭhiṃ āharāpetvā nikkhipāpesi. Pakatiyā ca sīlavā ahosi akkodhano saṇhavāco, paresañca yathābhūtaṃ guṇaṃ kitteti.

Vesālī nāma nagaratthi vajjīnanti This is the Ambasakkara Petavatthu. What is its origin? While the Blessed One was dwelling in Jetavana, a Licchavi king named Ambasakkara, a holder of wrong views (micchādiṭṭhiko) and a nihilist (natthikavādo), ruled in Vesālī. At that time, near the shop of a certain merchant in the city of Vesālī, there was mud (cikkhallaṃ). Many people, slipping and passing by, became weary, and some were smeared with mud. Seeing this, the merchant, thinking, "Let these people not step in the mud," had brought and placed a sandalwood plank (gosīsaṭṭhiṃ) with a color like a conch shell and free from bad smells. By nature, he was virtuous, not easily angered, gentle in speech, and praised the true qualities of others.

So ekasmiṃ divase attano sahāyassa nhāyantassa pamādena anolokentassa nivāsanavatthaṃ kīḷādhippāyena apanidhāya taṃ dukkhāpetvā adāsi. Bhāgineyyo panassa corikāya paragehato bhaṇḍaṃ āharitvā tasseva āpaṇe nikkhipi. Bhaṇḍasāmikā vīmaṃsantā bhaṇḍena saddhiṃ tassa bhāgineyyaṃ tañca rañño dassesuṃ. Rājā ‘‘imassa sīsaṃ chindatha, bhāgineyyaṃ panassa sūle āropethā’’ti āṇāpesi. Rājapurisā tathā akaṃsu. So kālaṃ katvā bhummadevesu uppajji. So gosīsena setuno katattā setavaṇṇaṃ dibbaṃ manojavaṃ assājānīyaṃ paṭilabhi, guṇavantānaṃ vaṇṇakathanena tassa gattato dibbagandho vāyati, sāṭakassa pana apanihitattā naggo ahosi. So attanā pubbe katakammaṃ olokento tadanusārena attano bhāgineyyaṃ sūle āropitaṃ disvā karuṇāya codiyamāno manojavaṃ assaṃ abhiruhitvā aḍḍharattisamaye tassa sūlā ropitaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā avidūre ṭhito ‘‘jīva, bho, jīvitameva seyyo’’ti divase divase vadati.

One day, he playfully hid the bathing cloth (nivāsanavatthaṃ) of a friend who was bathing and not paying attention, causing him distress, and then gave it back. His nephew, however, stole goods from another's house and placed them in his shop. The owners of the goods, searching, showed his nephew along with the goods to the king. The king ordered, "Cut off his head, and impale his nephew on a stake." The king's men did so. He, having died, was reborn among the earth-devas. Because he had made a bridge with sandalwood, he obtained a white, divine, mind-swift thoroughbred horse. Because of praising the qualities of virtuous ones, a divine fragrance emanated from his body, but because of hiding the garment, he was naked. Observing the deed he had done in the past, and being moved by compassion upon seeing his nephew impaled on a stake in accordance with that deed, he mounted the mind-swift horse and, in the middle of the night, went to the place where he was impaled, stood not far away, and said day by day, "Live, friend, life is indeed better."

Tena ca samayena ambasakkaro rājā hatthikkhandhavaragato nagaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ karonto aññatarasmiṃ gehe vātapānaṃ vivaritvā rājavibhūtiṃ passantiṃ ekaṃ itthiṃ disvā paṭibaddhacitto hutvā pacchāsane nisinnassa purisassa ‘‘imaṃ gharaṃ imañca itthiṃ upadhārehī’’ti saññaṃ datvā anukkamena attano rājagehaṃ paviṭṭho taṃ purisaṃ pesesi – ‘‘gaccha, bhaṇe, tassā itthiyā sasāmikabhāvaṃ vā asāmikabhāvaṃ vā jānāhī’’ti. So gantvā tassā sasāmikabhāvaṃ ñatvā rañño ārocesi. Rājā tassā itthiyā pariggahaṇūpāyaṃ cintento tassā sāmikaṃ pakkosāpetvā ‘‘ehi, bhaṇe, maṃ upaṭṭhāhī’’ti āha. So anicchantopi ‘‘rājā attano vacanaṃ akaronte mayi rājadaṇḍaṃ kareyyā’’ti bhayena rājupaṭṭhānaṃ sampaṭicchitvā divase divase rājupaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati. Rājāpi tassa bhattavetanaṃ dāpetvā katipayadivasātikkamena pātova upaṭṭhānaṃ āgataṃ evamāha – ‘‘gaccha, bhaṇe, amumhi ṭhāne ekā pokkharaṇī atthi, tato aruṇavaṇṇamattikaṃ rattuppalāni ca ānehi, sace ajjeva nāgaccheyyāsi, jīvitaṃ te natthī’’ti. Tasmiñca gate dvārapālaṃ āha – ‘‘ajja anatthaṅgate eva sūriye sabbadvārāni thaketabbānī’’ti.

At that time, King Ambasakkara, riding on the best of elephants, was circumambulating the city when he saw a woman opening a window in a certain house and looking at the royal splendor, and becoming attached in his mind, he gave a signal to a man sitting behind him, saying, "Note this house and this woman." Gradually entering his royal palace, he sent that man, saying, "Go, friend, find out whether that woman is married or unmarried." He went and, learning that she was married, reported it to the king. The king, thinking of a way to take possession of that woman, summoned her husband and said, "Come, friend, attend to me." Though unwilling, thinking, "If the king does not obey his words, he might inflict royal punishment on me," he agreed to attend to the king and went to attend to the king day by day. The king, having given him food and wages, after a few days, when he came to attend him early in the morning, said this: "Go, friend, in such and such a place there is a pond. Bring red-colored clay and red lotuses from there. If you do not come today, your life is not yours." When he had left, he said to the gatekeeper, "Today, when the sun has set, all the gates should be closed."

Sā ca pokkharaṇī vesāliyā tiyojanamatthake hoti, tathāpi so puriso maraṇabhayatajjito vātavegena pubbaṇheyeva taṃ pokkharaṇiṃ sampāpuṇi. ‘‘Sā ca pokkharaṇī amanussapariggahitā’’ti pageva sutattā bhayena so ‘‘atthi nu kho ettha koci parissayo’’ti samantato anupariyāyati. Taṃ disvā pokkharaṇipālako amanusso karuṇāyamānarūpo manussarūpena upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘kimatthaṃ, bho purisa, idhāgatosī’’ti āha. So tassa taṃ pavattiṃ kathesi. So ‘‘yadi evaṃ yāvadatthaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti attano dibbarūpaṃ dassetvā antaradhāyi.

That pond was three yojanas from Vesālī, yet that man, terrified by the fear of death, reached that pond with the speed of the wind in the forenoon. Because he had already heard that "that pond is possessed by non-humans," he, fearing, went around everywhere thinking, "Is there any danger here?" Seeing him, a non-human guardian of the pond, compassionate in appearance, approached in human form and said, "Why, friend, have you come here?" He told him the situation. He, showing his divine form, said, "If so, take as much as you need," and disappeared.

‘‘seyyā nisajjā nayimassa atthī’’tiādinā pañcahi gāthāhi paṭipucchi. Idāni ādito pana‘‘vesāli nāma nagaratthi vajjīna’’nti gāthā tāsaṃ sambandhadassanatthaṃ saṅgītikārehi ṭhapitā –

"seyyā nisajjā nayimassa atthī"ti etc. he questioned with five verses. Now, from the beginning, the verse "vesāli nāma nagaratthi vajjīna" was placed by the compilers to show the connection of those (verses) –

517.

517.

‘‘Vesālī nāma nagaratthi vajjīnaṃ, tattha ahu licchavi ambasakkaro;

"There is a city of the Vajjians named Vesālī, there lived a Licchavi named Ambasakkara;
Having seen a peta outside the city, he asked him there, desiring the reason.

518.

518.

‘‘Seyyā nisajjā nayimassa atthi, abhikkamo natthi paṭikkamo ca;

"He has no bed or seat, no going forward or backward;
He has no clothing or enjoyments to be eaten, drunk, or tasted, nor any attendance.

519.

519.

‘‘Ye ñātakā diṭṭhasutā suhajjā, anukampakā yassa ahesuṃ pubbe;

"Those relatives, friends, and companions who were compassionate to him in the past;
They cannot even see him now, for he is excluded by people.

520.

520.

‘‘Na oggatattassa bhavanti mittā, jahanti mittā vikalaṃ viditvā;

"Friends are not found in one who has declined, friends abandon him, knowing him to be ruined;
Seeing (his) advantage, they surround one who has risen, many friends are found in one who has risen.

521.

521.

‘‘Nihīnatto sabbabhogehi kiccho, sammakkhito samparibhinnagatto;

"He is wretched, deprived of all possessions, miserable, covered and clothed with filth;
Like drops of sweat trickling down, today or tomorrow is the end of his life.

522.

522.

‘‘Etādisaṃ uttamakicchappattaṃ,

"Such a one, brought to utter misery,
Frightened on the impaling stake of the Pucimanda tree;
Then by what reason do you say, yaksha,
‘Live, friend, life is indeed better’?"

517.Tatthatatthāti tassaṃ vesāliyaṃ.Nagarassa bāhiranti nagarassa bahi bhavaṃ, vesālinagarassa bahi eva jātaṃ pavattaṃ sambandhaṃ.Tatthevāti yattha taṃ passi, tattheva ṭhāne.Tanti taṃ petaṃ.Kāraṇatthikoti ‘‘jīva, bho, jīvitameva seyyo’’ti vuttaatthassa kāraṇena atthiko hutvā.

517. Therein, tatthāti means in that Vesālī. Nagarassa bāhiraṃti means outside the city, born, arisen, connected outside the city of Vesālī. Tatthevāti means in that very place where he saw him. Taṃti means that peta. Kāraṇatthikoti means desiring the reason for the statement, "Live, friend, life is indeed better."

518.Seyyā nisajjā nayimassa atthīti piṭṭhipasāraṇalakkhaṇā seyyā, pallaṅkābhujanalakkhaṇā nisajjā ca imassa sūle āropitapuggalassa natthi.Abhikkamo natthi paṭikkamo cāti abhikkamādilakkhaṇaṃ appamattakampi gamanaṃ imassa natthi.Paricārikā sāpīti yā asitapītakhāyitavatthaparibhogādilakkhaṇā indriyānaṃ paricāraṇā, sāpi imassa natthi. ‘‘Pariharaṇā sāpī’’ti vā pāṭho, asitādiparibhogavasena indriyānaṃ pariharaṇā, sāpi imassa natthi vigatajīvitattāti attho. ‘‘Paricāraṇā sāpī’’ti keci paṭhanti.

518. Seyyā nisajjā nayimassa atthīti: Lying down, characterized by stretching out the back (piṭṭhipasāraṇalakkhaṇā), and sitting, characterized by bending the legs (pallaṅkābhujanalakkhaṇā), are not present for this person impaled on the stake. Abhikkamo natthi paṭikkamo cā: Even the slightest movement (gamanaṃ), characterized by advancing and retreating (abhikkamādilakkhaṇaṃ), is not present for him. Paricārikā sāpī: That attending (paricāraṇā) to the senses, characterized by enjoying things eaten, drunk, chewed, and worn, is also not present for him. Alternatively, there is a reading "Pariharaṇā sāpī": that tending (pariharaṇā) of the senses through the consumption of things eaten, etc., is also not present for him, meaning that because his life is gone. Some recite "Paricāraṇā sāpī".

519.Diṭṭhasutā suhajjā, anukampakā yassa ahesuṃ pubbeti sandiṭṭhasahāyā ceva adiṭṭhasahāyā ca yassa mittā anuddayāvanto ye assa imassa pubbe ahesuṃ.Daṭṭhumpīti passitumpi na labhanti, kuto saha vasitunti attho.Virājitattoti pariccattasabhāvo.Janena tenāti tena ñātiādijanena.

519. Diṭṭhasutā suhajjā, anukampakā yassa ahesuṃ pubbe: Those friends of his who were seen and those who were unseen, and compassionate well-wishers who existed for this person previously. Daṭṭhumpī: They cannot even get to see (him), how could they live together? Virājitatto: One whose nature is abandoned. Janena tenā: By that group of relatives and others.

520.Na oggatattassa bhavanti mittāti apagataviññāṇassa matassa mittā nāma na honti tassa mittehi kātabbakiccassa atikkantattā.Jahanti mittā vikalaṃ viditvāti mato tāva tiṭṭhatu, jīvantampi bhogavikalaṃ purisaṃ viditvā ‘‘na ito kiñci gayhūpaga’’nti mittā pajahanti.Atthañca disvā parivārayantīti tassa pana santakaṃ atthaṃ dhanaṃ disvā piyavādino mukhullokikā hutvā taṃ parivārenti.Bahū mittā uggatattassa hontīti vibhavasampattiyā uggatasabhāvassa samiddhassa bahū anekā mittā honti, ayaṃ lokiyasabhāvoti attho.

520. Na oggatattassa bhavanti mittā: Friends do not exist for the one whose consciousness has departed, who is dead, because the duties to be done by his friends have passed. Jahanti mittā vikalaṃ viditvā: Let the dead one remain as he is; even knowing a living man to be deficient in wealth, friends abandon (him), (thinking) "nothing can be gained from him." Atthañca disvā parivārayantī: But seeing his wealth, they surround him, becoming agreeable speakers and those who superficially appear friendly. Bahū mittā uggatattassa hontī: For the one whose nature is elevated by prosperity, the rich one, there are many friends. This is the way of the world, is the meaning.

521.Nihīnatto sabbabhogehīti sabbehi upabhogaparibhogavatthūhi parihīnatto.Kicchoti dukkhito.Sammakkhitoti ruhirehi sammakkhitasarīro.Samparibhinnagattoti sūlena abbhantare vidālitagatto.Ussāvabindūva palimpamānoti tiṇagge limpamānaussāvabindusadiso.Ajja suveti ajja vā suve vā imassa nāma purisassa jīvitassa uparodho nirodho, tato uddhaṃ nappavattatīti attho.

521. Nihīnatto sabbabhogehī: One who is deprived of all objects of enjoyment and use. Kiccho: Miserable. Sammakkhito: One whose body is smeared with blood. Samparibhinnagatto: One whose body is pierced through inside by the stake. Ussāvabindūva palimpamāno: Like a dew drop clinging to the tip of a blade of grass. Ajja suve: Today or tomorrow, the life of this person named will come to an end, ceasing; after that, it will not continue, is the meaning.

522.Uttāsitanti āvutaṃ āropitaṃ.Pucimandassa sūleti nimbarukkhassa daṇḍena katasūle.Kena vaṇṇenāti kena kāraṇena.Jīva, bho, jīvitameva seyyoti, bho purisa, jīva. Kasmā? Sūlaṃ āropitassāpi hi te idha jīvitameva ito cutassa jīvitato satabhāgena sahassabhāgena seyyo sundarataroti.

522. Uttāsitanti: Pierced, impaled. Pucimandassa sūle: On a stake made from a branch of a neem tree. Kena vaṇṇenā: For what reason? Jīva, bho, jīvitameva seyyo: Live, good man! Why? Even for one impaled on a stake, life here is better, by a hundredfold, by a thousandfold, than life after dying from this place.

Evaṃ tena raññā pucchito so peto attano adhippāyaṃ pakāsento –

Thus, being asked by that king, that peta, revealing his intention—

523.

523.

‘‘Sālohito esa ahosi mayhaṃ, ahaṃ sarāmi purimāya jātiyā;

"He was of the same blood as me; I recall (this from) a previous birth.
Seeing him, compassion arose in me, O King, (lest) that evildoer should fall into hell.

524.

524.

‘‘Ito cuto licchavi esa poso, satthussadaṃ nirayaṃ ghorarūpaṃ;

"Departing from here, this man, a Licchavi, (will go) to hell, a fearful place, full of the cries of the suffering;
He will arise (there), doing wicked deeds, (in a place of) great torment, bitter and fearful.

525.

525.

‘‘Anekabhāgena guṇena seyyo, ayameva sūlo nirayena tena;

"By many parts, by merit, this stake is better than that hell;
He would fall into a hell that is exclusively painful, bitter, fearful, exclusively intense.

526.

526.

‘‘Idañca sutvā vacanaṃ mameso, dukkhūpanīto vijaheyya pāṇaṃ;

"If he were to hear this speech of mine, he would give up the ghost, brought down by grief;
Therefore, I do not speak near him, lest there be an end to life because of me"—

Catasso gāthā abhāsi.

He spoke four verses.

523.Tatthasālohitosamānalohito yonisambandhena sambandho, ñātakoti attho.Purimāya jātiyāti purimattabhāve.Mā pāpadhammo nirayaṃ patāyanti ayaṃ pāpadhammo puriso nirayaṃ mā pati, mā nirayaṃ upapajjīti imaṃ disvā me kāruññaṃ ahosīti yojanā.

523. There, sālohito: One of the same blood, related by birth (yonisambandhena sambandho), a relative, is the meaning. Purimāya jātiyā: In a previous existence. Mā pāpadhammo nirayaṃ patāya: May this evildoing man not fall into hell, may he not arise in hell; seeing this, compassion arose in me, is the connection.

524.Sattussadanti pāpakārīhi sattehi ussannaṃ, atha vā pañcavidhabandhanaṃ, mukhe tattalohasecanaṃ, aṅgārapabbatāropanaṃ, lohakumbhipakkhepanaṃ, asipattavanappavesanaṃ, vettaraṇiyaṃ samotaraṇaṃ, mahāniraye pakkhepoti. Imehi sattahi pañcavidhabandhanādīhi dāruṇakāraṇehi ussannaṃ, uparūpari nicitanti attho.Mahābhitāpanti mahādukkhaṃ, mahāaggisantāpaṃ vā.Kaṭukanti aniṭṭhaṃ.Bhayānakanti bhayajanakaṃ.

524. Sattussada: Teeming with beings who do evil, or that which is full of the seven types of punishment (pañcavidhabandhanaṃ): pouring hot molten metal into the mouth, hoisting (people) onto a mountain of embers, throwing (them) into a copper cauldron, making (them) enter a forest of sword-leaf trees, crossing the Vettaraṇī river, and casting (them) into the great hell. Teeming, piled high on top, with these seven terrible causes, beginning with the fivefold bonds (pañcavidhabandhanādīhi), is the meaning. Mahābhitāpa: Great suffering, or great heat of fire. Kaṭuka: Unpleasant. Bhayānaka: Fear-inducing.

525.Anekabhāgenaguṇenāti anekakoṭṭhāsena ānisaṃsena.Ayameva sūlo nirayena tenāti tato imassa uppattiṭṭhānabhūtato nirayato ayameva sūlo seyyoti. Nissakke hi idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ.Ekanta tibbanti ekanteneva tikhiṇadukkhaṃ, niyatamahādukkhanti attho.

525. Anekabhāgena guṇenā: By many portions, by merit. Ayameva sūlo nirayena tenā: This stake itself is better than that hell, which is the place of origin for that. Here, this is a statement made out of disdain. Ekanta tibba: Exclusively sharp suffering, meaning certain great suffering.

526.Idañca sutvā vacanaṃ mamesoti ‘‘ito cuto’’tiādinā vuttaṃ mama vacanaṃ sutvā eso puriso dukkhūpanīto mama vacanena nirayadukkhaṃ upanīto viya hutvā.Vijaheyya pāṇanti attano jīvitaṃ pariccajeyya.Tasmāti tena kāraṇena.Mā mekatoti ‘‘mayā ekato imassa purisassa jīvitassa uparodho mā hotū’’ti imassa santike idaṃ vacanaṃ ahaṃ na bhaṇāmi, atha kho ‘‘jīva, bho, jīvitameva seyyo’’ti idameva bhaṇāmīti adhippāyo.

526. Idañca sutvā vacanaṃ mameso: Hearing my speech, stated with "ito cuto," etc., this man, as if brought down by suffering, brought to the suffering of hell by my speech. Vijaheyya pāṇaṃ: Would abandon his own life. Tasmā: For that reason. Mā mekato: "May there not be an end to the life of this man along with me (mayā ekato)"; I do not speak this speech near him, but rather I speak only, "Live, good man, life itself is better," is the intention.

Evaṃ petena attano adhippāye pakāsite puna rājā petassa pavattiṃ pucchituṃ okāsaṃ karonto imaṃ gāthamāha –

Thus, when his intention was revealed by the peta, the king, making an opportunity to ask about the peta's story, spoke this verse:

527.

527.

‘‘Aññāto eso purisassa attho, aññampi icchāmase pucchituṃ tuvaṃ;

"This account of the man is unknown; we wish to ask you something else;
If you will make an opportunity for us, we will ask you; you should not be angry."

528.

528.

‘‘Addhā paṭiññā me tadā ahu, nācikkhaṇā appasannassa hoti;

"Indeed, my promise was made then: Speaking is not done to one who is not pleased;
Having made (the decision) 'One should be willing to believe the words of one who does not desire (anything),' ask me what you wish!"—

Imā rañño petassa ca vacanapaṭivacanagāthā.

These are verses of the king's words and the peta's reply.

527.Tatthaaññātoti avagato.Icchāmaseti icchāma.Noti amhākaṃ.Na ca kujjhitabbanti ‘‘ime manussā yaṃkiñci pucchantī’’ti kodho na kātabbo.

527. There, aññāto: Unknown. Icchāmase: We wish. No: To us. Na ca kujjhitabba: Anger should not be made, (thinking) "These men are asking whatever they like."

528.Addhāti ekaṃsena.Paṭiññā meti ñāṇavasena mayhaṃ ‘‘pucchassū’’ti paṭiññā, okāsadānanti attho.Tadā ahūti tasmiṃ kāle paṭhamadassane ahosi.Nācikkhaṇā appasannassa hotīti akathanā appasannassa hoti. Pasanno eva hi pasannassa kiñci katheti. Tvaṃ pana tadā mayi appasanno, ahañca tayi, tena paṭijānitvā kathetukāmo nāhosi. Idāni panāhaṃ tuyhaṃakāmā saddheyyavacoakāmo eva saddhātabbavacanoiti katvāiminā kāraṇena.Pucchassumaṃ kāmaṃ yathā visayhanti tvaṃ yathā icchasi, tamatthaṃ maṃ pucchassu. Ahaṃ pana yathā visayhaṃ yathā mayhaṃ sahituṃ sakkā, tathā attano ñāṇabalānurūpaṃ kathessāmīti adhippāyo.

528. Addhā: Certainly. Paṭiññā me: A promise to me, in terms of knowledge, "You should ask," meaning giving an opportunity. Tadā ahū: It was at that time, at the first sight. Nācikkhaṇā appasannassa hotī: Not speaking is (appropriate) for one who is not pleased. For, one who is pleased indeed speaks something to one who is pleased. But you were not pleased with me then, and I with you; therefore, having promised, I was not willing to speak. But now, to you, I am akāmā saddheyyavaco: One whose words should be believed even without desire, iti katvā: Because of this reason. Pucchassu maṃ kāmaṃ yathā visayha: Ask me what you wish, whatever you want. But I will speak according to what I can bear (yathā mayhaṃ sahituṃ sakkā), according to my strength of knowledge, is the intention.

Evaṃ petena pucchanāya okāse kate rājā –

Thus, when an opportunity for questioning was made by the peta, the king—

529.

529.

‘‘Yaṃ kiñcahaṃ cakkhunā passisāmi,

"Whatever I shall see with (my) eye,
I would fully believe all of that;
Even having seen it, if I should not believe,
O yaksha, you should make me believe (in) it."

yaṃ kiñcahaṃ cakkhunā passissāmīti ahaṃ yaṃ kiñcideva cakkhunā passissāmi acakkhugocarassa adassanato.Sabbampi tāhaṃ abhisaddaheyyanti sabbampi te ahaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ aññaṃ vā abhisaddaheyyaṃ. Tādiso hi mayhaṃ tayi abhippasādoti adhippāyo. Pacchimapadassa pana yathāvuttova attho.

Yaṃ kiñcahaṃ cakkhunā passissāmī: Whatever at all I will see with my eye, something that is not in the range of the eye, something not seen before. Sabbampi tāhaṃ abhisaddaheyyaṃ: I would fully believe all of that seen or heard or anything else of yours. For such is my great confidence in you, is the meaning. But the meaning of the last phrase (pacchimapada) is just as stated above.

Taṃ sutvā peto –

Hearing that, the peta—

530.

530.

‘‘Saccappaṭiññā tava mesā hotu, sutvāna dhammaṃ labha suppasādaṃ;

"May this pledge of truth be yours; having heard the Dhamma, may you gain great faith!
Not desiring other things, nor with a corrupted mind, the Dhamma that you have heard, and even the Dhamma you have not heard,
I will explain everything as I know it"— spoke the verse; after that—

531.

531.

‘‘Setena assena alaṅkatena, upayāsi sūlāvutakassa santike;

"You approached the stake-impaled one with a white, decorated horse;
This chariot is wonderful, worth seeing; of what deed is this the result?"

532.

532.

‘‘Vesāliyā nagarassa majjhe, cikkhallamagge narakaṃ ahosi;

"In the middle of the city of Vesālī, on a muddy road, there was a pit (narakaṃ);
For one day, with a gladdened mind, I placed a white (Gosīsā sandalwood) in the pit (narakasmiṃ)."

533.

533.

‘‘Etasmiṃ pādāni patiṭṭhapetvā, mayañca aññe ca atikkamimhā;

"Having placed our feet on that, we and others crossed over;
This chariot is wonderful, worth seeing; that is the result of that deed."

534.

534.

‘‘Vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsati, gandho ca te sabbadisā pavāyati;

"Your complexion shines in all directions, and your fragrance wafts in all directions;
You have attained the power of a yaksha, you are of great power, and yet you are naked; of what is this the result?"

535.

535.

‘‘Akkodhano niccapasannacitto, saṇhāhi vācāhi janaṃ upemi;

"Not angry, always with a gladdened mind, I approach people with gentle words;
That is the result of that deed: my divine complexion always shines forth."

536.

536.

‘‘Yasañca kittiñca dhamme ṭhitānaṃ, disvāna mantemi pasannacitto;

"Having seen the glory and fame of those established in the Dhamma, I praise (them) with a gladdened mind;
That is the result of that deed: my divine fragrance always wafts forth."

537.

537.

‘‘Sahāyānaṃ titthasmiṃ nhāyantānaṃ, thale gahetvā nidahissa dussaṃ;

"Of friends bathing at a bathing place, I took the clothes from the shore and put them away;
With the intention of joking, and not with a corrupted mind, therefore I am naked, and my livelihood is wretched."

538.

538.

‘‘Yo kīḷamāno pakaroti pāpaṃ, tassedisaṃ kammavipākamāhu;

"He who, playing, commits evil,
They say this is the result of his deed;
But he who does not play, yet does (evil),
What do they say is the result of his deed?"

539.

539.

‘‘Ye duṭṭhasaṅkappamanā manussā, kāyena vācāya ca saṃkiliṭṭhā;

"Those men of corrupted thoughts,
Defiled in body and speech,
At the breaking up of the body, after death,
Without doubt, they go to hell.

540.

540.

‘‘Apare pana sugatimāsamānā, dāne ratā saṅgahitattabhāvā;

"But other beings, aspiring to a happy state,
Delighting in giving, of gathered essence,
At the breaking up of the body, after death,
Without doubt, they go to a good state."—

Tesaṃ ubhinnaṃ vacanapaṭivacanagāthā honti.

These are the verses of the two's responses.

530.Tatthasaccappaṭiññā tava mesā hotūti ‘‘sabbampi tāhaṃ abhisaddaheyya’’nti tava esā paṭiññā mayhaṃ saccaṃ hotu.Sutvāna dhammaṃ labha suppasādanti mayā vuccamānaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā sundaraṃ pasādaṃ labhassu.Aññatthikoti ājānanatthiko.Yathā pajānanti yathā aññopi pajānanto, ‘‘yathāpi ñāta’’nti vā mayā yathā ñātanti attho.

530. There, saccappaṭiññā tava mesā hotū: May this pledge of yours, "I would fully believe everything," be true for me. Sutvāna dhammaṃ labha suppasādaṃ: Having heard the Dhamma spoken by me, may you gain great confidence. Aññatthiko: Desiring to understand. Yathā pajāna: Just as another also knows, or, "yathāpi ñāta," as it is known by me, is the meaning.

531.Kissetaṃ kammassa ayaṃ vipākoti kissetaṃ kissa nāma etaṃ, kissa kammassa ayaṃ vipāko.Etanti vā nipātamattaṃ, kissa kammassāti yojanā. ‘‘Kissa te’’ti ca keci paṭhanti.

531. Kissetaṃ kammassa ayaṃ vipāko: Of what is this? To what does this belong, of what deed is this the result? Etaṃ is merely a particle, the connection is "of what deed?" Some also read "Kissa te".

532-33.Cikkhallamaggeti cikkhallavati pathamhi.Narakanti āvāṭaṃ.Ekāhanti ekaṃ ahaṃ.Narakasmiṃ nikkhipinti yathā kaddamo na akkamīyati, evaṃ tasmiṃ cikkhallāvāṭe ṭhapesiṃ.Tassāti tassa gosīsena setukaraṇassa.

532-33. Cikkhallamagge: On a muddy path. Naraka: A pit. Ekāhaṃ: For one day. Narakasmiṃ nikkhipiṃ: Just as mud is not stepped on, so it was placed in that muddy pit. Tassā: Of that bridge-making with Gosīsā sandalwood.

536-7.Dhamme ṭhitānanti dhammacārīnaṃ samacārīnaṃ.Mantemīti kathemi kittayāmi.Khiḍḍatthikoti hasādhippāyo.No ca paduṭṭhacittoti dussasāmike na dūsitacitto, na avaharaṇādhippāyo nāpi vināsādhippāyoti attho.

536-7. Dhamme ṭhitānaṃ: Of those who are established in the Dhamma, who practice the Dhamma. Mantemi: I speak of, I praise. Khiḍḍatthiko: Intending to joke. No ca paduṭṭhacitto: Not with a mind corrupted toward the owners (dussasāmike na dūsitacitto), not with the intention of stealing, nor with the intention of destroying, is the meaning.

538.Akīḷamānoti akhiḍḍādhippāyo, lobhādīhi dūsitacitto.Kiṃ tassa kammassa vipākamāhūti tassa tathā katassa pāpakammassa kīva kaṭukaṃ dukkhavipākaṃ paṇḍitā āhu.

538. Akīḷamāno: Not intending to joke, with a mind corrupted by greed and other (defilements). Kiṃ tassa kammassa vipākamāhū: What bitter, painful result do the wise say there is for that evil deed done in that way?

539-40.Duṭṭhasaṅkappamanāti kāmasaṅkappādivasena dūsitamanovitakkā, etena manoduccaritamāha.Kāyena vācāya ca saṃkiliṭṭhāti pāṇātipātādivasena kāyavācāhi malinā.Āsamānāti āsīsamānā patthayamānā.

539-40. Duṭṭhasaṅkappamanā: Whose mental thoughts are corrupted by thoughts of sense-desire, etc.; by this, he states mental misconduct. Kāyena vācāya ca saṃkiliṭṭhā: Defiled in body and speech by killing living beings, etc. Āsamānā: Hoping, desiring.

Evaṃ petena saṅkhepeneva kammaphalesu vibhajitvā dassitesu taṃ asaddahanto rājā –

Thus, when the results of actions were shown concisely by the peta, the king, not believing it—

541.

541.

‘‘Taṃ kinti jāneyyamahaṃ avecca, kalyāṇapāpassa ayaṃ vipāko;

"How would I know, having learned (this), that this is the result of good and bad deeds?
Or what would I see, having believed, or who would make me believe this?"

taṃ kinti jāneyyamahaṃ aveccāti yoyaṃ tayā ‘‘ye duṭṭhasaṅkappamanā manussā, kāyena vācāya ca saṃkiliṭṭhā’’tiādinā. ‘‘Apare pana sugatimāsamānā’’tiādinā ca kalyāṇassa pāpassa ca kammassa vipāko vibhajitvā vutto, taṃ kinti kena kāraṇena ahaṃ avecca aparapaccayabhāvena saddaheyyaṃ.Kiṃ vāhaṃ disvā abhisaddaheyyanti kīdisaṃ vā panāhaṃ paccakkhabhūtaṃ nidassanaṃ disvā paṭisaddaheyyaṃ.Ko vāpi maṃ saddahāpeyya etanti ko vā viññū puriso paṇḍito etamatthaṃ maṃ saddahāpeyya, taṃ kathehīti attho.

"taṃ kinti jāneyyamahaṃ aveccā"ti—that which was spoken by you with "ye duṭṭhasaṅkappamanā manussā, kāyena vācāya ca saṃkiliṭṭhā" (those beings who have corrupt thoughts, and are defiled by body and speech), and so on, and "apare pana sugatimāsamānā" (others attaining a happy destination), and so on, dividing and stating the result of good and bad actions, how should I, not knowing, believe without any external persuasion? "Kiṃ vāhaṃ disvā abhisaddaheyya"nti—or what kind of visible example should I see and fully believe? "Ko vāpi maṃ saddahāpeyya eta"nti—or what wise and learned person would make me believe this matter, please tell me. This is the meaning.

Taṃ sutvā peto kāraṇena tamatthaṃ tassa pakāsento –

Having heard that, the peta, revealing that matter with a reason:

542.

542.

‘‘Disvā ca sutvā abhisaddahassu, kalyāṇapāpassa ayaṃ vipāko;

"Having seen and heard, have full faith, this is the result of good and bad actions;
If both good and bad deeds did not exist, would beings be destined for happiness or suffering?

543.

543.

‘‘No cettha kammāni kareyyuṃ maccā, kalyāṇapāpāni manussaloke;

"If mortals did not perform deeds, good and bad, in the human world;
There would be no beings destined for happiness or suffering, inferior or superior in the human world.

544.

544.

‘‘Yasmā ca kammāni karonti maccā, kalyāṇapāpāni manussaloke;

"Since mortals perform deeds, good and bad, in the human world;
Therefore, beings are destined for happiness or suffering, inferior or superior in the human world.

545.

545.

‘‘Dvayajja kammānaṃ vipākamāhu, sukhassa dukkhassa ca vedanīyaṃ;

"They say that the result of deeds is twofold, to be experienced as happiness and suffering;
Those devatās enjoy themselves, while fools, not seeing the duality, are tormented."

Gāthā abhāsi.

This verse was spoken.

542.Tatthadisvā cāti paccakkhato disvāpi.Sutvāti dhammaṃ sutvā tadanusārena nayaṃ nento anuminanto.Kalyāṇapāpassāti kusalassa akusalassa ca kammassa ayaṃ sukho ayaṃ dukkho ca vipākoti abhisaddahassu.Ubhaye asanteti kalyāṇe pāpe cāti duvidhe kamme avijjamāne.Siyā nu sattā sugatā duggatā vāti ‘‘ime sattā sugatiṃ gatā duggatiṃ gatā vā, sugatiyaṃ vā aḍḍhā duggatiyaṃ daliddā vā’’ti ayamattho kiṃ nu siyā kathaṃ sambhaveyyāti attho.

542. Therein, "disvā ca"ti—having seen directly. "Sutvā"ti—having heard the Dhamma, leading the reasoning in accordance with that, inferring. "Kalyāṇapāpassā"ti—this is the pleasant, this is the painful result of wholesome and unwholesome actions, have full faith. "Ubhaye asante"ti—when the twofold action, both wholesome and unwholesome, does not exist. "Siyā nu sattā sugatā duggatā vā"ti—"these beings have gone to a good destination or a bad destination, or are wealthy in a good destination or poor in a bad destination," how could this matter be, how could it be possible? This is the meaning.

543-4.Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ‘‘nocettha kammānī’’ti ca‘‘yasmā ca kammānī’’ti ca gāthādvayena byatirekato anvayato ca vibhāveti. Tatthahīnā paṇītāti kularūpārogyaparivārādīhi hīnā uḷārā ca.

543-4. Now, with the two verses "no cettha kammānī"ti and "yasmā ca kammānī"ti, he distinguishes the aforementioned matter by way of contrast and correspondence. Therein, "hīnā paṇītā"ti—inferior and superior in terms of family, appearance, health, retinue, and so on.

545.Dvayajja kammānaṃ vipākamāhūti dvayaṃ duvidhaṃ ajja idāni kammānaṃ sucaritaduccaritānaṃ vipākaṃ vadanti kathenti. Kiṃ tanti āha‘‘sukhassa dukkhassa ca vedanīya’’nti, iṭṭhassa ca aniṭṭhassa ca anubhavanayoggaṃ.Tā devatāyo paricārayantīti ye ukkaṃsavasena sukhavedanīyaṃ vipākaṃ paṭilabhanti, te devaloke tā devatā hutvā dibbasukhasamappitā indriyāni paricārenti.Paccenti bālā dvayataṃ apassinoti ye bālā kammañca kammaphalañcāti dvayaṃ apassantā asaddahantā, te pāpappasutā dukkhavedanīyaṃ vipākaṃ anubhavantā nirayādīsu kammunā paccenti dukkhaṃ pāpuṇanti.

545. "Dvayajja kammānaṃ vipākamāhū"ti—they say, they speak of the twofold result of deeds, of good conduct and bad conduct, now, today. What is it? He says, "sukhassa dukkhassa ca vedanīyaṃ"ti—to be experienced as pleasant and unpleasant. "Tā devatāyo paricārayantī"ti—those who obtain the result to be experienced as pleasant in an excellent way, becoming those devatās in the deva-world, enjoy their senses, endowed with divine happiness. "Paccenti bālā dvayataṃ apassino"ti—those fools who do not see the duality of action and result of action, not believing, being devoted to evil, experiencing the result to be experienced as painful, are tormented by action in hells and so on, they attain suffering.

Evaṃ kammaphalaṃ saddahanto pana tvaṃ kasmā evarūpaṃ dukkhaṃ paccanubhavasīti anuyogaṃ sandhāya –

Thus, with reference to the question, "Believing in the result of action, why do you experience such suffering?"—

546.

546.

‘‘Na matthi kammāni sayaṃkatāni, datvāpi me natthi yo ādiseyya;

"I have no deeds done by myself, nor do I have anyone who would dedicate something after giving;
Clothing, bedding, food, and drink, therefore I am naked and my livelihood is wretched."

na matthi kammāni sayaṃkatānīti yasmā sayaṃ attanā pubbe katāni puññakammāni mama natthi na vijjanti, yehi idāni acchādanādīni labheyyaṃ.Datvāpi me natthi yo ādiseyyāti yo samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ dānaṃ datvā ‘‘asukassa petassa hotū’’ti me ādiseyya uddiseyya, so natthi.Tenamhi naggo kasirā ca vuttīti tena duvidhenāpi kāraṇena idāni naggo niccoḷo amhi, kasirā dukkhā ca vutti jīvikā hotīti.

"na matthi kammāni sayaṃkatānī"ti—because there are no meritorious deeds done by myself in the past, by which I might now obtain clothing and so on. "Datvāpi me natthi yo ādiseyyā"ti—there is no one who, having given a gift to ascetics and brahmins, would dedicate it to me, saying, "May it be for such and such a peta." "Tenamhi naggo kasirā ca vuttī"ti—therefore, for both reasons, I am now naked, always unclothed, and my livelihood is wretched and painful.

Taṃ sutvā rājā tassa acchādanādilābhaṃ ākaṅkhanto –

Having heard that, the king, desiring the attainment of clothing and so on for him—

547.

547.

‘‘Siyā nu kho kāraṇaṃ kiñci yakkha, acchādanaṃ yena tuvaṃ labhetha;

"Is there perhaps some cause, Yaksha, by which you might obtain clothing?
Tell me what reason there is, I will listen to words of reason that inspire faith."

yenāti yena kāraṇena tvaṃacchādanaṃ labhethalabheyyāsi,kiñcitaṃkāraṇaṃ siyā nu khobhaveyya nu khoti attho.Yadatthīti yadi atthi.

"yenā"ti—by which cause you "acchādanaṃ labhetha"—might obtain clothing, "kiñci"—that "kāraṇaṃ siyā nu kho"—cause, might there be, could there be? This is the meaning. "Yadatthī"ti—if there is.

Athassa peto taṃ kāraṇaṃ ācikkhanto –

Then the peta, revealing that cause to him—

548.

548.

‘‘Kappitako nāma idhatthi bhikkhu, jhāyī susīlo arahā vimutto;

"There is here a bhikkhu named Kappitaka, meditative, virtuous, an Arahant, liberated;
Guarded in his senses, restrained by the Pātimokkha, cooled, having attained the highest view.

549.

549.

‘‘Sakhilo vadaññū suvaco sumukho, svāgamo suppaṭimuttako ca;

"Affable, generous, compliant, with a pleasant countenance, of good conduct, and well-trained;
A field of merit, dwelling in a peaceful abode, worthy of offerings from devas and humans.

550.

550.

‘‘Santo vidhūmo anīgho nirāso, mutto visallo amamo avaṅko;

"Calm, without smoke, without distress, without desire, freed, without a dart, without possessiveness, without crookedness;
Without basis, with all proliferation extinguished, having attained the three knowledges, radiant.

551.

551.

‘‘Appaññāto disvāpi na ca sujāno, munīti naṃ vajjisu voharanti;

"Unknown, even seeing him, one does not fully know, they call him a 'sage';
Yakkha-beings know him, the unshaken one, wandering in the world with wholesome Dhamma.

552.

552.

‘‘Tassa tuvaṃ ekayugaṃ duve vā, mamuddisitvāna sace dadetha;

"If you were to give him one pair of robes or two, dedicating them to me;
And may those be accepted, and you would see me clothed in fine cloth."

Gāthā abhāsi.

This verse was spoken.

548.Tatthakappitato nāmāti jaṭilasahassassa abbhantare āyasmato upālittherassa upajjhāyaṃ sandhāya vadati.Idhāti imissā vesāliyā samīpe.Jhāyīti aggaphalajhānena jhāyī.Sītibhūtoti sabbakilesadarathapariḷāhavūpasamena sītibhāvappatto.Uttamadiṭṭhipattoti uttamaṃ aggaphalaṃ sammādiṭṭhiṃ patto.

548. Therein, "kappitato nāmā"ti—he speaks with reference to the preceptor of Venerable Upāli Thera among the thousand ascetics. "Idhā"ti—near this Vesāli. "Jhāyī"ti—meditative with the highest attainment of jhānas. "Sītibhūto"ti—having attained coolness by the calming of all defilements, distress, and burning. "Uttamadiṭṭhipatto"ti—having attained the highest fruit, the highest right view.

549.Sakhiloti mudu.Suvacoti subbaco.Svāgamoti suṭṭhu āgatāgamo.Suppaṭimuttakoti suṭṭhu paṭimuttakavāco, muttabhāṇīti attho.Araṇavihārīti mettāvihārī.

549. "Sakhilo"ti—gentle. "Suvaco"ti—easy to speak to. "Svāgamo"ti—of well-received teaching. "Suppaṭimuttako"ti—of well-expressed speech, speaking well. "Araṇavihārī"ti—dwelling in loving-kindness.

550.Santoti upasantakileso.Vidhūmoti vigatamicchāvitakkadhūmo.Anīghoti niddukkho.Nirāsoti nittaṇho.Muttoti sabbabhavehi vimutto.Visalloti vītarāgādisallo.Amamoti mamaṃkāravirahito.Avaṅkoti kāyavaṅkādivaṅkavirahito.Nirūpadhīti kilesābhisaṅkhārādiupadhippahāyī.Sabbapapañcakhīṇoti parikkhīṇataṇhādipapañco.Jutimāti anuttarāya ñāṇajutiyā jutimā.Appaññātoti paramappicchatāya paṭicchannaguṇatāya ca na pākaṭo.

550. "Santo"ti—with calmed defilements. "Vidhūmo"ti—without the smoke of thoughts of desire. "Anīgho"ti—without suffering. "Nirāso"ti—without craving. "Mutto"ti—liberated from all existences. "Visallo"ti—without the dart of lust and so on. "Amamo"ti—without self-conceit. "Avaṅko"ti—without crookedness, without crookedness of body and so on. "Nirūpadhī"ti—having abandoned the basis of defilements, formations, and so on. "Sabbapapañcakhīṇo"ti—with all proliferation of craving and so on extinguished. "Jutimā"ti—radiant with the unsurpassed radiance of knowledge. "Appaññāto"ti—not well-known due to his great humility and the concealment of his virtues.

551.Disvāpi na ca sujānoti gambhīrabhāvena disvāpi ‘‘evaṃsīlo, evaṃdhammo, evaṃpañño’’ti na suviññeyyo.Jānanti taṃ yakkhabhūtā anejanti yakkhabhūtā ca anejaṃ nittaṇhaṃ ‘‘arahā’’ti taṃ jānanti.Kalyāṇadhammanti sundarasīlādiguṇaṃ.

551. "Disvāpi na ca sujāno"ti—even having seen him, one does not easily know "he is of such virtue, such Dhamma, such wisdom" due to his profound nature. "Jānanti taṃ yakkhabhūtā anejaṃ"ti—yakkha-beings know him, the unshaken one, the Arahant. "Kalyāṇadhammaṃ"ti—of beautiful virtues such as good morality.

552.Tassāti tassa kappitakamahātherassa.Ekayuganti ekaṃ vatthayugaṃ.Duve vāti dve vā vatthayugāni.Mamuddisitvānāti mamaṃ uddisitvā.Paṭiggahītānicatāni assūti tāni vatthayugāni tena paṭiggahitāni ca assu bhaveyyuṃ.Sannaddhadussanti dussena katasannāhaṃ, laddhavatthaṃ nivatthapārutadussanti attho.

552. "Tassā"ti—to that Kappitaka Mahāthera. "Ekayugaṃ"ti—one pair of cloths. "Duve vā"ti—or two pairs of cloths. "Mamuddisitvānā"ti—dedicating them to me. "Paṭiggahītāni ca tāni assū"ti—and may those pairs of cloths be accepted by him. "Sannaddhadussa"nti—clothed in fine cloth, having obtained cloth, clothed and wrapped in fine cloth. This is the meaning.

Tato rājā –

Then the king—

553.

553.

‘‘Kasmiṃ padese samaṇaṃ vasantaṃ, gantvāna passemu mayaṃ idāni;

"In what place does the ascetic dwell, that we might go and see him now?
Who might dispel my doubt and uncertainty, and the arrows of wrong views?"

kasmiṃ padeseti katarasmiṃ padese.Yo majjāti yo ajja, ma-kāro padasandhikaro.

"kasmiṃ padese"ti—in which place. "Yo majjā"ti—who today; the "ma" is a euphonic addition.

Tato peto –

Then the peta—

554.

554.

‘‘Eso nisinno kapinaccanāyaṃ, parivārito devatāhi bahūhi;

"He is sitting in Kapinaccana, surrounded by many devatās;
Speaking the Dhamma discourse, truly named, diligent in his own sphere."

kapinaccanāyanti kapīnaṃ vānarānaṃ naccanena ‘‘kapinaccanā’’ti laddhavohāre padese.Saccanāmoti jhāyī susīlo arahā vimuttotiādīhi guṇanāmehi yāthāvanāmo aviparītanāmo.

"kapinaccanāyaṃ"ti—in the place known as "Kapinaccana" by the dancing of monkeys. "Saccanāmo"ti—truly named, his name is true, not reversed, by virtue of his qualities such as meditative, virtuous, Arahant, liberated, and so on.

Evaṃ petena vutte rājā tāvadeva therassa santikaṃ gantukāmo –

When thus spoken by the peta, the king, desiring to go to the Thera immediately—

555.

555.

‘‘Tathāhaṃ kassāmi gantvā idāni, acchādayissaṃ samaṇaṃ yugena;

"Thus I will do, going there now, I will clothe the ascetic with a pair of robes;
And may those be accepted, and we would see you clothed in fine cloth."

kassāmīti karissāmi.

"kassāmī"ti—I will do.

Atha peto ‘‘devatānaṃ thero dhammaṃ deseti, tasmā nāyaṃ upasaṅkamanakālo’’ti dassento –

Then the peta, showing "the Thera is teaching the Dhamma to the devatās, therefore this is not the time to approach"—

556.

556.

‘‘Mā akkhaṇe pabbajitaṃ upāgami, sādhu vo licchavi nesa dhammo;

"Do not approach the recluse at an inopportune time, this Dhamma is not suitable for you, Licchavi;
But after that, having approached at the right time, you will see him sitting alone there."

sādhūti āyācane nipāto.Vo licchavi nesa dhammoti, licchavirāja, tumhākaṃ rājūnaṃ esa dhammo na hoti, yaṃ akāle upasaṅkamanaṃ.Tatthevāti tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne.

"sādhū"ti—an interjection of entreaty. "Vo licchavi nesa dhammo"ti—Licchavi king, this is not the custom of you kings, to approach at an inopportune time. "Tatthevā"ti—in that very place.

Evaṃ petena vutte rājā ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā attano nivesanameva gantvā puna yuttapattakāle aṭṭha vatthuyugāni gāhāpetvā theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṃ nisinno paṭisanthāraṃ katvā ‘‘imāni, bhante, aṭṭha vatthayugāni paṭiggaṇhā’’ti āha. Taṃ sutvā thero kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ‘‘mahārāja, pubbe tvaṃ adānasīlo samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ viheṭhanajātikova kathaṃ paṇītāni vatthāni dātukāmo jāto’’ti āha. Taṃ sutvā rājā tassa kāraṇaṃ ācikkhanto petena samāgamaṃ, tena ca attanā ca kathitaṃ sabbaṃ therassa ārocetvā vatthāni datvā petassa uddisi. Tena peto dibbavatthadharo alaṅkatapaṭiyatto assāruḷho therassa ca rañño ca purato pātubhavi. Taṃ disvā rājā attamano pamudito pītisomanassajāto ‘‘paccakkhato vata mayā kammaphalaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, na dānāhaṃ pāpaṃ karissāmi, puññameva karissāmī’’ti vatvā tena petena sakkhiṃ akāsi. So ca peto ‘‘sace, tvaṃ licchavirāja, ito paṭṭhāya adhammaṃ pahāya dhammaṃ carasi, evāhaṃ tava sakkhiṃ karissāmi, santikañca te āgamissāmi, sūlāvutañca purisaṃ sīghaṃ sūlato mocehi, evaṃ so jīvitaṃ labhitvā dhammaṃ caranto dukkhato muccissati, therañca kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamitvā dhammaṃ suṇanto puññāni karohī’’ti vatvā gato.

When thus spoken by the peta, the king, consenting with "sādhu," went to his own residence, and then, at the appropriate time, having had eight pairs of cloths taken, approached the Thera, and sitting to one side, having exchanged friendly greetings, said, "Venerable sir, please accept these eight pairs of cloths." Having heard that, the Thera, for the purpose of initiating conversation, said, "Mahārāja, formerly you were uncharitable, by nature afflicting ascetics and brahmins; how have you now become desirous of giving fine cloths?" Having heard that, the king, revealing the reason for that, having told the Thera everything about the meeting with the peta and what he himself had said, gave the cloths and dedicated them to the peta. By that, the peta, adorned and prepared, wearing divine cloths, mounted on a horse, appeared before the Thera and the king. Having seen that, the king, pleased and delighted, with joy and gladness, said, "Truly, I have seen the result of action with my own eyes; from today, I will not do evil, but only do good," and he made an affirmation in the presence of the peta. And that peta said, "If you, Licchavi king, from today, abandoning unrighteousness, live righteously, then I will make an affirmation in your presence and I will come to your presence. And quickly release the man impaled on a stake from the stake; thus he, having obtained life, living righteously, will be freed from suffering. And from time to time approach the Thera, listening to the Dhamma and doing good deeds." And having said this, he departed.

Atha rājā theraṃ vanditvā nagaraṃ pavisitvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ licchaviparisaṃ sannipātetvā te anujānāpetvā taṃ purisaṃ sūlato mocetvā ‘‘imaṃ arogaṃ karothā’’ti tikicchake āṇāpesi. Therañca upasaṅkamitvā pucchi – ‘‘siyā nu kho, bhante, nirayagāmikammaṃ katvā ṭhitassa nirayato muttī’’ti. Siyā, mahārāja, sace uḷāraṃ puññaṃ karoti, muccatīti vatvā thero rājānaṃ saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpesi. So tattha patiṭṭhito therassa ovāde ṭhatvā sotāpanno ahosi, sūlāvuto pana puriso arogo hutvā saṃvegajāto bhikkhūsu pabbajitvā nacirasseva arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Tamatthaṃ dassentā saṅgītikārā –

Then the king, having paid homage to the Thera, entered the city, and quickly, quickly having gathered the Licchavi assembly and having obtained their permission, released that man from the stake and ordered the physicians, "Make him well." And having approached the Thera, he asked, "Venerable sir, is there release from hell for one who has done a deed leading to hell?" "There is, Mahārāja, if he does great merit, he is released," said the Thera, and established the king in the refuges and precepts. Established there, abiding in the Thera's advice, he became a Sotāpanna. The man impaled on the stake, having become well, feeling remorse, ordained among the bhikkhus and soon attained Arahantship. The compilers, showing that matter—

557.

557.

‘‘Tathāti vatvā agamāsi tattha, parivārito dāsagaṇena licchavi;

"Having said 'Thus be it,' the Licchavi went there, surrounded by a retinue of servants;
He approached that city, and went to his own residence to stay.

558.

558.

‘‘Tato ca kāle gihikiccāni katvā,

"Then, at the right time, having done his household duties,
Having bathed and drunk, and having obtained a moment;
Having selected eight pairs of cloths from the chest,
The Licchavi had them taken by a retinue of servants.

559.

559.

‘‘So taṃ padesaṃ upasaṅkamitvā, taṃ addasa samaṇaṃ santacittaṃ;

"He approached that place, and saw that ascetic, with a calmed mind;
Having finished his alms round and returned, cooled, sitting at the foot of a tree.

560.

560.

‘‘Tamenamavoca upasaṅkamitvā, appābādhaṃ phāsuvihārañca pucchi;

"Having approached him, he asked about his health and ease of living;
'Venerable sir, I am the Licchavi Ambasakkara in Vesāli, the Licchavis know me.'

561.

561.

‘‘Imāni me aṭṭha yugā subhāni, paṭiggaṇha bhante padadāmi tuyhaṃ;

"These eight fine pairs I offer, accept them, Venerable Sir; I have come here for this purpose, that I may be of joyful mind."

562.

562.

‘‘Dūratova samaṇā brāhmaṇā ca, nivesanaṃ te parivajjayanti;

"From afar, monks and brahmins avoid your dwelling; their bowls are broken at your house, and their Saṅghāṭīs are torn."

563.

563.

‘‘Athāpare pādakuṭhārikāhi, avaṃsirā samaṇā pātayanti;

"Moreover, others with foot-axes strike down the monks headfirst; such torment do renunciates, done by you, O monk, obtain.

564.

564.

‘‘Tiṇena telampi na tvaṃ adāsi, mūḷhassa maggampi na pāvadāsi;

"You did not give oil even with a blade of grass, nor did you show the way to a confused person; you yourself took away the stick from a blind man; such a miserly and unrestrained one are you; then by what means, seeing what, do you make sharing with us?"

565.

565.

‘‘Paccemi bhante yaṃ tvaṃ vadesi, vihesayiṃ samaṇe brāhmaṇe ca;

"I confess, Bhante, what you say; I tormented monks and brahmins; it was for fun, not with a corrupt mind; even this is wrong for me, Bhante."

566.

566.

Khiḍḍāya yakkho pasavitvā pāpaṃ, vedeti dukkhaṃ asamattabhogī;

Having accumulated evil through sport, the Yaksha experiences suffering, with incomplete enjoyment; a young man is partaker of nakedness; what could be more painful than that?

567.

567.

‘‘Taṃ disvā saṃvegamalatthaṃ bhante, tappaccayā vāpi dadāmi dānaṃ;

"Having seen that, Bhante, I attained Saṃvega, because of that I also give alms; accept, Bhante, these eight pairs of cloths; may these gifts go to the Yaksha."

568.

568.

‘‘Addhā hi dānaṃ bahudhā pasatthaṃ, dadato ca te akkhayadhammamatthu;

"Indeed, giving is praised in many ways, and may you have imperishable Dhamma; I accept your eight pairs of cloths; may these gifts go to the Yaksha."

569.

569.

‘‘Tato hi so ācamayitvā licchavi, therassa datvāna yugāni aṭṭha;

Then that Licchavi, having rinsed his mouth, gave the eight pairs to the Thera; and those were accepted, and he saw the Yaksha clothed and armored.

570.

570.

‘‘Tamaddasā candanasāralittaṃ, ājaññamārūḷhamuḷāravaṇṇaṃ;

He saw him anointed with sandalwood essence, riding an thoroughbred horse of outstanding color; adorned and well-clothed, surrounded by the Yaksha, possessed of great power.

571.

571.

‘‘So taṃ disvā attamano udaggo, pahaṭṭhacitto ca subhaggarūpo;

Seeing him, he was glad, uplifted, with delighted mind and beautiful form; and having seen the action of great result, having realized it with his own eyes.

572.

572.

‘‘Tamenamavoca upasaṅkamitvā, dassāmi dānaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ;

Approaching him, he said, "I will give alms to monks and brahmins; and nothing is un-giveable for me; and you, O Yaksha, are of great help to me."

573.

573.

‘‘Tuvañca me licchavi ekadesaṃ, adāsi dānāni amoghametaṃ;

"You, O Licchavi, gave me a portion; your gifts are not in vain; I will make a compact with you, a non-human with a human."

574.

574.

‘‘Gatī ca bandhū ca parāyaṇañca, mitto mamāsi atha devatā me;

"You are my refuge, kinsman, and resort, my friend, and also my deity; I beg you with joined palms, I wish to see you again, O Yaksha."

575.

575.

‘‘Sace tuvaṃ assaddho bhavissasi, kadariyarūpo vippaṭipannacitto;

"If you are faithless, of miserly nature, of perverse mind; you will not be able to see me, and having seen me, I will not speak to you."

576.

576.

‘‘Sace pana tvaṃ bhavissasi dhammagāravo, dāne rato saṅgahitattabhāvo;

"But if you are respectful of the Dhamma, delighting in giving, of composed self; a watering place for monks and brahmins, then you will be able to see me.

577.

577.

‘‘Disvā ca taṃ ālapissaṃ bhadante, imañca sūlato lahuṃ pamuñca;

"And having seen you, I would speak to you, O Blessed One, and quickly release this man from the stake; since we made an agreement, I think it is because of the impaled man."

578.

578.

‘‘Te aññamaññaṃ akarimha sakkhiṃ, ayañca sūlato lahuṃ pamutto;

"We made a compact with each other, and may this man quickly be freed from the stake; diligently practicing the Dhammas, he might be freed from that hell; if there is Karma to be experienced elsewhere."

579.

579.

‘‘Kappitakañca upasaṅkamitvā, teneva saha saṃvibhajitvā kāle;

"Approaching the barber, and having shared with him in due time; sitting down personally, ask, and he will explain this matter to you."

580.

580.

‘‘Tameva bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā, pucchassu aññatthiko no ca paduṭṭhacitto;

"Approaching that monk, ask him with a clear, not corrupt, mind; he will explain to you all the Dhamma, heard and unheard, as he understands."

581.

581.

‘‘So tattha rahassaṃ samullapitvā, sakkhiṃ karitvāna amānusena;

Having secretly conversed there, having made a pact with a non-human; that Licchavi departed to his own people, then he spoke to the assembled company.

582.

582.

‘‘‘Suṇantu bhonto mama ekavākyaṃ, varaṃ varissaṃ labhissāmi atthaṃ;

"'Let the Venerable Ones hear my words, I will choose a boon, I will obtain the goal; a man impaled, of cruel deeds, with outstretched hands, a persistent form.

583.

583.

‘‘‘Ettāvatā vīsatirattimattā, yato āvuto neva jīvati na mato;

"'For about twenty nights, since he was impaled, he neither lives nor dies; I will now release him, let the Saṅgha approve according to its wisdom.'"

584.

584.

‘‘‘Etañca aññañca lahuṃ pamuñca, ko taṃ vadetha tathā karontaṃ;

"'Quickly release this and anything else, who would blame you for doing so; as you understand, do so, the Saṅgha approves according to its wisdom.'"

585.

585.

‘‘So taṃ padesaṃ upasaṅkamitvā, sūlāvutaṃ mocayi khippameva;

Approaching that place, he quickly released the impaled man; and said to him, "Fear not, friend," and provided physicians.

586.

586.

‘‘Kappitakañca upasaṅkamitvā, teneva saha saṃvibhajitvā kāle;

Approaching the barber, and having shared with him in due time; sitting down personally, the Licchavi asked him with purpose.

587.

587.

‘‘Sūlāvuto puriso luddakammo, paṇītadaṇḍo anusattarūpo;

"A man impaled, of cruel deeds, with outstretched hands, a persistent form; for about twenty nights, since he was impaled, he neither lives nor dies.

588.

588.

‘‘So mocito gantvā mayā idāni, etassa yakkhassa vaco hi bhante;

He was released by me, now, Bhante, this is the word of the Yaksha; could there be any reason why he should not go to hell?

589.

589.

‘‘Ācikkha bhante yadi atthi hetu, saddhāyikaṃ hetuvaco suṇoma;

Tell me, Bhante, if there is a cause, we will hear a word of cause with faith; there is no destruction of those actions without experiencing them here."

590.

590.

‘‘Sace sa dhammāni samācareyya, sakkacca rattindivamappamatto;

"If he practices the Dhammas, diligently, day and night, unremittingly; he might be freed from that hell, if there is Karma to be experienced elsewhere."

591.

591.

‘‘Aññāto eso purisassa attho, mamampi dāni anukampa bhante;

"This meaning of the man was unknown, now also have compassion on me, Bhante; instruct me, advise me, O of great wisdom, so that I might not go to hell."

592.

592.

‘‘Ajjeva buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ upehi, dhammañca saṅghañca pasannacitto;

"Even today, go for refuge to the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Saṅgha, with a serene mind; likewise, undertake the five precepts of training, unbroken and perfect.

593.

593.

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viramassu khippaṃ, loke adinnaṃ parivajjayassu;

Quickly abstain from killing, avoid taking what is not given in the world; do not drink intoxicants, nor speak falsely, and be content with your own wife; and undertake this noble eightfold path, skillful and productive of happiness.

594.

594.

‘‘Cīvaraṃ piṇḍapātañca, paccayaṃ sayanāsanaṃ;

"Robes, alms food, requisites, lodging;

595.

Food, drink, edibles, cloths and lodgings;

‘‘Bhikkhūpi sīlasampanne, vītarāge bahussute;

Give to the upright, with a serene mind.

596.

595.

‘‘Evañca dhammāni samācaranto, sakkacca rattindivamappamatto;

"And monks endowed with virtue, free from lust, learned;

597.

Satisfy them with food and drink, always may your merit increase.

‘‘Ajjeva buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ upemi, dhammañca saṅghañca pasannacitto;

596.

598.

"Practicing the Dhammas in this way, diligently, day and night, unremittingly; you will be freed from that hell, if there is Karma to be experienced elsewhere."

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viramāmi khippaṃ, loke adinnaṃ parivajjayāmi;

597.

599.

"Even today, I go for refuge to the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Saṅgha, with a serene mind; likewise, I undertake the five precepts of training, unbroken and perfect.

‘‘Cīvaraṃ piṇḍapātañca, paccayaṃ sayanāsanaṃ;

598.

600.

I abstain from killing, I avoid taking what is not given in the world; I do not drink intoxicants, nor do I speak falsely, and I am content with my own wife; and I undertake this noble eightfold path, skillful and productive of happiness.

‘‘Bhikkhū ca sīlasampanne, vītarāge bahussute;

599.

601.

Robes, alms food, requisites, lodging;

‘‘Etādiso licchavi ambasakkaro, vesāliyaṃ aññataro upāsako;

Food, drink, edibles, cloths and lodgings.

602.

600.

‘‘Sūlāvuto ca arogo hutvā, serī sukhī pabbajjaṃ upāgami;

And monks endowed with virtue, free from lust, learned;

603.

I give, I do not waver, devoted to the Buddha's teaching."

‘‘Etādisā sappurisāna sevanā, mahapphalā hoti sataṃ vijānataṃ;

601.

Gāthāyo avocuṃ.

Such was the Licchavi Ambasakkara, another Upāsaka in Vesālī; faithful, gentle, and helpful to the monk, and he diligently attended to the Saṅgha at that time.

557-560.Tatthavāsūpagacchitthāti vāsaṃ upagacchi.Gihikiccānīti gehaṃ āvasantena kātabbakuṭumbakiccāni.Viceyyāti sundaravatthagahaṇatthaṃ vicinitvā.Paṭikkantanti piṇḍapātato paṭikkantaṃ. Tenāha‘‘gocarato nivatta’’nti.Avocāti ‘‘vesāliyaṃ licchavihaṃ, bhadante’’tiādikaṃ avoca.

602.

562-3.Vidālayantīti viphālayanti.Pādakuṭhārikāhīti pādasaṅkhātāhi kuṭhārīhi.Pātayantīti paripātayanti.

And the impaled man, having become healthy, happy, went forth into homelessness; and having approached the excellent barber monk, both attained the fruits of the life of a recluse.

564.Tiṇenāti tiṇaggenāpi.Mūḷhassa maggampi na pāvadāsīti maggamūḷhassa maggampi tvaṃ na kathayasi ‘‘evāyaṃ purisā ito cito ca paribbhamatū’’ti. Keḷīsīlo hi ayaṃ rājā.Sayamādiyāsīti andhassa hatthato yaṭṭhiṃ sayameva acchinditvā gaṇhasi.Saṃvibhāgaṃ karosīti attanā paribhuñjitabbavatthuto ekaccāni datvā saṃvibhajasi.

603.

565.Paccemi, bhante, yaṃ tvaṃ vadesīti ‘‘bhante, tvaṃ pattāni bhijjantī’’tiādinā yaṃ vadesi, taṃ paṭijānāmi, sabbamevetaṃ mayā kataṃ kārāpitañcāti dasseti.Etampīti etaṃ khiḍḍādhippāyena katampi.

Such is the association with good people, of great fruit, as the wise know; the impaled man touched the highest fruit, but Ambasakkara the lesser fruit" -

566-7.Khiḍḍāti khiḍḍāya.Pasavitvāti upacinitvā.Vedetīti anubhavati.Asamattabhogīti aparipuṇṇabhogo. Tameva aparipuṇṇabhogataṃ dassetuṃ‘‘daharo yuvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.Nagganiyassāti naggabhāvassa.Kiṃ su tato dukkhatarassa hotīti kiṃ su nāma tato naggabhāvato dukkhataraṃ assa petassa hoti.Yakkhassimā gacchantu dakkhiṇāyoti imā mayā diyyamānavatthadakkhiṇāyo petassa upakappantu.

They recited the verses.

568-72.Bahudhāpasatthanti bahūhi pakārehi buddhādīhi vaṇṇitaṃ.Akkhayadhammamatthūti aparikkhayadhammaṃ hotu.Ācamayitvāti hatthapādadhovanapubbakaṃ mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā.Candanasāralittanti sārabhūtacandanalittaṃ.Uḷāravaṇṇanti seṭṭharūpaṃ.Parivāritanti anukulavuttinā parijanena parivāritaṃ.Yakkhamahiddhipattanti mahatiṃ yakkhiddhiṃ, deviddhiṃ patvā ṭhitaṃ.Tamenamavocāti tamenaṃ avoca.

557-560. There, vāsūpagacchitthā: approached a dwelling. Gihikiccānī: household duties to be done by one living in a house. Viceyyā: having searched, selecting for the purpose of taking fine cloths. Paṭikkantaṃ: having returned from alms round. Therefore he said, ‘‘gocarato nivatta’’: "returned from the pasture". Avocā: said, "In Vesālī, there is a Licchavi, Bhante," etc.

573.Ekadesaṃ adāsīti catūsu paccayesu ekadesabhūtaṃ vatthadānaṃ sandhāya vadati.Sakkhinti sakkhibhāvaṃ.

562-3. Vidālayantī: they tear apart. Pādakuṭhārikāhī: with axes called feet. Pātayantī: they cause to fall down.

574.Mamāsīti me āsi.Devatā meti mayhaṃ devatā āsīti yojanā.

564. Tiṇenā: even with a blade of grass. Mūḷhassa maggampi na pāvadāsī: you do not even tell the way to one confused about the way, "Let this man wander here and there." For this king is of playful nature. Sayamādiyāsī: you yourself cut off and take the stick from the hand of a blind man. Saṃvibhāgaṃ karosī: giving some of the things to be used by oneself, you share.

575-7.Vippaṭipannacittoti micchādiṭṭhiṃ paṭipannamānaso, dhammiyaṃ paṭipadaṃ pahāya adhammiyaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipannoti attho.Yatonidānanti yannimittaṃ yassa santikaṃ āgamanahetu.

565. Paccemi, bhante, yaṃ tvaṃ vadesī: "Bhante, what you say, 'bowls are broken,' etc., I acknowledge that, I show that all of it was done or caused to be done by me." Etampī: even this, done with playful intent.

579.Saṃvibhajitvāti dānasaṃvibhāgaṃ katvā.Sayaṃ mukhenūpanisajja pucchāti aññe purise apesetvā upinisīditvā sammukheneva puccha.

566-7. Khiḍḍā: for sport. Pasavitvā: having accumulated. Vedetī: experiences. Asamattabhogī: with incomplete enjoyment. To show that very incompleteness of enjoyment, ‘‘daharo yuvā’’ etc., was said. Nagganiyassā: of nakedness. Kiṃ su tato dukkhatarassa hotī: what could be more painful than that nakedness for the departed? Yakkhassimā gacchantu dakkhiṇāyo: may these gifts of cloth given by me accrue to the departed.

581-3.Sannisinnanti sannipatitavasena nisinnaṃ.Labhissāmi atthanti mayā icchitampi atthaṃ labhissāmi.Paṇihitadaṇḍoti ṭhapitasarīradaṇḍo.Anusattarūpoti rājini anusattasabhāvo.Vīsatirattimattāti vīsatimattā rattiyo ativattāti attho.Tāhanti taṃ ahaṃ.Yathāmatinti mayhaṃ yathāruci.

581-3. Sannisinna means sitting together in a gathering. Labhissāmi attha means "I will obtain the benefit that I desire." Paṇihitadaṇḍo means one who has set aside the rod of punishment. Anusattarūpo means one who is attached to the queen. Vīsatirattimattā means about twenty nights have passed. Tāha means that I. Yathāmati means according to my liking.

584.Etañcaaññañcāti etaṃ sūle āvutaṃ purisaṃ aññañca yassa rājāṇā paṇihitā, tañca.Lahuṃ pamuñcāti sīghaṃ mocehi.Ko taṃ vadetha tathā karontanti tathā dhammiyakammaṃ karontaṃ taṃ imasmiṃ vajjiraṭṭhe ko nāma ‘‘na pamocehī’’ti vadeyya, evaṃ vattuṃ kocipi na labhatīti attho.

584. Etañca aññañcā means this man pierced on a stake, and that other for whom the king's command is laid down. Lahuṃ pamuñcā means quickly release him. Ko taṃ vadetha tathā karonta means who in this Vajji country would say to you, while you are doing such a righteous deed, "Do not release him"? No one can say such a thing.

585.Tikicchakānañcāti tikicchake ca.

585. Tikicchakānañcā means and to the physicians.

588.Yakkhassa vacoti petassa vacanaṃ, tassa, bhante, petassa vacanena evamakāsinti dasseti.

588. Yakkhassa vaco means the word of the peta; it shows that he did this by the word of that peta, venerable sir.

590.Dhammānīti pubbe kataṃ pāpakammaṃ abhibhavituṃ samatthe puññadhamme.Kammaṃ siyā aññatra vedanīyanti yaṃ tasmiṃ pāpakamme upapajjavedanīyaṃ, taṃ ahosikammaṃ nāma hoti. Yaṃ pana aparapariyāyavedanīyaṃ, taṃ aññatra aparapariyāye vedayitabbaphalaṃ hoti sati saṃsārappavattiyanti attho.

590. Dhammānī means meritorious deeds that are capable of overcoming the evil deeds done in the past. Kammaṃ siyā aññatra vedanīya means that the evil deed which is of the nature to be experienced in the immediately subsequent existence, that is called ahosikamma. But that which is to be experienced in another subsequent existence will bear fruit in that other subsequent existence, as long as the cycle of existence continues.

593.Imañcāti attanā vuccamānaṃ tāya āsannaṃ paccakkhaṃ vāti katvā vuttaṃ.Ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgavarenupetanti parisuddhaṭṭhena ariyaṃ, pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīhi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi upetaṃ yuttaṃ uttamaṃ uposathasīlaṃ.Kusalanti anavajjaṃ.Sukhudrayanti sukhavipākaṃ.

593. Imañcā means this, being spoken by himself, is said because it is near and evident. Ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgavarenupeta means the noble uposatha-sīla, which is noble in the sense of purity, endowed with eight factors, namely, abstinence from killing and so on. Kusala means blameless. Sukhudraya means having happiness as its result.

595.Sadā puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti sakideva puññaṃ katvā ‘‘alamettāvatā’’ti aparituṭṭho hutvā aparāparaṃ sucaritaṃ pūrentassa sabbakālaṃ puññaṃ abhivaḍḍhati, aparāparaṃ vā sucaritaṃ pūrentassa puññasaṅkhātaṃ puññaphalaṃ uparūpari vaḍḍhati paripūretīti attho.

595. Sadā puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī means one who, having done merit even once, is not content, thinking "this is enough," and continuously fulfills good conduct, merit always increases for him; or, for one who continuously fulfills good conduct, the meritorious result called merit grows and becomes complete, again and again.

597.Evaṃ therena vutte rājā apāyadukkhato utrastacitto ratanattaye puññadhamme ca abhivaḍḍhamānapasādo tato paṭṭhāya saraṇāni sīlāni ca samādiyanto‘‘ajjeva buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ upemī’’tiādimāha.

597. When the Elder said this, the king, with his mind frightened by the suffering of the apāya and with increasing faith in the Three Jewels and in meritorious deeds, from then on, taking refuge and observing the precepts, said "Even today, I go for refuge to the Buddha" and so on.

601.Tatthaetādisoti ediso yathāvuttarūpo.Vesāliyaṃ aññataro upāsakoti vesāliyaṃ anekasahassesu upāsakesu aññataro upāsako hutvā.Saddhotiādi kalyāṇamittasannissayena tassa purimabhāvato aññādisataṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Pubbe hi so assaddho kakkhaḷo bhikkhūnaṃ akkosakārako saṅghassa ca anupaṭṭhāko ahosi. Idāni pana saddho muduko hutvā bhikkhusaṅghañca sakkaccaṃ tadā upaṭṭhahīti. Tattakārakaroti upakārakārī.

601. There, etādiso means like this, of the kind described. Vesāliyaṃ aññataro upāsako means having been one of the many thousands of lay followers in Vesālī. Saddho etc. is said to show a state different from his former state due to reliance on good friends. For formerly he was faithless, harsh, abusive to the monks, and did not support the Sangha. But now, being faithful and gentle, he respectfully supported the Sangha of monks at that time. There, kārakaro means one who does good, a benefactor.

602.Ubhopīti dvepi sūlāvuto rājā ca.Sāmaññaphalāni ajjhagunti yathārahaṃ sāmaññaphalāni adhigacchiṃsu. Tayidaṃ yathārahaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘sūlāvuto aggaphalaṃ aphassayi, phalaṃ kaniṭṭhaṃ pana ambasakkaro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatthaphalaṃ kaniṭṭhanti sotāpattiphalaṃ sandhāyāha. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.

602. Ubhopī means both, the one pierced on a stake and the king. Sāmaññaphalāni ajjhagu means they attained the fruits of reclusiveness according to their deserts. To show this appropriately, it is said, ‘‘sūlāvuto aggaphalaṃ aphassayi, phalaṃ kaniṭṭhaṃ pana ambasakkaro’’. There, phalaṃ kaniṭṭha means referring to the sotāpatti fruit. Whatever is not distinct here in meaning, that is easily understood.

Evaṃ raññā petena attanā ca vuttamatthaṃ āyasmā kappitako satthāraṃ vandituṃ sāvatthiṃ gato bhagavato ārocesi. Satthā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Thus, Venerable Kappitaka, having gone to Sāvatthi to pay homage to the Teacher, reported to the Blessed One the matter spoken by the king, the peta, and himself. The Teacher, making that matter the occasion, taught the Dhamma to the assembled company. That teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Ambasakkarapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Ambasakkara Peta-story is finished.

2. Serīsakapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Serīsaka Peta-story

604-57.Suṇotha yakkhassa vāṇijānañcāti idaṃ serīsakapetavatthu. Taṃ yasmā serīsakavimānavatthunā nibbisesaṃ, tasmā tattha aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ gāthāsu ca yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paramatthadīpaniyaṃ vimānavatthuvaṇṇanāyaṃ (vi. va. aṭṭha. 1227 serīsakavimānavaṇṇanā) vuttameva, tasmā tattha vuttanayena veditabbanti.

604-57. Suṇotha yakkhassa vāṇijānañcā means this is the Serīsaka Peta-story. Since it is not different from the Serīsaka Vimāna-story, whatever should be said about the origin and the verses is already said in the Paramatthadīpanī, in the commentary on the Vimāna-story (VvA. 1227, Serīsaka-vimāna-vaṇṇanā); therefore, it should be understood according to the method stated there.

Serīsakapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Serīsaka Peta-story is finished.

3. Nandakapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Nandaka Peta-story

Rājā piṅgalako nāmāti idaṃ nandakapetavatthu. Tassa kā uppatti? Satthu parinibbānato vassasatadvayassa accayena suraṭṭhavisaye piṅgalo nāma rājā ahosi. Tassa senāpati nandako nāma micchādiṭṭhī viparītadassano ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā micchāgāhaṃ paggayha vicari. Tassa dhītā uttarā nāma upāsikā patirūpe kule dinnā ahosi. Nandako pana kālaṃ katvā viñjhāṭaviyaṃ mahati nigrodharukkhe vemānikapeto hutvā nibbatti. Tasmiṃ kālakate uttarā sucisītalagandhodakapūritaṃ pānīyaghaṭaṃ kummāsābhisaṅkhatehi vaṇṇagandharasasampannehi pūvehi paripuṇṇasarāvakañca aññatarassa khīṇāsavattherassa datvā ‘‘ayaṃ dakkhiṇā mayhaṃ pitu upakappatū’’ti uddisi, tassa tena dānena dibbapānīyaṃ aparimitā ca pūvā pātubhaviṃsu. Taṃ disvā so evaṃ cintesi – ‘‘pāpakaṃ vata mayā kataṃ, yaṃ mahājano ‘natthi dinna’ntiādinā micchāgāhaṃ gāhito. Idāni pana piṅgalo rājā dhammāsokassa rañño ovādaṃ dātuṃ gato, so taṃ tassa datvā āgamissati, handāhaṃ natthikadiṭṭhiṃ vinodessāmī’’ti. Na cireneva ca piṅgalo rājā dhammāsokassa rañño ovādaṃ datvā paṭinivattanto maggaṃ paṭipajji.

Rājā piṅgalako nāmā means this is the Nandaka Peta-story. What is its origin? Two hundred years after the passing away of the Teacher, there was a king named Piṅgala in the Suraṭṭha country. His general, named Nandaka, was a holder of wrong views with perverted vision, who went around proclaiming his wrong belief, beginning with "there is no giving." His daughter, named Uttarā, was a lay follower given in marriage to a suitable family. Nandaka, having died, was reborn as a peta with a celestial mansion in a large banyan tree in the Viñjhā forest. When he died, Uttarā, having given a water pot filled with clean, cool, and fragrant water, and a bowl full of cakes mixed with kummāsa, possessing excellent color, smell, and taste, to a certain arahant Elder, dedicated it, saying, "May this offering accrue to my father." By that giving, divine water and immeasurable cakes appeared. Seeing that, he thought thus: "I have done an evil deed, in that I have caused many people to adopt the wrong belief beginning with 'there is no giving.' Now, King Piṅgala has gone to give advice to King Dhammāsoka; he will give it to him and return. Now I will dispel his wrong view." Not long after, King Piṅgala, having given advice to King Dhammāsoka, set out on the road to return.

‘‘devatā nusi gandhabbo’’tiādinā petaṃ pucchi. Peto ādito paṭṭhāya attano pavattiṃ ācikkhitvā rājānaṃ micchādassanato vimocetvā saraṇesu sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpesi. Tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ saṅgītikārā –

‘‘devatā nusi gandhabbo’’ etc., he asked the peta. The peta, having related his story from the beginning, freed the king from his wrong view and established him in the refuges and precepts. To show that matter, the compilers of the Saṅgīti said:

658.

658.

‘‘Rājā piṅgalako nāma, suraṭṭhānaṃ adhipati ahu;

"There was a king named Piṅgalaka,
The ruler of the Suratthas;
Having gone to attend upon the Moriyas,
He returned again to Surattha.

659.

659.

‘‘Uṇhe majjhanhike kāle, rājā paṅkaṃ upāgami;

"At midday in the hot season,
The king approached a muddy spot;
He saw a delightful path,
The route described by the petas.

660.Sārathiṃ āmantayī rājā –

660. The king addressed his charioteer:

‘‘‘Ayaṃ maggo ramaṇīyo, khemo sovatthiko sivo;

"‘This path is delightful,
Safe, auspicious, and secure;
By this path, charioteer, let us go,
To Surattha, near from here.’

661.

661.

‘‘Tena pāyāsi soraṭṭho, senāya caturaṅginiyā;

"Then the king of Soraṭṭha proceeded,
With his fourfold army;
A man of frightening appearance
Spoke these words to the king of Soraṭṭha:

662.

662.

‘‘‘Kummaggaṃ paṭipannamhā, bhiṃsanaṃ lomahaṃsanaṃ;

"‘We have entered a bad path,
Frightful, making the hair stand on end;
The path is visible in front,
But not visible behind.

663.

663.

‘‘‘Kummaggaṃ paṭipannamhā, yamapurisāna santike;

"‘We have entered a bad path,
Near to the servants of Yama;
An inhuman smell is blowing,
A terrible sound is heard.’

664.

664.

‘‘Saṃviggo rājā soraṭṭho, sārathiṃ etadabravi;

"The king of Soraṭṭha, agitated,
Spoke these words to his charioteer:
‘We have entered a bad path,
Frightful, making the hair stand on end;
The path is visible in front,
But not visible behind.

665.

665.

‘‘‘Kummaggaṃ paṭipannamhā, yamapurisāna santike;

"‘We have entered a bad path,
Near to the servants of Yama;
An inhuman smell is blowing,
A terrible sound is heard.’

666.

666.

‘‘Hatthikkhandhaṃ samāruyha, olokento catuddisā;

"Having mounted the elephant's neck,
Looking in the four directions;
He saw a delightful banyan tree,
A tree full of shade;
Resembling the color of a dark cloud,
Like the splendor of a rain cloud.

667.

667.

‘‘Sārathiṃ āmantayī rājā, ‘kiṃ eso dissati brahā;

"The king addressed his charioteer: ‘What is that great thing that is seen?
Resembling the color of a dark cloud,
Like the splendor of a rain cloud.’

668.

668.

‘‘Nigrodho so mahārāja, pādapo chāyāsampanno;

"‘That, great king, is a banyan tree,
A tree full of shade;
Resembling the color of a dark cloud,
Like the splendor of a rain cloud.’

669.

669.

‘‘Tena pāyāsi soraṭṭho, yena so dissate brahā;

"Then the king of Soraṭṭha proceeded,
To where that great thing was seen;
Resembling the color of a dark cloud,
Like the splendor of a rain cloud.

670.

670.

‘‘Hatthikkhandhato oruyha, rājā rukkhaṃ upāgami;

"Having descended from the elephant's neck,
The king approached the tree;
He sat at the foot of the tree,
With his ministers and retinue;
He saw a full flask of water,
Cakes and various kinds of food.

671.

671.

‘‘Puriso ca devavaṇṇī, sabbābharaṇabhūsito;

"And a man of divine appearance,
Adorned with all kinds of ornaments;
Approaching the king,
Spoke these words to the king of Soraṭṭha:

672.

672.

‘‘‘Svāgataṃ te mahārāja, atho te adurāgataṃ;

"‘Welcome, great king, and well arrived;
Let the king drink water,
Eat cakes, O subduer of foes.’

673.

673.

‘‘Pivitvā rājā pānīyaṃ, sāmacco saparijjano;

"Having drunk the water, the king,
With his ministers and retinue;
Having eaten the cakes and drunk the water,
The king of Soraṭṭha spoke these words:

674.

674.

‘‘Devatā nusi gandhabbo, adu sakko purindado;

"‘Are you a deva or a gandhabba,
Or Sakka, the giver of cities?
Not knowing you, we ask,
How should we know you?’

675.

675.

‘‘Nāmhi devo na gandhabbo, nāpi sakko purindado;

"‘I am not a deva or a gandhabba,
Nor Sakka, the giver of cities;
I am a peta, great king,
From Surattha, who has come here.’

676.

676.

‘‘Kiṃsīlo kiṃsamācāro, suraṭṭhasmiṃ pure tuvaṃ;

"‘What was your conduct, what your behavior,
When you were in Surattha?
By what sort of holy life,
Is this your power?’

677.

677.

‘‘Taṃ suṇohi mahārāja, arindama raṭṭhavaḍḍhana;

"‘Listen to me, great king,
Subduer of foes, increaser of the kingdom,
Ministers, courtiers,
The brahmin and the chaplain.

678.

678.

‘‘Suraṭṭhasmiṃ ahaṃ deva, puriso pāpacetaso;

"‘In Surattha, O king, I was
A man with an evil mind;
A holder of wrong views and immoral,
Stingy and a reviler.

679.

679.

‘‘Dadantānaṃ karontānaṃ, vārayissaṃ bahujjanaṃ;

"‘To those who were giving and doing good,
I would dissuade many people;
To others who were giving,
I was an obstructer.

680.

680.

‘‘Vipāko natthi dānassa, saṃyamassa kuto phalaṃ;

"‘There is no result of giving,
How can there be fruit of self-restraint?
There is no teacher,
Who will tame the untamed?

681.

681.

‘‘Samatulyāni bhūtāni, kuto jeṭṭhāpacāyiko;

"‘Beings are equal and alike,
How can there be respect for elders?
There is no strength or energy,
How can there be manly effort?

682.

682.

‘‘Natthi dānaphalaṃ nāma, na visodheti verinaṃ;

"‘There is no result of giving,
It does not purify hatred;
A mortal obtains what is obtainable,
A result of fixed conditions.

683.

683.

‘‘Natthi mātā pitā bhātā, loko natthi ito paraṃ;

"‘There is no mother, father, or brother,
There is no world beyond this;
There is no giving, no offering,
No good deed well done exists.

684.

684.

‘‘Yopi haneyya purisaṃ, parassa chindate siraṃ;

"‘Even if one should kill a man,
Or cut off another's head;
No one kills anyone,
It is only between the intervals of the seven elements.

685.

685.

‘‘Acchejjābhejjo hi jīvo, aṭṭhaṃso guḷaparimaṇḍalo;

"‘For the life-principle is indestructible and unbreakable,
An eighth part, like a lump of molasses;
Five hundred yojanas in extent,
Who is able to cut the life-principle?

686.

686.

‘‘Yathā suttaguḷe khitte, nibbeṭhentaṃ palāyati;

"‘Just as when a ball of thread is thrown,
It unravels and runs away;
Even so, that life-principle,
Unraveling, runs away.

687.

687.

‘‘Yathā gāmato nikkhamma, aññaṃ gāmaṃ pavisati;

"‘Just as having left one village,
One enters another village;
Even so, that life-principle,
Enters another body.

688.

688.

‘‘Yathā gehato nikkhamma, aññaṃ gehaṃ pavisati;

"‘Just as having left one house,
One enters another house;
Even so, that life-principle,
Enters another body.

689.

689.

‘‘Cullāsīti mahākappino, satasahassāni hi;

"‘Eighty-four great aeons,
Hundreds of thousands;
Both the foolish and the wise,
Having exhausted saṃsāra,
Will make an end to suffering.

690.

690.

‘‘Mitāni sukhadukkhāni, doṇehi piṭakehi ca;

"‘Pleasures and pains are measured,
By baskets and containers;
The Conqueror knows all,
The rest of mankind is deluded.

691.

691.

‘‘Evaṃdiṭṭhi pure āsiṃ, sammūḷho mohapāruto;

"‘I was of such views in the past,
Deluded, covered with ignorance;
A holder of wrong views and immoral,
Stingy and a reviler.

692.

692.

‘‘Oraṃ me chahi māsehi, kālakiriyā bhavissati;

"‘Within six months from now,
My death will occur;
I will fall into a hell,
Utterly bitter and terrible.’

693.

693.

‘‘Catukkaṇṇaṃ catudvāraṃ, vibhattaṃ bhāgaso mitaṃ;

"Four-cornered, four-doored, divided into portions, measured;
Enclosed by a wall of iron, hammered down with iron.

694.

694.

‘‘Tassa ayomayā bhūmi, jalitā tejasā yutā;

"Its ground is made of iron, blazing, endowed with heat;
On all sides, a hundred yojanas, pervading, it always stands.

695.

695.

‘‘Vassāni satasahassāni, ghoso suyyati tāvade;

"For hundreds of thousands of years, a sound is heard;
This is a hundred thousand, a hundred-part-year-crore.

696.

696.

‘‘Koṭisatasahassāni, niraye paccare janā;

"Hundreds of thousands of crores, people suffer in hell;
Those of wrong view and immoral, and those who revile the Noble Ones.

697.

697.

‘‘Tatthāhaṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ, dukkhaṃ vedissa vedanaṃ;

"There, for a long time, I will experience painful feeling;
The fruit of evil action, therefore I grieve greatly.

698.

698.

‘‘Taṃ suṇohi mahārāja, arindama raṭṭhavaḍḍhana;

"Listen to that, great king, subduer of foes, increaser of the realm;
My daughter, great king, Uttara, may good be to you.

699.

699.

‘‘Karoti bhaddakaṃ kammaṃ, sīlesuposathe ratā;

"She does good deeds, delights in the precepts and the uposatha;
Restrained, sharing, generous, free from stinginess.

700.

700.

‘‘Akhaṇḍakārī sikkhāya, suṇhā parakulesu ca;

"An unbroken practitioner of the training, a daughter-in-law in other families;
A female lay follower of the Sakyan sage, the glorious Fully Enlightened One.

701.

701.

‘‘Bhikkhu ca sīlasampanno, gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi;

"A bhikkhu, accomplished in virtue, entered the village for alms;
With downcast eyes, mindful, guarded of the doors, well restrained.

702.

702.

‘‘Sapadānaṃ caramāno, agamā taṃ nivesanaṃ;

"Wandering in regular order, he went to that dwelling;
Her he saw, great king, Uttara, may good be to you.

703.

703.

‘‘Pūraṃ pānīyasarakaṃ, pūve vitte ca sā adā;

"A full water pot, cakes and sweets she gave;
'My father is deceased, venerable sir, may this accrue to him.'

704.

704.

‘‘Samanantarānuddiṭṭhe, vipāko udapajjatha;

"Immediately after the offering, the result arose;
I enjoy sensual pleasures here, like King Vessavaṇa.

705.

705.

‘‘Taṃ suṇohi mahārāja, arindama raṭṭhavaḍḍhana;

"Listen to that, great king, subduer of foes, increaser of the realm;
For the world with its devas, the Buddha is said to be supreme;
Go for refuge to that Buddha, with your children and wife, subduer of foes.

706.

706.

‘‘Aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena, phusanti amataṃ padaṃ;

"By the eightfold path, they touch the deathless state;
Go for refuge to that Dhamma, with your children and wife, subduer of foes.

707.

707.

‘‘Cattāro ca paṭipannā, cattāro ca phale ṭhitā;

"Four are those who have entered, four are those established in the fruit;
This Sangha is upright, endowed with wisdom and virtue;
Go for refuge to that Sangha, with your children and wife, subduer of foes.

708.

708.

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viramassu khippaṃ, loke adinnaṃ parivajjayassu;

"Abstain from killing quickly, avoid taking what is not given in the world;
Be not an alcoholic, nor speak falsely, and be content with your own wife."

709.

709.

‘‘Atthakāmosi me yakkha, hitakāmosi devate;

"You wish for my welfare, Yaksha, you wish for my good, deity;
I will do your word, you are my teacher.

710.

710.

‘‘Upemi saraṇaṃ buddhaṃ, dhammañcāpi anuttaraṃ;

"I go for refuge to the Buddha, and also to the unsurpassed Dhamma;
And to the Sangha of the God of men, I go for refuge.

711.

711.

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viramāmi khippaṃ, loke adinnaṃ parivajjayāmi;

"I abstain from killing quickly, I avoid taking what is not given in the world;
I am not an alcoholic, nor do I speak falsely, and I am content with my own wife."

712.

712.

‘‘Ophuṇāmi mahāvāte, nadiyā sīghagāmiyā;

"I cast off in a great wind, in a swiftly flowing river;
I vomit out evil views, delighting in the Buddhas' teaching.

713.

713.

‘‘Idaṃ vatvāna soraṭṭho, viramitvā pāpadassanā;

"Having said this, Soraṭṭha, desisting from evil views;
Having paid homage to the Blessed One, Pāmokkha mounted the chariot"—so the verses were spoken;

658-9.Tattharājā piṅgalako nāma, suraṭṭhānaṃ adhipati ahūti piṅgalacakkhutāya ‘‘piṅgalo’’ti pākaṭanāmo suraṭṭhadesassa issaro rājā ahosi.Moriyānanti moriyarājūnaṃ, dhammāsokaṃ sandhāya vadati.Suraṭṭhaṃ punarāgamāti suraṭṭhassa visayaṃ uddissa suraṭṭhagāmimaggaṃ paccāgañchi.Paṅkanti mudubhūmiṃ.Vaṇṇupathanti petena nimmitaṃ marūbhūmimaggaṃ.

658-9.There, a king named Piṅgalaka, was the ruler of the Surāṭṭhas because of his reddish-brown eyes, he was known as "Piṅgala", the lord of the Surāṭṭha country, was the king. Of the Moriyas he speaks referring to the Moriya kings, concerning Dhammāsoka. He returned again to Surāṭṭha he returned towards the district of Surāṭṭha, towards the road to the Surāṭṭha village. Mud means soft ground. Vaṇṇupatha means the desert road made by the peta.

660.Khemoti nibbhayo.Sovatthikoti sotthibhāvāvaho.Sivoti anupaddavo.Suraṭṭhānaṃ santike itoti iminā maggena gacchantā mayaṃ suraṭṭhavisayassa samīpeyeva.

660.Khemo means fearless. Sovatthiko means bringing well-being. Sivo means free from danger. Near to Surāṭṭha from here means, going by this road, we are very near to the Surāṭṭha district.

661-2.Soraṭṭhoti suraṭṭhādhipati.Ubbiggarūpoti utrastasabhāvo.Bhiṃsananti bhayajananaṃ.Lomahaṃsananti bhiṃsanakabhāvena lomānaṃ haṃsāpanaṃ.

661-2.Soraṭṭho means the ruler of Surāṭṭha. Ubbiggarūpo means of a fearful nature. Bhiṃsana means causing fear. Lomahaṃsana means the hair standing on end due to the fearful state.

663.Yamapurisāna santiketi petānaṃ samīpe vattāma.Amānuso vāyati gandhoti petānaṃ sarīragandho vāyati.Ghoso suyyati dāruṇoti paccekanirayesu kāraṇaṃ kāriyamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ghorataro saddo suyyati.

663.Near to the Yama's people means we are near to the petas. A non-human smell wafts means the body odor of the petas wafts. A terrible sound is heard means the most terrible sound of beings being made to do (kāraṇaṃ) in the individual hells is heard.

666.Pādapanti pādasadisehi mūlāvayavehi udakassa pivanato ‘‘pādapo’’ti laddhanāmaṃ taruṃ.Chāyāsampannanti sampannacchāyaṃ.Nīlabbhavaṇṇasadisanti vaṇṇena nīlameghasadisaṃ.Meghavaṇṇasirīnibhanti meghavaṇṇasaṇṭhānaṃ hutvā khāyamānaṃ.

666.Pādapa means a tree that has obtained the name "pādapo" because it drinks water with root parts similar to feet. Chāyāsampanna means possessing abundant shade. Nīlabbhavaṇṇasadisa means similar in color to a blue cloud. Meghavaṇṇasirīnibha means appearing as having the form of a cloud color.

670.Pūraṃ pānīyasarakanti pānīyena puṇṇaṃ pānīyabhājanaṃ.Pūveti khajjake.Vitteti vittijanane madhure manuññe tahiṃ tahiṃ sarāve pūretvā ṭhapitapūve addasa.

670.Pūraṃ pānīyasaraka means a water vessel full of water. Pūve means cakes. Vitte means sweet and pleasing in generating wealth, he saw cakes placed filling pots here and there.

672.Athote adurāgatanti etthaathoti nipātamattaṃ, avadhāraṇatthe vā, mahārāja, te āgataṃ durāgataṃ na hoti, atha kho svāgatamevāti mayaṃ sampaṭicchāmāti attho.Arindamāti arīnaṃ damanasīla.

672.Atho te adurāgata here atho is merely a particle, or in the sense of emphasis, "Great king, your coming is not unwelcome, but rather we welcome you," is the meaning. Arindama means one who is in the habit of subduing enemies.

677.Amaccā pārisajjāti amaccā pārisajjā ca vacanaṃ suṇantu, brāhmaṇo ca tuyhaṃ purohito taṃ suṇātūti yojanā.

677.Amaccā pārisajjā means let the ministers and attendants listen to the word, and let your brahmin purohita listen to it, is the construction.

678.Suraṭṭhasmiṃ ahanti suraṭṭhadese ahaṃ.Devāti rājānaṃ ālapati.Micchādiṭṭhīti natthikadiṭṭhiyā viparītadassano.Dussīloti nissīlo.Kadariyoti thaddhamaccharī.Paribhāsakoti samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ akkosako.

678.Suraṭṭhasmiṃ aha means in the Surāṭṭha country, I. Devā he addresses the king. Micchādiṭṭhī means seeing perversely with a nihilistic view. Dussīlo means immoral. Kadariyo means stubborn and stingy. Paribhāsako means one who reviles samaṇas and brāhmaṇas.

679.Vārayissanti vāresiṃ.Antarāyakaro ahanti dānaṃ dadantānaṃ upakāraṃ karontānaṃ antarāyakaro hutvā aññesañca paresaṃ dānaṃ dadamānānaṃ dānamayapuññato ahaṃ bahujanaṃ vārayissaṃ vāresinti yojanā.

679.Vārayissaṃ means I prevented. Antarāyakaro aha means I, being an obstacle to those giving gifts, to those doing good, and also to others giving gifts, will prevent many people from merit made of giving, is the construction.

680.Vipākonatthi dānassātiādi vāritākāradassanaṃ. Tatthavipāko natthi dānassāti dānaṃ dadato tassa vipāko āyatiṃ pattabbaphalaṃ natthīti vipākaṃ paṭibāhati.Saṃyamassa kuto phalanti sīlassa pana kuto nāma phalaṃ, sabbena sabbaṃ taṃ natthīti adhippāyo.Natthi ācariyo nāmāti ācārasamācārasikkhāpako ācariyo nāma koci natthi. Sabhāvato eva hi sattā dantā vā adantā vā hontīti adhippāyo. Tenāha‘‘adantaṃ ko damessatī’’ti.

680.Vipāko natthi dānassā etc., is the showing of the prevented state. There, vipāko natthi dānassā means there is no result to be attained in the future for one giving a gift, he refutes the result. Saṃyamassa kuto phala but where indeed is the fruit of virtue, the intention is that all of it is non-existent. Natthi ācariyo nāmā means there is no teacher named who teaches conduct and proper conduct. The intention is that beings are naturally tame or untame. Therefore he said "adantaṃ ko damessatī".

681.Samatulyāni bhūtānīti ime sattā sabbepi aññamaññaṃ samasamā, tasmā jeṭṭho eva natthi, kuto jeṭṭhāpacāyiko, jeṭṭhāpacāyanapuññaṃ nāma natthīti attho.Natthi balanti yamhi attano bale patiṭṭhitā sattā vīriyaṃ katvā manussasobhagyataṃ ādiṃ katvā yāvaarahattaṃ sampattiyo pāpuṇanti, taṃ vīriyabalaṃ paṭikkhipati.Vīriyaṃ vā natthi kuto uṭṭhānaporisanti idaṃ no purisavīriyena purisakārena pavattanti evaṃ pavattavādapaṭikkhepavasena vuttaṃ.

681.Samatulyāni bhūtānī means these beings are all equal to each other, therefore there is no elder at all, how much less a respecter of elders, there is no such thing as merit of respecting elders, is the meaning. Natthi bala means he rejects that power of effort by which beings, established in their own power, attain accomplishments beginning with the splendor of humans up to arahantship. Vīriyaṃ vā natthi kuto uṭṭhānaporisa this is said in terms of rejecting the doctrine of the absence of effort, of the absence of human action.

682.Natthidānaphalaṃ nāmāti dānassa phalaṃ nāma kiñci natthi, deyyadhammapariccāgo bhasmanihitaṃ viya nipphalo evāti attho.Na visodheti verinanti etthaverinanti veravantaṃ verānaṃ vasena pāṇātipātādīnaṃ vasena ca katapāpaṃ puggalaṃ dānasīlādivatato na visodheti, kadācipi suddhaṃ na karoti. Pubbe ‘‘vipāko natthi dānassā’’tiādi dānādito attano paresaṃ nivāritākāradassanaṃ, ‘‘natthi dānaphalaṃ nāmā’’tiādi pana atthano micchābhinivesadassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Laddheyyanti laddhabbaṃ. Kathaṃ pana laddhabbanti āha‘‘niyatipariṇāmaja’’nti. Ayaṃ satto sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā labhanto niyativipariṇāmavaseneva labhati, na kammassa katattā, na issarādinā cāti adhippāyo.

682.Natthi dānaphalaṃ nāmā means there is no such thing as the fruit of giving, the meaning is that the sacrifice of what should be given is fruitless like something buried in ashes. Na visodheti verina here verina means one who has enmity, one who has done evil due to enmity, due to killing etc., does not purify such a person by means of giving, virtue etc., he never makes him pure. It should be seen that previously "vipāko natthi dānassā" etc., is showing the prevented state from giving etc., to oneself and others, while "natthi dānaphalaṃ nāmā" etc., is showing one's own false adherence. Laddheyya means to be obtained. But how is it obtained? He says, "niyatipariṇāmaja". This being, experiencing happiness or suffering, obtains it only through the change of determinacy, not due to the doing of karma, not by God etc., is the intention.

683.Natthimātā pitā bhātāti mātādīsu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ phalābhāvaṃ sandhāya vadati.Loko natthi ito paranti ito idhalokato paraloko nāma koci natthi, tattha tattheva sattā ucchijjantīti adhippāyo.Dinnanti mahādānaṃ.Hutanti pahenakasakkāro, tadubhayampi phalābhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘natthī’’ti paṭikkhipati.Sunihitanti suṭṭhu nihitaṃ.Na vijjatīti yaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ dānaṃ nāma ‘‘anugāmikanidhī’’ti vadanti, taṃ na vijjati. Tesaṃ taṃ vācāvatthumattamevāti adhippāyo.

683.Natthi mātā pitā bhātā he speaks referring to the absence of results from proper conduct and improper conduct towards mother etc. Loko natthi ito para means there is no world beyond this world, beings are annihilated then and there, is the intention. Dinna means a great gift. Huta means respectful honor, he rejects both of those by saying "natthī" referring to the absence of results. Sunihita means well-placed. Na vijjatī means that which samaṇas and brāhmaṇas say is a gift, "an accompanying treasure," that does not exist. Theirs is merely a matter of words, is the intention.

684.Na koci kañci hanatīti yo puriso paraṃ purisaṃ haneyya, parassa purisassa sīsaṃ chindeyya, tattha paramatthato na koci kañci hanati, sattannaṃ kāyānaṃ chiddabhāvato hananto viya hoti. Kathaṃ satthapahāroti āha‘‘sattannaṃ vivaramantare’’ti. Pathavīādīnaṃ sattannaṃ kāyānaṃ vivarabhūte antare chidde satthaṃ pavisati, tena sattā asiādīhi pahatā viya honti, jīvo viya pana sesakāyāpi niccasabhāvattā na chijjantīti adhippāyo.

684.Na koci kañci hanatī means if a man should kill another man, should cut off the head of another man, there, in reality, no one kills anyone, because of the hollowness of the seven bodies, he appears to be killing. How is there a striking with a weapon? He says "sattannaṃ vivaramantare". In the interval, in the hollow, that is the division of the seven bodies beginning with earth, the weapon enters, therefore beings appear to be struck by swords etc., but the jīva, like the remaining bodies, is not cut off because of its eternal nature, is the intention.

685.Acchejjābhejjo hi jīvoti ayaṃ sattānaṃ jīvo satthādīhi na chinditabbo na bhinditabbo niccasabhāvattā.Aṭṭhaṃso guḷaparimaṇḍaloti so pana jīvo kadāci aṭṭhaṃso hoti kadāci guḷaparimaṇḍalo.Yojanānaṃ sataṃ pañcāti kevalībhāvaṃ patto pañcayojanasatubbedho hoti.Ko jīvaṃ chettumarahatīti niccaṃ nibbikāraṃ jīvaṃ ko nāma satthādīhi chindituṃ arahati, na so kenaci vikopaneyyoti vadati.

685.Acchejjābhejjo hi jīvo means this jīva of beings is not to be cut off, not to be broken by swords etc., because of its eternal nature. Aṭṭhaṃso guḷaparimaṇḍalo means that jīva is sometimes an eighth part, sometimes round like a ball. Yojanānaṃ sataṃ pañcā it is five hundred yojanas in extent when it has attained the state of being alone. Ko jīvaṃ chettumarahatī means who indeed is able to cut off the eternal, immutable jīva with swords etc.? He says that it is not to be disturbed by anyone.

686.Suttaguḷeti veṭhetvā katasuttaguḷe.Khitteti nibbeṭhanavasena khitte.Nibbeṭhentaṃ palāyatīti pabbate vā rukkhagge vā ṭhatvā nibbeṭhiyamānaṃ khittaṃ suttaguḷaṃ nibbeṭhentameva gacchati, sutte khīṇe na gacchati.Evamevanti yathā taṃ suttaguḷaṃ nibbeṭhiyamānaṃ gacchati, sutte khīṇe na gacchati, evameva so jīvo ‘‘cullāsīti mahākappino satasahassānī’’ti vuttakālameva attabhāvaguḷaṃ nibbeṭhento palāyati pavattati, tato uddhaṃ na pavattati.

86.Suttaguḷe in a ball of thread that has been rolled up. Khitte when thrown in terms of unrolling. Nibbeṭhentaṃ palāyatī a ball of thread that is thrown while being unrolled, standing on a mountain or on the top of a tree, goes only as it is being unrolled, it does not go when the thread is exhausted. Evameva just as that ball of thread goes as it is being unrolled, it does not go when the thread is exhausted, just so that jīva, unrolling the ball of existence only for the time stated, "eighty-four thousand great kappas," goes on, continues, it does not continue beyond that.

687.Evameva ca so jīvoti yathā koci puriso attano nivāsagāmato nikkhamitvā tato aññaṃ gāmaṃ pavisati kenacideva karaṇīyena, evameva so jīvo ito sarīrato nikkhamitvā aññaṃ aparaṃ sarīraṃ niyatavasena pavisatīti adhippāyo.Bondinti kāyaṃ.

687.Evameva ca so jīvo just as a man, having left his dwelling village, enters another village by some necessity, just so that jīva, having left this body, enters another and different body by necessity, is the intention. Bondi means body.

689.Cullāsītīti caturāsīti.Mahākappinoti mahākappānaṃ. Tattha ‘‘ekamhā mahāsarā anotattādito vassasate vassasate kusaggena ekekaṃ udakabinduṃ nīharante iminā upakkamena sattakkhattuṃ tamhi sare nirudake jāte eko mahākappo nāma hotī’’ti vatvā ‘‘evarūpānaṃ mahākappānaṃ caturāsītisatasahassāni saṃsārassa parimāṇa’’nti vadanti.Ye bālā ye ca paṇḍitāti ye andhabālā, ye ca sappaññā, sabbepi te.Saṃsāraṃ khepayitvānāti yathāvuttakālaparicchedaṃ saṃsāraṃ aparāparuppattivasena khepetvā.Dukkhassantaṃ karissareti vaṭṭadukkhassa pariyantaṃ pariyosānaṃ karissanti. Paṇḍitāpi antarā sujjhituṃ na sakkonti, bālāpi tato uddhaṃ nappavattantīti tassa laddhi.

689.Cullāsītī means eighty-four. Mahākappino means of great kappas. There, saying "when one removes a single drop of water with a blade of kusa grass every hundred years from a great lake, from the Anotatta etc., by this means, when that lake has become waterless seven times, that is called one great kappa," they say "eighty-four hundred thousand of such great kappas is the extent of saṃsāra." Ye bālā ye ca paṇḍitā means all those who are blindly foolish and those who are wise. Saṃsāraṃ khepayitvānā means having exhausted saṃsāra in terms of successive rebirths during the period mentioned. Dukkhassantaṃ karissare means they will make an end, a conclusion, to the round of suffering. His doctrine is that even the wise are not able to be purified in between, and even the foolish do not continue beyond that.

690.Mitāni sukhadukkhāni, doṇehi piṭakehi cāti sattānaṃ sukhadukkhāni nāma doṇehi piṭakehi mānabhājanehi mitāni viya yathāvuttakālaparicchedeneva parimitattā paccekañca tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tāni niyatipariṇāmajāni parimitāni. Tayidaṃjino sabbaṃ pajānātijinabhūmiyaṃ ṭhito kevalaṃ pajānāti saṃsārassa samatikkantattā. Saṃsāre pana paribbhamati sammūḷhāyaṃitarā pajā.

690.Mitāni sukhadukkhāni, doṇehi piṭakehi cā means that the happiness and suffering of beings are measured, as it were, with doṇas and baskets, with measuring vessels, being limited only by the specifically defined periods of time, and that these are of fixed measure and of fixed consequence for each of those beings individually. Therefore, the jino sabbaṃ pajānāti, the Victor, standing on the Victor's plane, knows all, because he has transcended saṃsāra. But the itarā pajā, the rest of humanity, wanders in saṃsāra, being deluded and confused.

691.Evaṃdiṭṭhi pure āsinti yathāvuttanatthikadiṭṭhiko pubbeva ahaṃ ahosiṃ.Sammūḷho mohapārutoti yathāvuttāya diṭṭhiyā hetubhūtena sammohena sammūḷho, taṃsahajātena pana mohena pāruto, paṭicchāditakusalabījoti adhippāyo.

691.Evaṃdiṭṭhi pure āsi means, "I formerly held such a nihilistic view." Sammūḷho mohapāruto means deluded by the confusion that was the cause of that view, and covered by the bewilderment born of it, that is, with the seeds of merit concealed.

692.Evaṃ pubbe yā attano uppannā pāpadiṭṭhi, tassā vasena kataṃ pāpakammaṃ dassetvā idāni attanā āyatiṃ anubhavitabbaṃ tassa phalaṃ dassento‘‘oraṃ me chahi māsehī’’tiādimāha.

692.Having shown the evil deed formerly done due to that evil view that arose in himself, he now says ‘‘oraṃ me chahi māsehī’’ etc., showing its result to be experienced by himself in the future.

695-7.Tatthavassāni satasahassānīti vassānaṃ satasahassāni, atikkamitvāti vacanaseso. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, vassesu satasahassesu vītivattesūti attho.Ghoso suyyati tāvadeti yadā ettako kālo atikkanto hoti, tāvadeva tasmiṃ kāle ‘‘idha paccantānaṃ vo mārisā vassasatasahassaparimāṇo kālo atīto’’ti evaṃ tasmiṃ niraye saddo suyyati.Lakkho eso, mahārāja, satabhāgavassakoṭiyoti satabhāgā satakoṭṭhāsā vassakoṭiyo, mahārāja, niraye paccantānaṃ sattānaṃ āyuno eso lakkho eso paricchedoti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – dasadasakaṃ sataṃ nāma, dasa satāni sahassaṃ nāma, dasadasasahassāni satasahassaṃ nāma, satasatasahassāni koṭi nāma, tāsaṃ koṭīnaṃ vasena satasahassavassakoṭiyo satabhāgā vassakoṭiyo. Sā ca kho nerayikānaṃyeva vassagaṇanāvasena veditabbā, na manussānaṃ, devānaṃ vā. Īdisāni anekāni vassakoṭisatasahassāni nerayikānaṃ āyu. Tenāha‘‘koṭisatasahassāni, niraye paccare janā’’ti. Yādisena pana pāpena sattā evaṃ nirayesu paccanti, taṃ nigamanavasena dassetuṃ‘‘micchādiṭṭhī ca dussīlā, ye ca ariyūpavādino’’ti vuttaṃ.Vedissanti anubhavissaṃ.

695-7.There, vassāni satasahassānī means hundreds of thousands of years, with the rest of the sentence being understood. Or this is a locative singular in the sense of the locative, meaning when hundreds of thousands of years have passed. Ghoso suyyati tāvade means that when such a time has passed, only then, at that time, a sound is heard in that hell, saying, "O sirs, here for those in the outlying regions, a time measured in hundreds of thousands of years has passed." Lakkho eso, mahārāja, satabhāgavassakoṭiyo means, O great king, this is the designation, this is the measure of the lifespan of beings in the outlying regions of hell, which is one hundred parts of a vassakoṭi. This is what is said: ten times ten is called a hundred, ten hundreds is called a thousand, ten times ten thousand is called a hundred thousand, a hundred times a hundred thousand is called a koṭi, and in terms of those koṭis, hundreds of thousands of vassakoṭis are one hundred parts of a vassakoṭi. And that should be understood in terms of the reckoning of years of the hell-beings themselves, not of humans or gods. Such countless hundreds of thousands of vassakoṭis are the lifespan of hell-beings. Therefore, he said ‘‘koṭisatasahassāni, niraye paccare janā’’. To show by way of conclusion what kind of evil deeds cause beings to be burned in such hells, ‘‘micchādiṭṭhī ca dussīlā, ye ca ariyūpavādino’’ was said. Vedissanti means I will experience.

698-706.Evaṃ āyatiṃ attanā anubhavitabbaṃ pāpaphalaṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘kena te brahmacariyena, ānubhāvo ayaṃ tavā’’ti raññā pucchitamatthaṃ ācikkhitvā taṃ saraṇesu ceva sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpetukāmo‘‘taṃ suṇohi mahārājā’’tiādimāha. Tatthasīlesuposathe ratāti niccasīlesu ca uposathasīlesu ca abhiratā.Adāti adāsi.Taṃ dhammanti taṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ amatapadañca.

698-706.Having shown in this way the evil result to be experienced by himself in the future, he now says ‘‘taṃ suṇohi mahārājā’’ etc., wishing to explain the matter asked by the king, "by what conduct of the holy life is this your power?" and to establish him in the refuges and the precepts. There, sīlesuposathe ratā means delighting in the constant precepts and the uposatha precepts. Adā means he gave. Taṃ dhammanti means that eightfold path and the deathless state.

709-12.Evaṃ petena saraṇesu sīlesu ca samādapito rājā pasannamānaso tena attano kataṃ upakāraṃ tāva kittetvā saraṇādīsu patiṭṭhahanto‘‘atthakāmo’’tiādikā tisso gāthā vatvā pubbe attanā gahitāya pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā paṭinissaṭṭhabhāvaṃ pakāsento‘‘ophuṇāmī’’ti gāthamāha.

709-12.Thus, the king, having been encouraged in the refuges and the precepts by the peta, his mind being pleased, first praising the help done by him, and establishing himself in the refuges, etc., saying the three verses beginning with ‘‘atthakāmo’’, now says the verse ‘‘ophuṇāmī’’, revealing the state of having relinquished the evil view formerly held by himself.

ophuṇāmi mahāvāteti mahante vāte vāyante bhusaṃ viya taṃ pāpakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ, yakkha, tava dhammadesanāvāte ophuṇāmi niddhunāmi.Nadiyā vā sīghagāmiyāti sīghasotāya mahānadiyā vā tiṇakaṭṭhapaṇṇakasaṭaṃ viya pāpikaṃ diṭṭhiṃ pavāhemīti adhippāyo.Vamāmi pāpikaṃ diṭṭhinti mama manomukhagataṃ pāpikaṃ diṭṭhiṃ ucchaḍḍayāmi. Tattha kāraṇamāha‘‘buddhānaṃ sāsane rato’’ti.Yasmā ekaṃsena amatāvahe buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ sāsane rato abhirato, tasmā taṃ diṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ visaṃ vamāmīti yojanā.

ophuṇāmi mahāvāte means, like a great wind blowing strongly, I shake off that evil view with the wind of your teaching, O yakkha. Nadiyā vā sīghagāmiyā means, like grass, wood, leaves, and rubbish in a great river of swift current, I let the evil view drift away. Vamāmi pāpikaṃ diṭṭhinti means I vomit out the evil view that has entered my mind-mouth. There, he says the reason: ‘‘buddhānaṃ sāsane rato’’ti. Because I delight and rejoice in the teaching of the Buddhas, the Blessed Ones, which without a doubt brings about deathlessness, therefore I vomit out that poison called view, is the connection.

713.Ti osānagāthā saṅgītikārehi ṭhapitā. Tatthapāmokkhoti*pācīnadisābhimukho hutvā.*Rathamāruhīti rājā gamanasajjaṃ attano rājarathaṃ abhiruhi, āruyha yakkhānubhāvena taṃ divasameva attano nagaraṃ patvā rājabhavanaṃ pāvisi. So aparena samayena imaṃ pavattiṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ārocesi, bhikkhū taṃ therānaṃ ārocesuṃ, therā tatiyasaṅgītiyaṃ saṅgahaṃ āropesuṃ.

713.The concluding verse was placed by the compilers. There, pāmokkhoti means facing the eastern direction. Rathamāruhīti means the king mounted his royal chariot, ready for departure, and having mounted, by the power of the yakkha, he reached his city on that very day and entered the royal palace. Later, he announced this occurrence to the monks, the monks announced it to the elders, and the elders included it in the Third Council.

Nandakapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Nandaka Peta-story is finished.

4. Revatīpetavatthuvaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Revatī Peta-story

714-36.Uṭṭhehi,revate, supāpadhammeti idaṃ revatīpetavatthu. Taṃ yasmā revatīvimānavatthunā nibbisesaṃ, tasmā yadettha aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ gāthāsu ca vattabbaṃ, taṃ paramatthadīpaniyaṃ vimānavatthuvaṇṇanāyaṃ (vi. va. aṭṭha. 860 revatīvimānavaṇṇanā) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idañhi nandiyassa devaputtassa vasena vimānavatthupāḷiyaṃ saṅgahaṃ āropitampi revatīpaṭibaddhāya gāthāya vasena ‘‘revatīpetavatthu’’nti petavatthupāḷiyampi saṅgahaṃ āropitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

714-36.Uṭṭhehi,revate, supāpadhammeti this is the Revatī Peta-story. Since it is no different from the Revatī Vihāra-story, whatever should be said here in the account of the origin and in the verses, that should be understood in the same way as stated in the Vihāravatthu Commentary (VvA. 860 Revatīvimanavaṇṇanā). For it should be seen that this, even though it was included in the Vihāravatthu Pali in connection with the devaputta Nandiya, was also included in the Petavatthu Pali as the "Revatī Petavatthu" in connection with the verse pertaining to Revatī.

Revatīpetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Revatī Peta-story is finished.

5. Ucchupetavatthuvaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Uccu Peta-story

Idaṃ mama ucchuvanaṃ mahantanti idaṃ ucchupetavatthu. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati veḷuvane viharante aññataro puriso ucchukalāpaṃ khandhe katvā ekaṃ ucchuṃ khādanto gacchati. Atha aññataro upāsako sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo bāladārakena saddhiṃ tassa piṭṭhito piṭṭhito gacchati. Dārako ucchuṃ passitvā ‘‘dehī’’ti parodati. Upāsako dārakaṃ parodantaṃ disvā taṃ purisaṃ saṅgaṇhanto tena saddhiṃ sallāpamakāsi. So pana puriso tena saddhiṃ na kiñci ālapi, dārakassa ucchukhaṇḍampi nādāsi. Upāsako taṃ dārakaṃ dassetvā ‘‘ayaṃ dārako ativiya rodati, imassa ekaṃ ucchukhaṇḍaṃ dehī’’ti āha. Taṃ sutvā so puriso asahanto paṭihatacittaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā anādaravasena ekaṃ ucchulaṭṭhiṃ piṭṭhito khipi.

Idaṃ mama ucchuvanaṃ mahantanti this is the Uccu Peta-story. What is its origin? While the Blessed One was dwelling in the Veluvana, a certain man, having placed a bundle of sugarcane on his shoulder, was going along eating a sugarcane. Then another lay follower, virtuous and of good morals, was going along behind him with a young boy. The boy, seeing the sugarcane, cried out, "Give me some!" The lay follower, seeing the boy crying, approached that man and conversed with him. But that man did not speak anything with him, nor did he give a piece of sugarcane to the boy. The lay follower, showing the boy, said, "This boy is crying very much, give him a piece of sugarcane." Hearing that, the man, being intolerant, having established a repulsed mind, threw a sugarcane stick from his shoulder in a disrespectful manner.

So aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā ciraṃ paribhāvitassa lobhassa vasena petesu nibbatti, tassa phalaṃ nāma sakakammasarikkhakaṃ hotīti aṭṭhakarīsamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ avattharantaṃ añjanavaṇṇaṃ musaladaṇḍaparimāṇehi ucchūhi ghanasañchannaṃ mahantaṃ ucchuvanaṃ nibbatti. Tasmiṃ khāditukāmatāya ‘‘ucchuṃ gahessāmī’’ti upagatamatte taṃ ucchū abhihananti, so tena pucchito patati.

Later, having died, due to the greed that had been cultivated for a long time, he was reborn among the petas, and its result, namely, similar to one's own action, a great sugarcane forest arose, covering a place about eight karīsas in extent, densely covered with sugarcane of the color of añjana, the size of pestle sticks. Whenever he approached, wishing to eat, thinking "I will take a sugarcane," that sugarcane would strike him, and struck by that, he would fall.

Athekadivasaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno rājagahaṃ piṇḍāya gacchanto antarāmagge taṃ petaṃ addasa. So theraṃ disvā attanā katakammaṃ pucchi –

Then one day, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, going to Rājagaha for alms, saw that peta on the road. He, seeing the Elder, asked about the deed he had done –

737.

737.

‘‘Idaṃ mama ucchuvanaṃ mahantaṃ, nibbattati puññaphalaṃ anappakaṃ;

"This is my great sugarcane forest, an insignificant result of merit arises;
But now it does not come into my possession; tell me, venerable sir, what is the result of this?

738.

738.

‘‘Haññāmi khajjāmi ca vāyamāmi, parisakkāmi paribhuñjituṃ kiñci;

I am struck and eaten, and I strive, I try to enjoy something;
I am one with severed strength, wretched, I wail; what is the result of this deed?

739.

739.

‘‘Vighāto cāhaṃ paripatāmi chamāyaṃ,

I fall down, being afflicted, on the ground,
I roll around like a fish in the heat;
And tears flow from me as I cry out,
Tell me, venerable sir, what is the result of this?

740.

740.

‘‘Chāto kilanto ca pipāsito ca, santassito sātasukhaṃ na vinde;

Hungry, exhausted, and thirsty, I do not find delightful pleasure, being tormented;
I ask you this matter, O venerable one, how might I obtain the enjoyment of sugarcane?"

741.

741.

‘‘Pure tuvaṃ kammamakāsi attanā, manussabhūto purimāya jātiyā;

"Formerly, you did a deed by yourself, as a human being in a former birth;
And I will tell you this matter, having heard this matter, understand it.

742.

742.

‘‘Ucchuṃ tuvaṃ khādamāno payāto, puriso ca te piṭṭhito anvagacchi;

You were going along eating sugarcane, and a man followed behind you;
And he spoke expecting something from you, but you did not speak anything to him.

743.

743.

‘‘So ca taṃ abhaṇantaṃ ayāci, dehayya ucchunti ca taṃ avoca;

He asked you, though you were not speaking, he said, 'Give me sugarcane!';
You gave him sugarcane from behind, this is the result of that deed.

744.

744.

‘‘Iṅgha tvaṃ gantvāna piṭṭhito gaṇheyyāsi, gahetvāna taṃ khādassu yāvadatthaṃ;

Now go and take it from behind, having taken it, eat it as much as you like;
By that you will be happy, delighted, uplifted, and joyful."

745.

745.

‘‘Gantvāna so piṭṭhito aggahesi, gahetvāna taṃ khādi yāvadatthaṃ;

He went and took it from behind, having taken it, he ate it as much as he liked;
By that he was happy, delighted, uplifted, and joyful." –

Vacanapaṭivacanagāthā petena therena ca vuttā.

The verses of question and answer were spoken by the peta and the Elder.

737-8.Tatthakissāti kīdisassa, kammassāti adhippāyo.Haññāmīti vihaññāmi vighātaṃ āpajjāmi.Vihaññāmīti vā vibādhiyāmi, visesato pīḷiyāmīti attho.Khajjāmīti khādiyāmi, asipattasadisehi nisitehi khādantehi viya ucchupattehi kantiyāmīti attho.Vāyamāmīti ucchuṃ khādituṃ vāyāmaṃ karomi.Parisakkāmīti payogaṃ karomi.Paribhuñjitunti ucchurasaṃ paribhuñjituṃ, ucchuṃ khāditunti attho.Chinnathāmoti chinnasaho upacchinnathāmo, parikkhīṇabaloti attho.Kapaṇoti dīno.Lālapāmīti dukkhena aṭṭito ativiya vilapāmi.

737-8.There, kissāti means of what kind, is the meaning. Haññāmīti means I am struck, I suffer affliction. Vihaññāmīti or I am harassed, that is, I am especially oppressed. Khajjāmīti means I am eaten, I am cut as if by sugarcane leaves like sword blades, sharp and eating. Vāyamāmīti means I make an effort to eat sugarcane. Parisakkāmīti means I make an exertion. Paribhuñjitunti means to enjoy the juice of the sugarcane, to eat the sugarcane. Chinnathāmoti means one whose strength is cut off, whose strength is destroyed, one whose power is diminished. Kapaṇoti means wretched. Lālapāmīti means being afflicted by suffering, I wail excessively.

739.Vighātoti vighātavā, vihatabalo vā.Paripatāmi chamāyanti ṭhātuṃ asakkonto bhūmiyaṃ papatāmi.Parivattāmīti paribbhamāmi.Vāricarovāti maccho viya.Ghammeti ghammasantatte thale.

739.Vighātoti means one who is afflicted, or one whose strength is destroyed. Paripatāmi chamāyanti means being unable to stand, I fall to the ground. Parivattāmīti means I roll around. Vāricarovāti means like a fish. Ghammeti means on hot, scorched land.

740-4.Santassitoti oṭṭhakaṇṭhatālūnaṃ sosappattiyā suṭṭhu tasito.Sātasukhanti sātabhūtaṃ sukhaṃ.Na vindeti na labhāmi.Tanti tuvaṃ.Vijānāti vijānāhi.Payātoti gantuṃ āraddho.Anvagacchīti anubandhi.Paccāsantoti paccāsīsamāno.Tassetaṃ kammassāti etthaetanti nipātamattaṃ, tassa kammassāti attho.Piṭṭhito gaṇheyyāsīti attano piṭṭhipasseneva ucchuṃ gaṇheyyāsi.Pamoditoti pamudito.

740-4.Santassitoti means being very thirsty due to the dryness of the lips, throat, and palate. Sātasukhanti means pleasure that is agreeable. Na vindeti means I do not obtain. Tanti means you. Vijānāti means understand. Payātoti means having begun to go. Anvagacchīti means he followed. Paccāsantoti means expecting. Tassetaṃ kammassāti here, etanti is merely a particle, the meaning is of that deed. Piṭṭhito gaṇheyyāsīti means you should take the sugarcane from your own back. Pamoditoti means joyful.

745.Gahetvāna taṃ khādi yāvadatthanti therena āṇattiniyāmena ucchuṃ gahetvā yathāruci khāditvā mahantaṃ ucchukalāpaṃ gahetvā therassa upanesi, thero taṃ anuggaṇhanto teneva taṃ ucchukalāpaṃ gāhāpetvā veḷuvanaṃ gantvā bhagavato adāsi, bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ taṃ paribhuñjitvā anumodanaṃ akāsi, peto pasannacitto vanditvā gato, tato paṭṭhāya yathāsukhaṃ ucchuṃ paribhuñji.

745.Gahetvāna taṃ khādi yāvadatthanti means having taken the sugarcane according to the rule commanded by the Elder, he ate as much as he liked, and having taken a great bundle of sugarcane, he offered it to the Elder. The Elder, accepting it, had him take that bundle of sugarcane to the Veluvana and gave it to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, having enjoyed it together with the community of monks, gave a blessing, the peta was pleased, paid homage, and left, and from then on, he enjoyed the sugarcane at his pleasure.

So aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu uppajji. Sā panesā petassa pavatti manussaloke pākaṭā ahosi. Atha manussā satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā taṃ pavattiṃ pucchiṃsu. Satthā tesaṃ tamatthaṃ vitthārato kathetvā dhammaṃ desesi, taṃ sutvā manussā maccheramalato paṭiviratā ahesunti.

Later, having died, he was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. But this story of the peta became well-known in the human world. Then humans approached the Teacher and asked about that event. The Teacher, having explained that matter to them in detail, taught the Dharma, and having heard that, the humans abstained from the stain of stinginess.

Ucchupetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Uccu Peta-story is finished.

6. Kumārapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Kumāra Peta-story

Sāvatthināma nagaranti idaṃ satthā jetavane viharanto dve pete ārabbha kathesi. Sāvatthiyaṃ kira kosalarañño dve puttā pāsādikā paṭhamavaye ṭhitā yobbanamadamattā paradārakammaṃ katvā kālaṃ katvā parikhāpiṭṭhe petā hutvā nibbattiṃsu. Te rattiyaṃ bheravena saddena parideviṃsu. Manussā taṃ sutvā bhītatasitā ‘‘evaṃ kate idaṃ avamaṅgalaṃ vūpasammatī’’ti buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ datvā taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā ‘‘upāsakā tassa saddassa savanena tumhākaṃ na koci antarāyo’’ti vatvā tassa kāraṇaṃ ācikkhitvā tesaṃ dhammaṃ desetuṃ –

Sāvatthināma nagaranti this the Teacher told in connection with two petas while dwelling at Jetavana. It is said that in Sāvatthi, two sons of King Kosala, handsome, standing at a young age, intoxicated with the pride of youth, having committed adultery, died and were reborn as petas on the outskirts of the moat. At night, they lamented with a terrible sound. Humans, having heard that, being frightened and terrified, thinking "by doing this, this inauspicious event will be calmed," gave a great gift to the community of monks headed by the Buddha and announced that event to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, saying "lay followers, there is no danger to you from hearing that sound," explained the reason for it and, to teach them the Dharma –

746.

746.

‘‘Sāvatthi nāma nagaraṃ, himavantassa passato;

"Sāvatthi is the name of the city, on the side of the Himalayas;
There were two young men, sons of the king, so I have heard.

747.

747.

‘‘Sammattā rajanīyesu, kāmassādābhinandino;

Intoxicated in objects of passion, delighting in the taste of sensuality;
Greedy for present pleasure, they did not see what was to come.

748.

748.

‘‘Te cutā ca manussattā, paralokaṃ ito gatā;

"Having passed away from humanity, they have gone from here to the next world;
There, unseen, they cry out, 'Alas, our former misdeeds!'

749.

749.

‘‘Bahūsu vata santesu, deyyadhamme upaṭṭhite;

"Indeed, when so many opportunities were available,
We were unable to secure for ourselves even a little happiness-bringing merit.

750.

750.

‘‘Kiṃ tato pāpakaṃ assa, yaṃ no rājakulā cutā;

"What could be worse than that we, having fallen from a royal lineage,
Have been reborn in the realm of the departed, afflicted by hunger and thirst?

751.

751.

‘‘Sāmino idha hutvāna, honti asāmino tahiṃ;

"Having been masters here, they are masterless there;
They wander about, afflicted by hunger and thirst, humans who once were high and mighty.

752.

752.

‘‘Etamādīnavaṃ ñatvā, issaramadasambhavaṃ;

"Having understood this danger, born of the intoxication of power,
Abandoning the intoxication of power, a person may go to heaven;
At the breakup of the body, the wise one is reborn in heaven," thus he spoke the verse;

746.Tatthaiti me sutanti na kevalaṃ attano ñāṇena diṭṭhameva, atha kho loke pākaṭabhāvena evaṃ mayā sutanti attho.

746. There, iti me sutaṃ means not only seen by one's own knowledge, but rather, "thus I have heard" due to its manifest presence in the world.

747.Kāmassādābhinandinoti kāmaguṇesu assādavasena abhinandanasīlā.Paccuppannasukhe giddhāti vattamānasukhamatte giddhā gathitā hutvā.Na te passiṃsunāgatanti duccaritaṃ pahāya sucaritaṃ caritvā anāgataṃ āyatiṃ devamanussesu laddhabbaṃ sukhaṃ te na cintesuṃ.

747. Kāmassādābhinandino means those who are constantly delighting in the taste of sense pleasures. Paccuppannasukhe giddhā means being attached to and engrossed only in present happiness. Na te passiṃsunāgataṃ means they did not consider the future happiness to be obtained among gods and humans in the future by abandoning misconduct and practicing good conduct.

748.Tedha ghosentyadissantāti te pubbe rājaputtabhūtā petā idha sāvatthiyā samīpe adissamānarūpā ghosenti kandanti. Kiṃ kandantīti āha‘‘pubbe dukkaṭamattano’’ti.

748. Tedha ghosentyadissantā means those former royal-born spirits (petas), being invisible, cry out near Sāvatthi. What do they cry out? He says, ‘‘pubbe dukkaṭamattano’’.

749.Idāni tesaṃ kandanassa kāraṇaṃ hetuto ca phalato ca vibhajitvā dassetuṃ‘‘bahūsu vata santesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ.

749. Now, to show the cause and effect of their crying, it is said, ‘‘bahūsu vata santesū’’ and so on.

bahūsu vata santesūti anekesu dakkhiṇeyyesu vijjamānesu.Deyyadhamme upaṭṭhiteti attano santake dātabbadeyyadhammepi samīpe ṭhite, labbhamāneti attho.Parittaṃ sukhāvahanti appamattakampi āyatiṃ sukhāvahaṃ puññaṃ katvā attānaṃ sotthiṃ nirupaddavaṃ kātuṃ nāsakkhimhā vatāti yojanā.

bahūsu vata santesu means while many worthy recipients of offerings are present. Deyyadhamme upaṭṭhite means even when the offering-gifts belonging to oneself are present, that is, available. Parittaṃ sukhāvahaṃ means the construction is that we were unable to make ourselves safe and free from trouble by doing even a little merit that brings happiness in the future.

750.Kiṃ tato pāpakaṃ assāti tato pāpakaṃ lāmakaṃ nāma kiṃ aññaṃ assa siyā.Yaṃ no rājakulā cutāti yena pāpakammena mayaṃ rājakulato cutā idha pettivisayaṃ upapannā petesu nibbattā khuppipāsasamappitā vicarāmāti attho.

750. Kiṃ tato pāpakaṃ assā means what else could be more evil and wretched than that? Yaṃ no rājakulā cutā means because of which evil deed we, having fallen from a royal lineage, are reborn in this realm of departed spirits, born among the departed, wandering about afflicted by hunger and thirst.

751.Sāmino idha hutvānāti idha imasmiṃ loke yasmiṃyeva ṭhāne pubbe sāmino hutvā vicaranti, tahiṃ tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne honti assāmino.Manussā unnatonatāti manussakāle sāmino hutvā kālakatā kammavasena onatā bhamanti khuppipāsāya, passa saṃsārapakatinti dasseti.

751. Sāmino idha hutvānā means in this world, in the very place where they previously lived as masters, in that very place they are now masterless. Manussā unnatonatā means having been masters in their human existence, they died and, due to karma, are brought low and wander about because of hunger and thirst; he shows, "look at the nature of saṃsāra."

752.Etamādīnavaṃ ñatvā, issaramadasambhavanti etaṃ issariyamadavasena sambhūtaṃ apāyūpapattisaṅkhātaṃ ādīnavaṃ dosaṃ ñatvā pahāya issariyamadaṃ puññappasuto hutvā.Bhave saggagato naroti saggaṃ devalokaṃ gatoyeva bhaveyya.

752. Etamādīnavaṃ ñatvā, issaramadasambhavaṃ means having understood this danger consisting of rebirth in the lower realms, which arises from the intoxication of power, and having abandoned the intoxication of power, being devoted to merit. Bhave saggagato naroti means a person would indeed go to heaven, the deva-world.

Iti satthā tesaṃ petānaṃ pavattiṃ kathetvā tehi manussehi kataṃ dānaṃ tesaṃ petānaṃ uddisāpetvā sampattaparisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Thus, the Teacher, having related the story of those departed spirits, and having had the people dedicate the alms done by those humans to those departed spirits, taught the Dhamma appropriate to the inclinations of the assembled company. That teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Kumārapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Kumārapeta Story is finished.

7. Rājaputtapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Rājaputtapeta Story

Pubbekatānaṃ kammānanti idaṃ satthā jetavane viharanto rājaputtapetaṃ ārabbha kathesi. Tattha yo so atīte kitavassa nāma rañño putto atīte paccekabuddhe aparajjhitvā bahūni vassasahassāni niraye paccitvā tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesena petesu uppanno. So idha ‘‘rājaputtapeto’’ti adhippeto. Tassa vatthu heṭṭhā sāṇavāsipetavatthumhi vitthārato āgatameva, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva gahetabbaṃ. Satthā hi tadā therena attano ñātipetānaṃ pavattiyā kathitāya ‘‘na kevalaṃ tava ñātakāyeva, atha kho tvampi ito anantarātīte attabhāve peto hutvā mahādukkhaṃ anubhavī’’ti vatvā tena yācito –

Pubbe katānaṃ kammānaṃ This the Teacher spoke while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning a departed spirit who had been a prince. Here, in the past, the son of a king named Kitava, without apologizing to a Paccekabuddha, suffered in hell for many thousands of years, and due to the remaining result of that same karma, was born among the departed spirits. He is here intended as the "Rājaputtapeta." His story has already come in detail in the Sāṇavāsipeta Story below, therefore it should be understood in the manner stated there. For then, when the Elder related the story of his relatives who were departed spirits, the Teacher, said, "Not only your relatives, but you yourself in a previous existence immediately before this one, having been a departed spirit, experienced great suffering," and being requested by him –

753.

753.

‘‘Pubbe katānaṃ kammānaṃ, vipāko mathaye manaṃ;

"The result of deeds done in the past torments the mind,
Regarding sights, sounds, tastes, smells, and pleasant tactile objects.

754.

754.

‘‘Iccaṃ gītaṃ ratiṃ khiḍḍaṃ, anubhutvā anappakaṃ;

"Thus having experienced no small amount of song, delight, and play,
Having wandered in the park, entering Giribbaja (Rājagaha),

755.

755.

‘‘Isiṃ sunettamaddakkhi, attadantaṃ samāhitaṃ;

"He saw the seer Sunetta, self-controlled, serene,
Content, endowed with shame, delighting in alms fallen into his bowl.

756.

756.

‘‘Hatthikkhandhato oruyha, laddhā bhanteti cābravi;

"Having descended from the elephant's back, he said, 'Did you receive alms, venerable sir?'
Having taken his bowl, the nobleman raised it up high.

757.

757.

‘‘Thaṇḍile pattaṃ bhinditvā, hasamāno apakkami;

"Breaking the bowl on the bare ground, laughing, he departed;
'I am the son of King Kitava, what can you, monk, do to me?'

758.

758.

‘‘Tassa kammassa pharusassa, vipāko kaṭuko ahu;

"The result of that harsh deed was bitter;
Which the prince experienced, confined in hell.

759.

759.

‘‘Chaḷeva caturāsīti, vassāni nahutāni ca;

"For six times eighty-four hundred thousand years,
He greatly suffered, having committed evil, in hell.

760.

760.

‘‘Uttānopi ca paccittha, nikujjo vāmadakkhiṇo;

"Sometimes he was cooked lying face up, sometimes face down, on his left side or right side;
Sometimes standing with his feet up, for a long time the fool suffered.

761.

761.

‘‘Bahūni vassasahassāni, pūgāni nahutāni ca;

"For many thousands of years, groups of hundred thousands,
He greatly suffered, having committed evil, in hell.

762.

762.

‘‘Etādisaṃ kho kaṭukaṃ, appaduṭṭhappadosinaṃ;

"Such a bitter result is there for those who harm
An innocent ascetic, practicing well, those who do evil deeds suffer.

Paccanti pāpakammantā, isimāsajja subbataṃ.

763.

763.

"He, having experienced much suffering there for many years,
Then, having passed away from there, became a departed spirit, tormented by hunger and thirst.

‘‘So tattha bahuvassāni, vedayitvā bahuṃ dukhaṃ;

764.

764.

"Having understood this danger, born of the intoxication of power,
Abandoning the intoxication of power, one should practice humility.

‘‘Etamādīnavaṃ ñatvā, issaramadasambhavaṃ;

765.

765.

"Visible in this very life, praiseworthy, one who is respectful to the Buddhas,
At the breakup of the body, the wise one is reborn in heaven." –

‘‘Diṭṭheva dhamme pāsaṃso, yo buddhesu sagāravo;

This story of the departed spirit he related.

Idaṃ petavatthuṃ kathesi.

753. There, pubbe katānaṃ kammānaṃ, vipāko mathaye manaṃ means the fruit of unwholesome actions done in previous lives, arising as something great, would agitate and overwhelm the minds of the blind and foolish, meaning it would produce harm for others while creating advantage for oneself.

753.Tatthapubbe katānaṃ kammānaṃ, vipāko mathaye mananti purimāsu jātīsu katānaṃ akusalakammānaṃ phalaṃ uḷāraṃ hutvā uppajjamānaṃ andhabālānaṃ cittaṃ mathayeyya abhibhaveyya, paresaṃ anatthakaraṇamukhena attano atthaṃ uppādeyyāti adhippāyo.

‘‘rūpe sadde’’ and so on was said. There, rūpe means because of forms, for the sake of obtaining a desirable and pleasing object of sight. The same method applies to sadde and the others.

‘‘rūpe sadde’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattharūpeti rūpahetu, yathicchitassa manāpiyassa rūpārammaṇassa paṭilābhanimittanti attho.Saddetiādīsupi eseva nayo.

754. Thus, showing the meaning stated generally by determining it specifically, he said ‘‘naccaṃ gīta’’ and so on. There, rati means sensual delight. Khiḍḍa means play with friends and others. Giribbaja means Rājagaha.

754.Evaṃ sādhāraṇato vuttamatthaṃ asādhāraṇato niyametvā dassento‘‘naccaṃ gīta’’ntiādimāha. Tattharatinti kāmaratiṃ.Khiḍḍanti sahāyakādīhi keḷiṃ.Giribbajanti rājagahaṃ.

755. Isiṃ means a seer because of the seeking-nature (esanatthena) of the unexcelled aggregates of morality and so on. Sunettaṃ means a Paccekabuddha named Sunetta. Attadantaṃ means one whose mind is tamed by the highest taming. Samāhitaṃ means one who is serene with the serenity of the fruit of Arahatship. Uñche pattagate rataṃ means content and satisfied with the food obtained by gleaning, which had fallen into the bowl and filled it.

755.Isinti asekkhānaṃ sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ esanaṭṭhena isiṃ.Sunettanti evaṃnāmakaṃ paccekabuddhaṃ.Attadantanti uttamena damathena damitacittaṃ.Samāhitanti arahattaphalasamādhinā samāhitaṃ.Uñche pattagate ratanti uñchena bhikkhācārena laddhe pattagate pattapariyāpanne āhāre rataṃ santuṭṭhaṃ.

756. Laddhā, bhanteti cābravī means he spoke for the purpose of creating confidence, saying, "Have you received alms, venerable sir?" Uccaṃ paggayhā means having raised the bowl, making it higher.

756.Laddhā, bhanteti cābravīti ‘‘api, bhante, bhikkhā laddhā’’ti vissāsajananatthaṃ kathesi.Uccaṃ paggayhāti uccataraṃ katvā pattaṃ ukkhipitvā.

757. Thaṇḍile pattaṃ bhinditvā means having thrown and broken the bowl on the hard, rough ground. Apakkamī means he stepped back a little. And as he stepped back, the prince said to the Paccekabuddha who was looking at him with compassion because "the blind fool has, without reason, done great harm to himself," ‘‘rañño kitavassāhaṃ putto, kiṃ maṃ bhikkhu karissasī’’ti.

757.Thaṇḍile pattaṃ bhinditvāti kharakaṭhine bhūmippadese khipanto pattaṃ bhinditvā.Apakkamīti thokaṃ apasakki. Apasakkanto ca ‘‘akāraṇeneva andhabālo mahantaṃ anatthaṃ attano akāsī’’ti karuṇāyanavasena olokentaṃ paccekabuddhaṃ rājaputto āha‘‘rañño kitavassāhaṃ putto, kiṃ maṃ bhikkhu karissasī’’ti.

758. Pharusassā means of the cruel. Kaṭuko means undesirable. Yaṃ means which result. Samappito means being attached.

758.Pharusassāti dāruṇassa.Kaṭukoti aniṭṭho.Yanti yaṃ vipākaṃ.Samappitoti allīno.

759. Chaḷeva caturāsīti, vassāni nahutāni cā means lying face up for eighty-four thousand years, face down, on his left side, on his right side, with his feet up, hanging down, and standing as he was; thus there are six times eighty-four thousand years. Therefore he said –

759.Chaḷeva caturāsīti, vassāni nahutāni cāti uttāno nipanno caturāsītivassasahassāni, nikujjo, vāmapassena, dakkhiṇapassena, uddhaṃpādo, olambiko, yathāṭhito cāti evaṃ cha caturāsītisahassāni vassāni honti. Tenāha –

760.

760.

"Sometimes he was cooked lying face up, sometimes face down, on his left side or right side;
Sometimes standing with his feet up, for a long time the fool suffered."

‘‘Uttānopi ca paccittha, nikujjo vāmadakkhiṇo;

‘‘nahutānī’’ti.

‘‘nahutānī’’ti.Bhusaṃ dukkhaṃ nigacchitthoti ativiya dukkhaṃ pāpuṇi.

Bhusaṃ dukkhaṃ nigacchittho means he attained very great suffering.

761.Pūgānīti vassasamūhe, idha purimagāthāya ca accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

761. Pūgānī means in groups of years; here the word is to be understood as used in the sense of continuous connection, as in the previous verse.

762.Etādisanti evarūpaṃ.Kaṭukanti atidukkhaṃ, bhāvanapaṃsakaniddesoyaṃ ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisīdī’’tiādīsu viya. Appaduṭṭhappadosinaṃ isiṃ subbataṃ āsajja āsādetvā pāpakammantā puggalā evarūpaṃ kaṭukaṃ ativiya dukkhaṃ paccantīti yojanā.

762. Etādisaṃ means such a kind of. Kaṭukaṃ means very painful; this is a mere utterance of affection (bhāvanapaṃsakaniddesa), like in "sit down to one side" and so on. Those individuals who are evil-doers, having harmed and insulted an innocent ascetic who has good practices, experience such a bitter and very great suffering, is the connection.

763.Soti so rājaputtapeto.Tatthāti niraye.Vedayitvāti anubhavitvā.Nāmāti byattapākaṭabhāvena.Tato cutoti nirayato cuto. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

763. So means that prince-peta. Tatthā means in hell. Vedayitvā means having experienced. Nāmā means in a clearly manifest way. Tato cuto means having passed away from hell. The rest is as stated before.

Evaṃ bhagavā rājaputtapetakathāya tattha sannipatitaṃ mahājanaṃ saṃvejetvā upari saccāni pakāsesi. Saccapariyosāne bahū sotāpattiphalādīni sampāpuṇiṃsūti.

Thus the Blessed One, having stirred up the great crowd assembled there with the story of the prince-peta, revealed the Truths further. At the end of the Truths, many attained the fruits beginning with Stream-entry.

Rājaputtapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Rājaputtapeta Story is finished.

8. Gūthakhādakapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Gūthakhādaka Peta Story

Gūthakūpatouggantvāti idaṃ satthari jetavane viharante ekaṃ gūthakhādakapetaṃ ārambha vuttaṃ. Sāvatthiyā kira avidūre aññatarasmiṃ gāmake eko kuṭumbiko attano kulūpakaṃ bhikkhuṃ uddissa vihāraṃ kāresi. Tattha nānājanapadato bhikkhū āgantvā paṭivasiṃsu. Te disvā manussā pasannacittā paṇītena paccayena upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Kulūpako bhikkhu taṃ asahamāno issāpakato hutvā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dosaṃ vadanto kuṭumbikaṃ ujjhāpesi. Kuṭumbiko te bhikkhū kulūpakañca paribhavanto paribhāsi. Atha kulūpako kālaṃ katvā tasmiṃyeva vihāre vaccakuṭiyaṃ peto hutvā nibbatti, kuṭumbiko pana kālaṃ katvā tasseva upari peto hutvā nibbatti. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno taṃ disvā pucchanto –

Gūthakūpato uggantvā This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning a peta who eats excrement. It seems that not far from Sāvatthi, in a certain village, a householder had a monastery built, intending it for his family's patron monk. Monks came there from various districts and resided there. Seeing them, people with pleased minds attended to them with excellent requisites. The family's patron monk, unable to bear that, being envious, found fault with those monks and caused the householder to be displeased. The householder scorned and reproached those monks and also the family's patron monk. Then the family's patron monk, having died, was reborn as a peta in the latrine of that very monastery, and the householder, having died, was reborn as a peta on top of him. Then, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, seeing him and asking –

766.

766.

‘‘Gūthakūpato uggantvā, ko na dīno patiṭṭhasi;

"Having emerged from a cesspool, who are you standing there, not wretched?
Undoubtedly a wrongdoer, what do you believe in?" –

Gāthamāha. Taṃ sutvā peto –

He spoke the verse. Hearing that, the peta –

767.

767.

‘‘Ahaṃ bhadante petomhi, duggato yamalokiko;

"I, venerable sir, am a peta, unfortunate, a resident of the realm of Yama;
Having done evil deeds, I have gone from here to the realm of departed spirits." –

Gāthāya attānaṃ ācikkhi. Atha naṃ thero –

He declared himself in the verse. Then the Elder –

768.

768.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil have you done by body, speech, or mind?
By the result of what action do you undergo this suffering?" –

Gāthāya tena katakammaṃ pucchi. So peto –

Asked about the deed he had done in the verse. That peta –

769.

769.

‘‘Ahu āvāsiko mayhaṃ, issukī kulamaccharī;

"There was a resident monk of mine, envious, greedy for families;
He lived in my house, miserly, a reviler.

770.

770.

‘‘Tassāhaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā, bhikkhavo paribhāsisaṃ;

"Having heard his words, I reviled the monks;
By the result of that action, I have gone from here to the realm of departed spirits." –

Dvīhi gāthāhi attanā katakammaṃ kathesi.

In two verses, he related the deed he had done.

769.Tatthaahu āvāsiko mayhanti mayhaṃ āvāse mayā katavihāre eko bhikkhu āvāsiko nibaddhavasanako ahosi.Ajjhāsito mayhaṃ ghareti kulūpakabhāvena mama gehe taṇhābhinivesavasena abhiniviṭṭho.

769. There, ahu āvāsiko mayhaṃ means in my monastery, in the monastery made by me, there was a resident monk who lived there regularly. Ajjhāsito mayhaṃ ghare means being attached to my house due to craving-attachment, as a family patron.

770.Tassāti tassa kulūpakabhikkhussa.Bhikkhavoti bhikkhū.Paribhāsisanti akkosiṃ.Petalokaṃ ito gatoti iminā ākārena petayoniṃ upagato petabhūto.

770. Tassā means of that family patron monk. Bhikkhavo means monks. Paribhāsisaṃ means I insulted. Petalokaṃ ito gato means having gone to the peta-existence in this way, having become a peta.

Taṃ sutvā thero itarassa gatiṃ pucchanto –

Hearing that, the Elder, asking about the destiny of the other –

771.

771.

‘‘Amitto mittavaṇṇena, yo te āsi kulūpako;

"An enemy in the guise of a friend, who was your family patron;
At the breakup of the body, foolish one, what destiny did he go to?" –

mittavaṇṇenāti mittapaṭirūpena mittapaṭirūpatāya.

mittavaṇṇenāti: by the guise of a friend, through the appearance of a friend.

Puna peto therassa tamatthaṃ ācikkhanto –

Again, the peta, explaining that matter to the Elder:

772.

772.

‘‘Tassevāhaṃ pāpakammassa, sīse tiṭṭhāmi matthake;

"Upon his head, the very top, I stand because of his evil deed;
And he, reaching another realm, is merely my attendant.

773.

773.

‘‘Yaṃ bhadante hadantaññe, etaṃ me hoti bhojanaṃ;

"That which, Bhante, others evacuate, that becomes my food;
And that which I evacuate, that is what he lives on." – He spoke these two verses.

772.Tatthatassevāti tasseva mayhaṃ pubbe kulūpakabhikkhubhūtassa petassa.Pāpakammassāti pāpasamācārassa.Sīse tiṭṭhāmi matthaketi sīse tiṭṭhāmi, tiṭṭhanto ca matthake eva tiṭṭhāmi, na sīsappamāṇe ākāseti attho.Paravisayaṃ pattoti manussalokaṃ upādāya paravisayabhūtaṃ pettivisayaṃ patto.Mamevāti mayhaṃ eva paricārako ahosīti vacanaseso.

772. There, tassevāti: of that very one, of me, a peta who was formerly a regular attendant bhikkhu of the family. Pāpakammassāti: of evil conduct. Sīse tiṭṭhāmi matthaketi: I stand on his head, and while standing, I stand on the very top; it is not in the space measuring the head, is the meaning. Paravisayaṃ pattoti: having reached the realm of petas, which is a realm other than the human world. Mamevāti: he was only my attendant, is the remaining part of the statement.

773.Yaṃ bhadante hadantaññeti bhadante, ayya mahāmoggalāna, tassaṃ vaccakuṭiyaṃ yaṃ aññe uhadanti vaccaṃ ossajanti.Etaṃ me hoti bhojananti etaṃ vaccaṃ mayhaṃ divase divase bhojanaṃ hoti.Yaṃ hadāmīti taṃ pana vaccaṃ khāditvā yampahaṃ vaccaṃ karomi.Etaṃ so upajīvatīti etaṃ mama vaccaṃ so kulūpakapeto divase divase khādanavasena upajīvati, attabhāvaṃ yāpetīti attho.

773. Yaṃ bhadante hadantaññeti: Bhante, venerable Mahāmoggallāna, that which others evacuate, discharge as excrement, in that latrine. Etaṃ me hoti bhojananti: that excrement becomes my food day by day. Yaṃ hadāmīti: but the excrement which I make, having eaten that excrement. Etaṃ so upajīvatīti: that excrement of mine that regular attendant peta lives on day by day by way of eating, he maintains his existence, is the meaning.

Tesu kuṭumbiko pesale bhikkhū ‘‘evaṃ āhāraparibhogato varaṃ tumhākaṃ gūthakhādana’’nti akkosi. Kulūpako pana kuṭumbikampi tathāvacane samādapetvā sayaṃ tathā akkosi, tenassa tatopi paṭikuṭṭhatarā jīvikā ahosi. Āyasmā mahāmoggallāno taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā upavāde ādīnavaṃ dassetvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Among them, the householder insulted the worthy bhikkhus, saying, “Eating excrement is better than this kind of consumption of food for you.” The regular attendant, however, having persuaded the householder to make such a statement, insulted himself in the same way, so his livelihood became even more loathsome than before. Venerable Mahāmoggallāna reported that incident to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, making that matter the basis for a talk, showing the danger in disparagement, taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering. That teaching was beneficial to the multitude.

Gūthakhādakapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Account of the Excrement-Eating Peta is Concluded.

9. Gūthakhādakapetivatthuvaṇṇanā
9. The Account of the Female Excrement-Eating Peta

774-81.Gūthakūpatouggantvāti idaṃ satthari jetavane viharante aññataraṃ gūthakhādakapetiṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Tassā vatthu anantaravatthusadisaṃ. Tattha upāsakena vihāro kāritoti upāsakassa vasena āgataṃ, idha pana upāsikāyāti ayameva viseso. Sesaṃ vatthusmiṃ gāthāsu ca apubbaṃ natthi.

774-81. Gūthakūpato uggantvāti: This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning a certain female excrement-eating peta. The story of that is similar to the immediately preceding story. There, it came in terms of the male lay follower because a monastery was built by a male lay follower, but here the distinction is only that it is by a female lay follower. The rest in the story and in the verses is nothing different from before.

Gūthakhādakapetivatthuvaṇṇānā niṭṭhitā.

The Account of the Female Excrement-Eating Peta is Concluded.

10. Gaṇapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
10. The Account of a Group of Petas

Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpātthāti idaṃ satthari jetavane viharante sambahule pete ārabbha vuttaṃ. Sāvatthiyaṃ kira sambahulā manussā gaṇabhūtā assaddhā appasannā maccheramalapariyuṭṭhitacittā dānādisucaritavimukhā hutvā ciraṃ jīvitvā kāyassa bhedā nagarassa samīpe petayoniyaṃ nibbattiṃsu. Athekadivasaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno sāvatthiyaṃ piṇḍāya gacchanto antarāmagge pete disvā –

Naggā dubbaṇṇarūpātthāti: This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning a number of petas. It seems that many people in Sāvatthi, as a group, were faithless, uninspired, their minds consumed by the stain of stinginess, averse to giving and other good conduct, and after living for a long time, at the breaking up of the body, were reborn in the peta realm near the city. Then one day, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, while going for alms in Sāvatthi, seeing the petas on the road:

782.

782.

‘‘Naggā dubbaṇarūpāttha, kisā dhamanisanthatā;

"Naked, you are ugly in appearance, emaciated, with sinews showing;
You have projecting ribs, you are thin; who are you here, good sirs?" –

dubbaṇṇarūpātthāti dubbaṇṇasarīrā hotha.Ke nu tumhetthāti tumhe ke nu nāma bhavatha.Mārisāti te attano sāruppavasena ālapati.

dubbaṇṇarūpātthāti: you have ugly bodies. Ke nu tumhetthāti: who might you be. Mārisāti: he addresses them in accordance with their own status.

Taṃ sutvā petā –

Hearing that, the petas:

783.

783.

‘‘Mayaṃ bhadante petamhā, duggatā yamalokikā;

"We, Bhante, are petas, unfortunate, belonging to the realm of Yama;
Having done evil deeds, we have gone from here to the peta world." –

Gāthāya attano petabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā puna therena –

Having declared their state of being petas in the verse, then asked by the Elder:

784.

784.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil have you done by body, speech, or mind?
By the result of what action have you gone from here to the peta world?" –

Gāthāya katakammaṃ pucchitā –

Asked in the verse about the deeds done:

785.

785.

‘‘Anāvaṭesu titthesu, vicinimhaddhamāsakaṃ;

"In unclosed fords, we took the half-māsaka;
When offerings were available, we made no island for ourselves.

786.

786.

‘‘Nadiṃ upema tasitā, rittakā parivattati;

"We approach the river, thirsty, it turns out empty;
We approach the shade in the heat, the sun turns upon us.

787.

787.

‘‘Aggivaṇṇo ca no vāto, ḍahanto upavāyati;

"And a fire-colored wind blows against us, scorching;
This too, Bhante, we deserve, and other evil worse than that.

788.

788.

‘‘Api yojanāni gacchāma, chātā āhāragedhino;

"Though we go for even yojanas, hungry, craving for food,
Without obtaining it, we turn back; alas, our lack of merit!

789.

789.

‘‘Chātā pamucchitā bhantā, bhūmiyaṃ paṭisumbhitā;

"Hungry, bewildered, frightened, collapsed on the ground,
We turn over supine, we fall face down.

790.

790.

‘‘Te ca tattheva patitā, bhūmiyaṃ paṭisumbhitā;

"And there fallen, collapsed on the ground,
We strike our chest and head; alas, our lack of merit!

791.

791.

‘‘Etañca bhante arahāma, aññañca pāpakaṃ tato;

"This too, Bhante, we deserve, and other evil worse than that;
When offerings were available, we made no island for ourselves.

792.

792.

‘‘Te hi nūna ito gantvā, yoniṃ laddhāna mānusiṃ;

"Surely, going from here, having obtained a human birth,
Generous, accomplished in virtue, we will do much good." –

Attanā katakammaṃ kathesuṃ.

They spoke about the deeds done by themselves.

788.Tatthaapi yojanāni gacchāmāti anekānipi yojanāni gacchāma. Kathaṃ?Chātā āhāragedhinoti, cirakālaṃ jighacchāya jighacchitā āhāre giddhā abhigijjhantā hutvā, evaṃ gantvāpi kiñci āhāraṃ aladdhāyeva nivattāma.Appapuññatāti apuññatā akatakalyāṇatā.

788. There, api yojanāni gacchāmāti: even for many yojanas we go. How? Chātā āhāragedhinoti: constantly afflicted by hunger for a long time, being greedy for food, strongly desiring, even having gone thus, we turn back without obtaining any food. Appapuññatāti: lack of merit, not doing good.

789.Uttānāpaṭikirāmāti kadāci uttānā hutvā vikiriyamānaṅgapaccaṅgā viya vattāma.Avakujjā patāmaseti kadāci avakujjā hutvā patāma.

789. Uttānā paṭikirāmāti: sometimes we turn over supine, as if scattering limbs and appendages. Avakujjā patāmaseti: sometimes we fall face down.

790.Te cāti te mayaṃ.Uraṃ sīsañca ghaṭṭemāti avakujjā hutvā patitā uṭṭhātuṃ asakkontā vedhantā vedanāppattā attano attano uraṃ sīsañca paṭighaṃsāma. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

790. Te cāti: those, we. Uraṃ sīsañca ghaṭṭemāti: fallen face down, unable to rise, trembling, afflicted by pain, we strike our own chest and head. The rest is as stated below.

Thero taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Taṃ sutvā mahājano maccheramalaṃ pahāya dānādisucaritanirato ahosīti.

The Elder reported that incident to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, making that matter the basis for a talk, taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering. Hearing that, the great multitude, abandoning the stain of stinginess, became devoted to giving and other good conduct.

Gaṇapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Account of a Group of Petas is Concluded.

11. Pāṭaliputtapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
11. The Account of the Pāṭaliputta Peta

Diṭṭhā tayā nirayā tiracchānayonīti idaṃ satthari jetavane viharante aññataraṃ vimānapetaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Sāvatthivāsino kira pāṭaliputtavāsino ca bahū vāṇijā nāvāya suvaṇṇabhūmiṃ agamiṃsu. Tattheko upāsako ābādhiko mātugāme paṭibaddhacitto kālamakāsi. So katakusalopi devalokaṃ anupapajjitvā itthiyā paṭibaddhacittatāya samuddamajjhe vimānapeto hutvā nibbatti. Yassaṃ pana so paṭibaddhacitto, sā itthī suvaṇṇabhūmigāminiṃ nāvaṃ abhiruyha gacchati. Atha kho so peto taṃ itthiṃ gahetukāmo nāvāya gamanaṃ uparundhi. Atha vāṇijā ‘‘kena nu kho kāraṇena ayaṃ nāvā na gacchatī’’ti vīmaṃsantā kāḷakaṇṇisalākaṃ vicāresuṃ. Amanussiddhiyā yāvatatiyaṃ tassā eva itthiyā pāpuṇi, yassaṃ so paṭibaddhacitto. Taṃ disvā vāṇijā veḷukalāpaṃ samudde otāretvā tassa upari taṃ itthiṃ otāresuṃ. Itthiyā otāritamattāya nāvā vegena suvaṇṇabhūmiṃ abhimukhā pāyāsi. Amanusso taṃ itthiṃ attano vimānaṃ āropetvā tāya saddhiṃ abhirami.

Diṭṭhā tayā nirayā tiracchānayonīti: This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Jetavana, concerning a certain vimāna-peta. It seems that many merchants from Sāvatthi and from Pāṭaliputta went to Suvaṇṇabhūmi by ship. There, one lay follower, afflicted with a disease, his mind attached to a woman, died. Although he had done meritorious deeds, without being reborn in the deva world, due to his mind being attached to the woman, he was reborn in the middle of the ocean as a vimāna-peta. The woman to whom he was attached boarded a ship going to Suvaṇṇabhūmi. Then that peta, wanting to take that woman, prevented the ship from going. Then the merchants, investigating, "By what cause is this ship not going?" cast lots for the "black-eared" one. By the power of a non-human, it fell to that very woman three times, to whom he was attached. Seeing that, the merchants lowered a bamboo raft into the ocean and lowered the woman onto it. As soon as the woman was lowered, the ship quickly sailed towards Suvaṇṇabhūmi. The non-human raised that woman into his vimāna and enjoyed himself with her.

Sā ekaṃ saṃvaccharaṃ atikkamitvā nibbinnarūpā taṃ petaṃ yācantī āha – ‘‘ahaṃ idha vasantī mayhaṃ samparāyikaṃ atthaṃ kātuṃ na labhāmi, sādhu, mārisa, maṃ pāṭaliputtameva nehī’’ti. So tāya yācito –

Having spent a year, disgusted, she pleaded with that peta, saying, "Living here, I am unable to do what is beneficial for my future life; please, good sir, take me to Pāṭaliputta." Urged by her:

793.

793.

‘‘Diṭṭhā tayā nirayā tiracchānayoni, petā asurā athavāpi mānusā devā;

"You have seen the hells, the animal realm, petas, asuras, or even human beings and devas;
You have seen for yourself the result of your own actions; I will take you unharmed to Pāṭaliputta;
Having gone there, do meritorious deeds." –

diṭṭhā tayā nirayāti ekacce paccekanirayāpi tayā diṭṭhā.Tiracchānayonīti mahānubhāvā nāgasupaṇṇāditiracchānāpi diṭṭhā tayāti yojanā.Petāti khuppipāsādibhedā petā.Asurāti kālakañcikādibhedā asurā.Devāti ekacce cātumahārājikā devā. So kira attano ānubhāvena antarantarā taṃ gahetvā paccekanirayādike dassento vicarati, tena evamāha.Sayamaddasa kammavipākamattanoti nirayādike visesato gantvā passantī sayameva attanā katakammānaṃ vipākaṃ paccakkhato addasa adakkhi.Nessāmi taṃ pāṭaliputtamakkhatanti idānāhaṃ taṃ akkhataṃ kenaci aparikkhataṃ manussarūpeneva pāṭaliputtaṃ nayissāmi. Tvaṃ panatattha gantvā kusalaṃ karohi kammaṃ,kammavipākassa paccakkhato diṭṭhattā yuttapayuttā puññaniratā hohīti attho.

diṭṭhā tayā nirayāti: you have seen certain individual hells. Tiracchānayonīti: it should be connected that you have also seen powerful animals such as nāgas and supaṇṇas. Petāti: petas of various kinds, such as those afflicted by hunger and thirst. Asurāti: asuras of various kinds, such as kālakañcikas. Devāti: certain devas of the Cātumahārājika realm. It seems that by his power he traveled around, taking her from place to place, showing her individual hells and so on, therefore he said this. Sayamaddasa kammavipākamattanoti: going and seeing the hells and so on in particular, she herself saw directly the result of the actions done by herself. Nessāmi taṃ pāṭaliputtamakkhatanti: now I will take you unharmed, uninjured in any way, in human form itself, to Pāṭaliputta. But you, tattha gantvā kusalaṃ karohi kammaṃ, having seen the result of actions directly, be constantly and appropriately devoted to merit, is the meaning.

Atha sā itthī tassa vacanaṃ sutvā attamanā –

Then that woman, hearing his words, delighted:

794.

794.

‘‘Atthakāmosi me yakkha, hitakāmosi devate;

"You are wishing for my welfare, Yaksha, you are wishing for my benefit, Deva;
I will do as you say, you are my teacher.

795.

795.

‘‘Diṭṭhā mayā nirayā tiracchānayoni, petā asurā athavāpi mānusā devā;

"I have seen the hells, the animal realm, petas, asuras, or even human beings and devas;
I have seen for myself the result of my own actions; I will do plentiful meritorious deeds." –

Gāthamāha.

She spoke the verse.

Atha so peto taṃ itthiṃ gahetvā ākāsena gantvā pāṭaliputtanagarassa majjhe ṭhapetvā pakkāmi. Athassā ñātimittādayo taṃ disvā ‘‘mayaṃ pubbe samudde pakkhittā matāti assumha. Sā ayaṃ diṭṭhā vata, bho, sotthinā āgatā’’ti abhinandamānā samāgantvā tassā pavattiṃ pucchiṃsu. Sā tesaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya attanā diṭṭhaṃ anubhūtañca sabbaṃ kathesi. Sāvatthivāsinopi kho te vāṇijā anukkamena sāvatthiṃ upagatakāle satthu santikaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisinnā taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā catunnaṃ parisānaṃ dhammaṃ desesi. Taṃ sutvā mahājano saṃvegajāto dānādikusaladhammanirato ahosīti.

Then that peta, taking that woman, going through the air, placed her in the middle of the city of Pāṭaliputta and departed. Then her relatives and friends, seeing her, rejoicing, saying, "We thought she was thrown into the ocean and dead. Behold, she is seen, having come safely!" gathered together and asked her about the incident. She told them everything from the beginning, what she had seen and experienced. Those merchants from Sāvatthi also, when they gradually arrived at Sāvatthi, approached the Teacher, paid homage, sat down to one side, and reported that incident to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, making that matter the basis for a talk, taught the Dhamma to the four assemblies. Hearing that, the great multitude, filled with a sense of urgency, became devoted to giving and other meritorious activities.

Pāṭaliputtapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Account of the Pāṭaliputta Peta is Concluded.

12. Ambavanapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
12. The Account of the Mango Grove Peta

Ayañca te pokkharaṇī surammāti idaṃ satthari sāvatthiyaṃ viharante ambapetaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Sāvatthiyaṃ kira aññataro gahapati parikkhīṇabhogo ahosi. Tassa bhariyā kālamakāsi, ekā dhītāyeva hoti. So taṃ attano mittassa gehe ṭhapetvā iṇavasena gahitena kahāpaṇasatena bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā satthena saddhiṃ vaṇijjāya gato, na cireneva mūlena saha udayabhūtāni pañca kahāpaṇasatāni labhitvā satthena saha paṭinivatti. Antarāmagge corā pariyuṭṭhāya satthaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, satthikā ito cito ca palāyiṃsu. So pana gahapati aññatarasmiṃ gacche kahāpaṇe nikkhipitvā avidūre nilīyi. Corā taṃ gahetvā jīvitā voropesuṃ. So dhanalobhena tattheva peto hutvā nibbatti.

Ayañca te pokkharaṇī surammāti: This was said by the Teacher while dwelling at Sāvatthi, concerning the mango peta. It seems that in Sāvatthi a certain householder had exhausted his wealth. His wife died, and he had only one daughter. He placed her in the home of his friend, and taking goods with a hundred kahāpaṇas that he had borrowed, he went for trade with a caravan, and before long he obtained five hundred kahāpaṇas that arose as profit together with the capital, and he returned with the caravan. On the way, thieves surrounded and attacked the caravan, and the caravan people fled here and there. That householder, however, hid the kahāpaṇas in a bundle and hid nearby. The thieves seized him and killed him. Due to greed for wealth, he was reborn there as a peta.

Vāṇijā sāvatthiṃ gantvā tassa dhītuyā taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesuṃ. Sā pitu maraṇena ājīvikābhayena ca ativiya sañjātadomanassā bāḷhaṃ paridevi. Atha naṃ so pitu sahāyo kuṭumbiko ‘‘yathā nāma kulālabhājanaṃ sabbaṃ bhedanapariyantaṃ, evameva sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ bhedanapariyantaṃ. Maraṇaṃ nāma sabbasādhāraṇaṃ appaṭikārañca, tasmā mā tvaṃ pitari atibāḷhaṃ soci, mā paridevi, ahaṃ te pitā, tvaṃ mayhaṃ dhītā, ahaṃ tava pitu kiccaṃ karomi, tvaṃ pituno gehe viya imasmiṃ gehe avimanā abhiramassū’’ti vatvā samassāsesi. Sā tassa vacanena paṭippassaddhasokā pitari viya tasmiṃ sañjātagāravabahumānā attano kapaṇabhāvena tassa veyyāvaccakārinī hutvā vattamānā pitaraṃ uddissa matakiccaṃ kātukāmā yāguṃ pacitvā manosilāvaṇṇāni suparipakkāni madhurāni ambaphalāni kaṃsapātiyaṃ ṭhapetvā yāguṃ ambaphalāni ca dāsiyā gāhāpetvā vihāraṃ gantvā satthāraṃ vanditvā evamāha – ‘‘bhagavā mayhaṃ dakkhiṇāya paṭiggahaṇena anuggahaṃ karothā’’ti. Satthā mahākaruṇāya sañcoditamānaso tassā manorathaṃ pūrento nisajjākāraṃ dassesi. Sā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā paññattavarabuddhāsane attanā upanītaṃ suvisuddhavatthaṃ attharitvā adāsi, nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane.

The merchants went to Sāvatthi and reported this news to his daughter. Overwhelmed with sorrow and fear for her livelihood upon hearing of her father’s death, she lamented greatly. Then that family friend, a householder, consoled her, saying, "Just as all pottery made by a potter is destined to break, so too is the life of beings destined to end. Death is common to all and cannot be averted. Therefore, do not grieve excessively for your father, nor lament. I will be your father, and you will be my daughter. I will take care of your father's affairs. In this house, be as comfortable and happy as you were in your father's house, without any sadness." Calmed by his words, she developed great respect and reverence for him as if he were her father. Living humbly, she served him diligently. Desiring to perform the death rites for her father, she cooked rice gruel and, after placing ripe, sweet mangoes the color of manosilā in a bronze bowl, she had the maidservant take the gruel and mangoes to the monastery. There, she paid homage to the Teacher and said, "Venerable Sir, please show me your favor by accepting this offering." The Teacher, his heart moved by great compassion, fulfilled her wish by indicating his acceptance. Delighted, she spread out a very pure cloth she had brought on the excellent Buddha-seat that had been prepared, and the Blessed One sat on the prepared seat.

Atha sā bhagavato yāguṃ upanāmesi, paṭiggahesi bhagavā yāguṃ. Atha saṅghaṃ uddissa bhikkhūnampi yāguṃ datvā puna dhotahatthā ambaphalāni bhagavato upanāmesi, bhagavā tāni paribhuñji. Sā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā evamāha – ‘‘yā me, bhante, paccattharaṇayāguambaphaladānavasena pavattā dakkhiṇā, sā me pitaraṃ pāpuṇātū’’ti. Bhagavā ‘‘evaṃ hotū’’ti vatvā anumodanaṃ akāsi. Sā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Tāya dakkhiṇāya samuddiṭṭhamattāya so peto ambavanauyyānavimānakapparukkhapokkharaṇiyo mahatiñca dibbasampattiṃ paṭilabhi.

Then she offered the gruel to the Blessed One, and he accepted it. Next, offering gruel to the monks for the Sangha, and washing her hands again, she offered the mangoes to the Blessed One, and he consumed them. Paying homage to the Blessed One, she said, "May the merit accruing to me, Venerable Sir, from the gift of the cloth, gruel, and mangoes, reach my father." The Blessed One said, "So be it," and gave his approval. After paying homage to the Blessed One and circumambulating him, she departed. As soon as this offering was designated, that departed spirit received an ambavana (mango grove), a celestial mansion, wishing trees, ponds, and great divine wealth.

Atha te vāṇijā aparena samayena vaṇijjāya gacchantā tameva maggaṃ paṭipannā pubbe vasitaṭṭhāne ekarattiṃ vāsaṃ kappesuṃ. Te disvā so vimānapeto uyyānavimānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ attānaṃ dassesi. Te vāṇijā taṃ disvā tena laddhasampattiṃ pucchantā –

Later, those merchants, while traveling for trade, followed the same path and spent a night in the place where they had stayed before. Seeing them, that spirit in the celestial mansion showed himself to them along with the garden and the mansion. Seeing him, the merchants asked about the wealth he had obtained:

796.

796.

‘‘Ayañca te pokkharaṇī surammā, samā sutitthā ca mahodakā ca;

"This lovely pond of yours, so level, with beautiful, easily accessible banks, and abundant water,
Full of flowers, swarming with bees, how did you obtain this delightful thing?"

797.

797.

‘‘Idañca te ambavanaṃ surammaṃ, sabbotukaṃ dhārayate phalāni;

"And this lovely mango grove of yours, bearing fruit in all seasons,
Full of flowers, swarming with bees, how did you obtain this mansion?"

Imā dve gāthā avocuṃ.

He spoke these two verses.

796.Tatthasurammāti suṭṭhu ramaṇīyā.Samāti samatalā.Sutitthāti ratanamayasopānatāya sundaratitthā.Mahodakāti bahujalā.

796. Here, surammā means very delightful. Samā means level. Sutitthā means having beautiful banks with jeweled steps. Mahodakā means having abundant water.

797.Sabbotukanti pupphūpagaphalūpagarukkhādīhi sabbesu utūsu sukhāvahaṃ. Tenāha‘‘dhārayate phalānī’’ti.Supupphitanti niccaṃ supupphitaṃ.

797. Sabbotukaṃ means bringing happiness in all seasons with trees bearing flowers, fruits, and foliage. Therefore, he said, "dhārayate phalāni" (bearing fruits). Supupphitaṃ means always well-flowered.

Taṃ sutvā peto pokkharaṇiādīnaṃ paṭilābhakāraṇaṃ ācikkhanto –

Hearing that, the departed spirit, explaining the cause of obtaining the pond and other things, said:

798.

798.

‘‘Ambapakkaṃ dakaṃ yāgu, sītacchāyā manoramā;

"Ripe mangoes, water, and gruel, cool shade, delightful things;
By the gift given by my daughter, I obtained them here."

tena me idha labbhatīti yaṃ taṃ bhagavato bhikkhūnañca ambapakkaṃ udakaṃ yāguñca mamaṃ uddissa dentiyā mayhaṃ dhītāya dinnaṃ dānaṃ, tena me dhītāya dinnadānena idha imasmiṃ dibbe ambavane sabbotukaṃ ambapakkaṃ, imissā dibbāya manuññāya pokkharaṇiyā dibbaṃ udakaṃ, yāguyā attharaṇassa ca dānena uyyānavimānakapparukkhādīsu sītacchāyā manoramā idha labbhati, samijjhatīti attho.

tena me idha labbhatī means: that gift of ripe mangoes, water, and gruel given by my daughter to the Blessed One and the monks, designating it for me; by that gift given by my daughter, the all-season ripe mangoes in this divine mango grove, the divine water in this delightful pond, and the cool shade and delightful things in the garden, mansion, and wishing trees are obtained and fulfilled here.

Evañca pana vatvā so peto te vāṇije netvā tāni pañca kahāpaṇasatāni dassetvā ‘‘ito upaḍḍhaṃ tumhe gaṇhatha, upaḍḍhaṃ mayā gahitaṃ iṇaṃ sodhetvā sukhena jīvatūti mayhaṃ dhītāya dethā’’ti āha. Vāṇijā anukkamena sāvatthiṃ patvā tassa dhītāya kathetvā tena attano dinnabhāgampi tassā eva adaṃsu. Sā kahāpaṇasataṃ dhanikānaṃ datvā itaraṃ attano pitu sahāyassa tassa kuṭumbikassa datvā sayaṃ veyyāvaccaṃ karonti nivasati. So ‘‘idaṃ sabbaṃ tuyhaṃyeva hotū’’ti tassāyeva paṭidatvā taṃ attano jeṭṭhaputtassa gharasāminiṃ akāsi.

Having said this, that departed spirit led the merchants, showed them those five hundred kahāpaṇas, and said, "Take half of this yourselves, and give the other half to my daughter, saying, 'May she pay off the debt I incurred and live happily.'" The merchants gradually reached Sāvatthi, told the story to his daughter, and gave her even their share of the money. She gave one hundred kahāpaṇas to the creditors and gave the rest to that householder, her father's friend, and lived serving him. He, saying, "May all this be yours," gave it back to her and made her the mistress of the house for his eldest son.

Sā gacchante kāle ekaṃ puttaṃ labhitvā taṃ upalālentī –

In due course, she conceived a son and, while caressing him, spoke this verse:

799.

799.

‘‘Sandiṭṭhikaṃ kammaṃ evaṃ passatha, dānassa damassa saṃyamassa vipākaṃ;

"See thus the directly visible result of action, the fruition of giving, taming, and restraint;
Having been a slave in the ancestral homes, I become the daughter-in-law, the mistress of the house."

Imaṃ gāthaṃ vadati.

She speaks this verse.

Athekadivasaṃ satthā tassā ñāṇaparipākaṃ oloketvā obhāsaṃ pharitvā sammukhe ṭhito viya attānaṃ dassetvā –

Then, one day, the Teacher, seeing the maturity of her knowledge, radiating light and appearing as if standing before her, spoke this verse:

‘‘Asātaṃ sātarūpena, piyarūpena appiyaṃ;

"The unpleasant as the form of the pleasant, the disliked as the form of the liked,
Suffering as the form of happiness, overtakes the heedless." (Udā. 18; Jā. 1.1.100)

Imaṃ gāthamāha. Sā gāthāpariyosāne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitā. Sā dutiyadivase buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa dānaṃ datvā taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

At the end of the verse, she was established in the fruit of Stream-entry. On the following day, she gave alms to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha and reported that event to the Blessed One. The Blessed One made that event the basis and delivered a discourse to the assembled company. That discourse was beneficial to many people.

Ambavanapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Ambavanapeta Vatthu is finished.

13. Akkharukkhapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
13. Akkharukkhapeta Vatthu

Yaṃ dadāti na taṃ hotīti idaṃ akkhadāyakapetavatthu. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati sāvatthiyaṃ viharante aññataro sāvatthivāsī upāsako sakaṭehi bhaṇḍassa pūretvā vaṇijjāya videsaṃ gantvā tattha attano bhaṇḍaṃ vikkiṇitvā paṭibhaṇḍaṃ sakaṭesu āropetvā sāvatthiṃ uddissa maggaṃ paṭipajji. Tassa maggaṃ gacchantassa aṭaviyaṃ ekassa sakaṭassa akkho bhijji. Atha aññataro puriso rukkhagahaṇatthaṃ kuṭhāripharasuṃ gāhāpetvā attano gāmato nikkhamitvā araññe vicaranto taṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā taṃ upāsakaṃ akkhabhañjanena domanassappattaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ vāṇijo akkhabhañjanena aṭaviyaṃ kilamatī’’ti anukampaṃ upādāya rukkhadaṇḍaṃ chinditvā daḷhaṃ akkhaṃ katvā sakaṭe yojetvā adāsi.

Yaṃ dadāti na taṃ hotī - This is the Akkharukkhapeta Vatthu. What is its origin? While the Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi, a certain lay follower living in Sāvatthi, having filled carts with goods, went abroad for trade. There, after selling his goods, he loaded return goods onto the carts and set out on the road to Sāvatthi. As he was traveling along the road, in a forest, the axle of one of his carts broke. Then another man, taking an axe and hatchet to collect wood, having left his village and wandering in the forest, reached that place. Seeing that lay follower distressed by the broken axle, he took pity on him, cut down a tree trunk, made a strong axle, fitted it to the cart, and gave it to him.

So aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tasmiṃyeva aṭavipadese bhummadevatā hutvā nibbatto. Attano kammaṃ paccavekkhitvā rattiyaṃ tassa upāsakassa gehaṃ gantvā gehadvāre ṭhatvā –

Some time later, he died and was reborn as a bhummadevatā (earth deity) in that same forest region. Reflecting on his kamma, he went to that lay follower’s house at night, stood at the door, and said:

800.

800.

‘‘Yaṃ dadāti na taṃ hoti, detheva dānaṃ datvā ubhayaṃ tarati;

"What one gives does not remain the same; one should indeed give; having given, one crosses over both (worlds);
By that giving, one attains both; be vigilant, do not be heedless."

yaṃ dadāti na taṃ hotīti yaṃ deyyadhammaṃ dāyako deti, na tadeva paraloke tassa dānassa phalabhāvena hoti, atha kho aññaṃ bahuṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ phalaṃ hotiyeva. Tasmādetheva dānanti yathā tathā dānaṃ detha eva. Tattha kāraṇamāha‘‘datvā ubhayaṃ taratī’’ti, dānaṃ datvā diṭṭhadhammikampi samparāyikampi dukkhaṃ anatthañca atikkamati.Ubhayaṃ tena dānena gacchatīti diṭṭhadhammikaṃ samparāyikañcāti ubhayampi sukhaṃ tena dānena upagacchati pāpuṇāti, attano paresañca hitasukhavasenāpi ayamattho yojetabbo.Jāgaratha mā pamajjathāti evaṃ ubhayānatthanivāraṇaṃ ubhayahitasādhanaṃ dānaṃ sampādetuṃ jāgaratha, dānūpakaraṇāni sajjetvā tattha ca appamattā hothāti attho. Ādaradassanatthaṃ cettha āmeḍitavasena vuttaṃ.

yaṃ dadāti na taṃ hotī means: the thing that a giver gives as an offering does not remain the same in the next world as the fruit of that giving. Rather, another, much more desirable and pleasing result certainly arises. Therefore, detheva dānaṃ: one should indeed give alms in whatever way possible. The reason for this is stated: "datvā ubhayaṃ taratī": having given, one crosses over both worldly and otherworldly suffering and misfortune. Ubhayaṃ tena dānena gacchatī: one attains both worldly and otherworldly happiness by that giving. This meaning should also be applied in terms of the benefit and happiness for oneself and others. Jāgaratha mā pamajjatha: be vigilant in order to accomplish giving, which prevents both kinds of misfortune and achieves both kinds of benefit; prepare the requisites for giving, and be diligent in that. Here, the repetition is stated for emphasis.

Vāṇijo attano kiccaṃ tīretvā paṭinivattitvā anukkamena sāvatthiṃ patvā dutiyadivase satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisinno taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Satthā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

The merchant, having finished his business and returning, gradually reached Sāvatthi and, on the following day, approached the Teacher, paid homage, sat down to one side, and reported that event to the Blessed One. The Teacher made that event the basis and delivered a discourse to the assembled company. That discourse was beneficial to many people.

Akkharukkhapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Akkharukkhapeta Vatthu is finished.

14. Bhogasaṃharaṇapetivatthuvaṇṇanā
14. Bhogasaṃharaṇapeta Vatthu

Mayaṃbhoge saṃharimhāti idaṃ bhogasaṃharaṇapetivatthu. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati veḷuvane viharante rājagahe kira catasso itthiyo mānakūṭādivasena sappimadhuteladhaññādīhi vohāraṃ katvā ayoniso bhoge saṃharitvā jīvanti. Tā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā bahinagare parikhāpiṭṭhe petiyo hutvā nibbattiṃsu. Tā rattiyaṃ dukkhābhibhūtā –

Mayaṃ bhoge saṃharimhā - This is the Bhogasaṃharaṇapeta Vatthu. What is its origin? While the Blessed One was dwelling in the Veḷuvana (bamboo grove), it is said that in Rājagaha, four women were trading in ghee, honey, oil, grain, and so on, through deceitful means, and lived accumulating wealth unrighteously. After death, due to the disintegration of their bodies, they were reborn as petas outside the city, near the moat. Overwhelmed with suffering at night, they wailed loudly:

801.

801.

‘‘Mayaṃ bhoge saṃharimhā, samena visamena ca;

"We hoarded wealth, by fair means and foul;
Others enjoy it, we are the recipients of suffering."

Vippalapantiyo bheravena mahāsaddena viraviṃsu. Manussā taṃ sutvā bhītatasitā vibhātāya rattiyā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ sajjetvā satthāraṃ bhikkhusaṅghañca nimantetvā paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena parivisitvā bhagavantaṃ bhuttāviṃ onītapattapāṇiṃ upanisīditvā taṃ pavattiṃ nivedesuṃ. Bhagavā ‘‘upāsakā tena vo saddena koci antarāyo natthi, catasso pana petiyo dukkhābhibhūtā attanā dukkaṭaṃ kammaṃ kathetvā paridevanavasena vissarena viravantiyo –

Screaming and lamenting with a terrifying, loud noise, the people who heard it, frightened and terrified, prepared a great offering of food for the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha at the break of dawn, invited the Teacher and the Sangha of monks, served them with delicious foods, and, after the Blessed One had finished eating, sat down near him with their bowls put away and reported that event. The Blessed One said, "Lay followers, there is no danger to you from that sound. However, four petas, overwhelmed with suffering, are wailing loudly, recounting the evil deeds they committed:

‘‘Mayaṃ bhoge saṃharimhā, samena visamena ca;

"We hoarded wealth, by fair means and foul;
Others enjoy it, we are the recipients of suffering."

Imaṃ gāthamāhaṃsūti avoca.

They spoke this verse."

bhogeti paribhuñjitabbaṭṭhena ‘‘bhogā’’ti laddhanāme vatthābharaṇādike vittūpakaraṇavisese.Saṃharimhāti maccheramalena pariyādinnacittā kassaci kiñci adatvā sañcinimha.Samena visamena cāti ñāyena ca aññāyena ca, ñāyapatirūpakena vā aññāyena te bhoge amhehi saṃharite idāni aññe paribhuñjanti.Mayaṃ dukkhassa bhāginīti mayaṃ pana kassacipi sucaritassa akatattā duccaritassa ca katattā etarahi petayonipariyāpannassa mahato dukkhassa bhāginiyo bhavāma, mahādukkhaṃ anubhavāmāti attho.

bhogeti, wealth, in the sense of that which is to be enjoyed, is a specific kind of property such as clothes, ornaments, and other possessions. Saṃharimhāti, we accumulated [wealth], with minds completely consumed by the taint of stinginess, not giving anything to anyone. Samena visamena cāti, by fair means and foul means, or by means that appeared fair but were actually unjust, we accumulated those possessions; now others enjoy them. Mayaṃ dukkhassa bhāginīti, because we did not perform any good deeds and did commit evil deeds, we are now recipients of great suffering, having been born into the peta realm; we experience great suffering.

Evaṃ bhagavā tāhi petīhi vuttaṃ gāthaṃ vatvā tāsaṃ pavattiṃ kathetvā taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desetvā upari saccāni pakāsesi, saccapariyosāne bahū sotāpattiphalādīni pāpuṇiṃsūti.

Thus, the Blessed One, having spoken the verse uttered by those petis and told of their plight, made that event the basis and expounded the Dhamma to the assembled company, revealing the Truths above, and at the end of the Truths, many attained the fruits of Stream-entry and so on.

Bhogasaṃharaṇapetivatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Bhogasaṃharaṇapeta Vatthu is finished.

15. Seṭṭhiputtapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
15. Seṭṭhiputtapeta Vatthu

Saṭṭhivassasahassānīti idaṃ seṭṭhiputtapetavatthu. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena kho pana samayena rājā pasenadi kosalo alaṅkatappaṭiyatto hatthikkhandhavaragato mahatiyā rājiddhiyā mahantena rājānubhāvena nagaraṃ anusañcaranto aññatarasmiṃ gehe uparipāsāde vātapānaṃ vivaritvā taṃ rājavibhūtiṃ olokentiṃ rūpasampattiyā devaccharāpaṭibhāgaṃ ekaṃ itthiṃ disvā adiṭṭhapubbe ārammaṇe sahasā samuppannena kilesasamudācārena pariyuṭṭhitacitto satipi kularūpācārādiguṇavisesasampanne antepurajane sabhāvalahukassa pana duddamassa cittassa vasena tassaṃ itthiyaṃ paṭibaddhamānaso hutvā pacchāsane nisinnassa purisassa ‘‘imaṃ pāsādaṃ imañca itthiṃ upadhārehī’’ti saññaṃ datvā rājagehaṃ paviṭṭho. Aññaṃ sabbaṃ ambasakkarapetavatthumhi āgatanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

Saṭṭhivassasahassānīti - This is the Seṭṭhiputtapeta Vatthu. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove. At that time, King Pasenadi of Kosala, adorned and arrayed, mounted on the best of elephants, was proceeding through the city with great royal splendor and great royal power. As he was proceeding, he saw a woman in a certain house, opening a window on the upper floor and looking at that royal magnificence, whose beauty rivaled that of a celestial nymph. His mind, overwhelmed by a sudden upsurge of defilements arising from an object never seen before, despite having noble-born ladies in his inner chambers endowed with virtue, beauty, good conduct, and other qualities, but due to the fickle and untamed nature of his mind, became fixated on that woman. He gave a signal to a man sitting behind him on the elephant, saying, "Take note of this house and this woman." The rest should be understood in the same way as it is given in the Ambasakkara Peta Vatthu.

Ayaṃ pana viseso – idha puriso sūriye anatthaṅgateyeva āgantvā nagaradvāre thakite attanā ānītaṃ aruṇavaṇṇamattikaṃ uppalāni ca nagaradvārakavāṭe laggetvā nipajjituṃ jetavanaṃ agamāsi. Rājā pana sirisayane vāsūpagato majjhimayāme sa-iti na-iti du-iti so-iti ca imāni cattāri akkharāni mahatā kaṇṭhena uccāritāni viya vissaravasena assosi. Tāni kira atīte kāle sāvatthivāsīhi catūhi seṭṭhiputtehi bhogamadamattehi yobbanakāle pāradārikakammavasena bahuṃ apuññaṃ pasavetvā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tasseva nagarassa samīpe lohakumbhiyaṃ nibbattitvā paccamānehi lohakumbhiyā mukhavaṭṭiṃ patvā ekekaṃ gāthaṃ vatthukāmehi uccāritānaṃ tāsaṃ gāthānaṃ ādiakkharāni, te paṭhamakkharameva vatvā vedanāppattā hutvā lohakumbhiṃ otariṃsu.

Here is the distinction: in this case, a man, even before sunset, having come to the city gate, and having fastened the reddish-brown clay and lotuses he had brought himself onto the gateposts, went to Jetavana to lie down. The king, having retired to his royal bed in the middle watch of the night, heard these four syllables—sa-iti, na-iti, du-iti, so-iti—as if uttered loudly with a great voice. Those were, in the past, the initial syllables of the verses uttered by four sons of wealthy men living in Savatthi, who, being drunk with the pride of wealth in their youth, had accumulated much demerit through association with prostitutes. Having died later, they were reborn near that same city in a copper cauldron. While being cooked, upon reaching the rim of the copper cauldron, they uttered the first syllable of each verse they desired to speak, and, experiencing intense pain, sank back into the copper cauldron.

Rājā pana taṃ saddaṃ sutvā bhītatasito saṃviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto taṃ rattāvasesaṃ dukkhena vītināmetvā vibhātāya rattiyā purohitaṃ pakkosāpetvā taṃ pavattiṃ kathesi. Purohito rājānaṃ bhītatasitaṃ ñatvā lābhagiddho ‘‘uppanno kho ayaṃ mayhaṃ brāhmaṇānañca lābhuppādanupāyo’’ti cintetvā ‘‘mahārāja, mahā vatāyaṃ upaddavo uppanno, sabbacatukkaṃ yaññaṃ yajāhī’’ti āha. Rājā tassa vacanaṃ sutvā amacce āṇāpesi ‘‘sabbacatukkayaññassa upakaraṇāni sajjethā’’ti. Taṃ sutvā mallikā devī rājānaṃ evamāha – ‘‘kasmā, mahārāja, brāhmaṇassa vacanaṃ sutvā anekapāṇavadhahiṃsanakakiccaṃ kātukāmosi, nanu sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāro bhagavā pucchitabbo? Yathā ca te bhagavā byākarissati, tathā paṭipajjitabba’’nti. Rājā tassā vacanaṃ sutvā satthu santikaṃ gantvā taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā ‘‘na, mahārāja, tatonidānaṃ tuyhaṃ koci antarāyo’’ti vatvā ādito paṭṭhāya tesaṃ lohakumbhiniraye nibbattasattānaṃ pavattiṃ kathetvā tehi paccekaṃ uccāretuṃ āraddhagāthāyo –

The king, hearing that sound, frightened, alarmed, and with his hair standing on end, spent the rest of the night with difficulty. At dawn, he summoned his chaplain and related the incident. The chaplain, knowing that the king was frightened and alarmed, and thinking, "This is an opportunity for me and the brahmins to gain profit," said, "Great king, a great calamity has arisen; you should perform a sabbacatukka sacrifice." Hearing his words, the king commanded his ministers, "Prepare the equipment for a sabbacatukka sacrifice." Hearing that, Queen Mallika said to the king, "Why, great king, having heard the words of a brahmin, do you intend to perform an act of violence and killing of many beings? Should not the Blessed One, whose knowledge is unhindered in all things, be consulted? And as the Blessed One explains to you, so should you act." Hearing her words, the king went to the Teacher and reported the incident to the Blessed One. The Blessed One said, "No, great king, there is no danger to you from that cause," and from the beginning, related the story of those beings reborn in the copper cauldron hell, and the verses they had begun to utter individually:

802.

802.

‘‘Saṭṭhivassasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni sabbaso;

"Sixty thousand years,
All completely full;
For those cooking in hell,
When will there be an end?"

803.

803.

‘‘Natthi anto kuto anto, na anto paṭidissati;

"There is no end, from where an end?
No end is to be seen;
So indeed is the evil done,
By you and me, dear sirs."

804.

804.

‘‘Dujjīvitamajīvimha, ye sante na dadamhase;

"We have lived a bad life,
We who gave not to the virtuous;
Among the things fit to be given to the virtuous,
We made no island for ourselves."

805.

805.

‘‘Sohaṃ nūna ito gantvā, yoniṃ laddhāna mānusiṃ;

"Surely I, having gone from here,
Having obtained a human birth,
Generous and endowed with virtue,
Will do much good."

Paripuṇṇaṃ katvā kathesi.

Having made it complete, he told it.

802.Tatthasaṭṭhivassasahassānīti vassānaṃ saṭṭhisahassāni. Tasmiṃ kira lohakumbhiniraye nibbattasatto adho ogacchanto tiṃsāya vassasahassehi heṭṭhimatalaṃ pāpuṇāti, tato uddhaṃ uggacchantopi tiṃsāya eva vassasahassehi mukhavaṭṭipadesaṃ pāpuṇāti, tāya saññāya so ‘‘saṭṭhivassasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni sabbaso’’ti gāthaṃ vattukāmo sa-iti vatvā adhimattavedanāppatto hutvā adhomukho pati. Bhagavā pana taṃ rañño paripuṇṇaṃ katvā kathesi. Esa nayo sesagāthāsupi. Tatthakadā anto bhavissatīti lohakumbhiniraye paccamānānaṃ amhākaṃ kadā nu kho imassa dukkhassa anto pariyosānaṃ bhavissati.

802. There, saṭṭhivassasahassāni: sixty thousand years. It seems that a being reborn in that copper cauldron hell, while sinking down, reaches the bottom in thirty thousand years, and rising up again, reaches the rim of the mouth in thirty thousand years. With that perception, wanting to utter the verse "saṭṭhivassasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni sabbaso," having uttered sa-iti, experiencing excessive pain, he fell face down. But the Blessed One told it completely to the king. This method applies to the remaining verses as well. There, kadā anto bhavissati: when will there be an end or conclusion to this suffering for us, who are being cooked in the copper cauldron hell?

803.Tathā hīti yathā tuyhaṃ mayhañca imassa dukkhassa natthi anto, na anto paṭidissati, tathā tena pakārena pāpakaṃ kammaṃ pakataṃ tayā mayā cāti vibhattiṃ vipariṇāmetvā vattabbaṃ.

803. Tathā hi: just as there is no end to this suffering for you and me, no end is to be seen, so in that way, evil deeds have been done by you and me. The inflection should be changed and stated.

804.Dujjīvitanti viññūhi garahitabbaṃ jīvitaṃ.Ye santeti ye mayaṃ sante vijjamāne deyyadhamme.Na dadamhaseti na adamha. Vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ‘‘santesu deyyadhammesu, dīpaṃ nākamha attano’’ti vuttaṃ.

804. Dujjīvitaṃ: a life to be despised by the wise. Ye sante: we who had meritorious things existing. Na dadamhase: we did not give. To make the meaning clearer, it was said, "santesu deyyadhammesu, dīpaṃ nākamha attano".

805.Sohanti so ahaṃ.Nūnāti parivitakke nipāto.Itoti imasmā lohakumbhinirayā.Gantvāti apagantvā.Yoniṃ laddhāna mānusinti manussayoniṃ manussattabhāvaṃ labhitvā.Vadaññūti pariccāgasīlo, yācakānaṃ vā vacanaññū.Sīlasampannoti sīlācārasampanno.Kāhāmi kusalaṃ bahunti pubbe viya pamādaṃ anāpajjitvā bahuṃ pahūtaṃ kusalaṃ puññakammaṃ karissāmi, upacinissāmīti attho.

805. Sohaṃ: so I. Nūna: a particle used in reflection. Ito: from this copper cauldron hell. Gantvā: having gone away. Yoniṃ laddhāna mānusiṃ: having obtained a human birth, a state of being human. Vadaññū: generous by nature, or knowing the words of beggars. Sīlasampanno: endowed with virtue and good conduct. Kāhāmi kusalaṃ bahuṃ: not falling into negligence as before, I will do much abundant good, meritorious deeds, I will accumulate them, is the meaning.

Satthā imā gāthāyo vatvā vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi, desanāpariyosāne mattikārattuppalahārako puriso sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Rājā sañjātasaṃvego parapariggahe abhijjhaṃ pahāya sadārasantuṭṭho ahosīti.

The Teacher, having spoken these verses, extensively taught the Dhamma. At the end of the teaching, the man who brought the clay and lotuses attained the fruit of Stream-entry. The king, having experienced a sense of urgency, abandoning greed for others' possessions, was content with his own wife.

Seṭṭhiputtapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Story of the Wealthy Men's Petas is Finished.

16. Saṭṭhikūṭapetavatthuvaṇṇanā
16. Commentary on the Story of the Sixty Iron Stakes Peta

Kiṃnu ummattarūpovāti idaṃ satthari veḷuvane viharante aññataraṃ petaṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Atīte kira bārāṇasinagare aññataro pīṭhasappī sālittakapayoge kusalo, tahiṃ sakkharakhipanasippe nipphattiṃ gato nagaradvāre nigrodharukkhamūle nisīditvā sakkharapahārehi hatthiassamanussarathakūṭāgāradhajapuṇṇaghaṭādirūpāni nigrodhapattesu dasseti. Nagaradārakā attano kīḷanatthāya māyakaḍḍhamāsakādīni datvā yathāruci tāni sippāni kārāpenti.

Kiṃ nu ummattarūpovā: this was said by the Teacher while dwelling at the Veluvana, concerning a certain peta. It seems that in the past, in the city of Baranasi, there was a craftsman skilled in using palmyra shoots, accomplished in the art of throwing sugar pellets. Sitting at the foot of a banyan tree near the city gate, he would demonstrate figures of elephants, horses, men, chariots, peaked houses, flags, full pots, etc., on banyan leaves by throwing sugar pellets. The city children, giving him a māyakaḍḍhamāsaka or similar for their amusement, would have him make those crafts according to their wishes.

Athekadivasaṃ bārāṇasirājā nagarato nikkhamitvā taṃ nigrodhamūlaṃ upagato nigrodhapattesu hatthirūpādivasena nānāvidharūpavibhattiyo appitā disvā manusse pucchi – ‘‘kena nu kho imesu nigrodhapattesu evaṃ nānāvidharūpavibhattiyo katā’’ti? Manussā taṃ pīṭhasappiṃ dassesuṃ ‘‘deva, iminā katā’’ti. Rājā taṃ pakkosāpetvā evamāha – ‘‘sakkā nu kho, bhaṇe, mayā dassitassa ekassa purisassa kathentassa ajānantasseva kucchiyaṃ ajalaṇḍikāhi pūretu’’nti? ‘‘Sakkā, devā’’ti. Rājā taṃ attano rājabhavanaṃ netvā bahubhāṇike purohite nibbinnarūpo purohitaṃ pakkosāpetvā tena saha vivitte okāse sāṇipākāraparikkhitte nisīditvā mantayamāno pīṭhasappiṃ pakkosāpesi. Pīṭhasappī nāḷimattā ajalaṇḍikā ādāyāgantvā rañño ākāraṃ ñatvā purohitābhimukho nisinno tena mukhe vivaṭe sāṇipākāravivarena ekekaṃ ajalaṇḍikaṃ tassa galamūle patiṭṭhāpesi. So lajjāya uggilituṃ asakkonto sabbā ajjhohari. Atha naṃ rājā ajalaṇḍikāhi pūritodaraṃ vissajji – ‘‘gaccha, brāhmaṇa, laddhaṃ tayā bahubhāṇitāya phalaṃ, maddanaphalapiyaṅgutacādīhi abhisaṅkhataṃ pānakaṃ pivitvā ucchaḍḍehi, evaṃ te sotthi bhavissatī’’ti. Tassa ca pīṭhasappissa tena kammena attamano hutvā cuddasa gāme adāsi. So gāme labhitvā attānaṃ sukhento pīṇento parijanampi sukhento pīṇento samaṇabrāhmaṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ kiñci dento diṭṭhadhammikaṃ samparāyikañca atthaṃ ahāpento sukheneva jīvati, attano santikaṃ upagatānaṃ sippaṃ sikkhantānaṃ bhattavetanaṃ deti.

Then one day, the king of Baranasi, having gone out of the city, approached that banyan tree. Seeing various kinds of forms fashioned on the banyan leaves in the shape of elephants, etc., he asked the people, "Who has made these various kinds of forms on these banyan leaves?" The people pointed out the craftsman, saying, "Lord, this one has made them." The king, having summoned him, said, "Is it possible, friend, to fill the belly of a certain man I point out, who is speaking but unaware, with ajalaṇḍikā?" "It is possible, lord." The king, having taken him to his royal palace, weary of his garrulous chaplain, summoned the chaplain and, sitting in a secluded place enclosed by a fence wall, consulting with him, summoned the craftsman. The craftsman, having brought a nāḷi-measure of ajalaṇḍikā, knowing the king's intention, sat facing the chaplain. With his mouth open, he placed one ajalaṇḍika at a time at the base of his throat through the opening in the fence wall. Unable to regurgitate them out of shame, he swallowed them all. Then the king, having dismissed him with his belly full of ajalaṇḍikā, said, "Go, brahmin, you have received the fruit of your garrulousness. Drink a beverage mixed with maddanaphala, piyaṅgu, and cāda, and throw them up; thus, there will be safety for you." And the craftsman, pleased by that deed, gave him fourteen villages. Having obtained the villages, delighting and satisfying himself and also delighting and satisfying his retinue, giving something to ascetics, brahmins, etc., as appropriate, without losing his immediate and future welfare, he lived happily, giving food and wages to those who came to him to learn the craft.

Atheko puriso tassa santikaṃ upagantvā evamāha – ‘‘sādhu, ācariya, mampi etaṃ sippaṃ sikkhāpehi, mayhaṃ pana alaṃ bhattavetanenā’’ti. So taṃ purisaṃ taṃ sippaṃ sikkhāpesi. So sikkhitasippo sippaṃ vīmaṃsitukāmo gantvā gaṅgātīre nisinnassa sunettassa nāma paccekabuddhassa sakkharābhighātena sīsaṃ bhindi. Paccekabuddho tattheva gaṅgātīre parinibbāyi. Manussā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā taṃ purisaṃ tattheva leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi paharitvā jīvitā voropesuṃ. So kālakato avīcimahāniraye nibbattitvā bahūni vassasahassāni niraye paccitvā tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesena imasmiṃ buddhuppāde rājagahanagarassa avidūre peto hutvā nibbatti. Tassa kammassa sarikkhakena vipākena bhavitabbanti kammavegukkhittāni pubbaṇhasamayaṃ majjhanhikasamayaṃ sāyanhasamayañca saṭṭhi ayokūṭasahassāni matthake nipatanti. So chinnabhinnasīso adhimattavedanāppatto bhūmiyaṃ nipatati, ayokūṭesu pana apagatamattesu paṭipākatikasiro tiṭṭhati.

Then a certain man approached him and said, "Good teacher, teach me this craft also, but I do not need food or wages." He taught that man the craft. Wanting to test his skill, the man, having gone to the bank of the Ganges, struck Sunetta, a Paccekabuddha who was sitting there, on the head with a sugar pellet, splitting it open. The Paccekabuddha passed away right there on the bank of the Ganges. The people, hearing that incident, beat that man to death with clods of dirt, sticks, etc., right there. Having died, he was reborn in the Avici great hell and suffered in hell for many thousands of years. Due to the remaining result of that same deed, in this Buddha-era, he was reborn as a peta not far from the city of Rajagaha. It is said that due to a similar result of that deed, sixty thousand iron stakes, propelled by the force of karma, fall on his head in the early morning, midday, and evening. With his head crushed and broken, experiencing excessive pain, he falls to the ground, but when the iron stakes have gone away, his head returns to its original state.

Athekadivasaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno gijjhakūṭapabbatā otaranto taṃ disvā –

Then one day, Venerable Mahamoggallana, descending from Gijjhakuta Mountain, saw him and said:

806.

806.

‘‘Kiṃ nu ummattarūpova, migo bhantova dhāvasi;

"Like one mad, you run,
Like a frightened animal;
Surely doing an evil deed,
Why do you cry out?"

ummattarūpovāti ummattakasabhāvo viya ummādappatto viya.Migo bhantova dhāvasīti bhantamigo viya ito cito ca dhāvasi. So hi tesu ayokūṭesu nipatantesu parittāṇaṃ apassanto ‘‘na siyā nu kho evaṃ pahāro’’ti itopi ettopi palāyati. Te pana kammavegukkhittā yattha katthaci ṭhitassa matthakeyeva nipatanti.Kiṃ nu saddāyase tuvanti kiṃ nu kho tuvaṃ saddaṃ karosi, ativiya vissaraṃ karonto vicarasi.

ummattarūpovā: like a madman, as if afflicted by madness. Migo bhantova dhāvasī: like a frightened animal, you run here and there. Indeed, when those iron stakes are falling, not seeing any protection, he flees, thinking, "May such a blow not happen." But those stakes, propelled by the force of karma, fall only on his head wherever he stands. Kiṃ nu saddāyase tuvaṃ: why do you make a noise, moving about while crying out excessively?

Taṃ sutvā peto –

Hearing that, the peta said:

807.

807.

‘‘Ahaṃ bhadante petomhi, duggato yamalokiko;

"I, venerable sir, am a peta,
Destined for misery, belonging to the realm of Yama;
Having done an evil deed,
I have gone to the peta world from here."

808.

808.

‘‘Saṭṭhi kūṭasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni sabbaso;

"Sixty thousand stakes,
All completely full;
Fall on my head,
And they crush my skull."

saṭṭhi kūṭasahassānīti saṭṭhimattāni ayokūṭasahassāni.Paripuṇṇānīti anūnāni.Sabbasoti sabbabhāgato. Tassa kira saṭṭhiyā ayokūṭasahassānaṃ patanappahonakaṃ mahantaṃ pabbatakūṭappamāṇaṃ sīsaṃ nibbatti. Taṃ tassa vālaggakoṭinitudanamattampi ṭhānaṃ asesetvā tāni kūṭāni patantāni matthakaṃ bhindanti, tena so aṭṭassaraṃ karoti. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘sabbaso sīse mayhaṃ nipatanti, te bhindanti ca matthaka’’nti.

saṭṭhi kūṭasahassānī: sixty thousand iron stakes. Paripuṇṇānī: not lacking. Sabbaso: in every way. It is said that a large head, the size of a mountain peak, sufficient for the falling of sixty thousand iron stakes, arises for him. Without leaving even a space the size of the tip of a hair, those stakes fall, crushing his skull, and therefore he cries out loudly. Therefore, it was said, "sabbaso sīse mayhaṃ nipatanti, te bhindanti ca matthaka".

Atha naṃ thero katakammaṃ pucchanto –

Then the Elder, asking him about the deed he had done, said:

809.

809.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil have you done,
By body, speech, or mind?
Due to what karmic result,
Do you undergo this suffering?

810.

810.

‘‘Saṭṭhi kūṭasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni sabbaso;

"Sixty thousand stakes,
All completely full;
Fall on your head,
And they crush your skull."

Dve gāthā abhāsi.

He spoke two verses.

Tassa peto attanā katakammaṃ ācikkhanto –

The peta, declaring the deed he had done, said:

811.

811.

‘‘Athaddasāsiṃ sambuddhaṃ, sunettaṃ bhāvitindriyaṃ;

"Then I saw a Fully Enlightened One,
Sunetta, with faculties developed;
Sitting at the foot of a tree,
Meditating, free from fear.

812.

812.

‘‘Sālittakappahārena, bhindissaṃ tassa matthakaṃ;

"With a throw of sugar pellets,
I split his skull;
Due to the karmic result of that deed,
I undergo this suffering.

813.

813.

‘‘Saṭṭhi kūṭasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni sabbaso;

"Sixty thousand stakes,
All completely full;
Fall on my head,
And they crush my skull."

Tisso gāthāyo abhāsi.

He spoke three verses.

811.Tatthasambuddhanti paccekasambuddhaṃ.Sunettanti evaṃnāmakaṃ.Bhāvitindriyanti ariyamaggabhāvanāya bhāvitasaddhādiindriyaṃ.

811. There, sambuddhaṃ: a Paccekasambuddha. Sunettaṃ: one named thus. Bhāvitindriyaṃ: with faculties of faith, etc., developed by cultivation of the noble path.

812-13.Sālittakappahārenāti sālittakaṃ vuccati dhanukena, aṅgulīhi eva vā sakkharakhipanapayogo. Tathā hi sakkharāya pahārenāti vā pāṭho.Bhindissanti bhindiṃ.

812-13. Sālittakappahārena: sālittakaṃ means with a bow, or with the fingers, a technique of throwing sugar pellets. Thus, there is also a reading: sakkharāya pahārena. Bhindissaṃ: I split.

Taṃ sutvā thero ‘‘attano katakammānurūpameva idāni purāṇakammassa idaṃ phalaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti dassento –

Hearing that, the Elder, showing that "now he is receiving this fruit of past karma, just as it befits his own deed," said:

814.

814.

‘‘Dhammena te kāpurisa;

"By Dhamma, you base man,
Sixty thousand stakes,
All completely full;
Fall on your head,
And they crush your skull."

dhammenāti anurūpakāraṇena.Teti tava, tasmiṃ paccekabuddhe aparajjhantena tayā katassa pāpakammassa anucchavikamevetaṃ phalaṃ tuyhaṃ upanītaṃ. Tasmā kenaci devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā api sammāsambuddhenapi appaṭibāhanīyametanti dasseti.

dhammena: by a fitting cause. Te: to you, this fruit has been brought to you, befitting the evil deed done by you in offending that Paccekabuddha. Therefore, it shows that this is unpreventable by any deva, Mara, Brahma, or even a Fully Enlightened Buddha.

Evañca pana vatvā tato nagare piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakicco sāyanhasamaye satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desento paccekabuddhānaṃ guṇānubhāvaṃ kammānañca avañjhataṃ pakāsesi, mahājano saṃvegajāto hutvā pāpaṃ pahāya dānādipuññanirato ahosīti.

Having spoken thus, he then went into the city for alms, and after completing his meal, in the late afternoon, he approached the Teacher and reported the incident to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, making this the reason and the origin, while teaching the Dhamma to the assembled company, revealed the power and greatness of the Paccekabuddhas and the infallibility of kamma. The great multitude, stirred with emotion, abandoned evil and became devoted to meritorious deeds such as giving.

Saṭṭhikūṭapetavatthuvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Story of the Sixty-Peaked House is Finished.

Iti khuddaka-aṭṭhakathāya petavatthusmiṃ

Thus, in the Khuddaka Commentary, in the Petavatthu,

Soḷasavatthupaṭimaṇḍitassa

The explanation of the fourth great chapter

Catutthassa mahāvaggassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Adorned with sixteen stories, is finished.

Nigamanakathā
Concluding Remarks

Ettāvatā ca –

Herewith –

Ye te petesu nibbattā, sattā dukkaṭakārino;

Those beings who are born among the Petas, doers of misdeeds;
By which kammas they experience that, evil and bitter fruit.

Paccakkhato vibhāventī, pucchāvissajjanehi ca;

Directly revealing through questions and answers;
That teaching through method, increases the emotion of the virtuous.

Yaṃ kathāvatthukusalā, supariññātavatthukā;

Which those skilled in the subject of stories, with well-understood subject matter;
The great sages compiled under the name Petavatthu.

Tassa atthaṃ pakāsetuṃ, porāṇaṭṭhakathānayaṃ;

To reveal its meaning, relying on the ancient commentary tradition;
The meaning commentary that was begun by me.

Yā tattha paramatthānaṃ, tattha tattha yathārahaṃ;

Which, concerning the ultimate realities, appropriately in each instance;
Has attained completion by name, named Paramattha-dīpanī.

Sampattā pariniṭṭhānaṃ, anākulavinicchayā;

Having reached its conclusion, with unobstructed decision;
It is fifteen recitations long in terms of the Pāḷi.

Iti taṃ saṅkharontena, yaṃ taṃ adhigataṃ mayā;

Thus, by him who compiled it, whatever merit was gained by me;
By the power of that, may the teaching of the World-Protector.

Ogāhetvā visuddhāya, sīlādipaṭipattiyā;

Having plunged into the pure practice of virtue and so on;
May all embodied beings be partakers of the taste of liberation.

Ciraṃ tiṭṭhatu lokasmiṃ, sammāsambuddhasāsanaṃ;

May the teaching of the Sammāsambuddha long endure in the world;
In that may all beings always be respectful.

Sammā vassatu kālena, devopi jagatīpati;

May the god and the ruler of the world rain properly in due season;
Devoted to the true Dhamma, may he govern the world by Dhamma.

badaratitthavihāravāsināmunivarayatinā

The Petavatthuatthasaṃvaṇṇanā, written by Ācariya Dhammapāla, a sage and ascetic residing at the Badaratittha Vihāra, is completed.

ācariyadhammapālenakatā petavatthuatthasaṃvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Petavatthu Commentary is finished.

Petavatthu-aṭṭhakathā samattā.

Petavatthu-aṭṭhakathā samattā.